Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Contract 39193
CITY SECRETARY Q, �Q CONTRACT NO, 1 CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS WATER DEPARTMENT NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE OZONE GENERATION EQUIPMENT — PRE -SELECTION CAPITAL PROJECT NO. 00757 ..r 2009 MIKE MONCRIEF DALE FISSELER, P.E. MAYOR CITY MANAGER S. FRANK CRUMB, P.E. DIRECTOR, WATER DEPARTMENT CHRIS HARDER, P.E. ENGINEERING MANAGER PRODUCTION DIVISION Freese and Nichols FTW09118 CHARLY ANGADICHERIL ASSISTANT DIRECTOR, WATER PRODUCTION ANDY CRONBERG, P.E. ASSISTANT DIRECTOR ENGINEERING AND PLANNING In Association with Engineers...t-�orkin..tref OFFIMAL RECOR® CITY SMETAR'Y FT. WORM TX City of Fort Worth North and South Holly Water Treatment Plant Upgrade Ozone Generation Equipment of Wjt 5-29-vi DAVID W. SLOAN / op ........................ 63946 vow% ,/o t ! i � Ali �0••_ _ _.-.� Process/Mechanical (S/0'? 9/0 9 AV M.......................: M RONALD D. JOOST jw f0 61187 -� i '; F,�• '� Process/Mechanical & Instrumentation OF TF�tt� JAMES STEPI EN GAUOVICH K r0 .....8523fiN '/CENS� : Process/Mechauical 29 AAA Y o4 :.................I.....: *. KERRY A. OWEN ....................... .n•. 82944 :'X Electrical CITY OF FORT WORTH NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WTP UPGRADE mwwl OZONE GENERATION EQUIPMENT — PRE -SELECTION FTW09118 ADDENDUM NO. 1 June 15, 2009 The location for the submission of bid is unchanged. BID DATE; Thursday, June 25, 2009, 1:30 pm The following additions, deletions, modifications, or clarifications shall be made to the approprl sections of the plans and specifications and shall become a part of the Contract Documents. Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the space provided on the Bid form. BIDDING REQUIREMENTS: Al-1 PART B — PROPOSAL A. Reference Page B-2, ARTICLE 1. Modification: Modify the end of the first sentence of paragraph 1.6 to read: "...maybe imposed based on results from the Performance Testing." TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: ,22 SECTION 01010 — SUMMARY OF WORK A. Reference Page 01010-1, Paragraph 1.04.A.4 —Modification Change "Ozone contactors and diffusers" to "Ozone contactors and diffuser piping". 3 SECTION 1300 - SUBMITTALS A. Reference Page 01300-2, Paragraph 1.03.E —Modification Modify the table by changing the number of copies to the following: Prefix Description No. of No. of Copies Sent Copies Returned O&M Preliminary O&M Manuals 5 1 I O&M Final O&M Manuals 4 0 SD Shop Drawings 8 1 B. Reference rage 01300-2, Paragraph 1.03.E —Addition Insert the following after the table: "One copy of each shop drawing submittal will be provided by the Owner to the General Contractor upon execution of the general construction contract." Al-4 SECTION 01612 - SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA .� A. Reference Page 01612-1, Paragraph 1.01.13. f Deletion: Delete entire paragraph. Addendum No. 1 FTWO9118 f 009004 B. Reference Page 01612-1. Paragraph 1.02.A. Modification: Modify Sub -paragraph 1 by deleting "building code as specified in Section 01410." and adding "2003 International Building Code or City -approved latest edition." A1-5 SECTION 01614 - WIND DESIGN CRITERIA A. Reference Page 01614-1, Paragraph 1.01.13. Deletion: Delete entire paragraph. B. Reference Page 01614-1, Paragraph 1.02.A.. Modification: Modify Sub -paragraph 1 by deleting 'building code as specified in Section 01410." and adding "2003 International Building Code or City -approved latest edition." A11-6 SECTION 1660 —STARTING SYSTEMS A. Reference Page 01650-3, Paragraph 3.04.1.4 -Modification Modify the paragraph from: "4. Training is to be limited to 16 hours per week." to "4. Training is to be limited to 20 hours per week per subject." B. Reference Page 01650-4, Paragraph 3.05 — Modification Delete the existing paragraph and replace with the following: "3.05 ACCEPTANCE TESTING A. Start, test, and place equipment and systems into operation continuously for 7 days to allow the Owner and Engineer to observe the operation and overall performance of the equipment and to determine that controls function as intended. Demonstrate proper -40p, rotation, alignment, speed, flow, pressure, vibration, sound level, adjustments, and calibration. Perform initial checks in the presence of and with the assistance of the manufacturer's representative. B. Functionally test mechanical and electrical equipment, and instrumentation and controls systems for proper operation after general start-up and testing tasks have been completed C. Equipment which operates on a limited or part-time basis shall be operated in the presence of the Engineer to demonstrate that controls function as specified. D. Demonstrate proper operation of each instrument loop function including alarms, local and remote controls, instrumentation and other equipment functions. Generate signals with test equipment to simulate operating conditions in each control mode. E. Unless specifically stated otherwise in the individual equipment specifications, equipment and systems are not substantially complete until the end of this initial operation period. If an exception to this requirement is specifically noted in an individual equipment specification, the exception shall only apply to that particular piece of equipment and not to the remaining components provided under the project. 3.06 PERFORMANCE TESTING A. Conduct performance test as specified in individual specification sections. Demonstrate that equipment and systems meet the specified performance criteria. Performance testing of the ozone system shall be as specified In Section 11264F. `--' Performance Testing shall be completed within ninety days of Substantial Completion of the Ozone System." Addendum No.1 00900-2 FTWO9118 Al-7 Al-8 SECTION 01740 — WARRANTIES A. Reference Page 01740-2, Paragraph 1.02 B.5 Modifications Modify this paragraph to read "OWNER recognizes that the occurrence of any of the following may void the ozone generator warranty," Delete item 5.c in its entirety. SECTION 11264A - OZONE SYSTEM A. Reference Page 11264A-1, Paragraph 1.01.8. Modification: Modify Sub -paragraph 14 by deleting "Section 17505" and adding "Section 17504". Addition: Add an additional sub -paragraph "15. Section 17530 -.Analytical Measurement - Dew Point." B. Reference Page 11264A-7, Paragraph 2.02.G. Modification: Modify the reference in Sub -paragraph 2 by deleting "Section 17504" and adding "Section 17530". C. Reference Page 11264A-8, Paragraph 3.01.A, Modification: Modify the paragraph by deleting Sub -paragraphs 2 and 3, and adding the following "2. PLCs located in the Ozone Generation Building PLC Panel." D. Reference Page,11264A-9, Paragraph 3.04.6. Addition: In Sub -paragraph 7; after the words "Programming of the PLCs" add the words .and panel -mounted HMIs". E. Reference Page 11264A-10, Paragraph. 3.07.A. Addition: Add the following sentence to this paragraph: "The training requirements in this Article are In addition to the training requirements described in Section 17050 F. Reference Page 11264A-10, Paragraph 3.07.8. Modification: In Sub -paragraph 1 delete the words "40 hours" and add the words "60 hours"., Modification: In Sub -paragraph 2 delete the words "40 hours" and add the words "60 hours", G. Reference Page 11264A-11,, Paragraph 3.08:6. Addition: Add Sub -paragraph I., "1. For instrumentation and control equipment, provide O&M Information as specified in Section 17050." H. Reference Page 11264A-11, Paragraph 3.09.A. Modification: Modify the paragraph by deleting "The CONTRACTOR shall provide record drawing packages for the system prepared by the Ozone System Supplier" and adding "The Ozone System Supplier shall provide record drawings." Addendum No. FTWO9118 00900-3 A1-9 SECTION 11264C - OZONE GENERATORS AND POWER SUPPLIES A, Reference Page 11264C-1, Paragraph 1.01.13. Modification: Modify Sub -paragraph 5 by deleting "Section 17505" and adding "Section 17504". B. Reference Page 11264C-2, Paragraph 1.04.B. Modification: Delete the last sentence of this paragraph "The water flow through each generator shall be constant regardless of generator operating level" and add the sentence "The water flow through the open -loop portion of the ozone generation system shall be modulated in accordance with Section 17110." C. Reference Page 11264C-5, Paragraph 1.08.6. Addition: Add the following new sub -paragraphs: "2. Provide a set of stainless steel washdown dams to facilitate cleaning of the ozone generator. 3. Provide one set of dielectric removal and insertion tools." Al-10 SECTION 11264D -OZONE DIFFUSION SYSTEM A. Reference Page 11264D-2, Paragraph 1.05,C, Deletion: In Sub -paragraph 2, delete "(CHECK WITH CITY ON THEIR PREFERENCE)" A1-11 SECTION 11264E -OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEMS A. Reference Page 11264E-1, Paragraph 1.01.B. Modification: Modify Sub -paragraph 13 by deleting "Section 17505' and adding 'Section 17504". B.. Reference Page 11264E-5, Paragraph 2,01.E. Modification. In Sub -paragraph 4 delete the word "painted" and add the word "galvanized". Al-12 SECTION 13446 —VALVE OPERATORS: A. Reference Page 13446-2, Paragraph 2.01 E. Modification: Replace the words "Counterclockwise to open" with "Clockwise to open". A143 SECTION 15110 — VALVES: A. Reference Page 15110, Paragraph 2.03.A — Modification Modify the paragraph from: "A. Valve operator "Open" direction: Open counterclockwise." To "A. Valve operator "Open" direction: Open clockwise" Al-14 SECTION 15755 - PLATE AND FRAME HEAT EXCHANGERS A. Reference Page 15755-1, Paragraph 1.01.13. Modification: Modify Sub -paragraph 1 by deleting °Section 09960 - Coatings (Title?)" and adding "Section 09905 - Protective Coatings". Addendum No. 1 00900-4 FTWO9118 B. Reference Page 15755-1, Paragraph 1.01.13. Deletion: Delete this section from related sections, section 11264A - Ozone Syster C. Reference Page 15755-1,, Paragraph 1.013. Deletion: Delete this section -from related sections, Section 11264C - Ozone Gener Power Supplies Al-15 SECTION 17901 -FIELD INSTRUMENTS A. Add "Schedules - Field Instruments" to Section 17901 Al-16 SECTION 17903 - 1/0 LIST A. Add "Schedules - 1/0 List" to Section 17903 ADD THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS: �. Section 09905 — Protective Coatings 1. Section 16075 — Electrical Identification Section 17316 — Rotameters (Variable Area. Flow Meters) ). Section 17761 — PLC Programming Software END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1 OF I 00 uiaa..a..e...a...a..ia DAVID w. SLOsee AN Addendum No.1 00900-5 FTWO9118 0 09905 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to apply protective coatings to material and equipment as specified herein, including the preparation of surfaces prior to application of coatings. B. Protective coatings shall be applied to the following surfaces: 1. Metal surfaces 2. Structural steel located in the following areas: a. Ozone Generation Area b. Ozone Destruct Area 3. New piping, except stainless steel. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Products which meet the specifications manufactured by the following companies will be acceptable: 1. Tnemec Company, Inc. 2, Carboline 3. Ameron International Performance Coatings and Finishes Group 4. The Sherwin-Williams Company 5. International Paint, LLC 6. ICI Devoe High Performance Coatings 7. Plasite Protective Coatings 1.03 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: ANSI American National Standards Institute, 25 West 43ro Street, New York, NY 10036 NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers, 1440 South Creek Drive, Houston, TX 77084-4906 OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration, U.S., Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue, NW, Washington DC 20210 SSPC The Society for Protective Coatings, 40 24'" Street, 6'" Floor, Pittsburgh, PA 15222- 4656 In the event of a conflict between the published standards, codes, and this specification, the more stringent requirement shall govern. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Primers factory -applied to equipment shall be those specified. Where possible, notify manufacturers which shop prime coats will be required in order to be compatible with field - applied finish coats. Where equipment is purchased which has the manufacturer's standard primer or a factory finish which is other than as specified in this section, remove the factory - applied paint system or apply passivators or other special coatings as required to make the surface compatible with the finish coat specified. Protective Coatings kill FTWO9118 09905-1 f B. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 1. Do not apply coatings under conditions that are unsuitable for the production of good results. Remove trash and debris from enclosed buildings and thoroughly clean prior to application of coatings. Do not begin application of coatings in areas where other trades are working, or where construction activities result in airborne dust or other debris. Do not apply coatings in conditions which do not conform to the recommendations of the coatings manufacturer. 2. Coatings shall only be applied when conditions fall within the parameters listed in the manufacturer's printed data. 3. Do not apply any coatings when weather conditions are unfavorable. In the event that climatic conditions are not conducive for best results, postpone application of coatings until conditions conform to the manufacturer's recommendations and the provisions of this specification. Do not apply coatings to a wet or damp surface in wet or damp weather conditions, or when there is dust in the air. Surfaces exposed to direct sunlight shall be shaded by awnings or other protective devices while coatings are being applied. When necessary, provide temporary heating devices of a type that produces no fumes which will discolor the paint system. 4. Apply coatings to surfaces which will be under water constantly or which periodically will be under water during operation of the project in accordance with requirements for submerged structures to a point 1'-0" above the maximum water level. Mask the line of demarcation between the coating systems to a straight level line. 1.05 GUARANTEES A. Protective coating shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the date of the Owner's acceptance of the project. B. A warranty inspection shall be conducted in the eleventh month following completion of painting and coatings. Any defective work discovered at this date shall be corrected by the Contractor in accordance with the specifications at no additional cost to the Owner. Other corrective measures may be required during the one (1) year warranty period. >.00 PRODUCTS ?.01 MATERIALS Materials shall be the manufacturer's top of line quality products, as listed herein. Products used on this project shall be as indicated below. Primers and finish coats shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer. Coatings shall be from the same batch. Products shall be as follows: TYPE A Tnemec Sherwin-Williams International Paint, LLC ICI Devoe Carboline Ameron ALKYD -PHENOLIC UNIVERSAL PRIMER Series 1 Purple Prime Kern Kromik Universal Interlac 573 Devguard 4165 Rustbond 81-113 Amercoat 185HS TYPE B EPDXY-POLYAMIDE PRIMER Tnemec Series 66 Sherwin-Williams Copoxy Primer International Paint, LLC Intergard 251; Intergard 269 for valves and gates, submerged structural steel and misc. metals, and submerged piping ICI Devoe Devran 201 Carboline 893 Ameron Amerlock 400/2 Protective Coatings FTW09118 09905-2 r TYPE C Tnemec Sherwin-Williams International Paint, LLC ICI Devoe Carboline Ameron ALKYD ENAMEL Series 23 Enduratone DTM Alkyd Enamel Interlac 665 Devguard 4308 DTM58 Amercoat 5450 TYPE D EPDXY-POLYAMIDE COATINGS Tnemec Series 66 Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy International Paint, LLC Intergurd 475HS; Interseal 670HS for valves and gates, PVC pipe and conduit, submerged structural steel and misc. metals, and submerged piping ICI Devoe Devran 224 HS Carboline 890 Ameron Amercoat 395FD TYPE E EPDXY-POLYAMIDE COATINGS FOR POTABLE WATER Tnemec Series N140 Pota-Pox Plus Sherwin-Williams Tank Clad Epoxy International Paint, LLC Interline 850 or Interseal 670HS (NSF colors) ICI Devoe Bar -Rust 233H Carboline 891 Ameron Amerlock 400/2 TYPE F EPDXY-POLYAMIDE COATINGS FOR WALKING SURFACES Tnemec Series 66 Hi -Build Epoxoline Sherwin-Williams Tile Clad HS International Paint, LLC Interseal 670HS ICI Devoe Devoe AST 250 Non -Skid Carboline 890 Ameron Amerlock 400/2 w/886 Non -Skid Additive TYPE G HIGH BUILD ACRYLIC POLYURETHANE ENAMEL Tnemec Series 73 Endura-Shield Sherwin-Williams Hi -Solids Polyurethane International Paint, LLc Interthane 870HS ICI Devoe Devthane 359 Carboline 133HB Ameron Amercoat 450H TYPE H ALIPHATIC POLYURETHANE ENAMEL Tnemec Series 1074 Endura-Shield II Sherwin-Williams Hi -Solids Polyurethane International Paint, LLC Interthane 990HS ICI Devoe Devthane 379UVA Carboline 134 HS Ameron Amercoat 450H TYPE Tnemec Sherwin-Williams ICI Devoe Ameron Carboline Intemational Paint, LLC Protective Coatings FTW09118 MODIFIED ACRYLIC COATINGS Series 29 Tuferyl DTM Acrylic Devflex 4206 Amercoat 220 3359 Intercryl 520 09905-3 TYPE J SILICONE ALUMINUM COATINGS FOR HIGH TEMPERATURE Tnemec Series 39 Silicon Aluminum Sherwin-Williams Silver Brite Aluminum 65958 International Paint, LLC Intertherm 50 ICI Devoe Devoe HT-12 Ameron Amercoat 878 Carboline 4674 TYPE K Tnemec Sherwin-Williams International Paint, LLC ICI Devoe Ameron TYPE L Tnemec !.02 COLOR SELECTION EPDXY CONCRETE COATING Series 46H-413 Hi -Build Tneme-Tar Tar Guard Epoxy Interzone 954 Devtar 247 Amercoat 78HB Coal Tar Epoxy EPDXY CONCRETE COATING - HFS Series 434/435 Perma-Shield System A. The color chart shall include the complete available range of colors, including tints and shades. The Owner shall select the colors. B. Use a multi -color system coatings for any surface receiving more than one (1) coat. Each coat shall be tinted differently from the preceding coat in a manner that will allow the various coats to be easily distinguished. Colors shall generally be from light to dark shades, but the Contractor may have the option to select tint shades to insure coats will receive adequate coverage without bleeding or otherwise showing through the preceding coat. C. Piping and equipment shall be color -coded in accordance with the requirements of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ). 1.00 EXECUTION W1 PREPARATION A. Thoroughly clean surfaces before applying coating. Where field cleaning is required, apply one (1) coat of shop primer to the surface to protect the surface until field cleaning is performed. B. Each surface shall have a primer, except in the instance where field cleaning is required and the manufacturer's printed literature states that the coating may be applied without a primer and approval of the Engineer is obtained. Shop -applied primer shall be thoroughly cleaned of oil, grease, and other contaminants, and nicks or other defects shall be spot -primed before subsequent coats are applied. C. Thoroughly clean surfaces that are blasted of abrasive material, and apply coating to surfaces before any corrosion occurs on the surface. Apply coatings no later than the same day they are blasted. In the event that surfaces are not coated immediately after cleaning, and rust reforms on the blasted surfaces, re -blast surfaces. Remove abrasives used in the blasting operations, rust, scale, and other foreign materials accumulating from the cleaning operations from the site. Sweep abrasive blasted surfaces clean after blasting is complete. D. The adequacy of the preparation of surfaces shall be determined by comparing the surface with SSPC-Vis-1 "Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces". Prepare surfaces in accordance with the following requirements: protective Coatings 'TW09118 09905-4 fib 1. TYPE SP1 NEAR WHITE BLASTING: Surfaces shall receive one (1) coat of sacrificial rust inhibitive shop primer to protect the surfaces until time for cleaning and preparation of surfaces at the project site. Metal surfaces shall be cleaned to a "Near White" condition by abrasive blasting in accordance with SSPC SP10 "Near White Blast Cleaning", using 16 to 35 mesh grit. Take precautions to prevent gouging and channeling of metal. The resulting surface profile shall be in accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations. Protect soft metal parts, gears or other parts of the equipment that may be damaged by the cleaning process or by the introduction of grit or dust. Replace any oils or lubricants that are contaminated by the cleaning process. 2. TYPE SP1A: Equipment that contains mechanical parts that would be damaged by field cleaning may be factory -blasted to a "Near White" condition by abrasive blasting before the equipment is assembled. Apply a single coat of primer that is compatible with the next coat to the surface and allow to thoroughly cure before assembly or shipping. This type of surface preparation may only be performed on the sensitive components. All other components will be prepared in accordance with Type SP1 Near White Blasting. 3. TYPE SP2 COMMERCIAL BLAST CLEANING: Thoroughly clean metal surfaces of mill scale, rust, and other foreign matter by abrasive blasting to gray metal in accordance with SSPC-SP6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". Perform abrasive blasting after erection, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 4. TYPE SP3 CONCRETE SURFACES: Thoroughly cure concrete surfaces prior to application of coatings. Allow a minimum of 30 days curing time to elapse before coatings are applied. Concrete surfaces which are scheduled to receive coatings shall be dry and shall be prepared by light abrasive blasting in accordance with SSPC-SP7 "Brush Blast Cleaning". Blasting shall be sufficient to remove dirt, dust, efflorescence, oil, grease, stains, and other foreign matter and shall provide adequate surface roughening for good adhesion. 5. TYPE SP4 SHOP PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES: Exterior metal surfaces, except those specified for field preparation, may be shop cleaned by blasting to a gray metal finish in accordance with SSPC-SP-6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning", as described above. The blasted surface shall be primed immediately as scheduled. 6. TYPE SP5 FIELD PREPARATION OF SHOP PRIMED SURFACES: Slag and weld metal accumulations and splatters not removed by the fabricator shall be removed in the field by chipping or grinding. Sharp edges shall be peened, ground or otherwise blunted. Areas adjacent to welds or any area where shop primer has been damaged shall be thoroughly cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP2 "Hand Tool Cleaning" preparation and reprimed. In order to prevent injury to surrounding painted surfaces, blast cleaning may require the use of a lower air pressure, a shorter blast distance to the surface, and shielding and masking. If damage is too extensive or uneconomical to touch-up, the entire item shall be recleaned and coated in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. Welds and irregular surfaces shall receive a field coat of the specified primer prior to the application of the first field coat. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Surface preparation and application of coatings shall be in accordance with applicable standards of the Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) and the manufacturer's recommendations. Do not apply the prime coat until the Owner's field representative is notified and approval is obtained for the surface preparation. Coating shall be applied by skilled workmen and shall be brushed out or sprayed evenly, without runs, crazing, sags, or other blemishes. Apply coating by brush or spray as noted in the specifications. B. Apply the first coat to the surface, including cutting in around edges, before the second coat is applied. The second coat and any successive coats shall not to be applied before notifying the Owner's field representative and obtaining approval. Each coat shall be tested before the successive coat is applied. Protective Coatings FTW09118 09905-5 M C. Each coat shall be thoroughly dry before application of the successive coat. The full drying time recommended by the manufacturer shall be allowed. Sand enamel between coats. D. Protect adjacent materials from damage, including over spray or spillage. Provide drop cloths or other protective tarps to cover floors, equipment or other adjacent materials. SCHEDULES Protective coatings shall be applied in accordance with the following paint schedule: Protective Coatings FTW09118 09905-6 PROTECTIVE COATINGS PAINT SCHEDULE SPEC PREP SURFACE DESCRIPTION APPLICATION VEHICLE SHEEN NO, NO. TYPE SS-1 SP2 Structural Steel Brush or Spray Alkyd Gloss or EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR Pheonolic SP4 SS-2 SP2 Equipment, Pumps, Motors, Valves and or Piping SP4 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR SS-3 SP2 Structural Steel and Miscellaneous Metals or ABOVE WATER SURFACES SP4 SS-4 SP1 Structural Steel and Miscellaneous Metals SUBMERGED SS-5 SP1 Piping SUBMERGED SS-6 SP1A Valves and Gates SS-7 SP1 Water Storage Tanks SUBMERGED OR ABOVE WATER SS-8 SP2 Water Storage Tanks EXTERIOR Brush or Spray Arcylic Polyurethane Brush or Spray Acrylic Polyurethane Brush or Spray Brush or Spray Brush or Spray Brush or Spray Brush or Spray SS-9 SP3 Concrete Floor Surfaces of Chemical Storage Brush or Spray Area INTERIOR SS-10 SP1 High Temperature Surfaces Brush Gloss Gloss Epoxy Gloss Polyamide Epoxy Gloss Polyamide Epoxy Gloss Polyamide Epoxy Polyamide Epoxy Polyamide Polyurethane Epoxy Polyamide Silicone Protective Coatings 09905-7 FTW09118 Gloss Gloss Gloss Alum. NO, OF PRODUCT COATS TYPE 1 TYPE A 2 TYPE C 3 TYPE C Total Dry Film Thickness 1 TYPE B 2 TYPE D 3 TYPE G Total Dry Film Thickness 1 TYPE B 2 TYPE D 3 TYPE G Total Dry Film Thickness 1 TYPE B 2 TYPE D 3 TYPE D Total Dry Film Thickness 1 TYPE B 2 TYPE D 3 TYPE D Total Dry Film Thickness 1 TYPE B 2 TYPE D 3 TYPE D Total Dry Film Thickness 1 TYPE E 2 I TYPE E Total Dry Film Thickness 1 TYPE B 2 TYPD D 3 TYPE H Total Dry Film Thickness 1 TYPE F 1 TYPE J DFT (MILS) 2.0 3.0 3.0 8.0 mils 2.0 4.0 3.0 9.0 mils 2.0 5.0 3.0 10.0 mils 2.0 5.0 5.0 12.0 mils 2.0 5.0 5.0 12.0 mils 2.0 5.0 5.0 12.0 mils 6.0 6.0 12.0 mils 2.0 5.0 2.5 9.5 mils 5.0 mils 1.5 SS-11 SP4 Electrical Equipment EXTERIOR * See Paragraph 3.03E or 3.04E 2 1 TYPE J Total Dry Film Thickness Brush Alkyd Gloss 1 TYPE A Enamel 2 TYPE C 3 TYPE C Total Dry Film Thickness Protective Coatings 09905-8 FTW09118 1.5 3.0 mils 2.0 3.0 3.0 * SECTION 16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Identifying electrical, instrumentation, and process equipment and components. 2. Material, manufacturing and installation requirements for identification devices. B. Related Sections: 1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its subcontractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 16050. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 16050. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Nameplates: 1. Provide a nameplate for each piece of mechanical equipment, process equipment, valve, pump, mixer, feeder, fan, air -handling unit, motor, switch, receptacle, controller, instrument transducer, instrument power supply, solenoid, motor control center, starter, panelboard, switchboard, individually mounted or plug-in type circuit protector or motor controller, disconnect switch, bus duct tap switch, time switch, relay and for any other control device or major item of electrical equipment, either located in the field or within panels. 2. Provide all nameplates of identical style, color, and material throughout the facility. 3. Device nameplates information: a. Designations as indicated on the Drawings and identified on the Process and Instrumentation Drawings. b. Device tag and loop number ID (e.g. EDV-60.0101.01). c. Circuit ID (e.g. LPA-11). d. Area served (e.g. Lighting Chemical Building). B. Wire Numbers: 1. Coordinate the wire numbering system with all vendors of equipment so that every field wire has a unique number associated with it for the entire system: a. Wire numbers shall correspond to the wire numbers on the control drawings or the panel and circuit numbers for receptacles and lighting. June 12, 2009 - DRAFT 16075-1 pw:IlCarollolDocumentslClientlYJFort Worth18205A101SpecificationslPre-SelecUl6075 (Addendum No. 1) 8205A10 b. Wire numbers shall correspond to the terminal block number to which they are attached in the control panel. c. Internal panel wires on a common terminal shall have the same wire number. d. Multiconductor cables shall be assigned a cable number that shall be attached to the cable at intermediate pull boxes and stub -up locations beneath freestanding equipment. All multi -conductor and instrumentation cables shall be identified at pull points as described above: 1) Label armored multiconductor cable using the conduit number as indicated on the Drawings, following the requirements for conduit markers in Section 16130. 2. Provide the following wiring numbering schemes throughout the project for field wires between Vendor Control Panels, (VCP), Motor Control Centers, (MCC), field starters, field instruments, etc. (ORIGIN LOC.)-(ORIGIN TERN.)/(DEST. LOC.)-(DEST. TERN.) OR (ORIGIN LOC.)-(ORIGIN TERM.) (DEST. LOC.)-(REST. TERM.) Where: ORIGIN LOC. = Designation for originating panel or device ORIGIN TERM. = Terminal designation at originating panel or device DEST. LOC. = Designation for destination panel or device DEST. TERM. = Terminal designation at destination panel or device or PLC ■� 1/0 address at destination panel a. Identify equipment and field instruments as the origin. b. VCP's are always identified as the destination. c. Location is the panel designation for VCP, or LCP. For connections to MCC's, location is the specific starter tag and loop number. Location is the tag and loop number for motor starters, field instruments and equipment. Any hyphen in the panel designation or tag and loop number shall be omitted. d. Terminal designation is the actual number on the terminal block where the conductor terminates at field devices and vendor control panels. For multiconductor cables, all terminal numbers shall be shown, separated by commas. e. Terminal designations at motor leads shall be the motor manufacturer's standard terminal designation (e.g.T1, T2, T3, etc.). f. Terminal designations at VCP's where the field conductor connects to a PLC input or output shall be the PLC address (Note: the following PLC 1/0 numbering scheme is typical for Allen Bradley, the numbering scheme should be modified to match that of the actual PLC manufacturer used for the project): 1) Discrete Point: W:X:Y/Z Analog Point: W:X:Y.Z F June 12, 2009 16075-2 8205A10 pw:/lCarollo/Documents/ClientTX/FortWorth/8205A10/Specificabons/Pre-WecVI6075 (Addendum No, 1) Where: W = I for input, O for output X = PLC number (1, 2, 3...) Y = Slot number (01, 02, 03...) Z = Terminal number (00,01,02...) for a discrete point or a word number for an analog point (1,2,3...) g. Terminal designations at VCP's where the conductor does not connect to a PLC 1/0 point shall be the terminal number with a "C" prefix (e.g. C0010). For common power after a fuse or neutrals after a switch, the subsequent points shall have and capital letter suffix starting with "A" (e.g.. C0010A). SUBMITTALS Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 16050. Product Data: 1. Nameplates: a. Color. b. Size: 1) Outside dimensions. 2) Lettering. c. Material. d. Mounting means. 2. Nameplate Schedule: a. Show exact wording for each nameplate. b. Include nameplate and letter sizes. 3. Wire Numbers: a. Manufacturer's catalog data for wire labels and label printer. Record Documents: 1. Update the conduit schedule to reflect the exact quantity of wire numbers including spares and destination points for all wires. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 16050. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 16050. 1.08 SYSTEM START UP A. Refer to Section 16050. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Nameplates and Signs: 1. One of the following: June 12, 2009 - DRAFT 16075-3 pw:/ICamilolDocuments/Client/TXIFort Worth/B205A10/Specificafions/Pre-Select/16075 (Addendum No. 1) 8205A10 a. Brady. b. Seton. B. Conductor and Cable Markers: 1. Heat -shrinkable tubing: a. One of the following or equal: 1) Raychem. 2) Brady. 3) Thomas & Betts. 4) Kroy. C. Conduit and Raceway Markers: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Almeteck: Almeteck type mini -tag. D. Medium Voltage Raceway Voltage Labels: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Brady. b. Seton. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Nameplates: 1. Fabricated from white -center and red face or black -center, white face laminated plastic engraving stock: a. 3/32-inch thick material. b. Two-ply. c. With chamfered edges. d. Block style engraved characters of adequate size to be read easily from a distance of 6 feet: 1) No characters smaller than 1/8-inch in height. B. Signs: 1. Automatic equipment and high voltage signs: a. Suitable for exterior use. b. In accordance with OSHA regulations. C. Conductor and Cable Markers: 1. Machine printed black characters on white tubing. 2. Ten point type or larger. D. Conduit and Raceway Markers: 1. UV resistant holder and letters. 2. Black letters on yellow background. 3. Minimum 1/2-inch high letters. E. Medium Voltage Circuit Raceway Labels: 1. Vinyl plastic. 2. Minimum 1-inch high letters. June 12, 2009 16075-4 8205A10 pw.//Camllo/Documents/ClienUTX/FortWorth/8205Ai0/Specifica4onslPre-Seleci/16075 (Addendum No. 1) 3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Nameplates: 1. Provide all nameplates for control panel operator devices (e.g. pushbuttons, selector switches, pilot lights, etc.): a. Same material and same color and appearance as the device nameplates, in order to achieve an aesthetically consistent and coordinated system. RT 3 EXECUTION 1 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 16050. B. Nameplates: 1. Attach nameplates to equipment with rivets, bolts or sheet metal screws, approved waterproof epoxy -based cement or install in metal holders welded to the equipment. 2. On NEMA 4, NEMA 4X, or NEMA 7 enclosures, use epoxy -based cement to attach nameplates. 3. Nameplates shall be aligned and level or plumb to within 1/64 inch over the entire length: a. Misaligned or crooked nameplates shall be remounted, or provide new enclosures at the discretion of the ENGINEER. C. Conductor and Cable Markers: 1. Apply all conductor and cable markers before termination. 2. Heat -shrinkable tubing: a. Tubing shall be shrunk using a heat gun that produces low temperature heated air. b. Tubing shall be tight on the wire after it has been heated. c. Characters shall face the open panel and shall read from left to right or top to bottom. d. Marker shall start within 1/32 inch of the end of the stripped insulation point. D. Conduit Markers: 1. Furnish and install conduit markers for every conduit in the electrical system that is identified in the conduit schedule or part of the process system: a. Conduit markings shall match the conduit schedule. 2. Mark conduits at the following locations: a. Each end of conduits that are greater that 10 feet in length. b. Where the conduit penetrates a wall or structure. c. Where the conduit emerges from the ground, slab, etc. d. The middle of conduits that are 10 feet or less in length. 3. Mark conduits after the conduits have been fully painted. 4. Position conduit markers so that they are easily read from the floor. June 12, 2009 - DRAFT 16075-5 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/iXlFoitWorth16205At0/Specfications/Pm-SelecU16075 (Addendum No. 1) 8205A10 5. Secure all conduit markers with nylon cable ties: a. Provide with ultraviolet resistant cable ties for conduit markers exposed to direct sunlight. 6. Conduit shall be identified with 0.036 minimum thickness solid brass tags with stamped 3/16-inch minimum height characters. Tags shall be attached to the raceway with Type 316 stainless steel wires. 7. Mark conduits before construction review by ENGINEER for punch list purposes. 8. Label intrinsically safe conduits in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC). Medium Voltage Raceway Labels: 1. Apply at 50 foot intervals stating the voltage level contained within the raceway. Labeling: 1. Furnish and install permanent warning signs at mechanical equipment that may be started automatically or from remote locations: a. Fasten warning signs with round head stainless steel screws or bolts. b. Locate and mount in a manner to be clearly legible to Operations Personnel. 2. Furnish and install permanent and conspicuous warning signs on equipment (front and back), doorways to equipment rooms, pull boxes, manholes, and where the voltage exceeds 600 volts. 3. Place warning signs on utilization equipment that has more than one source of power. Use warning signs to identify every panel and circuit number of the disconnecting means all external power sources: a. Place warning signs on utilization equipment that has 120 VAC control voltage source used for interlocking. b. Identify panel and circuit number or conductor tag for control voltage source disconnecting means. G. Signs: 1. Automatic equipment and high voltage signs: ra a. Mount permanent warning signs at mechanical equipment that may be started automatically from remote locations. Fasten warning signs with round head stainless steel screws or bolts. Locate and mount warning signs in a suitable manner that is acceptable to the ENGINEER. b. Mount permanent and conspicuous warning signs on the front and back of equipment, doorways to equipment rooms, pull boxes, and manholes where the voltage exceeds 600 volts. c. Place warning signs on equipment that has more than one source of power: 1) Warning sign to identify every power source. d. Place warning signs on equipment that has a 120 VAC control voltage source used for interlocking. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Replace any nameplates, signs, conductor markers, cable markers or raceway Wpm& labels that in the sole opinion of the ENGINEER do not meet the ENGINEER's aesthetic requirements. June 12, 2009 16075-6 8205A10 pw:flCamilolDocuments/ClientrWFort Worth18205A101Specificabons/Pre-Select/16075 (Addendum No. 1) END OF SECTION 16075-7 e-SelecU16U75 (Addendum No. 8205A10 SECTION 17316 ROTAMETERS (VARIABLE AREA FLOW METERS) GENERAL SUMMARY Section includes requirements for: 1. Rotameters (variable area flow meters). Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub -Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.04 SUBMITTALS Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 17050. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE Refer to Section 17050. B. Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc. 2. Physical conditions: a. Installation and mounting requirements. b. Location within the process. c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050. June 12, 2009 17316-1 pw.//Carollo/Documents/ClienttTXIFort Worthi82O5A10/Specificabons/Pre-SekUl7316 (Addendum No.1) 8205A10 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following: 1. ABB. 2. Brooks. 3. King Instrument Company. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Rotameters: 1. General: a. Variable area type flow meters with local flow indication. b. Glass Tube type. 2. Performance requirements: a. Flow Range: 1) As specified in instrument data sheets or instrument index. b. Accuracy: 1) Glass Tube: t2.0 percent of range. 2) Metal Tube: t5.0 percent of range. 3) Repeatability: 0.50 percent of range. 3. Element: a. Flow tube: 1) Glass Tube: Borosilicate glass, or as required to be compatible with the process conditions. b. Metal Tube with magnetic follower: 316 Stainless Steel. c. Turndown: 10 to 1. d. Process Temperature: 1) Glass Tube: 32 to 200 degrees Fahrenheit. 2) Metal Tube: -20 to 320 degrees Fahrenheit. e. Maximum Process Pressure: 1) Glass Tube: 100 psig. 2) Metal Tube: 450 psig. 3) Size tube for the largest of the following: a) 2.0 times the normal flow rate. b) 1.2 times the maximum flow rate. c) 4.0 times the minimum flow rate. June 12, 2009 17316-2 8205A10 pw:l/Camllo/Documents/ClientrrXlFortWorth18205Al O/Specifica6ons/Pre-Sele&/17316 (Addendum No. 1) f. Float: 1) Design to provide the widest possible immunity band change in viscosity. 2) Metal Tube Rotameters: float with encapsulated magnet. 4. Components: a. Seals: O-rings or packing glands fully compatible with process fluid. b. Integral needle valve for flow control. 5. Scale: a. Metal Tube: Dial indicator with rotatable magnet coupled to magnet encapsulated in rotameter float. 6. Other: a. Process Connection: 1) As indicated on the Mechanical Drawings. b. Mounting: 1) As indicated on the Drawings. 2) Provide all necessary hardware for rotameter mounting. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. 3 EXECUTION INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions: 1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field verification requirements for calibration. 3.04 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before K, commissioning. June 12, 2009 17316-3 8205A10 pw:llCarollo[Documents/ClienVrffort Worth18205A10ISpecificetions/Pre-Select/17316 (Addendum No. 1) 3.06 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be shown on the Drawings, in the Specifications or both. END OF SECTION June 12, 2009 17316-4 8205A10 pw:llCamlWDocumentslClienVTXIFort Worth/8205A101SpecificabonstPre-SelecU17316 (Addendum No.1) SECTION 17761 PLC PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Development software to be used with the specified PLC hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub -Contractors to review all Sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Specific Definitions: 1. Development Operating Software: The software provided by the PLC Manufacturer for use in programming the PLC. 2. Application software: The software that is programmed specifically for the project. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 17050. B. Product Data: 1. Programming languages. 2. Operating system requirements. C. Control logic: 1. Fully annotated copy of programmed PLC logic. 2. Cross-referenced index of all PLC registers or points. D. Provide Application Software for the specific project process requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. June 12, 2009 17761-1 pw:/ICaronaDocumenWClienUTJUFort Wor1hl8205A101SpecficatonslPre-SelecU17761 (Addendum No.1) 8205A10 1.06 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.07 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Provide system upgrades and maintenance fixes for a period of three years from substantial completion. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The PLC programming software system shall be manufactured by PLC hardware manufacturer. B. One of the following or equal: 1. Rockwell Software RSLogix 5000. 2. Modicon Unity Pro. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. PLC Programming Software: 1. Furnish Operating Software capable of monitoring and/or control of the PLCs via the PLC data network: a. Contain diagnostics to collect troubleshooting and performance data and display it in easy to understand graphs and tables. b. Monitor devices at each drop on the PLC data network for proper communications. c. Provide the ability to program all PLCs on the PLC data network from the Engineer's Console. 2. Operating System: a. Microsoft Windows XP. 3. The PLC programming software shall be suitable for the PLCs furnished under Section 17720. 4. PLC programming software for all programming, monitoring, searching, and editing: a. Usable both on-line, while connected to the PLC, and off-line. b. The Operating Software shall display multiple series and parallel contacts, coils, timers, counters, and mathematical function blocks. c. Capable of disabling/forcing all inputs, outputs, and coils to simulate the elements of the ladder logic, forced elements shall be identifiable by means of color change. d. Include a search capability to locate any address or element and its program location. e. Display at the EC, PLC status information, such as faults and communication errors and amount of memory remaining. 5. The PLC programming software shall support the following programming languages: a. Ladder Diagram. June 12, 2009 17761-2 8205A10 pw;l/Camllo/Qocuments/Cllenl/TX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specfta6ons/Pre-Select/177e1 (Addendum No, 1) 6. Generate a PLC program printout, which is fully documented, through the PLC programming software: a. Fully documented program listings include, as a minimum, appropriate rungs, address, and coils shown with comments to clarify to a reader what that segment of the program accomplishes on an individual line by line basis. b. Include a sufficient embedded comment for every rung of the program explaining the control function accomplished in said rung. c. Use a mnemonic associated with each contact, coil, etc, that describes its function. d. Utilize the Tag and Loop identification as contained in the P&IDs: 1) If additional internal coils, timers, etc. are used for a loop they shall contain the loop number. e. Provide a cross-reference report of program addresses. 7. Software functions automatically without operator intervention, except as required to establish file names and similar information: a. Furnish the operating system software that is the standard uncorrupted product of the PLC Manufacturer with the following minimum functions: 1) Respond to demands from a program request. 2) Dynamic allocation of the resources available in the PLC. These resources include main memory usage, computation time, peripheral usage, and 1/0 channel usage. 3) Allotment of system resources based on task priority levels such that a logical allocation of resources and suitable response times are assured. 4) Queuing of requests in order of priority if one or more requested resources are unavailable. 5) Resolution of contending requests for the same resource in accordance with priority. 6) Service requests for execution of one program by another. 7) Transfer data between programs as requested. 8) Management of all information transfers to and from peripheral devices. 9) Control and recovery from all program fault conditions. 10) Diagnose and report real-time hardware device errors. 8. Program Execution: a. Application Software - program execution scheduled on a priority basis: 1) A multilevel priority interrupt structure is required. 2) Enter into a list of pending programs a program interrupted by a higher priority program: a) Resume its execution once it becomes the currently highest priority program. 3) Schedule periodic programs. 4) Base the allocation of resources to a time -scheduled program on its relative priority and the availability of resources. 9. Start -up and Restart: a. Provide software that initializes and brings a PLC or any microprocessor based hardware unit from an inactive condition to a state of operational readiness. b. Initialization: 1) Determination of system status before start -up of initializing operating system software and initializing application software. June 12, 2009 17761-3 8205A10 pw.//Carollo/Domments/ClientrrX/FortWorth/6205A10/Spec feations/Pre-SdecUI7761 (Addendum No. t) M M ;M' 2) Loading of all memory resident software, initializing timers, counters, and queues, and initialization of all dynamic database values. 10. Shutdown: a. Where possible provide orderly shutdown capability for shutdowns resulting from equipment failure, including other PLC processor failures, primary power failure, or a manually entered shutdown command. b. Upon loss of primary power, a high -priority hardware interrupt initiates software for an immediate, orderly shutdown. c. Hardware is quickly and automatically commanded to a secure state in response to shutdown command or malfunction. d. Alarm PLC failure at the operator interface level. 11. Diagnostics: a. Furnish diagnostic programs with the PLC software package to detect and isolate hardware problems and assist maintenance personnel in discovering the causes for system failures. b. Use the manufacturer's standard diagnostic routines as much as possible. c. Furnish diagnostic software and test programs for each significant component in the control system. d. As a minimum, provide diagnostic routines to test for power supply, central processing unit, memory, communications, and 1/0 bus failures. 12. Calendar/Time Program: a. The calendar/time program to update the second, minute, hour, day, month, and year and transfer accurate time and date information to all system level and application software. b. Variations in the number of days in each month and in leap years must be handled automatically by the program. c. The operator must be able to set or correct the time and date from any operator interface, only at the highest security level. 13. Algorithms: a. Implementation of algorithms for the determinations of control actions and special calculations involving analog and discrete data. b. Algorithms must be capable of outputting positional or incremental control outputs or providing the product of calculations. c. Algorithms must include alarm checks where appropriate. d. Provide, as a minimum, the following types of algorithms: 1) Performs functions such as summing several variables, raising to a power, roots, dividing, multiplying, and subtracting. 2) A switch algorithm, which reads the current, value from its input address and stores it as the value of its output address. 2 types of switches shall be accommodated, two outputs with one input and one output with 2 inputs. 3) A 3-made Proportional - Integral - Derivative, PID, controller algorithm, with each of the 3 modes independently adjustable, supporting both direct and reverse acting modes. 4) Lead, lag, dead time, and ratio compensators. 5) Integration and totalization of analog process variables. 14. Furnish a comprehensive database for the analog inputs, calculated values, control modules, and outputs: a. In addition, provide spare database points for future expansion. 15. One integrated database can be utilized for all types of analog points or separate databases for each type, in either case the database for each point must include all specified aspects. June 12, 2009 17761-4 pw:i/Caroho/Documents/ClienVTffort Worth/UMA10iSpec6catlons1Pre-SelecV17761 (Addendum No.1) 8205A10 M or 16. All portions of the database must be available for use by the display, report, and other specified software modules. 17. All of the data fields and functions specified below must be part of the point definition database at the operator interface. Provide the capability to define new database points through the point display specified below as well as modifying defined points through these displays. This point definition and modification must include all of the features and functions defined below. The analog database software must support the following functions and attributes: a. Analog Input Signal Types: 1) Provide software at the RTUs and PLCs to read variable voltage/current signals and pulse duration/frequency type analog input signals. b. Input Accuracy: 1) Inputs must be read with an accuracy of t0.05 percent full scale or better. 2) Data conversion errors must be less than 0.05 percent full scale. 3) Pulse accumulation error less than or equal to 1 count of actual input count at a scan rate of once a minute. 4) Maintain for a minimum of 1 year the system accuracy stated above without adjustments. c. Blocking: 1) Provide mechanisms to inhibit or block the scanning and/or processing of any analog input through the operator interface. 2) For any input so blocked, the operator may manually enter a value to be used as the input value. d. Filtering: 1) For each analog input provide a first order lag digital filter with an adjustable filter factor. e. Linearizing: 1) Where analog inputs require square root extraction or other linearization, provide a mechanism to condition the filtered data before the process of scaling and zero suppression takes place. f. Calculated Values: 1) Provide means to allow for pseudo -inputs calculated by algebraic and/or Boolean expressions utilizing real inputs, other calculated value, constants, etc. 2) These values must be handled the same as real inputs in terms of record keeping, alarming, etc. g. Scaling and Zero Suppression: 1) Provide a conversion program to convert input values into engineering units in a floating-point format. h. Alarms: 1) Provide an alarm program to check all analog variables against high -high, high, low, and low -low alarm limits. 2) When an analog value exceeds a set limit, it must be reported as an alarm based on individually set priority level for each alarm point. 3) Provide an adjustable hysteresis band in order to prevent excessive alarms when a variable is hovering around an alarm limit. 4) Report return to normal shall also be reported. 5) Must be possible to inhibit alarms based on external events, ie. lock- out low pump flow alarm when the pump is off. i. Averages: June 12, 2009 17761-5 pw//Carollo/DocumentsfGientiTXIFon Worth/6206A10/Spwkabons/Pre-SelecUt7761 (Addendum No. 1) 8205A10 1) Provide a program to calculate and store hourly, daily, and monthly averages of analog variables. 2) Continuously compute averages, ie. the average for the current period to the present point in time must be stored in memory and available for use in displays, etc. 3) Update hourly averages each minute or at the polling interval for the selected variable. 4) Update daily averages at least once each hour and calculate using the results of the hourly averages. 5) Update monthly averages at least once each day and calculate using the results of the daily averages. 6) At the end of each averaging period, store the average values for the period on the hard disk for historical record keeping and reset the present period average register to the present value of the variable. 7) The active database must include the present period average and previous period average for each variable and averaging period. j. Totals: 1) Provide a program to calculate and store hourly, daily, and monthly totalization of analog variables. 2) Assign a scaling factor to each variable to convert to the appropriate units based on a 1-minute totalizing interval. 3) Assign a separate factor for each totalizing interval. 4) Variables for which totalization is inappropriate must have scaling factors of zero. 5) At the end of each totalizing period, store the totalized values for the period on the hard disk for historical record keeping and reset the present period totalization register to zero. 6) The active database must include the present period total and previous period total for each variable and totalizing period. k. Engineering Units: 1) Provide software to allow the system and the operator to convert all the measured analog variables to any desired engineering units. 2) The operator must be able to view displays and generate reports of any measured variable in one or more engineering units such as flow in GPM, MGD, CFS, and Acre -Feet per day. 3) Pre-program the conversion of the engineering units, and if not pre- programmed, the operator must be able to program new engineering unit conversions by using simple methods, ie. multiplication of the database attributes by a constant. 4) The programming method must be at a level and compatible with the specified training of the operator and the OWNER'S personnel. 5) New conversions must not require the services of a special programmer and/or special, high-level, programming training. I. Control Modules: 1) For each control function configured, whether processed at the RTU, PLC, or operator interface, maintain a file of necessary data including input values, setpoints, constants, intermediate calculated values, output value and limit clamps, etc. 2) Input and output assignments, setpoints, and constants must be adjustable by the operator through the operator interface. 3) Provide control algorithms for manual control with output values adjustable by the operator. June 12, 2009 17761-6 pw.//CaroNo/DocumentsiCfiienbTXIFortWorthIB205A10/SpecftafonsiPre-SelwYl7761 (Addendum No. 1) 8205A10 m. Analog Outputs: 1) Analog outputs must be maintained as part of the database. 2) These outputs must be adjustable manually by the operator through the operator interface or through automatic control algorithms. 18. Some of the above functions may be better accomplished in the Data Acquisition and Graphic Display Software package; it is the responsibility of the ICSC to optimize the location of the various functions between all software packages. B. General Control Functions: 1. Analog Control Functions: a. PID, lead/lag, signal select, alarm, limit, delay, and time base. b. Furnish the control system complete with a library of mathematical/calculation software to support averaging, weighted average, addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, square root extraction, exponential, AND, OR, NAND, NOR, XOR and NXOR functions. c. All math utilities must be linkable to process data points or manual inputs via control block configuration. d. By linking control blocks to data points, the math library must support system unit conversion and calculation requirements. 2. Discrete Control Functions: a. AND, OR, NOT, EXCLUSIVE OR, comparators, delays and time base. 3. Software Support: a. Retain in firmware all control and logic functions at each RTU and PLC and in RAM at the operator interface. b. Call each function as required by the configured controls to perform the intended function. 4. Control and Status Discrepancies: a. Generate a discrepancy/fail alarm for any pump, valve, or final control element if a discrepancy exists between a system or operator command and the device status. b. For example, the system commands to start (call), and the pump fails to start (run status report back), within predetermined operator programmable time delay (time disagree), and then generate a discrepancy (fail) alarm shall be generated. c. Involuntary change in the device's status must also generate an alarm: 1) For example, a pump starts when not commanded to do so, or a pump shuts down while running even though it still has a command to run. d. Each command, status, and alarm must cause the color of the symbol to change. e. Because many discrete final control elements have a cycle time in excess of the scan interval, provide each control output with an associated delay period selected to be longer than the operating period of the control element: 1) Delay periods for each final control element must be adjustable at the operator interface. 2) List all time delays in the final documentation. 5. Some of the above functions may be better accomplished in the Data Acquisition and Graphic Display Software package, it is the responsibility of June 12, 2009 17761-7 8205A10 pw:NCarollo/DocumenWCAienVWortWorth/8205A10/Specifica6ons/Pre-Select/17761 (Addendum No. 1) the ICSC to optimize the location of the various functions between all software packages. C. Control Configuration: 1. Provide software to allow control strategies to be developed and their operation initiated through the operator interface. 2. Provide standardized control point displays for defining the control functions including the function type, input/output addresses, set points and tuning constants, etc. 3. Provide a mechanism to link separate control functions together into an integrated control strategy. 4. Provide a mechanism to download operational/control set points developed at any operator interface to any PLC or RTU for operational implementation. 5. Provide a mechanism to define and implement operational/control set points locally at the PLC or RTU and to upload them to the Operator interface for operational record keeping. 6. Perform control configurations on-line at the operator interface, the PLC or RTU may be taken off-line when being configured or downloaded. ..03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 17050. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050. B. General: 1. The control system logic program shall reside at the PLC level. C. Use the Tag and Loop identifications found on the P&IDs for all tags used and/or assigned as part of the Application Software work provided by the ICSC. D. Program the PLC logic using Ladder Diagram programming language. 3.02 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Training: 1. Performed by pre -approved and qualified representatives of the ICSC and or manufacturer of the local operator interface software. A representative of the ICSC may perform the training only if the representative has completed the manufacturer's training course for the PLC programming software. END OF SECTION June 12, 2009 17761-8 8205A10 pW://CamOo/Documents/ClienVT)UFortWorth/8205AlOtSpecaficafions/Pre-Seh)cV17761 (Addendum No.1) Rio Field Instruments - Sch =dule TAG NUMBER DESCRIPTION P&ID NH-OZ-N2-PI-001 Pressure Gage 7-N-104 NH-OZ-N2-PI-002 Pressure Gage 7-N-104 NH-OZ-N2-PI-003 Pressure Gage 7-N-104 NH-OZ-N2-PI-004 Pressure Gage 7-N-104 NH-OZ-N2-AIT-001 Dew Point Analyzer 7-N-104 NH-OZ-N2-FIC-001 Flow Meter/Controller 7-N-104 NH-OZ-GOX-FM-001 Orfice Plate Flow Meter 7-N-105 NH-OZ-GOX-FM-002 Orfice Plate Flow Meter 7-N-105 NH-OZ-GOX-PIT-001 Pressure Transmitter 7-N-105 NH-OZ-GOX-TIT-001 Temperature Transmitter 7-N-105 NH-OZ-OZ-PI-001 Pressure Gage 7-N-105 NH-OZ-OZ-PI-002 Pressure Gage 7-N-105 NH-OZ-OZ-TI-001 Temperature Gage 7-N-105 NH-OZ-OZ-PSH-001 Pressure Switch 7-N-105 NH-OZ-OZ-PSL-001 Pressure Switch 7-N-105 NH-OZ-OZ-TSH-001 Temperature Switch 7-N-105 NH-OZ-OZ-AIT-001 Ozone Concentration 7-N-105 NH-OZ-OCWS-PI-001 Pressure Gage 7-N-105 NH-OZ-OCWS-TIT-001 Temperature Transmitter 7-N-105 NH-OZ-OCWS-FM-001 Magnetic Flowmeter 7-N-105 NH-OZ-OCWR-TIT-001 Temperature Transmitter 7-N-105 NH-OZ-OCWR-TSH-001 Temperature Switch 7-N-106 NH-OZ-OCWR-TSH-002 Temperature Switch 7-N-106 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-001 Magnetic Flowmeter 7-N-106 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-002 Magnetic Flowmeter 7-N-106 NH-OZ-OCWR-PSL-001 Pressure Switch 7-N-106 NH-OZ-OCWR-PSL-002 Pressure Switch 7-N-106 NH-OZ-OCWR-PSH-001 Pressure Switch 7-N-106 NH-OZ-OCWR-PSH-002 Pressure Switch 7-N-106 RANGE OR SETPOINT June 12, 2009 17901-1 pw:I.CarolblDocuments/ClienVrffort WoOh18205AlMpecificatbnsfflm-SelocU17901 (Addendum No. 1) SPEC. SECTION COMMENTS 17404 Nitrogen Receiver Tank Pressure 17404 Desiccant Dryer Discharge Pressure 17404 Desiccant Dryer Discharge Pressure 17404 Desiccant Dryer Discharge Pressure 17530 Desiccant Dryer Discharge 17302 Nitrogen Flow Controller 17312 Include DP Transmitter scaled for flow 17312 Include DP Transmitter scaled for flow 17406 Oxygen Service 17604 Oxygen Service 17404 Ozone Service/Diaphragm Seal 17404 Ozone Service/Diaphragm Seal 17404 Ozone Service 17403 Ozone Service/Diaphragm Seal 17403 Ozone Service/Diaphragm Seal 17601 Ozone Service 17504 Analyzer 17404 Cooling Water Pressure 17604 Cooling Water Supply Temperature 17302 Cooling Water Supply Flow 17604 Cooling Water Return Temperature 17601 Cooling Water Return Temperature 17601 Cooling Water Return Temperature 17302 Cooling Water Return Flow 17302 Cooling Water Return Flow 17403 Cooling Water Return Flow 17403 Cooling Water Return Flow 17403 Cooling Water Return Flow 17403 Cooling Water Return Flow 8205A10 Field Instruments - Schedule TAG NUMBER DESCRIPTION P&ID NH-OZ-OCWS-PI-001 Pressure Gage 7-N-106 NH-OZ-OCWS-PI-002 Pressure Gage 7-N-106 NH-OZ-OCWR-PI-001 Pressure Gage 7-N-106 NH-OZ-OCWR-PI-002 Pressure Gage 7-N-106 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-003 Magnetic Flowmeter 7-N-106 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-004 Magnetic Flowmeter 7-N-106 NH-OZ-OCWS-TI-001 Temperature Gage 7-N-106 NH-OZ-OCWS-TI-002 Temperature Gage 7-N-106 INH-OZ-OCWS-PSH-001 Pressure Switch 7-N-106 INH-OZ-OCWS-PSH-002 Pressure Switch 7-N-106 INH-OZ-GOX-FM-003 Orfice Plate Flow Meter 7-N-107 INH-OZ-GOX-FM-004 Orfice Plate Flow Meter 7-N-107 INH-OZ-GOX-PIT-002 Pressure Transmitter 7-N-107 INH-OZ-GOX-TIT-002 Temperature Transmitter 7-N-107 INH-OZ-OZ-PI-003 Pressure Gage 7-N-107 INH-OZ-OZ-PI-004 Pressure Gage 7-N-107 INH-OZ-OZ-TI-002 Temperature Gage 7-N-107 INH-OZ-OZ-PSH-002 Pressure Switch 7-N-107 NH-OZ-OZ-PSL-002 Pressure Switch 7-N-107 NH-OZ-OZ-TSH-002 Pressure Switch 7-N-107 NH-OZ-OZ-AIT-002 Ozone Concentration 7-N-107 NH-OZ-OCWS-PI-002 Pressure Gage 7-N-107 NH-OZ-OCWS-TIT-002 Temperature Transmitter 7-N-107 NH-OZ-OCWS-FM-002 Magnetic Flowmeter 7-N-107 NH-OZ-OCWR-TIT-002 Temperature Transmitter 7-N-107 NH-OZ-OCWR-TSH-003 Temperature Switch 7-N-108 NH-OZ-OCWR-TSH-004 Temperature Switch 7-N-108 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-003 Magnetic Flowmeter 7-N-108 INH-OZ-OCWR-FM-004 Magnetic Flowmeter 7-N-108 RANGE OR SETPOINT June 12, 2009 17901-2 pw:l/Carc4loM currents/Client/WFortWonh18205AtO/Spedkalions/Pre-SelecV1T901 (Addendum No.1) SPEC. SECTION COMMENTS 17404 Cooling Water Supply 17404 Cooling Water Supply 17404 Cooling Water Return Flow 17404 Cooling Water Return Flow 17302 Cooling Water Return Flow 17302 Cooling Water Return Flow 17404 Cooling Water Supply 17404 Cooling Water Supply 17403 Cooling Water Supply 17403 Cooling Water Supply 17312 Include DP Transmitter scaled for flow 17312 Include DP Transmitter scaled for flow 17406 Oxygen Service 17604 Oxygen Service 17404 Ozone Service/Diaphragm Seal 17404 Ozone Service/Diaphragm Seal 17404 Ozone Service 17403 Ozone Service/Diaphragm Seal 17403 Ozone Service/Diaphragm Seal 17601 Ozone Service 17504 Analyzer 17404 Cooling Water Pressure 17604 Cooling Water Supply Temperature 17302 Cooling Water supply Flow 17604 Cooling Water Return Temperature 17601 Cooling Water Return Temperature 17601 Cooling Water Return Temperature 17302 Cooling Water Return Flow 17302 Cooling Water Return Flow 8205A10 Field Instruments - Sch :dule TAG NUMBER DESCRIPTION P&ID NH-OZ-OCWR-PSL-003 Pressure Switch 7-N-108 NH-OZ-OCWR-PSL-004 Pressure Switch 7-N-108 NH-OZ-OCWR-PSH-003 Pressure Switch 7-N-108 NH-OZ-OCWR-PSH-004 Pressure Switch 7-N-108 NH-OZ-OCWS-PI-003 Pressure Gage 7-N-108 NH-OZ-OCWS-PI-004 Pressure Gage 7-N-108 NH-OZ-OCWR-PI-003 Pressure Gage 7-N-108 NH-OZ-OCWR-PI-004 Pressure Gage 7-N-108 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-005 Magnetic Flowmeter 7-N-108 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-006 Magnetic Flowmeter 7-N-108 NH-OZ-OCWS-TI-003 Temperature Gage 7-N-108 NH-OZ-OCWS-TI-004 Temperature Gage 7-N-108 NH-OZ-OCWS-PSH-003 Pressure Switch 7-N-108 NH-OZ-OCWS-PSH-004 Pressure Switch 7-N-108 NH-OZ-GOX-FM-005 NH-OZ-GOX-FM-006 NH-OZ-GOX-PIT-003 NH-OZ-GOX-TIT-003 NH-OZ-OZ-PI-005 NH-OZ-OZ-PI-006 NH-OZ-OZ-TI-003 NH-OZ-OZ-PSH-003 NH-OZ-OZ-PSL-003 NH-OZ-OZ-TSH-003 NH-OZ-OZ-AIT-003 NH-OZ-OCWS-PI-003 NH-OZ-OCWS-TIT-003 NH-OZ-OCWS-FM-003 Orfice Plate Flow Meter 7-N-109 Orfice Plate Flow Meter 7-N-109 Pressure Transmitter 7-N-109 Temperature Transmitter 7-N-109 Pressure Gage 7-N-109 Pressure Gage 7-N-109 Temperature Gage 7-N-109 Pressure Switch 7-N-109 Pressure Switch 7-N-109 Pressure Switch 7-N-109 Ozone Concentration 7-N-109 Pressure Gage 7-N-109 Temperature Transmitter 7-N-109 Magnetic Flowmeter 7-N-109 RANGE OR SETPOINT SPEC. SECTION 17403 17403 17403 17403 17404 17404 17404 17404 17302 17302 17404 17404 17403 17403 17312 17312 17406 17604 17404 17404 17404 17403 17403 17601 17504 17404 17604 17302 COMMENTS Cooling Water Return Flow Cooling Water Return Flow Cooling Water Return Flow Cooling Water Return Flow Cooling Water Supply Cooling Water Supply Cooling Water Return Flow Cooling Water Return Flow Cooling Water Return Flow Cooling Water Return Flow Cooling Water Supply Cooling Water Supply Cooling Water Supply Cooling Water Supply Include DP Transmitter scaled for flow Include DP Transmitter scaled for flow Oxygen Service Oxygen Service Ozone Service/Diaphragm Seal Ozone Service/Diaphragm Seal Ozone Service Ozone Service/Diaphragm Seal Ozone Service/Diaphragm Seal Ozone Service Analyzer Cooling Water Pressure Cooling Water Supply Temperature Cooling Water supply Flow June 12, 2009 17901-3 8205A10 pw:llCarolb/Documents/ClienVrXlFon WoAhB205At01S0ecificatbnslPre-SelecUl7901 (Addendum No. 1) M Field Instruments - Schedule TAG NUMBER DESCRIPTION P&ID NH-OZ-OCWR-TIT-003 Temperature Transmitter 7-N-109 NH-OZ-OCWR-TSH-005 Temperature Switch 7-N-110 NH-OZ-OCWR-TSH-006 Temperature Switch 7-N-110 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-005 Magnetic Flowmeter 7-N-110 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-006 Magnetic Flowmeter 7-N-110 NH-OZ-OCWR-PSL-005 Pressure Switch 7-N-110 NH-OZ-OCWR-PSL-006 Pressure Switch 7-N-110 NH-OZ-OCWR-PSH-005IPressure Switch 7-N-110 INH-OZ-OCWR-PSH-006IPressure Switch 74-110 INH-OZ-OCWS-PI-005 lPressure Gaqe 7-N-110 INH-OZ-OCWS-PI-006 lPressure Gaqe 1 7-N-110 INH-OZ-OCWR-PI-005 JPressure Gage 7-N-110 INH-OZ-OCWR-PI-006 Pressure Gage 7-N-110 INH-OZ-OCWR-FM-007 IMaqnetic Flowmeter 7-N-110 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-008 Imagnetic Flowmeter 7-N-110 NH-OZ-OCWS-TI-005 ITemoerature Gage 7-N-110 NH-OZ-OCWS-TI-006 JTemoerature Gage 7-N-110 NH-OZ-OCWS-PSH-0051Pressure Switch 1 7-N-110 NH-OZ-OCWS-PSH-006 Pressure Switch 1 7-N-110 NH-OZ-OF-PIT-001 JPressure Transmitter 1 7-N-111 NH-OZ-OF-TIT-001 ITemperature Transmitter 1 7-N-111 NH-OZ-OF-TSH-001 Temperature Switch 1 7-N-111 NH-OZ-OF-TIT-002 Temperature Transmitter 7-N-111 NH-OZ-OF-PSL-001 Pressure Switch 7-N-111 INH-OZ-OF-PI-001 Pressure Gage 7-N-111 INH-OZ-OF-AIT-001 (Ozone Concentration 1 7-N-111 INH-OZ-OF-PIT-002 (Pressure Transmitter 1 7-N-112 INH-OZ-OF-TIT-003 ITemperature Transmitter 17-N-112 INH-OZ-OF-TSH-002 ITemperature Switch I7-N-112 RANGE OR SETPOINT June 12, 2009 17901-4 pw:I/CarolblDocuments/ClientnX/Fort Wc"ht8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecV17901 (Addendum No. 1) SPEC. SECTION COMMENTS 17604 Cooling Water Return Temperature 17601 Cooling Water Return Temperature 17601 Cooling Water Return Temperature 17302 Cooling Water Return Flow 17302 Cooling Water Return Flow 17403 Cooling Water Return Flow 17403 Cooling Water Return Flow 17403 Cooling Water Return Flow 17403 Cooling Water Return Flow 17404 Cooling Water Supply 17404 Cooling Water Supply 17404 Cooling Water Return Flow 17404 Cooling Water Return Flow 17302 Cooling Water Return Flow 17302 Cooling Water Return Flow 17404 Cooling Water Supply 17404 Cooling Water Supply 17403 Cooling Water Supply 17403 Cooling Water Supply 17406 Ozone Service/Diaphragm Seal 17604 Ozone Off Gas Service 17601 Ozone Destruct PreHeater 17604 Ozone Off Gas Service 17403 Ozone Off Gas Service 17404 Ozone Off Gas Service 17504 Analyzer 17406 Ozone Service/Diaphragm Seal 17604 Ozone Off Gas Service 17601 Ozone Destruct PreHeater 8205A10 Field Instruments - Schedule TAG NUMBER rM DESCRIPTION P81D NH-OZ-OF-TIT-004 Temperature Transmitter_ 7-N-112 NH-OZ-OF-PSL-002 Pressure Switch 7-N-112 NH-OZ-OF-PI-002 Pressure Gage 7-N-112 NH-OZ-OF-AIT-002 Ozone Concentration 7-N-112 NH-OZ-OF-PIT-003 Pressure Transmitter 7-N-113 NH-OZ-OF-TIT-005 Temperature Transmitter 7-N-113 NH-OZ-OF-TSH-003 Temperature Switch 7-N-113 NH-OZ-OF-TIT-006 Temperature Transmitter 7-N-113 NH-OZ-OF-PSL-003 Pressure Switch 7-N-113 NH-OZ-OF-PI-003 Pressure Gage 7-N-113 NH-OZ-OF-AIT-003 Ozone Concentration 7-N-113 ISH-OZ-OF-PIT-001 Pressure Transmitter 7-N-114 ISH-OZ-OF-TIT-001 Temperature Transmitter 7-N-114 ISH-OZ-OF-TSH-001 Temperature Switch 7-N-114 ISH-OZ-OF-TIT-002 Temperature Transmitter 7-N-114 ISH-OZ-OF-PSL-001 Pressure Switch 7-N-114 ISH-OZ-OF-PI-001 JPressure Gage 7-N-114 ISH-OZ-OF-AIT-001 10zone Concentration 7-N-114 ISH-OZ-OF-PIT-002 Pressure Transmitter 7-N-115 ISH-OZ-OF-TIT-003 ITemperature Transmitter 7-N-115 ISH-OZ-OF-TSH-002 ITemperature Switch 7-N-115 SH-OZ-OF-TIT-004 Temperature Transmitter 7-N-115 SH-OZ-OF-PSL-002 Pressure Switch 7-N-115 SH-OZ-OF-PI-002 Pressure Gage 7-N-115 SH-OZ-OF-AIT-002 10zone Concentration 7-N-115 SH-OZ-OF-PIT-003 Pressure Transmitter 7-N-116 SH-OZ-OF-TIT-005 ITemperature Transmitter 7-N-116 SH-OZ-OF-TSH-003 Temperature Switch 7-N-116 SH-OZ-OF-TIT-006 Temperature Transmitter 7-N-116 RANGE OR SETPOINT June 12, 2009 17901-5 pw:llCarolblDocumentslClient117UFort worth18205A10ISpecftationslPre-SelecUI W (Addendum No.1) SPEC, SECTION COMMENTS 17604 Ozone Off Gas Service 17403 Ozone Off Gas Service 17404 Ozone Off Gas Service 17504 Analyzer 17406 Ozone Service/Diaphragm Seal 17604 Ozone Off Gas Service 17601 Ozone Destruct PreHeater 17604 Ozone Off Gas Service 17403 Ozone Off Gas Service 17404 Ozone Off Gas Service 17504 Analyzer 17406 Ozone Service/Diaphragm Seal 17604 Ozone Off Gas Service 17601 Ozone Destruct PreHeater 17604 Ozone Off Gas Service 17403 Ozone Off Gas Service 17404 Ozone Off Gas Service 17504 Analyzer 17406 Ozone Service/Diaphragm Seal 17604 Ozone Off Gas Service 17601 Ozone Destruct PreHeater 17604 Ozone Off Gas Service 17403 Ozone Off Gas Service 17404 Ozone Off Gas Service 17504 Analyzer 17406 Ozone Service/Diaphragm Seal 17604 Ozone Off Gas Service 17601 Ozone Destruct PreHeater 17604 Ozone Off Gas Service 8205A10 Field Instruments • Schedule TAG NUMBER SH-OZ-OF-PSL-003 SH-OZ-OF-PI-003 SH-OZ-OF-AIT-003 DESCRIPTION Pressure Switch Pressure Gage Ozone Concentration P&ID 7-N-116 7-N-116 7-N-116 RANGE OR SETPOINT SPEC. SECTION 17403 Ozone Off Gas Service 17404 Ozone Off Gas Service 17504 Analyzer June 12, 2009 17901-6 8205A10 pw.I/CardblDocuments(ClienVWortworth18205A101SpecftationslPreSelecVl7901 (Addendum No. 1) COMMENTS Lo 1/O List PLC NH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 NH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 NH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 NH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 NH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 N H-OZ-OZ-REM-001 NH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 NH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 NH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 NH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 NH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 NH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 NH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 NH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 INH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 NH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 NH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 NH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 NH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 INH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 INH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 INH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 INH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 INH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 INH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 INH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 INH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 INH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 INH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 INH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 INH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 INH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 ,NH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 INH-OZ-OZ-REM-001 1/0 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT 1/0 ADDRESS SIGNAL TAG i DESCRIPTION ` DI 1 3 1 NH-OZ-N2-AC-001-AL N2 Gen Compressor No.1 OL Alarm DI 1 3 2 NH-OZ-N2-AC-001-RN N2 Gen Compressor No.1 Run Status DI 1 3 3 NH-OZ-N2-AC-002-AL N2 Gen Compressor No.2 OL Alarm DI 1 3 4 NH-OZ-N2-AC-002-RN N2 Gen Compressor No.2 Run Status DI 1 3 5 NH-OZ-N2-PSH-002-AL N2 Gen Receiver Tank Press High -High Alarm DI 1 3 6 NH-OZ-N2-PSL-002-AL N2 Gen Receiver TankPress Low -Low Alarm DI 1 3 7 NH-OZ-N2-DY-001-RN N2 Gen Desiccant Dryer No.1 Run Status DI 1 3 8 NH-OZ-N2-DY-002-RN N2 Gen Desiccant Dryer No.2 Run Status DI 1 3 9 NH-OZ-N2-AIT-001-AH N2 Gen Desiccant Dryer Dewpoint High Alarm DI 1 3 10 DI 1 3 11 DI 1 3 12 DI 1 3 13 DI 1 3 14 DI 1 3 15 DI 1 3 16 DO 1 4 1 NH-OZ-N2-SV-001-OC Open N2 Gen Coal Filter No.1 Drain valve DO 1 4 2 NH-OZ-N2-SV-002-OC Open N2 Gen Coal Filter No.2 Drain valve DO 1 4 3 DO 1 4 4 DO 1 4 5 DO 1 4 6 DO 1 4 7 DO 1 4 8 DO 1 4 9 DO 1 4 10 DO 1 4 11 DO 1 4 12 DO 1 4 13 DO 1 4 14 DO 1 4 15 DO 1 4 16 Al 1 5 1 NH-OZ-N2-AI-001-AI N2 Gen Desiccant Dryer Dewpoint Indication Al 1 5 2 NH-OZ-N2-FIC-001-FI N2 Gen Flow Rate Indication June 09 17903-1 8205A10 pw:(/CaiolbiDocumeAtS/CWnVTX/Fort Worthhl9205A10/Sped ubDnsiPre-SekVl7903 (Addendum No. 1) June 09 17903-2 8205A10 pwYlCarolb/DocumentstClienVWort WorthI8205A101SpecificatbnstPre-SelecU17903 (Addendum No.1) 1/0 1/0 PLC TYPE RACKSLOT POINT ADDRESS SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 3 1 NH-OZ-GOX-BA-001-ZSO Ozone Gen No.1 GOX Inlet Valve Open Status INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 3 2 NH-OZ-GOX-BA-001-ZSC Ozone Gen No.1 GOX Inlet Valve Closed Status INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 3 3 NH-OZ-GOX-BA-001-RM Ozone Gen No.1 GOX Inlet Valve Remote Status INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 3 4 NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-001-ZSO Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Open Status INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 3 5 NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-001-ZSC Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Closed Status INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 3 6 NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-001-RM Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Remote Statu INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 3 7 NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-001-ZSO Ozone Gen No.1 Ozone Flow Ctl Valve Open Status INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 3 8 NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-001-ZSC Ozone Gen No.1 Ozone Flow Ctl Valve Closed Status INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 3 9 NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-001-RM Ozone Gen No.1 Ozone Flow Ctl Valve Remote Status INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 3 10 NH-OZ-OZ-TSH-002-AL Ozone Gen No.1 Power Supply High Temp. Alarm INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 3 11 NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-001-RN Ozone Gen No.1 Power Supply Run Status INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 3 12 NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-001-AL Ozone Gen No.1 Power Supply Fail Alarm NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 3 13 NH-OZ-OZ-PSH-001-AL Ozone Gen No.1 Power Supply High Press..Alarm INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 3 14 NH-OZ-OZ-PSL-001-AL Ozone Gen No.1 Power Supply Low Press. Alarm INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 3 15 NH-OZ-OZ-TSH-001-AL Ozone Gen No.1 Product Gas High Temp. Alarm INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 3 16 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 4 1 NH-OZ-OCWR-TSH-001-AL Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water No.1 High Temp. Alarm INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 4 2 NH-OZ-OCWR-TSH-002-AL Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water No.2 High Temp. Alarm NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 4 3 NH-OZ-OCWR-PSH-001-AL Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water No.1 High Press. Alarm NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 4 4 NH-OZ-OCWR-PSH-002-AL Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water No.2 High Press. Alarm NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 4 5 NH-OZ-OCWR-PMP-001-RN Oz Gen No.1 Cooling Water Pump No.1 Run Status NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 4 6 NH-OZ-OCWR-PMP-002-RN Oz Gen No.1 Cooling Water Pump No.2 Run Status NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 4 7 NH-OZ-OCWR-PSH-003-AL Oz Gen No.1 CW Pump No.1 Dischg High Press. Alarm NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 4 8 NH-OZ-OCWR-PSH-004-AL Oz Gen No.1 CW Pump No.2 Dischg High Press. Alarm NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 4 9 NH-OZ-OCWS-PSH-001-AL Oz Gen No.1 HEX No.1 Dischg High Press. Alarm NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 4 10 NH-OZ-OCWS-PSH-002-AL Oz Gen No.1 HEX No.2 Dischg High Press. Alarm NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 4 11 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-001-AL Oz Gen No.1 HEX No.1 Dischg Low Flow Alarm NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 4 12 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-002-AL Oz Gen No.1 HEX No.2 Dischg Low Flow Alarm NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 4 13 NH-OZ-OCWR-TSH-003-AL Oz Gen No.1 HEX Dischg High Temp Alarm NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 4 14 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 4 15 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DI 2 4 16 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DO 2 5 1 NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-001-OOC Ozone Gen No.1 On/Off Control NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DO 2 5 2 NH-OZ-OCWS-SV-001-OC Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Control NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DO 2 5 3 Spare June 09 17903-3 8205A10 pw:I/Carollo/Documents/ClienVWort Wodhl8205A10/Specifications/PR -Selectl17903 (Addendum No.1) 1/0 1/0 PLC TYPE RACKSLOT POINT ADDRESS SIGNAL TAG NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DO 2 5 4 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DO 2 5 5 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DO 2 5 6 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DO 2 5 7 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DO 2 5 8 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DO 2 5 9 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DO 2 5 10 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DO 2 5 11 Spare INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DO 2 5 12 Spare INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DO 2 5 13 Spare INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DO 2 5 14 Spare INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DO 2 5 15 Spare INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 DO 2 5 16 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 Al 2 6 1 NH-OZ-GOX-BA-001-ZI NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 Al 2 6 2 NH-OZ-GOX-FM-001-FI NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 Al 2 6 3 NH-OZ-GOX-FM-002-FI INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 Al 2 6 4 NH-OZ-GOX-PIT-001-PI INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 Al 2 6 5 NH-OZ-GOX-TIT-001-TI INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 Al 2 6 6 NH-OZ-OCWS-TIT-001-TI NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 Al 2 6 7 NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-001-ZI NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 Al 2 6 8 NH-OZ-OCWS-FM-OO1-FI NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 Al 2 7 1 NH-OZ-OCWR-TIT-001-TI NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 Al 2 7 2 NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-001-JI NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 AI 2 7 3 NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-001-ZI NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 Al 2 7 4 NH-OZ-OZ-AIT-001-AI NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 Al 2 7 5 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-001-FI NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 Al 2 7 6 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-002-FI NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 Al 2 7 7 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-003-FI NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 Al 2 7 8 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-004-FI NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 Al 2 8 1 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 Al 2 8 2 Spare INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 Al 2 8 3 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 Al 2 8 4 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 AI 2 8 5 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 Al 2 8 6 Spare June 09 17903-4 pw•I(CarolblDocuments/ClientriXIFortWorth18205A10lSpecfications/Pm-SelecV17903 (Addendum No.1) DESCRIPTION Ozone Gen No.1 GOX Inlet Valve Position Ozone Gen No.1 GOX Inlet High Range Flow Ozone Gen No.1 GOX Inlet Low Range Flow Ozone Gen No.1 GOX Inlet Press Indication Ozone Gen No.1 GOX Inlet Temp Indication Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water Inlet Temp. Indication Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Position Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water Flow Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water Return Temp. Indication Ozone Gen No.1 Power Indication Ozone Gen No.1 Ozone Flow Valve Position Ozone Gen No.1 Product Gas Concentration Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water No.1 Flow Indication Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water No.2 Flow Indication Ozone Gen No.1 HEX No.1 Dischg Flow Indication Ozone Gen No.1 HEX No.2 Dischg Flow Indication 8205A10 IPLC INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-001 1/0 I/O TYPE RACKSLOT POINT ADDRESS SIGNAL TAG Al 2 8 7 Spare Al 2 8 8 Spare AO 2 9 1 NH-OZ-GOX-BA-001-ZC AO 2 9 2 NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-001-ZC AO 2 9 3 NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-001-JC AO 2 9 4 NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-001-ZC AO 2 9 5 Spare AO 2 9 6 Spare AO 2 9 7 Spare AO 2 9 8 Spare DESCRIPTION Ozone Gen No.1 GOX Inlet Valve Position Control Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Position Conti Ozone Gen No.1 Power Setpoint Ozone Gen No.1 Ozone Flow Valve Position Control June 09 17903-5 6205A10 pw://CaroliolDocuments/ClientrrX/Fort Worth/8205At0/Specihcations/Pre-5elect/17903 (Addendum No.1) 110 u0 PLC TYPE RACKSLOT POINT ADDRESS SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 3 1 NH-OZ-GOX-BA-002-ZSO Ozone Gen No.2 GOX Inlet Valve Open Status INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 3 2 NH-OZ-GOX-BA-002-ZSC Ozone Gen No.2 GOX Inlet Valve Closed Status INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 3 3 NH-OZ-GOX-BA-002-RM Ozone Gen No.2 GOX Inlet Valve Remote Status INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 3 4 NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-002-ZSO Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Open Status INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 3 5 NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-002-ZSC Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Closed Status INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 3 6 NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-002-RM Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Remote Statu INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 3 7 NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-002-ZSO Ozone Gen No.2 Ozone Flow Ctl Valve Open Status INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 3 8 NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-002-ZSC Ozone Gen No.2 Ozone Flow Ctl Valve Closed Status INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 3 9 NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-002-RM Ozone Gen No.2 Ozone Flow Ctl Valve Remote Status INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 3 10 NH-OZ-OZ-TSH-004-AL Ozone Gen No.2 Power Supply High Temp. Alarm INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 3 11 NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-002-RN Ozone Gen No.2 Power Supply Run Status INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 3 12 NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-002-AL Ozone Gen No.2 Power Supply Fail Alarm INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 3 13 NH-OZ-OZ-PSH-002-AL Ozone Gen No.2 Power Supply High Press..Alarm INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 3 14 NH-OZ-OZ-PSL-002-AL Ozone Gen No.2 Power Supply Low Press. Alarm INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 3 15 NH-OZ-OZ-TSH-003-AL Ozone Gen No.2 Product Gas High Temp. Alarm NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 3 16 Spare INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 4 1 NH-OZ-OCWR-TSH-004-AL Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water No.3 High Temp. Alarm INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 4 2 NH-OZ-OCWR-TSH-005-AL Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water No.4 High Temp. Alarm INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 4 3 NH-OZ-OCWR-PSL-003-AL Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water No.3 High Press. Alarm INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 4 4 NH-OZ-OCWR-PSL-004-AL Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water No.4 High Press. Alarm INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 4 5 NH-OZ-OCWR-PMP-002-RN Oz Gen No.2 Cooling Water Pump No.3 Run Status INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 4 6 NH-OZ-OCWR-PMP-002-RN Oz Gen No.2 Cooling Water Pump No.4 Run Status INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 4 7 NH-OZ-OCWR-PSH-003-AL Oz Gen No.2 CW Pump No.3 Dischg High Press. Alarm INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 4 8 NH-OZ-OCWR-PSH-004-AL Oz Gen No.2 CW Pump No.4 Dischq High Press. Alarm INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 4 9 NH-OZ-OCWS-PSH-003-AL Oz Gen No.2 HEX No.3 Dischg High Press. Alarm INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 4 10 NH-OZ-OCWS-PSH-004-AL Oz Gen No.2 HEX No.4 Dischg High Press. Alarm INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 4 11 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-002-AL Oz Gen No.2 HEX No.3 Dischg Low Flow Alarm INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 4 12 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-002-AL Oz Gen No.2 HEX No.4 Dischg Low Flow Alarm INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 4 13 NH-OZ-OCWR-TSH-006-AL Oz Gen No.2 HEX Dischg High Temp Alarm INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 4 14 Spare INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 4 15 Spare INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DI 3 4 16 Spare {NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DO 3 5 1 NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-002-OOC Ozone Gen No.2 On/Off Control INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DO 3 5 2 NH-OZ-OCWS-SV-002-OC Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Control INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DO 3 5 3 Spare June 09 17903-6 8205A10 pw:1/CarofloMxuments1G ienVWort Worth/8205A10/Specftat1ons/Pre-SeWU17903 (Addendum No, 1) low 1/0 1/0 PLC TYPE RACKSLOT POINT ADDRESS SIGNAL TAG NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DO 3 5 4 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DO 3 5 5 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DO 3 5 6 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DO 3 5 7 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DO 3 5 8 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DO 3 5 9 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DO 3 5 10 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DO 3 5 11 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DO 3 5 12 Spare INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DO 3 5 13 Spare INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DO 3 5 14 Spare INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DO 3 5 15 Spare INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 DO 3 5 16 Spare INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 Al 3 6 1 NH-OZ-GOX-BA-002-ZI INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 Al 3 6 2 NH-OZ-GOX-FM-003-FI INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 Al 3 6 3 NH-OZ-GOX-FM-004-FI INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 Al 3 6 4 NH-OZ-GOX-PIT-002-PI INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 Al 3 6 5 NH-OZ-GOX-TIT-002-TI INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 Al 3 6 6 NH-OZ-OCWS-TIT-002-TI INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 Al 3 6 7 NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-002-ZI NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 Al 3 6 8 NH-OZ-OCWS-FM-002-FI NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 Al 3 7 1 NH-OZ-OCWR-TIT-002-TI NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 Al 3 7 2 NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-002-JI NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 Al 3 7 3 NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-002-ZI NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 Al 3 7 4 NH-OZ-OZ-AIT-002-AI NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 Al 3 7 5 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-005-FI NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 Al 3 7 6 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-006-FI NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 Al 3 7 7 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-007-FI NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 Al 3 7 8 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-008-FI NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 Al 3 8 1 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 AI 3 8 2 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 Al 3 8 3 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 Al 3 8 4 Spare Al 3 8 5 Spare �NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 Al 3 8 6 Spare June 09 17903-7 pw:f/CarollotDoeuments/ClienUTXIFottWorth/8205A10/Specifications/PreSelecU17903 (Addendum No. 1) DESCRIPTION Ozone Gen No.2 GOX Inlet Valve Position Ozone Gen No.2 GOX Inlet High Range Flow Ozone Gen No.2 GOX Inlet Low Range Flow Ozone Gen No.2 GOX Inlet Press Indication Ozone Gen No.2 GOX Inlet Temp Indication Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water Inlet Temp. Indication Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Position Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water Flow Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water Return Temp. Indication Ozone Gen No.2 Power Indication Ozone Gen No.2 Ozone Flow Valve Position Ozone Gen No.2 Product Gas Concentration Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water No.3 Flow Indication Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water No.4 Flow Indication Ozone Gen No.2 HEX No.3 Dischg Flow Indication Ozone Gen No.2 HEX No.4 Dischg Flow Indication 8205A10 IPLC �NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 NH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-002 1/0 I/O TYPE RACKSLOT POINTADDRESS SIGNAL TAG Al 3 8 7 Spare Al 3 8 8 Spare AO 3 9 1 NH-OZ-GOX-BA-002-ZC AO 3 9 2 NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-002-ZC AO 3 9 3 NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-002-JC AO 3 9 4 NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-002-ZC AO 3 9 5 Spare AO 3 9 6 Spare AO 3 9 7 Spare AO 3 9 8 Spare June 09 17903-8 pw://Carolbl0acumentsiClienl/Wort Worth1H2O5A10ISpeacations/Pm-Selectl17W3 (Addendum No.1) DESCRIPTION Ozone Gen No.2 GOX Inlet Valve Position Control Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Position Conti Ozone Gen No.2 Power Setpoint Ozone Gen No.2 Ozone Flow Valve Position Control 8205A10 PLC NH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 NH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 NH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 NH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 NH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 NH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 NH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 NH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 NH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 u0 u0 TYPE RACFC.SLOT POINTADDRESS SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION DI 1 3 1 NH-OZ-GOX-BA-003-ZSO Ozone Gen No.3 GOX Inlet Valve Open Status DI 4 3 2 NH-OZ-GOX-BA-003-ZSC Ozone Gen No.3 GOX Inlet Valve Closed Status DI 4 3 3 NH-OZ-GOX-BA-003-RM Ozone Gen No.3 GOX Inlet Valve Remote Status DI 4 3 4 NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-003-ZSO Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Open Status DI 4 3 5 NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-003-ZSC Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Closed Status DI 4 3 6 NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-003-RM Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Remote Statu DI 4 3 7 NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-003-ZSO Ozone Gen No.3 Ozone Flow Ctl Valve Open Status DI 4 3 8 NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-003-ZSC Ozone Gen No.3 Ozone Flow Ctl Valve Closed Status DI 4 3 9 NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-003-RM Ozone Gen No.3 Ozone Flow Ctl Valve Remote Status DI 4 3 10 NH-OZ-OZ-TSH-006-AL Ozone Gen No.3 Power Supply High Temp. Alarm DI 4 3 11 NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-003-RN Ozone Gen No.3 Power Supply Run Status DI 4 3 12 NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-003-AL Ozone Gen No.3 Power Supply Fail Alarm DI 4 3 13 NH-OZ-OZ-PSH-003-AL Ozone Gen No.3 Power Supply High Press..Alarm DI 4 3 14 NH-OZ-OZ-PSL-003-AL Ozone Gen No.3 Power Supply Low Press. Alarm DI 4 3 15 NH-OZ-OZ-TSH-005-AL Ozone Gen No.3 Product Gas High Temp. Alarm DI 4 3 16 Spare DI 4 4 1 NH-OZ-OCWR-TSH-007-AL Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water No.1 High Temp. Alarm DI 4 4 2 NH-OZ-OCWR-TSH-008-AL Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water No.2 High Temp. Alarm DI 4 4 3 NH-OZ-OCWR-PSL-005-AL Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water No.1 High Press. Alarm DI 4 4 4 NH-OZ-OCWR-PSL-006-AL Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water No.2 High Press. Alarm DI 4 4 5 NH-OZ-OCWR-PMP-003-RN Oz Gen No.3 Cooling Water Pump No.5 Run Status DI 4 4 6 NH-OZ-OCWR-PMP-003-RN Oz Gen No.3 Cooling Water Pump No.6 Run Status DI 4 4 7 NH-OZ-OCWR-PSH-005-AL Oz Gen No.3 CW Pump No.5 Dischg High Press. Alarm DI 4 4 8 NH-OZ-OCWR-PSH-006-AL Oz Gen No.3 CW Pump No.6 Dischg High Press. Alarm DI 4 4 9 NH-OZ-OCWS-PSH-005-AL Oz Gen No.3 HEX No.5 Dischg High Press. Alarm DI 4 4 10 NH-OZ-OCWS-PSH-006-AL Oz Gen No.3 HEX No.6 Dischg High Press. Alarm DI 4 4 11 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-003-AL Oz Gen No.3 HEX No.5 Dischg Low Flow Alarm DI 4 4 12 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-003-AL Oz Gen No.3 HEX No.6 Dischg Low Flow Alarm DI 4 4 13 NH-OZ-OCWR-TSH-008-AL Oz Gen No.3 HEX Dischg High Temp Alarm DI 4 4 14 Spare DI 4 4 15 Spare DI 4 4 16 Spare DO 4 5 1 NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-003-OOC Ozone Gen No.3 On/Off Control DO 4 5 2 NH-OZ-OCWS-SV-003-OC Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Control DO 4 5 3 Spare June 09 17903-9 8205A10 rw.uCaiolb/Documents/ClienVMT-od Wog h/8205A10ISpecikations/Pre-SelecU1T903 (Addendum No.1) uO uO PLC TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS SIGNAL TAG NH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 DO 4 5 4 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 DO 4 5 5 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 DO 4 5 6 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 DO 4 5 7 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 DO 4 5 8 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 DO 4 5 9 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 DO 4 5 10 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 DO 4 5 11 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 DO 4 5 12 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 DO 4 5 13 Spare NH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 DO 4 5 14 Spare INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 DO 4 5 15 Spare INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 DO 4 5 16 Spare INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 Al 4 6 1 NH-OZ-GOX-BA-003-ZI INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 Al 4 6 2 NH-OZ-GOX-FM-005-FI INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 Al 4 6 3 NH-OZ-GOX-FM-006-FI NH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 Al 4 6 4 NH-OZ-GOX-PIT-003-PI NH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 Al 4 6 5 NH-OZ-GOX-TIT-003-TI ,NH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 Al 4 6 6 NH-OZ-OCWS-TIT-003-TI INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 AI 4 6 7 NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-003-ZI INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 Al 4 6 8 NH-OZ-OCWS-FM-003-FI INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 Al 4 7 1 NH-OZ-OCWR-TIT-003-TI INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 Al 4 7 2 NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-003-JI INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 Al 4 7 3 NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-003-ZI INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 Al 4 7 4 NH-OZ-OZ-AIT-003-AI INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 Al 4 7 5 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-009-FI INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 Al 4 7 6 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-010-FI INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 Al 4 7 7 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-011-FI INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 Al 4 7 8 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-012-FI INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 Al 4 8 1 Spare INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 Al 4 8 2 Spare INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 Al 4 8 3 Spare INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 Al 4 8 4 Spare INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 Al 4 8 5 Spare INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 Al 4 8 6 Spare June 09 17903-10 pw:IlCarolbiDocumentslClientlW-ortWorthIB205A10ISpecificationslPm-Setectl17903 (Addendum No. 1) DESCRIPTION Ozone Gen No.3 GOX Inlet Valve Position Ozone Gen No.3 GOX Inlet High Range Flow Ozone Gen No.3 GOX Inlet Low Range Flow Ozone Gen No.3 GOX Inlet Press Indication Ozone Gen No.3 GOX Inlet Temp Indication Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water Inlet Temp. Indication Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Position Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water Flow Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water Return Temp. Indication Ozone Gen No.3 Power Indication Ozone Gen No.3 Ozone Flow Valve Position Ozone Gen No.3 Product Gas Concentration Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water No.5 Flow Indication Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water No.6 Flow Indication Ozone Gen No.3 HEX No.5 Dischq Flow Indication Ozone Gen No.3 HEX No.6 Dischg Flow Indication 8205A10 1PLC INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 IN H-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 INH-OZ-GEN-REM-003 1/O 1/O TYPE RACKSLOT POINT ADDRESS SIGNAL TAG Al 4 8 7 Spare Al 4 8 8 Spare AO 4 9 1 NH-OZ-GOX-BA-003-ZC AO 4 9 2 NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-003-ZC AO 4 9 3 NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-003-JC AO 4 9 4 NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-003-ZC AO 4 9 5 Spare AO 4 9 6 Spare AO 4 9 7 Spare AO 4 9 8 Spare June 09 17903-11 pw:/�'Camllo/Documents/Client/WortWorth/8205A10/Specifications/Pm-Select/17903 (Addendum No. 1) DESCRIPTION Ozone Gen No.3 GOX Inlet Valve Position Control Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Position Conti Ozone Gen No.3 Power Setpoint Ozone Gen No.3 Ozone Flow Valve Position Control 8205A10 4— 1/O PLC 1/0 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS SIGNAL TAG NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 3 1 NH-OZ-RW-GT-001-RM NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 3 2 NH-OZ-RW-GT-001-ZSO NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 3 3 NH-OZ-RW-GT-001-ZSC NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 3 4 NH-OZ-OF-BA-001-RM NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 3 5 NH-OZ-OF-BA-001-ZSO NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 3 6 NH-OZ-OF-BA-001-ZSC NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 3 7 NH-OZ-OF-BA-002-RM NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 3 8 NH-OZ-OF-BA-002-ZSO NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 3 9 NH-OZ-OF-BA-002-ZSC NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 3 10 NH-OZ-OF-BA-003-RM NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 3 11 NH-OZ-OF-BA-003-ZSO NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 3 12 NH-OZ-OF-BA-003-ZSC NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 3 13 NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 3 14 NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 3 15 NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 3 16 NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 4 1 NH-OZ-RW-GT-001-RM NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 4 2 NH-OZ-RW-GT-001-ZSO NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 4 3 NH-OZ-RW-GT-001-ZSC NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 4 4 NH-OZ-OF-BA-004-RM INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 4 5 NH-OZ-OF-BA-004-ZSO INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 4 6 NH-OZ-OF-BA-004-ZSC jNH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 4 7 NH-OZ-OF-BA-005-RM INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 4 8 NH-OZ-OF-BA-005-ZSO INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 4 9 NH-OZ-OF-BA-005-ZSC INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 4 10 NH-OZ-OF-BA-006-RM INH-OZ-07-REM-004 DI 5 4 11 NH-OZ-OF-BA-006-ZSO INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 4 12 NH-OZ-OF-BA-006-ZSC INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 4 13 INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 4 14 INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 4 15 INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 4 16 DESCRIPTION Ozone Contactor No.1 Inlet Gate Remote Status Ozone Contactor No.1 Inlet Gate Open Status Ozone Contactor No.1 Inlet Gate Closed Status Ozone Contactor No.1 Feed Valve Remote Status Ozone Contactor No.1 Feed Valve Open Status Ozone Contactor No.1 Feed Valve Closed Status Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 1 Valve Remote Status Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 1 Valve Open Status Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 1 Valve Closed Status Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 2 Valve Remote Status Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 2 Valve Open Status Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 2 Valve Closed Status Ozone Contactor No.2 Inlet Gate Remote Status Ozone Contactor No.2 Inlet Gate Open Status Ozone Contactor No.2 Inlet Gate Closed Status Ozone Contactor No.2 Feed Valve Remote Status Ozone Contactor No.2 Feed Valve Open Status Ozone Contactor No.2 Feed Valve Closed Status Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 1 Valve Remote Status Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 1 Valve Open Status Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 1 Valve Closed Status Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 2 Valve Remote Status Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 2 Valve Open Status Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 2 Valve Closed Status INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 5 1 NH-OZ-OF-BFV-00 1 -RM OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.1 Remote Status INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 5 2 NH-OZ-OF-BFV-001-ZSO OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.1 Open INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 5 3 NH-OZ-OF-BFV-001-ZSC OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.1 Closed June 09 17903-12 8205A10 pw://Cardb/Documents/ClienYWortWoRh18205A10/Specfttions/PnLSelecU17903 (Addendum No.1) ON— I1O PLC 110 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 5 4 NH-OZ-OF-TSH-001-AL OZ Destruct PreHeater No.1 Hi Temp Alarm NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 5 5 NH-OZ-OF-PH-001-RM OZ Destruct PreHeater No.1 Rem. Status NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 5 6 NH-OZ-OF-PH-001-RN OZ Destruct PreHeater No.1 ON Status NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 5 7 NH-OZ-OF-PSL-001 AL OZ Destruct Blower No.1 Feed Low Press Alarm NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 5 8 NH-OZ-OF-BLR-001-RM OZ Destruct Blower No.1 Remote Status NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 5 9 NH-OZ-OF-BLR-001-RN OZ Destruct Blower No.1 Run Status NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 5 10 NH-OZ-OF-BLR-001-AL OZ Destruct Blower No.1 Alarm NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 5 11 NH-OZ-OF-BFV-002-RM OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.2 Remote Status NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 5 12 NH-OZ-OF-BFV-002-ZSO OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.2 Open NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 5 13 NH-OZ-OF-BFV-002-ZSC OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.2 Closed NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 5 14 NH-OZ-OF-TSH-002-AL OZ Destruct PreHeater No.2 Hi Temp Alarm NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 5 15 NH-OZ-OF-PH-002-RM OZ Destruct PreHeater No.2 Rem. Status NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 5 16 NH-OZ-OF-PH-002-RN OZ Destruct PreHeater No.2 ON Status NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 6 1 NH-OZ-OF-PSL-002-AL OZ Destruct Blower No.2 Feed Low Press Alarm NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 6 2 NH-OZ-OF-BLR-002-RM OZ Destruct Blower No.2 Remote Status NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 6 3 NH-OZ-OF-BLR-002-RN OZ Destruct Blower No.2 Run Status NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 6 4 NH-OZ-OF-BLR-002-AL OZ Destruct Blower No.2 Alarm NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 6 5 NH-OZ-OF-BFV-003-RM OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.3 Remote Status NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 6 6 NH-OZ-OF-BFV-003-ZSO 07_ Destruct Inlet Valve No.3 Open NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 6 7 NH-OZ-OF-BFV-003-ZSC OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.3 Closed NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 6 8 NH-OZ-OF-TSH-003-AL OZ Destruct PreHeater No.3 Hi Temp Alarm NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 6 9 NH-OZ-OF-PH-003-RM OZ Destruct PreHeater No.3 Rem. Status NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 6 10 NH-OZ-OF-PH-003-RN OZ Destruct PreHeater No.3 ON Status NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 6 11 NH-OZ-OF-PSL-003-AL OZ Destruct Blower No.3 Feed Low Press Alarm NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 6 12 NH-OZ-OF-BLR-003-RM OZ Destruct Blower No.3 Remote Status NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 6 13 NH-OZ-OF-BLR-003-RN OZ Destruct Blower No.3 Run Status NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 6 14 NH-OZ-OF-BLR-003-AL OZ Destruct Blower No.3 Alarm NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 6 15 Spare NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 6 16 Spare NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 7 1 Spare NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 7 2 Spare NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 7 3 Spare NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 7 4 Spare NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 7 5 Spare June 09 17903-13 8205A10 pw iiCamlio Documents/ClienVWort Wodh/8205A101Spe ifications/Pre-5elecU17903 (Addendum No. 1) 1/0 PLC 1/0 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 7 6 Spare INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 7 7 Spare NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 7 8 Spare NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 7 9 Spare NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 7 10 Spare NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 7 11 Spare INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 7 12 Spare INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 7 13 Spare INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 7 14 Spare INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 7 15 Spare INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DI 5 7 16 Spare INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 8 1 NH-OZ-RW-GT-001-ZCO Ozone Contactor No.1 Inlet Gate Control Open INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 8 2 NH-OZ-RW-GT-001-ZCC Ozone Contactor No.1 Inlet Gate Control Closed INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 8 3 NH-OZ-OF-BFV-001-ZCO No. OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.1 Control Open INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 8 4 NH-OZ-OF-BFV-O01-ZCC No. OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.1 Control Closed INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 8 5 NH-OZ-OF-PH-001-ZCC No. OZ Destruct PreHeater No.1 On/Off Control INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 8 6 NH-OZ-OF-BLR-001-OOC No. OZ Destruct Blower No.1 On/Off Control INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 8 7 Spare INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 8 8 Spare INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 8 9 Spare INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 8 10 Spare INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 8 11 Spare jNH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 8 12 Spare INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 8 13 Spare INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 8 14 Spare INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 8 15 Spare INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 8 16 Spare INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 9 1 NH-OZ-RW-GT-002-ZCO Ozone Contactor No.2 Inlet Gate Control Open INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 9 2 NH-OZ-RW-GT-002-ZCC Ozone Contactor No.2 Inlet Gate Control Closed INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 9 3 NH-OZ-OF-BFV-002-ZCO No. OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.2 Control Open INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 9 4 NH-OZ-OF-BFV-002-ZCC No. OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.2 Control Closed INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 9 5 NH-OZ-OF-PH-002-ZCC No. OZ Destruct PreHeater No.2 On/Off Control INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 9 6 NH-OZ-OF-BLR-002-OOC No. OZ Destruct Blower No.2 On/Off Control INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 9 7 Spare June 09 17903-14 8205A10 pw:l/Carollo/Documents/ClienU?X/Fort Worth/8205A10/SpecificalionslPm-SelecU179M (Addendum No. 1) 110 PLC 1/0 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 9 8 Spare NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 9 9 Spare NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 9 10 Spare NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 9 11 Spare NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 9 12 Spare NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 9 13 NH-OZ-OF-BFV-003-ZCO No. OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.3 Control Open NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 9 14 NH-OZ-OF-BFV-003-ZCC No. OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.3 Control Closed NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 9 15 NH-OZ-OF-PH-003-ZCC No. OZ Destruct PreHeater No.3 On/Off Control NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 DO 5 9 16 NH-OZ-OF-BLR-003-OOC No. OZ Destruct Blower No.3 On/Off Control NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 10 1 NH-OZ-OF-BA-001-ZI Ozone Contactor No.1 Feed Valve Position INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 10 2 NH-OZ-OF-BA-002-ZI Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 1 Valve Position INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 10 3. NH-OZ-OF-BA-003-ZI Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 2 Valve Position INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 10 4 NH-OZ-OF-FM-001-FI Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 1 Flow Indication INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 AI 5 10 5 NH-OZ-OF-FM-002-FI Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 2 Flow Indication INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 10 6 NH-OZ-OZ-AIT-001-AI Ozone Contactor No.1 Monitor 1 OZ Residual INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 10 7 NH-OZ-OZ-AIT-002-AI Ozone Contactor No.1 Monitor 2 OZ Residual INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 10 8 NH-OZ-OZ-AIT-003-AI Ozone Contactor No.1 Monitor 3 OZ Residual INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 11 1 NH-OZ-OZ-AIT-004-AI Ozone Contactor No.1 Monitor 4 OZ Residual INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 11 2 NH-OZ-OF-PIT-001-PI No. OZ Destruct No.1 Inlet Press NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 11 3 NH-OZ-OF-TIT-001-TI No. OZ Destruct No.1 Inlet Temp NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 11 4 NH-OZ-OF-TIT-002-TI No. OZ Destruct No.1 Off -Gas Temp INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 11 5 NH-OZ-OF-AIT-001-AI No. OZ Destruct No.1 Off -Gas Ozone Concentration NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 11 6 NH-OZ-OF-BLR-001-SI No. OZ Destruct Blower No.1 Speed Indication NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 11 7 Spare NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 11 8 Spare NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 12 1 NH-OZ-OF-BA-004-ZI Ozone Contactor No.2 Feed Valve Position NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 12 2 NH-OZ-OF-BA-005-ZI Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 1 Valve Position NH-OZ-OZ-REM-OO4 INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 12 3 NH-OZ-OF-BA-006-ZI Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 2 Valve Position Al 5 12 4 NH-OZ-OF-FM-003-FI Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 1 Flow Indication NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 12 5 NH-OZ-OF-FM-004-FI Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 2 Flow Indication NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 12 6 NH-OZ-OZ-AIT-005-AI Ozone Contactor No.2 Monitor 1 OZ Residual NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 12 7 NH-OZ-OZ-AIT-006-AI Ozone Contactor No.2 Monitor 2 OZ Residual NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 12 8 NH-OZ-OZ-AIT-007-AI Ozone Contactor No.2 Monitor 3 OZ Residual NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 13 1 NH-OZ-OZ-AIT-008-AI Ozone Contactor No.2 Monitor 4 OZ Residual NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 13 2 NH-OZ-OF-PIT-002-PI No. OZ Destruct No.2 Inlet Press June 09 17903-15 8205A10 pw://Caroltw[bcuments/ClienVTX/Fort Worth!B205A1015pecificatbrui're-5okU17903 (Addendum No. 1) 1/0 PLC 1/0 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS SIGNAL TAG �NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 AI 5 13 3 NH-OZ-OF-TIT-003-TI NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 13 4 NH-OZ-OF-TIT-004-TI INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 13 5 NH-OZ-OF-AIT-002-AI NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 13 6 NH-OZ-OF-BLR-002-SI NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 13 7 Spare INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 13 8 Spare NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 14 1 NH-OZ-OF-PIT-003-PI NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 14 2 NH-OZ-OF-TIT-005-TI NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 14 3 NH-OZ-OF-TIT-006-TI NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 14 4 NH-OZ-OF-AIT-003-AI NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 14 5 NH-OZ-OF-BLR-003-SI NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 14 6 Spare NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 14 7 Spare NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 Al 5 14 8 Spare NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 AO 5 15 1 NH-OZ-OF-BLR-001-SC NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 AO 5 15 2 NH-OZ-OF-BA-001-ZC NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 AO 5 15 3 NH-OZ-OF-BA-002-ZC NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 AO 5 15 4 NH-OZ-OF-BA-003-ZC NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 AO 5 15 5 Spare NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 AO 5 15 6 Spare NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 AO 5 15 7 Spare NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 AO 5 15 8 Spare INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 AO 5 16 1 NH-OZ-OF-BLR-002-SC (NH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 AO 5 16 2 NH-OZ-OF-BA-004-ZC INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 AO 5 16 3 NH-OZ-OF-BA-005-ZC INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 AO 5 16 4 NH-OZ-OF-BA-006-ZC INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 AO 5 16 5 Spare INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 AO 5 16 6 Spare INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 AO 5 16 7 Spare INH-OZ-OZ-REM-004 AO 5 16 8 NH-OZ-OF-BLR-003-SC June 09 17903-16 pw://Camillo/Documents/ClienVMFort Wonh/8205A10/SpecikationslPre SelecU17903 (Addendum No.1) DESCRIPTION No. OZ Destruct No.2 Inlet Temp No. OZ Destruct No.2 Off -Gas Temp No. OZ Destruct No.2 Off -Gas Ozone Concentration No. OZ Destruct Blower No.2 Speed Indication No. OZ Destruct No.3 Inlet Press No. OZ Destruct No.3 Inlet Temp No. OZ Destruct No.3 Off -Gas Temp No. OZ Destruct No.3 Off -Gas Ozone Concentration No. OZ Destruct Blower No.3 Speed Indication No. OZ Destruct Blower No.1 Speed Control Ozone Contactor No.1 Feed Valve Control Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 1 Valve Control Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 2 Valve Control No. OZ Destruct Blower No.2 Speed Control Ozone Contactor No.2 Feed Valve Control Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 1 Valve Control Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 2 Valve Control No. OZ Destruct Blower No.3 Speed Control 8205A10 JPLC ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 1/0 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS SIGNAL TAG DI 5 3 1 SH-OZ-RW-GT-001-RM DI 5 3 2 SH-OZ-RW-GT-001-ZSO DI 5 3 3 SH-OZ-RW-GT-001-ZSC DI 5 3 4 SH-OZ-OF-BA-001-RM DI 5 3 5 SH-OZ-OF-BA-001-ZSO DI 5 3 6 SH-OZ-OF-BA-001-ZSC DI 5 3 7 SH-OZ-OF-BA-002-RM DI 5 3 8 SH-OZ-OF-BA-002-ZSO DI 5 3 9 SH-OZ-OF-BA-002-ZSC DI 5 3 10 SH-OZ-OF-BA-003-RM DI 5 3 11 SH-OZ-OF-BA-003-ZSO DI 5 3 12 SH-OZ-OF-BA-003-ZSC DI 5 3 13 DI 5 3 14 DI 5 3 15 DI 5 3 16 DI 5 4 1 SH-OZ-RW-GT-001-RM DI 5 4 2 SH-OZ-RW-GT-001-ZSO DI 5 4 3 SH-OZ-RW-GT-001-ZSC DI 5 4 4 SH-OZ-OF-BA-004-RM DI 5 4 5 SH-OZ-OF-BA-004-ZSO DI _5 4 6 SH-OZ-OF-BA-004-ZSC DI 5 4 7 SH-OZ-OF-BA-005-RM DI 5 4 8 SH-OZ-OF-BA-005-ZSO DI 5 4 9 SH-OZ-OF-BA-005-ZSC DI 5 4 10 SH-OZ-OF-BA-006-RM DI 5 4 11 SH-OZ-OF-BA-006-ZSO DI 5 4 12 SH-OZ-OF-BA-006-ZSC DI 5 4 13 DI 5 4 14 DI 5 4 15 DI 5 4 16 DESCRIPTION Ozone Contactor No.1 Inlet Gate Remote Status Ozone Contactor No.1 Inlet Gate Open Status Ozone Contactor No.1 Inlet Gate Closed Status Ozone Contactor No.1 Feed Valve Remote Status Ozone Contactor No.1 Feed Valve Open Status Ozone Contactor No.1 Feed Valve Closed Status Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 1 Valve Remote Status Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 1 Valve Open Status Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 1 Valve Closed Status Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 2 Valve Remote Status Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 2 Valve Open Status Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 2 Valve Closed Status Ozone Contactor No.2 Inlet Gate Remote Status Ozone Contactor No.2 Inlet Gate Open Status Ozone Contactor No.2 Inlet Gate Closed Status Ozone Contactor N6.2 Feed Valve Remote Status Ozone Contactor No.2 Feed Valve Open Status Ozone Contactor No.2 Feed Valve Closed Status Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 1 Valve Remote Status Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 1 Valve Open Status Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 1 Valve Closed Status Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 2 Valve Remote Status Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 2 Valve Open Status Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 2 Valve Closed Status DI 5 5 1 SH-OZ-OF-BFV-001-RM OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.1 Remote Status DI 5 5 2 SH-OZ-OF-BFV-001-ZSO OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.1 Open DI 5 5 3 SH-OZ-OF-BFV-001-ZSC OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.1 Closed June 09 17903-17 8205A10 pw://CarolblDocuments/ClienUTX/rort Worth18205AIOtSpeckations/Pre-SelecU17903 (Addendum No. 1) F 1/O PLC 1/0 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 5 4 SH-OZ-OF-TSH-001-AL OZ Destruct PreHeater No.1 Hi Temp Alarm SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 5 5 SH-OZ-OF-PH-001-RM OZ Destruct PreHeater No.1 Rem. Status SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 5 6 SH-OZ-OF-PH-001-RN OZ Destruct PreHeater No.1 ON Status SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 5 7 SH-OZ-OF-PSL-001-AL OZ Destruct Blower No.1 Feed Low Press Alarm SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 5 8 SH-OZ-OF-BLR-001-RM OZ Destruct Blower No.1 Remote Status SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 5 9 SH-OZ-OF-BLR-001-RN OZ Destruct Blower No.1 Run Status SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 5 10 SH-OZ-OF-BLR-001-AL OZ Destruct Blower No.1 Alarm SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 5 11 SH-OZ-OF-BFV-002-RM OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.2 Remote Status SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 5 12 SH-OZ-OF-BFV-002-ZSO OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.2 Open SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 5 13 SH-OZ-OF-BFV-002-ZSC OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.2 Closed ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 5 14 SH-OZ-OF-TSH-002-AL OZ Destruct PreHeater No.2 Hi Temp Alarm ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 5 15 SH-OZ-OF-PH-002-RM OZ Destruct PreHeater No.2 Rem. Status ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 5 16 SH-OZ-OF-PH-002-RN OZ Destruct PreHeater No.2 ON Status ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 6 1 SH-OZ-OF-PSL-002-AL OZ Destruct Blower No.2 Feed Low Press Alarm ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 6 2 SH-OZ-OF-BLR-002-RM OZ Destruct Blower No.2 Remote Status ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 6 3 SH-OZ-OF-BLR-002-RN OZ Destruct Blower No.2 Run Status ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 6 4 SH-OZ-OF-BLR-002-AL OZ Destruct Blower No.2 Alarm ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 6 5 SH-OZ-OF-BFV-003-RM OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.3 Remote Status ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 6 6 SH-OZ-OF-BFV-003-ZSO OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.3 Open ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 6 7 SH-OZ-OF-BFV-003-ZSC OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.3 Closed ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 6 8 SH-OZ-OF-TSH-003-AL OZ Destruct PreHeater No.3 Hi Temp Alarm JSH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 6 9 SH-OZ-OF-PH-003-RM OZ Destruct PreHeater No.3 Rem. Status ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 6 10 SH-OZ-OF-PH-003-RN OZ Destruct PreHeater No.3 ON Status ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 6 11 SH-OZ-OF-PSL-003-AL OZ Destruct Blower No.3 Feed Low Press Alarm SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 6 12 SH-OZ-OF-BLR-003-RM OZ Destruct Blower No.3 Remote Status SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 6 13 SH-OZ-OF-BLR-003-RN OZ Destruct Blower No.3 Run Status SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 6 14 SH-OZ-OF-BLR-003-AL OZ Destruct Blower No.3 Alarm SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 6 15 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 6 16 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 7 1 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 7 2 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 7 3 Spare �SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 7 4 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 7 5 Spare June 09 17903-18 8205A10 pw:rlCarolbftlocumenWClienVWort Wolh18205A10/SpeciAoatbm/Pre-SelecU11903 (Addendum No. 1) 1/O PLC 1/0 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 7 6 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 7 7 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 7 8 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 7 9 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 7 10 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 7 11 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 7 12 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 7 13 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 7 14 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 7 15 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DI 5 7 16 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 8 1 SH-OZ-RW-GT-001-ZCO Ozone Contactor No.1 Inlet Gate Control Open SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 8 2 SH-OZ-RW-GT-001-ZCC Ozone Contactor No.1 Inlet Gate Control Closed SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 8 3 SH-OZ-OF-BFV-001-ZCO So. OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.1 Control Open SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 8 4 SH-OZ-OF-BFV-001-ZCC So. OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.1 Control Closed SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 8 5 SH-OZ-OF-PH-001-ZCC So. OZ Destruct PreHeater No.1 On/Off Control SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 8 6 SH-OZ-OF-BLR-001-OOC So. OZ Destruct Blower No.1 On/Off Control SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 8 7 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 8 8 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 8 9 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 8 10 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 8 11 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 8 12 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 8 13 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 8 14 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 8 15 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 8 16 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 9 1 SH-OZ-RW-GT-002-ZCO Ozone Contactor No.2 Inlet Gate Control Open SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 9 2 SH-OZ-RW-GT-002-ZCC Ozone Contactor No.2 Inlet Gate Control Closed SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 9 3 SH-OZ-OF-BFV-002-ZCO So. OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.2 Control Open SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 9 4 SH-OZ-OF-BFV-002-ZCC So. OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.2 Control Closed SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 9 5 SH-OZ-OF-PH-002-ZCC So. OZ Destruct PreHeater No.2 On/Off Control SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 9 6 SH-OZ-OF-BLR-002-OOC So. OZ Destruct Blower No.2 On/Off Control SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 9 7 Spare June 09 17903-19 8205A10 pw://CarolloMocuments/ChenUTWortWorth/B205A10/SpecficatanslPmSelecUl7903 (Addendum No.1) 1/O PLC 1/0 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 9 8 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 9 9 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 9 10 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 9 11 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 9 12 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 9 13 SH-OZ-OF-BFV-003-ZC0 So. OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.3 Control Open SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 9 14 SH-OZ-OF-BFV-003-ZCC So. OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.3 Control Closed SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 9 15 SH-OZ-OF-PH-003-ZCC So. OZ Destruct PreHeater No.3 On/Off Control SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 DO 5 9 16 SH-OZ-OF-BLR-003-OOC So. OZ Destruct Blower No.3 On/Off Control SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 Al 5 10 1 SH-OZ-OF-BA-001-ZI Ozone Contactor No.1 Feed Valve Position SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 Al 5 10 2 SH-OZ-OF-BA-002-ZI Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 1 Valve Position SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 Al 5 10 3 SH-OZ-OF-BA-003-ZI Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 2 Valve Position SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 Al 5 10 4 SH-OZ-OF-FM-001-FI Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 1 Flow Indication SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 AI 5 10 5 SH-OZ-OF-FM-002-FI Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 2 Flow Indication SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 Al 5 10 6 SH-OZ-OZ-AIT-001-AI Ozone Contactor No.1 Monitor 1 OZ Residual SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 Al 5 10 7 SH-OZ-OZ-AIT-002-AI Ozone Contactor No.1 Monitor 2 OZ Residual SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 Al 5 10 8 SH-OZ-OZ-AIT-003-Al Ozone Contactor No.1 Monitor 3 OZ Residual SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 Al 5 11 1 SH-OZ-OZ-AIT-004-AI Ozone Contactor No.1 Monitor 4 OZ Residual SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 Al 5 11 2 SH-OZ-OF-PIT-001-PI So. OZ Destruct No.1 Inlet Press SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 Al 5 11 3 SH-OZ-OF-TIT-001-TI So. OZ Destruct No.1 Inlet Temp SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 Al 5 11 4 SH-OZ-OF-TIT-002-TI So. OZ Destruct No.1 Off -Gas Temp SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 Al 5 11 5 SH-OZ-OF-AIT-001-AI So. OZ Destruct No.1 Off -Gas Ozone Concentration SH-OZ-OZ-REM-OO5 Al 5 11 6 SH-OZ-OF-BLR-001-SI So. OZ Destruct Blower No.1 Speed Indication SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 Al 5 11 7 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 Al 5 11 8 Spare SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 Al 5 12 1 SH-OZ-OF-BA-004-ZI Ozone Contactor No.2 Feed Valve Position SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 Al 5 12 2 SH-OZ-OF-BA-005-ZI Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 1 Valve Position SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 Al 5 12 3 SH-OZ-OF-BA-006-ZI Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 2 Valve Position SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 Al 5 12 4 SH-OZ-OF-FM-003-FI Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 1 Flow Indication SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 Al 5 12 5 SH-OZ-OF-FM-004-FI Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 2 Flow Indication SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 Al 5 12 6 SH-OZ-OZ-AIT-005-Al Ozone Contactor No.2 Monitor 1 OZ Residual SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 Al 5 12 7 SH-OZ-OZ-AIT-006-AI Ozone Contactor No.2 Monitor 2 OZ Residual SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 Al 5 12 8 SH-OZ-OZ-AIT-007-AI Ozone Contactor No.2 Monitor 3 OZ Residual SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 Al 5 13 1 SH-OZ-OZ-AIT-008-AI Ozone Contactor No.2 Monitor 4 OZ Residual SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 Al 5 13 2 SH-OZ-OF-PIT-002-PI So. OZ Destruct No.2 Inlet Press June 09 17903-20 8205A10 pw:G'Carofb/Documents/GienVWoo Worth/8205A10/SpedficatanslPn?-SekU17903 (Addendum No.1) F F F PLC SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 SH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 IS H-OZ-OZ-REM-005 ISH-OZ-OZ-REM-005 -, all I/O 110 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION Al 5 13 3 SH-OZ-OF-TIT-003-Ti So. OZ Destruct No.2 Inlet Temp Al 5 13 4 SH-OZ-OF-TIT-004-Ti So. OZ Destruct No.2 Off -Gas Temp Al 5 13 5 SH-OZ-OF-AIT-002-AI So. OZ Destruct No.2 Off -Gas Ozone Concentration Al 5 13 6 SH-OZ-OF-BLR-002-SI So. OZ Destruct Blower No.2 Speed Indication Al 5 13 7 Spare Al 5 13 8 Spare Al 5 14 1 SH-OZ-OF-PIT-003-PI So. OZ Destruct No.3 Inlet Press Al 5 14 2 SH-OZ-OF-TIT-005-Ti So. OZ Destruct No.3 Inlet Temp Al 5 14 3 SH-OZ-OF-TIT-006-Ti So. OZ Destruct No.3 Off -Gas Temp Al 5 14 4 SH-OZ-OF-AIT-003-AI So. OZ Destruct No.3 Off -Gas Ozone Concentration Al 5 14 5 SH-OZ-OF-BLR-003-Si So. OZ Destruct Blower No.3 Speed Indication Al 5 14 6 Spare Al 5 14 7 Spare Al 5 14 8 Spare AO 5 15 1 SH-OZ-OF-BLR-001-SC So. OZ Destruct Blower No.1 Speed Control AO 5 15 2 SH-OZ-OF-BA-001-ZC Ozone Contactor No.1 Feed Valve Control AO 5 15 3 SH-OZ-OF-BA-002-ZC Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 1 Valve Control AO 5 15 4 SH-OZ-OF-BA-003-ZC Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 2 Valve Control AO 5 15 5 Spare AO 5 15 6 Spare AO 5 15 7 Spare AO 5 15 8 Spare AO 5 16 1 SH-OZ-OF-BLR-002-SC So. OZ Destruct Blower No.2 Speed Control AO 5 16 2 SH-OZ-OF-BA-004-ZC Ozone Contactor No.2 Feed Valve Control AO 5 16 3 SH-OZ-OF-BA-005-ZC Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 1 Valve Control AO 5 16 4 SH-OZ-OF-BA-006-ZC Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 2 Valve Control AO 5 16 5 Spare AO 5 16 6 Spare AO 5 16 7 Spare AO 5 16 8 SH-OZ-OF-BLR-003-SC So. OZ Destruct Blower No.3 Speed Control June 09 17903-21 pw:(ICardlo/Documents/ClienUMod WodhB20SA10/Specificafions/Pm-SelecU17903 (Addendum No. 1) 8205A10 CITY OF FORT WORTH NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WTP UPGRADE **..01 OZONE GENERATION EQUIPMENT -- PRE -SELECTION FTW09118 ADDENDUM NO. 2 June 22, 2009 The time for the submission of Bids has been changed to Thursday, July 2, 2009, 1:30 pm. The location for the submission of bid is unchanged. BID DATE: Thursday, July 2, 2009, 1:30 pm The following additions, deletions, modifications, or clarifications shall be made to the appropriate sections of the plans and specifications and shall become a part of the Contract Documents. Bidders shall acknowledge recelpt of this Addendum In the space provided on the Bid form. ADDENDA: A2-1 ADDENDUM NO. 1 A. Reference Page 00900-5, ITEM Al-16. Modification: Delete the I10 list provided with Addendum No. 1 and replace with the revised 1/0 list attached. rrri BIDDING REQUIREMENTS: A2-2 PART A — NOTICE TO BIDDERS A. Reference Page A-6, ARTICLE 12. Clarification: The Proposal Security need not be bound into the Contract Documents, but should be attached to the book of documents and included in the same sealed envelope with the Proposal. B. Reference Page A-8, ARTICLE 14. Modification: Replace Paragraph 14.7.C.1 with the following: "Provide dimensioned drawings illustrating the proposed layout for the ozone system, including dimensions for housing all ozone equipment and appurtenances, Including power supplies, generators, cooling water facilities, and nitrogen system. Lay out facilities to fit within the previously designed Ozone Generation Building, shown on the attached "BUILDING PLAN" figure. This building was designed for this purpose and the Owner desires to minimize changes to the building design. Provide plan and section views of the proposed ozone system. Drawings shall be to scale, with major dimensions identified. Provide critical clearance requirements for access and maintenance in addition to equipment outline dimensions, since Owner reserves the right to modify layouts in consultation with OSS." C. Reference Page A-8, ARTICLE 14. Addition: Insert the following Paragraph 14.7.C.4: "Provide dimensioned drawings illustrating the proposed layout for the ozone destruct units and associated appurtenances. The ozone destruct units will be located on top of the ozone contact structure for each plant, Addendum No. 2 00902.1 FTWO9118 and separate layout for the ozone destruct units should be provided based on the needs of the equipment." D. Reference Page A-8, ARTICLE 14. Addition: Insert the attached "BUILDING PLAN" figure. E. Reference Page A-9, ARTICLE 20. Modification: Revise the last sentence of paragraph 20.2.2 to read: "The OSS shall accept a Schedule for Delivery of Goods that requires the Goods to be fabricated and delivered to the Point of Destination in as few as 240 days, but no more than 365 days, after the 'Notice to Commence Fabrication' is issued." F. Reference Page A-10, ARTICLE 21. Addition: Add the following to the end of paragraph 21.2: "Payment of such damages shall constitute Owner's and Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for damages attributable to late delivery. No liquidated damages will be assessed against OSS unless OSS is late in performing according to the mutually agreed upon delivery schedule, OSS's delay impacts Contractor's overall project schedule, and Contractor is assessed liquidated damages under its prime contract with the Owner." A2-3 PART B — PROPOSAL A. Reference Page B-3, ARTICLE 6. Modification: Modify the first sentence of 6.1 B to read as follows: "OSS shall submit with the bid an explanation of the methodology used to calculate the proposed energy value Nftwe SECavg provided in Item C below." A2-4 PART D —SPECIAL CONDITIONS A. Reference Page D-1, ARTICLE D-4. Modification: Delete Items 2-5 of Paragraph B and replace with the following: "2.Upon delivery of Goods to the Point of Destination, progress payments will be made by the OWNER, through the General Contractor, in an amount equal to up to 75 percent of the Contract Price, less the aggregate of payments previously made. 3. Upon completion of the Acceptance Testing, including training of OWNER's personnel and Underwriter's Laboratory Labeling, progress payments will be made by the OWNER, through the General Contractor, in an amount equal to up to 85 percent of the Contract Price, less the aggregate of payments previously made. 4. Upon successful completion of the Performance Testing, progress payments will be made by the OWNER, through the Genera[ Contractor, in an amount equal to up to 95 percent of the Contract Price, less the aggregate of payments previously made. 5. Final Payment. Upon final delivery of all spare parts, record documentation, and completion of OSS final punchlist, the OWNER, through the General Contractor, will pay up to 100% of the Contract Price, less the aggregate of payments previously made. 6. Retainage. OWNER, through the General Contractor, will hold five percent (5%) retainage for work performed until Final Payment." B. Reference Page D-6, ARTICLE D-8. Modification: Revise the last sentence of paragraph B.2 to read: "The OSS shall accept a Schedule for Delivery of Goods that requires the Goods to be fabricated and delivered to the Addendum No. 2 00902-2 FTW09118 Point of Destination in as few as 240 days, but no more than 365 days, after the "Notice to Commence Fabrication" is issued." C. Reference Page D-6, ARTICLE D-8. Modification: In the first sentence of paragraph C.2, delete the words "in Article 20". D. Reference Page D-6, ARTICLE D-8. Addition: Add the following to the end of paragraph C.2: "Payment of such damages shall constitute Owner's and Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for damages attributable to late delivery. No liquidated damages will be assessed against OSS unless OSS is late in performing according to the mutually agreed upon delivery schedule, OSS's delay impacts Contractor's overall project schedule, and Contractor is assessed liquidated damages under its prime contract with the Owner." E. Reference Page D-8, ARTICLE D-17. Modification: Replace the last sentence of this article with the following: The label may be obtained either through factory or field testing, and shall be provided prior to Acceptance Testing. A2-5 PART G —SPECIAL ENGINEERING SERVICES AGREEMENT A. Reference Page G-2, ARTICLE 5. Modification: In Paragraph 5.2 a.1., change the mechanical submittal time limit from "60 calendar days" to "90 calendar days". TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: A2-6 SECTION 01005 — DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY A. Reference Page 01005-1, Paragraph 1.01.13— Modification Modification: Change the words "deliver and unload" to "and deliver". A2-7 SECTION 01010 — SUMMARY OF WORK A. Reference Page 01010-1, Paragraph 1.01.13 —Addition Addition: Insert the following at the end of this paragraph: "Provide separate shop drawing submittals for mechanical equipment and Instrumentation/controls. Design assistance shall include one trip by the lead mechanical designer for the project and one trip by the lead instrumentation/controls designer for the project to the project site. Design assistance trips shall allow for up to 12 hours of consultation, exclusive of travel, within two consecutive days. OSS shall make key members of the project design team available by telephone and electronic mail as necessary during the design phase to allow appropriate design coordination between supplied equipment and the remainder of the project." B. Reference Page 01010-1, Paragraph 1.03.A —Addition Addition: Insert the following at the end of this paragraph: "4. Ozone diffusers." Addendum No. 2 00902.3 FTW09118 A2-8 SECTION 11264A—OZONE SYSTEM A. Reference Page 11264A-6, Paragraph 2.02.6.3 — Replacement Replacement: Delete the words: "Desiccant Dryer" and replace them with "two desiccant dryers each." A2-9 SECTION 11264A— OZONE.SYSTEM A. Reference Page 11264A-9, Paragraph 3.05.13.2 —Addition Addition: Add the following to the end of this paragraph: "Installation oversight services shall include a minimum of three (3) trips to the project site, with sixteen (16) hours of on -site time, exclusive of travel, per trip." A2-10 SECTION 11264C -OZONE GENERATORS AND POWER SUPPLIES A. Reference Page 3, Paragraph 1.05.0 Addition: Add the words "Submit anchorage calculations for sizing of anchor bolts for the ozone generators, power supplies and optional cooling water skids. Calculations shall be sealed by a professional engineer." B. Reference Page 6, Paragraph 2.02.E Deletion: Delete the words "shall not be longer than 50 percent of the cylinder length and". C. Reference Page 6, Sub -sub -paragraph 2.02.D.2.a Modification: Modify the sub -sub -paragraph by deleting the words "300 gallons per minute" and adding the words "Sized by the Ozone System Supplier for scenario of thermal relief in from exposure to fire. Minimum size shall be 20 gallons per minute." D. Reference Page 7, Paragraph 2.02.F Addition: Add the following words to a new sub -paragraph 5: "Ali anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be furnished for the ozone generators, power supplies and optional cooling water skids. Anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be 316 stainless steel." A2-11 SECTION 11264D - OZONE DIFFUSION SYSTEM A. Reference Page 1, Paragraph 1.03.D Deletion: Delete the words "as shown on the Drawings." B. Reference Page 1, Paragraph 1.04.A Deletion: Delete the words "as indicated on the Drawings." Addition: Add the words "Provide 1200 ozone diffuser assemblies." C. Reference Page 1, Paragraph 1.05.A Deletion: Delete the words "as indicated on the Drawings." D. Reference Page 2, Paragraph 1.08.A Deletion: Delete the Sub -paragraph 1 "Complete standard ozone diffuser assemblies including gaskets: 20." E. Reference Page 4, Paragraph 2.02.A Deletion: Delete the following words from the paragraph: "connection hardware, orifice plates and diffuser grid piping". A2-12 SECTION 11264E - OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM A. Reference Page 2, Paragraph 1.03.E Addendum No. 2 00902-4 FTW09118 Addition: Add a new Sub -paragraph 11: "Design Inlet Ozone Destruct System Gas Pressure: 10 inches water column -vacuum." **no, B. Reference Page 3, Article 1.03 Addition: Add a new Paragraph N: "Submit anchorage calculations for sizing of anchor bolts. Calculations shall be sealed by a professional engineer." C. Reference Page 3, Paragraph 2.01.A Addition: Add a new Sub -paragraph 6: "All signals from each destruct unit shall be collected on a terminal strip in the local control panel. These signals will be wired to the Contactor Remote 1/0 Panels by others." A2-13 SECTION 15112 - BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Reference Page 8, Article 2.05. Deletion: Delete Paragraphs B, C, D, E, F and G A2-14 SECTION 15117 -SPECIALTY VALVES A. Reference Page 3, Paragraph 2.05.E Modification: In the table under Volumetric Flow, Maximum, delete "300" and add "450". Modification: In the table under Volumetric Flow, Minimum, delete "20" and add "30". A2-15 SECTION 16050 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK A. Reference Page 8, Sub -paragraph 1.08.A.4 Addition: Add the following new Sub -sub -paragraph c: "Refer to Section 15050 for site project conditions." B. Reference Page 9, Sub -paragraph 1.08.13.3 Addition: Add the following word after "316 Stainless Steel": "aluminum". C. Reference Page 9, Paragraph 1.08.0 Edit the Conduit and Support Materials Table as follows: - For Outdoor Area Exposed Conduit Type, delete "PVC -Coated Rigid Steel" and insert "Aluminum". - For Outdoor Area Support, insert "SS Unistrut, Clamps, Hardware, and All -thread". - For Indoor Area Exposed Conduit Type, delete "Rigid Steel' and insert "Aluminum". - For Indoor Area Support, insert "SS Unistrut, Clamps, Hardware, and All -thread". - Add a third line to the Table with the following information: "Area: Indoor; NEMA Type: 4X; Exposed Condult Type: Aluminum; Environment: W,D; Support: SS Unistrut, Clamps, Hardware, and All -thread". - Add a fourth line to the Table with the following information: "Area: Corrosive; NEMA Type: 4X; Exposed Conduit Type: Plastibond-coated Aluminum; Environment: X; Support: Plastibond-coated Unistrut and Clamps; SS Hardware and All -thread". D. Reference Page 10, Paragraph 1.10.A Addition: Add the following words after "General Conditions": "and Section 01740". A2-16 SECTION 16123 - 660 VOLT OR LESS WIRES AND CABLES A. Reference Page 5, Sub -paragraph 3.01.G.1 Modification: Delete the word "ring" and add the words "forked spade". A2-17 SECTION 16130 - CONDUITS A. Replacement: Replace specification section 16130 with the attached section 16130. Addendum No. 2 00902-5 FTWO9118 L A2-18 SECTION 16222 - LOW VOLTAGE MOTORS UP TO 500 HORSEPOWER A. Reference Page 3, Paragraph 1.08.A Modification: Delete the number "16050" and add the number "15050". B. Reference Page 4, Sub -sub -paragraph 2.02.A.11.a Modification: Delete the words "or stamped steel' and add the words "- oversize if located outdoors". A2-19 SECTION 16261 -VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 0.50 -10 HORSEPOWER A. Reference Page 4, Paragraph 1.08.A Modification: Delete the number 016050" and add the number "15050". B. Reference Page 7, Paragraph 2.03.A Addition: Add the following Sub -paragraphs: "3. Provide units for climate -controlled interior locations in NEMA 1 enclosures. 4. Provide units for outdoor locations in NEMA 1 enclosures, panel -mounted inside NEMA 4X enclosures with cooling per sub -paragraph 2.03.A.2, above." A2-20 SECTION 16412 - LOW VOLTAGE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Reference Page 3, Article 3.02 Deletion: Delete this article completely. DRAWINGS: A2-21 Repiacement-Replace the following drawings with the attached ones: 7-N-105 7-N-106 7-N-107 7-N-108 7-N-109 7-N-110 A2-22 SHEET 7-E-103 F A. Modify the voltage in the title of Schematic A from "480" to "120". B. Move the first three devices in the table of Schematic B into the bottom of the table for Schematic A. A2-23 SHEET 7-N-102: A. Add Note 6 "All Remote 1/0 Chassis (Backplanes) must provide a minimum of 10 module mounting slots" B. Modify the North Ozone Contactor MCC Building Remote 1/0 Tags to read "NH-REM-G-06" and "NH-REM-G-07." Modify the South Ozone Contactor MCC Building Remote 1/0 Tags to read "SH-REM-G-08" and "SH-REM-G-09." A2-24 SHEET:7-N-103: A. Add Note 6: "Relative to Material Item 6 - UPS and batteries may be 19-inch Rack Mounted. Bypass Switch may be mounted in the same 19-inch Rack." Addendum No. 2 00902-6 FTWO9118 A2-25 SHEET 7-N-104: A. Add Remote 110 tag number NH-REM-G-05 in the PLC layer and delete the existing tag "� number. B. Add the following Note: "All Screened back SCADA points at the top of the drawing will be programmed by others." A2-26 SHEETS: 7-N-111, 7-N-112, 7-N-113 A. Add Remote 1/0 tag number NH-REM-G-06/07 in the PLC layer and delete the existing tag number. B. Add the following Note: "Ali Screened back SCADA points at the top of the drawing will be programmed by others." A2-27 SHEETS 7-N-114, 7-N-115, 7-N-116 A. Add Remote 1/0 tag number SH-REM-G-08/09 in the PLC layer and delete the existing tag number. B. Add the following Note: "All Screened back SCADA points at the top of the drawing will be programmed by others." END OF ADDENDUM NO. 2 w OF W1 d.�P E+..... rF�-ale *e++a e+sa+••su+ee++• sees DAVID W. SLOAN e 63946 J- %0'Xir �?6 Addendum No. 2 FTW09118 00902-7 t I _..w».u:wrcurea.uru..r,.:":c:c,u��.ea;a,r..:c.uu�S..•.___.�._......,_..___ ....,._...._._- ..._..- _,._. rn v, E� II Il II II II II II 5a'.s" ---------- _ .._,._.. _--..___ _ C ` �]...,. _,. _.. _ , _ _.. ., ... __................. .._ a-0" I i s7.-a• i I i yr a z Q� iT s n cz' O bmp O 0i p O 0 rnD mno5x G pm mC �e b O m Z •o qq � Engineers... Working Wonders With Water - NO. IRNl510N BY DATE �F' JaD62oSA.iqMLE 4 m CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS �( I Fujt-FIG-2•0WG NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE PRELIMINARY IRATE MAY 2o09 111 N O T F O R IDESIGNE➢ J3G OZONE GENERATION FACILITIES V4 t;xks+a :wuGl !°!tlitGw:�wl�'S' N I DRAWN MAj - +N4 Intwnoyonol Ploka, Sutto 200 VERIFY SCALE BUILDING PLAN FOR Worm Tataa 761p9-4H9a CONSTRUCTION q Bar b one inch on original drawing. if IRLMSEO 3. 100 not one inch on this shoot, adjust scolo.. IGMEDxED a=-- (a?7) 735-7�01 LAST SAVED BY. ]I= v/ A LASTUPOATBa; 0002 Dp DtdOF'M O O M(46 �;j RW- m�o 5ag �Q� EAO t $ZR Rro� y, FIELD EQUIPMENT 00 I p �{1!'' II}.. INH-OZ-fiW(-BA-001-ZSC{ f_ •. - -- ! - INN-D�-GmC^BA 401-Wi { f i (�Tj g - z Z i j 1 NN 0l-COk-$A-f%11-1C, I w __--.�-r----- -_ i g ,INH-OZ-GOx-PI-3011a a i Q t�i INH-OZ�G0X-FL(--0071 I I--_---1Wi-OZ»GOX-FM-=-SI® 1 1 wwz-cbx-F-oozl w+-p�-GDx-Fu oQz FlI J 1 1 sNH-U[-4Ux-Pft-DOTE ---L '0z-RT-007-P1f® NH I-OZ-00-K- -Oln -_- i INN-oz-Goz-ltt-Gott 1 1 ! NH-oz-caDu-m.-om-n I ' I INH-Dz-GGws-nT-orn{ � t --__. _____--_'__---- � i •••-••-• INtf-OZ-tlL75-�)f'V-DD7�lS� f- - - _....- ---_.--.----_.�-.�.-'--- tNli--OZ-OCMS.-BFY-tl01-lSYT- c nu 1 l taut-OZ =0C1r1rAFV-�001-7�.� V ------------------ -------------- 1 00 ttj 'NN-Ol-OCR'.r-F1t-ODE{ i 7 1 1 I , 1 �OUISlO£ f Is ----IAza Ot I L- 1 NH--4 N--Wf• a 1 1 I y .-,L�... V o f _ M�•^pCMi_TIT-OOf^Tr� 1 ' 1 P 1 - 1NH-OZ-OC91S-4Y-fit r- - I 1 rp Epopp t/'�r j,NFF-OZ-OZ-CF.N-Qn-.l�� 'NN-OZ-OCWRI" i - 'o� �� INFI-OZ-OZ-�l5H-0Gt-Atih l- —cyJ—" Z T,:8 J 1 ». __-...� f 6 i �3 s.a.a X 1 ! 1 � NH-OZ--OCNfi TTF002-^7"� SI1n y ;z O '� �.y 1 I um-ot..ax-Ps7wm-AL, x , K'� �m7i � ; lNti-Oz-Oz-P51i-�W11-._.....__-i.i-_:_._--_-..-,^•-_..� x 4 1 o y 1 INH-OZ-OZ-PSL-001I-_-...•-..,..�..I L '�PSL-OOI'I�J. *. ,I plgf- q sm � A_lNn�oz-az-�v-orn�zsa� � � ;-------_...,..� �' m ni- ` 'Y INH^OZ-i1Z-BI'W001^'LS�I T Z C' N W�o ggli O � A n r z 2��q��,r� n O�ff4 ^I m m fly �o m> zq. , mq,• I N 0 1 I tL1 NH-02-OZ_3-0011 ` /'' INH-OZ-OZ-TSH-ODE) _-._ I i I',"Oz�-TsH- '-µ'me — { Spl-----_------- `✓ li > I N)i-OZ-OZ lAIT-W I --_— 1 1 G) GY 1 f�Q NO. RLw90N 1 BY tsETC FDIN JOR 6205410 o m V ; 7-N-105.aWG 1 aATI MAY 20M 061CNm RDI o� Sj gar is one Ina on o/syyinal drarinq. H ltivl�>2 01 �, ,�I not one Inch t111 Inchon a ahaat, odj: scale. 1 CHECKED NOW, !1- - CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEKAS NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE OZONE GENERATION FACIUBES OZONE GENERATOR No-1 Q&,lD SCADA P N OZONE SY'TEM EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN INITIATION OZONE GENERATOR NOA Z�A COX INLET VALVE OPEN STATUS OZONE GENERATOR NOA --- y GOX INLET VALVE CLOSED STATUS _--! OZONE GENERATOR NO.1 COX INLET VALVE POSITION INDICATION ^\, OZONE GENERATOR NO.1 GOX INLET VALVE CONTROL MODE STATUS OZONE GENERATOR N0.1 �c1 COX INLET VALVE POSITION CONTROL -� OZONE GENERATOR 1,10GASEOUS OXYGEN t4lCH FLANGE FLOW OW OZONE GENERATOR NO.1 - GASEOUS OXYGEN LOW FLOW ALARM OZONE GENERATOR NO.1 GASF,OUS. -- OXYGEN LOW RANGE FLOW OZONE GENERATOR NO.1 GASEOUS OXYGEN LOW RANGE FLOW ALARM OZONE C^_ IRATCR NO.1 II��L{T��OOOn GOX PRESSURE INVC.ATION OZONE GENERATOR NO -- TFUPF�,antaF 1NE�,noN OZONE GENERATOR No.t COOLING _ WATER INLET TEMPERATURE 114OC&T10N OZONE CENERATOR NO 1 COOLING I _ WATER INLET VALVE OPEV STATUS OZONE GENERATOR. NO.1 COOUNG I _-► WATER INLET VALVE CLOSED STATUS j OZONE GENERATOR NO T ^OOt1NC _ s WATER INLET VA -'VS 4OSITON NOCATIO.N OZONE GENERATOR N0 1 COOLING _ WATER INLE CONTROL MODE STATUS OZONE GENERATOR 40.1 COOLrlC - ` WATER INLET VALYC 00STON CONTROL OZONE GENERATOR N0.1 LOW -LOW COOLING WATER FLOW ALAR1A „ OZ04E GENERATOR N0.1 -- - CXLINO WATER %LCr,4 1 OZONE GENERATOR NO.1 ALKIZ4 y LOW COOLING WATER FLOW 1 i OZONE GENERATOR NO'I I " 1' Ir q V.C! SHUT-DOWN STATUS I 1 GENERATOa UOZONE AUTO/IAA.NUAL SELECTOR OZONE CENERAYOP NC-1 { SYSTE)i ONJCFF CONFRGL T� OZONE GENERATOR NG.1 w SHUTDOWN TIME L,qx-.'ON SE'A"7,KT OZONE CENERATOR NO 1 v5 OXYGEN PU4GE ttvE G,RA'tOK SE"iPO�'lT = OZONE GENERATOR Na.1 - - a POWER SET MN' . _j]WATER OUTt.ET !'EGA- TEK.x..RA'URE' ALARM OZONE GENERATOR N0.1 COOLNG WATER FM PN TENPCRA.Tlit = OZONE. GENERATOR WC.1 Wr-K__'R SUPPLY H COOLING WATER tKt-- VALVE CONTRD. - PT� OAR GENERATOR KO. % OZONE GENERATCP. NO.-, 1 _ - POWER SUPPLY rPG•1 , rldP ALARV . OZONE GENERATOR NO.! _- 'j POWER SUPPLY ON!OFF STATUS POWER S:PPLY NO 1 COOLIK'i. *ATER O'er+LEI TEVO NyiCAT4N OZONE G-NERArp v0 1 POWER SVaPLY '=AT..uA.E ALA�7J OZONE GENERATOR NO.1 --- PROOAYCT CAS HCH PRESSURE ALAFW -m OZONE GENERATOR W T PRODUCT GAS LOW PR-,-TJRE ALARM .,..- �a OZONE' GE>`E3IATOP NC.1 OZONE cLC7W KTROL VA"r oov; sfATUS N OZONE C_NEP..A'OR NO.1 OZONE *_010 _ OONTTaOL VAvvE CLOSE Srwr+OS OZONE GENERATOR NO.1 OZONE F' CJW CONTROL VALVE POS OON rioc&r+O% 'OZONE GEEtZEW.O'R VC.t OZONE F-OW CONTROL VA',-- PCsmN CONTROL OZONE GETCRATOR N0.1 OZONE FLOW CC#MOI VALV' C041 ROL MODE _-J 1':R OZONIE GEN` A OR N0.1 aRoovc, GAS -G, TDF' KAR. --77i OZONE G:. _RATOR NO 1 PRODUCT CONCE'NTRATIOV S OZONE Cr.NERATOR NO.1 MtCµ i PROOITCT GAS CGNCENTRATATION ALARN I> OZONE GENERATOR NO 1 IL LOW PROD C. GAS CONCENTRATION ALARY T WE No. F.S82. I r*`:' �6VY � TNC 9Gk. ApPGWNb - ~'� .., .*'• eel T11K OaPKNf �ROT:AELD D.. 3005'3'i 1a� At111oleYla 1tt r 81I57 uRY0"20 Frome and MOWS �096 kWluaBad pWm Uft 200 pt =T�YI � f LASTSAVEOBY:IIazo LA5FUPDATEO: 08=409 0192PM E%PAtvSwN 1 nn-oc- - -W'1 1 FIELD FOUIPMENT TANK ,S.�A,RA {� E%PAN5ION A 1 TANKm s —��--- 1 nn=ucyx�mc_Iw_Uln 1 1 fk 1 y OZ GEN. NO.1 COOLING LOOP NO.1 RETURN HIGH TEMP. ALARM - J 't77/�•��+�j,. --------_--- ��..JA.// ,} --- •n GZ GEN. NO.1 COOLOJG LOOP N0.1 '�'�-�)L 1 - RETURN FLOW { I INN Ol.-UCNt7-IS1hU0jJ ffyl,-/lt-fj'rM-I y�y I ��p pp��11 -t r1• ] fQ1^•.•-•••: __-____._...».«.-___-__-___--0 ( j�:T -__l I�1 -,_�T '�' OZGEN. tC41 COOLING LOOP 40.2 1 �•/`�' jeES( 1 `"�,� _ � rtE7U RN HIGH TEMP, ALARM It z 1 i 1 n. n�l�[•-LY' !t-rM 0�z i --- t nrruc- -- v-utrr-rl 1 j�7� }—___.,...___«........._--- __--__.,..........— --_'� I - "r'® -- ORMRNN FLOW COOLMC LOOP v0.2 C] I dJ1I OZ .................._......_._......___........�..� ( b;.j I ...-�..( 1L] '_-`� RET1GENN LO'N 1PCOO ALARM P NO.1 1 1 v --OL-OcwR_ ,.««_--..t3._._.,............,........_........_,__"1_LL.1]!--9__1i-_y-_lf-_Oy_1_ 02 GEN rLOOP NO2 RETURN LOW ?RESS. ALARM 1 � 1 ' I n 1 f�0y/ Ih�' =WA am=t it=wL m yam( , (/jQ p''�'] _..........._.�_....-».._-____' .�,,.[ p�T -,...� �i CZ GEN. N0.1p LL050 LOOP 3 31t �i- O.LQ �f COJ'JNO p%;V NO., RtN STANS z� 1 y 1 1 , 1 Z 1� O I IC � � t ---- ..._......_..---,....,........._.......�.���......-._�-=d1 JN SU7L5 j 1g) x --_ " ( f,Si J --..-f LST OZ GEN. N0.: KO,2D LOOT' a___— 4 .\L•c t �.J'..tj wr�>:c P�.NF No.z R� l0- w I I� 111M-UL-iX.11N_IhH-W,_K{ yp[ tt q� p7�, OZ �3C i GE- i C*OLNGLONO.1 ��GOP I j a tiLi-,1/ u•MM-IMr/I ihtMilt-ufM-Y�t1-U1t1-N3 yp[ ^— r-R� to - _______________________________ fJ\`FG~FS I /�6 1 OT GhT7. N0.1 t7p hA LOOP YJ-2 titR'u 1 I I C_ 1I 1 Nh oz-OGNS-PI-00'L I 1 , �j{ I z t � KQoI m j lQo � I J -iceN ; -ice I 1 ' 1 1 7 , 1 NN-GL-•cxwrt-r M-Ws , Di GEN. N0.1 -Uc X0.1 NH_0Z-aCYhi-PI^0021 [M,tiK`S&wK-wawa,-n.t t 1 0z --N. NO.% KEY N0.1 _-__--..,.-___.--_SCµ+�RQE DLOW FLOW ALA?1W t 1 b I -- OZ k0.1 G LOOP /0-1 --------- SUPPLY HCI PRESS. nLnRu .........___._.___......_—... C. EFLOW JHEX 1i02 *CK4 r roi•-wtr'1v,ttr-W'e-r� �OZ GEN NR1 HEX NO.2 DSCK&RGE LOW FLOW ALAMA 1 - 1 , I - t OZ Cef. N0.1 COOLf/, LOOP NO.2 I —t�--------------------_—__. ___ ._ SUPPLY H;CS+ PRESS. A(.AR1Y NH Y�a1,N-I��JI FLOW HCH - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ( x 92 I t 0 1 t , � a� 0 I �—�� Wbdift lfrof W U.1 No. REVISION In, RATE IF&H JOB NO. A I 8205A1 D crrY OF FORT WORTH. TEXAS `I 7-N-106.DWG NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMINi PWVT UPGRADE „� :,r ,I� �L P•�W IaA7 MAY 2009 - �._........._..•,.......» W�sHOW 0O P*O ifNf Z FRgWeD D. 100ST ,p,,,,a o. � IMIGM RDJ/TS OZONE GENERATION FACUTIES uo9 —� ' `BR""" mm OZONE GENERATOR NO-1la200 o PFY SC"LE1 Bars on* inch an onpinal drawing. H IRmEu COOLING WATER MID I-b,- _car» � not ono Inch an thla chest. adjust scale. I a,�Nty - 1'Ga - (m» 733" r LAST SAVEo SY: pm v 8- LASTUPOATED: DWIMMMI 12:36PM• §1 O A rpqemAt 'OQ A I ."9 FIELD EQ IPMENr x � 1 0 z m N � rn 1 67 8 I Z i x m N yo {t; � � lNH-OZ-GOx-PP-0021" t� INH-0Z-OCCNS-PI-OOTI ' �,../ 1-�----- tNH-.oz-saX-aA-aoz-Ru� I 1 1 t i - _ INH--0Z-IXIX-F1M00}-FT I C�f 1 t t � NH-OZ-G9X-HT�� ; � INH-OQ-GOX-flT-002-A)@ INH-OZ-OCWS-11T-002I l I Mi-OZ-041-TIT-OOS-n [ 1 1 .______-_-_- --- INH-OZ-OC11S-8('V-001•-Z90 I INFhpZ-OLiYS-BFY.-0p2-ZC I 1 �rna`t• 1 1 OUTSIDE 1 1 OCE t ON pT INH-OZ"G.ET1_002-�1�k t - rz ' 1 !NH-OZ-OCWR•-TIT-M t ' r O v j!H-OZ-OCAR-TR'-WS-1] .. -..r,..-.... � 11 - �� INN-OZ-O(.YIS-SY-0021} r- 0 DOOOO 'QN C51 V1 paTT Qp Cyr n x y Gf�•C p1.t o Z x �N I�1 a o L[, 2" YY �m m 1! t r � Qm AA ((�� y> spomry �o 9� m A s N t -------�j u� �-- tNN..oz-ac-GEN-oo�-.t� 1y� �-'+ I INH-OL-OZ-i9•I-•006^AL� I ••--•••••_• fit#-01-0t.1tlR-nT-UDS-l�. ' t - t i NH-OZ-OZ-P9i-Oq ---_-_----.._...--........------'---t> INN-OZ-0Z-�PSLL-o02' - I � INH-OZ_ O.Z-PSL-002-ALJ-0 jtT 1 0 I 0 OZONE SYSTEM EMERGENCY TT SHUTDOWN INITIATION 'I OZONE GENERATOR NOA COX IN VALVE OPcN STATUS OZONE GENERATOR NOA 1 _ GOX INLET VALVE CLOSED STATUS -«.,. CI _ __,.. pl OZONE GENERATOR NO.1 1 GOX INLET VALVE POSITION INDICATION OZONE GENERATOR NO.1 COX INLET VALVE CONTROL MODE STATUS OZONE GENERATOR NO.1 COX INLET VALVE POSITION CONTROL I 1� i p, _� � iSiT S2^' _ItiI-OZ-OZ^BFY-OO2-Z501 ._T,y.--____-----� 4 7" 1 IV c¢ x 1� rn c i NIb02-OZ-8FY-002-?SCI I - t _LNH-0Z-OZ-BFV-WZ-Zi I 1 ` \ INN-03T-OZ-dFY-002-N4,�...1 _..-_-...,..... - W IC7/1 t yy"yyINH-0Z-02-9Pi-002-•ZG ' --. y yV yyt7 yOZS 67 1 _I 1 -_...___- ......D rpagc-CiSR PP2S520 am�a M � I [ 1 pa� ��� g� r 1 I NH_DZ-07 11-0021 ' It 4 g,o� -wt-Dz-oz_Ts+-ooz-a1 g g rn O m t INH-OZ-OZ-NT-=0 1 1 i.QgZ-AIT �� i M--------------------- - z a L.I�S �- t�.1 O 1 y` 1 route E �.. --r ..--------,..«___� 5 nNv p ul No. RLVISIoN BY om (FO:N JOB No. m - 1 8205AA10 CITY OF FONT WORTH. TEXAS FILE -N-107.DWG ' NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE ' w r MAY 2009 Z IOac=RW/TS OZONE GENERATION FACILITIES JWWN Im OZONE GENERATOR No.2 C OVERIPY SCALE Bar Ts ono inch on orig;nol drowina. IfRo'S rr V not ono inch on this shoot. adjust scale. Q1 0 P&1D OZONE GENERATOR N0.1 GASEOUS OXYGEN HIGH RANGE FLOW >, OZONE GENERATOR NO.1 r GNSECUS OXYGEN LOW FLOW ALARM p 07ONE GENERATOR N0.1 C,A4E041S 12 OXYGEN �W RANGE Ftow OZONE GENERATOR NO.1 GASEOUS OXYGEN LOW RANCE FLOW ALARM OZONE GENERATOR N0.1 �.Ilt COX PRESSURE :NDICATION OZONE GENERATOR NO.) TEMPEFWT ,RE INDICATION DZONE GE`+EAATOR h0.t CCOUHG I WATER NLET TEMPEP.ATURE N1Cl^A--KN - OZONE GENERATOR 10.1 COOUNC WATER INL£, VALVE OPEN STATUS OZONE GENERATOR NOA GCOUNG WATER WLET VALVE CLOSED STATUS OZONE CENERATOR NO.1 COOUNC _ WATER 'WLET VALVE PMTuN RIDY.ATSp�( __ � OZO!T GENERATOR NO.t f"^OUNG -ER WA NLET VALVE CONTROL MOD£ STARtS OZONE CENEPATCR NO.1 COOuy^, WATER INLr-T vAI,Y P4S1GN gN'RCL OZONE CENERATOR NO.1 LOW -LOW COOUNC WATER FLOW &VRV __. OZONE GENERATOR NO.T COOLING VIATEP. RAW �. OZONE C'+ERATA4 N0.1 LOW COOLING WATER FLOW ALARM OZONE CE'4ERATOR NO.1 SKTF-DOWN STATUS T OZONE GENERATOR N0.1 co A;ro/MANUAL SELECTOR -� --- OZONE GENERATOR N9.' y SYSMV ON/OFF CONT?tY OZONE CvNERATOP. NC.T Wu TOOwN TIME 9URA-)ON SETPO1Nr J OZONE GE`771A"O NC.' OXYGEN PURGE Tr< M$WT704 SETPOIN. OZONE GENERATOR NO.' POWER SET mt r _-�OZONE GE'YFPATCR NO.1 CCATUR 7lATER OUTLET HX>I T;kP£RA71)RE ALA" w OZONE CENERATOR NC t COOLtNC WATER Rc-%,Rh TEMPERATURE _7172 OZONE G+\`.FA:-CR n0.1 POWER SUPPLY COQ_ING WATER INLET VANE CONTROL --�OZONE GENERATOR NO.' POWER OZONE GENERATOR NO.' POWER SUPPLY t1vH TEMP RAW OZONE OE`[ERATOR NO.'. _-" POWER SUPPLY 04/C'T STAT,-.s POWER SUPPLY NO2-.=JNtG WATER --- OUTLET TEMP. rNOMATIp*t _ OZONE GENERATOR N'O.- P'JWER SU; P-Ly FN,:.1n'E ALARM OZONE GENERATOP. NC.' PPOOV,-GAS Ht;H PRESSURE ALARu OZ04E GENERATOR, NC-. PMOUCT GAS LOW PpzSSURE A:A$w OZONE CENERATOR NO.' OZONE ROW c�! VALVE OPEN STA Z _ OZONt7 0ZD»E GENNERATOR NO.' OZONE FLOW -..'.►., In CONTROL VALVE CLOSEDSTATU$ OZONE CE'LERATOR NO.n0." OZONE FLOW -,...-.- RS CONTROL VALVE POSITION NOiCK 1ON OZONE GEWMATOR NO.' ^ZONE FL--- C04TROL VALVE POSITION CONTROL .._...._.; ICI OZONE GENERATOR NO' 02II44E FLOW Sl I i! COSgROL VALVE CONTROL MOO: OZONE lEt9>ATOR NO.' j PROOUCT GAS H)>+ TEVP ALARV -^- OZONE T GAS ENT � PK00JCf GAS CONCEM1TRATX]hi OZONE CENIMATOR NO." HIGH PRODUCT CAS CO4CEN'TRATATION ALAR}I 11-6OZONE CEvERAtCR NC.' Low PRODUCT GAS CCNCENTRATION A;,ARM Free" and m1CSx 400 lid-d nM Plak 9ft rot..,+. Tws 7.10o- m lsw,. - L n % 0•-Aoo F= - (61» 7M-7401 TSM No. F 882 - t -- �RONhLD D. 106ST� woww D. jO zT0. � # mar 20. 2000 9 LASTSAVEDSY: Ikam LASTUPDATED: OM92009 12:78PM rr � � INN-U7-IXNht-YI•.00;; 1 • EXPANSION FIELD EQUIPMENT TANK a i Nn—oL_cx wN—vl—oos I oWANSION TANK m 1 1 N t ^ A 1 -- y7y 1 t 1 -L NN-VL_Ul.'--yl--r- ------------.....�- - - -.-..-.... -- ' INH-{1t-UGi,N-•1 1-0Uki INX-n/-f?�1N2-i--tvu...- �y I i v 1 a! 1 O I t 1 t 1 LNH^UL_9CWN-tM-0061 - - - NN--- -- M•UUfs-tF 7 /� tp��Qp - m C -------- i%�� -- --i -i- ('�J .a--OL-UC�jLi; PS1-OOM ,((h-Lv..{r'NHW�Sl1-00?-A11 rpQp N� 1 =-a 'a 1 2 O 4+ o � moo! M=WM+i1^11N-M4 14-NNI r go u S2 --._----- r-- ---- � a Inn^VL-OCriR-YJ71^OLNI----...----�j ----V µl-- yty .t�• N-UL-UCWK-YI^WF k 1 n 1 ry�v11QQ 1 u , k NN—Oc—ocxx-�Yl-,Ws 1 lNN-0[-UUhk-kM-W/ (/!.....w.«..,.--...--.r...---..-----.-L2"'SK^11l.Vif-!'M�UJ.}�rLl� N/\ o �_��� NN-uc-uUmt-rM-Uulsl �-"'•'------,...---.-_---.,...,....p () -------------........-......-...--........--!...M..-.«-r.••- I� 7�7�C �4 --j% a NN-OZ-OCMS-YSII-OOM ...---_.----.---.._---- _^-ISk3IL-i8 ��w� NN_I1/-I II:WN-INN-uva --------------•.--..-.--- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - �.�i- - - - - JVT t N 1 l I i , 41. OZ GEN. NO2 COOUNG LOOP NO.1 RETURN 81CH TEMP. ALARM OZ GEN. NO.2 COOLING Loop NO.1 RETURN FLOW OZ CEN. NO.2 COOLING LOOP N0.2 ',... RETURN H'GH TEMP. ALARM CZ GEN. 402 COOLING LOOP NO.2 RETURN FLOW OZ GEN. NO 2 COOLING LOOP NO.1 -- RETURN LOW PRESS. MARL --. CZ CEN. NO.2 CCOLINC LOOP `!O2 RETURN LC'W PRESS. MARL CZ CEN. NO.2 CLOSED LOOP '�L1.IL/'G'Jt COO- NC P-JwP NG.$ STATUS IK " Z FN. NOi 0-OSEO LDOP CW-NG al;1AP N0.2 RUN STATUS CZ CEN. NO2 COOLar>c LOOP No.1 ry7� RETURN KCH PRESS A,ARL CZ GEN. N0.2 ":WNC LCP NO., T!MRN "POM PRESS ALARM _ _ {� CZ GE>i. NO 2 HEX O.-O-I:RCE FL0* �_-, CZ GEN. NO2 HEX NO.1 DWI ARGE LC* FLOW &ARM OZ GEN. N0.2 COOU"� LOOP 40.1 'SUPPLY H".,,l PRES& ALARW OZ CEN NO2 HEX NO2 ±=` OISCNARCE FLOW Cz CEN. N0.2 HOC Rol DISCHARGE LOW FLOW NAIR A 'CZ GEN. N3.2 COCUNC LOCO 40.2 SUPPLY .'aw PRESS. NARY CZ CC-N. NO2 HEX DISCKARGE �n +IC•..)i FLOW titan TEMP. A:ARL z�g � u;lT N0. RLVSYON OY O1TC F&H JOB NO. A i s2D^A,D Cmr OF FORT WORTH, 'TFxAS-40 7-N-103 DWG NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE t* M oqC MAY 2009 Niz I11 D. IOOS]'y 0.nalwa � nFSICNmRIU%iS OZONE GENERATION FACILiIlES 's s, 81107 wax soon a"` Tot ialh OZONE GENERATOR No.2 �, • YTO11Fr SCALE Tiwt 00 bar 18 one inch on orSg nai dmwinq. ifF n..s - Qa,� s rAw 00 ,.,..____a not ana Inch an thta .hoot, adjuut 0=10. ,pi=m COOLING WATER P&i D 9 FM — c�7) 7M-7401 LAST SAVED BY: dams m it, FC_ LASTUPDATED: 0m2V2M 0&1TAM HELD EQUIPMENT ' $o z� N ��-- I.L"OZ-CQY-SA-00.'i-7'S6i N------ -{I- ---1{{{------ - iNH--OOX-BA`O4S-zSC1� mz i Z ,--------- -4---- fry o N 1 iii 8 -"' »-----14........... _._ I NIWL-f:0%-j1A--003-RY I� TTI 18 H O r 8.'V � yl y CQa , I 8 2 _ 1 NH. GZ-WX• fM-Gas 4 -� ' _- M _ -1 NH-lOz--COX-FU-oos- i I 1 1 t I NH-Oz-COx-FlhA06=-==-LtI I NH-O�- ;GOX-f W W6-Ft I� Ir----==-- l aINH-OZ-COX-PIT-MI 1 i __-FNFf-Qj-COX-PfT-ODS-i'N �M_L�Z-S)CWS-R-OQJ t v __-., --___r --,� 1 _ I t+H-4b-GQX-TIT 00.s i i --- i MR-oz-cox-Tir- l-n i® 1 ---------.. - 1 Iz 1 , I y t i HH-Oz-OI.Y1S-nT-003 i------------ � y INK oz-acas-nr-oo� ni i 11 'iU�-•UL-Of'lIS-IiFV-00.1•-ZS'•� 1 _ i -Oz-OCkS-BFV-[qS-zsa ' ' I y ISM^_�� 1 a...__--•�----------- --_-�---- INN-Oz-OLll6-fiY-•DOS-Ft�•1 1 G h j y I NH-OZ-OCWS-fM-= I -«-- _--_--«,..__----r - 1dIRLFlI� ^i I1 1 1 1 '• �c�.'y ,�.. I � �, �1i1+•fIZ-OZ-CQI•-003-004< 1 yo i-----t--------- N I 1 1 I 1 O 1 I w. e " � � I I NN_oz•�ry-oos-.x: 4 i ' INH-Oz-OCNR-TIT-00.1i n Ili jiLLL 1 _ a � la--c2-OCMR-TiG-Ons�-lj to _-I NH-OZ--0CNS»SY-00J 1�� 1 x 1 I y o �$ (�, { rrH-oz-oz-caa•oo3-�I j �"'�y }�-.�I�� 4� j iy1j--...._....... INTf-OZ••OZ�^797-1%13-_71jv s t � u 2 2 1 1 i Fil 16 I_ m S76 bid O x�r�,, ro'o 7�Cy j 1{1 $ NH-OZ-OCIIN-TIT-PSI.-Ti P1'4 ;;l~ x1� r�� �yOo� g.1 Qyyr�g �mp ;R;g 1cxr21 m,��r m to y K om x 1 1 NH-OZ-OL �P�11-Q� 1 1 j AYty-Qi-�-PSI-003•f111� ^--L IS=T 1 ------- -•--V L`a� m O sx Wo y ( INN-�(12-0�'^PS4.^0- --_-i � -P9.. ul 7�� Q o � _ Ij..r � =°�,.:.� N C N r t+ia y 1 O 0 N i N NAN�..yy -1 t/I n •yA s-s� mS�nt>m,x -• 1/10 yy, 'GNCjP' m m ��2x � 1 -7 � I > 1 K4. ; - ZISN�� LN14-OZ-02-BEY �00.i�2SiJ1� 1 t _----------- l -1 NH-OZ-0Z-BFV-005-ZSC I -- 1 --«--------T---«_........__. _ 1 I NH-OZ-OZ-WV-00,,-p 1 j , -� -0 � -_ -----�4-----------r lNH-OZ-0z•-OFVV-003-Rm _i i j ` ir, 0 -- N r iNH-OZ-OZ-BFY-OOJ-ZCi -1 t , I NN-OZ-OZ-n-)Oi I 1 I NH-OZ-OL-i5Tl-00.i i -----1 1 INH-OL-tIt-T94-OtIY,^ALI� > I NH-0Z-OZ AIT-Ow I ' INN-Qz^OX^ATT-ON3^A1 j - I 1 1 P �ot � 1 IN'H�^02�-A./2-P4-006 I I 'N0. 'RLYLSION BY GATE :fkN NOB 82GUIO CITY OF FORT WORTH. TEXAS -k-TD� DVIG NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE z1 B"E MAY 20M IOE'cNEB1TOJ/TS OZONE GENERATION FACILMES IOZONE GENERATOR No.3 0 p�� SCN'j Bar is ono inch on oral no' dro. It RLvI� to y not ona Snch on thla atlL odjvnga¢Ola Ep P8c1D t OZONE SMEM EMERGENCY '^ SHUTDOWN INInKnoN -�- OZONE GENERATOR NO.1 COX INLET VALVE OPEN STATUS OZONE GENERATOR NOA COX INLET VALVE CLOSED STATUS OZONE GENERATOR NO.1 COX INLET VALVE POSITION INDICATION T'\ ~1 OZONE GENERATOR NO.1 GOX INLET VALVE CONTROL NODE STATUS OZONE GENERATOR NO.1 COX INLET VALVE POSITION CONTROL OZONE GENERATOR N0.1 GASEOUS axYCEN HIGH RANGE Ftow OZONE GENERATOR NO.1 GASEOUS OXYGEN LOW RANGE FLOW ALARM - 07 NtF 6FNF.RATOR NO.1 CAScOUS OXYGEN LOW PANGS FLOW -� OZONE GENERATOR N0.1 fi GASEOUS OXYGEN ',OW fLOW ALARM �j OZONE GENERATOR COX PRF5SURE rt DCAr�V, OZONE GENERATOR N0.1 TFIAPFRATURF INI`NATYN OZONE CM-RATO4 -40.1 COOLNG WATER INLET TMPtTATW^.E cNDKCATpk 77��T OZONE GENERATOR YO.1 COOLING 1 � WATER INLET VALVE OPEN SATUS j - OZONE GENERATO4 NO.1 ED=IJNG STAIT 1jJ WATER INIEr vaLyrE cLosE>S sTATvs -�-� „J OZONE CEN•ERATOR NO.1 COOLNG WATER INLEr.VALVE -,==ION INDCATM OZONE GENERATOR NO., COOLNG WATCT INLET VALVE Co%=10, MODE STATUS --- I OZONE CENERATOA NO.1 COOLNC WATER INLET VA V_v P09,*N CONTROL > i OZONE GENERATOR 140.1 LOW -LOW COOLING WATER ROW ALARM ^� OZONE GENERATOR NC.I I COOJNG 'WATER FLOW OZONE GENERATOR NO., I LOW COOLING WATER FLOW ALARM i i OZONE GENERATOR NO.T S'UT-DOWN STAT!,* _ OZONE CENVZATOR NO.1 `A AJTO/MmuAL SE1ECi0R - _ OZONE CellmTOR INC.,. SYST04 ON/Off COT.' ;M _ .. OZONE C0<PkT0R 40.1 1 n SHUTDOWN TIME DURATION SEIPONT OZONE CE`/ERATOR NO.1 it u l OXYGEN RJRGE TIME DURAT1CN Srrp( NT OZONE GENERATOR � 1 1 POWER SET POW- 1 OLON? CENLRAICR 4'0.1 CDOL'NG WATER OUTLET n1Cti T J ERATURE A I.W OZONE CENEW-00 NO.' -- COOLING WATER RETURN TE'A-,.RANKS _-�OZONE 004'W'TCR NO.t POWER SLIPALY COOLING WA-,-R MET VALVE CONTRO_ ---�OZONE GEmz?ATaR NO.+ POWER OZONE GENERATOR NO.; J PaNER SUPPLY kn4 TCUP H,ARY OZONE GENE^J.Tnt RO.1 POWER SUPPLY Or.IOf' SIA:, JS 5UPPLY NC.S COGJ111, .ATLR �1L�.Lt/Jl OUTLET TDJP. NDACAT10N _-- > OZONE ("EN0ZATOO N0.1 POWER SOPPY FA.URE AL au OZONE GENERATO? NO.1 -..-- IN PROD: CAS W04 mRE'SSURE ALARM .__rT.'q OZONE GENERATOR N01 PR00;ICT GAS LOW PR-LSSME• AURV OZONE G£'.•ERATOR NO.T OZONE ROW CONTROL VAUE OPEN STATUS OZONE GENERATOR N'0.1 02CN£ Ra« CONTROL VALVE CLOSED STATUS OZONE GENERATOR N0.1 OZONE FLOW .--"� CONTROL VALVE P05TO, INOCCATX)N OZONE CENERATOR NO.1 OZONE FLOW •`T Tn� CONTROL VALVE CONTRRIOL MOOS STA-IS 1 ^ ^ OZONE GENERATOR NO.1 OZONE PLO'.r CONTROL VAt:lE POS"N CONTROL ---_..! irl OZO-+ �E°ATOR NC.I �},-,+ PRQOJUCT GAS Ph>l TEMP ALARM --.-..... OZONE T GASA.TCR Nr,,1 > PRODUCT GAS CCN'V.NTRAIX% +� OZONE aenEwCA NO.1 KOH PROO:JGT GAS- CCrCC,cXTkATATICN ALARM '> OZONE G£rcRATOR NO.1 y' LOW PRODLi.^T GAS CONM'MtRATON ALARM TSK No. F4382 4ircarvilo. win �tMYS 1{ THE ocullIDIr - ,iRONATD D. I.. e_ �¢aI[a11L1ymm or t @Alen iitC mft ' i Fort P Fort Mo-rik T- ft 71 "06a-aA+ IMs % Tom - (O71 73 5-7401 � JN LASTSAVEDBY: Dart LASTUPDATED: 90M9R009 11:59AM EXPANSION FIELD EOUIPMENT TANK 21 Q r _ _ ry O ro 1 riSS-I-VSr'YM-YI^lY» 1 N �ro �VtAlp r I 1 u I' 'C9 t NH-VCL�M1/L m l�3�Y-Q0q JY- 0 1 ' 1 ��"Ilf=l>;1Nc-f�N�ywt -- INN �L Y �VI"'L�ly"ti� y(y t t � Q 1 1 [ 1 ! Nn-UL^SWYM-tM-UIU 1 ---- tM�U. c-V(.YM^hN-UIU-FI� /r\ t + I �--r--------- ' ro 1 1 i1LW (-PbH-UUNi fNN �-A21 ya( t IbiCV - - - -Y----"-'-'-'---__}� i 1 1 I 1 ! � 1 x� I„ir'ii4"klcTffi�'-V4fii=1SIL i1 "aa /(/ t z ' t 4 t C JI ff8 { C: iz �>4 rn .Z'1 I I I� CA Iv F f IZ OIn r � Q I g b� I z # O u NH-LlL-US.1M�t�MW-�t1US1 �1.. L� 1 NN_{j[_-04YfJ-Pt-OOS 3 I I 10 z I 13 1 � r t tlth-4/--tx.�N,c-xl-t>us r N tl i C----- — — — — — — — — ---------}— --- NH-UC-UCNII-MI-1YJq I � [ ------------------------- i[ I [ \.J I — NM-UL-UON,2-hM-01? 1 Z `�......«...............................,. _'----------------------- 1 Nlh---U4.i1X--tN-//IN#11 N/� 1 ......_..... _...-....._.-.--._--------."-'-----`---------------.,._..� 1 n v I NN-i?Lsxa�1-«>til l -`"'---'--------^------------------------- - NM-UL^OUYA3_f5T1-0IA51 I I _ CIIt3lldEN'Inf-Iw-t .rl�� 'f}�( 1 i f 1 a 1 zro qcb u m S NO. ' NMSiON w 047E F&M JOn NO. A 8205A10 � '%N-110.DWG oArE MAY 2009 IDMONOROVTS L I gym+ Wj -A Fy SDI'j Bar is one inch on original drowing. N I� p Q _ �, not one inch on this shoot, I dluNt Scala. I CHEtym ti 0 Oz GEN, NO.3 COOLING LOOP NO.1 '. RETURN HIGH TEMP. ALARM Oz GEN. N0.3 COOLING Loop N0.1 RETURN FLOW OZ GEN. N0.3 COOLING LOOP NO-? ; RETURN RICH TEAM. AMU -�t}.L.Cl _ OZ GEN. N0.3 COOU40 LOOP N0.2 RETURN FLOW OZ GEN. NO.3 000UNG LOOP NO., RETURN LOW PRESS, X.PRM 0z GEN. No-3 COOLING LOW NO.2 RETURN LOW PRESS, ALARM 1 CZ GLIB. N0.3 CLOSED LOOP COO+Ir:G a(A,c NOS RUr. SUT,rS . 1p Ip R11 OZ GEN NO3 CLOSED LOP -- . COOLING PU%1P NO-, RUN STATUS t Oz CE1: Iv:.3 COOLING LOOP 1✓0.1 RETURN t!4 PRESS. ALARA Oi 0"?, N0.3 COCQ14 LOOP NO2 RE T URN Hr-H PRESS. ALARM AOZ GEN. NO_i' ic[J( 1LQ?,1 D1 K%gGE FLOW OZ GEN. %C.3 HE;( N0.7 MCKARGE Lag FLOW ALARW NG0.3 OOO A LOW No.1 OZ OEt.14v' $UPPIY I1 �$$. AtAR41 OZ GEN.KAR NO.3 Hat NO2 02 GEN. vo.S -E)( NO2 OL9ChuRCE LOW F OW ALARV ,,� --- QZ A GEN .YCCNC..3 CY COLOW NO2 $JPaY M PRESS LA4,A �� -_-- OZ GEN. NO.3 HF7( OtSfi+A1hGE FLOW KGN TEMP ALARM CI1Y OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE OZONE GENERATION FACILITIES OZONE GENERATOR No.3 COOLING WATER P&ID T$PE No. F4M2 Ogg - iliQNALD D. i0092� ar Freese al ud ]NkhOls 4 ' at> ar t«r sa soda 4M ar,m.sol a POWIL S610 299- Fat WwIk Tom 79100-015 i9Nt. Nr./ SECTION 16130 CONDUITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Metallic Conduits: a. Rigid Aluminum (RAG). b. Polyvinyl Chloride Coated Metallic (Aluminum - PCA). c. Flexible Aluminum. (FLX). d. Liquid -Tight Flexible Metal Conduit (SLT). 2. Conduit bodies. 3. Conduit fittings and accessories. 4. Conduit installation. B. Related Sections: 1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its subcontractors to review all Sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 16050. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. C80.5 - Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit. C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. 1 - Standard for Safety for Flexible Metal Conduit. 2. 6 - Standard for Safety for Rigid Metal Conduit. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 16050. LU Specific definitions and abbreviations. 1. Conduit Bodies: A separate portion of a conduit system that provides access through a removable cover to the interior of the system at a junction of 2 or more conduit sections. Includes, but not limited to: shapes C, E, LB, T, X, etc. 2. Conduit Fitting: An accessory that serves primarily a mechanical purpose. Includes, but not limited to: bushings, locknuts, hubs, couplings, reducers, etd. 3. PCA: PVC Coated Rigid Aluminum Conduit. 4. SLT: Sealtight — Liquid -Tight Flexible Conduit. 5. FLX: Flexible Metallic Conduit. 6. RAC: Rigid Aluminum Conduit. June 22, 2009 16130-1 pvrXar0U0Dcuff"tVC%nVrX/Fort Worthl82d5A1Q1Spadrrzl onslPre SeleW16130 (Addendum No 2) 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide conduits, conduit bodies, fittings, junction boxes and all necessary components, whether or not indicated on the Drawings, as required, to install a complete electrical raceway system. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 16050. B. Product Data: 1. Furnish complete manufacturer's catalog sheets for every type and size of conduit, fitting, conduit body, and accessories to be used on the project. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 16050. B. All conduits, conduit bodies, and fittings shall be UL listed and labeled. C. Every installer of PVC coated Aluminum (PCA) conduits shall be certified by the manufacturer for installation of the conduit. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 16050. B. Do not store conduit in direct contact with the ground. C. Do not store aluminum conduit in contact with concrete. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 16050. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 16050. 1.10 SYSTEM START-UP A. Refer to Section 16050. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Rigid aluminum conduit (RAC): 1. One of the following or equal: a. Kaiser Aluminum. b. Alcoa. c. Indalex. June 22, 2009 16130-2 pwJlC=50(DxumsnWl knVrXRrtViortN82WI(YSpDLg adomPwSe$eWi6130 (AddeAdum No 2) 8205A10 3. A PVC sleeve extending 1 pipe diameter or 2 inches, whichever is less, shall be formed at every female conduit opening on fittings except unions: Name a. The inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside diameter of the conduit to be used. 4. Flexible overlapping sleeves on all hubs and couplings shall provide a vapor and moisture tight seal at every connection. F. Flexible Metallic Conduit (FLX) Fittings: 1. Provide insulated die-cast connectors with ridges that thread into the inside of the conduit to achieve a force fit. 2. Binding screw connectors are not acceptable. G. Sealtight - liquid -tight flexible conduit (SLT) fittings: 1. Construction: a. Malleable iron. b. Furnished with locknut and sealing ring. c. Liquid -tight, rain -tight, oil -tight. d. Insulated throat. e. Furnish as straight, 45 degree elbows and 90 degree elbows. f. Designed to prevent sleeving: 1) Verify complete bonding of the raceway jacket to the plastic gasket seal. g. Equipped with grounding device to provide ground continuity irrespective of raceway core construction. Grounding device if inserted into raceway and directly in contact with conductors shall have rolled over edges for sizes under 5 inches. h. Where terminated into a threadless opening using a threaded hub fitting, a suitable moisture resistant/oil resistant synthetic rubber gasket shall be provided between the outside of the box or enclosure and the fitting shoulder. Gasket shall be adequately protected by and permanently bonded to a metallic retainer. H. Corrosion resistant and outdoor sealtight - liquid -tight flexible conduit (SLT) fittings: 1. Construction: a. PVC coated liquid -tight fittings with a bonded 0.040 inch thick PVC coating on the metal connector to form a seal around the SLT conduit. b. Connectors shall have an'insulated throat and an integral sealing ring. Hubs for threaded attachment of conduit to sheet metal enclosures: 1. Construction: a. Shall have an insulated throat. b. When used in corrosive areas shall be PVC coated. c. Bonding locknut. d. Recessed neoprene O-ring to assure watertight and dust tight connector. e. Aluminum with aluminum conduit. 2. Usage: a. All conduits in damp, wet, outdoor, and corrosive areas shall hubs for connections to sheet metal enclosures. J. Through Wall and Floor Seals: 1. Materials: a. Grommet - neoprene. June 22, 2009 16130-6 pvJr,wo9oftwments MnVT IW WorthB2WI VSpecMmUDr m-SeWM6136 (Addendum No 2) b. Pressure rings - PVC coated steel. c. Disc material - PVC coated steel. d. Aluminum when used with conduit type RAC. K. Expansion couplings: 1. Shall allow for expansion and contraction of conduit: a. Permitting 8-inch movement, 4 inches in either direction. 2. Constructed to maintain electrical continuity of the conduit system. 3. Materials: a. Head - Malleable or ductile iron. b. Sleeve - Steel. c. Insulating Bushing - Phenolic. d. Aluminum when used with conduit type RAC. 4. These fittings shall be constructed in such a manner that will provide the continuity of the ground path in each conduit or raceway. L. Conduit markers: 1, In accordance with Section 16075. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 16050. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION 1-4w A. Refer to Section 16050. B. General: 1. Use only tools recommended by the conduit manufacturer for assembling conduit system. 2. Provide adequate clearances from high -temperature surfaces for all conduit runs. Provide minimum clearances as follows: a. Clearances of 6 inches from surfaces 113 degrees Fahrenheit to 149 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Clearances of 12 inches from surfaces greater than 149 degrees Fahrenheit. c. Keep conduit at least 6 inches from the coverings on hot water and steam pipes, 18 inches from the coverings on flues and breechings and 12 inches from fuel )Ines and gas lines. d. Where it is necessary to route conduit close to high -temperature surfaces, provide a high -reflectance thermal barrier between the conduit and the surface. 3. Support conduit runs on water -bearing walls a minimum of 7/8-inch away from wall on an accepted preformed channel: a. Do not run conduit within water -bearing walls. 4. Do not install 1 inch or larger conduits in or through structural members unless approved by the ENGINEER. 5. Run conduit exposed to view parallel with or at right angles to structural members, walls, or lines of the building: June 22, 2009 16130-7 8205A10 pxl,Cam0oM=mentsl05mVfX/Fart Wor1h18205A10SpedficabmPre-Sek06130 (Addendum No 2) a. Install straight and true conduit runs with uniform and symmetrical elbows, offsets, and bends. 14wof b. Make changes in direction with long radius bends or with conduit bodies. 6. Install conduit with total conduit bends between pull locations less than or equal to 270 degrees. 7. Route all exposed conduit to preserve headroom, access space and work space and to prevent tripping hazards and clearance problems: a. Install conduit runs so that runs do not interfere with proper and safe operation of equipment and not block or interfere with ingress or egress, including equipment removal hatches. b. Route conduit to avoid drains or other gravity lines. Where conflicts occur, relocate conduit as required. 8. Install complete conduit systems before conductors are installed. C. Conduit usage: 1. Exposed conduits: a. Rigid conduit: 1) Install the rigid conduit type for each location as specified in Section 16050. 2) Minimum Size: 3/4-inch. b. Flexible conduit: 1) Use flexible conduit for final connections between rigid conduit and motors, vibrating equipment, instruments, control equipment or where required for equipment servicing: a) Use type SLT with rigid metallic conduit. 2) Minimum size: 3/4-inch: a) 112 when required for connection to instruments. 3) Maximum length: 36 inches. 2. PVC coated rigid metallic conduit (PCA): a. Use specifically manufactured or machined threading dies to manufacturer's specifications to accommodate the PVC jacket. 3. Rigid aluminum conduit (RAC): a. Do not use aluminum conduit below grade, cast in concrete or on concrete or masonry in contact with earth. b. When installing RAC on concrete surfaces mount RAC on [nonmetallic] channel so that only the [nonmetallic] channel is in contact with the concrete. c. When penetrating concrete -walls and/or floors use O-Z Gedney rubber gasketed through wall and floor seals so that the aluminum conduit is completely isolated from the concrete by the rubber seal material. D. Conduit joints and bends: 1. General: a. Keep bends and offsets in conduit runs to an absolute minimum. b. All bends shall be symmetrical. c. Make field bends with a radius of not less than the requirements found in the NEC: 1) The minimum bending radius of the cable must be greater than the radius of the conduit bend. 2) Make all field bends with power bending equipment or manual benders specifically intended for the purpose: June 22, 2009 16130-8 8205A10 pvJram5oM=rmPW;kriVMFad%YoffiVOM1Mp dficatiawPr 1eW16136(AddendumNo2) a) Make bends so that the conduit is not damaged and the internal diameter is not effectively reduced. b) For the serving utilities, make bends to meet their requirements. d. Replace all deformed, flattened, or kinked conduit. 2. Threaded conduit: a. Cut threads on rigid metallic conduit with a standard conduit cutting die that provides a 3/4-inch per foot taper and to a length such that all bare metal exposed by the threading operation is completely covered by the couplings or fittings used. In addition, cut the lengths of the thread such that all joints become secure and wrench tight just preceding the point where the conduit ends would butt together in couplings or where conduit ends would butt into the ends or shoulders of other fittings. b. Thoroughly ream conduit after threads have been cut to remove burrs. c. Use bushings or conduit fittings at conduit terminations. d. Coat conduit threads with an approved electrically conductive sealant and corrosion inhibitor that is not harmful to the conductor insulation: 1) Use AP* ALUMA-Shield as manufactured by T&B on threads of aluminum conduit. 2) Apply to the male threads and tighten joints securely. 3) Clean excess sealant from exposed threads after assembly. e. Securely tighten all threaded connections. E. Conduit supports: 1. General: a. Provide appropriate hangers, supports, fasteners, and seismic restraints to suit applications: 1) Provide support materials consistent with the type of conduit being installed: a) Stainless steel for types PCA or RAC, indoor and outdoor. b) Plastibond coated aluminum in corrosive areas. b. Support conduit at the intervals required by the National Electrical Code. c. Perforated strap and plumbers tape are not acceptable for conduit supports. 2. Conduit on concrete or masonry: a. Use 1-hole malleable iron straps with metallic or plastic expansion anchors and screws or support from preset inserts. b. Use preset inserts in concrete when possible. c. Use pipe spacers (clamp backs) in wet locations. d. On plaster or stucco, use 1-hole malleable iron straps with toggle bolts. 3. Conduit on metal decking: a. Use 1-hole malleable iron straps with 1-inch long cadmium -plated Type A panhead sheet metal screws. Fully or partially hammer -driven screws are not acceptable. 4. Suspended conduit: a. Use malleable iron factory -made split -hinged pipe rings with threaded suspension rods sized for the weight to be carried (minimum 3/8-inch diameter), Kindorf, or equal. b. For grouped conduits, construct racks with threaded rods and tiered angle iron or preformed channel cross members. Clamp each conduit individually to a cross member. Where rods are more than 2 feet long, provide rigid sway bracing. 5. Supports at structural steel members: June 22, 2009 15130-9 pxdr.aroMocumo hCZenVrA Fort WoM/820MlMpe&cat rwPreSekU16136 (Addendum No 4 8205A10 a. Use beam clamps. b. Drilling or welding may be used only as indicated or with approval of the ,"`we ENGINEER. 6. PVC coated rigid aluminum conduit (PCA) systems: a. Provide right angle beam clamps and U bolts specially formed and sized to snugly fit the outside diameter of the coated conduit. Provide "U" bolts with PVC encapsulated nuts that cover the exposed portions of the threads. b. Securely fasten exposed PCA conduits with Type 316 stainless steel clamps or straps or PVC coated clamps or straps manufactured and supplied by the PCS conduit supplier. F. Miscellaneous: 1. Provide flashings and counter flashings or pitch pockets for waterproofing of raceways, outlets, fittings, and other items that penetrate the roof. 2. Provide electrical unions at all points of union between ends of rigid conduit systems that cannot otherwise be coupled: a. Running threads and threadless couplings are not allowed. 3. Replace any conduit installed that the ENGINEER determines does not meet the requirements of this Specification. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 16050. 3.03 PROTECTION A_ Refer to Section-16050. END OF SECTION June 22, 2009 16130-10 8205A10 pw-J/CamOo/Docuren&CknvWod WoAhffMl0/SpecitlmWw 're�iBI30 (Addendum No 2) GEN BLDG RIO 110 PLC Il0 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS NH-REM-G-05 DI 1 3 1 NH-REM-G-05 DI 1 3 2 NH-REM-G-05 DI 1 3 3 INH-REM-G-05 DI 1 3 4 INH-REM-G-05 DI 1 3 5 INH-REM-G-05 DI 1 3 6 NH-REM-G-05 DI 1 3 7 NH-REM-G-05 DI 1 3 8 NH-REM-G-05 DI 1 3 9 NH-REM-G-05 DI 1 3 10 NH-REM-G-05 DI 1 3 11 NH-REM-G-05 DI 1 3 12 NH-REM-G-05 DI 1 3 13 NH-REM-G-05 DI 1 3 14 NH-REM-G-05 DI 1 3 15 NH-REM-G-05 DI 1 3 16 INH-REM-G-05 DI 1 4 1 INH-REM-G-05 DI 1 4 2 ` (NH-REM-G-05 DI 1 4 3 INH-REM-G-05 DI 1 4 4 pe NH-REM-G-05 DI 1 4 5 NH-REM-6-05 DI 1 4 6 NH-REM-G--05 DI 1 4 7 NH-REM-G-05 DI 1 4 8 NH-REM-G-05 DI 1 4 9 NH-REM-G-05 DI 1 4 10 NH-REM-G-05 DI 1 4 11 NH-REM-G-05 D1 1 4 12 NH-REM-G-05 DI 1 4 13 INH-REM-G-05 DI_ 1 4 14 INH-REM-G-05 DI 1 4 15 SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION NH-OZ-N2-AC-001-AL N2 Gen Compressor No.1 OL Alarm NH-OZ-N2-AC-001-RN N2 Gen Compressor No.1 Run Status NH-OZ-N2 AC-002-AL N2 Gen Compressor No.2 OL Alarm NH-OZ-N2-AC-002-RN N2 Gen Compressor No.2 Run Status NH-OZ-N2-PSH-002 AL N2 Gen Receiver Tank Press High -High Alarm NH-OZ-N2-PSL-002-AL N2 Gen Receiver Tank Press Low -Low Alarm NH-OZ-N2-DY-001-RN N2 Gen Desiccant Dryer No.1 Run Status NH-OZ-N2-DY-002-RN N2 Gen Desiccant Dryer No.2 Run Status NH-OZ-N2-AIT-001-AH N2 Gen Desiccant Dryer Dewpoint High Alarm Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare NH-OX-LOX-PSH-001-AL LOX Storage Tank No.1 High Press Alarm NH-OX-LOX-PSH-002-AL LOX Storage Tank No.2 High Press Alarm NH-OX-LOX-TSL-001-AL LOX Vaporizer No.1 Low DischargeTemp Alarm NH-OX-LOX-TSL-002 AL LOX Vaporizer No.2 Low DischargeTemp Alarm NH-OX-LOX-TSL-003-AL LOX Vaporizer No.3 Low DischargeTemp Alarm N H-OX-GOX-BFV-001 -ZSO LOX Vaporizer No.1 GOX Outlet Valve Open Status NH-OX-GOX-BFV-001-ZSC LOX Vaporizer No.1 GOX Outlet Valve Closed Status NH-OX-GOX-BFV-001-RM LOX Vaporizer No.1 GOX Outlet Valve Remote Status NH-OX-GOX-BFV-002-ZSOLOX Vaporizer No.2 GOX Outlet Valve Open Status NH-OX-GOX-BFV-002-ZSC LOX Vaporizer No.2 GOX Outlet Valve Closed Status NH-OX-GOX-BFV-002-RM LOX Vaporizer No.2 GOX Outlet Valve Remote Status NH-OX-GOX-BFV-003-ZSOLOX Vaporizer No.3 GOX Outlet Valve Open Status NH-OX-GOX-BFV-003-ZSC LOX Vaporizer No.3 GOX Outlet Valve Closed Status NH-OX-GOX-BFV-003-RM LOX Vaporizer No.3 GOX Outlet Valve Remote Status Spare June 22, 2009 17903-1 pW:G'GnioWMccuments/CAenVrA Fort WoftBMIWehrerabtesftselect-Addendum 240 Schedule Add 2 (A) 8205A10 OR 1pr ( GEN BLDG RIO F 1/0 PLC 110 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS INH-REM-G-05 DI 1 4 16 (NH-REM-G-05 DO 1 5 1 INH-REM-G-05 DO 1 5 2 INH-REM-G-05 DO 1 5 3 INH-REM-G-05 DO 1 5 4 INH-REM-G-05 DO 1 5 5 NH-REM-G-05 DO 1 5 6 NH-REM-G-05 DO 1 5 7 NH-REM-G-05 DO 1 5 8 NH-REM-G-05 DO 1 5 9 NH-REM-G-05 DO 1 5 10 NH-REM-G-05 DO 1 5 11 NH-REM-G-05 DO 1 5 12 NH-REM-G-05 DO 1 5 13 NH-REM-G-05 DO 1 5 14 INH-REM-G-05 DO 1 5 15 INH-REM-G-05 DO 1 5 16 NH-REM-G-05 Al 1 6 1 (NH-REM-G-05 Al 1 6 2 INH-REM-G-05 Al 1 6 3 INH-REM-G-05 Al 1 6 4 INH-REM-G-05 Al 1 6 5 INH-REM-G-05 Al 1 6 6 INH-REM-G-05 Al 1 6 7 INH-REM-G-05 AI 1 6 8 INH-REM-G-05 Al 1 7 1 INH-REM-G-05 Al 1 7 2 INH-REM-G-05 Al 1 7 3 INH-REM-G-05 Al 1 7 4 INH-REM-G-05 Al 1 7 5 INH-REM-G-05 AI 1 7 6 SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION Spare NH-OZ-N2-SV-OOI-OC Open N2 Gen Coal Filter No.1 Drain valve NH-OZ-N2-SV-002-OC Open N2 Gen Coal Filter No.2 Drain valve NH-OZ-GOX-BFV-001-ZCOLOX Vaporizer No.1 GOX Outlet Valve Open Control NH-OZ-GOX-BFV-001-ZCC LOX Vaporizer No.1 GOX Outlet Valve Close Control NH-OZ-GOX-BFV-002-ZCO LOX Vaporizer No.2 GOX Outlet Valve Open Control NH-OZ-GOX-BFV-002-ZCC LOX Vaporizer No.2 GOX Outlet Valve Close Control NH-OZ-GOX-BFV-003-ZCO LOX Vaporizer No.3 GOX Outlet Valve Open Control NH-OZ-GOX-BFV-003-ZCC LOX Vaporizer No.3 GOX Outlet Valve Close Control Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare NH-OZ-N2 Al-OO1-AI N2 Gen Desiccant Dryer Dewpoint Indication NH-OZ-N2-FIC-OO1-FI N2 Gen Flow Rate Indication NH-OX-LOX-LVL-001-LI LOX Stage Tank No.1 Level NH-OX-LOX-LVL-002-LI LOX Stage Tank No.2 Level NH-OX-GOX AIT-001-AI LOX Vaporizer Outlet Oxygen Analyzer NH-OX-GOX-TIT-001-TI LOX Vaporizer Outlet Temp Indication NH-OX-GOX-PIT-001-PI LOX Vaporizer Outlet Press Indication Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare June 2-2, 2009 17903-2 twrlrCarob+Doa�mentslCrentlrXlFat woAh+820.'aA10NelhrerableslPresakci - Addendum M Schedule Add 2 (A) 8205A10 IGEN BLDG RIO I/O PLC 110 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION INH-REM-G-05 Al 1 7 7 Spare INH-REM-G-05 Al 1 7 8 Spare INH--REM-G-05 AO 1 8 1 NH-OZ-N2-FIC-001-FC N2 Gen Flow Control INH-REM-G-05 AO 1 8 2 Spare NH-REM-G-05 AO 1 8 3 Spare NH-REM-G-05 AO 1 8 4 Spare NH-REM-G-05 AO 1 8 5 Spare NH-REM-G-05 AO 1 8 6 Spare NH-REM-G-05 AO 1 8 7 Spare NH-REM-G-05 AO 1 8 8 Spare NH CONTACTORS RIO 110 PLC 1/0 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 3 1 NH-OZ-RW-GT-001-RM Ozone Contactor No.1 Inlet Gate Remote Status INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 3 2 NH-OZ-RW GT-001-ZSO Ozone Contactor No.1 Inlet Gate Open Status INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 3 3 NH-OZ-RW-GT-001-ZSC Ozone Contactor No.1 inlet Gate Closed Status INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 3 4 NH-OZOF-BA-001-RM Ozone Contactor No.1 Feed Valve Remote Status INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 3 5 NH-OZ-OF-BA-001-ZSO Ozone Contactor No.1 Feed Valve Open Status INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 3 6 NH-OZ-OF-BA-001-ZSC Ozone Contactor No.1 Feed Valve Closed Status INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 3 7 NH-OZ-OF-BA-002-RM Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 1 Valve Remote Status NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 3 8 NH-OZ-OF-BA-002-ZSO Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 1 Valve Open Status NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 3 9 NH-OZ-OF-BA-002-ZSC Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 1 Valve Closed Status NH-REM-G-06 01 2 3 10 NH-OZ-OF-BA-003-RM Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 2 Valve Remote Status NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 3 11 NH-OZ-OF-BA-003-ZSO Ozone Contactor No-1 Cell 2 Valve Open Status NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 3 12 NH-OZ-OF-BA-003-ZSC Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 2 Valve Closed Status NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 3 13 NH-OZ-OF-BA-004-RM Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 3 Valve Remote Status NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 3 14 NH-OZ-OF-BA-004-ZSO Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 3 Valve Open Status NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 3 15 NH-OZ-OF-BA-004-ZSC Ozone Contactor No-1 Cell 3 Valve Closed Status NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 3 16 Spare NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 4 1 NH-OZ-RW GT-001-RM Ozone Contactor No.2 Inlet Gate Remote Status June 22, 2009 17903-3 8205A10 WJr,aroltolDocurren%K tient/rXlFortworth182 MIO Deli mb%s/Frese - Addendum 2A0 Schedule Add 2 (A) INH CONTACTORS RIO 110 PLC 110 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 4 2 NH-REM-G-06 Di 2 4 3 NH REM-G-06 DI 2 4 4 NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 4 5 NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 4 6 NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 4 7 NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 4 8 NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 4 9 NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 4 10 NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 4 11 NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 4 12 INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 4 13 NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 4 14 INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 4 15 INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 4 16 NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 5 1 INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 5 2 INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 5 3 INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 5 4 NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 5 5 NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 5 6 NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 5 7 NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 5 8 NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 5 9 INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 5 10 INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 5 11 INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 5 12 INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 5 13 INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 5 14 INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 5 15 INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 5 16 SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION NH-OZ-RW-GT-001-ZSO Ozone Contactor No.2 Inlet Gate Open Status NH-OZ-RW-GT-001-ZSC Ozone Contactor No.2 Inlet Gate Closed Status NH-OZ-OF-BA-005-RM Ozone Contactor No.2 Feed Valve Remote Status NH-OZ-OF-BA-005-ZSO Ozone Contactor No.2 Feed Valve Open Status NH-OZ-OF-BA-005-ZSC Ozone Contactor No.2 Feed Valve Closed Status NH-OZ-OF-BA-006-RM Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 1 Valve Remote Status NH-OZ-OF-BA-006-ZSO Ozone Contactor Not Cell 1 Valve Open Status NH-OZ-OF-BA-006-ZSC Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 1 Valve Closed Status NH-OZ-OF-BA-007-RM Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 2 Valve Remote Status NH-OZ-OF-BA-007-ZSO Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 2 Valve Open Status NH-OZ-OF-BA-007-ZSC Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 2 Valve Closed Status NH-OZ-OF-BA-008-RM Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 3 Valve Remote Status NH-OZ-OF-BA-008-ZSO Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 3 Valve Open Status NH-OZ-OF-BA-008-ZSC Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 3 Valve Closed Status Spare NH-OZ-OF-BFV-001-RM OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.1 Remote Status NH-OZ-OF-BFV-001-ZSO OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.1 Open NH-OZ-OF-BFV-001-ZSC OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.1 Closed NH-OZ-OF-TSH-001-AL OZ Destruct PreHeater No.1 Hi Temp Alarm NH-OZ-OF-PH-001-RM OZ Destruct PreHeater No.1 Rem. Status NH-OZ-OF-PH-001-RN OZ Destruct PreHeater No.1 ON Status NH-OZ-OF-PSL-001-AL OZ Destruct Blower No.1 Feed Low Press Alarm NH-OZ-OF-BLR-001-RM OZ Destruct Blower No.1 Remote Status NH-OZ-OF-BLR-001-RN OZ Destruct Blower No.1 Run Status NH-OZ-OF-BLR-001-AL OZ Destruct Blower No.1 Alarm NH-OZ-OF-BFV-002-RM OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.2 Remote Status NH-OZ-OF-BFV-002-ZSO OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.2 Open NH-OZ-OF-BFV-002-ZSC OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.2 Closed NH-OZ-OF-TSH-002-AL OZ Destruct PreHeater No,2 Hi Temp Alarm NH-OZ-OF-PH-002-RM OZ Destruct PreHeater No.2 Rem. Status NH-OZ-OF-PH-002-RN OZ Destruct PreHeater No.2 ON Status June 22, 2009 17903-4 8205A10 pw hCarolo0oCument&aeWTX1Fat WortldBM100*matd rJ mseW -Addendum M Schedule Add 2 (A) NH CONTACTORS RIO 110 PLC 110 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 6 1 NH-OZ-OF-PSL-002-AL OZ Destruct Blower No.2 Feed Low Press Alarm NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 6 2 INH-OZ-OF-BLR-4002-RM OZ Destruct Blower No.2 Remote Status NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 6 3 INH-OZ-OF-BLR-002-RN OZ Destruct Blower No.2 Run Status NH-REM-G-06 DI Z 6 4 INH-OZ-OF-BLR-002-AL OZ Destruct Blower No.2 Alarm NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 6 5 INH-OZ-OF-BFV-003-RM OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.3 Remote Status INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 6 6 INH-OZ-OF-BFV-003-ZSO OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.3 Open INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 6 7 INH-OZ-OF-BFV-003-ZSC OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.3 Closed INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 6 8 INH-OZ-OF-TSH-003-AL OZ Destruct PreHeater No.3 Hi Temp Alarm INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 6 9 INH-OZ-OF-PH-003-RM OZ Destruct PreHeater No.3 Rem. Status INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 6 10 INH-OZ-OF-PH-003-RN OZ Destruct PreHeater No.3 ON Status DI 2 6 11 INH-OZ-OF-PSL-003 AL OZ Destruct Blower No.3 Feed Low Press Alarm INH-REM-G-06 NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 6 12 INH-OZ-OF-BLR-003-RM OZ Destruct Blower No.3 Remote Status INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 6 13 INH-OZ-OF-BLR-003-RN OZ Destruct Blower No.3 Run Status INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 6 14 INH--OZ-OF-BLR-003-AL OZ Destruct Blower No.3 Alarm {NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 6 15 Spare r INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 6 16 ISpare INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 7 1 Spare INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 7 2 Spare INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 7 3 Spare INH-REM-G-06 DI 2 7 4 Spare NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 7 5 Spare NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 7 6 Spare NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 7 7 Spare N11-REM-G-06 DI 2 7 8 Spare NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 7 9 Spare NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 7 10 Spare NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 7 11 Spare NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 7 12 Spare_ NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 7 13 Spare NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 7 14 Spare NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 7 15 Spare June 22, 2009 17903-5 8205A10 pwJC=lo/Dx meMsCXwtRXftd WoIV 05AI=o Merah uMmsrkd - Akdar d= M Schedule Add 2 (A) NH CONTACTORS RIO 1/0 PLC 1/0 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS NH-REM-G-06 DI 2 7 16 NH-REM-G-06 DO 2 8 1 NH-REM-G-06 DO 2 8 2 NH-REM-G-06 DO 2 8 3 NH-REM-G-06 DO 2 8 4 NH-REM-G-06 DO 2 8 5 MNH-REM-G-06 DO 2 8 6 INH-REM-G-06 DO 2 8 7 NH-REM-G-06 DO 2 8 8 NH-REM-G-06 DO 2 8 9 NH-REM-G-06 DO 2 8 10 NH-REM-G-06 DO 2 8 11 NH-REM-G-06 DO 2 8 12 NH-REM-G-06 DO 2 8 13 NH-REM-G-06 DO 2 8 14 NH-REM-G-06 DO 2 8 15 NH-REM-G-06 DO 2 8 16 NH-REM-G-06 DO 2 9 1 INH-REM-G-06 DO 2 9 2 {NH-REM-G-06 DO 2 9 3 INH-REM-G-06 DO 2 9 4 F INH-REM-G-06 DO 2 9 5 JNH-REM-G-06 DO 2 9 6 M INH-REM-G-06 DO 2 9 7 INH-REM-G-06 DO 2 9 8 INH-REM-G-06 DO 2 9 9 INH-REM-G-06 DO 2 9 10 INH-REM-G-06 DO 2 9 11 NH-REM-G-06 DO 2 9 12 NH-REM-G-06 DO 2 9 13 NH-REM-G-06 DO 2 9 14 SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION Spare NH-OZ-RW GT-001-ZCO Ozone Contactor No.1 Inlet Gate Control Open NH-OZ-RW-GT-001-ZCC Ozone Contactor No.1 inlet Gate Control Closed NH-OZ-OF-BFV-OO1-ZC0 No. OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.1 Control Open NH-OZ-OF-BFV-001-ZCC No. OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.1 Control Closed NH-OZ-OF-PH-001-ZCC No. OZ Destruct PreHeater No.1 On/Off-Control NH-OZ-OF-BLR-001-OOC No. OZ Destruct Blower No.1 On/Off Control Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare NH-OZ-RW-GT-O02-ZCO Ozone Contactor No.2 Inlet Gate Control Open NH-OZ-RW GT-002-ZCC Ozone Contactor No.2 Inlet Gate Control Closed NH-OZ-OF-BFV-002-ZCO No. OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.2 Control Open NH-OZ-OF-BFV-002-ZCC No. OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.2 Control Closed NH-OZ-OF-PH-002-ZCC No. OZ Destruct PreHeater No.2 On/Off Control NH-OZ-OF-BLR-002-OOC No, OZ Destruct Blower No.2 On/Off Control Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare NH-OZ-OF-BFV-003-ZCO No. OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.3 Control Open NH-OZ-OF-BFV-003-ZCC No. OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.3 Control Closed June 22, 2009 17903-6 8205A10 pw..1Cam1loM=ment&0lsnVrAftrt WortkC0 10Me1la mWes1PmseW- Addendum M Schedule Add 2 (A) k NH CONTACTORS RIO I/O PLC 1/0 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS NH-REM-G-06 DO 2 9 15 NH-REM-G-06 DO 2 9 16 NH-REM-G-07 Al 3 2 1 INH-REM-G-07 Al 3 2 2 INH-REM-G-07 Al 3 2 3 NH-REM-G-07 Al 3 2 4 NH-REM-G-07 Al 3 2 5 NH-REM-G-07 Al 3 2 6 NH-REM-G-07 Al 3 2 7 NH-REM-G-07 Al 3 2 8 NH-REM-G-07 Al 3 3 1 NH-REM-G-07 Al 3 3 2 NH-REM-G-07 AI 3 3 3 NH-REM-G-07 Al 3 3 4 NH-REM-G-07 AI 3 3 5 NH-REM-G-07 Al 3 3 6 NH-REM-G-07 Al 3 3 7 NH-REM-G-07 Al 3 3 8 NH-REM-G-07 Al 3 4 1 NH-REM-G-07 Al 3 4 2 NH-REM-G-07 Al 3 4 3 NH-REM-G-07 Al 3 4 4 NH-REM-G-07 Al 3 4 5 INH-REM-G-07 Al 3 4 6 !NH-REM-G-07 Al 3 4 7 INH-REM-G-07 Al 3 4 8 INH-REM-G-07 Al 3 5 1 INH-REM-G-07 Al 3 5 2 INH-REM--G-07 Al 3 5 3 INH-REM-G-07 Al 3 5 4 INH-REM-G-07 Al 3 5 5 SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION NH-OZ-OF-PH-003-ZCC No. OZ Destruct PreHeater No.3 On/Off Control NH-OZ-OF-BLR-003-OOC No. OZ Destruct Blower No.3 On/Off Control NH-OZ-OF-BA-001-ZI Ozone Contactor No.1 Feed Valve Position NH-OZ-OF-BA-002-ZI Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 1 Valve Position NH-OZ-OF-BA-003-ZI Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 2 Valve Position NH-OZ-OF-BA-004-ZI Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 3 Valve Position NH-OZ-OF-FM-001-FI Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 1 Flow Indication NH-OZ-OF-FM-OO2-FI Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 2 Flow Indication NH-OZ-OF-FM-003-FI Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 3 Flow Indication NH-OZ-OZ-AIT-001-AI Ozone Contactor No.1 Monitor 1 OZ Residual NH-OZ-OZ-AIT-002-AI Ozone Contactor No.1 Monitor 2 OZ Residual NH-OZ-OZ-AIT-003 AI Ozone Contactor No.1 Monitor 3 OZ Residual NH-OZ-OZ-AIT-004-AI Ozone Contactor No.1 Monitor 4 OZ Residual NH-OZ-OF-PIT-001-PI No. OZ Destruct No.1 Inlet Press NH-OZ-OF-TIT-001-Ti No. OZ Destruct No.1 Inlet Temp NH-OZ-OF-TIT-002-Ti No. OZ Destruct No.1 Off -Gas Temp NH-OZ-OF-AIT-001 AI No. OZ Destruct No.1 Off -Gas Ozone Concentration NH-OZ-OF-BLR-OO1-SI No. OZ Destruct Blower No.1 Speed Indication NH-OZ-OF-BA-005-ZI Ozone Contactor No.2 Feed Valve Position NH-OZ-OF-BA-006-ZI Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 1 Valve Position NH-OZ-OF-BA-007-ZI Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 2 Valve Position NH-OZ-OF-BA-008-ZI Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 3 Valve Position NH-OZ-OF-FM-004-FI Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 1 Flow Indication NH-OZ-OF-FM-005-FI Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 2 Flow Indication NH-OZ-OF-FM-006-FI Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 3 Flow Indication NH-OZ-OZ AIT-005-AI Ozone Contactor No.2 Monitor 1 OZ Residual NH-OZ-OZ AIT-006 AI Ozone Contactor No.2 Monitor 2 OZ Residual NH-OZ-OZ-AIT-007-AI Ozone Contactor No.2 Monitor 3 OZ Residual NH-OZ-OZAIT-008-AI Ozone Contactor No.2 Monitor 4 OZ Residual NH-OZ-OF-PIT-002-PI No. OZ Destruct No.2 Inlet Press NH-OZ-OF-TIT-003-TI No. OZ Destruct No.2 Inlet Temp June 22, 2009 17903-7 pw:1rAm0oM=menMU19nUrXlFor1 Wodh18MI00avemblesRrexW- Addendum Z10 Schedule Add 2 (A) 8205A10 NH CONTACTORS RIO I10 PLC 110 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION INH-REM-G-07 Al 3 5 6 NH-OZ-OF-TIT-00.4-T1 No. OZ Destruct No.2 Off -Gas Temp INH-REM-G-07 AI 3 5 7 NH-OZ-OF-AIT-002 AI No. OZ Destruct No.2 Off -Gas Ozone Concentration INH-REM-G-07 Al 3 5 8 NH-OZ-OF-BLR-002-SI No. OZ Destruct Blower No.2 Speed Indication INH-REM-G-07 Al 3 6 1 NH-OZ-OF-PIT-003-PI No. OZ Destruct No.3 Inlet Press !NH-REM-G-07 Al 3 6 2 NH-OZ-OF-TIT-005-Ti No. OZ Destruct No.3 Inlet Temp NH-REM-G-07 Al 3 6 3 NH-OZ-OF-TIT-006-TI No. OZ Destruct No.3 Off -Gas Temp NH-REM-G-07 Al 3 6 4 NH-OZ-OFAIT-003-A1 No. OZ Destruct No.3 Off -Gas Ozone Concentration NH-REM-G-07 Al 3 6 5 NH-OZ-OF-BLR-003-SI No. OZ Destruct Blower No.3 Speed Indication NH-REM-G-07 Al 3 6 6 Spare NH-REM-G-07 AI 3 6 7 Spare NH-REM-G-07 Al 3 6 8 Spare NH-REM-G-07 AO 3 7 1 NH-OZ-OF-BLR-001-SC No. OZ Destruct Blower No.1 Speed Control NH-REM-G-07 AO 3 7 2 NH-OZ-OF-BA-001 ZC Ozone Contactor No.1 Feed Valve Control NH-REM-G-07 AO 3 7 3 NH-OZ-OF-BA-002-ZC Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 1 Valve Control NH-REM-G-07 AO 3 7 4 NH-OZ-OF-BA-003-ZC Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 2 Valve Control NH-REM-G-07 AO 3 7 5 NH-OZ-OF-BA-004-ZC Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 3 Valve Control INH-REM-G-07 AO 3 7 6 Spare INH-REM-G-07 AO 3 7 7 Spare INH-REM-G-07 AO 3 7 8 Spare INH-REM-G-07 AO 3 8 1 NH-OZ-OF-BLR-002-SC No. OZ Destruct Blower No.2 Speed Control INH-REM-G-07 AO 3 8 2 NH-OZ-OF-BA-005-ZC Ozone Contactor No.2 Feed Valve Control INH-REM-G-07 AO 3 8 3 NH-OZ-OF-BA-006-ZC Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 1 Valve Control INH-REM-G-07 AO • 3 8 4 NH-OZ-OF-BA-007-ZC Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 2 Valve Control INH-REM-G-07 AO 3 8 5 NH-OZ-OF-BA-008-ZC Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 3 Valve Control INH-REM-G-07 AO 3 8 6 Spare INH-REM-G-07 AO 3 8 7 Spare INH-REM-G-07 AO 3 8 8 NH-OZ-OF-BLR-003-SC No. OZ Destruct Blower No-3 Speed Control June 22, 2009 17903--8 8205A10 pw1rA dioM=menMVl9nNrXlFort WorttU8206A101aelhrerablesftselect- Addendum M Schedule Add 2 (A) ISH CONTACTORS RIO 110 PLC 110 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 3 1 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 3 2 ASH-REM-C-08 DI 4 3 3 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 3 4 SH-REM-C-08 DI 4 3 5 SH-REM-C-08 DI 4 3 6 SH-REM-C-08 DI 4 3 7 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 3 8 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 3 9 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 3 10 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 3 11 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 3 12 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 3 13 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 3 14 SH-REM-C-08 DI 4 3 15 SH-REM-C-08 DI 4 3 16 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 4 1 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 4 2 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 4 3 ISH-REM-C-08 D) 4 4 4 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 4 5 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 4 6 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 4 7 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 4 8 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 4 9 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 4 10 ASH-REM-C-08 DI 4 4 11 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 4 12 (SH-REM-C-08 DI 4 4 13 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 4 14 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 4 15 SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION SH-OZ-RW-GT-001-RM Ozone Contactor No.1 Inlet Gate Remote Status SH-OZ-RW-GT-001-ZSO Ozone Contactor No.1 Inlet Gate Open Status SH-OZ-RW-GT-001-ZSC Ozone Contactor No.1 Inlet Gate Closed Status SH-OZ-OF-BA-001-RM Ozone Contactor No.1 Feed Valve Remote Status SH-OZ-OF-BA-001-ZSO Ozone Contactor No.1 Feed Valve Open Status SH-OZ-OF-BA-001-ZSC Ozone Contactor No.1 Feed Valve Closed Status SH-OZ-OF-BA-002-RM Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 1 Valve Remote Status SH-OZ-OF-BA-002-ZSO Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 1 Valve Open Status SH-OZ-OF-BA-002-ZSC Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 1 Vaive Closed Status SH-OZ-OF-BA-003-RM Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 2 Valve Remote Status SH-OZ-OF-BA-003-ZSO Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 2 Valve Open Status SH-OZ-OF-BA-003-ZSC Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 2 Valve Closed Status SH-OZ-OF-BA-004-RM Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 3 Valve Remote Status SH-OZ-OF-BA-004-ZSO Ozone Contactor No,1 Cell 3 Valve Open Status SH-OZ-OF-BA-004 ZSC Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 3 Valve Closed Status Spare SH-OZ-RW-GT-001-RM Ozone Contactor No.2 Inlet Gate Remote Status SH-OZ-RW-GT-001-ZSO Ozone Contactor No.2 Inlet Gate Open Status SH-OZ-RW GT-001-ZSC Ozone Contactor No.2 Inlet Gate Closed Status SH-OZ-OF-BA-005-RM Ozone Contactor No.2 Feed Valve Remote Status SH-OZ-OF-BA-005-ZSO Ozone Contactor No.2 Feed Valve Open Status SH-OZ-OF-BA-005-ZSC Ozone Contactor No,2 Feed Valve Closed Status SH-OZ-OF-BA-006-RM Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 1 Valve Remote Status SH-OZ-OF-BA-006-ZSO Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 1 Valve Open Status SH-OZ-OF-BA-006-ZSC Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 1 Valve Closed Status SH-OZ-OF-BA-007-RM Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 2 Valve Remote Status SH-OZ-OF-BA-007-ZSO Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 2 Valve Open Status SH-OZ-OF-BA-007-ZSC Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 2 Valve Closed Status SH-OZ-OF-BA-008-RM Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 3 Valve Remote Status SH-OZ-OF-BA-008-ZSO Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 3 Valve Open Status SH-OZ-OF-BA-008-ZSC Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 3 Valve Closed Status June 22, 2009 17903-9 8205A10 WJQr0kD0 x tnhCllenVFXJFOK WOON820SA701DelVer *SlPreseW -Addendum M Schedule Add 2 (A) SH CONTACTORS RIO 1/0 PLC 1/0 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 4 16 SH-REM-C-08 DI 4 5 1 SH-REM-C-08 DI 4 5 2 �SH-REM-C-08 DI 4 5 3 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 5 4 `SH-REM-C-08 DI 4 5 5 CSH-REM-C-08 DI 4 5 6 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 5 7 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 5 8 jSH-REM-C-08 DI 4 5 9 SH-REM-C-08 DI 4 5 10 SH-REM-C-08 DI 4 5 11 SH-REM-C-08 DI 4 5 12 SH-REM-C-08 DI 4 5 13 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 5 14 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 5 15 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 5 16 jSH-REM-C-08 DI 4 6 1 ISH-REM-C-08 Dl 4 6 2 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 6 3 {SH-REM-C-08 DI 4 6 4 SH-REM-C-08 DI 4 6 5 SH-REM-C-08 DI 4 6 6 SH-REM-C-08 DI 4 6 7 SH-REM-C-08 DI 4 6 8 SH-REM-C-08 DI 4 6 9 SH-REM-C-08 DI 4 6 10 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 6 11 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 6 12 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 6 13 ISH-REM-C-08 DI 4 6 14 SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION Spare SH-OZ-OF-BFV-001-RM OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.1 Remote Status SH-OZ-OF-BFV-001-ZSO OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.1 Open SH-OZ-OF-BFV-001-ZSC OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.1 Closed SH-OZ-OF-TSH-001 AL OZ Destruct PreHeater No.1 Hi Temp Alarm SH-OZ-OF-PH-001-RM OZ Destruct PreHeater No.1 Rem. Status SH-OZ-OF-PH-001-RN OZ Destruct PreHeater No.1 ON Status SH-OZ-OF-PSL-001 AL OZ Destruct Blower No.1 Feed Low Press Alarm SH-OZ-OF-BLR-001-RM OZ Destruct Blower No.1 Remote Status SH-OZ-OF-BLR-001-RN OZ Destruct Blower No.1 Run Status SH-OZ-OF-BLR-001-AL OZ Destruct Blower No.1 Alarm SH-OZ-OF-BFV-002-RM OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.2 Remote Status SH-OZ-OF-BFV-002-ZSO OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.2 Open SH-OZ-OF-BFV-002-ZSC OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.2 Closed SH-OZ-OF-TSH-002-AL OZ Destruct PreHeater No.2 Hi Temp Alarm SH-OZ-OF-PH-002-RM OZ Destruct PreHeater No.2 Rem. Status ASH-OZ-OF-PH-002-RN OZ Destruct PreHeater No.2 ON Status SH-OZ-OF-PSL-002 AL OZ Destruct Blower No.2 Feed Low Press Alarm SH-OZ-OF-BLR-002-RM OZ Destruct Blower No.2 Remote Status SH-OZ-OF-BLR-002-RN OZ Destruct Blower No.2 Run Status SH-OZ-OF-BLR-002-AL OZ Destruct Blower No.2 Alarm SH-OZ-OF-BFV-003-RM OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.3 Remote Status ISH-OZ-OF-BFV-003-ZSO OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.3 Open ASH-OZ-OF-BFV-003-ZSC OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.3 Closed ASH-OZ-OF-TSH-003-AL OZ Destruct PreHeater No.3 Hi Temp Alarm ASH-OZ-OF-PH-003-RM OZ Destruct PreHeater No.3 Rem. Status ISH-OZ-OF-PH-003-RN OZ Destruct PreHeater No.3 ON Status �SH-OZ-OF-PSL-003 AL OZ Destruct Blower No.3 Feed Low Press Alarm ISH-OZ-OF-BLR-003-RM OZ Destruct Blower No.3 Remote Status ASH-OZ-OF-BLR-003-RN OZ Destruct Blower No.3 Run Status ISH-OZ-OF-BLR-003-AL OZ Destruct Blower No.3 Alarm June 22, 2009 17903-10 8205A10 per.HCam1oM=menWUeWTXlFort WoffiM05A10Melher WvuPweW- Addendwn M Schedule Add 2 (A) 0 ISH CONTACTORS RIO PLC SH-REM-C-08 SH-REM-C-08 SH-REM-C-08 SH-REM-C-08 SH-REM-C-08 SH-REM-C-08 ISH-REM-C-08 ISH-REM-C-08 SH-REM-C-08 SH-REM-C-08 SH-REM-C-08 SH-REM-C-08 SH-REM-C-08 SH-REM-C-08 ISH-REM-C-08 ISH-REM-C-08 SH-REM-C-08 SH-REM-C-08 SH-REM-C-08 SH-REM-C-08 SH-REM-C-08 SH-REM-C-08 ISH-REM-C-08 ISH-REM-C-08 ISH-REM-C-08 ISH-REM-C-08 ISH-REM-C-08 ISH-REM-C-08 ISH-REM-C-08 ISH-REM-C-08 ISH-REM-C-08 1/0 110 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION DI 4 6 15 Spare DI 4 6 16 ISpare DI 4 7 1 ISpare DI 4 7 2 Spare DI 4 7 3 ISpare DI 4 7 4 ISpare DI 4 7 5 Spare DI 4 7 6 Spare DI 4 7 7 Spare DI 4 7 8 Spare DI 4 7 9 Spare DI 4 7 10 Spare DI 4 7 11 Spare DI 4 7 12 Spare DI 4 7 13 Spare DI 4 7 14 ISpare DI 4 7 15 !Spare DI 4 7 16 Spare DO 4 8 1 SH-OZ-RW-GT-001-ZCO Ozone Contactor No.1 Inlet Gate Control Open DO 4 8 2 SH-OZ-RW GT-001-ZCC Ozone Contactor No.1 Inlet Gate Control Closed DO 4 8 3 SH-OZ-OF-BFV-001-ZCO So. OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.1 Control Open DO 4 8 4 SH-OZ-OF-BFV-001-ZCC So. OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.1 Control Closed DO 4 8 5 SH-OZ-OF-PH-00I-ZCC So. OZ Destruct PreHeater No.1 On/Off Control DO 4 8 6 ISH-OZ-OF-BLR-001-OOCSo. OZ Destruct Blower No.1 On/Off Control DO 4 8 7 ISpare DO 4 8 8 ISpare DO 4 8 9 ISpare DO 4. 8 10 ISpare DO 4 8 11 ISpare DO 4 8 12 ISpare DO 4 8 13 ISpare June 22, 2009 17903-11 pw iCarok/DocumenlslC enVTXftrtWorW8E05A101DeRverabWSPM$Weet - Addendum 240 Sdiedule Add 2 (A) ISH CONTACTORS RIO 1/0 PLC 1/0 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS ISH-REM-C-08 DO 4 8 14 ISH-REM-C-08 DO 4 8 15 ISH-REM-C-08 DO 4 8 16 ISH-REM-C-08 DO 4 9 1 ISH-REM-C-08 DO 4 9 2 ISH-REM-C-08 DO 4 9 3 ISH-REM-C-08 DO 4 9 4 ISH-REM-C-08 DO 4 9 5 SH-REM-C-08 DO 4 9 6 SH-REM-C-08 DO 4 9 7 SH-REM-C-08 DO 4 9 8 SH-REM-C-08 DO 4 9 9 SH-REM-C-08 DO 4 9 10 SH-REM-C-08 DO 4 9 11 ISH-REM-C-08 DO 4 9 12 SH-REM-C-08 DO 4 9 13 SH-REM-C-08 DO 4 9 14 SH-REM-C-08 DO 4 9 15 SH-REM-C-08 DO 4 9 16 SH-REM-C-09 Al 5 2 1 SH-REM-C-09 Al 5 2 2 SH-REM-C-09 Al 5 2 3 SH-REM-C-09 Al 5 2 4 SH-REM-C-09 Al 5 2 5 SH-REM-C-09 Al 5 2 6 SH-REM-C-09 Al 5 2 7 SH-REM-C-09 Al 5 2 8 ISH-REM-C-09 Al 5 3 1 �SH-REM-C-09 Al 5 3 2 SH-REM-C-09 Al 5 3 3 ISH-REM-C-09 Al 5 3 4 SIGNAL. TAG DESCRIPTION Spare Spare Spare SH-OZ-RW-GT-002-ZCO Ozone Contactor No.2 Inlet Gate Control Open SH-OZ-RW-GT-002-ZCC Ozone Contactor No.2 Inlet Gate Control Closed SH-OZ-OF-BFV-002-ZCO So. OZ Destruct inlet Valve No.2 Control Open SH-OZ--OF-BFV-002-ZCC So. OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.2 Control Closed SH-OZ-OF-PH-002-ZCC So. OZ Destruct PreHeater No.2 On/Off Control SH-OZ-OF-8LR-002-OOC So. OZ Destruct Blower No.2 On/Off Control Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare SH-OZ-OF-BFV-003-ZCO So. OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.3 Control Open SH-OZ-OF-BFV-003-ZCC So, OZ Destruct Inlet Valve No.3 Control Closed SH-OZ-OF-PH-003-ZCC So, OZ Destruct PreHeater No.3 On/Off Control SH-OZ-OF-BLR-003-OOC So, OZ Destruct Blower No.3 On/Off Control SH-OZ-OF-BA-001-ZI Ozone Contactor No.1 Feed Valve Position SH-OZ-OF-BA-002-ZI Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 1 Valve Position SH-OZ-OF-BA-003-ZI Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 2 Valve Position SH-OZ-OF-BA-004-ZI Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 3 Valve Position SH-OZ-OF-FM-001-FI Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 1 Flow Indication SH-OZ-OF-FM-OO2-Fl Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 2 Flow Indication SH-OZ-OF-FM-003-FJ Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 3 Flow Indication SH-OZ-OZ-AIT-001-AI Ozone Contactor No.1 Monitor 1 OZ Residual SH-OZ-OZ-AIT-002 AI Ozone Contactor No.1 Monitor 2 OZ Residual SH-OZ-OZ AIT-003 Al Ozone Contactor No.1 Monitor 3 OZ Residual SH-OZ-OZAIT-004 Al Ozone Contactor No.1 Monitor 4 OZ Residual SH-OZ-OF-PIT-001-PI So. OZ Destruct No.1 Inlet Press June 22, 2009 17903-12 8205A10 pwXardbAhwmonta knt XRn Worth&nm10oellverblesRrese1ed- Addendum 2AO Schedule Add 2 (A) 0 ISH CONTACTORS RIO 1/0 PLC 1/0 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION ISH-REM-C-09 Al 5 3 5 SH-OZ-OF-TIT-001-Ti So. OZ Destruct No.1 Inlet Temp SH-REM-C-09 Al 5 3 6 SH-OZ-OF-TIT-002-Ti So. OZ Destruct No.1 Off -Gas Temp SH-REM-C-09 Al 5 3 7 SH-OZ-OF AIT-001-AI So. OZ Destruct No.1 Off -Gas Ozone Concentration SH-REM-C-09 Al 5 3 8 SH-OZ-OF-BLR-001-SI So. OZ Destruct Blower No.1 Speed Indication SH-REM-C-09 Al 5 4 1 SH-OZ-OF-BA-005-ZI Ozone Contactor No.2 Feed Valve Position ASH-REM-C-09 Al 5 4 2 SH-OZ-OF-BA-006-ZI Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 1 Valve Position ISH-REM-C-09 A[ 5 4 3 SH-OZ-OF-BA-007-ZI Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 2 Valve Position ASH-REM-C-09 Al 5 4 4 SH-OZ-OF-BA-008-ZI Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 3 Valve Position ISH-REM-C-09 A] 5 4 5 SH-OZ-OF-FM-004-FI Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 1 Flow Indication ASH-REM-C-09 Al 5 4 6 SH-OZ-OF-FM-005-FI Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 2 Flow Indication SH-REM-C-09 Al 5 4 7 SH-OZ-OF-FM-006-F1 Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 3 Flow Indication SH-REM-C-09 AI 5 4 8 SH-OZ-OZ-AIT-005-Al Ozone Contactor No.2 Monitor 1 OZ Residual SH-REM-C-09 Al 5 5 1 SH-OZ-OZ-AIT-006-AI Ozone Contactor No.2 Monitor 2 OZ Residual SH-REM-C-09 A) 5 5 2 SH-OZ-OZ-AIT-007-AI Ozone Contactor No.2 Monitor 3 OZ Residual SH-REM-C-09 Al 5 5 3 SH-OZ-OZ•-AIT-008-AI Ozone Contactor No.2 Monitor 4 OZ Residual SH-REM-C-09 Al 5 5 4 SH-OZ-OF-PIT-002-PI So. OZ Destruct No.2 Inlet Press SH-REM-C-09 Al 5 5 5 SH-OZ-OF-TIT-003-Ti So. OZ Destruct No.2 Inlet Temp SH-REM-C-09 A[ 5 5 6 SH-OZ-OF-TIT-004-TI So. OZ Destruct No.2 Off -Gas Temp SH-REM-C-09 Al 5 5 7 SH-OZ-OF AIT-002-AI So., OZ Destruct No.2 Off -Gas Ozone Concentration SH-REM-C-09 Al 5 5 8 SH-OZ-OF-BLR-002-SI So. OZ Destruct Blower No.2 Speed Indication SH-REM-C-09 Al 5 6 1 SH-OZ-OF-PIT-003-PI So. OZ Destruct No.3 Inlet Press ASH-REM-C-09 Al 5 6 2 SH-OZ-OF-TIT-005-TI So. OZ Destruct No.3 Inlet Temp ASH-REM-C-09 Al 5 6 3 SH-OZ-OF-TIT-006-T1 So. OZ Destruct No.3 Off -Gas Temp ISH-REM-C-09 Al 5 6 4 SH-OZ-OF AIT-003-AI So. OZ Destruct No.3 Off -Gas Ozone Concentration ISH-REM-C-09 A] 5 6 5 SH-OZ-OF-BLR-003-SI So, OZ Destruct Blower No.3 Speed Indication ASH-REM-C-09 Al 5 6 6 Spare ISH-REM=C-09 Al 5 6 7 Spare ISH-REM-C-09 Al 5 6 8 Spare SH-REM-C-09 AO 5 7 1 SH-OZ-OF-BLR-001-SC So. OZ Destruct Blower No.1 Speed Control ASH-REM-C-09 AO 5 7 2 SH-OZ-OF-BA-001-ZC Ozone Contactor No.1 Feed Valve Control ASH-REM-C-09 AO 5 7 3 SH-OZ-OF-BA-002-ZC Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 1 Valve Control June 22, 2009 17903-13 8205A10 PvXarotloM=rmnts0enYTXJFort WoAlu8 OMI Ofthsra6leOmseW- AddaMum M Schedule Add 2 (A) • SH CONTACTORS RIO 1/0 PLC 110 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS SIGNAL TAG SH-REM-C-09 AO 5 7 4 SH-OZ-OF-BA-003-ZC SH-REM-C-09 AO 5 7 5 SH-OZ-OF-BA-004-ZC SH-REM-C-09 AO 5 7 6 Spare ISH-REM-C-09 AO 5 7 7 Spare ISH-REM-C-09 AO 5 7 8 Spare ISH-REM-C-09 AO 5 8 1 SH-OZ-OF-BLR-002-SC ISH-REM-C-09 AO 5 8 2 SH-OZ-OF-BA-005-ZC ISH-REM-C-09 AO 5 8 3 SH-OZ-OF-BA-006-ZC ISH-REM-C-09 AO 5 8 4 SH-OZ-OF-BA-007-ZC ISH-REM-C-09 AO 5 8 5 SH-OZ-OF-BA-008-ZC ISH-REM-C-09 AO 5 8 6 Spare ISH-REM-C-09 AO 5 8 7 Spare (SH-REM-C-09 AO 5 8 8 SH-OZ-OF-BLR-003-SC (GENERATOR 1 PLC 110 1/0 PLC TYPE RACK SLOT POINTADDRESS NH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 3 1 NH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 3 2 INH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 3 3 INH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 3 4 INH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 3 5 INH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 3 6 INH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 3 7 NH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 3 8 NH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 3 9 NH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 3 10 INH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 3 11 INH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 3 12 INH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 3 13 INH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 3 14 DESCRIPTION Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 2 Valve Control Ozone Contactor No.1 Cell 3 Valve Control So. OZ Destruct Blower No.2 Speed Control Ozone Contactor No.2 Feed Valve Control Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 1 Valve Control Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 2 Valve Control Ozone Contactor No.2 Cell 3 Valve Control So. OZ Destruct Blower No.3 Speed Control SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION NH-OZ-GOX-BA-001-ZSO Ozone Gen No.1 GOX inlet Valve Open Status NH-OZ-GOX-BA-001-ZSC Ozone Gen No,1 GOX Inlet Valve Closed Status NH-OZ-GOX-BA-001-RM Ozone Gen No.1 GOX Inlet Valve Remote Status NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-001-ZSO Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Open Status NH-0Z-OCWS-BFV-001-ZSC Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Closed Status NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-001-RM Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Remote Status NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-001-ZSO Ozone Gen No.1 Ozone Flow Ctl Valve Open Status NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-001-ZSC Ozone Gen No.1 Ozone Flow Ct) Valve Closed Status NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-001-RM Ozone Gen No,1 Ozone Flow Ctl Valve Remote Status NH-OZ-OZ-TSH-002-AL Ozone Gen No.1 Power Supply High Temp. Alarm NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-001-RN Ozone Gen No.1 Power Supply Run Status NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-001-AL Ozone Gen No.1 Power Supply Fail Alarm NH-OZ-OZ-PSH-001-AL Ozone Gen No.1 Power Supply High Press.Alarm NH-OZ-OZ-PSL-001-AL Ozone Gen No.1 Power Supply Low Press. Alarm June 22, 2009 17903-14 pw,P arolblDo nwL%0anVrA For( worVU8205 I OneAverabk+sRMSeW - Addendum M Schedule Add 2 (A) 8205A10 IM GENERATOR 1 PLC 1/0 1/0 PLC TYPE RACK -SLOT POINTADDRESS NH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 3 15 NH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 3 16 INH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 4 1 INH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 4 2 INH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 4 3 INH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 4 4 INH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 4 5 INH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 4 6 NH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 4 7 NH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 4 8 NH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 4 9 NH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 4 10 NH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 4 11 NH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 4 12 NH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 4 13 INH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 4 14 INH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 4 15 INH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 4 16 INH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 5 1 INH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 5 2 #NH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 5 3 INH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 5 4 NH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 5 5 NH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 5 6 NH-PLC-Z-16 Di 1 5 7 NH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 5 8 NH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 5 9 NH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 5 10 INH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 5 11 INH-PLC-Z-16 _ DI 1 5 12 INH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 5 13 SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION NH-OZ-OZ-TSH-001-AL Ozone Gen No.1 Product Gas High Temp. Alarm Spare NH-OZ-OCWR-TSH-001-AL Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water No.1 High Temp. Alarm NH-OZ-OCWR-TSH-002 AL Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water No.2 High Temp. Alarm NH-OZ-OCWR-PSH-001-AL Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water No.1 High Press. Alarm NH-OZ-OCWR-PSH--002-AL Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water No.2 High Press. Alarm NH-OZ-OCWR-PMP-001-RN Oz Gen No.1 Cooling Water Pump No.1 Run Status NH-OZ-OCWR-PMP-002-RN Oz Gen No.1 Cooling Water Pump No.2 Run Status NH-OZ-OCWR-PSH-003-AL Oz Gen No.1 CW Pump No.1 Dischq High Press. Alarm NH-OZ-OCWR-PSH-004 AL Oz Gen No.1 CW Pump No.2 Dischg High Press. Alarm NH-OZ-OCWS-PSH-001-AL Oz Gen No.1 HEX No.1 Dischg High Press. Alarm NH-OZ-OCWS-PSH-002-AL Oz Gen No.1 HEX No.2 Dischg High Press. Alarm NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-001-AL Oz Gen No.1 HEX No.1 Dischg Low Flow Alarm ,J NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-002-AL Oz Gen No.1 HEX No.2 Dischg Low Flow Alarm NH-OZ-OCWR-TSH-003-AL Oz Gen No.1 HEX Dischg High Temp Alarm Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare June 22, 2009 17903-15 8205A10 pwjsCam1o0=ffentsrAenVM1Fort WOV82MA10/W*rebleslPres kd - Addendum M Schedule Add 2 (A) t F GENERATOR 1 PLC 1/0 UO PLC TYPE RACK SLOT POINTADDRESS SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION NH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 5 14 Spare NH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 5 15 Spare NH-PLC-Z-16 DI 1 5 16 Spare NH-PLC-Z-16 DO 1 6 1 NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-001-OOC Ozone Gen N6.1 On/Off Control NH-PLC-Z-16 DO 1 6 2 NH-OZ-OCWS-SV-001-OC Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Control INH-PLC-Z-16 DO 1 6 3 Spare INH-PLC-Z-16 DO 1 6 4 Spare INH-PLC-Z-16 DO 1 6 5 Spare INH-PLC-Z-16 DO 1 6 6 Spare INH-PLC-Z-1 6 DO 1 6 7 Spare NH-PLC-Z-16 DO 1 6 8 Spare NH-PLC-Z-16 DO 1 6 9 Spare NH-PLC-Z-16 DO 1 6 10 Spare NH-PLC-Z-16 DO 1 6 11 Spare NH-PLC-Z-16 DO 1 6 12 Spare INH-PLC-Z-16 DO 1 6 13 Spare NH-PLC-Z-16 DO 1 6 14 Spare INH-PLC-Z-16 DO 1 6 15 Spare INH-PLC-Z-16 DO 1 6 16 Spare INH-PLC-Z-16 Al 1 7 1 NH-OZ-GOX-BA-001-ZI Ozone Gen No.1 GOX Inlet Valve Position INH-PLC-Z-16 Al 1 7 2 NH-OZ-GOX-FM-001-FI Ozone Gen No.1 GOX Inlet High Range Flow INH-PLC-Z-16 Al 1 7 3 NH-OZ-GOX-FM-002-FI Ozone Gen No.1 GOX Inlet Low Range Flow INH-PLC-Z-16 Al 1 7 4 NH-OZ-GOX-PIT-O01-PI Ozone Gen No.1 GOX Inlet Press Indication INH-PLC-7--16 AI 1 7 5 NH-OZ-GOX-TIT-001 TI Ozone Gen No.1 GOX Inlet Temp Indication INH-PLC-Z-1 6 Al 1 7 6 NH-OZ-OCWS-TIT-001-TI Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water Inlet Temp. Indication NH-PLC-Z-16 Al 1 7 7 NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-001-ZI Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Position INH-PLC-Z-16 AI 1 7 8 NH-OZ-OCWS-FM-001-F1 Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water Flow INH-PLC-Z-16 AI 1 8 1 NH-OZ-OCWR-TIT-001-T1 Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water Return Temp. Indication NH-PLC-Z-16 Al 1 8 2 NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-001-J1 Ozone Gen No.1 Power Indication NH-PLC-Z-16 Al 1 8 3 NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-001-ZI Ozone Gen No.1 Ozone Flow Valve Position NH-PLC-Z-16 Al 1 8 4 NH-OZ-OZ-AIT-001-Al Ozone Gen No,1 Product Gas Concentration June 22, 2009 17903-16 WJ CaM10nocumanlsM*7 4T;W WDAhB20MI OOdhreraWeslPmseW - Addendum M Schedule Arid 2 (A) 8205A10 GENERATOR 1 PLC JPLC INH-PLC-Z-16 INH-PLC-Z-16 `NH-PLC-Z-16 jNH-PLC-Z-16 INH-PLC-Z-16 INH-PLC-Z-16 INH-PLC-Z-16 INH-PLC-Z-16 INH-PLC-Z-16 NH-PLC-Z-16 NH-PLC-Z-16 NH-PLC-Z-16 jNH-PLC-Z-16 NH-PLC-Z-16 NH-PLC-Z-16 NH-PLC-Z-16 INH-PLC-Z-16 INH-PLC-Z-16 �NH-PLC-Z-16 NH-PLC-Z-16 GENERATOR 2 PLC PLC N H-PLC-Z-46 NH-PLC-Z-46 N H-PLC-Z-46 NH-PLC-Z-46 NH-PLC-Z-46 NH-PLC-Z-46 NH-PLC-Z-46 110 110 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS AI 1 8 5 AI 1 8 6 Al 1 8 7 Al 1 8 8 Al 1 9 1 Al 1 9 2 Al 1 9 3 Al 1 9 4 Al 1 9 5 Al 1 9 6 Al 1 9 7 Al 1 9 8 AO 1 10 1 AO 1 10 2 AO 1 10 3 AO 1 10 4 AO 1 10 5 AO 1 10 6 AO 1 10 7 AO 1 10 8 110 110 TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS DI 1 3 1 DI 1 3 2 DI 1 3 3 DI 1 3 4 DI 1 3 5 DI 1 3 6 DI 1 3 7 SIGNAL TAG N H-O Z-O C WR- F M-001-F I NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-002-FI NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-003-FI NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-004-FI Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare NH-OZ-GOX BA-001-ZC NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV 001-ZC NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-001-JC NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-001-ZC Spare Spare Spare Spare DESCRIPTION Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water No.1 Flow Indication Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water No.2 Flow Indication Ozone Gen No.1 HEX No.1 Dischq Flow Indication Ozone Gen No.1 HEX No.2 Dischq Flow Indication Ozone Gen No,1 GOX Inlet Valve Position Control Ozone Gen No.1 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Position Control Ozone Gen No.1 Power Setpoint Ozone Gen No.1 Ozone Flow Valve Position Control SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION NH-OZ-GOX-BA-002-ZSO Ozone Gen No.2 GOX Inlet Valve Open Status NH-OZ-GOX-BA-002-ZSC Ozone Gen No.2 GOX Inlet Valve Closed Status NH-OZ GOX-BA-002-RM Ozone Gen No.2 GOX Inlet Valve Remote Status NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-002-ZSO Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Open Status NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-002-ZSC Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Closed Status NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-002-RM Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Remote Status NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-002-ZSO Ozone Gen No.2 Ozone Flow Ctl Valve Open Status June 22, 2009 17903-17 8205A10 pwXxo1oX)= merdslCllert rX%rl WoN%SM1 Q,D*mablwRmseled- Addendum M Schedule Add 2 (A) GENERATOR 2 PLC I/O Il0 PLC TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS INH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 3 8 INH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 3 9 INH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 3 10 INH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 3 11 INH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 3 12 INH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 3 13 INH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 3 14 NH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 3 15 NH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 3 16 NH-PLC-Z-46 Di 1 4 1 NH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 4 2 NH-PLCZ-46 DI 1 4 3 INH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 4 4 INH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 4 5 CNH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 4 6 INH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 4 7 INH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 4 8 INH-PLC-Z-46 DI _ 1 4 9 INH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 4 10 �NH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 4 11 NH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 4 12 INH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 4 13 INH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 4 14 INH-PLCZ-46 DI 1 4 15 INH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 4 16 NH-PLC-Z-46 D1 1 5 1 NH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 5 2 NH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 5 3 INH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 5 4 (NH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 5 5 INH-PLC-Z-46 Dl 1 5 6 SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-002-ZSC Ozone Gen No.2 Ozone Flow Ctl Valve Closed Status NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-002-RM Ozone Gen No.2 Ozone Flow Ctl Valve Remote Status NH-OZ-OZ-TSH-004-AL Ozone Gen No.2 Power Supply High Temp. Alarm NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-002-RN Ozone Gen No.2 Power Supply Run Status NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-002-AL Ozone Gen No.2 Power Supply Fail Alarm NH-OZ-OZ-PSH-002-AL Ozone Gen No.2 Power Supply High Press.Alarm NH-OZ-OZ-PSL-002-AL Ozone Gen No.2 Power Supply Low Press. Alarm NH-OZ-OZ-TSH-003-AL Ozone Gen No.2 Product Gas High Temp. Alarm Spare NH-OZ-OCWR-TSH-004-AL Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water No.3 High Temp. Alarm NH-OZ-OCWR-TSH-005-AL Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water No.4 High Temp. Alarm NH-OZ-OCWR-PSL-003-AL Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water No.3 High Press. Alarm NH-OZ-OCWR-PSL-004-AL Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water No.4 High Press. Alarm NH-OZ-OCWR-PMP-002-RN Oz Gen No.2 Cooling Water Pump No.3 Run Status NH-OZ-OCWR-PMP-002-RN Oz Gen No.2 Cooling Water Pump No.4 Run Status NH-OZ-OCWR-PSH-003-AL Oz Gen No.2 CW Pump No.3 Dischg High Press. Alarm NH-OZ-OCWR-PSH-004-AL Oz Gen No.2 CW Pump No.4 Dischg High Press. Alarm NH-OZ-OCWS-PSH-003-AL Oz Gen No.2 HEX No.3 Dischg High Press. Alarm NH-OZ-OCWS-PSH-004-AL Oz Gen No.2 HEX No.4 Dischg High Press. Alarm NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-002-AL Oz Gen No.2 HEX No.3 Dischg Low Flow Alarm NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-002 AL Oz Gen No.2 HEX No.4 Dischg Low Flow Alarm NH-OZ-OCWR-TSH-006-AL Oz Gen No.2 HEX Dischg High Temp Alarm Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare June 22, 2009 17903-18 8205A10 pwJr,arAIDoaarwWC mVMfl ort Wo t8205A10tD*&mbleslPm.select- Addendum M Schedule Add 2 (A) GENERATOR 2 PLC 1/0 1/0 PLC TYPE RACKSLOT POINTADDRESS SIGNAL TAG NH-PLC-Z46 DI 1 5 7 Spare NH-PLC-Z46 DI 1 5 8 Spare NH-PLC-Z46 DI 1 5 9 Spare INH-PLC-Z46 DI 1 5 10 Spare INH-PLC-Z46 DI 1 5 11 Spare INH-PLC-Z46 DI 1 5 12 Spare INH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 5 13 Spare INH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 5 14 Spare NH-PLC-Z-46 DI 1 5 15 Spare NH-PLC-Z46 DI 1 5 16 Spare NH-PLC-Z-46 DO 1 6 1 NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-002-OOC NH-PLC-Z46 DO 1 6 2 NH-OZ-OCWS-SV-002-OC NH-PLC--Z46 DO 1 6 3 Spare NH-PLC-Z-46 DO 1 6 4 Spare NH-PLC-Z-46 DO 1 6 5 Spare NH-PLC-Z-46 DO 1 6 6 Spare NH-PLC-Z46 DO 1 6 7 Spare NH-PLC-Z-46 DO 1 6 8 Spare NH-PLC-Z46 DO 1 6 9 Spare NH-PLC-Z-46 DO 1 6 10 Spare NH-PLC-Z-46 DO 1 6 11 Spare INH-PLC-Z-46 DO 1 6 12 Spare NH-PLC-Z46 DO 1 6 13 Spare NH-PLC-Z46 DO 1 6 14 Spare NH-PLC-Z46 DO 1 6 15 Spare NH-PLC-Z-46 DO 1 6 16 Spare NH-PLC-Z46 Ai 1 7 1 NH-OZ-GOX-BA-002-ZI INH-PLC-Z46 A! 1 7 2 NH-0Z-GOX-FM-003-FI INH-PLC-Z46 Al 1 7 3 NH-OZ-GOX-FM-004-FI INH-PLC-Z-46 Al 1 7 4 NH-OZ-GOX-PIT-002-PI INH-PLC-Z46 Al 1 7 5 NH-OZ-GOX-TIT-002-Ti June 22, 2009 17903-19 PvJr- Aoft—ents0fenUTXlFort WoM OMI01DeltueraM% PresoW - Addendum 240 Schedule Add 2 (A) DESCRIPTION Ozone Gen No.2 On/Off Control Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water Inlet Va Ozone Gen No.2 GOX Inlet Valve Position Ozone Gen No.2 GOX Inlet High Range Flow Ozone Gen No.2 GOX Inlet Low Range Flow Ozone Gen No,2 GOX Inlet Press Indication Ozone Gen No.2 GOX Inlet Temp Indication 8205A10 F GENERATOR 2 PLC 1PLC �NH-PLC-Z-46 NH-PLC-Z-46 NH-PLC-Z-46 INH-PLC-Z-46 iN H-PLC-Z-46 N H-PLC-Z-46 NH-PLC-Z-46 NH-PLC-Z-46 INH-PLC-Z-46 IN H-PLC-Z-46 INH-PLC-Z-46 INH-PLC-Z-46 INH-PLC-Z-46 NH-PLC-Z-46 NH-PLC-Z-46 N H-PLC-Z-46 INH-PLC-Z-46 INH-PLC-Z-46 NH-PLC-Z-46 NH-PLC-Z-46 NH-PLC-Z-46 NH-PLC-Z-46 NH-PLC-Z-46 NH-PLC-Z-46 NH-PLC-Z-46 NH-PLC-Z-46 NH-PLC-Z-46 1/0 110 TYPE RACiCSLOT POINT ADDRESS Al 1 7 6 Al 1 7 7 Al 1 7 8 AI 1 8 1 A[ 1 8 2 Al 1 8 3 Al 1 8 4 Al 1 8 5 Al 1 8 6 Al 1 8 7 A[ 1 8 8 A] 1 9 1 A] 1 9 2 Al 1 9 3 Al 1 9 4 AI 1 9 5 Al 1 9 6 Al 1 9 7 Al 1 9 8 AO 1 10 1 AO 1 10 2 AO 1 10 3 AO 1 10 4 AO 1 10 5 AO 1 10 6 AO 1 10 7 AO 1 10 8 SIGNAL TAG N H-OZ-OC WS-TIT-002-TI N H -O Z-O C WS-B F V-0 02-Z I NH-OZ-OCWS-FM-002-FI N H-OZ-O C WR-TIT-002-TI NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-002-JI NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-002-ZI NH-OZ-OZ-AIT-002-Al NH-OZ-OC WR-FM-005-Fi NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-006-FI N H-OZ-OCWR-FM-007-FI N H-OZ-O C WR-F M-008-F I Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare N H-OZ-GOX-BA-002-ZC N H-O Z-O C WS-B FV-002-ZC NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-002-JC NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-002-ZC Spare Spare Spare Spare June 22, 2009 17903-20 pwJ1Ca opol�owmentslCltentli70Fort WoAh/d205A10AellvetableslPteselec!- Addendum PAO Schedule Add 2 (A) DESCRIPTION Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water Inlet Temp. Indication Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Position Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water Flow Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water Return Temp. Indication Ozone Gen No.2 Power Indication Ozone Gen No.2 Ozone Flow Valve Position Ozone Gen No.2 Product Gas Concentration Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water No.3 Flow Indication Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water No.4 Flow Indication Ozone Gen No.2 HEX No.3 Dischg Flow Indication Ozone Gen No.2 HEX No.4 Dischg Flow Indication Ozone Gen No.2 GOX Inlet Valve Position Control Ozone Gen No.2 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Position Control Ozone Gen No.2 Power Setpoint Ozone Gen No.2 Ozone Flow Valve Position Control 8205A10 GENERATOR 3 PLC 110 1/0 PLC TYPE RACK SLOT POINT ADDRESS NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 1 3 1 NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 3 2 INH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 3 3 INH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 3 4 INH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 3 5 INH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 3 6 INH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 3 7 INH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 3 8 NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 3 9 NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 3 10 NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 3 11 NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 3 12 NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 3 13 NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 3 14 NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 3 15 NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 3 16 NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 4 1 CNH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 4 2 (NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 4 3 NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 4 4 NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 4 5 NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 4 6 NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 4 7 NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 4 8 NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 4 9 NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 4 10 �NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 4 11 NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 4 12 NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 4 13 NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 4 14 NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 4 15 SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION NH-OZ-GOX-BA-003-ZSO Ozone Gen No-3 GOX Inlet Valve Open Status NH-OZ-GOX-BA-003-ZSC Ozone Gen No.3 GOX Inlet Valve Closed Status NH-OZ-GOX-BA-003-RM Ozone Gen No.3 GOX Inlet Valve Remote Status NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-003-ZSO Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Open Status NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-003-ZSC Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Closed Status NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-003-RM Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Remote Status NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-003-ZSO Ozone Gen No.3 Ozone Flow Ctl Valve Open Status NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-003-ZSC Ozone Gen No.3 Ozone Flow Ctl Valve Closed Status NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-003-RM Ozone Gen No.3 Ozone Flow Ctl Valve Remote Status NH-OZ-OZ-TSH-006-AL Ozone Gen No.3 Power Supply High Temp. Alarm NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-003-RN Ozone Gen No.3 Power Supply Run Status NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-003-AL Ozone Gen No.3 Power Supply Fail Alarm NH-OZ-OZ-PSH-003-AL Ozone Gen No.3 Power Supply High Press.Alarm NH-OZ-OZ-PSL-003-AL Ozone Gen No.3 Power Supply Low Press. Alarm NH-OZ-OZ-TSH-005-AL Ozone Gen No.3 Product Gas High Temp. Alarm Spare NH-OZ-OCWR-TSH-007-AL Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water No.1 High Temp. Alarm NH-OZ-OCWR-TSH-008-AL Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water No.2 High Temp. Alarm NH-OZ-OCWR-PSL-005 AL Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water No.1 High Press. Alarm NH-OZ-OCWR-PSL-006-AL Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water No.2 High Press, Alarm NH-OZ-OCWR-PMP-003-RN Oz Gen No.3 Coaling Water Pump No.5 Run Status NH-OZ-OCWR-PMP-003-RN Oz Gen No.3 Cooling Water Pump No.6 Run Status NH-OZ-OCWR-PSH-005-AL Oz Gen No.3 CW Pump No-5 Dischg High Press. Alarm NH-OZ-OCWR-PSH-006 AL Oz Gen No.3 CW Pump No.6 Dischg High Press. Alarm NH-OZ-OCWS-PSH-0.05-AL Oz Gen No.3 HEX No.5 Dischq High Press. Alarm NH-OZ-OCWS-PSH-006-AL Oz Gen No.3 HEX No.6 Dischg High Press. Alarm NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-003-AL Oz Gen No.3 HEX No.5 Dischg Low Flow Alarm NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-003-AL Oz Gen No.3 HEX No.6 Dischg Low Flow Alarm NH-OZ-OCWR-TSH-008-AL Oz Gen No.3 HEX Dischg High Temp Alarm Spare Spare June 22, 2009 17903-21 8205A10 pv ..ACamlloD=r ents IenVrXIFod WortN820SA10OPe embleslPreseW -Addendum M Schedule Add 2 (A) IGENERATOR 3 PLC 1/0 110 PLC TYPE RACK SLOT POINTADDRESS SIGNAL TAG DESCRIPTION INH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 4 16 Spare INH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 5 1 Spare INH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 5 2 Spare INH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 5 3 Spare 4NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 5 4 Spare INH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 5 5 Spare INH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 5 6 Spare ENH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 5 7 Spare INH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 5 8 Spare INH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 5 9 Spare INH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 5 10 Spare NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 5 11 Spare NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 5 12 Spare NH-PLC-Z-56 DI { 4 5 13 Spare NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 5 14 Spare NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 5 15 Spare NH-PLC-Z-56 DI 4 5 16 Spare NH-PLC-Z-56 DO 4 6 1 NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-003-OOC Ozone Gen No.3 On/Off Control (NH-PLC-Z-56 DO 4 6 2 NH-OZ-OCWS-SV-003-OC Ozone Gen No.3 Coolinq Water inlet Valve Control INH-PLC-Z-56 DO 4 6 3 Spare INH-PLC-Z-56 DO 4 6 4 Spare NH-PLC-Z-56 DO 4 6 5 Spare NH-PLC-Z-56 DO 4 6 6 Spare NH-PLC-Z-56 DO 4 6 7 Spare NH-PLC-Z-56 DO 4 6 8 Spare NH-PLC-Z-56 DO 4 6 9 Spare INH-PLC-Z-56 DO 1 4 6 10 Spare INH-PLC-Z-56 DO 1 4 6 11 Spare INH-PLC-Z-56 DO 1 4 6 12 Spare INH-PLC-Z-56 DO I 4 6 13 Spare INH-PLC Z-56 DO ! 4 6 14 Spare June 22, 2009 - 17903-22 8205A10 PWA Caro Words =MI QA*Mabtaft a bd-Addendum M Schedule Add 2 (A) GENERATOR 3 PLC 110 1/0 PLC TYPE RACK SLOT POINTADDRESS SIGNAL TAG NH-PLC-Z-56 DO 4 6 15 Spare NH-PLC-Z-56 DO 4 6 16 Spare INH-PLC-Z-56 Al 4 7 1 NH-OZ-GOX-BA-003-Z) INH-PLC-Z-56 Al 4 7 2 NH-OZ-GOX-FM-005-FI INH-PLC-Z-56 Al 4 7 3 NH-OZ-GOX-FM-OQ6-Fl INH-PLC-Z-56 Al 4 7 4 NH-OZ-GOX-PIT-003-PI INH-PLC-Z-56 Al 4 7 5 NH-OZ-GOX-TIT-003-T1 INH-PLC-Z-56 Al 4 7 6 NH-OZ-OCWS-TIT-003-TI INH-PLC-Z-56 Al 4 7 7 NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-003-ZI jNH-PLC-Z-56 Al 4 7 8 NH-OZ-OCWS-FM-003-F) INH-PLC-Z-56 Al 4 8 1 NH-OZ-OCWR 71T-003-TI INH-PLC-Z-56 Al 4 8 2 NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-003-JI INH-PLC-Z-56 AI 4 8 3 NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-003-Z1 jNH-PLC-Z-56 AI 4 8 4 NH-OZ-OZ-AIT-003-Al INH-PLC-Z-56 Al 4 8 5 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-009-FI (NH-PLC-Z-56 Al 4 8 6 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-01'O-FI INH-PLC-Z-56 Al 4 8 7 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-011-F1 INH-PLC-Z-56 Al 4 8 8 NH-OZ-OCWR-FM-012-FI INH-PLC-Z-56 Al 4 9 1 Spare INH-PLC-Z-56 Al 4 9 2 Spare INH-PLC-Z-56 Al 4 9 3 Spare INH-PLC-Z-56 Al 4 9 4 Spare INH-PLC-Z-56 Al 4 9 5 Spare f NH-PLC-Z-56 AI 4 9 6 Spare INI-l-PLC-Z-56 AI 4 9 7 Spare NH-PLC-Z-56 Al 4 9 8 Spare INH-PLC-Z-56 AO 4 10 1 NH-OZ-GOX-BA-003-ZC !NH-PLC-Z-56 AO 4 10 2 NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-003-ZC NH-PLC-Z-56 AO 4 10 3 NH-OZ-OZ-GEN-003-JC NH-PLC-Z-56 AO 4 10 4 NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-003-ZC NH-PLC-Z-56 AO 4 10 5 Spare June 22, 2009 17903-23 pwl/ CaraloOmmenWCknVrXr,oR worUtl8MI O/DoMrableslP"SeW-Addendum 2AO schedule Add 2 (A) Ozl Ozone uen No.3 uun miet tiign Kange riow Ozone Gen No.3 GOX Inlet Low Range Flow Ozone Gen No.3 GOX Inlet Press Indication Ozone Gen No.3 GOX Inlet Temp Indication Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water Inlet Temp. Indication Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Position Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water Flow Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water Return Temp. Indication Ozone Gen No.3 Power Indication Ozone Gen No.3 Ozone Flow Valve Position Ozone Gen No.3 Product Gas Concentration Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water No.5 Flow Indication Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water No.6 Flow Indication Ozone Gen No.3 HEX No.5 Dischg Flow Indication Ozone Gen No.3 HEX No.6 Dischg Flow Indication Ozone Gen No.3 GOX Inlet Valve Position Control Ozone Gen No.3 Cooling Water Inlet Valve Position Control Ozone Gen No.3 Power Setpoint Ozone Gen No.3 Ozone Flow Valve Position Control E:3�•i�I+yrtH] GENERATOR 3 PLC 110 110 jPLC TYPE RACK SLOT POINTADDRESS SIGNAL TAG INH-PLC-Z-56 AO 4 10 6 Spare INH-PLC-Z-56 AO 4 10 7 Spare INH-PLC-Z-56 AO 4 10 8 Spare imommi DESCRIPTION June 22, 2009 17903-24 8205A10 pw:LCaroUo1Dwuments CllenMFort Wortl1/82Q5AlO/De versbleslPieselett-Addendum M Schedule Add 2 (A) CITY OF FORT WORTH NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WTP UPGRADE OZONE GENERATION EQUIPMENT— PRE -SELECTION FTW09118 ADDENDUM NO. 3 June 26, 2009 The location for the submission of bid is unchanged. BID DATE: Thursday, July 2, 2009, 1:30 pm The following additions, deletions, modifications, or clarifications shall be made to the appropriate sections of the plans and specifications and shall become a part of the Contract Documents. Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the space provided on the Bid form. ADDENDA: A3-1 ADDENDUM NO. 1 A. Reference Page 09905-2, Paragraph 1.05.A Modification: change period from "one (1) year" to "two (2) years" B. Reference Page 09905-2, Paragraph 1.05.E Modification: change period from "one (1) year` to "two (2) year" A3-2 ADDENDUM NO. 1 A. Reference Page 09905-7, Protective Coatings Paint Schedule, SPEC NO. SS-6 Addition: Under the words "Valves and Gates" insert the word "SUBMERGED" TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: A3-3 SECTION 11264A - OZONE SYSTEM A. Reference Page 11264A-3, Sub -paragraph 1.05.13.1. Addition: Add the following after the existing sentence: "The Ozone System Oesig Production Capacity shall be based on two ozone generators operating under the conditions specified for the Ozone Generator Design Production Capacity in Sect 11264C." A3-4 SECTION 11264C - OZONE GENERATORS AND POWER SUPPLIES A. Reference Page 11264C-2, Sub -paragraph 1.03.C.1.b Modification: Modify the sub -paragraph by deleting "70" and adding the following' A3-5 SECTION 11264F - OZONE SYSTEM TESTING A. Reference Page 11264F-6, Paragraph 3.02.13. Modification: Modify the paragraph by deleting "70" and adding the following "80". ADDENDUM No. 3 FTWO9118 B. Reference Page 11264F-6, Paragraph 3.03.13 Modification: Modify the paragraph by deleting "70" and adding the following "80". ,%Me, A3-6 SECTION 17050 - PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Reference Page 17050-20, Paragraph 1.09.1-1. Deletion: Delete this paragraph completely. B. Reference Page 17050-20, Sub -paragraph 1.09.1.5. Modification: Modify the sub -paragraph by deleting "performance", and adding the following "acceptance". C. Reference Page 17050-27, Sub -paragraph 3.05.E Replace the Training Course Summary Table with the followinq: Minimum Personnel Minimum Course Course (Estimated Number Training hours Length In Number of Course Title hours of Students) Sessions System Overview 4 10 1 4 (Operator Training - 24 5 2 48 Basic Operator Training - 16 5 2 32 Advanced PLC Hardware 16 4 1 16 PLC Software 16 4 j 1 16 HMI Hardware and 4 4 1 4 Software Instrument Training 16 4 2 32 Total Training Hours 152 A3-7 SECTION 17110 - OZONE SYSTEM CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS A. Replacement: Replace specification section 17110 with the attached section 17110. A3-8 SECTION 17312 - FLOW MEASUREMENT - ORIFICE PLATE A. Reference Page 17312-1, Article 1.04. Addition: Add the following Paragraph: "C. All orifice sizing calculations." A3-9 SECTION 17530 - ANALYTICAL MEASUREMENT - DEW POINT A, Reference Page 17530-2, Paragraph 1.09.E Modification: Modify the paragraph by deleting "two spare dew point analyzers" and adding the words "one spare dew point analyzer'. A3-10 SECTION 17720 -CONTROL SYSTEMS -PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER HARDWARE A. Reference Page 17720-2. Paragraph 1.10.E Modification: Modify the existing Paragraph B by deleting it and adding the following: "B. In addition to the spare parts requirements in Section 17050, furnish: **#moo, 1. One spare 1/0 card for every type of 1/0 card in the system. ADDENDUM No. 3 00903-2 FTWO9118 SECTION 17110 OZONE SYSTEM CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS GENERAL SUMMARY Section Includes: Common control functions and control descriptions. The control descriptions that follow shall be implemented in the programmable logic controllers (PLCs) provided by the Ozone System Supplier. Some but not all PLC control logic is described in this Section. The Ozone System Supplier shall be responsible for the programming of any logic not included herein that is required for safety or proper operation of the Supplier provided equipment. COMMON CONTROL FUNCTIONS Alarms: Discrepancy Alarms: Each device capable of being controlled by the DCS in REMOTE mode shall have a discrepancy alarm, which shall be displayed at the DCS workstations. The discrepancy alarms shall be derived by the PLC as follows: Device is commanded to start, and the starter auxiliary contact or VFD does not echo the command after an operator -adjustable time delay. Device is commanded to stop, and the starter auxiliary contact or VFD does not echo the command after an operator -adjustable time delay. Device is commanded to open, and the open limit switch does not echo the opened condition after an operator -adjustable time delay. An initial setting of two times the normal full travel time shall be used. Device is commanded to close, and the closed limit switch does not echo the closed condition after an operator -adjustable time delay. An initial setting of two times the normal full travel time shall be used. For modulating valves, the alarm shall activate if the valve position is not within an operator -adjustable percent of scale of the set -point position after an operator -adjustable time delay. An initial setting of 3 percent of scale shall be used. The discrepancy alarms shall only be active if the LOCAUREMOTE selector switch at the device is in REMOTE mode. Once a discrepancy alarm occurs, the PLC shall terminate the command to the device. The command to the device can not be reinitiated until the discrepancy alarm is acknowledged by the operator from the OIS or HMI graphic screen. Within program logic, configure each alarm to eliminate nuisance alarms that would otherwise activate when equipment is not in operation. For example, a low flow alarm on a pump discharge shall not be activated if the pump is off. All alarms derived in program logic, whether from analog measurements, discrete inputs, or discrepancy alarms, shall have an operator -adjustable proving timer to limit nuisance alarms. The timer shall start when an alarm condition is first detected, and shall only activate the alarm after the timer has expired, if the June 09 17110-1 8205A10 alarm condition clears while the timer is running, the timer shall be reset, and the alarm shall not be activated. Alarms Based on Analog Measurements Shall be Derived as Follows: The PLC shall derive alarms by comparing the process measurement to an operator -adjustable set point. Flow Totalizers: Each liquid flow rate transmitted to the PLC shall have a flow total calculated by the PLC as follows: The current day's total flow shall be calculated by the PLC and displayed at the OIS and HMI. These flow totals shall be calculated and displayed even if they are not shown on the P&IDs (Process and Instrumentation Drawings). PID Control Algorithms: Each PID control algorithm shall have a faceplate that shall be displayed at the OIS and HMI. The Face Plate Shall Have the Following Functions: Display process variable. Display set point. Display output. Allow for operator selection of Automatic or Manual control of output. Under manual control of output allow the operator to enter the desired output value. Allow for input of the three PID tuning parameters. The PID algorithm shall include set point and output tracking to provide bumpless control when switching between control modes. Data Validation: The OIS and HMI graphic screens shall accept manually -entered set point data only if it is within valid process range. The OIS and HMI shall require low -low set point to be lower than a low set point, high -high set point higher than a high set point, etc. DEFINITIONS The following definitions shall apply throughout this specification section: DCS: Distributed Control System, consisting of PLCs and HMIs (Human -Machine Interfaces) computers. HMI: Human Machine Interface. OIS: Operator Interface Station, Computer running HSQ MISER human machine interface (HMI) software. GOX: Gaseous (vaporized) oxygen. LOX: Liquid Oxygen. MCC: Motor Control Center. PID: Proportional, integral, derivative controller used for feedback control. PLC: Programmable Logic Controller. PR: Performance Ratio. PROGRAMMING RESPONSIBILITY All graphic screens and logic resident in operator interface stations shall be programmed by HSQ Technology. All logic resident in NH-PLC-G-04, NH-PLC-G-05, NH-HMI-G-19, NH-PLC-Z-16, NH- PLC-Z-46, NH-PLC-Z-56, NH-HMI-Z-17, NH-HMI-Z-47 and NH-HMI-Z-57 shall be June 09 17110-2 8205A10 programmed by the Ozone System Supplier. NH-PLC-G-04 and NH-PLC-G-05 are hot -standby redundant PLC processors located in the Ozone Generation Building PLC Panel. The Ozone Generation Building PLC system human machine interface (NH-HMI-G-19) shall be programmed to serve as a back-up to the operator interface station NH- OIS-G-02. NH-HMI-G-19 shall provide the same ozone system data and control setpoints as NH-OIS-G-02, unless noted otherwise herein. In the event of a communications or DCS failure, the operator shall have full control of the ozone system through NH-HMI-G-19. Data transfer via peer -to -peer communications will be required between the existing HSQ Technology system and the PLCs provided by the Ozone System Supplier. The minimum requirements for this data transfer are described in this specification section. HSQ Technology will be responsible for coordinating this data transfer with the Ozone System Supplier. Ozone System Supplier shall coordinate with HSQ Technology relative to this data transfer. Not Used. PRODUCTS EXECUTION LOX STORAGE AND VAPORIZATION Summary: The equipment and instrumentation described in this Article will be supplied by the Contractor. The Ozone System Supplier shall provide the programming for this equipment as described herein. Tag numbers shown herein are preliminary and are subject to change. General Description: Two LOX tanks will be provided. Liquid oxygen is evaporated in three static ambient vaporizers; typically one will be in service, one in defrost and one in stand-by. Each ambient vaporizer is able to handle 100% of the design oxygen flow. Each vaporizer consists of the vaporizer itself and a motorized outlet valve. Two redundant oxygen particulate filters will be provided. Field Controls and Instrumentation: Instrumentation: LOX Storage Tank No. 1 Level Transmitter. (NH-OX-LOX-LT-001) LOX Storage Tank No. 2 Level Transmitter. (NH-OX-LOX-LT-002) LOX Storage Tank No. 1 High Pressure Switch. (NH-OX-LOX-PSH-001) LOX Storage Tank No. 2 High Pressure Switch. (NH-OX-LOX-PSH-002) LOX Vaporizer No. 1 Outlet GOX Temperature Switch (NH-OX-LOX-TSL-001). LOX Vaporizer No. 2 Outlet GOX Temperature Switch (NH-OX-LOX-TSL-002) LOX Vaporizer No. 3 Outlet GOX Temperature Switch (NH-OX-LOX-TSL-003) Vaporizer Outlet GOX Temperature Transmitter. (NH-OX-GOX-TT-001) GOX Particulate Filter No. 1 Differential Pressure Transmitter. (NH-OX-GOX- DPT-001) June 09 17110-3 8205A10 GOX Particulate Filter No. 2 Differential Pressure Transmitter. (NH-OX-GOX- DPT-002) Pressure Regulating Valve Outlet GOX Pressure Transmitter. (NH-OX-GOX- �"� PIT-001) GOX Dew Point Analyzer. (NH-OX-GOX-AIT-001). Final Control Elements: LOX Vaporizer No. 1 Outlet Valve. (NH-OX-GOX-BFV-001) LOX Vaporizer No. 2 Outlet Valve. (NH-OX-GOX-BFV-002) LOX Vaporizer No. 3 Outlet Valve. (NH-OX-GOX-BFV-003) Local Control Devices: The LOX vaporizer outlet valves are each equipped with Local/Off/Remote selector at the valve actuator. The LOX vaporizer outlet valves are each equipped with Open/Close controls at the valve actuator. Local Process Indicators and Alarms: None. Hard -wired Interlocks: LOX vaporizer outlet valves shall close upon activation of the ozone system emergency shutdown circuit or the plant power failure shutdown circuit. P$ID Drawing Number: In General Contract Drawing Set PLC/SCADA Monitoring and Control Functions: Monitoring Signals: LOX storage tank level. (2) LOX vaporizer outlet valves. (3) Open status. Closed status. Remote mode status. Vaporizer outlet GOX temperature. GOX particulate filter differential pressure. (2) Pressure regulating valve outlet GOX pressure. GOX dew point. Control Signals: LOX vaporizer outlet valves. (3) Open command. Close command. Manual Control. The LOX vaporizer outlet valves may be manually opened and closed from the SCADA graphic screen. Automatic Control. The operator shall have the option to turn on or off the "defrosting" sequence. There are two modes of sequence control for the vaporizers. One is based on a time delay setpoint and the other is based on a rotation command in SCADA. Any single vaporizer unit alarm (low vaporizer outlet GOX temperature) shall also trigger a rotation. LOX vaporizer outlet valves must be in remote to enable the automatic sequence. If there is no unit shutdown alarm and all LOX Vaporizer discharge valves are in remote, the SCADA graphic screen shall indicate that the LOX system is in AUTO READY. The LOX system at this point shall implement the automatic rotation logic. The operator shall have the option to change the 1*000 automatic sequence to MANUAL if the operator decides to do the June 09 17110-4 8205A10 vaporizer operational rotation in manual by activating a momentary pushbutton on the SCADA GRAPHIC SCREEN. Any sequence mode shall involve a rotation in operation between the three vaporizers: one vaporizer is in SERVICE and its discharge valve is open; one vaporizer is in DEFROST and its discharge valve is closed; and one vaporizer is in STANDBY and its discharge valve is closed. The operator shall designate which of the three vaporizers is in STANDBY mode from the SCADA GRAPHIC SCREEN. The operator shall also designate which of the remaining two vaporizers is to start as the SERVICE vaporizer. Upon system start-up, the rotation sequence first opens the SERVICE vaporizer's discharge valve. After the SERVICE vaporizer's initial duty, the rotation sequence first opens the DEFROST vaporizer's discharge valve and after the valve opens, a time delay shall close the previous SERVICE vaporizer's discharge valve and its state changes to DEFROST. The SERVICE unit becomes the DEFROST unit and the DEFROST unit becomes the SERVICE vaporizer. The following are events and control that shall enable a rotation to occur: TIME CONTROL — a retentive timer - adjustable from 0 to 24 hours, associated with an operator entered time setpoint shall be used as a means of shifting operation between vaporizers. When the preset time has elapsed, a rotation occurs. This feature is only available if the LOX system control is on AUTO and is the default rotation control for the vaporizer discharge valves. MANUAL CONTROL — there shall also be an option in SCADA to manually activate a MANUAL ROTATION command. This shall be available only if the LOX System control is changed to MANUAL on the SCADA GRAPHIC SCREEN. VAPORIZER UNIT SHUTDOWN - an existing temperature transmitter located downstream of the vaporizers shall send a signal to the control system. Upon reaching a low temperature set point, the Ozone Generation Building PLC Panel PLC shall automatically initiate a rotation to the DEFROST vaporizer and provide an alarm. This feature shall be only available if the LOX system control is on AUTO. Alarms: LOX tank high level. (2) LOX tank low level, (2) LOX tank high pressure. (2) Vaporizer outlet GOX low temperature. (3) Oxygen particulate filter high differential pressure. (2) Pressure reducing valve outlet GOX high pressure. GOX high dew point. GOX high -high dew point. Software interlocks: None. Calculations: Calculate the volume of oxygen in gallons for each LOX tank based on the level of liquid in the horizontal cylinder of the tank. Operator Functions from HMI (NH-HMI-G-19) and SCADA Screens: Initial LOX vaporizer selection for SERVICE and STANDBY mode in auto sequence. LOX vaporizer outlet valves: (3) June 09 17110-5 8205A10 Manual/auto selection. Open/Close controls. LOX tank high level alarm set point. (2) LOX tank low level alarm set point. (2) LOX tank high pressure alarm set point. (2) Vaporizer outlet GOX low temperature alarm set point. (3) Oxygen particulate filter high differential pressure alarm set point. (2) Pressure reducing valve outlet GOX high pressure alarm set point. GOX high dew point alarm set point. GOX high -high dew point alarm set point. NITROGEN GENERATOR CONTROL DESCRIPTION Summary This control description applies to the nitrogen generator. The addition of small pr amounts of nitrogen into the GOX feed tine can improve the performance of the ozone generators. The nitrogen generator shall be equipped with a local control panel. Two oil -free, reciprocating compressors (one SERVICE and one STANDBY) are provided to compress the air. An air receiver holds the compressed air and controls the operation of the compressors. Air flows from the receiver to a two RW desiccant dryers (one SERVICE and one STANDBY). Dried air is analyzed in a dew point analyzer prior to introduction into the gaseous oxygen stream. A flow controller regulates the nitrogen flow into the gaseous oxygen stream. Field Controls and Instrumentation: Instrumentation: �..� Nitrogen Generator Dew Point Analyzer. (NH-OZ-N2-AIT-001) Nitrogen Generator Flow Meter with Integral Flow Control Valve. (NH-OZ-N2- FIC-001) Nitrogen Generators Air Receiver Tank Pressure Gauge. (NH-OZ-N2-PI-001) Nitrogen Generators Air Receiver Tank High Pressure Switch. (NH-OZ-N2-- PSH-001) Nitrogen Generators Air Receiver Tank High -High Pressure Switch. (NH-OZ- N2--PSH-002) Nitrogen Generators Air Receiver Tank Low Pressure Switch. (NH-OZ-N2-- PSL-001) Nitrogen Generators Air Receiver Tank Low -Low Pressure Switch. (NH-OZ- N2--PSL-002) Nitrogen Generators Dried Air Pressure Gauge (NH-OZ-N2-PI-002) Desiccant Dryer Discharge No. 1 Pressure Gauge (NH-OZ-N2-PI-003) Desiccant Dryer Discharge No. 2 Pressure Gauge (NH-OZ-N2-PI-004) Final Control Elements: M Nitrogen Generator Compressor No. 1. (NH-OZ-N2-AC-001) Nitrogen Generator Compressor No. 2. (NH-OZ-N2-AC-002) Nitrogen Generator Desiccant Dryer No. 1. (NH-OZ-N2-DY-001) Nitrogen Generator Desiccant Dryer No. 2. (NH-OZ-N2-DY-002) Nitrogen Generator Coalescing Filter Drain Solenoid Valve No. 1. (NH-OZ-N2- SV-001) Nitrogen Generator Coalescing Filter Drain Solenoid Valve No. 2. (NH- OZ- N2-SV-002) Local Control Devices: June 09 17110-6 8205A10 The nitrogen generation system is equipped with a local control panel that includes the following local control devices: Hand/Off/Auto selector for each of the nitrogen generator compressors. Local Process Indicators and Alarms: The nitrogen generation system local control panel includes the following local process indicators and alarms. Running status light for each of the nitrogen generator compressors. Overload alarm light for each of the nitrogen generator compressors. Air receiver tank high -high pressure alarm light. Air receiver tank low -low pressure alarm light. On status light'for each of the nitrogen generator desiccant dryers. Hardwired Interlocks: The nitrogen generator compressors shut down on motor overload. The nitrogen generator compressors shut down on high dew point. One of the compressors starts on receiver tank low pressure and stops on receiver tank high pressure. The compressors automatically alternate starts when both are in Auto. P&lD Drawing Number: 7-N-104. PLC/SCADA Monitoring and Control Functions: Monitoring Signals: Nitrogen Generator Compressors. (2) Running status. Nitrogen Generator Desiccant Dryers. (2) On status. Nitrogen generator dew point. Nitrogen generator flow rate. Control Signals: Nitrogen Generator Coalescing Filter Drain Solenoid Valves. (2) Open command. Nitrogen generator flow control set point. Manual Control. The flow meter with integral control valve may be given a manual flow set point. Automatic Control. The nitrogen generation system flow rate shall be automatically controlled by the PLC based on flow -paced set point. The operator enters a Flow Ratio set point (scfm nitrogen/scfm total GOX flow). The PLC shall automatically modulate the flow meter with integral control valve to maintain the Flow Ratio set point. The PLC shall automatically open the coalescing filter drain valve for an 'On' desiccant dryer for an operator entered timed duration and at an operator entered time set frequency. Alarms: Compressor overload. (2) Receiver tank high -high pressure. Receiver tank low -low pressure. High dew point. Software interlocks: None. Calculations: None. June 09 17110-7 8205A10 Operator Functions from HMI (NH-HMI-G-19) and SCADA Screens: Flow meter with integral control valve Auto/Manual selection. Flow meter with integral control valve manual flow rate set point. Nitrogen generation system Flow Ratio set point. Coalescing filter drain valve open time duration and frequency set points. High dew point alarm set point. OZONE GENERATORS Summary: Three new ozone generators are being provided to serve both the North and South Holly Water Treatment Plants. These generators will be manifolded so that any generator can serve any plant. During low ozone production periods, one generator may serve both plants. The cooling water control descriptions and information herein are written around an open -loop cooling water system. If a closed -loop cooling system is required as shown in P&IDs 7-N-106, 7-N-108 and 7-N-110, then the Ozone System Supplier shall develop the additional control descriptions, in a format consistent with those herein, as required for a fully -functional and operational cooling water system. The control descriptions herein for the open -loop cooling system shall be incorporated into the open -loop portion of the closed - loop cooling system, if provided, including the modulation of open -loop cooling water flow. Each ozone generator will be provided with a dedicated power supply. Each power supply will be provided with a PLC and HMI. Field Controls and Instrumentation: Instrumentation: Ozone Generator No, 1 GOX Pressure Indicator (NH-OZ-GOX-PI-001) Ozone Generator No. 2 GOX Pressure Indicator (NH-OZ-GOX-PI-002) Ozone Generator No, 3 GOX Pressure Indicator (NH-OZ-GOX-PI-003) Ozone Generator No. 1 High Range GOX Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ-GOX- FM-001) Ozone Generator No, 2 High Range GOX Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ-GOX- FM-003) Ozone Generator No. 3 High Range GOX Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ-GOX- FM-005) Ozone Generator No. 1 Low Range GOX Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ-GOX- FM- 002) Ozone Generator No. 2 Low Range GOX Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ-GOX- FM- 004) Ozone Generator No. 3 Low Range GOX Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ-GOX- FM- 006) Ozone Generator No. 1 GOX Pressure Transmitter (NH-OZ-GOX-PIT-001) Ozone Generator No. 2 GOX Pressure Transmitter (NH-OZ-GOX-PIT-002) Ozone Generator No. 3 GOX Pressure Transmitter (NH-OZ-GOX-PIT-003) Ozone Generator No. 1 GOX Temperature Transmitter (NH-OZ-GOX-TIT- 001) Ozone Generator No. 2 GOX Temperature Transmitter (NH-OZ-GOX-TIT- 002) Ozone Generator No. 3 GOX Temperature Transmitter (NH-OZ-GOX-TIT- 003) Ozone Generator No. 1 Product Gas Pressure Indicator (NH-OZ-OZ-PI-001) Ozone Generator No. 2 Product Gas Pressure Indicator (NH-OZ-OZ-PI-003) June 09 17110-8 8205A10 Ozone Generator No. 3 Product Gas Pressure Indicator (NH-OZ-OZ-PI-005) Ozone Generator No. 1 Product Gas High Pressure Switch (NH-OZ-OZ-PSH- 001) Ozone Generator No. 2 Product Gas High Pressure Switch (NH-OZ-OZ-PSH- 002) Ozone Generator No. 3 Product Gas High Pressure Switch (NH-OZ-OZ-PSH- 003) Ozone Generator No. 1 Product Gas Low Pressure Switch (NH-OZ-OZ-PSL- 001) Ozone Generator No. 2 Product Gas Low Pressure Switch (NH-OZ-OZ-PSL- 002) Ozone Generator No. 3 Product Gas Low Pressure Switch (NH-OZ-OZ-PSL- 003) Ozone Generator No. 1 Product Gas Temperature Indicator (NH-OZ-OZ-TI- 001) Ozone Generator No. 2 Product Gas Temperature Indicator (NH-OZ-OZ-TI- 002) Ozone Generator No. 3 Product Gas Temperature Indicator (NH-OZ-OZ-TI- 003) Ozone Generator No. 1 Product Gas High Temperature Switch (NH-OZ-OZ- TSH-001) Ozone Generator No. 2 Product Gas High Temperature Switch (NH-OZ-OZ- TSH-002) Ozone Generator No. 3 Product Gas High Temperature Switch (NH-OZ-OZ- TSH-003) Ozone Generator No. 1 Product Gas Ozone Concentration Analyzer (NH-OZ- OZ-AIT-001) `now Ozone Generator No. 2 Product Gas Ozone Concentration Analyzer (NH-OZ- OZ-AIT-002) Ozone Generator No. 3 Product Gas Ozone Concentration Analyzer (NH-OZ- OZ-AIT-003) Ozone Generator No. 1 Product Gas Pressure Indicator (NH-OZ-OZ-PI-002) Ozone Generator No. 2 Product Gas Pressure Indicator (NH-OZ-OZ-PI-004) Ozone Generator No. 3 Product Gas Pressure Indicator (NH-OZ-OZ-PI-006) Ozone Generator No. 1 Cooling Water Inlet Pressure Indicator (NH-OZ- OCWS-PI-001) Ozone Generator No. 2 Cooling Water Inlet Pressure Indicator (NH-OZ- OCWS-PI-002) Ozone Generator No. 3 Cooling Water Inlet Pressure Indicator (NH-OZ- OCWS-PI-003) Ozone Generator No. 1 Cooling Water Inlet Temperature Transmitter (NH-OZ- OCWS-TIT-001) Ozone Generator No. 2 Cooling Water Inlet Temperature Transmitter (NH-OZ- OCWS-TIT-002) Ozone Generator No. 3 Cooling Water Inlet Temperature Transmitter (NH-OZ- OCWS-TIT-003) Ozone Generator No. 1 Cooling Water Inlet Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ-OCWS- FM-001) Ozone Generator No. 2 Cooling Water Inlet Flaw Transmitter (NH-OZ-OCWS- FM-002) Ozone Generator No. 3 Cooling Water Inlet Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ-OCWS- �''FM-003) June 09 17110-9 8205A10 Ozone Generator No. 1 Cooling Water Outlet Temperature Transmitter (NH- OZ-OCWR-TIT-001) Ozone Generator No. 2 Cooling Water Outlet Temperature Transmitter (NH- `' OZ-OCWR-TIT-002) Ozone Generator No. 3 Cooling Water Outlet Temperature Transmitter (NH- OZ-OCWR-TIT-003) Ozone Generator No. 1 PSU Cooling Water Inlet Flow Indicator (NH-OZ- OCWR-RM-001) Ozone Generator No. 2 PSU Cooling Water Inlet Flow Indicator (NH-OZ- OCW R-RM-002) Ozone Generator No. 3 PSU Cooling Water Inlet Flow Indicator (NH-OZ- OCW R-RM-003) PSU No. 1 Cooling Water Outlet Temp Transmitter (NH-OZ-OCWR-TIT-002) PSU No. 2 Cooling Water Outlet Temp Transmitter (NH-OZ-OCWR-TIT-004) PSU No. 3 Cooling Water Outlet Temp Transmitter (NH-OZ-OCWR-TIT-006) Final Control Elements; Ozone Generator No. 1 GOX Inlet Valve (NH-OZ-GOX-BA-001) Ozone Generator No. 2 GOX Inlet Valve (NH-OZ-GOX-BA-002) Ozone Generator No. 3 GOX Inlet Valve (NH-OZ-GOX-BA-003) Ozone Generator No. 1 Ozone Flow Control Valve (NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-001) Ozone Generator No. 2 Ozone Flow Control Valve (NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-002) Ozone Generator No. 3 Ozone Flow Control Valve (NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-003) Ozone Generator No. 1 Cooling Water Inlet Valve (NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-001) Ozone Generator No. 2 Cooling Water Inlet Valve (NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-002) Ozone Generator No. 3 Cooling Water Inlet Valve (NH-OZ-OCWS-BFV-003) Local Control Devices: The ozone generator GOX inlet, ozone flow control and cooling water inlet ,%.r valves are each equipped with Local/Off/Remote selector at the valve actuator. The ozone generator cooling water, GOX flow, and ozone flow control valves are each equipped with Open/Stop/Close controls at the valve actuator. Each ozone generator power supply local control panel is equipped with a dedicated PLC and panel -mounted HMI. From the HMI, the operator may select "LOCAL" or "REMOTE" control mode. The ozone generator power supply local control panel shall control the solenoid valve on each generator's power supply cooling water inlet line. Local Process Indicators and Alarms: Those specified for the power supply in Section 11264C. Hard -wired Interlocks: Interlocks internal to the power supply as specified in Section 11264C and required by the Ozone System Supplier. The on-line ozone generators shall ramp to zero ozone production upon activation of the ozone system emergency shutdown circuit. P&ID Drawing Numbers: 7-N-105, 7-N-107, and 7-N-109 plus 7-N-106, 7-N-108, and 7- N-110 if required. PLC/SCADA Monitoring and Control Functions: Monitoring Signals: Ozone generator GOX inlet valves (3) Valve position Open status Closed status June 09 17110-10 8205A10 M Remote mode status Ozone generator ozone flow control valves (3) Valve position Open status Closed status Remote mode status Ozone generator cooling water inlet valves (3) Valve position Open status Closed status Remote mode status Ozone generator high range GOX flow (3) Ozone generator low range GOX flow (3) Ozone generator GOX pressure (3) Ozone generator GOX temperature (3) Ozone generator product gas ozone concentration (3) Ozone generator cooling water inlet temperature (3) Ozone generator cooling water flow (3) Ozone generator cooling water outlet temperature (3) Ozone generator power supply run status (3) Ozone generator shut -down status (3) Ozone generator power supply power input (3) Control Signals: Ozone generator GOX inlet valve (3) Position control Ozone generator ozone flow control valve (3) Position control Ozone generator cooling water inlet valves (3) Position control Ozone generator on/off control (3) Ozone generator power input set point (3) Manual Control. The GOX inlet valves, the ozone flow control valves, and the cooling water inlet valves shall be capable of being manually positioned from the HMI or SCADA screens. The ozone generator shall be capable of being manually started and stopped from the HMI or SCADA screens. The ozone generator power set point shall be manually selectable from the HMI or SCADA screen. Automatic Control. Ozone Generator Inlet Oxygen Pressure Control The oxygen gas pressure control maintains pressure entering each ozone generator while in operation. The GOX inlet valve is modulated based on an operator entered adjustable set point pressure. A PID control algorithm shall be programmed in the ozone generator individual PLC control logic. The set point for the PID algorithm shall be the inlet pressure set point from the main ozone control system. The process variable for the PID shall be the ozone generator GOX inlet pressure. The controlled variable of the PID shall be the position input to the GOX inlet valve. In ozone generator local mode, the operator shall have the option to manually enter the inlet oxygen pressure setpoint (SP) at the ozone generator power supply HMI . In Auto SCADA mode, the ozone June 09 17110-11 8205A10 M M N*Mps June 09 generator PLC shall use a pressure setpoint from the Ozone Generation Building PLC Panel PLC and identical to the pressure setpoint for all other online ozone generators. The ozone generator Manual/Auto pressure selector mode shall be a selection on the ozone generator power supply HMI screen, Ozone Generator Product Gas Concentration Control A constant ozone product gas concentration output shall be maintained for each generator, regardless of changes in ozone production requirements, by varying the power output of the PSU to the generator in response to an ozone concentration setpoint from the main ozone control system. A PID control algorithm shall be programmed in the ozone generator individual PLC control logic. The set point for the PID algorithm shall be the ozone concentration setpoint from the main ozone control system. The process variable for the PID shall be the ozone generator product gas concentration as measured by the ozone concentration analyzer on the generator discharge. The controlled variable of the. PID shall be the power output of the PSU to the generator. In ozone generator local mode, the operator shall have the option to manually enter the ozone concentration setpoint (SP) at the ozone generator power supply HMI, In Auto SCADA mode, the ozone generator PLC shall use a concentration setpoint from the Ozone Generation Building PLC Panel PLC and identical to the ozone concentration setpoint for all other online ozone generators. The ozone generator Manual/Auto concentration selector mode shall be a selection on the ozone generator power supply HMI screen. Ozone Generator Cooling Water Control The generator cooling water flow rate shall be automatically controlled via two control modes: delta temperature (AT) control, or flow control. In delta temperature control mode, a PID control algorithm shall be programmed in the ozone generator power supply PLC control logic. The set point for the PID algorithm shall be an operator -entered delta temperature set point in the range of 5 OF to 20 OF in increments of 1 OF. The process variable for the PID shall be cooling water delta temperature as measured by the cooling water inlet and outlet temperature transmitters. The controlled variable of the PID shall be the flow setpoint for the cooling water. The flow setpoint shall be then be used to modulate inlet control valve position as described below in flow control mode. In Flow control mode, a PID control algorithm shall be programmed in the ozone generator power supply PLC control logic. The set point for the PID algorithm shall be an operator -entered flow set point. The process variable for the PID shall be cooling water flow rate as measured by the cooling water inlet flow transmitter. The controlled variable of the PID shall be cooling water inlet control valve position. The open -loop cooling water loop to the power supply units shall be controlled from the power supply by control of a solenoid valve on the cooling water inlet, Ozone Generator Lead -Lag Operation The operator shall be capable of designating each of the three ozone 9enerators as LEAD, LAG and STAND-BY from the Ozone Generation Building PLC Panel HMI or SCADA screens, The 17110-12 8205A10 operator shall also be able to designate any or all of the ozone generators as OUT -OF -SERVICE, so that the auto sequence algorithm will not attempt to start an OUT -OF -SERVICE ozone generator. The DEAD ozone generator will operate alone if the total ozone required for both plants is lower than an adjustable production rate (initial setting = 2700 lb/day). As the total ozone required exceeds the adjustable rate, the ozone system will automatically bring on line the LAG ozone generator. The ozone system will verify that all necessary devices associated with an ozone generator are in REMOTE prior to initiating the start command to the LAG ozone generator. When two ozone generators are operating, the ozone system will automatically take off line the LAG ozone generator when the total ozone required goes below an adjustable production rate (initial setting = 2400 lb/day). Ozone Generator Shutdown In the event of an ozone generator shutdown, an automatic re -start of an off-line ozone generator shall be attempted provided all permissives are met. The auto -start shall include purge sequence of the off-line generator and once on-line, the generator will operate based on production demand. Ozone Generator Auto Start If all components of the LEAD and LAG ozone generators are in remote and capable of control from HMI and SCADA, that generator shall be in an AUTO -READY state and shall be capable of control by the Auto Start and Control algorithms described in this section. Alarms. Ozone generator GOX high range low flow alarm (3) Ozone generator GOX low range low flow alarm (3) Ozone generator product gas high pressure alarm (3) Ozone generator product gas low pressure alarm (3) Ozone generator product gas high temperature alarm (3) Ozone generator product gas high ozone concentration alarm (3) Ozone generator product gas low ozone concentration alarm (3) Ozone generator cooling water low flow alarm (3) Ozone generator cooling water low -low flow alarm (3) Ozone generator cooling water outlet high temperature alarm (3) Ozone generator power supply high temperature alarm (3) Ozone generator power supply high cooling water temperature alarm (3) Ozone generator power supply failure alarm (3) Software interlocks The ozone generators shall go to STANDBY mode upon activation of the plant power failure shutdown signal. Calculations: None. Operator functions from each ozone generator power supply HMI Screen: Ozone generator: On/Off control. Kilowatt power set point. GOX inlet valves: Manual/auto selection. Open/Close controls. Ozone flow control valves June 09 17110-13 8205A10 f� 13 F F Manual/auto selection. Open/Close controls. Cooling water inlet valves: Manual/auto selection. Open/Close controls. Ozone generator inlet pressure set point Ozone generator cooling water differential temperature set point Ozone generator cooling water flow set point Ozone generator concentration set point GOX low flow alarm set point. Cooling water low flow alarm set point. Cooling water low -low flow alarm set point. Cooling water outlet high temperature alarm set point. PSU cooling water outlet high temperature alarm set point. Ozonated product gas high ozone concentration alarm set point. Ozonated product gas low ozone concentration alarm set point. Operator Functions from HMI (NH-HMI-G-19) and SCADA Screens: Ozone generators (3) Manual/Auto selection. On/Off control. Shutdown time duration set point. Oxygen purge time duration set point. Kilowatt power set point. GOX inlet valves (3) Manual/Auto selection. Open/Close controls. Cooling water inlet valves (3) Manual/Auto selection. Open/Close controls. Ozone flow control valves (3) Manual/Auto selection. Valve position set point. Ozone generator inlet pressure set point (3) Ozone generator cooling water differential temperature set point (3) Ozone generator cooling water flow set point (3) Ozone generator concentration set point. (3) GOX.low flow alarm set point. (3) Cooling water low flow alarm set point. (3) Cooling water low -low flow alarm set point. (3) Cooling water outlet high temperature alarm set point. (3) Ozone generator power supply high temperature alarm set point. (3) Ozonated product gas high pressure alarm set point. (3) Ozonated product gas low pressure alarm set point. (3) Ozonated product gas high temperature alarm set point. (3) Ozonated product gas high ozone concentration alarm set point. (3) Ozonated product gas low ozone concentration alarm set point. (3) OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM Summary: The following control descriptions are written for the Holly North Ozone Contactors. The exact programming shall be provided for both the Holly North and South Ozone Contactors by the Ozone System Supplier. June 09 17110-14 8205A10 W& The ozone destruct system catalytically destroys ozone in the contactor off -gas stream. Each ozone destruct system is equipped with a local control panel. Field Controls and Instrumentation: Instrumentation: North Ozone Destruct System Inlet Pressure Transmitter (NH-OZ-OF-PIT- 001). North Ozone Destruct System No. 1 Inlet Temperature Transmitter (NH-OZ- OF-TIT-001). North Ozone Destruct System No. 2 Inlet Temperature Transmitter (NH-OZ- OF-TIT-003). North Ozone Destruct System No. 3 Inlet Temperature Transmitter (NH-OZ- OF-TIT-005). North Ozone Destruct System No. 1 Preheater High Temperature Switch (NH- OZ-OF-TSH-001). North Ozone Destruct System No. 2 Preheater High Temperature Switch (NH- OZ-OF-TSH-002). North Ozone Destruct System No. 3 Preheater High Temperature Switch (NH- OZ-OF-TSH-003). North Ozone Destruct System No. 1 Preheater Temperature Controller (NH- OZ-OF-TIC-001). North Ozone Destruct System No. 2 Preheater Temperature Controller (NH- OZ-OF-TIC-002). North Ozone Destruct System No. 3 Preheater Temperature Controller (NH- OZ-OF-TIC-003). North Ozone Destruct System No. 1 Catalytic Destruct Unit Differential Pressure Gauge (NH-OZ-OF-PDI-001). North Ozone Destruct System No. 2 Catalytic Destruct Unit Differential Pressure Gauge (NH-OZ-OF-PDI-002). North Ozone Destruct System No. 3 Catalytic Destruct Unit Differential Pressure Gauge (NH-OZ-OF-PDI-003). North Ozone Destruct System No. 1 Heated Off -gas Temperature Transmitter (NH-OZ-OF-TIT-002). North Ozone Destruct System No. 2 Heated Off -gas Temperature Transmitter (NH-OZ-OF-TIT-004). North Ozone Destruct System No. 3 Heated Off -gas Temperature Transmitter (NH-OZ-OF-TIT-006). North Ozone .Destruct System No. 1 Blower Feed Gas Low Pressure Switch (NH-OZ-OF-PSL-001). North Ozone Destruct System No. 2 Blower Feed Gas Low Pressure Switch (NH-OZ-OF-PSL-002). North Ozone Destruct System No. 3 Blower Feed Gas Low Pressure Switch (NH-OZ-OF-PSL-003). North Ozone Destruct System No. 1 Blower Feed Gas Pressure Indicator (NH- OZ-OF-PI-001). North Ozone Destruct System No. 2 Blower Feed Gas Pressure Indicator (NH- OZ-OF-PI-002). North Ozone Destruct System No. 3 Blower Feed Gas Pressure Indicator (NH- OZ-OF-PI-003). North Ozone Destruct System No. 1 Off -Gas Ozone Concentration Analyzer (NH-OZ-OF-AIT-001). North Ozone Destruct System No. 2 Off -Gas Ozone Concentration Analyzer (NH-OZ-OF-AIT-002). PP June 09 17110-15 8205A10 North Ozone Destruct System No. 3 Off -Gas Ozone Concentration Analyzer (NH-OZ-OF-AIT-003). Final Control Elements: North Ozone Destruct System No. 1 Inlet Valve (NH-OZ-OF-BFV-001). North Ozone Destruct System No. 2 Inlet Valve (NH-OZ-OF-BFV-002). North Ozone Destruct System No. 3 Inlet Valve (NH-OZ-OF-BFV-003). North Ozone Destruct System No. 1 Preheater (NH-OZ-OF-PH-001). North Ozone Destruct System No. 2 Preheater (NH-OZ-OF-PH-002). North Ozone Destruct System No. 3 Preheater (NH-OZ-OF-PH-003). North Ozone Destruct System No. 1 Off -Gas Blower (NH-OZ-OF-BLR-001). North Ozone Destruct System No. 2 Off -Gas Blower (NH-OZ-OF-BLR-002). North Ozone Destruct System No. 3 Off -Gas Blower (NH-OZ-OF-BLR-003). Local Control Devices: Each ozone destruct system is equipped with a local control panel that includes the following local control devices: Local/Off/Remote selector and local On/Off switch for the preheater. A single loop controller to modulate the preheater power output. Ozone destruct system preheater power output shall be modulated to maintain an adjustable temperature differential between the heated off -gas temperature and the inlet temperature. Initial differential temperature set point shall be 30 degrees F. Local/Off/Remote selector, local Start/Stop switch, and speed control for the off -gas blower. Off -gas blower variable frequency drive Local Process Indicators and Alarms: Each ozone destruct system local control panel includes the following local process indicators and alarms. On status light for the preheater. Failure alarm light for the off -gas blower. Speed indication for the off -gas blower. Hardwired Interlocks: Each off -gas blower shuts down on VFD failure. Each ozone destruct system preheater shall be interlocked to shut down on high temperature as detected by the ozone destruct system preheater high temperature switch. Each ozone destruct system preheater shall be interlocked to the position status of the corresponding destruct system inlet valve. The preheater shall not operate unless the inlet valve is not closed. P&ID Drawing Numbers: North - 7-N-111, 7-N-112, 7-N-113, South - 7-N-114, 7-N-115, 7-N-116. PLC/SCADA Monitoring and Control Functions: Monitoring Signals Ozone destruct system inlet pressure. Ozone destruct system inlet temperature. (3) Ozone destruct system inlet valves. (3) Open -closed status. Control mode status. 110- Ozone destruct system preheater. (3) On status. '`wo, Control mode status. OF Ozone destruct system heated off -gas temperature. (3) June 09 17110-16 8205A10 Ozone destruct system blower. (3) Speed indication. Control mode status. Run status. Ozone destruct system off -gas concentration. (3) Control Signals: Ozone destruct system inlet valves. (3). Open command. Close command. Ozone destruct system preheater. (3) On -off control. Ozone destruct system blower. (3) Speed control. Start -stop control. Manual Control. Each ozone destruct system inlet valve shall be capable of being manually opened and closed from the SCADA graphic screen. Each ozone destruct system preheater shall be capable of being manually turned on and off from the SCADA graphic screen. Each ozone destruct system blower shall be capable of being manually started and stopped from the SCADA graphic screen. Each ozone destruct system blower speed shall be capable of being manually controlled from the SCADA graphic screen. Automatic Control. Each ozone destruct system blower speed shall be modulated to maintain an adjustable ozone destruct system inlet pressure. Each operational ozone destruct system blower shall be controlled to the same speed. Initial inlet pressure set point shall be 6 inches of water - vacuum. The operator shall be capable of designating each of the three ozone destruct systems at each plant as DEAD, LAG and STAND-BY from the HMI or SCADA screens. The operator shall also be able to designate any or all of the ozone destruct systems as OUT -OF -SERVICE, so that the auto sequence algorithm described below in the article entitled `Ozone System Control' will not attempt to start an OUT -OF -SERVICE ozone destruct system. The LEAD ozone destruct system will operate alone if the feed gas to a plant as measured by the Plant Feed Gas Flow Meter is lower than an adjustable gas flow rate (initial setting = 230 scfm). As the total feed gas exceeds the adjustable rate at either plant, the ozone system will automatically bring on line the LAG ozone destruct system for that plant. The ozone system will verify that all necessary devices associated with an ozone destruct system are in REMOTE prior to initiating the start command to the LAG ozone destruct system. When two ozone destruct systems are operating, the ozone system will automatically take off line the LAG ozone destruct system when the total gas flow goes below an adjustable feed rate (initial setting = 200 scfm). In the event of an ozone destruct system shutdown as a result of a VFD failure, an automatic re -start of an LAG or STAND-BY ozone destruct system shall be attempted provided all permissives are met. Once on-line, the ozone destruct system will operate in the automatic control mode as described herein. Ozone Destruct System Auto Start If all components of the LEAD and LAG ozone destruct systems for a plant are in remote and capable of control from HMI and SCADA, June 09 17110-17 8205A10 that ozone destruct system shall be in an AUTO -READY state and shall be capable of control .by the Auto Start and Control algorithms described in this section. Alarms: Ozone destruct system preheater high temperature alarm. (3) Ozone destruct system heated off -gas low temperature. (3) Ozone destruct system blower feed -gas low pressure alarm. (3) Ozone destruct system blower VFD failure alarm. (3) Ozone destruct system off -gas high ozone concentration alarm. (3) Ozone destruct system off -gas high -high ozone concentration alarm. (3) Software interlocks: None. Calculations: None, Operator Functions from HMI (NH-HMI-G-19) and SCADA Screens: Ozone destruct system Lead/Lag/Standby selection Ozone destruct system inlet valve open and closed commands (3) Ozone destruct system preheater start and stop control (3) Ozone destruct system blowers manual/auto control Ozone destruct system blowers manual speed control Ozone destruct system inlet pressure set point Auto start LAG ozone destruct system feed gas flow rate set point Auto stop LAG ozone destruct system feed gas flow rate set point Preheated gas low temperature alarm set point Blower feed gas low pressure alarm set point Off -gas high concentration alarm set point Off -gas high -high concentration alarm set point OZONE CONTACTORS - CT CALCULATION Summary: The instrumentation described in this Article will be supplied by the Contractor. The Ozone System Supplier shall provide the programming for this equipment as described herein. Tag numbers shown herein are preliminary and are subject to change. The following control descriptions are written for the two Holly North Ozone Contactors. The exact programming shall be provided for both the Holly North and the two South Ozone Contactors by the Ozone System Supplier except for the plant specific requirements noted below. Calculation of CT (Concentration x Time) is necessary to determine ozone contactor disinfection credit. The Surface Water Treatment Rule (SWTR) requires 0.5-log Giardia and 2-logs virus inactivation required from disinfection. The operating target will be 2-logs virus inactivation. Partial direct credit for virus or Giardia may be taken in Ozone Contactor Cell 1, depending on the ozone residual at the outlet of Cell 1. Downstream of Cell 1, CT will be calculated using the effluent method for virus and Giardia inactivation. Calculated CT will be converted to log inactivation credit based on water temperature. The total disinfection credit from ozone is the sum of the direct and CT credit. Disinfection performance ratio will be determined from the total credit (calculated) and the target (required) credit. Field Controls and Instrumentation: Instrumentation: June.09 17110-18 8205A10 North Ozone Contactor No. 1 Ozone Residual Analyzer No. 1 (NH-OZ- OW-ORA-001).. North Ozone Contactor No, 1 Ozone Residual Analyzer No. 2 (NH-OZ-OW- `` ORA-002). North Ozone Contactor No. 1 Ozone Residual Analyzer No. 3 (NH-OZ-OW- ORA-003). North Ozone Contactor No. 1 Ozone Residual Analyzer No. 4 (NH-OZ-OW- ORA-004). North Ozone Contactor No. 2 Ozone Residual Analyzer No. 1 (NH-OZ-OW- ORA-005). North Ozone Contactor No. 2 Ozone Residual Analyzer No. 2 (NH-OZ-OW- ORA-006). North Ozone Contactor No. 2 Ozone Residual Analyzer No. 3 (NH-OZ-OW- ORA-007). North Ozone Contactor No. 2 Ozone Residual Analyzer No. 4 (NH-OZ-OW- ORA-008). North Ozone Contactor Plant Water Temperature Transmitter (NH-OZ-RW- TIT-001). North Raw Water Flowmeters (existing). Final Control Elements: None, Local Control Devices: None. Local Process Indicators and Alarms: None. Hardwired Interlocks: None. P&lD Drawing Number: In General Contract Drawing Set PLC/SCADA Monitoring and Control Functions: Monitoring Signals: Plant flow rate Plant water temperature Ozone residual concentration from each analyzer The PLC shall calculate and display total effluent CT, virus log inactivation, Giardia log inactivation, virus performance ratio, and Giardia performance ratio for each contactor. Control Signals: None. Manual Control: None. Automatic Control: None. Alarms: Low virus performance ratio for each contactor Low Giardia performance ratio for each contactor High virus performance ratio for each contactor High Giardia performance ratio for each contactor Software Interlocks: None. Calculations: General: CT credit is not allowed in the first cell where ozone is added. A direct credit is allowed if the ozone residual at the outlet of the cell exceeds a threshold value as described below in the calculations. Ozone residual will normally be measured at the outlet of Cell 1, Cell 2, and two other downstream cells. The Cell 1 residual is used to determine direct log inactivation credit. The downstream residuals are used to calculate CT value. CT values are converted to virus and Giardia log June 09 17110-19 8205A10 inactivation credit. Total ozone disinfection credit will be the sum of the direct credit and credit from CT. Ozone will normally be added in both Cell 1 and Cell 2. Ozone can be added to Cell 3 in the event that Cell 1 or Cell 2 ozone diffusers are unavailable. Residual sampling points will be located at the outlet of each of the 8 contactor cells. Each sampling point shall be connected to a separate analyzer probe tee -fitting located in the contactor access corridor. The probes for the analyzers may be moved between probe tee -fittings to provide flexibility in residual measurement. The analyzer/cell assignment will be a manual operator input from the OIS and HMI graphic screen. The following analyzer/cell combinations will be allowed. Analyzer No. 1: Cells 1 or 2. This analyzer probe will be located at the outlet of the first cell where ozone is added, normally Cell 1. This analyzer is used to determine disinfection direct credit and is not used for CT calculation. Analyzer No. 2: Cells 2, 3, or 4. Analyzer No. 3: Cells 3, 4, 5, or 6. Analyzer No. 4: Cells 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8. TY_x (Theoretical hydraulic detention time): Plant Flow = Total raw water flow rate to the ozone contactors as measured by the raw water flowmeters (mgd). The flow rate used in these calculations shall be averaged over an operator -adjustable time interval of 0-10 minutes, initially set at 1 minute. Number of Contactors = Number of contactors in service. To be input by the operator. Cell Volume = Volume of one contactor cell (MG). The volume of each cell in the North Plant is 0,0426 MG. The volume of each cell in the South Plant is 0.0568 MG. Ty.x = Theoretical hydraulic detention time between the outlet of Cell X and the outlet of Cell Y (minutes). TY x _ Cell Volume L (Y — X) x (Number of Contactors) x (1,440) Plant Floiv Example: Assume North Plant Flow = 75 mgd, 2 contactors in service, cell volume = 0.0426 MG. Find theoretical hydraulic detention time between Cell 2 outlet and Cell 4 outlet. T4_2=(0.0426) x (4 — 2) x (2) x (1,440) = 3.1 minutes CT (Concentration x Time): CT value is calculated using the effluent method for each section of the contactor preceding a residual analyzer. For the equations that follow, Cell Y is the cell with residual measurement at its outlet. Cell X is the next cell upstream with residual measurement at its outlet. TIO/T = hydraulic efficiency ratio. Initial value of 0.70, but may be changed based on results of tracer studies of the ozone contactors. Allowable range is 0.01 to 0.99, increments of 0.01. Cy = Residual measured at the outlet of Cell Y (mg/Q. TY_x = Theoretical hydraulic detention time between the outlet of Cell X and the outlet of Cell Y as calculated above (minutes). CTYx = CT value between the end of Cell X and the end of Cell Y (mg/L*minutes). June 09 17110-20 8205A10 CTy-X =( T ) X (Cy) X (TY-X ) The above equation shall only be calculated if Cy is greater than or equal to an operator -adjustable minimum residual setpoint, normally set at 0.05 mg/L. If Cy is less than the minimum residual setpoint, then CTy-X equals 0.0 mg/L*minutes. Example: Analyzer No. 2 is measuring Cell 2 outlet residual. Analyzer No. 3 is measuring Cell 4 outlet residual of 0.08 mg/L. Theoretical hydraulic detention time between Cell 2 outlet and Cell 4 outlet is 3.1 minutes as calculated in the previous example. Find CT value between the end of Cell 2 and the end of Cell 4. CT,-2 =(0.7) x (0.08) x (3.1) = 0.17 (mg/ L * minutes) Total Effluent CT: Total effluent CT for the contactor is the sum of the CT for each section calculated above. Example: Analyzer No. 1 is measuring Cell 1 outlet residual; Analyzer No. 2 is measuring Cell 2 outlet residual; Analyzer No. 3 is measuring Cell 4 outlet; Analyzer No. 4 is measuring Cell 6 outlet. Assume CT2-1 = 0.25 mg/L*min; assume CT4 2 = 0.17 mg/L*min as calculated above; assume CT6A = 0.12 mg/L*min. Find total effluent CT value for the contactor. CTTa,r = (0.25) + (0.17) + (0.12) = 0.54 (mg I L * minutes) Giardia and virus inactivation rate. Inactivation rate is a function of water temperature. Virus inactivation rate: WT = Water temperature as measured by the ozone contactor plant water temperature transmitter (Degrees C). e = 2.718 Kv = Virus inactivation rate ((Log 1)/(mg/L*min)). Kv, = (2.1507) x (e(a0707x WT)) Giardia inactivation rate: WT = Water temperature as measured by the ozone contactor plant water temperature transmitter (Degrees C). e = 2.718. KG = Giardia inactivation rate ((Log I)/(mg/L*min)). Kc = (1.0237) X (0(0.0722 X wr)) Example: Find virus inactivation rate if the water temperature = 20 degrees C. K, = (2.1507) x (e(0.0707) X (20)) = 8.84 Log I mg ,l L minutes Giardia and virus inactivation credit from CT: Virus Log Inactivation from CT (Logs 1): Virus Log Inactivation (from CT) = Kv x CTTota, Giardia Log inactivation from CT (Logs 1): Giardia Log Inactivation (from CT) = CTTocai Example: Assume CTT,,wi = 0.54 mg/L*min and Kv = 8.84 (Log 1)/ (mg/L*min) as calculated above. Find virus log inactivation (from CT). June 09 17110-21 8205A10 Virus Log Inactivation (from CT) = 8.84 x 0.54 = 4.8 Logs I Total Giardia and virus inactivation credit: �•.� CT credit is not allowed in the first cell where ozone is added. A direct credit is allowed if the ozone residual at the outlet of the cell exceeds the following values: 0.5 log direct Giardia credit if the initial residual is > 0.30 mg/L. 1.0 log direct virus credit if the initial residual is > 0.10 mg/L. Total Virus Log Inactivation (Logs 1). Total Virus Log Inactivation = Virus Log Inactivation (from CT) + Direct Virus Credit Total Giardia Log Inactivation (Logs 1): Total Giardia Log Inactivation = Giardia Log Inactivation (from CT) + Direct Virus Credit Example: Assume 4.4 log virus removal as calculated above and 1.0 log direct credit from Cell 1. Total Virus Log Inactivation = 4.8 + 1.0 = 5.8 Logs I Virus and Giardia performance ratio: PRv = Virus performance ratio. Total Virus Log inactivation PRv _ Required Virus Log inactivation PRe = Giardia performance ratio. (Total Giardia Long Inactivation). PRc (Required Giardia Log Inactivation) Example: Assume 5.8 log virus inactivation credit. Required virus inactivation is 2.0 log. PRv=(2.0)=2.9 Analyzer Maintenance Mode: Ozone residual analyzers undergoing maintenance or calibration should not be included in the CT calculation, The PLC program shall include a maintenance mode setting for each ozone residual analyzer. The operator shall have the ability to place an analyzer in maintenance mode from the OIS or HMI. The PLC shall not use residual values from any analyzer in maintenance mode. O�The alarm will be inactive for that contactor until the analyzer is removed from maintenance mode. Operator Functions from HMI (NH-HMI-G-19) and SCADA Screens: A display screen or pop-up screen at the OIS and HMI shall be provided for the CT calculation parameter entry and display of calculated values. This screen shall display the following as a minimum: The following alarms shall be provided on the OIS and HMI graphic screen: Virus performance ratio low alarm. Set point shall be operator adjustable between 0.00 and 9.99, initially set at 1.10. Giardia performance ratio low alarm. Set point shall be operator adjustable between 0.00 and 9.99, initially set at 1.10. June 09 17110-22 8205A10 Virus performance ratio high alarm. Set point shall be operator adjustable between 0.00 and 9.99, initially set at 3.0. Giardia performance ratio high alarm. Set point shall be operator adjustable between 0.00 and 9,99, initially set at 3.0. The following control set points, selectors, and push buttons shall be provided on the OIS and HMI graphic screen: Number of contactors in service. Operator shall select 0, 1, or 2. Analyzer/contactor cell assignment. Operator shall input which cell's ozone residual each analyzer is measuring, with input choices as stated in this Article. Hydraulic efficiency ratio. Value shall be adjustable between 0.00 and 0.99, initially set at 0.70. Minimum residual for CT calculation. Value shall be adjustable between 0.00 and 0.20, initially set at 0.05. OZONE SYSTEM CONTROL Summary: The following algorithms are developed for the entire ozone system. The control descriptions herein shall reside in the Ozone Generation Building PLC. The. raw water flow meters, plant feed gas flow transmitters, and plant feed gas flow control valves described in this Article will be supplied by the Contractor. The Ozone System Supplier shall provide the programming for this equipment and all other programming as described herein. Tag numbers shown herein are preliminary and are subject to change. Field Controls and Instrumentation: Instrumentation: North Plant Raw Water Flow Meters South Plant Raw Water Flow Meters North Plant Feed Gas Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ-OZ-FIT-001) South Plant Feed Gas Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ-OZ-FIT-002) Final Control Elements: North Plant Feed Gas Flow Control Valve (NH-OZ-OZ-BA-001) South Plant Feed Gas Flow Control Valve (NH-OZ-OZ-BA-002) Local Control Devices: The plant feed gas control valves are each equipped with Local/Off/Remote selector at the valve actuator. Local Process Indicators and Alarms: None. Hardwired Interlocks: None. P&ID Drawing Number: In General Contract Drawing Set PLC/SCADA Monitoring and Control Functions: Monitoring Signals: Plant raw water flow (2) Plant feed gas flow (2) Plant feed gas control valves (2) Valve position Open status Closed status Remote mode status Automatic start sequence active status. Current automatic start sequence step. Automatic shutdown sequence active status. June 09 17110-23 8205A10 Current automatic shutdown sequence step. Control Signals: Plant feed gas control valves (2) Position control Manual Control: The plant feed gas control valves shall be capable of being manually positioned from the HMI or SCADA screens. Automatic Control: The ozone system will perform all of the automatic control functions described herein if the ozone system is designated by the operator as in AUTO from the HMI or SCADA screens. If the ozone system is not in AUTO, it will be in MANUAL. The total mass flow rate (pounds per day or PPD) of ozone required for generation will be calculated and become the basis for operating the ozone generation system. The total mass flow rate of ozone required for each plant will be calculated. The total ozone produced will be divided in accordance with each plant's, each contactor's and each cell's requirements. PID control algorithms shall be programmed for each cell as described in the next Article. The set point for the PID algorithms shall be the ozone contactor feed gas flow rates calculated below for each contactor multiplied by the percentage ozone dose for each cell. The ozone system shall be capable of executing an automatic start sequence. Prior to initiating the auto start sequence, the control system shall verify that the following devices are in AUTO READY status: The LOX vaporizer outlet valve of the SERVICE LOX vaporizer. The LEAD ozone generator The North Plant and South Plant cell feed gas valves for any on-line ozone contactor. Ozone contactor feed gas control valve for any on-line contactor The LEAD ozone destruct system for any plant with an on-line contactor The operator will manually activate the nitrogen system and initiate water flow into any ozone contactors. An automatic start sequence shall be capable of being initiated from the HMI or SCADA screens. The automatic start sequence shall perform the following steps: Start the LEAD ozone destruct system for any plant with an on-line contactor. Verify LEAD ozone destruct system is operating. Open the SERVICE LOX vaporizer outlet valve. Verify SERVICE LOX vaporizer outlet valve is open. Initiate automatic LOX vaporizer rotation logic. Open the LEAD ozone generator GOX inlet valve. Verify the LEAD ozone generator GOX inlet valve is open. Confirm that LEAD ozone generator GOX pressure is at least21 psig after an adjustable time delay. Once the pressure is confirmed, open the LEAD ozone generator ozone flow control valve. Verify the LEAD ozone generator ozone flow control valve is open. Begin oxygen pre -purge step on LEAD ozone generator. After an adjustable time delay, start the LEAD ozone generator. Start the ozone system automatic control functions described in this section. If any of the above steps cannot be performed or verified, an automatic start sequence failure alarm shall be activated. June 09 17110-24 8205A10 The ozone system shall be capable of executing an operator -initiated automatic controlled stop sequence if the ozone system is operating in AUTO. The automatic controlled stop sequence shall also be initiated if any of the following alarms are active for any operating ozone generator and a LAG or STANDBY ozone generator is not available: - cooling water low -low flow alarm - GOX low flow alarm - PSU failure The following steps will be performed as part of the automatic controlled stop sequence: Stop the LEAD and LAG (if LAG is operating) ozone generators. Verify ozone generators are off. Begin oxygen post -purge step on previously -operating ozone generators. After an adjustable time delay, the SERVICE LOX vaporizer outlet valve, the LEAD and LAG (if LAG is operating) ozone generator GOX inlet valve, and the LEAD and LAG (if LAG is operating) ozone generator ozone flow control valve all close. Verify all valves have closed. Stop the LEAD and LAG (if LAG is operating) ozone destruct system for any plant with an on-line ozone contactor. If any of the above steps cannot be performed or verified, an automatic stop sequence failure alarm shall be activated. Alarms: Ozone system automatic start sequence failure. Ozone system automatic stop sequence failure. Software Interlocks: None, Calculations: `"ftoo All calculations will be performed in the Ozone Generation Building PLC. Mass flow rate per contactor: The raw water flow rate per contactor for a plant is calculated as follows: Raw Water = Raw Water Flow `�"" Number of Contactors Online Where: Raw Water Flow values are in MGD Based on this contactor raw water flow, the PLC shall calculate the contactor - required pounds per day for both North and South Holly contactors using this equation: Re quired PPD,,,,,, = (Raw Water.,.n,r x Dosage x 8.345) ± CT Trim PPD,,,,,, Where: Required PPD and CT Trim PPD is in ibs/day, Raw Wafer is in MGD, and Dosage is in mg/l, separate set points for the North and South Holly plants. This contactor required pounds per day value shall be the basis of several calculations involving choice of constant concentration control or constant gas flow control. The CT Trim PPD can be enabled or disabled on the operator interface. CT Trim PPD shall be calculated based on the difference between the required CT and the actual real time CT as described below. The CT Trim PPD shall be limited to a +/- 10% change NOW to the Required PPD. The actual real time CT will be calculated as June 09 17110-25 8205A10 described in the preceding article entitled 'Ozone Contactors - CT Calculation'. The CT Trim PPD adjustment factor is used for fine-tune control of disinfection performance. The adjustment factor shall be automatically calculated by the PLC based on the following table. The tuning adjustment factor shall be operator adjustable. An operator -adjustable scaling factor (Range 0.1 to 9.9, initially set at 1.0) is multiplied by the lowest virus performance ratio from operating contactors to determine the value in the left-hand column of the following table. Lowest Virus Performance Ratio from operating contactors multiplied by operator -adjustable Dose -Tuning scaling factor. Adjustment Factor < 1.00 0.05 1.00 -1.09 0.035 j 1.10 - 1.19 0.025 1.20 - 1.29 0,015 1.30 - 1.39 0.005 1.40 - 1.49 0.0 1.50 - 1.59 0.0 1.60 - 1.69 0.005 C 1.70 - 1.79 -0.01 1.80 - 1.89 -0.015 1,90 - 2.00 -0.02 > 2.00 -0.025 The dose -tuning adjustment factor shall include an operator adjustable time delay setting (Range 0 - 60 minutes, initially set at 5 minutes). The dose - tuning adjustment factor shall not be changed more often than the time delay setting. This will allow time for the ozone residual to change within the contactor before calculating a new adjusted dose. Total Required PPD: Depending on the number of contactors online, the total required pounds per day shall be the summation of the calculated required pounds per day of online North and South ozone contactors. Total System PPD = Re gtured PPDa,1;,,,coRN� This TOTAL SYSTEM PPD shall be the basis of the LEAD and LAG control logic of the ozone generators in operation during automatic operation as described herein. Constant Ozone Gas Flow Control. The operator shall have the option to operate the ozone system either in constant ozone gas flow mode or constant ozone gas concentration mode. In the Constant Ozone Gas Flow Control mode, the ozone generator power output shall be modulated to vary the ozone generator discharge ozone concentration. In the Constant Ozone Gas Flow Control mode, the ozone control logic shall determine the ozone concentration setpoint that the online ozone generator(s) will use to vary its power. The ozone concentration set point is based on the TOTAL required PPD and the TOTAL. ozone gas flow setpoint. The TOTAL_ ozone gas flow set point shall be calculated by the June 09 17110-26 8205A10 Ozone Generation Building PLC as the sum of the individual gas flow set points for each online contactor. Iftwo Ozone Cv►rce►rb•ation Setpt = Total System PPD Gas Flow Setpt x 1.192 Where: Total System PPD is. in Ibs/day, Gas Flow Setpt Is in scfm, and Ozone Concentration Setpt is in %wt The calculated ozone concentration setpoint is the value used by the online ozone generators PID controller logic to vary their power output and thereby vary their discharge ozone concentration. Constant Ozone Gas Concentration Control In the Constant Ozone Gas Concentration Control mode, the contactor cell feed gas valves shall be modulated to vary the ozone gas flow rate to each contactor cell. In the Constant Ozone Gas Concentration Control mode, the ozone control logic determines the ozone gas flow setpoint for each cell of each online contactor. The Ozone Generation Building PLC shall calculate the ozone gas flow for each online contactor based on the calculated required PPD of the online contactor and the operator entered ozone concentration setpoint. Ozone lids Flow Setptr4ar — Re wired PPDc,,,,,,. Ozone Concentration Setpt x IA 92 Where* Required Contactor PPD is in Ibs/day, Ozone Gas Flow Setpt is in scfm, and Ozone Concentration Setpt is in %wt The calculated ozone gas flow setpoint for each online contactor shall be used to control the ozone contactor cell feed gas valves as described in the following article. Operator Functions from HMI (NH-HMI-G-19) and SCADA Screens: Plant feed gas flow control valve open and closed commands (2) Number of ozone contactors online (2) Designate AUTO or MANUAL operation for the ozone system Designate LEAD, LAG, and STAND-BY ozone generators Auto start LAG ozone generator ozone system production rate set point Auto stop LAG ozone generator ozone system production rate set point Automatic system start command Automatic start sequence LEAD ozone generator GOX pressure delay set point Automatic controlled system stop command Automatic stop sequence LEAD and LAG ozone generator oxygen purge delay set point Plant ozone dosage (2) Ozone concentration set point. CT Trim PPD - enabled or disabled 9 17110-27 8205A10 OZONE CONTACTORS - GAS FLOW RATE CONTROL Summary: The instrumentation and equipment described in this Article will be supplied by the Contractor. The Ozone System Supplier shall provide the programming for this equipment as described herein. Tag numbers shown herein are preliminary and are subject to change. The following control descriptions are written for the two Holly North Ozone Contactors. The exact programming shall be provided for both the two Holly North and the two South Ozone Contactors by the Ozone System Supplier, The Ozone Generation Building PLC shall calculate and set the gas flow rate to each contactor cell based on plant water flow rate and set points that are input by the operator as described in the previous Article. The PID algorithms described herein shall use those valves multiplied by cell flow percentage set points as the algorithm set point. Under normal operating conditions, there will always be gas flow to Cell 1 of a contactor that is in service. There will usually be gas flow to Cell 2, but if Cell 2 is not available, gas flow may be diverted to Cell 3. Field Controls and Instrumentation Instrumentation: Ozone Contactor No. 1 Feed Gas Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ-OZ-FIT-003). Ozone Contactor No. 2 Feed Gas Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ-OZ-FIT-004). Ozone Contactor No. 1 Cell 1 Feed Gas Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ-OZ-FIT- 005). Ozone Contactor No. 1 Cell 2 Feed Gas Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ-OZ-FIT- 006). Ozone Contactor No. 1 Cell 3 Feed Gas Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ-OZ-FIT- 007). Ozone Contactor No. 2 Cell 1 Feed Gas Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ-OZ-FIT- 008). Ozone Contactor No. 2 Cell 2 Feed Gas Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ-OZ-FIT- 009). Ozone Contactor No. 2 Cell 3 Feed Gas Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ-OZ-FIT- 010). Raw Water Flowmeters (existing). Final Control Elements: Ozone Contactor No. 1 Feed Gas Valve (NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-003). Ozone Contactor No. 2 Feed Gas Valve (NH-OZ-OZ-BFV-004). Ozone Contactor No. 1 Cell 1 Feed Gas Valve (NH-OZ-OZ-BA-005). Ozone Contactor No. 1 Cell 2 Feed Gas Valve (NH-OZ-OZ-BA-006). Ozone Contactor No. 1 Cell 3 Feed Gas Valve (NH-OZ-OZ-BA-007). Ozone Contactor No. 2 Cell 1 Feed Gas Valve (NH-OZ-OZ-BA-008). Ozone Contactor No. 2 Cell 2 Feed Gas Valve (NH-OZ-OZ-BA-009). Ozone Contactor No. 2 Cell 3 Feed Gas Valve (NH-OZ-OZ-BA-010). Local Control Devices: The ozone contactor feed gas and cell feed gas valves are each equipped with a Local/Off/Remote selector and Open -Stop -Close hand switches at the valve actuator. Local Process Indicators and Alarms: None. Hardwired Interlocks: None. P&ID Drawing Number: In General Contract Drawing Set June 09 17110-28 8205A10 PLC/SCADA Monitoring and Control Functions: Monitoring Signals: Ozone contactor feed gas valves (2) Valve position Open status Closed status Remote mode status Ozone contactor cell feed gas valves (6) Valve position Open status Closed status Remote mode status Ozone contactor feed gas flow (2) Ozone contactor cell feed gas flow (6) Control Signals: Ozone contactor feed gas valves (2) Position control Ozone contactor cell feed gas valves (6) Position control Manual Control: The ozone contactor feed gas and cell feed gas valves shall be capable of being manually positioned from the HMI or SCADA screens. Auto Control: Ozone Contactor Feed Gas Valves: If the associated ozone contactor is in service, the valve shall be automatically kept at 100 percent open. Ozone Contactor Cell Feed Gas Valves: The position of each of the three cell feed gas valves for a contactor shall be controlled automatically by a PID flow control loop programmed in PLC logic. The PID control loop shall use as its set point the required oxygen/ozone gas flow to the associated ozone contactor as calculated in the previous article 'Ozone System Control' multiplied by the cell flow percentage. The PLC shall continuously compare the required cell flow rate to the actual cell flow rate as measured by the ozone contactor cell feed gas flow transmitter, and shall modulate the position of the cell feed gas valve to maintain the required flow rate. Alarms: None. Software Interlocks: None. Calculations: None. Operator Functions from HMI (NH-HMI-G-19) and SCADA Screens: Ozone contactor feed gas valves AUTO/MANUAL selectors. Ozone contactor feed gas valves position set point. Ozone Contactor Cell 1, 2, and 3 feed gas valves AUTO/MANUAL selectors. Ozone Contactor Cell 1, 2, and 3 gas valves position set point. Desired ozone dose for each contactor cell. Cell 1 flow percentage set point. (2) Cell 2 flow percentage set point. (2) Cell 3 flow percentage set point. (2) June 09 17110-29 8205A10 OZONE SYSTEM EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN Summary: The ozone system emergency shutdown provides personnel and equipment protection. The emergency shutdown is a hard -wired shutdown signal. This shutdown is different from the ozone system automatic controlled shutdown sequence described above. The instrumentation and equipment described in this Article will be supplied by the Contractor. The Ozone System Supplier shall provide the programming for this equipment as described herein. Tag numbers shown herein are preliminary and are subject to change. Field Controls and Instrumentation: Instrumentation: Ozone Generation Building Ambient Ozone Concentration Analyzer No. 1 (NH-OZ-AMB-AIT-001). Ozone Generation Building Ambient Ozone Concentration Analyzer No. 2 (NH-OZ-AMB-AIT-002) Ozone Generation Building Ambient Oxygen Concentration Analyzer No. 1 (N H-OZ-AMB-AIT-003). Ozone Generation Building Ambient Oxygen Concentration Analyzer No. 2 (N H-OZ-AMB-AIT-004). Final Control Elements: Ozone Generation Building Ventilation Exhaust Fan No. 1 (NH-OZ-AMB-EF- 001). Ozone Generation Building Ventilation Exhaust Fan No. 2 (NH-OZ-AMB-EF- 002). Ozone Generation Building Ventilation Exhaust Fan No. 3 (NH-OZ-AMB-EF- 003). Ozone Generation Building Ventilation Exhaust Fan No. 4 (NH-OZ-AMB-EF- 004). LOX Vaporizer No. 1 Outlet Valve. (NH-OX-GOX-BFV-001) LOX Vaporizer No. 2 Outlet Valve. (NH-OX-GOX-BFV-002) LOX Vaporizer No. 3 Outlet Valve. (NH-OX-GOX-BFV-003) Local Control Devices: Ozone Generation Building Inside Manual Emergency Shutdown Hand Switches (NH-OZ-HS-21, NH-OZ-HS-22, NH-OZ-HS-23, NH-OZ-HS-24). Ozone Generation Building Outside Manual Emergency Shutdown Hand Switch (NH-OZ-HS-26). Ozone Generation Building Fine Alarm Control Panel (NH-OZ-LCP-6). Local Process Indicators and Alarms: Indoor and outdoor alarm beacons. Indoor alarm horn. Hardwired Interlocks: All control actions described in this article are hardwired. P&ID Drawing Number: In General Contract Drawing Set PLC/SCADA Monitoring and Control Functions: Monitoring Signals: None. Control Signals: None. Manual Control: None. Automatic Control: June 09 17110-30 8205A10 When any of the following conditions occur, hard -wired interlocks shall execute the shutdown procedures, as defined herein, for selected components of the ozone system. ,%No, Operator initiation of the ozone system emergency shutdown by activating one of the manual emergency shutdown hand switches. Operator initiation of the ozone system emergency shutdown by activating the HMI or OIS software switch in SCADA. Ozone Generation Building high -high ambient oxygen concentration. Ozone Generation Building high -high ambient ozone concentration. Ozone Generation Building fire alarm. Ozone Generation Building smoke alarm. Activation of the ozone system shutdown shall result in the following hard- wired actions: Signal each ozone generator to set generator output to 0 percent. Stop the LOX flow into the ozone system by closing the LOX vaporizer oxygen outlet valves. Activate an ozone system shutdown alarm using alarm horns and beacons. Send signal to PLC system to provide alarm on OIS and HMI graphic screens Alarms: Ozone Generation Building fire alarm. Ozone Generation Building smoke alarm. Ozone Generation Building high -high ambient ozone alarm. Ozone Generation Building high -high ambient oxygen alarm. Ozone Generation Building ventilation exhaust fans low current alarm. General emergency shutdown alarm. 'Software Interlocks: None. Calculations: None. Operator Functions from HMI (NH-HMI-G-19) and SCADA Screens: Ozone Generation Building high -high ambient ozone concentration set point. Ozone Generation Building high -high ambient oxygen concentration set point. Ozone system emergency shutdown manual activation. POWER FAILURE Summary: This control description applies to the actions to be taken by the control system in the event of a plant power failure. There will be an input from the SCADA system to the Ozone Generation Building to indicate a power failure. Field Controls and Instruments: Instrumentation: None Final Control Elements: LOX Vaporizer No. 'I Outlet Valve. (NH-OX-GOX-BFV-001) LOX Vaporizer No, 2 Outlet Valve. (NH-OX-GOX-BFV-002) LOX Vaporizer No. 3 Outlet Valve. (NH-OX-GOX-BFV-003) Local Control Devices: None. Local Process Indicators and alarms: None. Hardwired Interlocks: 144MV, The signals to close the LOX vaporizer oxygen outlet valves shall be hardwired. June 09 17110-31 8205A10 P&ID Drawing Number: LOX Vaporizer Outlet Valves: In General Contract Drawing Set. Ozone Generators: 7-N-105, 7-N-107., 7-N-109. ... PLC/SCADA Monitoring and Control Functions: Monitoring Signals: The Ozone Generation Building .PLC will monitor the power failure signal coming from the plant SCADA system. Control Signals: As described under 'Automatic Control'. Manual Control: None. Automatic Control: The control system shall monitor for plant power failure. The control system shall implement the following steps only after the power has been interrupted for an operator -adjustable time period of 0.1-9.9 minutes, initially set at 1.0 minute. The ozone generators shall be placed in STANDBY mode. The power set point to the generators shall be set to 0 percent. The LOX vaporizer oxygen outlet valves shall automatically close. After power is restored, the operator must initiate the ozone system start-up sequence as described above or start-up the system manually before ozone production can begin again. Alarms: Ozone System Power Failure Shutdown Active Software Interlocks: The placing of the ozone generators in STANDBY mode shall be a software interlock, Calculations: None. 1%EW Operator Functions from HMI (NH-HMI-G-19) and SCADA Screens: Power failure delay time period set point - 0.1 to 9.9 minutes. END OF SECTION June 09 17110-32 8205A10 CITY OF FORT WORTH NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WTP UPGRADE OZONE GENERATION EQUIPMENT— PRE -SELECTION FTWO9118 ADDENDUM NO.4 June 30, 2009 The location for the submission of bid Is unchanged. BID DATE: Thursday, July 2, 2009, 1:30 pm The following additions, deletions, modifications, or clarifications shall be made to the appropri, sections of the plans and specifications and shall become a part of the Contract Documents. Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of this Addendum In the space provided on the Bid form. ADDENDA: A4-1 ADDENDUM NO. 1 A. Reference Page 17761-2 Modification: Modify Paragraph 17761.2.01.A by deleting the following words from the paragraph: 1. Allen-Bradley "Rockwell Software RSLogix 5000." and adding the following No substitutions shall be acceptable." BIDDING REQUIREMENTS: A4-2 PART B — PROPOSAL A. Reference Pages B-1 through B-6. Modification: Replace the proposal form in its entirety with the revised form attached. A4-3 PART G — SPECIAL ENGINEERING SERVICES AGREEMENT A. Reference Page G-5, ARTICLE 10. Modification: In Paragraph 10.2 a., modify the beginning of the first sentence to read: "Applicable policies, except for Workers' Compensation and Professional Liability policies, shall be endorsed to name...". TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: A4-4 SECTION 17720 - CONTROL SYSTEMS - PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS HARDWARE A. Reference Page 17720-3, Paragraph 2.01.A. Modification: Modify the paragraph by deleting the following words from the paragraph: Allen-Bradley ControlLogix" and adding the following "2. No substitutions shall be acceptable." Addendum No. 4 009 FTWO9118 SECTION 17721 - CONTROL SYSTEMS - HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE Reference Page 17721-3, Paragraph 2.01.A. Modification: Modify the paragraph by deleting the following words from the paragraph: "1. Allen-Bradley. PanelView Plus." and adding the following "1. No substitutions shall be acceptable." SECTION 17765 - HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE SOFTWARE Reference: Page 17765-2, Paragraph 2.01.A. Modification: Modify the paragraph by deleting the following words from the paragraph: 01. Rockwell Software RSView." and adding the following "1. No substitutions shall be acceptable." END OF ADDENDUM NO.4 OF �qtta� *see,,, i � • s �� r % jiii�isessssssssssssssssis� / DAVID w. SLOAN s � •• �ssssssssusessssssssr s / 63946 Addendum No. 4 FTWO9118 00904-2 City of Fart Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment PART B PROPOSAL (This Proposal shall be attached to the Specifications and submitted with appropriate supporting documents.) TO: Dale Fisseter, P.E. City Manager Municipal Office Building 1000 Throckmorton Fort Worth, Texas 76102 ',OPOSAL FOR: North And South Holly Water Treatment Plant Upgrade Ozone Generation Equipment Capital Project No. 00757 ZTICLE 1. PROPOSER'S DECLARATION AND UNDERSTANDING. 1.1. This Proposal is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed person, firm, or corporation and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group, association, organization, or corporation; Proposer has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Proposer to submit a false or sham Proposal; Proposer has not solicited or induced any person, firm, or corporation to refrain from proposing; and Proposer has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any advantage over any other Proposer or over OWNER. 1.2. In submitting this Proposal, Ozone System Supplier (OSS) certifies it is qualified to do business in the state where the Project is located as required by laws, rules, and regulations or, if allowed by statute, covenants to obtain such qualification prior to contract award. L3 In submitting this Proposal, OSS makes all representations required by the Notice to Bidders and further warrants and represents that: (a) OSS has examined copies of all the Contract Documents, the Notice to Bidders, the Instructions to Bidders, and of the following Addenda (receipt of all which is hereby acknowledged): No. Rated, NO, Dated No. Dated, No: Dated Ida. Dated NO. Dated (b) OSS has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance_ or furnishing the Goods and Special Services. IM Part B — Proposal 6/29/2009 City of Port Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment (c) OSS has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies which may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the {'foods and Special Services at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports or similar information or data are or will be required by OSS for such purposes. (d) OSS has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports and studies with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. (e) OSS has given ENGINEER written 'notice of all conflicts, errors, omissions, ambiguities or discrepancies that it has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to OSS. 1.4 In this Section, the OSS shall provide values for specific performance parameters for the Ozone System. The OSS understands and agrees that the values stated in this Section for the associated performance parameters will be compared to the performance standards required in Section 11264A of the Contract Documents. OSS understands and agrees to guarantee the performance values stated herein for the Ozone System in accordance with the guidelines specified in Section 01740 and Section 11264A of the Contract Documents. 1.5 The undersigned agrees to enter into a Subcontract with the General Contractor for the Holly Ozone Project to perform and furnish all Work and engineering services as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the amount indicated in this Proposal Forth and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of these Contract Documents. 1.6 The undersigned accepts all of the terms and conditions of these Contract Documents including, without limitation, those dealing with the disposition of Proposal security, and the penalties that may be imposed based on results from the Performance Testing. This Proposal shall remain subject to acceptance for a period of 300 calendar days after the day of Proposal opening. If the General Contractor has not been awarded the contract within the 300 calendar day period, the OSS bid price presented in the Proposal will be adjusted upward based upon the ratio of the applicable Consumer Price Index (CPI) numbers between the end of the 300 day period and such time the General Contractor is awarded the contract by the City. 1.7 The OSS shall determine a percentage of the supply price which is subject to the stainless steel market price fluctuations, and shall indicate this value in Item E below. The price in this Proposal shall be adjusted up or down based on the London Commodity Index for 304 Stainless Steel Flat Rolled Coil as indicated on the www.metalpricees.com web site. The subject portion of the supply price will be adjusted in proportion to the ratio of the index on the date the General Contractor is given a notice to proceed by the Owner and the bid date of this equipment supply proposal. The percentage selected by the OSS shall not exceed 20%. 1.8 The OSS acknowledges that ,it has reviewed the design criteria specified in these Contract Documents and that the Proposal offered will meet the design and operational criteria and project schedule as described in the Contract Documents. In submitting the Proposal, the M Part B — Proposal 6/29/2009 City of Fort worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment OSS agrees to provide Goods to meet or exceed the requirements specified in the Contract Documents. 1.9 The OWNER's decision on ozone system equipment selection will be. final. By submitting a Proposal, OSS waives any right to protest the decision. 1.10 The OSS _acknowledges that the selection of a proprietary ozone equipment OSS is the sole decision of the OWNER and such decisions are final. 1.11 OSS accepts the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 2. INSURANCE. 2.1 OSS further agrees that the Proposal amount(s) stated .herein includes specific consideration for the specified insurance coverages. ARTICLE 3. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. 3,1 OSS agrees to pay the General Contractor for the Project liquidated damages in the event of late delivery, as described in Part A - Instructions to Bidders. ARTICLE 4. STATE AND LOCAL SALES AND USE TAXES. 4.1 Except as may be specifically provided to the contrary in any of the Contract Documents, the Proposal Price should include all applicable international, federal, state, and local transportation, privilege, occupation, and other taxes applicable to the Goods and Special Services, and all international, federal, state, and local taxes, contributions, and premiums imposed upon or measured by the OSS's or its Subcontractor's payroll. The OWNER shall not be responsible for any state or local sales, use, or excise taxes. ARTICLE 5. PROPOSAL SCHEDULE. 5.1 OSS shall provide required information by filling in all blanks shown in Article 5 and Article 6. If the blanks provided in the proposal are not applicable to the OSS's ozone system, please write, "not applicable" in the blank, 5.2 Life -cycle costs will be developed based upon: a, Base Bid of the Ozone System equipment (Item A). b. Present worth value of power costs for 20 years (Item Q. Power costs will be calculated using information provided in the Proposals, with modifications, as deemed appropriate, by the judgment of the ENGINEER and OWNER. 5.3 Item B - Price for Special Engineering Services for Ozone System Design will not be included in the life -cycle cost evaluation. Part B - Proposal 6/29/2009 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly 1YIP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment ARTICLE 6. DESIGN CRITERIA 6.1 Base Proposal Design Criteria A. OSS shall note that performance information provided in this Proposal must be guaranteed over the warranty period and will serve as the baseline against which future system performance will be compared to determine whether system is non- performing. See Section 01.740 for warranty information. B. OSS shall submit with the bid an explanation of the methodology used to calculate the proposed energy value SECavg provided in Item C below. The methodology shall include a description of all key assumptions made and example calculations. PROPOSAL Item A: Ozone System and Services Contract Price Indicate the Contract Price for the Ozone System and Services as specified in Section 11264A and related sections of the technical specifications. amount in words S amount in figures Item B: Price for Special Engineering Services for Ozone System Design The Contract Price for Special Engineering Services has been determined by the OWNER as fair and reasonable. Fifty Thousand. Dollars and No Cents amount in words 50,000.00 amount in figures Item C: Present -Worth Value of Average Rate of Energy Consumption Average Specific Energy Consumption (SECavg) using one generator for producing ozone production rates specified in Section 11264F and at the conditions specified in Section 11264F for the Energy Consumption Efficiency tests, SECavg = kWh/pound of ozone B-4 Part B — Proposal 6/29/2009 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment The Present -worth value of energy consumption cost for continuous operation over a 20-year period is calculated as follows: Average energy consumption cost for producing ozone production rates at the conditions specified in Section 11264E - SECavg kWhlpound of ozone X 2300 pounds per day X $0.085 per kWh X 365 days per year X a present worth factor of 12.46 = Present Worth Value. Present Worth Value - amount in words S Item D: Total of Items A and C. amount in words ammt iifigms amount in figures Item Et Portion of Contract Price Subject to Stainless Steel Price Index. Indicate the percentage of Item A to be adjusted up or down for stainless steel price fluctuations, as described in Article 1.7. Percentage shall not exceed 20% of Item A. percentage in words Percentage in figures ARTICLE 7. GUARANTEES. ofa 7.1 Performance: The OSS shall guarantee that the system will perform, meeting the design conditions as stated herein and in Section 11264A. After installation, the OWNER will conduct Acceptance Testing to confirm performance as described in Section 11264F. Remedial actions are described in Section 01740 and Section 11264A. ARTICLE 8. SURETY. 8.1 If OSS is awarded the Work from this Proposal, the surety who provides the Performance and Payment Bond(s) shall be: whose address is S"t City State Zip Code B-5 Part B — Proposal 6/29/2009 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment ARTICLE 9. PROPOSERS. (S E A L) If Bidder is Corporation Date: Respectfully submitted, 0 Title: Address: Telephone: END OF SECTION B-6 Part B - Proposal 6/29/2009 CITY OF FORT WORTH NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE OZONE GENERATION EQUIPMENT DIVISION 0 BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS Part A Notice to Bidders Part B Proposal Part C General Conditions of the Contract Part D Special Conditions Part G Special Engineering Services Agreement DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 01010 01300 01600 01612 01614 01650 01730 01740 DIVISION 1 i EQUIPMENT Definitions and Terminology Summary of Work Submittals Products Seismic Design Criteria Wind Design Criteria Starting Systems Operation and Maintenance Manuals Warranties 11264A Ozone System **Awl 11264C Ozone Generators and Power Supplies 11264D Ozone Diffusion System 11264E Ozone Destruct Systems 11264F Ozone System Testing 113120 ANSI Horizontal End Suction Pumps DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13446 13447 DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL 15050 15052 15110 15111 15112 15114 15115 15117 15118 15120 15121 15251 15255 15755 15956 Valve Operators Motorized Operators Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Basic Piping Materials and Methods Valves Ball Valves Butterfly Valves Check Valves Globe and Angle Valves Specialty Valves Pressure Reducing and Pressure Relief Valves Piping Specialties Pipe Couplings Ductile Iron Piping Stainless Steel Piping and Tubing Plate and Frame Heat Exchangers Piping Systems Testing `/ Table of Contents TOC•1 04/04/05 15958 Mechanical Equipment Testing DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL 16050 General Requirements for Electrical Work 16123 600 Volt or Less Wires and Cables 16130 Conduits 16222 Low Voltage Motors Up to 500 Horsepower 16261 Variable Frequency Drives 0.50 — 10 Horsepower 16412 Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers DIVISION 17 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 17050 Process control and Instrumentation Systems General Requirements 17101 Loop Description 17110 Ozone System Control Descriptions 17302 Flow Measurement — Magnetic Flow Meters 17302 D1 ISA Data Sheet 17312 Flow Measurement — Orifice Plate 17312 D1 ISA Data Sheet 17401 Diaphragm Seals 17402 Pressure/Vacuum Measurement — Instrument Valves 17403 Pressure/Vacuum Measurement —Switches 17403 D1 ISA Data Sheet 17404 Pressure/Vacuum Measurement — Gauges 17404 D1 ISA Data Sheet 17406 Pressure/Vacuum Measurement — Differential 17406 D1 ISA Data Sheet 17504 Analytical Measurement — Gas Monitors 17514 Residual Ozone Analyzers 17514 D1 ISA Data Sheet 17530 Analytical Measurement — DEW Point 17601 Temperature Measurement — Temperature Switch 17601 D1 ISA Data Sheet 17602 Temperature Measurement — Temperature Gauge 17602 D1 ISA Data Sheet 17604 Temperature Measurement — RTD 17604 D1 ISA Data Sheet 17710 Control Systems — Panels, Enclosures. and Panel Components 17712 Control Systems — Uninterruptible Power Supplies 10 KVA and Below 17720 Control Systems — Programmable Logic Controllers Hardware 17721 Control Systems — Human Machine Interface Hardware 17765 Human Machine Interface Software 17901 Schedules — Field Instruments 17903 I/O List 17950 Testing, Calibration, and Commissioning PROCESS AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAMS 7-E-101 Electrical Legend 7-E-102 Control Schematics 7-E-103 Control Schematics II 7-E-104 Ozone Destruct System Control Schematics 7-N-101 Instrumentation Legend 7-N-102 Control System Configuration Table of Contents TOC-2 04104/05 Nftai w 7-N-103 PLC & Remote 1/0 Panel Layouts 7-N-104 Nitrogen Generator P&ID 7-N-105 Ozone Generator No. 1 P&ID 7-N-106 Ozone Generator No. 1 Cooling Water P&ID 7-N-107 Ozone Generator No. 2 P&ID 7-N-108 Ozone Generator No. 2 Cooling Water P&ID 7-N-109 Ozone Generator No. 3 P&ID 7-N-110 Ozone Generator No. 3 Cooling Water P&ID 7-N-111 North Ozone Destruct System No. 1 P&ID 7-N-112 North Ozone Destruct System No. 2 P&ID 7-N-113 North Ozone Destruct System No. 3 P&ID 7-N-114 South Ozone Destruct System No. 1 P&ID 7-N-115 South Ozone Destruct System No. 2 P&ID 7-N-116 South Ozone Destruct System No. 3 P&ID APPENDIX A — GENERAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Part C General Conditions of the Contract Table of Contents TOC-3 04/04/05 Cin, of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipmcnt ..i PART A NOTICE TO BIDDERS Sealed proposals for the following: NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE OZONE GENERATION EQUIPMENT CAPITAL PROJECT NO. 00757 will be received at the office of the Purchasing Manager, located on the lower level, Municipal Building, 1000 Throckmorton Street, Fort Worth, Texas 76102, until 1:30 P.M., on June 25, 2009. Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud in the City Council Chambers at: 2:00 P.M., on June 25, 2009 Contract Documents have been prepared by Freese & Nichols, Inc. [(817) 735-7300, 4055 International Plaza, Ste. 200, Fort Worth, TX 76109) and Carollo Engineers, P.C. [(817) 882-0528, 100 E 15`n Street, Suite 300, Fort Worth, TX 76051] and maybe examined without charge at the Freese and Nichols office. Contract Documents may be obtained from Freese & Nichols, Inc. at the above address for a non- refundable charge of S50.00 per set. All bidders submitting bids are required to be pre -qualified in accordance with the requirements of the Instructions to Bidders. The City reserves the right to reject any and/or all bids and waive any and/or all formalities. No bid may be withdrawn until the expiration of three hundred (300) days from the date the bids are received. A cashier's check, or an acceptable bidder's bond, payable to the City of Fort Worth, in an amount of not less than five (5%) percent of the bid submitted (per Article 8 of the Instructions to Bidders) must accompany the bid, and is subject to forfeit in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a subcontract agreement with the General Contractor for the Holly Water Treatment Plant Upgrade Project in accordance with provisions of these Documents. Upon selection of the Ozone System Supplier (OSS) the work and associated price will be included as part of the Holly Water Treatment Plant Upgrade Project general construction contract. The OSS shall enter into a subcontract directly with the General Contractor. The selected OSS shall provide a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond, each for one hundred percent (1001,1u) of the bid price, to the General Contractor. The selected OSS shall also provide a two year Maintenance Bond for one hundred percent (100%) of the bid price, to the General Contractor. For additional information, please contact Mr. Clay Ralm, P.E. at (817) 735-7364, or David Sloan, P.E., Freese & Nichols, Inc. at (817) 735-72 77. Publication Dates: May 28, 2009 June 4, 2009 A-1 Part A — Notice to Bidders 5!29, 09 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK `/ *%Wool `/ A-2 Part A — Notice to Bidders 5/29/09 Citv of Fort Wonh 'Forth and South HoJIN Vy'TP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment •.roe INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ARTICLE 1. GENERAL INFORMATION 1.1 The following "instructions outline the procedure for preparing and submitting Proposals. Ozone System Supplier (OSS) must fulfill all requirements as specified in the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 2. PREQUALIFIED OZONE SYSTEM SUPPLIERS. 2.1 The following OSS's have been pre -qualified to submit bids based upon their experience with similar sizes and types of projects and their capabilities of performing the work within the project schedule. ■ Ozonia North America, Elmwood Park, NJ ■ Fuji Electric, Saddlebrook, NJ ARTICLE 3. TYPE OF PROPOSAL 3.1 Proposal consists of both technical and cost information. 3.2 OSSs shall be required to submit prices and other required data for all items listed in the Proposal Form. ARTICLE 4. COPIES OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ""W 4.1 Refer to the Notice to Bidders for information regarding the availability of Contract Documents. 4.2 Complete sets of Contract Documents shall be used in preparing Proposals; neither OWNER nor ENGINEER assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Contract Documents. 4.3 Reproduction and distribution of the Contract Documents to another party that is not directly associated with this Project is strictly prohibited. 4.4 OWNER and ENGINEER in making copies of Contract Documents available do so only for the purpose of obtaining Proposals on the Work and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. ARTICLE 5. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND POINT OF DESTINATION 5.1 Before submitting a Proposal, each OSS must (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly, including any Addenda; (b) familiarize itself with Federal, State and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations that may in any manner affect cost, progress or performance of the Work; (c) study and carefully correlate OSS's observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents; and (d) promptly furnish ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts; errors, omissions, ambiguities, or discrepancies that OSS discovers in the Contract Documents and confine that the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to OSS. 5.2 Before submitting its Proposal each OSS may, at its own expense, make such additional investigations and tests as the OSS may deem necessary_ to determine its Proposal for performance A-3 Part A — Notice to Bidders 5:29/09 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment of the Work in accordance with the time, price and other ternis and conditions of the Contract N%EW Documents. 5.3 The submission of a Proposal will constitute an incontrovertible representation by the OSS that it has complied with every requirement of this Article 5 and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance of the Work, that OSS has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, omissions, ambiguities and discrepancies that OSS has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolutions thereof by Engineer are acceptable to OSS, and that the Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terns and conditions for furnishing Goods and Special Services. ARTICLE 6. INTERPRETATIONS 6.1 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents shall be submitted in writing to Freese and Nichols, Inc., 4055 International Plaza, Fort Worth, Texas 76109, Attn: Mr. Clay Rahn, P.E., or by e-mail (cer'vfreese.com) Questions received less than ten days before the date herein set for the opening of Proposals may not be clarified by addendum. 6.2 Written clarifications or interpretations will be issued by Addenda. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other clarifications or interpretations will be without legal effect. Addenda will be issued to all parties recorded as having received the Contract Documents. 6.3 Each OSS shall be responsible for determining that it has received all Addenda issued. 14fto" ARTICLE 7. CONTRACT AND SUBCONTRACT 7.1 Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bids and waive any and all formalities, and the right to disregard all nonconforming or conditional Bids or counter proposals. 7.2 The City of Fort Worth will receive and evaluate proposals for the ozone system from the prequalified OSS's prior to the date that the General Contractors for the Holly Water Treatment Plant Project (Project) submit their bids. The selected OSS will enter into an initial Special Engineering Services Agreement (Contract) with the City for providing services during design of the Project. The OSS will then enter into a subcontract agreement (Subcontract) with the General Contractor for the Project. 7.3 The selected OSS will enter into a Special Engineering Services Agreement (Pan G) with the City for providing project design documentation, shop drawings, assistance in the design of the ozone system, and attendance at design progress meetings. This agreement will be for the amount presented in Part B Proposal, Item B. If the OSS considers the cost for these services to be greater than the Proposal amount, the additional cost should be included as part of the Item A. y 7.4 The selected OSS will become a subcontractor to the General Contractor for the Project. The name, bid price, and proposal of the OSS Subcontractor will be supplied by the City to each of the General Contractors bidding the Project. The City will receive bids from General Contractors for the Project, evaluate the bids, and issue a letter of intent to award the contract to the successful General Contractor. *4%0/ A-4 Part A — Notice to Bidders 529/09 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly 1A TP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment ..i 7.5 Within a period of time, not to exceed 300 calendar days from receipt of OSS proposals, the OSS shall enter into a written Subcontract Agreement with the General Contractor for the Project. OSS shall hold the bid price for that period of time. The City of Fort Worth will not enter into a contract directly with the OSS Subcontractor for the work-, except for the special engineering services described in Article 7.3. The OSS Subcontractor shall be subject to the teens and conditions of all subcontractors for the Project as required by the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Special Conditions of the Contract that will apply to the General Contractor for the Project. The General Conditions are included in Appendix A of these Documents. ARTICLE 8. PROPOSAL SECURITY 8.1 Proposals must be accompanied by a cashier's check, or an acceptable bidder's bond, payable to the City of Fort Worth, in the amount of not less than five (5%) percent of the total of the bid submitted (Items A and B of Proposal only). This proposal security is subject to forfeiture in the event the successful bidder fails or neglects to execute the Subcontract Agreement and furnish the satisfactory bonds and insurance within thirty days of the City's notice to proceed to the General Contractor for the Project. To be an acceptable surety on the bond, (1) the name of the surety company shall be included on the current U.S. Treasury list of acceptable sureties, or (2) the surety company must have capital and surplus equal to ten times the limit on the bond. The surety must be licensed to do business in the State of Texas. The amount of the bond shall not exceed the amount shown on the U.S. Treasury list or one -tenth (1/10) the total capital and surplus. Proposal Securities for all bidders will be held until the Special Engineering Services Contract is awarded. The Proposal Security for the bidder awrded the Special Engineering Services Contract and selected to supply the Ozone System will be held for 300 days or until such time the subcontract 141001, agreement between the General Contractor and the OSS has been executed. ARTICLE 9. PERFORMANCE, PAYMENT. AND OTHER BONDS 9.1 The successful OSS shall furnish a performance bond, a payment bond, and a maintenance bond each for one hundred (100%) percent of the subcontract price with a security listed in the Federal Register and licensed in Texas, in compliance with the General Conditions of Contract. Reference G-8 of the General Conditions presented in Appendix A. The maintenance bond shall be for a two- year period. The performance, payment, and maintenance bonds required as Subcontract security shall be furnished to the General Contractor for the Holly Water Treatment Plant Upgrade project. The performance and payment bonds shall be provided at contract start. The maintenance bond shall be provided at successful completion of the performance warranty testing. The performance bond shall be kept in force until the ozone system equipment has been tested and meets the applicable performance warranties of Section 01740, Section I 1264-A and Section 11264-F. ARTICLE 10. INSURANCE 10.1 The successful OSS shall purchase and keep in force liability insurance in compliance with the General Conditions of the Contract included in Appendix A of these Documents. The required insurance policy shall be taken out and available to the General Contractor for review and approval when the subcontract agreement is executed. 10.2 Except for Workmen's Compensation Insurance, the City of Fort Worth, and the City's Engineer and Construction Manager, shall be added as an additional insured on all policies. If requested by the General Contractor, the General Contractor shall also be added as an additional insured. A-5 Part A — Notice to Bidders 5%29i09 City of Fort North North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment ARTICLE 11. PREPARATION OF PROPOSALS ] L I OSSs shall use the Proposal forms included in the Contract Documents. Supplemental data to be furnished shall be included in the same sealed envelope with Proposal. 11.2 Proposal Forms must be completed in ink. The Bid price -of each item on the form must be stated in words, if specifically requested, and/or numerals; in case of a conflict. words will take precedence. Y 11.3 Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the signature. 11.4 Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and sighed by a partner, their title must appear under their signature and the official address of the partnership must be shown below the signature. 11.5 All names must be printed below the signature. 11.6 The Bid shall contain an acknowledgement of receipt of all Addenda (the number of which shall be filled in on the Bid Fomi). ARTICLE 12. SUBMISSION OF PROPOSALS 12.1 Each Proposal shall consist of the following bound documents. ■ The Contract Documents as assembled herein with the Proposal Form and Proposal Security completed. ■ Three (3) copies of technical inforrnation as required in these Instructions to Bidders. 12.2 All Proposals must be submitted intact with the remainder of the Contract Documents, no later than the time prescribed, at the place, and in the manner set forth in the Notice to Bidders. Each Proposal must be submitted in a sealed envelope or container, so marked as to indicate its contents, including project title, name of the OSS, its address, and contract number without being opened, and delivered in person or addressed and mailed in conformance with the instructions in the Notice to Bidders. 12.3 Bidders shall not separate, detach or remove any portion, segment, or sheets from the contract document at any time. Bidders must complete the proposal section(s) and submit the complete volume of contract documents. Revised bid forms issued by addenda shall be stapled to the original bid form in the specifications book prior to submission. 12.4 OWNER may reject as non -responsive any Proposal not prepared and submitted in accordance with the provisions hereof. 12.5 Bidders are cautioned that it is the responsibility of each individual bidder to assure that its proposal is in the possession of the responsible official or its designated alternate prior to the stated time and at the place of the Proposal Opening. ON NER is not responsible for proposals delayed by mail and/or delivery services, of any nature. 12.6 Bidders shall not take any exceptions within their Proposal. Doing so may render the bid non- responsive and may result in the bid not being accepted by the City. A-6 Part A — Notice to Bidders 5.!29t09 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment ARTICLE 13. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF PROPOSAL 13.1 Proposals may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Proposal must be executed) and delivered to the place where Proposals are to be submitted at any time prior to the opening; of Proposals. 132 Proposals may be withdrawn prior to the scheduled time (or authorized postponement thereof) for the opening of Proposals. 13.3 Any Proposal received after the time and date specified shall not be considered. :ARTICLE 14. TECHNICAL INFORMATION REQUIRED WITH THE PROPOSAL 14.1 Proposals from the invited OSSs shall address the items listed in the following sections. OSSs should note that it is Suggested that the Proposals be presented in such a manner as to allow the readers to expeditiously learn the key features and differences of the OSS's system. Concise answers to all questions are desired. 14.2 Proposals without sufficient submittal data to provide a complete evaluation will not be considered. 14.3 Reimbursement will not be made for costs incurred by the OSS to prepare this document. 14.4 Use of Information Provided: The OSS shall agree that any and all information provided in the Proposal shall serve as the basis for evaluation of Proposals. 14.5 Selection of OSS does not constitute approval of any materials or deviations from the Contract Documents. 14.6 The OSS shall present any objections or exceptions to the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements, and Patent Protection. 14.7 Each OSS is required to describe and provide details on their proposed product and services for the OWNER. A. Miscellaneous Company Characteristics A.1 Provide company contact information including address, telephone number. facsimile number, and email address. A.2 The OSS shall disclose in writing all legal claims or actions taken against the OSS that involve the delivery or execution of a Contract for the supply of Goods and Special Services within the past 5 years. A.3 The OSS shall disclose in writing if there is any legal claim regarding the infringement of a patent or other intellectual property that could affect its ability to provide Goods or Special Services as part of this Contract. A-7 Part A — Notice to Bidders 5.'29;09 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly NVTP upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment B. Ozone System Operating Characteristics s B.1 Provide guaranteed performance information on the ozone generators, including power supplies, cooling water pumps if closed loop cooling is used. and nitrogen generator. B.2 OSS shall provide detailed calculations supporting the methodology used to calculate power consumption. B.3 Submit preliminary electrical load list for all 480V equipment supplied by the OSS. B.4 Submit ozone generator performance curves, indicating kWhilb of ozone as a function of operating level and cooling water temperature. C. Facilities Layout: C.1 Provide dimensioned drawings illustrating the proposed layout for the ozone system, including dimensions for housing all ozone equipment and appurtenances including power supplies, generators, cooling water facilities, nitrogen system, and ozone destruct units. Provide plan and section views of the proposed ozone system. Drawings shall be to scale, with major dimensions identified. C.2 Provide the scope of supply for the ozone system equipment, along -with the quantities and preliminary sizing for each piece of equipment. C.3 Provide three hard copies of all drawings printed on 1 1" x 17" paper and provide `,i three CDs of all drawing files in AutoCad. ARTICLE 15. SELECTION OF PROPOSER 15.1 Within 90 calendar days after the opening of Proposals, the OWNER will select one of the Proposals or will act in accordance with BASIS OF SELECTION, below. The selection of the Proposal will be by written notice of selection, mailed or delivered to the office designated in the Proposal. Selection of the Proposal does not guarantee execution of the Special Engineering Services Agreement or the Subcontract Agreement with the General Contractor. ARTICLE 16. BASIS OF SELECTION 16.1 The selection will be made by the OWTIER on the basis of that Proposal which, in the OWNER's sole and absolute judgment, will best serve the interest of the OWNER. 16.2 The Selected OSS will be determined by the OWNER based on the OWNER's estimate of life - cycle costs and other evaluation criteria, as specified below. 16.3 The OWNER will select an OSS based on its evaluation. The OWNER reserves the right to make this determination based on factors which represent the needs and interests of the OWNER, and by submitting this Proposal, the OSS forgoes any opportunity to formally protest the OWNER's decision. 16.4 The OWNER may request additional information as deemed necessary. Failure to provide such information in a timely manner may result in the Proposal being considered non -responsive. A-8 Part A —'notice to Bidders 5i29.!09 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment 16.5 The OWNER reserves the right to reject all Proposals, or any Proposal not in conformance with the intent of the Contract Documents, and to waive any informalities and irregularities in said Proposals. ARTICLE 17. EVALUATION CRITERIA FOR PROPOSALS 17.1 Ozone System Proposals will be evaluated based upon capital cost and life cycle cost. 17.2 Life -cycle costs will be developed based upon: a. Base Bid of the Ozone System equipment (item A). b. Present worth value of energy costs for 20 years using 6% interest rate and 3% inflation rate (item C). Electric power cost will be estimated using a unit cost of $0.085 per kilowatt-hour. ARTICLE 18. WAGE RATES 18.1 Not less than the wage rates issued by the U.S. Department of Labor under the Davis -Bacon and related Acts must be paid on this project. The wage rates shall be for the specific project location. Refer to the web site w1N•w.,-,"l)o.2ov:'davisbacon;`tx.litmI for the applicable rates. ARTICLE 19. SALES TAX 19.1 The material and supplies to be used in the Work will be subject to the requirements of Section D-9 TAXES of the General Conditions attached in Appendix A. ,%.r ARTICLE 20. TIME OF COMPLETION 20.1 The OSS shall commence work under the Special Engineering Services Contract on the day following notice to proceed for the contract and shall meet the completion dates specified in Part G - Special Engineering Services Contract. 20.2 The OSS shall commence work under the Subcontract Agreement with the General Contractor for the Project on the day following the execution of the Subcontract Agreement and shall complete work in accordance with the following schedule: 1. OSS shall not commence the manufacture of any Goods until the Shop Drawings have been approved and the GENERAL CONTRACTOR has issued a "Notice to Commence Fabrication." 2. The Goods shall be fabricated and delivered to the Point of Destination in accordance with the Schedule for Delivery of Goods, to be developed and agreed upon by the OWNER, OSS, ENGINEER, and General Contractor for the installation of the Goods prior to the issuance of the "Notice to Commence Fabrication'. The OSS shall accept a Schedule for Delivery of Goods that requires the Goods to be fabricated and delivered to the Point of Destination in as few as 200 days, but no more than 365 days, after the "Notice to Commence Fabrication" is issued. 3. All Goods shall be fabricated and delivered to the Point of Destination according to the Schedule for Delivery of Goods. Each shipment of Goods specified in the Schedule of Delivery of Goods shall be delivered to the Point of Destination within a period of time from A-9 Part A — Notice to Bidders 5/29/09 City of Fort Worth North and South Hotly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment between four calendar days before to four calendar days after the date specified for that shipment within the Schedule for Delivery of Goods. The OSS shall be liable for liquidated damages in accordance with Article 21 below for each shipment of Goods that is not fabricated and delivered to the Point of Destination in accordance with the Schedule for Delivery of Goods. ARTICLE 21. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 21.1 Should the OSS fail to complete the Work or portions of the Work under the Special Engineering Services Contract within the specified time periods, the OSS will be subject to liquidated damages as specified in Part G — Special Engineering Services Contract. 21.2 Should the OSS fail to complete the work or portions of the Work under the Subcontract Agreement with the General Contractor for the Project, within the Schedule for Delivery of Goods as specified in Article 20 above, thereby causing the General Contractor to be late and having to pay liquidated damages to the City, the OSS agrees to pay the Contractor liquidated damages in the amount of $1,000 for each and every calendar day of delay until the Work is completed. The total amount of liquidated damages payable by the OSS shall not exceed ten percent of the OSS contract price. ARTICLE 22. AMBIGUITY 22.1 In the case of ambiguity or lack of clearness in stating prices in the Proposal, the City reserves the right to adopt the most advantageous construction thereof to the City or to reject the Proposal. ARTICLE 23. BIDDER LICENSE 23.1 Prior to the award of contract to an out-of-state bidder, the bidder shall be licensed to do business in the State of Texas. For licensing procedures, contact the Texas Secretary of State Offices (Telephone Number 1-512-463-5555 or 1-900-263-0060) ARTICLE 24. AGE 24.1 In accordance with the policy of the Executive Branch of the Federal Government, OSS covenants that neither it nor any of its officers, members, agents. employees, program participants or subcontractors, while engaged in perfonning this contract, shall, in connection with the employment, advancement or discharge of employees or in connection with the terms, conditions or privileges of their employment, discriminate against persons because of their age except on the basis of a bona fide occupational qualification, retirement plan or statutory requirement. OSS further covenants that neither it nor its officers, members, agents, employees, subcontractors, program participants, or persons acting on their behalf, shall specify, in solicitation to advertisement for employees to work on this contract, a maximum age limit for such employment unless the specified maximum age limit is based upon a bona fide occupational qualification, retirement plan or statutory requirements. OSS warrants it will fully comply with the policy and will defend, indemnify and hold City harmless against any claims or allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractors against the City arising out of the OSS' alleged failure to comply with the above referenced Policy concerning age discrimination in the performance of the contract. 015 A-10 Pan A — Notice to Bidders 5/29.r09 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment ..i ARTICLE 25. DISABILITY 25.1 In accordance with provision of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA), OSS warrants that it and any and all of its subcontractors will not unla,,A-fully discriminate on: the basis of disability in the provision of services to the general public, nor in the availability, ternis and/or conditions of employ7ment for applicants for employment with, or employees of the OSS or any of its subcontractors. OSS warrants it will fully comply with ADA's provision and any other applicable Federal, State, and local laws concerning disability and will defend, indemnify and hold harmless against any claims or allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractors against the City arising out of the OSS's and/or its subcontractor's alleged failure to comply with the above referenced Policy concerning disability discrimination in the performance of this contract. ARTICLE 26. MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES 26.1 The Minority and Women Business Enterprise requirements, per the City of Fort Worth Ordinance No.15530, have been waived and are not applicable to this Ozone System Pre -Selection. ARTICLE 27. ADDENDA 27.1 Bidders wanting further information, interpretation or clarification of the contract documents must make their request in writing to the Fort Worth Water Department in care of Mr. Clay Rahn, P.E., Freese and Nichols, Inc., 4055 International Plaza, Fort Worth, Texas 76109, (817) 730-7300, at least ten days prior to bid opening- Answers to all such requests :will be bound and made a part of the Contract Documents, or should the bidder be in doubt as to their meaning, the bidder should at once notify the Fort Worth Water Department Engineering Services, in order that a written addendum may be sent to all bidders. Any addenda issued will be mailed or be delivered to each prospective bidder_ The bid proposal as submitted by the bidder must be so constructed as to include any addenda issued by the Fort Worth Water Department, prior to 24 hours of the opening of bids with appropriate recognition of addenda so noted in the bid proposal. Bidders are responsible for obtaining all addenda to the contract documents and acknowledging receipt of the addenda by initialing the appropriate spaces on the proposal form. Bids that do not acknowledge receipt of all addenda may be rejected as being non -responsive. Information regarding the status of addenda may be obtained by contacting Freese and Nichols, Inc. ARTICLE 28. PRE -BID CONFERENCE 28.1 A mandatory pre -bid conference for bidding the Ozone System will be held by representatives of the Fort Worth Water Department and the Consulting Engineers in the North Holly Conference Room, 1500 11th Avenue, Fort Worth, Texas 76102 on Thursday; June 11, 2009 at 10:00 a.m. This conference is for the purpose of interpretation of Contract Documents for bidding the Ozone System. Only comments addressed in subsequent Addenda will be binding. ARTICLE 29. TEXAS WATER DEVELOPMENT BOARD REQUIREMENTS: 29.1 This contract is contingent upon release of funds from the Texas Water Development Board, 29.2 Any contract or contracts awarded under this Notice for Bidders are expected to be funded in part by a loan from the Texas Water Development Board. Neither the State of Texas nor any of its departments, agencies, or employees are or will be a party to this Invitation for Bids or any resulting contract. A-1 1 Part A - Notice to Bidders � 1-9,•'09 City of Fort Worth North and South Holl} WTP Lpgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment 29.3 Equal Opportunity in Emplo}ment — All qualified Applicants will receive consideration for "*we _ employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex. age, handicap or national origin. Bidders � on this work will be required to comply with the President's Executive Order No. 11246, as amended by Executive Order 11375. and as supplemented in Department of Labor regulations 41 CFR Part 60. END OF SECTION \we \%M/ A-12 Part A — Notic^ to Bidders 5%29.'09 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment PART B (This Proposal shall be attached to the Specifications and submitted with appropriate supporting documents.) TO: Dale Fisseler, P.E. City Manager Municipal Office Building 1000 Throckmorton Fort Worth, Texas 76102 PROPOSAL FOR: North And South Holly Water Treatment Plant Upgrade Ozone Generation Equipment Capital Project No. 00757 ARTICLE 1. PROPOSER'S DECLARATION AND UNDERSTANDING. 1.1. This Proposal is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed person, firm, or corporation and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group, association, organization, or corporation; Proposer has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Proposer to submit a false or sham Proposal; Proposer has not solicited or induced any person, firm, or corporation to refrain from proposing; and Proposer has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any advantage over any other Proposer or over OWNER. 1.2. In submitting this Proposal, Ozone System Supplier (OSS) certifies it is qualified to do business in the state where the Project is located as required by laws, rules, and regulations or, if allowed by statute, covenants to obtain such qualification prior to contract award. 1.3 In submitting this Proposal, OSS makes all representations required by the Notice to Bidders and further warrants and represents that: (a) OSS has examined copies of all the Contract Documents, the Notice to Bidders, the Instructions to Bidders, and of the following Addenda (receipt of all which is hereby acknowledged). - No. 1 Dated 06/14/2009 No. 4 Dated 06/29/2009 No. 2 Dated 06/22/2009 No. Dated No. 3 Dated 06/26/2009 No. Dated (b) OSS has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing the Goods and Special Services. B-1 Part B — Proposal 6/29/2009 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment (c) OSS has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies which may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Goods and Special Services at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports or similar information or data are or will be required by OSS for such purposes. (d) OSS has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports and studies with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. (e) OSS has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors, omissions, ambiguities or discrepancies that it has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to OSS. 1.4 In this Section, the OSS shall provide values for specific performance parameters for the Ozone System. The OSS understands and agrees that the values stated in this Section for the associated performance parameters will be compared to the performance standards required in Section 11264A of the Contract Documents. OSS understands and agrees to guarantee the performance values stated herein for the Ozone System in accordance with the guidelines specified in Section 01740 and Section 11264A of the Contract Documents. 1.5 The undersigned agrees to enter into a Subcontract with the General Contractor for the Holly Ozone Project to perform and furnish all Work and engineering services as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the amount indicated in this Proposal Form and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of these Contract Documents. 1.6 The undersigned accepts all of the terms and conditions of these Contract Documents including, without limitation, those dealing with the disposition of Proposal security, and the penalties that may be imposed based on results from the Performance Testing. This Proposal shall remain subject to acceptance for a period of 300 calendar days after the day of Proposal opening. If the General Contractor has not been awarded the contract within the 300 calendar day period, the OSS bid price presented in the Proposal will be adjusted upward based upon the ratio of the applicable Consumer Price Index (CPI) numbers between the end of the 300 day period and such time the General Contractor is awarded the contract by the City. 7 The OSS shall determine a percentage of the supply price which is subject to the stainless steel market price fluctuations, and shall indicate this value in Item E below. The price in this Proposal shall be adjusted up or down based on the London Commodity Index for 304 Stainless Steel Flat Rolled Coil as indicated on the www.metalDricees.com web site. The subject portion of the supply price will be adjusted in proportion to the ratio of the index on the date the General Contractor is given a notice to proceed by the Owner and the bid date of this equipment supply proposal. The percentage selected by the OSS shall not exceed 20%. 1.8 The OSS acknowledges that it has reviewed the design criteria specified in these Contract Documents and that the Proposal offered will meet the design and operational criteria and project schedule as described in the Contract Documents. In submitting the Proposal, the B-2 Part B — Proposal 6/29/2009 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment OSS agrees to provide Goods to meet or exceed the requirements specified in the Contract Documents. 1.9 The OWNER's decision on ozone system equipment selection will be final. By submitting a Proposal, OSS waives any right to protest the decision. 10 The OSS acknowledges that the selection of a proprietary ozone equipment OSS is the sole decision of the OWNER and such decisions are final. 1.11 OSS accepts the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 2. INSURANCE. 2.1 OSS further agrees that the Proposal amount(s) stated herein includes specific consideration for the specified insurance coverages. ARTICLE 3. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. 3.1 OSS agrees to pay the General Contractor for the Project liquidated damages in the event of late delivery, as described in Part A — Instructions to Bidders. ARTICLE 4. STATE AND LOCAL SALES AND USE TAXES. 4.1 Except as may be specifically provided to the contrary in any of the Contract Documents, the Proposal Price should include all applicable international, federal, state, and local transportation, privilege, occupation, and other taxes applicable to the Goods and Special ..mwl Services, and all international, federal, state, and local taxes, contributions, and premiums imposed upon or measured by the OSS's or its Subcontractor's payroll. The OWNER shall not be responsible for any state or local sales, use, or excise taxes. ARTICLE 5. PROPOSAL SCHEDULE. 5.1 OSS shall provide required information by filling in all blanks shown in Article 5 and Article 6. If the blanks provided in the proposal are not applicable to the OSS's ozone system, please write, "not applicable" in the blank. 5.2 Life -cycle costs will be developed based upon: a. Base Bid of the Ozone System equipment (Item A). b. Present worth value of power costs for 20 years (Item Q. Power costs will be calculated using information provided in the Proposals, with modifications, as deemed appropriate, by the judgment of the ENGINEER and OWNER. 5.3 Item B — Price for Special Engineering Services for Ozone System Design will not be included in the life -cycle cost evaluation. B-3 Part B — Proposal 6/29/2009 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment ARTICLE 6. DESIGN CRITERIA 6.1 Base Proposal Design Criteria A. OSS shall note that performance information provided in this Proposal must be guaranteed over the warranty period and will serve as the baseline against which future system performance will be compared to determine whether system is non- performing. See Section 01740 for warranty information. B. OSS shall submit with the bid an explanation of the methodology used to calculate the proposed energy value SECavg provided in Item C below. The methodology shall include a description of all key assumptions made and example calculations. PROPOSAL Item A: Ozone System and Services Contract Price Indicate the Contract Price for the Ozone System and Services as specified in Section 11264A and related sections of the technical specifications. Four Million Five Hundred Forty Thousand Dollars and Zero Cents amount in words $ 4.540.000.00 amount in figures Item B: Price for Special Engineering Services for Ozone System Design The Contract Price for Special Engineering Services has been determined by the OWNER as fair and reasonable. Fifty Thousand Dollars and No Cents amount in words $ 50.000.00 amount in figures Item C: Present -Worth Value of Average Rate of Energy Consumption Average Specific Energy Consumption (SECavg) using one generator for producing ozone production rates specified in Section 11264F and at the conditions specified in Section 11264F for the Energy Consumption Efficiency tests, SECavg = 3.61 kWh pound of ozone B-4 Part B — Proposal 6/29/2009 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment The Present -worth value of energy consumption cost for continuous operation over a 20-year period is calculated as follows: Average energy consumption cost for producing ozone production rates at the conditions specified in Section 11264F - SECavg 3.61 kWh/pound of ozone X 2300 pounds per day X $0.085 per kWh X 365 days per year X a present worth factor of 12.46 = Present Worth Value. Three Million Two Hundred Nine Thousand Seven Hundred Dollars and Zero Cents Present Worth Value - amount in words Item D: Total of Items A and C. amount in words $ 3,209,700.00 amount in figures 7,749,700.00 amount in figures Item E: Portion of Contract Price Subject to Stainless Steel Price Index. Indicate the percentage of Item A to be adjusted up or down for stainless steel price fluctuations, as described in Article 1.7. Percentage shall not exceed 20% of Item A. Ten Percent percentage in words Percentage in figures ARTICLE 7. GUARANTEES. 10% 7.1 Performance: The OSS shall guarantee that the system will perform, meeting the design conditions as stated herein and in Section 11264A. After installation, the OWNER will conduct Acceptance Testing to confirm performance as described in Section 11264F. Remedial actions are described in Section 01740 and Section 11264A. ARTICLE 8. SURETY. 8.1 If OSS is awarded the Work from this Proposal, the surety who provides the Performance and Payment Bond(s) shall be: Fidelitv and Deposit Companv of Marvland whose address is P. O. Box 1227, Baltimore, MD 21203-1227 Street City State Zip Code B-5 Part B — Proposal 6/29/2009 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment ARTICLE 9. PROPOSERS. Respectfull s mitt By: set) Giannone Title: President Address: Ozonia North America. LLC 491 Edward N. Ross Dr. (S E A L) Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 If Bidder is Corporation Telephone: 201-794-3100 Date: 06/30/2009 END OF SECTION %ftwo B-6 Part B — Proposal 6/29/2009 %%EW WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE MANAGER OF OZONIA NORTH AMERICA, LLC The undersigned, being the manager of Ozonia North America, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company (the "Company"), hereby consents to the adoption of the following resolutions: RESOLVED, that the following persons are elected to the offices set opposite their respective names, to hold such offices until their successors shall be duly elected and qualified: Name Office Joseph Giannone President Stephane Puron Chief Financial Officer & Treasurer Anthony Dusovic Vice President Anthony J. Hargrave Vice President Mason Dirickson Vice President James E. Brown Secretary F. Thomas Smiley Assistant Treasurer Robert O'Grady Assistant Treasurer Gaspar Lesznik Assistant Secretary Robert W. Winslow Assistant Secretary RESOLVED FURTHER, that other known officer positions are hereby abolished and other officers are hereby removed. RESOLVED FURTHER, that all of the above -named officers are hereby authorized to execute for and on the behalf of the Corporation, proposals, bids, contracts, and other documents of a contractual or legal nature relating to the sale or purchase of products and services in the ordinary conduct of business by the Corporation. Signature pdge to follow ►n RESOLVED, that all actions heretofore taken by the Manager of the Company are approved, ratified and confirmed in all respects, This Consent shall be effective as of July 25, 2008. INFILCO DEGREMONT, INC. By: Name: Shyara Bhan Title: CEO Date: 2 PART C GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT The selected Ozone System Supplier (OSS) for the North and South Holly Water Treatment Plant Upgrade (Project) will enter into a subcontract agreement with the General Contractor for the Project. The General Contractor will be subject to the General Conditions (Part C) presented in the Appendix to these documents. The OSS will be subject to these same General Conditions, as Subcontractor to the General Contractor, This Part C — General Conditions, identifies those items within Part C that are applicable to the OSS as a subcontractor SECTION A DEFINITIONS, PROCEDURES AND INTERPRETATIONS A-1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: By the term Contract Documents is meant all of the written and drawn documents setting forth or affecting the rights of the parties, including but not necessarily limited to, the Contract, Notice to Bidders, Proposal, General Conditions, Special Conditions, Specifications, Plans, Bonds and all Addenda, Amendments signed by all parties, Change Orders, written Interpretations and any written Field Order for a minor change in the Work. A-2 ENTIRE AGREEMENT: The Contract Documents represent the entire agreement between the Parties, and no prior or contemporaneous, oral or written agreements, instruments or negotiations shall be construed as altering the terms and effects of the Contract Documents. After being executed, the Contract Documents can be changed only by a written Amendment signed by the Contractor and the Owner, or Change Order, or by a written Field Order for a minor change. A-3 WORK: By the term Work is meant all labor, supervision, materials and equipment necessary to be used or incorporated in order to produce the construction required by Contract Documents. A-4 EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Contract Documents shall be executed in six originals, with all required attachments, including required bonds and insurance certificates, by the Contractor and the Owner in such form as may be prescribed by law and returned to the Owner within ten business days of notification to Contractor. Failure to execute contracts and provide required enclosures will be grounds for revocation of award and taking of Bid Bond. A-5 FAMILIARITY WITH PROPOSED WORK: Before filing a Proposal, the bidder shall examine carefully the plans, specifications, special provisions, and the form of contract to be entered into for the work contemplated. He shall examine the site of work and satisfy himself as to the conditions that will be encountered relating to the character, quality and quantity of work to be performed and materials to be furnished. The filing of a bid by the bidder shall be considered evidence that he has complied with these requirements and has accepted the site as suitable for the work. Claims for additional compensation due to variations between conditions actually encountered in construction and as indicated by the plans will not be allowed. A-6 ONE UNIFIED CONTRACT: Insofar as possible, the Contract Documents will be bound together and executed as a single unified Contract. The intention of the Contract Documents being to provide for all labor, supervision, materials, equipment and other items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. Words that have well -recognized technical or trade meanings are used herein in accordance with such recognized meanings. A-7 DIVISION OF WORK: The arrangement of Drawings and/or Specifications into Divisions, Sections, Articles, or other Subdivisions shall not be binding upon the Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Trades. A-8 INTERPRETATIONS: The Engineer will furnish such Interpretations of the Plans and Specifications as may be necessary for the proper execution or progress of the work. Such Interpretations shall be furnished at the initiation of the Engineer or at the request of the Contractor, or Owner, and will be issued with reasonable promptness and at such times and in accordance with such schedule as may be agreed upon. Such Interpretations shall be consistent with the purposes and intent of the Plans and Specifications and may be effected by Field Order. In the event of any dispute between any of the parties to the Contract and the Engineer or each other involving the interpretation of the Contract Documents, the evaluation of work or materials performed or furnished by the Contractor or any subcontractor or materialsman, or involving any question of fault or liability of any party, the decision of the Owner shall be final and binding. In the event of inconsistency in the contract documents, the following sequence for interpretation shall be used in order of precedence: Change Orders and/or Field Orders (by date of issuance); Addenda (by date of issuance); Drawings; Notes and dimensions on Drawings: Technical Specifications; Special Provisions; Supplementary General Conditions; General Conditions; and, Construction Contract_ A-9 COPIES OF WORKING DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS: The Engineer will furnish to Contractor free of charge 5 sets of working Drawings and 5 sets of Specifications. Contractor shall pay the cost of reproduction for all other copies of Drawings and Specifications furnished to him. All Drawings, Specifications and copies thereof furnished by the Owner or the Engineer are and shall remain the property of the Owner. They are not to be used on any other project and, with the exception of one Contract set for each Party to the Contract, are to be returned to the Owner on request at the completion of the work. A-10 MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (M/WBE) POLICY: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor C-1 Pan C —General Conditions of the Contract (OSS) 03129109 A-11 CORRELATION AND INTENT: In general, the drawings indicate dimension, locations, positions, quantities, and kinds of construction; the specifications indicate the quality and construction procedures required. Work indicated on the drawings and not specified or vice -versa, shall be furnished as though set forth in both. Work not detailed, marked or specified shall be the same as similar parts that are detailed, marked or specified. If the drawings are in conflict or conflict with the specifications the better quality or greater quantity or work or materials shall be estimated and shall be furnished or included. Dimensions on drawings shall take precedence over small-scale drawings. Drawings showing locations of equipment, piping, ductwork, electrical apparatus, etc., are ifiagrammatic and job conditions may not allow installation in the exact location shown. Relocation shall not occur without the Engineer's approval. A-12 AGE: In accordance with the policy ("Policy") of the Executive Branch of the federal government, Contractor covenants that neither it nor any of its officers, members, agents, employees, program participants or subcontractors, while engaged in performing this contract, shall, in connection with the employment, advancement or discharge of employees or in connection with the terms, conditions or privileges of their employment, discriminate against persons because of their age except on the basis of a bona fide occupational qualification, retirement plan or statutory requirement. Contractor further covenants that neither it nor its officers, members, agents, employees, subcontractors, program participants, or persons acting on their behalf, shall specify, in solicitations or advertisements for employees to work on this contract, a maximum age limit for such employment unless the specified maximum age limit is based upon a bona fide occupational qualification, retirement plan or statutory equipment. Contractor warrants it will fully comply with the Policy and will defend, indemnify and hold City harmless against any claims or allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractor against City arising out of Contractor's and/or its subcontractors' alleged failure to comply with the above referenced Policy concerning age discrimination in the performance of this agreement. A-13 DISABILITY: In accordance with the provisions of the Americans With Disabilities Act of 1990 ("ADA"), Contractor warrants that it and any and all of its subcontractors will not unlawfully discriminate on the basis of disability in the provision of services to the general public, nor in the availability, terms and/or conditions of employment for applicants for employment with, or employees of Contractor or any of its subcontractors. Contractor warrants it will fully comply with ADA provisions and any other applicable federal, state and local laws concerning disability and will defend, indemnify and hold City harmless against any claims or allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractors against City arising out of Contractor's and/or its subcontractors' alleged failure to comply with the above -referenced laws concerning disability discrimination in the performance of this agreement. SECTION B IDENTITY OF ENGINEER B-1 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION: Where the term "Engineer" is used in the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", it shall refer to the Director, Water Department or his designated Construction Manager. The Director, Water Department will designate a Project Manager and Construction Manager (CM) to administer this contract and perform the functions of the "Engineer" as indicated in the General Conditions. The design engineer or consulting engineer may also be designated to perform the duties of "Engineer". The term "City" and "Owner" are used interchangeably and refer to the City of Fort Worth as B-2 TERMINATION AND SUSPENSION OF WORK: The Owner has the right to terminate the Project for any reason. If the project is terminated, the Contractor shall: Stop work under the Contract on the date and to the extent specified on the notice of termination. Place no further orders or subcontracts except as may be necessary for the completion of the work not terminated. c) Terminate all orders and subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the performance of the work terminated by the notice of termination. After termination as above, the City will pay the Contractor a proportionate part of the contract price based on the work completed; provided, however, that the amount of payment on termination shall not exceed the total contract price as reduced by the portion thereof allocatable to the work not completed and further reduced by the amount of payments, if, any otherwise made. Contractor shall submit its claim for amounts due after termination as provided in this paragraph within 30 days after receipt of such claim. In the event of any dispute or controversy as to the propriety or allowability of all or any portion of such claim under this paragraph, such dispute or controversy shall be resolved and be decided by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth, and the decision by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth shall be final and binding upon all parties to this contract. B-3 DUTIES OF THE ENGINEER: As used herein, the term Engineer means the Engineer or his authorized representative. Nothing contained in these Contract Documents shall create any privity of Contract between the Engineer and the Contractor. B-4 ENGINEER AS REPRESENTATIVE OF THE OWNER: the Contract on behalf of the Owner and will have authority to act Contract Documents unless changed in writing by the Owner. The the Owner or the Contractor at all reasonable times. C-2 The Construction Manager will provide general administration of as the representative of the Owner to the extent provided in the Engineer will be available for conferences and consultations with Pare C -General Conditions ofthe Contract (OSS) 05,129/09 kp B-5 ACCESS TO JOB SITES: The Engineer shall at all times have access to the Work whenever it is in preparation and progress. The Contractor shall provide facilities for such access so the Engineer may perform its assigned functions under the Contract Documents. The Engineer will make periodic visits to the Site to familiarize himself with the progress and quality of the work and to determine if the work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract documents. On the basis of on -site observations, the Engineer will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work of the Contractor. Based upon such observations and the Contractor's applications for payments, the Construction Manager will make determinations and recommendations concerning the amounts owing to the Contractor and will issue certificates for payment amounts. B-6 INTERPRETATIONS: The Engineer will be, in the first instance, the interpreter of the requirements of the Plans and Specifications and the judge of the performance thereunder by the Contractor, subject to the final decision of the Owner. The Engineer's decisions in matters relating to artistic effect will be final if consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. B-7 AUTHORITY TO STOP WORK: The CM will have authority to reject work that does not conform to the Plans and Specifications. In addition, whenever, in its reasonable opinion, the CM considers it necessary or advisable in order to ensure the proper realization of the intent of the Plans and Specifications, the CM will have authority to require the Contractor to stop the Work or any portion thereof, or to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not such Work be then fabricated, installed or completed. B-8 MISCELLANEOUS DUTIES OF ENGINEER Shoo Drawinos, The Engineer will review Shop Drawings and Samples. Two copies of each approved Shop Drawing and submittal will be provided to the Owner by the Engineer. Three copies will be returned to the Contractor. Chance Orders. Change Orders and Field Orders for Minor Changes in the Work will be issued by the Owner Guarantees. The Owner will receive all written guarantees and related documents required of the Contractor. Upon completion of the project the Contractor shall provide the Owner five copies of each guarantee. Inspections The Owner will conduct inspections for the purpose of determining and making his recommendations concerning the dates of substantial completion and final completion. The Engineer will conduct the final acceptance inspection and issue the Certificate of Completion. Operation and Maintenance Manuals The Owner will receive six copies of all applicable equipment installation, operation, and maintenance brochures and manuals required of the Contractor. B-9 TERMINATION OF THE ENGINEER: In case of the termination of the employment of the Engineer by the Owner, the Owner shall either assume the duties of the Engineer through the Director of the Water Department, or shall appoint a successor Engineer against whom the Contractor makes no reasonable objection. SECTION C OWNER C-1 IDENTIFICATION: By the term Owner is meant the City of Fort Worth acting herein by its duly authorized representatives in the manner provided by law. Authorized representatives include the City Manager, Assistant City Manager, the Director of the Water Department and members of the Water Department. Generally speaking a designated representative will be a Project Manager or the Construction Manager identified from within the Water Department to act as a point of contact for day-to-day contract administration. C-2 DUTIES OF THE OWNER: The Owner shall furnish surveys describing the physical characteristics, legal limits and utility locations for the site of the Work; provided, however, that the Contractor hereby covenants that he has inspected the premises and familiarized himself therewith and that the locations of utilities and other obstacles to the prosecution of the Work as shown on the Owner's survey are for information only, are not binding upon the Owner, and the Owner shall not incur any liability for loss or damage by virtue of any inaccuracies or deficiencies in such surveys. The Owner shall secure and pay for title to the site and all necessary permanent or construction easements. The Owner will cooperate with the Contractor in the prosecution of the Work in such manner and to such extent as may be reasonable and shall furnish information under its control with reasonable promptness at the request of the Contractor. C-3 INSTRUCTIONS: The Owner shall issue all instructions to the Contractor through the CM. C-4 ACCESS TO JOB SITE: The Owner shall at all times have access to the Work whenever it is in preparation and progress. The Contractor shall provide facilities for such access so the Owner may perform its assigned functions under the Contract Documents. C-3 Part C —General Conditions ofhe Contract LOSS) Q5!29'Q9 C-5 PROGRESS INSPECTIONS: The Owner will make visits to the Site to familiarize themselves with the progress and quality of the Work and to determine if the work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract documents. On the basis of on -site observations and reports concerning the progress and quality of the work, the Owner will approve and authorize the Contractor's applications for payments. C-6 AUTHORITY TO STOP WORK: The Owner will have authority to reject work that does not conform to the Plans and Specifications. Whenever, in its reasonable opinion, the Owner considers it necessary or advisable in order to ensure the proper realization of the intent of the Plans and Specifications, the Owner will have authority to require the Contractor to stop the work or any portion thereof, or to require the Contractor to stop the Work or any portion thereof, or to require special inspection or testing of �► the Work whether or not such Work be then fabricated, installed or completed. C-7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION: Upon agreement of the Contractor and Engineer that the Work is substantially complete, the Owner will schedule a Substantial Completion Inspection to be conducted by the Engineer and attended by representatives of the Engineer, Owner and Contractor. Items identified during this inspection as being incomplete. defective or deficient shall be incorporated into a punch list and accepted, approved and signed by the Owner and/or CM. C-8 RIGHT TO AUDIT: Contractor agrees that the City shall, until the expiration of three years after final payment under this contract, have access to and the right to examine any directly pertinent books, documents, papers and records of the Contractor involving transactions relating to this contract. Contractor further agrees to include in all his subcontracts hereunder a provision to the effect that the subcontractor agrees that the City shall, until the expiration of three years after final payment under the subcontract, have access to and the right to examine any directly pertinent books, documents, papers and records of such subcontractor, involving transactions to the subcontract. The term "subcontract" as used herein includes purchase orders. Contractor agrees to photocopy such documents as may be requested by the city. The city agrees to reimburse Contractor for the costs of copies at the rate published in the Texas Administrative Code. SECTION D CONTRACTOR D-1 IDENTIFICATION: The Contractor is the person or organization identified as such in the Contract. The term Contractor means the Contractor or his authorized representative. D-2 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR: Contractor shall perform all work and services hereunder as an independent contractor, not as agent, or employee of the City. Contractor shall have exclusive control of and the exclusive right to control the details of the Work and services performed hereunder, and all persons performing same, and Contractor shall be solely responsible for the acts of its officers, agents, and employees. Nothing herein shall be construed as creating a partnership or joint enterprise between City and the Contractor, its officers, agents and employees, and the doctrine of respondeat superior shall not apply. D-3 SUBLETTING: It is further agreed that the performance of this Contract, either in whole or in part, shall not be sublet or assigned to anyone else by said Contractor without the written consent of the Director of the Fort Worth Water Department. D-4 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract. Drawings, Specifications, Addenda and modifications and shall at once report to the Owner and to the Engineer any error, inconsistency or omission he may discover. The Contractor shall do no work without Drawings, Specifications and Interpretations. D-5 SUPERVISION: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor D-6 LABOR AND MATERIALS: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. D-7 COMPLIANCE WITH AND ENFORCEMENT OF PREVAILING WAGE RATE Dutv to oav Prevailing Waae Rates. The Contractor shall comply with all requirements of Chapter 2258, Texas Government Code (Chapter 2258). including the payment of not less than the rates determined by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth to be the prevailing wage rates in accordance with Chapter 2258. Such prevailing wage rates are included in these contract documents. Penaltv for Violation. A contractor or any subcontractor who does not pay the prevailing wage shall, upon demand made by the City, pay to the City $60 for each worker employed for each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the prevailing wage rates stipulated in these contract documents. This penalty shall be retained by the City to offset its administrative costs, pursuant to Texas Government Code 2258.023. Comolaints of Violations and Citv Determination of Good Cause. On receipt of information, including a complaint by a worker, concerning an alleged violation of 2258.023, Texas Government Code, by a contractor or subcontractor, the City shall make an initial determination, before the 31" day after the date the City receives the information, as to whether good cause exists to believe that the violation occurred. The City shall notify in writing the contractor or subcontractor and any affected worker of its initial determination. Upon the City's determination that there is good cause to believe the contractor or subcontractor has violated C-4 Part C -General Conditions of the Contract (OSS) Iftmar 05/29/09 Chapter 2258, the City shall retain the full amounts claimed by the claimant or claimants as the difference between wages paid and wages due under the prevailing wage rates, such amounts being subtracted from successive progress payments pending a final determination of the violation. Arbitration Required if Violation Not Resolved. An issue relating to an alleged violation of Section 2258.023, Texas Government Code, including a penalty owed to the City or an affected worker, shall be submitted to binding arbitration in accordance with the Texas General Arbitration Act (Article 274 et seq., Revised Statutes) if the contractor or subcontractor and any affected worker do not resolve the issue by agreement before the 15th day after the date the City makes its initial determination pursuant to the preceding paragraph above. If the persons required to arbitrate under this section do not agree on an arbitrator before the 11th day after the date that arbitration is required, a district court shall appoint an arbitrator on the petition of any of the persons. The City is not a party in the arbitration. The decision and award of the arbitrator is final and binding on all parties and may be enforced in any court of competent jurisdiction. Records to be Maintained. The Contractor and each subcontractor shall, for a period of three (3) years following the date of acceptance of the Work, maintain records that show (i) the name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor in the construction of the Work provided for in this contract; and (ii) the actual per diem wages paid to each worker. The records shall be open at all reasonable hours for inspection by the City. The provisions of the Audit section of these contract documents shall pertain to this inspection. Pav Estimates. With each partial payment estimate, the Contractor shall submit an affidavit stating that the Contractor has complied with the requirements of Chapter 2258, Texas Government Code. Postina of Waae Rates. The Contractor shall post the prevailing wage rates in a conspicuous place at the site of the project at all times. Subcontractor Comoliance. The Contractor shall include in its subcontracts andlor shall otherwise require all of its subcontractors to comply with this section in its entirety. On projects where special wage rates apply (e.g. Davis -Bacon) the Contractor agrees to meet all requirements of such programs D-8 WARRANTY: The Contractor warrants to the Owner and the Engineer that all materials and equipment furnished under this Contract will be new unless otherwise specified, and that all work will be of good quality, free from faults and defects, and in conformance with the Contract Documents. All work not so conforming to these standards may be considered defective. If required by the Engineer or the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. The warranty provided in this Section shall be in addition to and not in limitation of any other warranty or remedy provided by law or the Contract Documents. D-9 TAXES: The Contractor is exempt from State Sales Tax on material incorporated into the finished construction, Excise and Use Tax. D-10 LICENSES, NOTICES AND FEES: The Contractor shall obtain all Permits, Licenses, Certificates, and Inspections, whether permanent or temporary, required by law or these Contract Documents. The Contractor shall give all Notices and comply with all Laws, Ordinances, Rules, Regulations and Orders of any public authority bearing on the performance of the Work. If the Contractor observes or becomes aware that any of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith in any respect, he shall promptly notify the Engineer and Owner in writing and any necessary changes will be made. If the Contractor performs any Work knowing that it is in violation of, or contrary to, any of such Laws, Statutes, Charter, Ordinances, Orders or Directives, or Regulations without furnishing Notice to the Owner, the Contractor will assume full responsibility therefore and bear all costs attributable thereto. D-11 NOT USED: D-12 SUPERINTENDENT: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. D-13 RESPONSIBILITIES FOR EMPLOYEES AND SUB -CONTRACTORS: The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of all his employees and all Sub -contractors, their agents and employees, and all other persons performing any of the Work under a contract with the Contractor. D-14 FAILURE TO COMMENCE WORK: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. D-15 PROGRESS SCHEDULE: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. D-16 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS AT THE SITE: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. D-17 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES: Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, brochures and other data which are prepared by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor, and which illustrate some portion of the Work. G5 Pail C Gencral Conditions ofthe Contract (OSS) 05%29i09 Samples are physical examples furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship, and to establish standards by which the Work will be judged. The Contractor shall review, stamp with his approval and submit, with reasonable promptness and in orderly sequence so as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of any other contractor, normally within the first 90 days of the work, six copies of all shop Drawings and Samples required by the Contract Documents or subsequently by the Engineer as covered by changes or amendments. Shop Drawings and Samples shall be properly identified as specified, or as the Engineer may require. At the time of submission the Contractor shall inform the Engineer in writing of any deviation in the Shop Drawings or Samples from the requirements of the Contract Documents. By approving and submitting Shop Drawings and Samples, the Contractor thereby represents that he has determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers and similar data, and that he has checked and coordinated each shop drawing given in the Contract Documents. The Engineer's approval of a separate item shall not indicate approval of an assembly in which the item functions. The Engineer will review and approve Shop Drawings and Samples with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay, but only for conformance with the design concept of the Project and with the information given in the Contract Documents. The Engineer's approval of a separate item shall not indicate approval of an assembly in which the item functions. The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the Engineer and shall resubmit the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings or new Samples until approved. The Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings to revisions other than the corrections requested by the Engineer on previous submissions. The Engineer's approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless the Contractor has informed the Engineer in writing of such deviation at the time of submission and the Engineer has given written approval to the specific deviation. Engineer's approval shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings or Samples. No portion of the Work requiring a Shop Drawing or Sample submission shall be commenced until the Engineer has approved the submittal. All such portions of the Work shall be in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and Samples. D-18 SITE USE: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. D-19 CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. D-20 CLEANUP: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. D-21 COMMUNICATIONS: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. SECTION E SUBCONTRACTORS E-1 DEFINITION: A Subcontractor is a person or organization that has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform any of the Work at the site. The term Subcontractor is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine in gender and means a Subcontractor or his authorized representative. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relation between the Owner or the Engineer and any subcontractor or any of his sub -subcontractors or materialmen. E-2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS: The bidder shall furnish a list of the names of the subcontractors or other persons or organizations (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for such portions of the Work as may be designated in the bidding requirements, or if none is so designated in the bidding requirements, the names of the Subcontractors proposed for the principal portions of the Work. Prior to the award of the Contract, the Engineer shall notify the successful bidder in writing if either the Owner or Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any person or organization on such list. Failure of the Owner and Engineer to make an objection to any person or organization on the list prior to the award of this Contract shall not constitute acceptance of such person or organization. If, prior to the award of the Contract, the Owner or Engineer has an objection to any person or organization on such list, and refuses to accept such person or organization, the apparent low bidder may, prior to the award, withdraw his bid without forfeiture of bid security. If such bidder submits an acceptable substitute, the Owner may, at its discretion, accept the bid or he may disqualify the bid. If, after the award, the Owner or Engineer objects in writing to any person or organization on such list, the Contractor shall provide an acceptable substitute. The Contractor shall not make any substitution for any Subcontractor or person or organization that has been accepted by the Owner and the Engineer, unless the substitution is also acceptable to the Owner and the Engineer. C-6 Part C -General Conditions ofthe Contract (OSS) *4111110*1 05/29'09 E-3 TERMS OF SUBCONTRACTS: All work performed for the Contractor by a Subcontractor shall be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor (and where appropriate between Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors) which shall contain provisions that: 1. Preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and the Engineer under the Contract with respect to the Work to be performed under the subcontract so that the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights; 2. Require that such Work be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents; Aw 3. Require submission to the Contractor of applications for payment under each subcontract to which the Contractor is a party, in reasonable time to enable the Contractor to apply for payment; 4. Require that all claims for additional costs, extensions of time, damages for delays or otherwise with respect to subcontracted portions of the Work shall be submitted to the Contractor (via any Subcontractor or Sub -subcontractor where appropriate) in the manner provided in the Contract Documents for like claims by the Contractor upon the Owner: 5. Waive all rights the contracting parties may have against one another for damages caused by fire or other perils covered by the property insurance, except such rights, if any, as they may have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner, and. 6. Obligate each Subcontractor specifically to consent to the provisions of this Section All of the provisions set out in this section shall be deemed to have been included in every subcontract, and every subcontract shall be so construed and applied as to the Owner and the Engineer, whether or not such provisions are physically included in the sub- contract. E-4 MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE fM1WBE): Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. E-5 PAYMENTS TO SUBCONTRACTORS: The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, an amount equal to the percentage of completion allowed to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's Work. The Contractor shall also require each Subcontractor to make similar payments to his subcontractors. If the Owner refuses to issue a Certificate for Payment for any cause which is the fault of the Contractor and not the fault of a particular subcontractor, the Contractor shall pay that Subcontractor on demand, made at any time after the Certificate for Payment would otherwise have been issued, for his Work to the extent completed, less the retained percentage. The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor a just share of any insurance monies received by the Contractor, and he shall require each Subcontractor to make similar payments to his Subcontractors. The Owner may, on request and at its discretion, furnish to any Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion certified to the Contractor on account of Work done by such Subcontractors. Neither the Owner nor the Engineer shall have any obligation to pay or to see to the payment of any monies to any Subcontractor. E-6 NOT USED: SECTION F SEPARATE CONTRACTS F-1 OWNER'S RIGHT: The Owner reserves the right to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Work. When separate contracts are awarded for other portions of the Work, `the Contractor' in the Contract Documents in each case shall be the contractor who signs each separate contract. F-2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTORS: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. F-3 CUTTING AND PATCHING UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. F4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. SECTION G MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS G-1 CONFLICT OF LAWS: The law of the place where the site is located shall govern the Contract. The Contractor must familiarize himself and strictly comply with all Federal, State, and County and City Laws, Statutes, Charter, Ordinances, Regulations, or Directives controlling the action or operation of those engaged upon the work affecting the materials used. He shall indemnify and save harmless the City and all of its officers and agents against any claim or liability arising from or based on the violation of any such Laws, Statutes, Charter, Ordinances, Regulations, or Directives, whether by himself, his employees, agents or subcontractors. >t G-2 GOVERNING LAWS: It is mutually agreed and understood that this agreement is made and entered into by the parties hereto with reference to the existing Charter and Ordinances of the City of Fort Worth and the laws of the State of Texas with C-7 Part C -General Conditions of the Contract (OSS) 05i29109 reference to and governing all matters affecting this Contract, and the Contractor agrees to fully comply with all the provisions of the. same. G-3 PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS: In performing their duties under the Statutes of the State of Texas and the Charter and Ordinances of the City of Fort Worth in connection with this Contract, or in exercising any of the powers granted the Owner herein, the officers, agents and employees of the City of Fort Worth are engaged in the performance of a governmental function and shall not incur any personal liability by virtue of such performance hereunder, except for gross negligence or willful wrong. s G-4 COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS. Contractor agrees to comply with all laws, Federal, state and local, including all ordinances, rules and regulations of the City of Fort Worth, Texas. Materials incorporated into the finished Project are not subject to State Sales Tax. The Owner is responsible for obtaining the Building Permit. The Contractor and the appropriate subcontractor are responsible for obtaining all other construction permits from the governing agencies. Contractor shall schedule all code inspections with the Code Inspection Division in accordance with the permit requirements and submit a copy of updated schedule to the Construction Manager weekly. Building, plumbing, electrical and mechanical building permits are issued without charge. Water and sewer tap, impact & access fees will be paid by the City. Any other permit fees are the responsibility of the Contractor. G-5 INDEMNIFICATION: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. G-6 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS: Except as provided in Paragraph E-2, this contract shall be binding upon and remain to the benefit of the parties hereto, their Successors or Assigns. Contractor shall not assign or sublet all or any part of this Contract or his rights or duties hereunder without the prior written consent of the Owner. Any such purported assignment or subletting without the prior written consent of Owner shall be void. G-7 WRITTEN NOTICE: Written Notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice. G-8 SURETY BONDS: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. G-9 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. G-10 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS: The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. He shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the Owner harmless from loss on account thereof and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified; however, if the �� Contractor has reason to believe that the design, process or product specified is an infringement of a patent, he shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives such information to Owner. G-11 TESTS: If the Contract Documents, Laws, Ordinances, Rules, Regulations or Orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any Work to be inspected, tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness and the date arranged so the Engineer may observe such inspection, testing or approval. The Owner shall bear all costs of such inspection, tests and approvals unless otherwise provided. If after the commencement of the Work, the Owner determines that any work requires special inspection, testing or approval not included above, the Engineer, upon written authorization from the Owner, will instruct the Contractor to order such special inspection, testing or approval, and the Contractor shall give notice as required in the preceding paragraph. If such special inspection or testing reveals a failure of the Work to comply (1) with the requirements of the Contract Documents or (2) with respect to the performance of the Work, with Laws, Statutes, Charter, Ordinances, Regulations or Orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, the Contractor shall bear all costs thereof, including the Engineer's additional services made necessary by such costs; otherwise the Owner shall bear such costs, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. The Contractor shall secure certificate of inspection, testing or approval, and three copies will be promptly delivered by him to the Engineer. The Engineer will review the certificates and forward one copy of each with his recommendation(s) to the Owner. If the Owner wishes to observe the inspections, tests or approvals required by this Section, they will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the source of supply. Neither the observations of the Engineer or the Owner in their administration of the Construction Contract, nor inspections, tests or approvals by persons other than the Contractor shall relieve the Contractor from his obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. G-12 INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES SERVICES: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. G-13 LAYING OUTWORK: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. G-14 MEASUREMENTS: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. C-8 Part C -General Conditions of the Contract (OSS) N101111IFF 05.'29'09 G-15 EXISTING OVERHEAD OR UNDERGROUND WORK: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. G-16 ALIGNMENT OF JOINTS IN FINISH MATERIALS: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor, G-17 INTEGRATING EXISTING WORK: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. G-18 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL CERTIFICATION: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. G-19 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND'PIPING: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. G-20 OVERLOADING: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. G-21 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS: Where it is required in the Specifications that materials, products, processes, equipment, or the like be installed or applied in accordance with manufacturers instructions, direction or specifications, or words to this effect, it shall be construed to mean that said application or installation shall be in strict accordance with printed instructions furnished by the manufacturer of the material concerned for use under conditions similar to those at the job site. G-22 CLEANING UP: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor, G-23 DUST CONTROL: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor G-24 FIRE PROTECTION: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. G-25 CUTTING AND PATCHING: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. G-26 PROJECT CLOSEOUT: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. G-27 GUARANTEE AND EXTENDED GUARANTEE: Upon completion of the Project, prior to final payment, guarantees required by technical divisions of Specifications shall be properly executed in quadruplicate by subcontractors and submitted through the Contractor to Engineer. Delivery of guarantees shall not relieve Contractor from any obligation assumed under Contract. The Contractor shall guarantee the entire Project for two years. In addition, where separate guarantees, for certain portions of work, are for longer periods, General Contractor's guarantee shall be extended to cover such longer periods. Manufacturer's extended warrantees shall be included in this contract. Guarantees shall become valid and operative and commence upon issuance of Certificate of Inspection and Acceptance by Owner. Guarantees shall not apply to work where damage is result of abuse, neglect by Owner or his successor(s) in interest. The Contractor agrees to warrant his work and materials provided in accordance with this contract and the terms of the Technical Specifications contained herein. Unless supplemented by the Technical Specifications or the manufacturer's normal extended warrantees, the Contractor shall warrant all work materials, and equipment against defects for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance. The Contractor further agrees to bear all costs of making good all work that is found to be defective or not provided in accordance with the Contract Documents. Additionally if the facility or contents are damaged due to defective materials or workmanship of the Contractor, the Contractor further agrees to bear all cost of repairing and/or replacing damaged items and components to bring such items back to at least their original condition. G-28 RECORD DRAWINGS: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. G-29 CONSTRUCTION FENCE: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. G-30 PRODUCT DELIVERY. STORAGE, HANDLING: The Contractor shall handle, store and protect materials and products, including fabricated components, by methods and means which will prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft (and resulting delays), thereby ensuring highest quality results as the work progresses. Control delivery schedules so as to minimize unnecessary long-term storage at project site prior to installation. G-31 REMOVAL OF SALVAGED MATERIAL: T Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. G-32 MANUFACTURER'S REFERENCE: Catalog, brand names, and manufacturer's references are descriptive, not restrictive. Bids on brands of like nature and quality will be considered. Contractor shall inform the City of any substitutions intended for the project in writing prior to the Preconstruction Conference. Failure to inform the City of substitute products will obligate the + Contractor to provide the specified material if awarded the contract. Upon request, the Contractor shall submit samples and/or detailed information as required to allow the Engineer to determine the acceptability of proposed substitutions. Where equipment has been listed as "no substitute accepted', or similar description, the City will accept no alternates to the specified equipment. C-9 Part C—General Cmditions ofthe Contract (OSS) 05129/09 SECTION H CONTRACT TIME H-1 DEFINITIONS %�! The Contract Time is the period of time allotted in the Contract Documents for completion of the Work and is the number of calendar days elapsing between the date of commencement and the date of substantial Completion plus additional days allowed to complete \ punch list items in a timely manner. t The Date of Commencement of the Work is the date established in the Notice to Proceed. If there is no notice to proceed, it shall be the date of the Agreement or such other date as may be established therein. The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof is the Date certified by the Engineer with the approval of the Owner that construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so the Owner may occupy the Work or designated portion thereof for the use for which it is intended. Final acceptance of the completed work or any portion thereof can be made only by the Assistant City Manager, and no other form of acceptance will be binding upon the Owner. A Calendar Day constitutes 24 hours of time and is any one of the seven days of a week, including Sunday, regardless of whether a "Working Day" or not, and regardless of weather conditions or any situation which might delay construction. An extension of contract time shall be in accordance with this Section. Extensions of time will be as recommended by the CM with final approval by City of Fort Worth. A Workino Dav is defined as a calendar day, not including Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays, in which weather or other conditions not under the control of the Contractor permit the performance of work for a continuous period of not less than seven hours between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. However, nothing in these Contract Documents shall be construed as prohibiting the Contractor from working on Saturdays if he so desires. Legal holidays are defined as being New Year's Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day, Memorial Day, and Veteran's Day, H-2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION: All the time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of essence to the Contract. The Contractor shall begin the Work on the date of commencement as defined in this Section. He shall carry the Work forward expeditiously with adequate forces and shall complete it within the Contract Time. H-3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME: If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by any act or neglect of the Owner or the Engineer, or by any employee of the Owner, or by any separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by any separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in transportation, unavoidable casualties or any causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by any cause which the Engineer determines may justify the delay, then the contract time may be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as recommended by the Engineer and approved by the Owner. All claims for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Engineer no more than fifteen days after the occurrence of the delay; otherwise they shall be waived. If no schedule or agreement is made stating the dates upon which written interpretations shall be furnished, then no claim for delay shall be allowed on account of failure to furnish such interpretation until fifteen days after demand is made for them, and not then unless such a claim is reasonable. H-4 NO DAMAGE FOR DELAY: No payment, compensation or adjustment of any kind (other than the extensions of time provided for) shall be made to the Contractor for damages because of hindrances or delays from any cause in the progress of the work, whether such hindrances or delays be avoidable or unavoidable, and the Contractor agrees that he will make no claim for compensation, damages or mitigation of liquidated damages for any such delays, and will accept in full satisfaction for such delays said extension of time. SECTION I PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 1-1 CONTRACT SUM: The Contract Sum is stated in the contract and is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. 1-2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. 1-3 ADJUSTMENT OF QUANTITIES: (Not used for Lump Sum Type Contract) 1-4 PROGRESS PAYMENTS: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. 1-5 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. 1-6 PAYMENTS WITHHELD: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor.. C-10 Part C -General Conditions of the Contract (OSS) %%NoI 05/29/09 1-7 NOT USED 1-8 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: The deduction for liquidated damages shall be per Part D, Special Conditions- 1-9 FAILURE OF PAYMENT: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor 1-10 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. 1-11 FINAL PAYMENT FOR UN -BONDED PROJECTS: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. SECTION J PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. SECTION K - INSURANCE K-1 INSURANCE REQUIRED: The Contractor shall not commence work under this Contract until he has obtained all insurance required under this Section and such insurance has been approved by the City of Fort Worth, nor shall the Contractor allow any Subcontractor to commence work to be performed under this Contract until all similar insurance of the Subcontractor has been so obtained and approved. The City of Fort Worth and their consultants and Construction Managers for the project will be listed as "additional insured` on all policies except Worker's Compensation. K-2 WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE 1) General a) Contractor's Worker's Compensation Insurance. Contractor agrees to provide to the Owner (City) a certificate showing that it has obtained a policy of workers compensation insurance covering each of its employees employed on the project in compliance with state law. No Notice to Proceed will be issued until the Contractor has complied with this section. b) Subcontractor's Worker's Compensation Insurance. Contractor agrees to require each and every subcontractor who will perform work on the project to provide to it a certificate from such subcontractor stating that the subcontractor has a policy -MWF of workers compensation insurance covering each employee employed on the project. Contractor will not permit any subcontractor to perform work on the project until such certificate has been acquired. Contractor shall provide a copy of all such certificates to the Owner (City). c) By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the City that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the Texas Worker's Compensation Commission's Division of Self-insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties or other civil actions. d) The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the City to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the City. 2) Definitions: a) Certificate of Coverage ("certificate'). A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission. or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC- 84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. b) Duration of the Project. Includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the City. c) Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in section 406.096)-includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner -operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other services related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. C-)) Part C -General Conditions of the Contract (OSS) 05.'29l09 3) Requirements a) The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the Contractor providing services of the project, for the duration of the project. b) The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the govet nmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. c) if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the City showing that coverage has been extended. d) The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the City: i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. e) The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. f) The Contractor shall notify the City in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. g) The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. h) The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: i) provide coverage, based on proper reporting on the classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; ii) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; iii) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; iv) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; v) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. vi) notify the City in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and vii) contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs h-i) - vii), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 4) Posting of Required Workers Compensation Coverage a) The Contractor shall post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Workers Compensation Act or other Texas Workers Compensation Commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text, without any additional words or changes: "REQUIRED WORKER'S COMPENSATION COVERAGE The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee". C- j 2 Part C —General Conditions ofthe Contract (OSS) A,11,11l 05'29.'09 Call the Texas Worker's Compensation Commission at 512-440-3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." K-3 LIABILITY INSURANCE: The Contractor shall procure and maintain during the term of this Contract such Liability Insurance as shall protect him, the City of Fort Worth and any Subcontractor performing work covered by this Contract, from claims of damage which may arise from operations under this Contract, including blasting, when blasting is done on, or in connection with the Work of the Project, whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed s by either of them and the limits of such insurance shall be not less than the following: 1) Automobile Liability: $1,000,000 each accident or reasonably equivalent split limits for bodily injury and property damage. Coverage shall be on "any auto" including leased, hired, owned, non -owned and borrowed vehicles used in connection with this Contract. 2) Commercial General Liability: $1,000,000 each occurrence. Coverage under the policy shall be as comprehensive as that provided in a current Insurance Services Office (ISO) policy form approved for use in Texas and the policy shall have no exclusions by endorsement unless such are approved by the City. 3) Excess Liability Umbrella: $1,000,000 each occurrence; $2,000,000 aggregate limit. This insurance shall provide excess coverage over each line of liability insurance required herein. The policy shall follow the form(s) of the underlying policies. K-4 BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE: Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor.. K-5 PROOF OF CARRIAGE OF INSURANCE: The Contractor shall provide a certificate of insurance documenting the Fort Worth Water Department as a "Certificate Holder". and noting the specific project(s) covered by the Contractors insurance as documented on the certificate of insurance. More than one certificate may be required of the Contractor depending upon the agents and/or insurers for the Contractor's insurance coverages specified for the project(s). K-6 OTHER INSURANCE RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1) All insurance policies for this project except Worker's Compensation shall be written with the City of Fort Worth and Engineer listed as additional insured, 2) Applicable insurance policies shall each be endorsed with a waiver of subrogation in favor of the City of Fort Worth. 3) Insurers of policies maintained by Contractor and its subcontractor(s), if applicable, shall be authorized to do business in the State of Texas, or otherwise approved by the City of Fort Worth, and such shall be acceptable to the City of Fort Worth insofar as their financial strength and solvency are concerned. Any company through which the insurance is placed must have a rating of at least A:VII, as stated in current edition of A. M. Best's Key Rating Guide. At the City's sole discretion, a less favorable rating may be accepted by the City. 4) Deductible limits on insurance policies and/or self -insured retentions exceeding $10,000 require approval of the City of Fort Worth as respects this Contract. 5) The City of Fort Worth shall be notified in writing a minimum of thirty days prior to an insurer's action in the event of cancellation, non -renewal or material change in coverage regarding any policy providing insurance coverage required in this Contract. 6) Full limits of insurance shall be available for claims arising out of this Contract with the City of Fort Worth. 7) The Contractor shall provide certificates of insurance to the City prior to commencement of operations pursuant to this Contract. Any failure on part of the City of Fort Worth to request such docurnentation shall not be construed as a waiver of insurance requirements specified herein. 8) The City of Fort Worth shall be entitled, upon request and without incurring expense, to review the insurance policies including endorsements thereto and, at its discretion, to require proof of payment for policy premiums. 9) The City of Fort Worth shall not be responsible for paying the cost of insurance coverages required herein. 10) Notice of any actual or potential claim and/or litigation that would affect insurance coverages required herein shall be provided to the City in a timely manner. 11) "Other insurance" as referenced in any policy of insurance providing coverages required herein shall not apply to any insurance policy or program maintained by the City of Fort Worth, 12) Contractor shall agree to either require its subcontractors to maintain the same insurance coverages and limits thereof as specified herein or the Contractor shall provide such coverage on the Contractors subcontractors. e 13) Contractor's liability shall not be limited to the specified amounts of insurance required herein. C-13 Pan C -General Conditions of the Contract (OSS) 05!29i09 SECTION L�` CHANGES IN THE WORK L-1 CHANGE ORDER: The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order Changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and the Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. All Such Changes in the Work shall be authorized by Change Order, and shall be executed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. A Change Order is a written order to the Contractor signed by the Contractor, Owner and the Engineer, issued after the execution of the Contract, authorizing a Change in the Work or adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by Change Order. Any changes in work required due to changed or unforeseen conditions, or by request of either the Contractor or the City, shall be coordinated with the Director, Fort Worth Water Department. A change order must be written and duly negotiated and executed prior to performing changed work. The cost or credit to the Owner resulting from a Change in the worts shall be determined in one or more of the following ways: 1) by mutual acceptance of a lump sum property itemized, including the allowance to Contractor for overhead and profit stipulated in the original contract proposal; 2) by unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; or 3) by cost and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee. If none of the methods set forth herein above is agreed upon, the Contractor, provided he receives a Change Order, shall promptly proceed with the Work involved. The cost of such work shall then be determined on the basis of the Contractors reasonable expenditures and savings, including a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit as indicted in the original contract proposal. In such cases. the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Engineer shall prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Pending final determination of cost to the Owner, payments on account shall be made on the Engineer's Certificate of Payment as approved by the Owner. If after the Contract has been executed, the Engineer requests a price proposal from the Contractor for a proposed change in scope of the work, Contractor shall process such proposal within seven days of receipt and return the price quote to the Engineer in writing. The Engineer shall review the price quotation and if approval is recommended, forward the proposed change order request and price proposal to the Owner for approval. If approval is not recommended, the Engineer will attempt to negotiate with Contractor to revise the proposal to a figure which is fair and reasonable and forward it on to the Owner for approval. If the negotiations do not result in an equitable solution, the Engineer shall prepare a cost-plus type Change Order with a price -not -to -exceed figure for approval by the City and require specific documentation to be provided by Contractor in accordance with the paragraph above. Contractor is advised that according to City of Fort Worth Charter, the City Council must approve all Change Orders and Work Orders which result in an increase in cost of the contract amount by over $25.000. Normal processing time for the City Staff to obtain City Council approval, once the recommended change order has been received at the City, is approximately thirty days. Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to identify Change Order items as early in the Construction process as possible to minimize their impact on the construction schedule. If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if the quantities originally contemplated are so changed in a proposed Change Order that application of the agreed unit prices to the quantities of Work proposed will create a hardship on the Owner or the Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted to prevent such hardship. If the Contractor claims that additional cost or time is involved because of (1) any written interpretation issued pursuant to Section A, (2) any order by the Engineer or Owner to stop the Work pursuant to Section B, where the Contractor was not at fault, or (3) any written order for a minor change in the Work, the Contractor shall make such claim. L-2 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST OR TIME: If the Contractor wishes to make a claim for an increase in the Contract Sum or an extension in the Contract Time, he shall give the Engineer written notice thereof within a reasonable time after the occurrence of the event that gave rise to such claim. This notice shall be given by the Contractor before proceeding to execute the Work, except in an emergency endangering life or property in which case the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with Section J. No such claim shall be valid unless so made. Any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time resulting from such claim, if approved by the Owner, shall be authorized by Change Order. L-3 OVERHEAD ALLOWANCES FOR CHANGES: Should any change in the work or extra work be ordered, the following applicable percentage shall be added to Material and Labor costs to cover overhead and profit: 1. Allowance to the Contractor for overhead and profit for extra work performed by the Contractor's own forces shall not exceed fifteen percent 15% . C-14 Part C —General Conditions of the Contract (OSS) �� 05i29%09 2. Allowance to the Contractor for overhead and profit for extra work performed by a Subcontractor and supervised by the Contractor shall not exceed ten percent 10°io . L-4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK: The Engineer shall have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes may be effected by Field Order or by other written order. Such changes shall be confirmed in writing by the Engineer and shall be binding on the Owner and the Contractor. ar L-5 FIELD ORDERS: The Engineer may issue written Field Orders which interpret the Contract Documents, or which order minor changes in the Work without change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. The Contractor shall carry out such Field Orders promptly. SECTION M UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK M-1 UNCOVERING OF WORK: If any Work should be covered contrary to the request of the Owner, it must be uncovered for observatidn and replaced, at the Contractor's expense. If any other work has been covered which the Owner has not specifically requested to observe prior to being covered, the Engineer or the Owner may request to see such work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work be found in accordance with the Plans and Specifications, the cost of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be charged to the Owner. If such work be found not in accordance with the Plans and Specifications, the Contractor shall pay such costs unless it is found that this condition was caused by a separate contractor employed by the Owner. M-2 CORRECTION OF WORK: The Contractor shall promptly correct all work rejected by the Owner as defective or as failing to conform to the Plans and Specifications whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such rejected Work, including the cost of the Engineer's additional service thereby made necessary. If, within two years after the Date of Final Completion or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents, any of the work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of a written notice from the Owner to do so, unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition, describing same specifically and not generally. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. All such defective or non -conforming work under the preceding paragraphs shall be removed from the site where necessary and the work shall be corrected to comply with the Contract Documents without cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall bear the cost of making good all work of separate contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or correction. If the Contractor does not remove such defective or non -conforming work within a reasonable time fixed by written notice from the Owner, the Owner may remove it and may store the materials or equipment at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the cost of such removal and storage within ten days thereafter, the Owner may upon ten additional days' written notice sell such work at auction or at private sale and shall account for the net proceeds thereof, after deducting all the costs that should have been borne by the Contractor including compensation for additional Engineering services. If such proceeds of sale do not cover all costs that the Contractor should have borne, the difference shall be charged to the Contractor and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount. the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. If the Contractor fails to correct such defective or non -conforming work, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section G. The obligation of the Contractor under this Section shall be in addition to and not in limitation of any obligations imposed upon him by special guarantees required by the Contract Documents or otherwise prescribed by law. M-3 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE OR NON -CONFORMING WORK: If the Owner prefers to accept defective or non- conforming work, he may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case a Change Order will be issued to reflect an appropriate reduction in the Contract Sum, or, if the amount is determined after final payment, it shall be paid by the Contractor. SECTION N TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT N-1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR: If the work is stopped for a period of 30 days under an order or any court or other public authority having jurisdiction, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing any of the work under a contract with the Contractor, or if the work should be stopped for a period of C-15 Fart C -General Conditions ofthe Contract (OSS) 05/29/09 30 days by the Contractor for the Owner's failure to make payment thereon as provided in Section 1, then the Contractor may after fir. the end of such period of 30 days and upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner, terminate the Contract. VL N-2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER: If the Contractor is adjudged as bankrupt, or if he makes a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of his insolvency, of if the Contractor refuses, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough property skilled workmen or proper materials, or if he fails to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or for materials or labor, or fails to comply with all Laws, Statutes, Charter, Ordinances, Regulations or Orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, or otherwise is guilty of a substantial violation of a provision of the Contract Documents, then the Owner, on its own initiative that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedy and after giving the Contractor and his surety, if any, seven (7) days written notice, terminate the employment of the Contractor and take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor and may finish the work by whatever method he may deem expedient. In such case the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Engineer's additional services, exceed the unpaid balance of the Contract, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The City of Fort Worth may terminate this contract in whole, or from time to time, in part, whenever such termination is in the best interest of the City. Termination will be effected by delivering to the Contractor a notice of termination specifying to what extent performance of the work of the contract is being terminated and the effective date of termination. After receipt of termination the Contractor shall: a) Stop work under the Contract on the date and to the extent specified on the notice of termination. b) Place no further orders or subcontracts except as may be necessary for the completion of the work not terminated. c) Terminate all orders and subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the performance of the work terminated by the notice of termination. After termination as above, the City will pay the Contractor a proportionate part of the contract price based on the work completed; provided, however, that the amount of payment on termination shall not exceed the total contract price as reduced by the portion thereof allocatable to the work not completed and further reduced by the amount of payments, if, any otherwise made. Contractor shall submit its claim for amounts due after termination as provided in this paragraph within 30 days after receipt of such claim. In the event of any dispute or controversy as to the propriety or allowability of all or any portion of such claim under this paragraph, such dispute or controversy shall be resolved and be decided by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth, and the decision by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth shall be final and binding upon all parties to this contract �whmw Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor., Not Applicable to OSS Subcontractor. SECTION O SIGNS SECTION P TEMPORARY FACILITIES SECTION Q VENUE Should any action arise out of the terms and conditions of this contract, venue for said action shall lie in Tarrant County, Texas. C-16 Pan C -General Conditions of the Contract (OSS) NWMW 05/29/09 \=/ a City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment PART D SPECIAL CONDITIONS v This Part D — Special Conditions is complimentary to Part C — General Conditions of the Contract. Anything contained in this Part D that is additive to any provision in Part C — General Conditions of the Contract are to be read together. Where any conflict exists between Part C — General Conditions of the Contract and this Part D, Part D shall control. FOR: NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE OZONE GENERATION EQUIPMENT CAPTI:AL PROJECT NO. 00757 D-1 GENERAL The City of Fort Worth is in the process of designing new ozonation facilities for the North and South Holly Water Treatment Plants (WTP). Final design of the project is scheduled to be completed by the middle of November, 2009. Construction of the ozonation facility is scheduled to start in February 2010 and be substantially completed by June 2012. The ozone generation equipment will be selected prior to commencing final design of the complete ozone facilities. The ozone system supplier (OSS) will be selected based on a present worth evaluated bid as specified herein. The selected OSS will enter into a special engineering services agreement with the City of Fort Worth for purposes of preparing shop drawings and attending design meetings with the Engineer during the design phase of the project. The majority of the goods and services to be provided by the OSS will be included as part of the General Construction Contract for the ozonation facility. Once the General Contractor for the Ozonation Facility Project is selected, the OSS will enter into a subcontract agreement with the General Contractor for the ozone generation equipment goods and services at the price submitted in the Proposal. The following Special Conditions shall be applicable to this project and shall govern over any conflicts with the General Contract Documents under the provisions stated above. The OSS shall be responsible for defects in the ozone generation equipment provided under this scope of supply, due to faulty materials or workmanship, or both, for a period of two and one-half (2-1/2) years beginning at the date of successful completion of the acceptance testing. OSS will be required to replace at his expense any part or all of this project which becomes defective due to these causes. D-2 LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT The Holly Water Treatment Plant is located at 1500 1 Irh Avenue, Fort Worth, Texas, 76102. The scope of work for the OSS consists of the furnishing of all the material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary for supplying the Ozone Generation Equipment for the Holly Water Treatment Plant as described herein. The Ozonation Facilities will provide a new unit process for raw surface water for both North and South Holly WTP. The project will include liquid oxygen storage facilities and a central ozone generation facility to serve both the North and South plants, with separate contact basins for each plant. The scope of supply for this OSS pre -selection will consist of the following: 1. Ozone Generators and Power Supplies. 2. Ozone Diffuser Assemblies. D-1 Part D - Special Conditions 05,29!09 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment '"Mr, .' 3. Demisters. 4. Ozone Destruct Systems. 5. Pressure/vacuum Relief Valves. 6. Nitrogen Generation System. 7. Interconnecting piping, valving, and safety relief devices as specified and shown on the Drawings for the above major equipment items. 8. Instrumentation as specified in Specification Division 17 for the above major equipment item--. 9. Programming of the PLC equipment within the Ozone System control panels. 10. Spare Parts for the above equipment items. 11. Other services as specified herein including but not limited to testing, installation responsibilities, training, O&M manuals and record drawings. D-3 SPECIAL ENGINEERING SERVICES AGREEMENT The OSS shall provide Special Engineering Services related to the ozone generation system during the design phase of the project. The OSS shall enter into an agreement (Part G) with the City of Fort Worth for these services, defined further within these specifications. The City shall pay the OSS $50,000 for these services. If the OSS feels that the cost of these services will exceed $50,000, the OSS shall include the additional cost within Item A of the Proposal. D-4 SUBCONTRACT AGREEMENT WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR A. The OSS shall enter into a Subcontract Agreement with the General Contractor for the Holly Ozone Facilities Project for the work described herein, with exception of the work to be performed as part of the .✓ Special Engineering Services Agreement. The proposal price (Item A of the Proposal) will be included as a line item in the Proposal for the General Construction Contract of the Holly Ozone Facilities Project. The scope of work of the OSS will be included as part of the overall scope of work for the General Contractor and become a part of their contract. B. Progress and Final Payment: 1. After review and approval of all Shop Drawings and after the General Contractor has issued a "Notice to Commence Fabrication", the OSS shall submit an Application for Payment in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions. The OWNER, through the General Contractor, will provide payment for 20 percent of the Contract Price (Item A of Proposal), less the aggregate of payments previously made. 2. Prior to Acceptance Testing, progress payments will be made by the OWNER, through the General Contractor, in an amount equal to up to 80 percent of the Contract Price, less the aggregate of payments previously made, based on the delivery of Goods to the Point of Destination, and Installation, Startup and Commissioning of Goods by the OSS. 3. Upon completion of the Acceptance Testing, the OWNER, through the General Contractor, will pay an amount equal to 95 percent of the Contract Price, less the aggregate of payments previously made. 4. Final Payment. Upon Final Completion or six months after completion of the Acceptance Testing, s whichever occurs first, the OWNER, through the General Contractor, will pay the remainder of the Contract Price. 5. Retainage. Owner, through the General Contractor, will hold five percent (5%) retainage for work performed until Final Payment. D-2 Part D — Special Conditions 05,129109 a 4,.pe Citv of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment D-5 CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE WITH WORKER'S COMPENSATION LAW A. Definitions: 1. Certification of coverage ("certificate") -A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. 2. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in §406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing a]] or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without ]imitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or prodding labor, transportation, or other services related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) or all employees of the Contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. C. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. E. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide the governmental entity: 1. A certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and 2. No later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. F. The contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. D-3 Part D — Special Conditions 05/29/09 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment G. The contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. H. The contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 1. The contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: 1. Provide coverage, based on proper reporting on classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; 2. Provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; 3. Provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; 4. Obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: a.) A certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and b.) A new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 5. Retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 6. Notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and 7. Contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (1)- (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 8. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or D-4 Part D — Special Conditions 05/29/09 9 F City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment misleading information may subject the contractor to administrative, criminal, civil penalties or other civil actions. 9. The contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. The contractor shall post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other Texas Worker's Compensation Commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text, without any additional words or changes: "REQUIRED WORKER'S COMPENSATION COVERAGE The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." Call the Texas Worker's Compensation Commission at (512)440-3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage". D-6 WAGE RATES Not less than the wage rates issued by the U.S. Department of Labor unde the Davis -Bacon and related Acts must be paid on this project. The wage rates shall be for the specific project location. Refer to the web site Nk-%-w.upo.^ovidavisbacon:"tx.hnnl for the applicable rates. D-7 SUBSTITUTIONS The specifications for materials set out the minimum standard of quality, which the City believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. No substitutions will be permitted until the Contractor has received written permission of the Engineer to make a substitution for the material, which has been specified. Where the term "or equal", or "or approved equal" is used, it is understood that if a material, product, or piece of equipment bearing the name so used is furnished, it will be approvable, as the particular trade name was used for the purpose of establishing a standard of quality acceptable to the City. If a product of any other name is proposed for use, the Engineer's approval thereof must be obtained before the Contractor procures the proposed substitute. Where the term "or equal", or "or approved equal" is not used in the specifications, this does not necessarily exclude alternative items or material or equipment which may accomplish the intended purpose. However, the Contractor shall have the full responsibility of proving that the proposed substitution is, in fact, equal, and the Engineer, as the representative of the City, shall be the sole judge of the acceptability of substitutions. The provisions of this sub -section as related to "substitutions" shall be applicable to all sections of these specifications. D-5 Pan D — Special Conditions 05/29i09 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment S D-8 TIME OF COMPLETION A. The OSS shall commence work under the Special Engineering Services Contract on the day following notice to proceed for the contract and shall meet the completion dates specified in Part G — Special Engineering Services Contract. B. The OSS shall commence work under the Subcontract Agreement with the General Contractor for the Project on the day following the execution of the Subcontract Agreement and shall complete work in accordance with the following schedule: 1. OSS shall not commence the manufacture of any Goods until the Shop Drawings have been approved and the GENERAL CONTRACTOR has issued a "Notice to Commence Fabrication." The Goods shall be fabricated and delivered to the Point of Destination in accordance with the Schedule for Delivery- of Goods, to be developed and agreed upon by the OWNER, OSS, ENGINEER, and General Contractor for the installation of the Goods prior to the issuance of the "Notice to Commence Fabrication". The OSS shall accept a Schedule for Delivery of Goods that requires the Goods to be fabricated and delivered to the Point of Destination in as few as 200 days, but no more than 365 days, after the "Notice to Commence Fabrication" is issued. 3. All Goods shall be fabricated and delivered to the Point of Destination according to the Schedule for Delivery of Goods. Each shipment of Goods specified in the Schedule of Delivery of Goods shall be delivered to the Point of Destination within a period of time from between four calendar days before to four calendar days after the date specified for that shipment within the Schedule for Delivery of Goods. .,,W-11 4. The OSS shall be liable for liquidated damages in accordance with Section C below for each shipment of Goods that is not fabricated and delivered to the Point of Destination in accordance with the Schedule for Delivery of Goods. C. Liquidated Damages 1. Should the OSS fail to complete the Work or portions of the Work under the Special Engineering Services Contract within the specified time periods, the OSS will be subject to liquidated damages as specified in Part G — Special Engineering Services Contract. 2. Should the OSS fail to complete the work or portions of the Work under the Subcontract Agreement with the General Contractor for the Project, within the Schedule for Delivery of Goods as specified in Article 20 above, thereby causing the General Contractor to be late and having to pay liquidated damages to the City, the OSS agrees to pay the Contractor liquidated damages in the amount of ea 1,000 for each and every calendar day of delay until the Work is completed. The total amount of liquidated damages payable by the OSS shall not exceed ten percent (10%) of the OSS contract price. D-9 INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Wherever the words "Directed", "Required", "Permitted", "Designated", "Considered Necessary", "Prescribed", or words of like import are used on the Plans or in the Specifications, it shall be understood that they are intended as Specifications, it shall be understood that they are intended as prerogative of the Owner and/or the Engineer; and, similarly, the words, "Approval", "Acceptable", "Satisfactory", or words D-6 Pan D — Special Conditions 05/29,109 6 1W City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment of like import, shall mean approval, etc., by the Owner and./or Engineer. Wherever in the Specifications or in the Plans for the work the terms or description of various qualities relative to finish, workmanship, or other qualities of similar kind cannot, because of their nature, be specifically and briefly described and are customarily described in general terms, the Owner and/or Engineer shall be final judge as to whether or not the workmanship so described is being performed in accordance with the intent of the Plans and Specifications and the work shall be completed in accordance with his interpretation of the meaning of such words, terms, or clauses. D-10 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Substantial Completion for the Ozone Generation System shall be defined as such date when the ozone generation system has been installed, is,completely operational, has successfully passed the acceptance test, and the City is obtaining beneficial use of the system by having the Ozonation facilities available for use in producing potable water that can be pumped into the City's distribution system. The Owner will advise the Contractor if the Ozone System has been satisfactorily completed in accordance with the Plans and Specifications and issue a written statement of substantial completion. After substantial completion, the OSS shall provide a two -and -one -half -year Guaranty, commencing the date of substantial completion. D-11 FINAL ACCEPTANCE After construction work is satisfactorily completed, the Owner shall make a final inspection of the project, in accordance with Section I-10 of the General Conditions. D-12 INTERPRETATION OF REOUIREMENTS A. Interpretation: Any question as to interpretation of drawings and specifications or any questions arising after examination of premises must be referred to the Engineer in writing. No interpretation nor instructions given verbally by any persons will be considered valid. B. Lack of Understanding: Lack of understanding of Drawings and Specifications or failure to secure information concerning all conditions will not justify any claims; and extra compensation will not be made simply because of lack of such knowledge. D-13 AGE In accordance with the policy ("Policy") of the Executive Branch of the Federal Government, OSS covenants that neither it nor any of its officers, members, agents, employees, program participants or subcontractors, while engaged in performing this contract, shall, in connection with the employment, advancement or discharge of employees or in connection with the terns, conditions or privileges of their employment, discriminate against persons because of their age except on the basis of a bona fide occupational qualification, retirement plan or statutory requirement. OSS further covenants that neither it nor its officers, members, agents, employees, subcontractors, program participants, or persons acting on their behalf, shall specify, in solicitations or advertisements for employees to work on this contract, a maximum age limit for such employment unless the specified maximum age limit is based upon a bona fide occupational qualification, retirement plan or statutory requirement. D-7 Part D — Special Conditions 05%29/09 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment ��� OSS warrants it will fully comply with the policy and will defend, indemnify and hold City harmless against any claims or allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractors against City arising out of OSS's and/or its subcontractor's alleged failure to comply with the above referenced Policy concerning age discrimination in the performance of this agreement. D-14 DISABILITY In accordance with the provisions of the Americans With Disabilities Act of 1990 ("ADA"), OSS warrants that it and its subcontractors will not unlawfully discriminate on the basis of disability in the provision of services to the general public, nor in the availability, terms and/or conditions of employment for applicants for employment with, or employees of Contractor or any of its subcontractors. OSS warrants it will fully comply with ADA's provision and any other applicable federal, state and local laws concerning disability and will defend, indemnify and hold City harmless against any claims or allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractors against City arising out of OSS's and/or its subcontractor's alleged failure to comply with the above -referenced law concerning disability discrimination in the performance of this agreement. D-15 INSURANCE Property insurance upon the entire work, including materials not in place at the site to the full insurable value thereof, is required. All Risk Builder's Risk Insurance shall include the interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractor and Sub -subcontractors in the work and shall include, but not be limited to, the perils of fire, lightning, flood, collapse, windstorm, hail, explosion, riot, civil commotion, smoke, aircraft, land vehicles, vandalism and malicious mischief. The Builder's Risk Insurance shall be endorsed to permit occupancy prior to completion of construction and prior to acceptance by the Owner. A copy of the %%Er Builder's Risk Policy shall be filed with the Owner and shall include a thirty (30) day notice of cancellation of policy provision. D-16 WARRANTY CERTIFICATES The OSS shall warrant that all equipment furnished by it hereunder complies in all respects with the design and specification of this contract and contains no defect of material or workmanship. In the event of failure of any part or parts of the equipment supplied by the OSS during the two and one-half years of service following Ozone System substantial completion, due to defects of design, materials, or workmanship, the affected part or parts shall be replaced promptly upon notice by the Contractor. All replacement parts shall be furnished, delivered and installed at the expense of the OSS. All warranty certificates or OSS's guarantees, for equipment purchased by the Contractor shall be issued in the name of the City of Fort Worth. D-17 UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES LABELING: lip All electrical materials and equipment to be installed as part of this project shall bear the label of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) or other testing laboratory approved by the City of Fort Worth Electrical Inspection Section. Such labeling shall include electrical equipment provided as part of a mechanical equipment package, such as pumps, blowers, etc. The label shall be provided prior to the equipment being shipped to the project site. _. M Pan D — Speeial Conditions 05'29/09 .d/ City of Fort worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment D-18 OSS's TOTAL LIMIT OF LI.ABILITY: Notwithstanding any other provision of the Contract Documents, the OSS shall not be liable for any consequential, incidental, special, punitive or other indirect damages (other than liquidated damages expressly provided for in the Contract Documents). The OSS's liability under the Contract Documents shall not exceed 1.5 times the contract price for the purchase and services related to procurement of the equipment. END OF SECTION D-9 Part D — Special Conditions 05.29i09 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK D-10 Pan D - Special Conditions 05!29!09 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment PART G � SPECIAL ENGINEERING SERVICES AGREEMENT THIS SPECIAL ENGINEERING SERVICES AGREEMENT, hereafter referred to as the "Agreement" made as of the —Llb--- day of A4ubtl in the year 200N by and between the City of Fort Worth, hereinafter called OWNER and Ozonia North America. LLC with legal address and principal place of business at 491 Edward N. Ross Dr., Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 hereinafter called OSS. OWNER and OSS in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: ARTICLE 1. SPECIAL ENGINEERING SERVICES 1.1 OSS shall provide Special Engineering Services as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Special Engineering Services to be furnished are described in Section 01010, Summary of Work. 1.2 OSS shall attend progress design meetings as required by OWNER. OSS shall provide all necessary project documents required by ENGINEER for the successful design of the ozone system. ARTICLE 2. THE PROJECT 2.1 The Project for which the Special Engineering Services are to be provided under the Contract Documents is generally described as follows: The OSS shall provide project design documentation, shop drawings, installation manuals, assistance to the ENGINEER in the design of the ozone system, and shall attend progress design meetings. 2.2 The OWNER shall execute the Agreement and administer the Contract for the Special Engineering Services associated with the preparation of Shop Drawings and other Submittals required for the Project. ARTICLE 3. ENGINEER 3.1 The Contract Documents have been prepared by Freese & Nichols, Inc, 4055 International Plaza, Suite 200, Fort Worth, TX 76109, who will act as ENGINEER in connection with the furnishing of Special Engineering Services in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4. POINT OF DELIVERY 4.1 Project design documentation and other related documents are to be delivered to the ENGINEER, Freese & Nichols, Inc, 4055 International Plaza, Suite 200, Fort Worth, TX 76109. ARTICLE 5. CONTRACT TIMES 5.1 Time of the Essence a. All time limits for Milestones and the furnishing of Special Engineering Services as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract, and accordingly the parties have provided - for liquidated damages in Article 8 of this Agreement. ... ---- I .� OFFICIAL RECORD Fn1Ty9rCRFTARy G-1 Part G — Special Engineg Services Agreement 8/ 17/2899 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment 5.2 Days to Achieve Submittal of Shop Drawings and Samples a. All Shop Drawings and Samples required by the Contract Documents shall be submitted to the OWNER for ENGINEER's review and approval in accordance with Section 01300 and the following schedule. 1. The OSS shall have submitted to the ENGINEER the mechanical Shop Drawing Submittal within 60 calendar days after the Notice of Award. 2. The OSS shall have submitted to the ENGINEER the instrumentation and control Shop Drawing Submittal within 90 calendar days after the Notice of Award b. OSS will be assessed liquidated damages in accordance with Article 8 for failure to provide the above Submittals within the specified times. 5.3 Project Milestones for Special Engineering Services a. The furnishing of Special Engineering Services to the OWNER and ENGINEER will commence upon the execution of the Agreement between the OWNER and the OSS. The OSS shall provide all Special Engineering Services required by the Contract Documents based upon the following milestones. 1. Upon execution of the Agreement, the OSS will begin to provide Special Engineering Services required for Shop Drawings and Samples. 2. OSS shall participate in progress design meetings and assist ENGINEER in the design of the Ozone System. 3. All submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals. ARTICLE 6. CONTRACT PRICE 6.1 OSS shall provide Special Engineering Services per the requirements of the Contract Documents and accept in full payment the Contract Price of fifty thousand dollars ($50,000) as specified in Part B - Proposal. ARTICLE 7. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 7.1 Applications for Payment will be processed by OWNER as provided in the Conditions of the Contract and as modified below. Applications for payment shall be submitted by the OSS on or before the last day of each calendar month. 7.2 Progress Payments a. OWNER will make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of OSS's Applications for Payment as follows: 1. OWNER shall provide a payment often thousand dollars ($10,000) for Special Engineering Services for receipt of OSS's first mechanical shop drawing Submittal. G-2 Part G — Special Engineering Services Agreement 8/17/2009 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment 2. OWNER shall provide a payment of fifteen thousand dollars ($15,000) for Special Engineering �..i Services for approval of OSS's final mechanical shop drawing Submittal. 3. OWNER shall provide a payment of ten thousand dollars ($10,000) for Special Engineering Services for receipt of OSS's first instrumentation and control shop drawing Submittal. 4. OWNER shall provide a payment of fifteen thousand dollars ($15,000) for Special Engineering Services for approval of OSS's final instrumentation and control shop drawing Submittal. ARTICLE 8. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 8.1 OWNER and OSS recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the Contract Time specified in Article 5 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with the General Conditions. Should OSS fail to complete the Work within this time, OWNER may retain liquidated damages in accordance with this Agreement. Liquidated damages set forth in this Article 8 shall constitute the OWNER's sole and exclusive remedy for delay by OSS in achieving any Milestones or dates for the delivery of Goods or furnishing of Special Services or Engineering. In no event shall OSS be required to pay liquidated damages to the extent that the payment of such damages would allow the aggregate of all such damages paid to exceed the Contract Price. It is understood that the foregoing limitation is a subset of and not in addition to the limitation of liability set forth in Article 11 of this Agreement. 8.2 Liquidated Damages: ,"Wo, a. OSS agrees to pay OWNER liquidated damages in the amount of five hundred dollars ($500) per calendar day that expires after the contract times or dates specified for the furnishing of Special Engineering Services in Article 5 of this Agreement. b. The liquidated damages are not a penalty but represent the fixed costs associated with OWNER's administrative fees and costs incurred by the OWNER's inability to place all or portions of this project into service within the time stipulated in the Agreement. The payment of liquidated damages shall not, however, prevent the OWNER from pursuing non -monetary remedies for breach of contract or other claims for breach of contract not relating to failure to achieve final completion. c. By execution of this Agreement, the OWNER and OSS expressly agree that these liquidated damage amounts are reasonable under the circumstances existing at the time this Agreement is executed. ARTICLE 9. ASSURANCE 9.1 OSS has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, locality, and with all local conditions and Federal, State and local laws, ordinances, rules at regulations that irr-""� any manner may affect cost, progress or performance of the Work. OFFICIAL. RECORD 9.2 OSS has carefully studied all reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and 1 eit�T� conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work relied upon by ENGINEER in the preparation of the Contract Documents. G-3 Part G — Special Engineering Services Agreement 8/17/2009 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment 9.3 OSS has made or caused to be made examinations, investigations and tests and studies of such reports and related data in addition to those referred to in the above paragraph as it deems necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents; and no additional examinations, investigations, tests, reports or similar data are or will be required by it for such purposes. 9.4 OSS has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, tests, reports and data with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 9.5 OSS has given ENGINEER written notice of any conflict, error or discrepancy that it has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to OSS. 9.6 OSS agrees that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance of the Work. ARTICLE 10.OSS INSURANCE 10.1 Insurance coverage and limits: OSS shall provide to the City certificate(s) of insurance documenting policies of the following coverage at minimum limits that are to be in effect prior to commencement of work on the PROJECT: Commercial General Liability $1,000,000 each occurrence $2,000,000 aggregate Automobile Liability $1,000,000 each accident on a combined single limit or $250,000 Property Damage $500,000 Bodily Injury per person per occurrence A commercial business policy shall provide coverage on "Any Auto", defined as autos owned, hired and non -owned when said vehicle is used in the course of the PROJECT. Worker's Compensation Coverage A: Statutory limits Coverage B: Employer's Liability $100,000 each accident $500,000 disease - policy limit $100,000 disease - each employee Professional Liability $1,000,000 each claim $2,000,000 aggregate Professional liability shall be written on a claims -made basis and shall contain a retroactive date prior to the date of the contract or the first date of services to be performed, whichever is earlier. G-4 Part G — Special Engineering Services Agreement 8/17/2009 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment Coverage shall be maintained for a period of 5 years following the completion of the contract. An annual certificate of insurance specifically referencing this project shall be submitted to the City �.r for each year following completion of the contract. 10.2 Certificates of insurance evidencing that the OSS has obtained all required insurance shall be delivered to the CITY prior to OSS proceeding with the PROJECT. a. Applicable policies shall be endorsed to name the CITY and Freese and Nichols, Inc. as Additional Insured thereon, as its interests may appear. The term CITY shall include its employees, officers, officials, agents, and volunteers as respects the contracted services. b. Certificate(s) of insurance shall document that insurance coverage specified in this agreement are provided under applicable policies documented thereon. c. Any failure on part of the CITY to request required insurance documentation shall not constitute a waiver of the insurance requirements. d. A minimum of forty-five (45) days notice of cancellation or material change in coverage shall be provided to the CITY. A ten (10) days notice shall be acceptable in the event of non-payment of premium. Such terms shall be endorsed onto OSS 's insurance policies. Notice shall be sent to the Water Director (by name), City of Fort Worth, 1000 Throckmorton, Fort Worth, Texas 76102. e. Insurers for all policies must be authorized to do business in the State of Texas and have a minimum rating of A: VII in the current A.M. Best Key Rating Guide or have reasonably equivalent financial strength and solvency to the satisfaction of Risk Management. f. Deductible limits, or self insured retentions, affecting insurance required herein shall be acceptable to the CITY in its sole discretion; and, in lieu of traditional insurance, any alternative coverage maintained through insurance pools or risk retention groups must be also approved. Dedicated financial resources or letters of credit may also be acceptable to the City. g. Applicable policies shall each be endorsed with a waiver of subrogation in favor of the CITY as respects the PROJECT. h. The City shall be entitled, upon its request and without incurring expense, to review the OSS 's insurance policies including endorsements thereto and, at the CITY's discretion, the OSS may be required to provide proof of insurance premium payments. i. The Commercial General Liability insurance policy shall have no exclusions by endorsements unless the CITY approves such exclusions in writing. j. For all lines of coverage underwritten on a claims -made basis, other than Professional Liability, the retroactive date shall be coincident with or prior to the date of the contractual agreement. The certificate of insurance shall state both the retroactive date and that the coverage is claims -made. k. The CITY shall not be responsible for the direct payment of any insurance premiums required by this agreement and all insurance required in this section, with the exception of Professional Liability, shall be written on an occurrence basis. �--` OFFICIAL REC®R® G-5 Part G — Special Engineering Services Agreement 8/ 17/2009_ City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment 1. Sub consultants and subcontractors to/of the OSS shall be required by the OSS to maintain the same or reasonably equivalent insurance coverage as required for the OSS. When sub consultants/subcontractors maintain insurance coverage, OSS shall provide CITY with documentation thereof on a certificate of insurance. ARTICLE 11. GENERAL LEGAL PROVISIONS 11.1 Authorization to Proceed OSS shall be authorized to proceed with this AGREEMENT upon receipt of a written Notice to Proceed from the CITY. 11.2 Reuse of Project Documents All designs, drawings, specifications, documents, and other work products ofthe OSS, whether in hard copy or in electronic form, are instruments of service for this PROJECT, whether the PROJECT is completed or not. Reuse, change, or alteration by the CITY or by others acting through or on behalf of the CITY of any such instruments of service without the written permission of the OSS will be at the CITY's sole risk. The CITY shall own the final designs, drawings, specifications and documents. 11.3 Force Majeure The OSS is not responsible for damages or delay in performance caused by acts of God, strikes, lockouts, accidents, or other events beyond the control of the OSS. 11.4 Termination Nftlol a. This AGREEMENT may be terminated only by the City for convenience on 30 days' written notice. This AGREEMENT may be terminated by either the CITY or the OSS for cause if either party fails substantially to perform through no fault of the other and does not commence correction of such nonperformance within 5 days of written notice and diligently complete the correction thereafter. b. If this AGREEMENT is terminated for the convenience of the City, the OSS will be paid for work performed prior to termination, and termination expenses as follows: 1. Cost of reproduction of partial or complete studies, plans, specifications or other forms of OSS's work product; 2. Out-of-pocket expenses for purchasing storage containers, microfilm, electronic data files, and other data storage supplies or services; 3. The time requirements for the OSS 's personnel to document the work underway at the time the CITY's termination for convenience so that the work effort is suitable for long time storage. c. Prior to proceeding with termination services, the OSS will submit to the CITY an itemized statement of all termination expenses. The CITY's approval will be obtained in writing prior to proceeding with termination services. 11.5 Suspension, Delay, or Interruption to Work G-6 Part G — Special Engineering Services Agreement 8/ 17/2009 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment The CITY may suspend, delay, or interrupt the services of the OSS for the convenience of the CITY. In the event of such suspension, delay, or interruption, an equitable adjustment in the PROJECT's schedule, commitment and cost of the OSS 's personnel and subcontractors, and ENGINEER's compensation will be made. 11.6 Indemnification a. The OSS agrees to indemnify and defend the CITY from any loss, cost, or expense claimed by third parties for property damage and bodily injury, including death, caused solely by the negligence or willful misconduct of the OSS, its employees, officers, and subcontractors in connection with the PROJECT. b. If the negligence or willful misconduct of both the OSS and the CITY (or a person identified above for whom each is liable) is a cause of such damage or injury, the loss, cost, or expense shall be shared between the OSS and the CITY in proportion to their relative degrees ofnegligence or willful misconduct as determined pursuant to T.C.P. & R. Code, section 33.011(4) (Vernon Supplement 1996). 11.7 Assignment Neither party shall assign all or any part of this AGREEMENT without the prior written consent of the other party. 11.8 Interpretation Limitations on liability and indemnities in this AGREEMENT are business understandings between the parties and shall apply to all the different theories of recovery, including breach of contract or warranty, tort v including negligence, strict or statutory liability, or any other cause of action, except for willful misconduct or gross negligence for limitations of liability and sole negligence for indemnification. Parties mean the CITY and the OSS, and their officers, employees, agents, and subcontractors. 11.9 Jurisdiction The law of the State of Texas shall govern the validity of this AGREEMENT, its interpretation and performance, and any other claims related to it. The venue for any litigation related to this AGREEMENT shall be Tarrant County, Texas. 11.10 Alternate Dispute Resolution a. All claims, disputes, and other matters in question between the CITY and OSS arising out of, or in connection with this Agreement or the PROJECT, or any breach of any obligation or duty of CITY or OSS hereunder, will be submitted to mediation. If mediation is unsuccessful, the claim, dispute or other matter in question shall be submitted to arbitration if both parties acting reasonably agree that the amount of the dispute is likely to be less than $50,000, exclusive of attorneys fees, costs and expenses. Arbitration shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association or other applicable rules of the Association then in effect. Any award rendered by the arbitrators less than $50,000, exclusive of attorneys fees, costs and expenses, will be final, judgment may be entered thereon in any court having jurisdiction, and will not be subject to appeal or modification except to the extent permitted by Sections 10 and 11 of the Federal Arbitration Act (9 U.S.C. Sections 10 and 11). b. Any award greater than $50,000, exclusive of attorney's fees, costs and expe 3 inay be litigated by G-7 Part G — Special Engineering Services Agreement 8/ 17/2009 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment either party on a de novo basis. The award shall become final ninety (90) days from the date same is issued. If litigation is filed by either party within said ninety (90) day period, the award shall become null and void and shall not be used by either party for any purpose in the litigation. 11.11 Severability and Survival If any of the provisions contained in this AGREEMENT are held for any reason to be invalid, illegal, or unenforceable in any respect, such invalidity, illegality, or unenforceability will not affect any other provision, and this AGREEMENT shall be construed as if such invalid, illegal, or unenforceable provision had never been contained herein. 11.12 Observe and Comply OSS shall at all times observe and comply with all federal and State laws and regulations and with all City ordinances and regulations which in any way affect this AGREEMENT and the work hereunder, and shall observe and comply with all orders, laws ordinances and regulations which may exist or may be enacted later by governing bodies having jurisdiction or authority for such enactment. No plea of misunderstanding or ignorance thereof shall be considered. OSS agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless CITY and all of its officers, agents and employees from and against all claims or liability arising out of the violation of any such order, law, ordinance, or regulation, whether it be by itself or its employees. ARTICLE 12. MISCELLANEOUS 12.1 Terms used in this Agreement shall have the meanings assigned in Part C - General Conditions. 12.2 Successors and Assigns The OWNER and OSS each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 12.3 OSS's Total Limitation of Liability: Notwithstanding any other provisions of the Contract Documents, the OSS's total liability arising at any time under any of the Contract Documents or otherwise in connection with completing the Contract (whether arising under breach of contract, tort, strict liability, or any other theory of law) shall not exceed 1.5 times the amount of the Total Contract Price of the Special Engineering Services Agreement. G-8 Part G — Special Engineering Services Agreement 8/17/2009 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment This AGREEMENT, including the referenced specifications and documents provided within this Specifications manual, constitutes the entire AGREEMENT, supersedes all prior written or oral understandings, and may only be changed by a written amendment executed by both parties. The following attachments and schedules are hereby made a part of this AGREEMENT: iki Executed this the day of ATTEST: Maif Hendfix City Secretary APPROVED AS TO ORM AND LEG Amy J. Ramsey Assistant City Attorney END OF , 2009. CITY OF FORT WORTH Fernando Costa Assistant City Manager APPROVAL RECOMMENDED L S. Frank Crumb, Director Water Department C a37 Conti t - Conti --klj klj �� k Dat:c Ozonia North America. LLC Ozone System Supgiier (OSS) - President OFFICIAL RECORD CITY SECRETARY FT. WORTH, TX G-9 Part G — Special Engineering Services Agreement 8/ 17/2009 City of Fort Worth North and South Holly WTP Upgrade - Ozone Generation Equipment THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK G-10 Part G — Special Engineering Services Agreement 8/17/2009 o�� TRAVELERS J� POLICY NUMBER: Y-660-6108A783-PHX-09 EFFECTIVE DATE: 03-01-09 ISSUE DATE: 03-09--09 LISTING OF FORMS, ENDORSEMENTS AND SCHEDULE NUMBERS THIS LISTING SHOWS THE NUMBER OF FORMS, SCHEDULES AND ENDORSEMENTS BY LINE OF BUSINESS. IL TO 02 11 89 COMMON POLICY DECLARATIONS IL T8 01 10 93 FORMS, ENDORSEMENTS AND SCHEDULE NUMBERS IL TO 01 01 07 COMMON POLICY CONDITIONS IL TO 03 04 96 LOCATION SCHEDULE. IL T3 02 07 86 CALCULATION OF PREMIUM -COMPOSITE RATE(S) IL T8 00 GENERAL PURPOSE ENDORSEMENT IL T3 20 09 97 EARLIER NOT CANCEL/NONRENEWAL PROV BY US COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG TO 01 11 03 CG T5 09 11 03 CG TO 07 09 87 CG TO 08 11 03 CG TO 34 11 03 CG 00 01 10 01 CG T8 00 CG D2 55 11 03 CG20101001 CG 20 37 07 04 CG 21 70 01 08 CG DO 37 04 05 CG D1 87 If 03 CG D2 11 01 04 CG D2 34 01 05 CG D2 46 08 05 CG D2 56 11 03 CG D2 88 11 03 CG D3 07 11 03 CG D3 26 01 04 CG 21 51 09 89 CG D1 42 01 99 CG O1 58 08 96 �Y+ CG 02 04 06 01 rk CG D2 40 06 01 * CG D2 42 01 02 cif CG T3 23 07 02 4K CG T4 78 02 90 CG 26 20 10 93 f- CG F i 68 01 99 CG F2 09 02 08 COML GENERAL LIABILITY COV PART DEC AMENDMENT OF LIMITS OF INSURANCE DECLARATIONS PREMIUM SCHEDULE KEY TO DECLARATIONS PREMIUM SCHEDULE TABLE OF CONTENTS COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COV FORM GENERAL PURPOSE ENDORSEMENT AMENDMENT OF COVERAGE - POLLUTION ADDL INSD-OWNER/LESSEE/CONTRACTOR B ADD INSURED-OWNRS,LESSEES,CONT COMPL CPS CAP ON LOSSES -CERTIFIED ACTS -TERRORISM OTHER INSURANCE -ADDITIONAL INSUREDS MANUFACTURERS AND WHOLESALERS XTEND END DESIGNATED PROJECT(S) GEN AGGR LIMIT WEB XTEND - LIABILITY BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED (CONTRACTORS) AMENDMENT OF COVERAGE EMPLOYMENT -RELATED PRACTICES EXCLUSION EXCLUSION -CONTRACTORS -PROFESSIONAL LIAB EXCLUSION -UNSOLICITED COMMUNICATIONS AMEND LIQUOR LIAB EXCL EXCEPT SCHED ACT EXCLUSION -DISCRIMINATION AMENDMENT -DIFFERENCE IN CONDITIONS EXCL-EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEM EXCLUSION - SILICA EXCLUSION WAR EXCL-AIRCRAFT PRODUCTS AND GROUNDING EXCLUSION -ASBESTOS NJ CHANGES -LOSS INFORMATION EXCLUSION - LEAD'- NEW JERSEY VIRGINIA CHANGES IL T8 01 10 93 PAGE : 1 OF 2 008391 Aw TRAVELEM POLICY NUMBER: Y-660-61 OBA783-PHX-09 EFFECTIVE DATE: 03-01-09 ISSUE DATE: 03-09-09 EMPLOYEE BENEFITS LIABILITY CG TO 09 09 93 EMPLOYEE BENEFITS LIAB COV PART DEC CG TO 43 11 88 EMPLOYEE BENEFITS LIAB TABLE OF CONTENTS CG Ti 01 07 86 EMPLOYEE BENEFITS LIABILITY COV FORM CG T5 30 06 89 AMENDMENT-EBL CG DO 38 03 95 EXCLUSION-IRC VIOLATIONS CG T4 84 11 88 EXCL-COBRA-EBL CG T4 85 11 88 ADDITIONAL EXCLUSION-EBL CG T5'21 05 90 EXCL-DMGES UNDER CERTAIN EMPL BEN PROG CG F4 23 05 06 AMENDATORY ENDORSEMENT - VA EBL CG T9 91 10 87 UT -AMENDATORY ENDORSEMENT - EBL MULTIPLE SUBLINE ENDORSEMENTS C = COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY E = EMPLOYEE BENEFITS LIABILITY L = LIQUOR LIABILITY CG 01 86 12 04 UTAH CHANGES (C, E, L) INTERLINE ENDORSEMENTS IL T3 68 01 08 FEDERAL TERRORISM RISK INSURANCE ACT IL T3 76 01 08 CAP ON LOSSES - CERTIFIED ACTS TERRORISM IL 00 21 11 85 NUCLEAR ENERGY LIABILITY EXCLUSION IL 01 38 04 06 VIRGINIA CHNGS CANCELLATION & NONRENEWAL IL 01 41 09 08 NEW JERSEY CHANGES -CIVIL UNION IL T8 01 10 93 PAGE : 2 of 2 ."1W 01005 DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SPECIFICATION TERMINOLOGY A. "Engineer" or "Architect' means Freese and Nichols, Inc., Architects and Engineers, 4055 International Plaza, Ste. 200, Fort Worth, Texas 76109-4895, or its designated representative. B. "Furnish" means to supply, deliver and unload materials and equipment at the project site ready to install. C. "Install' means the operations at the project site including unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, training and similar operations required to prepare the materials and equipment for use, verify conformance with Contract Documents and prepare for acceptance and operation by the Owner. D. 'Provide" means to furnish and install materials and equipment. E. "Perform" means to complete the operations necessary to comply with the Contract Documents. F. "Indicated" means graphic representations, notes, or schedules on drawings, or other requirements in Contract Documents. Words such as "shown", "noted", "scheduled", are used to help locate the reference. No limitation on the location is intended unless specifically noted. G. "Specified" means written representations in the bid documents or the technical specifications. H. 'Regulation" means laws, statutes, ordinances, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as, rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of work, whether they are lawfully imposed by authorities having jurisdiction or not. I. "Installer" means an entity engaged by Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or sub -subcontractor to install materials and/or equipment. Installers are to have successfully completed a minimum of five projects similar in size and scope to this project, have a minimum of five years of experience in the installation of similar materials and equipment, and comply with the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. J. "Manufacturer" means an entity engaged by Contractor, as a subcontractor, or sub -subcontractor to furnish materials and/or equipment. Manufacturers are to have a minimum of five years experience in the manufacture of materials and equipment similar in size, capacity and scope to the specified materials and equipment. K. 'Project site" means the space available to perform the work, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing construction at the project site. L. "Testing laboratory" means an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, either at the project site or elsewhere, and to report and interpret the results of those inspections or tests. Definitions and Terminology 01005-1 FTW09118 t- r , ^4r M. "Listed" means equipment is included in a list published by a nationally recognized laboratory which makes periodic inspection of production of such equipment and states that such equipment meets nationally recognized standards or has been tested and found safe for use in a specified manner. N. "Labeled" means equipment that embodies a valid label, symbol, or other identifying mark of a nationally recognized testing laboratory such as Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., and production is periodically inspected in accordance with nationally recognized standards or tests to determine safe use in a specified manner. O. "Certified" used in context with materials and equipment means the material and equipment has been tested and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet specification requirements, or nationally recognized standards if requirements are not specified, and is safe for use in the specified manner. Production of the equipment must be periodically inspected by a nationally recognized testing laboratory and the equipment must bear a label, tag, or other record of certification. "Certified" used in context with labor performance or ability to install materials and equipment means that the abilities of the proposed installer have been tested by a representative of the specified testing agency authorized to issue certificates of competency and has met the prescribed standards for certification. "Certified" used in context with test reports, payment requests or other statements of fact means that the statements made on the document are a true statement as attested to by the certifying entity. P. "Contractor' or "General Contractor" means the Contractor selected to construct the North and South Holly Water Treatment Plant Upgrade, including the purchase, coordination, installation, startup and testing of the ozone system equipment supplied under this supply agreement. Q. "Ozone System Supplier" means the manufacturer of ozone generators and power supplies to supply the Ozone System, defined herein, based on the Drawings, Specifications and the specific requirements of the Manufacturer's equipment. 1.02 SPECIFICATION SENTENCE STRUCTURE A. Specifications are written in modified brief style. Requirements apply to all work of the same kind, class, and type even though the word "all" is not stated. B. Simple imperative sentence structure is used which places a verb as the first word in the sentence. It is understood that the words "furnish", "install", "provide", or similar words include the meaning of the phrase "The Supplier shall..." before these words. C. It is understood that the words "directed", "designated", "requested", "authorized", "approved", "selected", or similar words include the meaning of the phrase "by the Engineer" after these words unless otherwise stated. Use of these words does not extend the Engineer's responsibility for construction supervision or responsibilities beyond those defined in the General Conditions. D. "At no additional cost to Owner", "With no extra compensation to Supplier", "At Supplier's own expense", or similar words mean that the Supplier will perform or provide specified operation of work without any increase in the Contract Amount. It is understood that the cost for performing all work is included in the amount bid and will be performed at no additional cost to the Owner unless specifically stated otherwise. Definitions and Terminology 01005-2 FTW09118 1.03 DOCUMENT ORGANIZATION A. The contract requirements described in the General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 apply to each and all specification sections unless specifically noted otherwise. f B. Organization of Contract Documents is not intended to control or to lessen the responsibility of the Supplier when dividing work among subcontractors, or to establish the extent of work to be performed by any trade, subcontractor or vendor. Specifications or details do not need to be indicated or specified in each specification or drawing. Items shown in the contract documents are applicable regardless of location in the Contract Documents. C. Standard paragraph titles and other identifications of subject matter in the specifications are intended to aid in locating and recognizing various requirements of the specifications. Titles do not define, limit, or otherwise restrict specification text. D. Capitalizing words in the text does not mean that these words convey special or unique meanings or have precedence over other parts of the Contract Documents. Specification text governs over titling and it is understood that the specification is to be interpreted as a whole. E. Drawings and specifications do not indicate or describe all of the work required to complete the project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Engineer. Provide any work, materials or equipment required for a complete and functional system even if they are not detailed or specified. 1.04 INTERPRETATIONS OF DOCUMENTS Iftow A. Comply with the most stringent requirements where compliance with two (2) or more standards is specified, and they establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, unless Contract Documents indicate otherwise. 1. Quantity or quality level shown or indicated shall be minimum to be provided or performed in every instance. 2. Actual installation may comply exactly with minimum quality indicated, or it may exceed that minimum within reasonable limits. 3. In complying with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum values, as noted, or appropriate for context of requirements. 4. Refer instances of uncertainty to the Engineer for a decision before proceeding. B. Provide materials and equipment comparable in quality to similar materials and equipment incorporated in the project or as required to meet the minimum requirements of the application if the materials and equipment are shown in the drawings but are not included in the specifications. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Comply with applicable construction industry standards as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents regardless of lack of reference in the Contract Documents. Apply provisions of the Contract Documents where Contract Documents include more stringent requirements than the referenced standards. 1. Standards referenced directly in the Contract Documents take precedence over standards that are not referenced but recognized in the construction industry as applicable. 2. Comply with standards not referenced but recognized in the construction industry as applicable for performance of the work except as otherwise limited by the Contract Definitions and Terminology 01005-3 FTW09118 Documents. The Engineer determines whether code or standard is applicable, or which of several are applicable. B. Consider a referenced standard to be the latest edition with supplements or amendments when a standard is referred to in an individual specification section but is not listed by title and date. C. Trade association names and title of general standards are frequently abbreviated. Acronyms or abbreviations used in the Contract Documents mean the recognized name of trade association, standards generating organization, authority having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable in the context of the Contract Documents. Refer to "Encyclopedia of Associations," published by Gale Research Company. D. Make copies of reference standards available as requested by Engineer or Owner. 1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS AND EQUAL PRODUCTS Provide materials and equipment manufactured by the entities specifically listed in each technical specification section. Submit a Contractor's Modification Request per Section 01300, SUBMITTALS for substitution of materials and equipment of manufacturers not specifically listed or for materials and equipment that does not strictly comply with the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION Definitions and Terminology 01005-4 FTW09118 `! 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Supply ozone system equipment as described in the Contract Documents. 1. Furnish the materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make the system equipment completely operable. 2. Provide the labor, equipment, tools, and consumable supplies required for a complete project. 3. Test and certify the completed system. 4. Provide the special tools, spare parts, lubricants, supplies, or other materials as specified for the operation and maintenance of the equipment. 5. Drawings and specifications do not indicate or describe all of the work required to complete the project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Engineer. B. Provide special services, including shop drawings and design assistance, in accordance with the Special Engineering Services Agreement. 1.02 JOB CONDITIONS A. The General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, and Division One specifications apply to each specification section. B. Comply with all applicable state and local codes and regulations pertaining to the nature and character of the work being performed. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Scope of supply is described in general, non -inclusive terms as: 1. Ozone generation equipment, including power supply units 2. Ozone destruct units 3. Ozone system controls 1.04 WORK UNDER GENERAL CONTRACT A. The following items of work are not included in this supply scope, but may impact construction scheduling, testing, and start up: 1. Ozone equipment installation 2. Ozone building construction 3. Liquid oxygen storage and vaporizers 4. Ozone contactors and diffusers 5. Plant SCADA integration B. Completion of the work described in this contract may impact the construction and testing of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the General Contractor. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the project or any specified milestones. 1*ftwple Summary of Work 01010-1 FTW09118 c. Use full size blueline sheets for fabrications and layout drawings. Reproducible drawings may be submitted in lieu of bluelines. 2. Mark submittals to: a. Indicate OSS's corrections in green. b. Highlight items pertinent to the products being furnished in yellow and delete items that are not when the Manufacturer's standard drawings or information sheets are provided. c. Cloud items and highlight in yellow where selections by the Engineer or Owner are required. d. Mark dimensions with the prefix FD to indicate field verified dimensions on the drawings. e. Provide a blank space 8" x 3" for OSS's and Engineer's stamp. 3. Define abbreviations and symbols used in shop drawings. a. Use terms and symbols in shop drawings consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the shop drawings. c. Provide a legend for symbols used on shop drawings. D. Mark submittals to reference the drawing number and/or section of the specifications, detail designation, schedule or location that corresponds with the data submitted. Other identification may also be required, such as layout drawings or schedules to allow the reviewer to determine where a particular product is to be used. E. The number of copies of each submittal to be sent by the OSS and the number of copies of each submittal to be returned are: Prefix Description No. of No. of Copies Sent Copies Returned O&M Preliminary O&M Manuals 4 1 O&M Final O&M Manuals 4 0 SD Shop Drawings 4 1 F. Submit an electronic copy of each submittal through the Freese and Nichols, Inc. FNManager website at httr)s://construction.freese.com. The Supplier will be provided access to log onto the FNManager website to post submittal documents and check the status of submittals. The complete contents of each submittal, including associated drawings product data, etc., shall be submitted in Adobe Acrobat PDF format, or other format approved by Engineer. 1.04 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Shop drawings are required for those products that cannot adequately be described in the Contract Documents to allow fabrication, erection or installation of the product without additional detailed information from the product's manufacturer. 1. Shop drawings are requested so that the Engineer can: a. Assist the Owner in selecting colors, textures or other aesthetic features. b. Compare the proposed features of the product with the specified features so as to advise the Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the Contract Documents. c. Compare the performance features of the proposed product with those specified so as to advise the Owner that it appears that the product will meet the designed performance criteria. d. Review required certifications, guarantees, warranties, and service agreements for compliance with the Contract Documents. 2. Supplier shall certify that the products, when installed, will be in full compliance with the Contract Documents per Part D Special Conditions. Submittals 01300-2 FTW09118 3. Include a complete description of the material or equipment to be furnished. Information is to include: �..i a. Type, dimensions, size, arrangement, model number, and operational parameters of the components. b. Weights, gauges, materials of construction, external connections, anchors, and supports required. c. Performance characteristics, capacities, engineering data, motor curves, and other information necessary to allow a complete evaluation of mechanical components. d. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers. e. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings. f. Wiring and piping diagrams and related controls. g. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt, or other materials proportioned for the project. h. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the site. 4. All required statements of certification, guarantees, extended service agreements, and other related documents are to be provided with the shop drawing. The effective date of these documents shall be the date of acceptance of the work by the Owner. 5. Comments will be made on items called to the attention of the Engineer for review and comment. Any marks made by the Engineer do not constitute a blanket review of the submittal or relieve the Supplier from responsibility for errors or deviations from the Contract requirements. a. Submittals that are reviewed shall be returned with one or more of the following designations: 1) Approved - Submittal is found to be acceptable as submitted. 2) Approved as Noted - Submittal is acceptable with corrections or notations made by Engineer and may be used as corrected. 3) Revise and Resubmit - Submittal has deviations from the Contract Documents, significant errors, or is inadequate and must be revised and resubmitted for ,%MW subsequent review. 4) Not Approved - Products are not acceptable. b. Drawings with a significant or substantial number of markings by the OSS may be marked "Approved as Noted" and "Revise and Resubmit'. These drawings are to be revised to provide a clean record of the submittal. c. Dimensions or other data that do not appear to conform to the Contract Documents will be marked as "At Variance With" (AVW) the Contract Documents or other information provided. The OSS is to make revisions as appropriate to comply with Contract Documents. B. Certifications, Warranties and Service Agreements include documents as specified in the detailed specifications, as shown in the submittal schedule or as follows: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR) - A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the specifications. 2. Certification of Local Field Service (CLS) - A certified letter stating that field service is available from a factory or supplier approved service organization located within a 300 mile radius of the project site. List names, addresses, and telephone numbers of approved service organizations on or attach to the certificate. 3. Extended Warranty (EW) - A guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the normal one (1) year warranty described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. 4. Extended Service Agreement (ESA) - A contract to provide maintenance beyond that required to fulfill requirements for warranty repairs, or to perform routine maintenance for a definite period of time beyond the warranty period. Issue the service agreement in the name of the Owner. 5. Certification of Adequacy of Design (CAD) - A certified letter from the manufacturer of the equipment stating that they have designed the equipment to be structurally stable and to Submittals 01300-3 FTW 09118 withstand all imposed loads without deformation, failure, or adverse effects to the performance and operational requirements of the unit. The letter shall state that mechanical and electrical equipment is adequately sized to be fully operational for the conditions specified or normally encountered by the product's intended use. C. Submit Operation and Maintenance manuals (O&M) for all equipment, mechanical devices, or components described in the Contract Documents per Section 01730, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS. Include copies of approved shop drawings in the manual. 1.05 GUARANTEES A. Warranties and guarantees shall be submitted as required by the Contract Documents and submitted in accordance with Section 01740, WARRANTIES. B. Additional copies will be provided for equipment and will be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Section 01730, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS. 1.06 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make all corrections or changes in the submittals required by the Engineer and resubmit until approved. B. For shop drawings: 1. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for the original submittal. 2. Highlight in yellow those revisions which have been made in response to the first review by the Engineer. 3. Highlight in blue any new revisions which have been made or additional details of information that has been added since the previous review by the Engineer. 0—J 1.07 ENGINEER'S DUTIES A. Review the submittals and return with reasonable promptness. B. Affix stamp, indicate approval, rejection, and the need for resubmittal. C. Distribute documents. END OF SECTION A Submittals 01300-4 FTW09118 01600 PRODUCTS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide products for this project that comply with the requirements of this section. Specific requirements of the detailed equipment specifications govern in the case of a conflict with the requirements of this Section. B. Comply with applicable specifications and standards. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. DESIGN CRITERIA 1. Assume responsibility for the design of the products to include structural stability and operational capability. 2. Design members to withstand all loads imposed by installation, erection, and operation of the product without deformation, failure, or adversely affecting the operational requirements of the product. Size and strength of materials for structural members are specified as minimums only. 3. Design mechanical and electrical components for all loads, currents, stresses, and wear imposed by start-up and normal operations of the equipment without deformation, failure, or adversely affecting the operation of the unit. Mechanical and electrical components specified for equipment are specified as the minimum acceptable for the equipment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS, and shall include: 1. Certificates of Adequacy of Design, as described in SECTION 01300, SUBMITTALS; 2. Equipment Installation Reports per SECTION 01650, STARTING SYSTEMS; 3. Other documentation as required by detailed equipment specifications. 1.04 STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.05 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES A. Guarantee and or Warranty products furnished by the Supplier under this contract against: 1. Faulty or inadequate design 2. Improper assembly or erection 3. Defective workmanship or materials 4. Leakage, breakage, or other failure B. Guarantee and or Warranty the products furnished under this contract, against leakage, breakage, or other failure due to improper assembly or erection and against improper installation of the equipment. The guarantee and or Warranty period shall be as defined in the General Conditions. Individual specification sections may have more stringent warranty requirements than stated in the General Conditions The most stringent warranty will be required in the event of any difference in the two aforementioned locations. Products 01600-1 FTWO9118 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Design, fabricate, assemble,'deliver and install according to normally accepted engineering and shop practices, except where a higher standard of quality is required by the Contract Documents. B. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gages. Like parts are to be interchangeable. C. Two (2) or more items of the same kind are to be identical and made by the same manufacturer. D. Provide products suitable for the intended service. E. Adhere to the equipment capacities, sizes, and dimensions indicated by the Contract Documents. F. Do not use products for any purpose other than that for which it is designed. G. Provide new products unless previously used products are specifically allowed in the Contract Documents. H. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except as required by tests. I. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions. J. Iron castings shall be tough, close -grained gray iron free from blowholes, flaws, or excessive shrinkage and shall conform to ASTM A-48. K. Structural members shall be considered as subject to shock or vibratory loads. 2.02 SPECIAL TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES Furnish tools, instruments, lifting and handling devices, and accessories necessary for proper maintenance and adjustment that are available only from the Product Vendor or are not commonly available. 2.03 LUBRICATION SYSTEMS FOR EQUIPMENT A. Provide equipment lubricated by systems which: 1. Require attention no more frequently than weekly during continuous operation. 2. Do not require attention during start-up or shutdown. 3. Do not waste lubricants. B. Provide lubricants to fill lubricant reservoirs and to replace lubricant consumed during testing, start-up, and operation prior to acceptance of equipment by the Owner. 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Products 01600-2 FTW09118 SECTION 01612 SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Seismic design criteria for the following: 1. Anchorage of mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Seismic design and design of anchorage for small tanks fabricated off site and shipped to the Project site. 3. Other structures or items as specified or indicated on the Drawings. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design requirements: 1. Design in accordance with the requirements of the building code as specified in Section 01410: a. Design spectral acceleration at short period, Sps: 0.112. b. Component amplification factor, ap: In accordance with ASCE 7-05, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures", Tables 13.5-1 and 13.6-1. NOW c. Component response modification factor, RP: In accordance with ASCE 7-05, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures", Tables 13.5-1 and 13.6-1. d. Component importance factor, Ip: 1.00. 2. Do not use friction to resist sliding due to seismic forces. 3. Do not use more than 60 percent of the weight of the mechanical and electrical equipment for designing anchors for resisting overturning due to seismic forces. 4. Do not use more than 60 percent of the weight of the tank for resisting overturning due to seismic forces. 5. Use anchor bolts, bolts, or welded studs for anchors for resisting seismic forces. Anchor bolts used to resist seismic forces shall have a standard hex bolt head. Do not use anchor bolts fabricated from rod stock with an L or J-shape. 6. Do not use chemical anchors, concrete anchors, flush shells, powder actuated fasteners, sleeve anchors, or other types of anchors unless indicated on the Drawings or accepted in writing by the ENGINEER. 7. Seismic forces must be resisted by direct bearing on the fasteners used to resist seismic forces. Do not use connections that use friction to resist seismic forces. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings and calculations: Complete shop drawings and seismic calculations. May 09 01612-1 8205A10 pw:/ICarollo/Documents/ClienVfX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifcations/Pre•SelecU01612 (FS-Clean) B. Calculations shall be signed and stamped by a civil or structural engineer licensed in the state where the Project is located. PART PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION May 09 01612-2 8205A10 pwJr,aD1o/D=nenisl0mVrX?Fa1 WatNffiMID/SpeefcAmslPre�SdedIO1612 (F&Ckan) W 4 SECTION 01614 WIND DESIGN CRITERIA PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Wind design criteria. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design requirements: 1. Building code criteria: Design for wind in accordance with building code as specified in Section 01410: a. Occupancy category: III. b. Basic wind speed: 90 miles per hour. c. Exposure category: C. d. Topographic factor, Kt: 1.0. e. Wind importance factor, IM,: 1.15. 2. Use anchor bolts, bolts, or welded studs for anchors for resisting wind forces. Anchor bolts used to resist wind forces shall have a standard hex bolt head. Do not use anchor bolts fabricated from rod stock with an L or J shape: a. Do not use concrete anchors, sleeve anchors, flush shells, chemical anchors, powder actuated fasteners, or other types of anchor unless indicated on the Drawings or accepted in writing by the ENGINEER. b. Wind forces must be resisted by direct bearing on the anchors used to resist wind forces. Do not use connections which use friction to resist wind forces. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings and calculations: Complete shop drawings and wind design calculations. B. Calculations shall be signed and stamped by a Civil or Structural Engineer licensed in the state where the Project is located. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. ..� May 09 01614-1 8205A10 paJlCaroiWDocumeriWCfientrrX/ForI Worth/8205A10/SpecikatonsfPr&-SelecM1614 (FS-Clean) PART 3 EXECUTION `— Not Used. END OF SECTION May 09 01614-2 8205A10 pKJlCar ort Worth18205 l0pedficabwSlPM-Wectl01614 (FS-Cean) _*ftwpol 01650 STARTING SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide step-by-step procedures for starting provided systems, including equipment, pumps and processes. B. Provide pre -start up inspections following installation of major equipment items. C. Provide instruction and demonstration of operation, adjustment, and maintenance of each system and the component parts. D. Place each system in service and operate the system to prove performance and to provide for initial correction of defects in workmanship, calibration, and operation. E. Provide for initial maintenance and operation. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following to the General Contractor: 1. Equipment Installation Reports on form provided by the Contractor. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals per Section 01730, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS. '"N/ 1.03 STANDARDS Comply with any standards associated with the testing or start-up of equipment, as listed in the various sections of the specifications. s 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 TESTING INSTRUMENTATION Furnish any instrumentation or other testing devices needed to conduct tests. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURERS' REPRESENTATIVES A. The Manufacturer's representative for inspection, supervision of installation, and training must be an experienced and competent technical (not sales) representative of the Manufacturer or Supplier. B. Provide direct supervision of the installation, adjustment, and testing of the equipment. C. The Manufacturer's representative is to instruct the Owner or his authorized personnel on operational procedures and maintenance requirements. D. Include the cost of the services of the Manufacturer's representative in the equipment price. Starting Systems 01650-1 FTW09118 3.02 INSPECTION AND START-UP A. Inspect equipment prior to placing any equipment or system into operation. Make adjustments as necessary for proper operation. 1 _ Check for adequate and proper lubrication. 2. Determine that parts or components are free from undue stress from structural members, piping or anchorage. 3. Adjust equipment for proper balance and operations. 4. Determine that vibrations are within acceptable limits. 5. Determine that equipment operates properly under full load conditions. 6. Determine that the equipment is in true alignment. B. Have the Manufacturer's representative present when the equipment is placed in operation. 1. The Representative is to be on site as often as necessary for proper and trouble free operation. 2. Ensure that the proper procedure is employed in start up of systems. C. Provide Equipment Installation Reports for Equipment on the form provided.. 1. Certify that the equipment and related appurtenances have been thoroughly examined and approved for start-up and operation. 2. Include the date when Owner's personnel were instructed in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment in the report. 3.03 STARTING REQUIREMENTS Refer to the individual sections, including Section 15958, Section 16950 and Section 17950 of the specifications for specific start up procedures. 3.04 OPERATOR TRAINING A. Provide instruction and demonstration of the care and operation of the equipment to the Owner's personnel. Instruction is to include classroom and hands-on training. Training shall be provided in advance of the Initial Operation phase described in paragraph 3.05. B. Provide training in adequate detail to ensure that the trainees who complete the program will be qualified and capable of operating and maintaining the equipment, products, and systems provided. C. Operations Training is to include but not be limited to: 1. Orientation to provide an overview of system/subsystem configuration and operation 2. Terminology, nomenclature, and display symbols. 3. Operations theory. 4. Equipment appearance, functions, concepts, and operation. 5. Operating modes, practices and procedures under normal, diminished, and emergency conditions. 6. Start-up and shutdown procedures. 7. Safety Precautions_ 8. On-the-job operating experience for monitoring functions, supervisory, or command activities. Include functions and activities associated with diminished operating modes, failure recognition, and responses to system/subsystem and recovery procedures. 9. Content and use of Operation and Maintenance manuals and related reference materials. D. Provide training for performing on -site routine, preventive, and remedial maintenance of the equipment, product, or system_ Maintenance Training is to include but not be limited to: 1. Orientation to provide an overview of system/subsystem concept, configuration, and operation. Starting Systems 01650-2 FTW 09118 2. Operations theory and interfaces. f 3. Instructions necessary to ensure a basic theoretical and practical understanding of equipment appearance, layout and functions. 4. Safety Precautions. 5. Use of standard and special tools and test equipment. 6. Adjustment, calibration, and use of related test equipment. 7. Detailed preventive maintenance activities. 8. Troubleshooting, diagnostics, and testing. 9. Equipment assembly and disassembly. 10. Repair and parts replacement. 11. Parts ordering practices and storage. 12. Failure and recovery procedures. 13. Cabling and/or interface connectors. 14. Content and use of Operation and Maintenance manuals and related reference materials. 15. Procedures for warranty repairs. 16. Lubrication. 17. Procedures, practices, documentation, and materials required to commence system maintenance. E. Provide a training plan that indicates the schedule and sequence of the training programs. The training plan is to include for each course: 1. Number of hours for the course. 2. Agenda and narrative description, including the defined objectives for each lesson. 3. Draft copy of training handbooks. 4. A descriptive listing of suggested reference publications. 5. Audio-visual equipment required for training. 6. Type and number of tools or test equipment required for each training session. F. Provide and use training aids to complement the instruction and enhance learning. 1. Provide training handbooks for use in both the classroom and the hands-on phases of training for each course. 2. Instructional materials shall include references to the Operation and Maintenance Manuals and identify and explain the use of the manual. 3. Provide a copy of all audio/visual training materials used in the presentations. G. Provide qualified instructors to conduct the training. 1. Instructors must have knowledge of the theory of operation and practical experience with the equipment, product, or system. 2. Instructors must have successfully conducted similar training courses. H. Training may be recorded by the Owner or its consultants for use in future training. Provide legal releases or pay additional fees required to allow training by the manufacturer to be recorded. I. Schedule for training is to be approved by Owner. 1. Schedule training and start-up operations for no more than one (1) piece of equipment or system at a time. 2. Owner may require re -scheduling of training if operations personnel are not available for training on a scheduled date. 3. Provide a minimum of two (2) weeks notice if training must be rescheduled. 4. Training is to be limited to 16 hours per week. J. Schedule and coordinate training for equipment, products, or systems which depend upon other equipment or systems for proper operation so that trainees can be made familiar with the operation and maintenance of the entire operating system. Starting Systems 01650-3 FTW 09118 3.05 INITIAL OPERATION A. Start, test, and place equipment and systems into operation for 30 days to allow the Owner and Engineer to observe the operation and overall performance of the equipment and to determine that controls function as intended. B. Equipment which operates on a limited or part-time basis shall be operated in the presence of the Engineer to demonstrate that controls function as specified. C. Perform acceptance test as specified in individual specification sections. Demonstrate that equipment and systems meet the specified performance criteria. Performance testing of the ozone system shall be as specified in Section 11264F. Performance Testing shall be completed within ninety days of Substantial Completion of the Ozone System. D. Unless specifically stated otherwise in the individual equipment specifications, equipment and systems are not substantially complete until the end of this initial operation period. If an exception to this requirement is specifically noted in an individual equipment specification, the exception shall only apply to that particular piece of equipment and not to the remaining components provided under the project. END OF SECTION Starting Systems 01650-4 FTW09118 —`"Mor 01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 'WORK INCLUDED A. Prepare a complete and detailed Operation and Maintenance Manual for each type and model of equipment or product furnished under this contract. B. Prepare the manuals in the form of an instruction manual for the Owner. The manual is to be suitable for use in providing operation and maintenance instruction as required by Section 01650, STARTING SYSTEMS. C. Provide complete and detailed information specifically for the products or systems provided for this project. Include the information required to operate and maintain the product or system. D. Manuals are to be in addition to any information packed with or attached to the product when delivered. This information is to be taken from the product and provided as an attachment to the manual. 1.02 SUBMITTALS Submit manuals in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS. Attach to each manual a copy of the Operation and Maintenance Manual Review Form as attached. 1.03 GUARANTEES ,"No, Provide copies of the Manufacturer's warranties, guarantees, or service agreements in accordance with Section 01740, WARRANTIES. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Print manuals on heavy, first quality paper. 1. Paper shall be 8-1/2" X 11" paper. a. Reduce drawings and diagrams to 8-1/2" X 11" paper size. b. When reduction is not practical, fold drawings and place each separately in a clear, super heavy weight, top loading polypropylene sheet protector designed for ring binder use. Provide a typed identification label on each sheet protector. 2. Punch paper for standard three-ring binders. B. Place manuals in Wilson Jones 385 Line D-Ring Dubllock Presentation Binders. 1. Binders are to have clear front, back, and spine covers. 2. Sheet lifters are to be provided. In 3. Minimum size is 2" capacity. Maximum size is 3" capacity. r C. Provide tab indexes for each section of the manual. 1. Indexes are to be constructed of heavy-duty paper with a reinforced binding edge and punched with 9/32" holes to fit the binders. 2. Index is to have clear insertable tabs for a typed insert. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 01730-1 FTW 09118 2.02 ELECTRONIC MANUAL FORMAT A. Manual contents to be provided on compact disc (CD). 1. Minimum CD storage capacity is 700MB. 2. CD to have read/write capability. Provide individual electronic files for each manual. 1. Maximum file size is 5MB. If manual is greater than maximum allowable file size, provide individual files for each major section of manual. 2. Acceptable file types for written documents are Adobe Acrobat (.pdf) or Microsoft Word (.doc) formats. Acceptable file types for drawing files are .dwg, Agn. or Awf formats. All files shall be compatible with the latest software version available. 3. Filename shall identify the plant site, plant area, equipment manufacturer, and date equipment placed in service. i.e. WWTP-PC1-Manufacturer-200503.pdf. 4. Each electronic file shall contain a table of contents at the beginning of the file which includes hypertext links or bookmarks to navigate the file contents per section/chapter. 5. Scanned images of written documents are not acceptable. Document must allow character selection. Text within a file shall be transferable to other documents. 6. Drawing files shall have the ability to turn on/off drawing layers within the file. 7. Submit a preliminary version of the electronic format of the manual for review. Upon approval of the preliminary submittal, the Contractor shall provide 3 copies of the electronic manual to the Owner. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUAL ORGANIZATION AND CONTENTS A. Provide a Table of Contents listing each section of the manual for each product or system. 1. Identify each product or system using the nomenclature shown in the Contract Documents. 2. Assign a number and letter to each section in the manual. a. Assign a number to each product or system. The number is to correspond to the Owner's equipment numbering system or other system designated by the Engineer. b. A cross reference is to be provided for the Owner's numbering system and designations for equipment indicated in the Contract Documents. c. The letter assigned will represent the part of the manual, consistent with the manual contents as required by Paragraphs 3.02, 3.03, and 3.04. 3. Provide index tabs for each section in the manual. 4. The designation on each index tab is to correspond to the number and letter assigned in the Table of Contents. B. Include only the information that pertains to the product described. Annotate each sheet to: 1. Clearly identify the specific product or component installed. 2. Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation. 3. Delete reference to inapplicable information. C. Supplement manual information with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, and control and flow diagrams. D. Identify each manual by placing a printed cover sheet in the front cover of the binder and as the first page in the manual. The first page is to be placed in a clear polypropylene sheet protector. The information on first page and the cover page are to include: 1. Name of Owner N"./ Operation and Maintenance Manuals 01730-2 FTWO9118 2. Project Name 3. Volume number 4. The Table of Contents for that volume E. Insert the Table of Contents into the spine of each manual. F. Manuals for several products or systems may be provided in the same binder. 4P 1. Sections for each product or system must be included in the same binder. 2. Sections must be in numerical order from volume to volume. G. Correlate the data into related groups when multiple binders are used. H. Fill binders to only 3/4 of its indicated capacity to allow for addition of materials to each binder by the Owner. 3.02 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS MANUAL CONTENT Manual shall provide the following information: A. A description of the unit and component parts. B. Operating instructions for startup, normal operations, regulation, control, shutdown, emergency conditions, and limiting operating conditions. C. Maintenance instructions including assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions. D. Lubrication schedule and lubrication procedures. Include a cross reference for recommended lubrication products. E. Troubleshooting guide. F. Schedule of routine maintenance requirements. G. Description of sequence of operation by the Control Manufacturer. H. Warnings for detrimental maintenance practices. I. Parts lists including: 1. Part numbers for ordering new parts 2. Assembly illustrations showing an exploded view of the complex parts of the product 3. Predicted life of parts subject to wear 4. List of the Manufacturer's recommended spare parts, current prices with effective date and number of parts recommended for storage 5. Directory of a local source of supply for parts with company name, address, and telephone number 6. Complete nomenclature and list of commercial replacement parts J. Outline, cross section and assembly drawings, engineering data, test data, and performance curves. K. Control schematics and point to point wiring diagrams prepared for field installation, including circuit directories of panel boards and terminal strips. L. Other information as may be required by the individual sections of the specifications. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 01730-3 FTW 09118 3.03 ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS SYSTEMS MANUAL Manual shall provide the following information: A. A description of the systems and component parts. B. Control schematics and point to point wiring diagrams prepared for field installation. Include circuit directories of panel boards and terminal strips and as installed color coded wiring i diagrams. C. Operating procedures, maintenance procedures, and the Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. D. List of the Manufacturer's recommended spare parts, current prices with effective date, and number of parts recommended for storage. E. Other information as may be required by the individual sections of the specifications. 3.04 LIST OF SERVICE ORGANIZATIONS Provide a directory of authorized service organizations with company name, address, telephone number, and the contact person for warranty repair. END OF SECTION Operation and Maintenance Manuals 01730-4 FTW09118 01740 WARRANTIES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section specifies the ozone system equipment and warranty. 1.02 OZONE SYSTEM WARRANTY A. Ozone System and Appurtenances Warranty 1. OSS's responsibility for correcting all non -conformities in the Ozone System and appurtenances supplied, will extend for a period of two and one-half years after completion of the Ozone System Acceptance Testing, (termed "Warranty Start Date"). Warranty of the ozone system shall meet the requirements of Article 1.04 of this Section. OWNER will issue a letter to the Contractor indicating the Warranty Start Date. 2. During the Warranty Period for the ozone system and associated appurtenances, the OSS shall furnish an equipment warranty certificate assuring the Ozone System (including Ozone Generators) will meet the service conditions specified. 3. The OSS warrants satisfactory performance of the Goods to achieve equipment performance (i_e., ozone production, power consumption, and destruction) objectives. 4. If the Goods are non -conforming and not able to conform to the equipment performance objectives, OWNER will notify the OSS in accordance with the procedures identified in General Conditions of the Construction Contract, presented in Appendix A_ OWNER shall make available to the OSS electronic records for OSS review. The OSS shall be given 10 days to develop a plan to remedy the non-conformance. 5. If within 60 days after the notification to the OSS of equipment non-conformance it has become apparent to OWNER that the remedy proposed by the OSS is not acceptable to OWNER, OWNER will provide notice to the OSS that the conditions for breach of contract exist. If within 30 days an acceptable remedy is not obtained, OWNER shall notify the OSS that a breach of contract exists. 6. If the non -conforming condition results in greater power consumption than those projected by OSS in Part B, Proposal to allow the system to produce the design ozone production, , the OSS shall reimburse OWNER for all costs associated with purchasing the additional power needed. This reimbursement requirement shall remain in effect during the correction period, which starts when OSS is notified and ends when OSS has corrected the non -conforming condition(s) and power consumption has returned to the levels projected by OSS in Part B, Proposal, B. Ozone System Warranty 1. The OSS warrants that the ozone generators and other system equipment are fit for the purpose intended as defined in Sections 11264 A and C. 2. The OSS's Ozone Generator Warranty period shall commence with the Warranty Start Date and continue until the end of the warranty period. a. For ozone generators supplied as part of the original equipment installation, the full replacement warranty period shall last for a period of 30 months after the Warranty Start Date. b. For ozone generators provided to address warranty claims after the Warranty Start Date, the full replacement warranty period shall last for a period of 30 months from the date of ozone generator installation. c. OWNER will record and maintain records of the date of installation for the ozone generators. ~- Warranties 01740-1 FTW09118 3. The OSS warrants that the ozone generators will be free from non-conformance in: a. Materials; b. Workmanship; and c. Ability to meet specified performance. After final acceptance of the Ozone System, if the ozone generators are determined to be non -conforming with respect to the parameters of generator performance criteria, the OSS will remedy in accordance with the General Conditions of the Construction Contract, a presented in Appendix A. Limitation of Ozone Generator Warranty: OWNER recognizes that the occurrence of any of the following shall void the ozone generator warranty. a. Physical Damage or Faulty Installation of the ozone generators by others b_ Unauthorized alteration of components manufactured by the OSS c. Improper maintenance of equipment. A description of proper maintenance procedures shall be included in the O&M manual and reviewed in the operator training. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written warranties to OWNER. B. Provide Ozone equipment serial numbers. C. When a special warranty is required to be executed by a supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to OWNER for approval prior to final execution. D. Prior to project completion, compile two copies of each required warranty and bond properly executed by the OSS, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Pre -selection Documents E. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy -bond, commercial quality, durable 3-ring vinyl covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-in by 11-in paper. F. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Pre- selection Documents, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification Section in which specified, and the name of the product or work item. G. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product, including the name of the product, and the name, address and telephone number of the installer, supplier and manufacturer. H. Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title "OZONE SYSTEM WARRANTIES AND BONDS,' the Project title or name, and the name, address and telephone number of the responsible principal. I. When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual. Warranties 01740-2 FTW09118 1.04 WARRANTY REQUIREMENT A. OWNER's Recourse: Written warranties made to OWNER are in addition to implied warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which OWNER can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties - do not relieve the OSS of the warranty on the Ozone System that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers and manufacturers required to countersign special warranties with the OSS. 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. Standard Product Warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to OWNER. B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for OWNER. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION ... Warranties 01740-3 FTW09118 ' SECTION 11264A OZONE SYSTEM PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Specifications for providing the equipment and services associated with the Ozone System by the Ozone System Supplier. 2. Detailed specifications for the nitrogen generation system. 3. Specifications for Contractor installation of equipment provided by the Ozone System Supplier and other Contractor responsibilities associated with the Ozone System. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09905 - Protective Coatings. 2. Section 11264C - Ozone Generators and Power Supplies. 3. Section 11264D - Ozone Diffusion System. 4. Section 11264E - Ozone Destruct System. 5. Section 11264F - Ozone System Testing. 6. Section 15111 - Ball Valves. 7. Section 15112 - Butterfly Valves. 8. Section 15114 - Check Valves. r 9. Section 15115 - Gate, Globe, and Angle Valves. 10. Section 15117 - Specialty Valves. 11. Section 15118 - Pressure Reducing and Pressure Relief Valves. 12. Section 17050 - Process Control and Instrumentation General Requirements. 13. Section 17110 - Ozone System Control Strategies. 14. Section 17505 - Analytical Measurement - Ozone Gas Concentration Monitors. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Compressed Gas Association (CGA): 1. G-4.1 - Cleaning Equipment for Oxygen Service. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI/IEEE 519-1981- Harmonic Control and Reactive Compensation of Static Power Converters. C. Guide for National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health. D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). E. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels, Division 1. 14009*01 May 09 11264A-1 8205A10 pwJ/Carollo/Documents/Cllent/TXiFort Worth/8205AlC/Specifications/Pre-Selec1111264A (FS-Clean) 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Ozone System: Major equipment and services furnished by the Ozone System Supplier including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Ozone Generators and Power Supplies..- 2. Ozone Diffuser Assemblies. 3. Demisters. 4. Ozone Destruct Systems. 5. Pressure/vacuum Relief Valves. 6. Nitrogen Generation System. 7. Ozone Generation Building PLC Panel. 8. North and South Ozone Contactors and Destruct Units Remote 1/0 Panels. 9. Interconnecting piping, valving, and safety relief devices as specified and shown on the Drawings for the above major equipment items. 10. Instrumentation as specified in Specification Division 17 for the above major equipment items. 11. Programming of the PLC equipment within the Ozone System control panels. 12. Spare Parts for the above equipment items. 13. Other services as specified herein including but not limited to testing, installation responsibilities, training, O&M manuals and record drawings. B. Ozone System Supplier (OSS): Manufacturer of ozone generators and power supplies to supply the Ozone System, defined herein, based on the Drawings, Specifications and the specific requirements of the Manufacturer's equipment. C. Ozone Generator Design Production Capacity (DPC): Design ozone production capacity of one generator and its associated power supply unit at a specific cooling water temperature and a specific ozone product gas concentration. D. Average Rate of Energy Consumption (AVE-kW): The average value of the rate of energy consumption over a specific period of operation, measured in kilowatts (kW). E. Ozone Generator Specific Energy Consumption (SEC): The amount of energy consumed per pound of ozone produced (kWh/pound) during operation under a specific set of operating conditions. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General Design Criteria: 1. Design the Ozone System components to operate continuously as specified throughout the full range of ambient environmental conditions as specified. B. Power Supply to the Ozone Generator Power Supply Units: 480-volt, 3-phase, 60 hertz. C. Gaseous Oxygen Production: 1. Gaseous oxygen with a maximum dew point of minus 80 degrees Fahrenheit, produced by vaporization of liquid oxygen (LOX), shall serve as the only oxygen feed gas to the Ozone System. D. Ozone System Operation: 1. The ozone product gas concentration of the Ozone System shall range between 6 to 12 percent, by weight. May 09 11264A-2 8205A10 pjr_vd10D=.ent9/CfiKWT)VFat WarhW05A105pe6/ica5DrdPM-Se"11264A (FS-Clean) r..i E. Cooling Water System: 1. Provide ozone generator and power supply cooling by a once -through stream of finished plant water or a closed loop cooling system, as specified in Section 11264C and indicated on the Drawings. 2. Design each ozone generator and power supply for a maximum cooling water temperature of 90 degrees Fahrenheit without a reduction in oxygen feed gas flow. F. Harmonic Mitigation Systems: 1. Provide harmonic mitigation evaluations and equipment with each ozone generator power supply system, as required, to meet the requirements of Section 11264C. 2. Provide written certification, signed by a representative of the Ozone System Supplier, that the Ozone System is in conformance with the harmonic standards specified. 1.05 OZONE GENERATOR PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Ozone Generator Design Production Capacity: 1. As specified in Section 11264C. B. Ozone System Design Production Capacity: 1. The Ozone System Design Production Capacity shall be 6,500 lb/day. C. Energy Consumption Efficiency Criteria: 1. Each ozone generator, power supply, nitrogen generation system and closed loop cooling pump required to produce ozone, shall have an average Specific Energy Consumption (SECAVG) of no more than the value bid in Part B in units of kWh/pound of ozone at a concentration of 8% by weight under the operating conditions given for the Energy Consumption Efficiency Test in Section 11264F. 2. If the actual ozone generator Specific Energy Consumption, SECACT, determined during the energy consumption efficiency performance testing defined in Section 11264F, is greater than SECAVG bid, the Ozone System Supplier shall pay the OWNER the penalties defined by the following equation: a. $penalty = $0.085 x 2300 x 365 x 12.46 x (SECACT - SECAVG) _ $889,100 x (SEC ACT - SECAVG). b. Where: 1) 0,085 = average cost of electrical power ($/kWh). 2) 2300 = average daily ozone production (lb/day). 3) 365 = days per year. 4) 12.46 = Equal Series Present Worth (20 year period at 5 percent interest). 3. This amount corresponds to the additional cost that the OWNER shall bear over a 20-year operating life of the plant. If SECACT is less than or equal to SECAVG, the penalty is $0. D. Design Production Capacity Criteria: 1. The maximum allowable Specific Energy Consumption (SECMAX) under the Design Production Capacity testing operating conditions defined in Section 11264F shall be 4.5 KWh/pound. 'qMPF1 May 09 11264A-3 8205A10 pw:/ICarollo/Documents/Client/TX/FortWorth/8205A10/Specificafions/Pre-Select/11264A (FS-Clean) The Actual Production Capacity (APC) measured under the Design Product ,. Capacity performance test in Section 11264F, shall be greater than or equal to the Ozone Generator Design Production Capacity. If either the SECACT measured during the Design Production Capacity test exceeds the SECMAx or the APC is less than the Ozone Generator Design Production Capacity for an ozone generator, power supply, nitrogen generation system, and closed loop cooling water pumps, the Ozone System Supplier shall modify that equipment and perform the Design Production Capacity Test until the criteria are met. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals to the ENGINEER as specified and in accordance with the individual equipment specifications, and Section 01300. B. Documentation, in writing to the ENGINEER, that the proposed equipment and the required clearances for the proposed equipment will be sufficiently accommodated by the appropriate means indicated on the Drawings. C. Operations and Maintenance Manuals as specified in Section 01730. D. Documentation to describe any deviations from the design indicated on the Drawings and in the Specifications. E. Submittal information as specified in Section 17050 for the instrumentation and controls portion of the ozone system work. F. Structural design calculations for the air receiver anchoring system. All structural calculations shall be signed and stamped by a Civil or Structural Engineer. 1.07 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES A. Warranties and Guarantees: Unless noted otherwise, as specified in Division 0. B. The Ozone System Supplier shall warrant the dielectrics and fuses of the ozone generators against excessive failure or breakage for a period of five (5) years after substantial completion. Excessive dielectric and fuse failure or breakage shall be defined as more than 1 percent failure or breakage in any ozone generator in any year of the five-year warranty period. The Ozone System Supplier shall furnish and install any failed or broken dielectrics and fuses over and above the warranty failure rates. New dielectrics and fuses required under this paragraph shall be provided and installed by the Ozone System Supplier within 21 calendar days of notification by the OWNER. The Ozone System Supplier shall furnish all gaskets, seals, nuts, bolts, and other materials as required to open and reseal the generators. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Ambient Environmental Conditions: 1. Design interior components to operate throughout the entire range of ambient conditions specified below: a. Maximum temperature: 110 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Maximum relative humidity: 95 percent. c. Minimum temperature: 40 degrees Fahrenheit. May 09 11264A-4 8205A10 p*JlcardWDocument&VenVWort Wo-W8205A10/Speckabm&9m-R6edtt264A (FS-Oean) 2. Design exterior components to withstand exposure to rain, direct sunlight, sleet, snow and other extreme environmental conditions and the ambient conditions specified below: a. Maximum temperature: 120 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Maximum relative humidity: 100 percent. c. Minimum temperature: 0 degrees Fahrenheit. d. Minimum relative humidity: 5 percent. B. Project Elevations: Design the systems to operate through the entire range of operation at an elevation of 550 feet above mean sea level. C. Cooling Water Quality: Design the Ozone System to be compatible with the following range of cooling water quality (i.e., potable water as produced from the Water Treatment Plant): 1. Turbidity, NTU 0.05 - 0.30 2. pH 7.8 - 9.5 3. Alkalinity, mg/L as CaCO3 110-125 4. Hardness, mg/L as CaCO3 130-160 5. Chloride Ion Concentration, mg/L Cl- 30-40 D. Cooling Water Temperature: 1. Design the system in accordance with a maximum cooling water temperature of 90 degrees Fahrenheit. 2. Cooling water temperature will range from 40 degrees Fahrenheit to 90 degrees Fahrenheit. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 OZONE SYSTEM A. Ozone System Supplier: 1. Ozonia North America Elmwood Park, NJ 2. Fuji Electric Saddlebrook, NJ. B. Materials: 1. Unless otherwise specified herein, all Ozone System equipment and appurtenances downstream of the vaporizers through the particulate filters, pressure reducers, the generators, contacting system and off -gas destruct units shall be compatible for continuous contact with up to 12 percent by weight concentration ozone and 98 - 99 percent pure oxygen. Compatible non- metallic materials for gaskets and seals include the appropriate grades of Viton or Teflon. Metallic components shall be AISI Type 316L stainless steel (ozone and gaseous oxygen) or brazed copper (gaseous oxygen), as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Ozone System equipment and appurtenances from the Ozone Contactor off - gas vent through the exhaust of the ozone destruct systems shall be compatible for continuous contact with ozone in saturated air and high concentrations of oxygen. Compatible non-metallic materials for gaskets and seals include the appropriate grades of Viton or Teflon. Metallic components shall be AISI Type 316L stainless steel. May 09 11264A-5 8205A10 pw://Carollo/DocumenWClienUTX/Fort Worth/8205A70/Specifications/Pre-SelecU11264A (FS-Clean) 3. All equipment and materials that may contact oxygen or ozone shall be cleaned and certified in accordance with Compressed Gas Association Standard G-4.1, Cleaning Equipment for Oxygen Service. Cleaned equipment and materials shall be protected from environmental exposure. The Contractor shall be responsible for all recleaning required due to: a. Accidental exposure of previously cleaned equipment and materials. b. Changes or modifications to the piping and equipment in order to bring the system into compliance with the specifications. 2.02 NITROGEN GENERATION SYSTEM A. Provide one nitrogen generation system as indicated on the Drawings. B. Nitrogen Generation System shall consist of: 1. Two rotary -scroll air compressors each with inlet air filter. 2. Air receiver. 3. Desiccant dryer with coalescing inlet filter and particulate outlet filter. 4. Dew point analyzer. 5. Flow meter and integral flow control valve. 6. Local control panel. C. Nitrogen Generation System shall be designed for the following design criteria: 1. A minimum dried, design airflow rate of 18 scfm based on an ambient inlet air temperature of 110 degrees Fahrenheit. Reduced values of the minimum, dried design air flow rate will be considered by the ENGINEER upon submittal and approval of data indicating ozone generator performance will be acceptable with the reduced design air flow rate. 2. A minimum dried air pressure of 90 psig. 3. A maximum dried air dew point of minus 100 degrees Fahrenheit at 90 psig. D. Rotary -scroll Air Compressors: 1. Nitrogen Generation System shall have two rotary -scroll air compressors. Each rotary -scroll air compressor shall be able to produce the design Nitrogen Generation System airflow rate plus the purge flow required by one desiccant dryer. 2. Compressors shall be mounted on a common baseplate with vibration isolation and designed for indoor floor mounting. 3. Compressors shall be oil -free design. 4. Compressors shall each be provided with an air-cooled aftercooler. 5. Compressors shall have an integral inlet air filter with a paper cartridge element with an absolute rating of 1.0 micron. 6. Compressors shall be housed in a sound reducing enclosure so that the maximum noise at 1 meter is less than 70 dBA. 7. Maximum motor size shall be 10 hp. Power supply shall be 480-volt, 3-phase. Each compressor shall be provided with a motor starter and the pair of compressors will be provided with an alternator. The motor starters and ` alternator shall be mounted in the local control panel provided by the Ozone System Supplier. A control panel shall be provided by the compressor supplier that allows one 480-volt feeder to supply both compressors. An interlock shall be provided that will not allow both compressors to be operational at one time. 8. Compressors shall be provided with instrumentation devices as indicated on the Drawings. May 09 11264A-6 8205A10 pwJ/Carollo/DocumenUClienVTX/Fort Worth/8205At01Specificabons/Pre-SelecUll264A (FS-Clean) ...i 9. 4M Compressors shall be Atlas-Copco SF Series, or equal. E. Air Receiver: 1. Nitrogen Generation System shall have one air receiver. 2. Air receiver shall be designed to ASME pressure vessel code and requirements and shall be ASME code stamped. 3. Air receiver shall be fabricated from A-36 carbon steel and shall be painted with a high -solids epoxy system in accordance with the requirements of Section 09905. 4. Air receiver shall have a volume of 240 gallons if the design Nitrogen Generation System airflow rate is 8.0 scfm or greater. Air receiver shall have a volume of 120 gallons if the design Nitrogen Generation System airflow rate is less than 8.0 scfm. 5. Air receiver shall have a maximum allowable operating pressure of 150 psig. 6. Air receiver shall be provided with a code stamped pressure -relief valve rated for the maximum output of one air compressor. Initial pressure setting shall be 140 psig. 7. Air receiver shall have an automatic liquid drain trap to drain condensation in the receiver. 8. Air receiver shall be provided with valves and instrumentation devices as indicated on the Drawings. 9. The air receiver supplier shall design the anchoring system for the air receiver. The anchorage shall be designed for the seismic and wind design criteria in Sections 01612 and 01614, respectively. F. Desiccant Dryers: 1. Nitrogen Generation System shall have two desiccant dryers. Each desiccant dryer shall be sized to produce the design Nitrogen Generation System design airflow rate. 2. Desiccant dryers shall be heatless, reactivated type. 3. Desiccant dryers shall be designed to ASME pressure vessel code and requirements and shall be ASME code stamped. 4. Desiccant dryers shall have a maximum allowable operating pressure of 150 psig or greater. 5. Desiccant dryers shall be designed to provide a dew point of minus 100 degrees Fahrenheit. 6. Desiccant dryers shall be floor -mounted or wall -mounted design suitable for indoor locations. 7. Desiccant dryers shall be supplied with a coalescing inlet filter and a 1.0 micron -absolute particulate outlet filter. 8. Desiccant dryers shall be provided with a purge gas muffler. 9. Power supply shall be 120-volt, single phase. 10. Provide a dry contact normally open dryer running output for remote monitoring. 11. Desiccant dryers shall be Hankison DHW Series or equal. G. Dew point Analyzer: 1. Nitrogen Generation System shall have one dew point analyzer. 2. Provide dew point analyzer in accordance with Section 17504. H. Flow Meter with Integral Flow Control Valve: `WO May 09 11264A-7 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Cllent/TX/For Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Selectl11264A (FSClean) 1. Nitrogen Generation System shall have one flow meter with integral flow control valve. 2. Flow meter shall be thermal mass type. 3. All wetted parts shall be stainless steel with Viton gaskets and seals. 4. Flow meter with integral flow control valve shall be Brooks Mfi Series or equal. s PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLC PROGRAMMING A. The Ozone System Supplier shall provide PLC programming for the following PLCs as shown on the Drawings and as described in Section 17110. 1. PLCs provided with the ozone generator power supplies. 2. PLC located in the main ozone PLC enclosure 3. PLCs provided with the ozone destruct units. 3.02 SOFTWARE TESTING A. The Ozone System Supplier shall prepare software and hardware to test the ozone system control software. The Ozone System Supplier shall demonstrate to the ENGINEER that the ozone system control software can meet the requirements as set out in these specifications. Once the ozone control system software has been demonstrated in a factory test and deemed to be acceptable by the ENGINEER, the Ozone System Supplier shall commence loading of the software into the ozone system PLCs on site. 3.03 FACTORY TESTING V A. All equipment specified as ASME rated shall be subjected to hydrostatic tests of both gas and water sides (when applicable) prior to shipment. Unless otherwise noted, the shop test pressure shall be 1.5 times the design operating pressure and held for not less than one hour. Any leaks detected shall be repaired and the unit retested until no leaks are reported. Certification of the successful factory testing shall be provided to the ENGINEER prior to installation of the equipment. 3.04 OZONE SYSTEM PROVISION RESPONSIBILITY A. All communication shall be through the CONTRACTOR after general contract execution. B. Ozone System Supplier: Furnish the following equipment: 1. Nitrogen generation system as specified in Section 11264A. 2. Skid -mounted ozone generators, including interconnecting piping on the skid, valving, instrumentation, pressure relief valves, and power supplies as specified in Section 11264C. 3. Ozone diffuser assemblies as specified in Section 11264D. 4. Ozone destruct systems, including pressure/vacuum relief valves and demisters, as specified in Section 11264E. 5. Ozone Generation Building PLC Panel, as indicated on the Drawings. 6. North and South Ozone Contactors and Destruct Units Remote 1/0 Panels, as indicated on the Drawings. May 09 11264A-8 8205A10 pw://CarollotDocuments/ClienUTX/Fort WoHhl8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecU11264A (FS-Clean) 7. Programming of the PLCs in control panels provided by the Ozone System # Supplier. These PLCs include control logic for remote 1/0 enclosures as shown on the Drawings. The programming shall implement the control strategies in Section 17110. 8. High Voltage cable between ozone generators and power supply units as specified in Section 11264C. 9. Miscellaneous process and control equipment specifically required for the Ozone System Supplier equipment. C. CONTRACTOR: Provide all equipment not supplied by the Ozone System Supplier for a complete and operable system, to include but not limited to the following: 1. Instrumentation equipment, including valves, pressure regulating and relief valves, analyzers, switches, gauges and transmitters. 2. Interconnecting piping and flanging for gaseous oxygen, ozone, off -gas and cooling water. 3. All power and signal wiring, with the exception of the high -voltage cable between the ozone generators and power supplies. 4. Power distribution equipment. 5. Conduit or cable tray to connect the high -voltage cable between the ozone generators and power supplies 6. All valves as specified in Sections 15111, 15112, 15114, 15115, 15117 and 15118 except those specifically in the nitrogen generation system, Ozone Generator skids, or the ozone destruct unit skids. 3.05 OZONE SYSTEM INSTALLATION RESPONSIBILITY A. The CONTRACTOR has overall responsibility. All communications shall be through the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall decide upon installation responsibility. The following is a suggested approach. B. Ozone System Supplier: 1. Connect High Voltage cable between ozone generators and power supplies. 2. Provide installation oversight services to ensure that the equipment is installed in accordance with the Specifications and the specific requirements of the Ozone System Supplier. 3. Provide service by qualified personnel knowledgeable in the equipment, systems and processes of the Ozone System. Additionally, the personnel shall have had previous experience providing similar services on projects of similar size and complexity. The ENGINEER reserves the right to request resumes for all technical support personnel and to reject any personnel, who in its judgment, are not qualified to or capable of providing the required services. 4. Include cost of all wages, taxes, benefits, insurance, travel and living expenses associated with the installation services in the Bid Price. C. CONTRACTOR: Install all equipment, piping, and power and signal connections of the Ozone System, except as specified herein, in accordance with the Contract Documents and the requirements of the Ozone System Supplier. 3.06 OZONE SYSTEM START-UP AND TESTING A. Perform all system start-up and testing in accordance with Section 01650. B. Ozone System Supplier: May 09 11264A-9 8205A10 pwJ/CardldD=meda/CWn"cd WorWM5AIO/SpearicationslPre SelwVll264A (FS-Clean) 1. Provide qualified personnel to start-up and operate the Ozone System prior to Substantial Completion of the Ozone System. 2. Provide qualified personnel to conduct the Ozone System performance tests as specified in Section 11264F. 3. Include cost of all wages, taxes, benefits, insurance, travel and living expenses associated with the Ozone System start-up and testing services in the Bid Price. y' C. CONTRACTOR: Provide qualified personnel to correct installation deficiencies defined by the Ozone System Supplier Representative during start-up and testing. Corrections shall be made in a timely fashion. 3.07 OPERATION TRAINING SERVICES A. All training shall be the responsibility of the Ozone System Supplier. B. The Ozone System Supplier shall provide classroom and field training to the OWNER's supervisory, operation and maintenance personnel covering the operation and maintenance of the Ozone System. General requirements of the training follow: 1. Minimum 40 hours of classroom training. 2. Minimum 40 hours of field instruction. C. A minimum of 40 hours of the training shall be completed prior to the Substantial Completion of the project. The scope of the initial training shall include sufficient information for the operational personnel such that they can successfully operate the Ozone System without the supervision of the Ozone System Supplier. Provide the balance of the training within 90 days of the Substantial Completion of the �- project. D. A minimum of 30 hours of the total training time shall be suited for the maintenance staff. E. A minimum of 10 hours of the total training shall cover safety issues related to the Ozone System. F. Include cost of all wages, taxes, benefits, insurance, travel and living expenses associated with the training services in the Bid Price. G. At the direction of the OWNER, classes may be repeated so that all staff may attend the training. Repeated class time counts toward the minimum total of 80 hours. H. Provide to the OWNER, in writing, at least 90 days before completion of Substantial Completion of the project and at least 21 days before the first training session, a training schedule, course outline and curriculum for review and acceptance by the OWNER. 3.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Ozone System Supplier shall supply the minimum number of copies of the Ozone System Operation and Maintenance Manual in accordance with Section 01730. Additionally, provide an electronic copy of all text in Microsoft Word format acceptable to the OWNER. May 09 11264A-10 8205A10 pwJ/Caro1oMocuments1C1ienVr0ort WathW05A101SpedficatiarslPreSdKV11264A (FS-Clean) B. Include the operation and maintenance information written by the Ozone System Supplier as well as a compilation of the equipment manuals for each piece of equipment provided as an element of the Ozone System. C. Present the Manual entirely in the English language. D. At the minimum, include the following Ozone System information in the Manual: 1. Description of the entire system. 2. Drawing list and functional Design Specification. 3. Start-up procedures. 4. Shutdown procedures under normal and emergency conditions. 5. Standard operating procedures, including a sample daily operating log and laboratory procedures. 6. System control, including alarms, process control and system efficiency and optimization considerations. 7. Troubleshooting. 8. Maintenance, corrective and preventive. 9. Glossary of terms. 10. Vendor contact list. 11. Recommended spare parts inventory. 12. Valve schedule for valves one inch in size and above. 13. Safety. 14. Summary of Ozone System equipment suppliers with addresses and phone numbers. 15. Emergency phone numbers, including that of the Ozone System Supplier representatives. I -Ed" E. Include sections in the Manual to cover the following information for each component of the Ozone System: 1. Description of the component. 2. Disassembly and reassembly instructions. 3. Troubleshooting. 4. Maintenance, preventive and corrective. 5. Parts list including recommended spare parts. 6. Piping and instrumentation diagrams, including logic summary if applicable. 7. Electrical wiring schematic. 8. Accessory literature. 9. Safety. F. Include manufacturer equipment manuals for each component of the Ozone System, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Nitrogen generation system. 2. Ozone generators and power supply units. 3. Gaseous oxygen and ozone flowmeters. 4. Ozone diffusion equipment. 5. Ozone destruct equipment. 6. Ozone process analyzers. 3.09 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide record drawing packages for the system prepared by the Ozone System Supplier as defined in the following: May 09 11264A-11 8205A10 pwJ/CardWDocumen%Chen0 X1Fort WorthVO5A1015peckAonstPreSelect(11264A (FS-Qean) 1. Five sets of complete record drawings of the Ozone System (P&IDs, layouts, and piping drawings). 2. One set of reproducible record drawings of the Ozone System. 3. Provide all drawings in 22-inch by 34-inch format. 4. Provide one complete set of Drawings in a digital format compatible with AutoCAD. s B. Provide the record drawings to the ENGINEER within 60 days of substantial completion. C. The Ozone System Supplier under the direction of the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for modifying the record drawings to reflect any changes made during the first year after substantial completion of the Ozone System installation. D. Comply with the requirements of Section 01300. END OF SECTION **M/ NVA/ May 09 11264A-12 8205A10 pwJ/CaroliolDocuments/Client/TX/Fort Worth/8205A101Specifica6ons/Pre-SelecU11264A (FS-Clean) SECTION 11264C OZONE GENERATORS AND POWER SUPPLIES = PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Equipment specifications for the ozone generators and power supplies. The generators and power supplies shall be supplied as part of the Ozone System by the Ozone System Supplier as specified in Section 11264A. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 11264A - Ozone System. 2. Section 113120 - ANSI Horizontal End Suction Pumps. 3. Section 15755 - Plate and Frame Heat Exchangers. 4. Section 17110 - Ozone System Control Strategies. 5. Section 17505 - Analytical Measurement - Ozone Gas Concentration Monitors. 6. Section 17710 - Control Systems - Panels, Enclosures and Panel Components. 7. Section 17712 - Control Systems - Uninterruptible Power Supplies 10 KVA and Below. 8. Section 17720 - Control Systems - Programmable Logic Controllers Hardware. 9. Section 17761 - Control Systems - PLC Programming Software. 10. Section 17765 - Control Systems - Local Operator Interface Software. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME): 1. B 16.5 - Steel Pipe Flanges, Flanged Valves and Fittings. B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section Vill, Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels, Division 1. C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A 240 - Standard Specification for Heat -Resisting Chromium and Chromium - Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels. D. Compressed Gas Association (CGA): 1. Standard G-4.1 Cleaning Equipment for Oxygen Service. E. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. Standard 519: Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems. F. National Electrical Code (NEC): 1. Section 450-23. G. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA). May 09 11264C-1 8205A10 pwJ/Camllo/Documents/ClienUfX/Fort Worth/8205A70/Specifications/Pre-Select/11264C (FS-Clean) 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. General: Corona discharge, medium frequency, water cooled, horizontal tube ozone generators. Each ozone generator shall be skid -mounted with all the components included on the skid and provided by the Ozone System Supplier as indicated on the Drawings. Each generator shall be provided with an individual power supply. The generators and power supplies shall be identical_ 4 B. The ozone generator skids and the power supplies shall be mounted on separate skids as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor will be responsible for the wiring and conduit between the ozone generator skids and the power supplies. The Ozone System Supplier shall provide a junction box on each ozone generator skid. The junction boxes shall be provided terminal strips for all the signals generated from the devices on the skid. The Ozone System Supplier shall provide the wire and conduit between the devices and the junction boxes. C. Ozone Production Requirements: Design each generator and power supply system in accordance with the following design condition performance requirements. 1. Ozone Generator Design Production Capacity: 3250 lb/day under the following conditions: a. Ozone Product Gas Concentration Range: 8 percent, by weight. b. Design temperature of cooling water supplied to the generator: 70 degrees Fahrenheit. c. Feed Gas Composition Range: 97 to 99 percent oxygen and 0.2 to 3 percent nitrogen, as required by the Ozone System Supplier. d. Maximum Oxygen Feed Gas Dew Point: Minus 80 degrees Fahrenheit. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A_ Each generator shall be capable of continuous operation at any point from 15 to 100 percent of its maximum ozone production capacity. The generators shall conform with the following performance criteria throughout the entire range of operation: 1. Maximum Product Gas Temperature: 120 degrees Fahrenheit as measured at the generator ozone outlet pipe with the cooling water temperature as specified. 2. Maximum Total Harmonic Distortion: 5 percent, as defined by IEEE Standard 519. B. Cooling Requirements: Each generator and its associated power supply shall be cooled by water flow supplied as indicated on the Drawings. No heat shall be rejected to the ambient air. The water flow through each generator shall be constant regardless of generator operating level. 1. Maximum cooling water flow to each generator shall be 575 gallons per minute. 2. Maximum temperature differential of the cooling water across each ozone generator's cooling circuit shall be 10 degrees Fahrenheit over the entire range of generator operation. 3. Maximum cooling water pressure drop across each generator from flange to flange shall not exceed 10 pounds per square inch. C. Control System Requirements: Ozone production shall be controlled by regulating the oxygen feed gas and the generator power input from the power supply. The May 09 11264C-2 8205A10 pwJ/CaroMM)ociments/CrienVrXJFort WorVJ8 M10/SpecficabomPre-Seledl12UG (FS-Clean) Ozone System Supplier shall provide programming of the control system for the Ozone System as specified in Sections 11264A and 17110. D. Harmonic Mitigation System Criteria: 1. Voltage distortion for each system shall comply with the IEEE Standard 519 (latest revision) total harmonic distortion and notching criteria for General Systems. 2. Current distortion limits shall comply with the individual harmonic order limits indicated in IEEE 519, Table 10.3. 3. Design all harmonic mitigation systems in accordance with IEEE 519 standards. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Ozone generator manufacturer data to show conformance with generator and power supply equipment specifications, in accordance with Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following information: 1. Detailed drawings to include equipment dimensions. 2. Anchor bolt layout requirements. 3. Piping connection details. 4. Control panel and annunciator layouts. 5. Instrumentation diagrams to document all signals sent and received by the generators and power supplies. C. Calculations: Provide calculations to show that pressure relief devices that protect ..i ASME Code vessels are designed in accordance with ASME Code Standards. Include capacity and set point of each pressure relief valve. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Comply with Section 01730. 2. Include detailed maintenance procedures and projected schedules. 3. Ten copies of standard manufacturer operation and maintenance manual. 4. Provide one copy of all text in Microsoft Word format. E. Certification to document successful completion of all equipment testing as specified herein. F. Electrical Harmonic Analysis: Submit detailed electrical calculations demonstrating compliance with the harmonic requirement specified herein. 1. For the purposes of the harmonic analysis, assume all units are operating, excluding any standby units not required to achieve Ozone System Design Production Capacity. 2. Voltage distortion for each condition shall comply with the IEEE Standard 519 (latest revision) total harmonic distortion and notching criteria for General Systems. Current distortion limits shall comply with the individual harmonic order limits indicated in IEEE 519, Table 10.3. Full load current shall be based on the OSS-submitted equipment characteristics. System short circuit at the point of common coupling shall be assumed to be 37,500 amperes (the full short circuit capacity of a 2,000 kVa 5.750/OZ transformer compensated for cable and utility source impedance). 3. Location of Point of Common Coupling: 480V bus of the supply switchboard. May 09 11264C-3 8205A10 pwJ/Camllo/Documents/ClienUTX/Fort Worth/8205A10ISpecificationslPre-SelecUl l264C (FS-Clean) The Harmonic Analysis Shall Include: a. All input data and assumptions. Provide an impedance diagram illustrating the simulated system. b. Explanation of methods used to perform the study. c. Explanation of study results with specific recommendations on harmonic mitigation measures that will be implemented to achieve the specified limits. d. All calculations and computer printouts used to arrive at the conclusions and recommendations. e. Individual PSU harmonic content and the combined total drives harmonic content reflected in the system supply voltage as a percent of the 60 hertz fundamental under actual load conditions from no-load to full load in 10 percent load increments. f. A detailed description of the field tests, procedures, and supporting calculations that will be required to verify that the installed systems comply with the THD limits. Include recommended test equipment and test conditions. g. Analysis shall be stamped and signed by a registered Professional Electrical Engineer. G. Submittal information as specified in Section 17050 for the instrumentation and controls portion of the ozone generators and power supplies work. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide a warranty against excessive dielectric breakage as specified in Section 11264A. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Factory Cleaning: All items to be wetted with oxygen or ozone shall be cleaned in accordance with CGA Standards prior to shipping. B. Packing, Delivery and Unpacking: Deliver all components in factory packaging and protect all components from environmental exposure before installation. C. Site Acceptance: All items shall be unpacked under the supervision of a factory representative. 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Spare Parts: 1. Dielectrics, including tube, fuse, electrode, and other accessories (as required) - five percent of total dielectric count for all ozone generators_ 2. Glass view ports and associated gaskets - two of each type and design for each generator provided. 3. Bolts, nuts, and washers - one set of each type and size for each generator provided. 4. Power supply relays and timers - one of each type and scale. 5. Power supply fuses and power factor capacitors - five of each type and scale. 6. Plug-in circuit boards - one of each type. 7. Control transformers - one of each type. 8. Amplifiers - one of each type. May 09 11264C-4 8205A10 pwJ/Caro1oVowrmftMnt/TX/Fat WorMOSA1o/SpedcatondPre-SelecIM1264C (FS-Clean) 9. Generator bulkhead gaskets - one set for each ozone generator provided. 10. PSU cabinet cooling water pump. 11. Closed loop cooling water pump (if required) - one of each type. B. Accessories: 1. Provide wheeled racks specifically designed to vertically hold dielectrics from the ozone generators. Sufficient racks shall be provided for each plant to hold 100 percent of the dielectrics from one generator. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Ozone Generators and Power Supplies: Ozone System Supplier as specified in Section 11264A. B_ Pressure Relief Valves: 1. Anderson Greenwood and Company. 2. Kunkle. 3. Engineer Approved Equal. 2.02 OZONE GENERATORS A. Generator Characteristics: Horizontal tubular corona discharge cells mounted inside a pressurized casing. 1. Design and stamp the horizontal, cylindrical generator vessels in accordance with ASME standards for an minimum operating pressure of 10 pounds per square inch above design operating pressure. 2. All metallic components of each generator potentially in contact with gaseous oxygen or ozonated feed gas shall be constructed with ASTM A240 Type 316L stainless steel. With the exception of the dielectrics, all non-metallic components in contact with oxygen gas or ozone shall be, glass, hypalon or teflon or other suitable material acceptable to the ENGINEER. 3. Each generator shall have compound hinges on both ends to allow the end covers to be swung open to allow access to dielectrics. 4. Provide skid -mounted instrumentation including connections and a high ozone gas concentration analyzer as specified in Section 17505 and as shown on the Drawings. Maximum tubing size between the product gas line and the high ozone gas concentration analyzer shall be 1/8-inch stainless steel. 5. Maximum ozone generator skid dimensions shall be as follows: a. Ozonia: 1) Length: 13 feet. 2) Width: 7.5 feet. b. Fuji: 1) Length: 12 feet. 2) Width: 13 feet. 6. The maximum clearance required at each end of the generator to allow complete removal of the dielectrics shall be less than or equal to the cylinder diameter. 7. The ozone generators shall be mounted on individual skids with all of the gas and cooling water connections on a common side. The centerline of the gas and cooling water connections shall be no more than 24 inches above the May 09 11264C-5 8205A10 p`rJlCarollolDo umenlsC mtrrXJFort WoMM05A10ISpedfratlonslPre-Select/11264C (Fs -Clean) 8. The ozone cylinder shell shall be constructed of double butt welded seams in accordance with ASME standard for unfired pressure vessels. 9. Outer Shell Design Corrosion Allowance: 1/8 inch (minimum). 10. The design cooling water pressure shall be at least 2 pounds per square inch less in pressure than the design ozone/oxygen gas pressure. B. Dielectrics: Dielectrics shall not be longer than 50 percent of the cylinder length and shall be removable as individual pieces from the appropriate end of the generator. Dielectrics shall be of stainless steel, glass or ceramic material. C. Service Connections: All gaseous oxygen, ozonated feed gas, and cooling water inlet and outlet connections shall be 150-pound class stainless steel flanges, in accordance with ANSI/ASME B16.5. Provide cooling water, gaseous oxygen, and ozonated feed gas service connections, as indicated on the Drawings. D. Pressure Relief Valves: Provide pressure relief valves and discharge piping for the gas and water systems, as indicated on the Drawings. Provide the pressure relief valves in accordance with the ASME Code and the following criteria, to prevent over -pressurization of the system: 1. Gas System Pressure Relief Valves: a. Design Relief Flow: 520 standard cubic feet per minute minimum or the failed open gas flow value for the Ozone System Supplier -provided gaseous oxygen pressure reducing valve, whichever is higher. b. Normal Operating Pressure: 24 pounds per square inch gauge. c. Relief Pressure: In accordance with the design of the generator housing. d. Maximum Overpressure: 10 percent. '- 2. Cooling water system pressure relief valves: a. Design Relief Flow: 300 gallons per minute. b. Normal Operating Pressure: 10 to 20 pounds per square inch gauge. c. Relief Pressure: In accordance with the design of the generator housing and a failed open cooling water pressure regulating valve. d. Maximum Overpressure: 10 percent. E. Closed Loop Cooling System: Ozone System Supplier shall provide a closed loop cooling system if it is required or recommended for the supplied ozone generator equipment. The closed -loop cooling system for each generator shall consist of a plate and frame heat exchanger as specified in Section 15755, an ANSI horizontal, end suction pump as specified in Section 113120 and piping, fittings, instruction and electrical equipment as shown on the Drawings. The closed loop cooling system shall start and stop in conjunction with the operation of its dedicated ozone generator. The closed loop cooling system shall be designed so that the design water pressure inside the ozone generator shell is at least 2 pounds per square inch less in pressure than the design gas pressure inside the ozone generator tubes. Maximum closed loop cooling water skid dimensions shall be as follows: 1. Length: 5 feet. 2. Width: 6 feet. May 09 11264C-6 8205A10 pxd/CaroUuD=menWCBenVrXTort Worth =5410/Spe ftbonsh4e-Seleci/11264C (FS-Clean) ..i F. Accessories: Provide the following accessories with each generator: 1. Dielectric Viewing Ports: Minimum of 3 viewing ports located on each hinged end of each generator. Provide additional ports as required so that all dielectrics may be inspected for operation without opening the generator shell. 2. Cooling Water System Inspection Ports: A minimum of one 6-inch flange connection with a Type 316 stainless steel blind flange for inspection of the internal coolant portion of each ozone generator. 3. Generator Gas Vent: Provide each generator with a vent consisting of a 1/2-inch diameter ball valve to allow depressurization and purging of the generator prior to maintenance. Include vent locks to prevent accidental opening during normal operation. Identically key all locks. 4. Cooling Water Drain: Provide a drain at the low point of each generator to allow complete drainage of the cooling water from each generator. 2.03 GENERATOR POWER SUPPLIES A. Manufacturers: The generator power supplies shall be provided with the ozone generators by the Ozone System Supplier. B. Power Supply Characteristics: 1. Design each power supply to convert 480-volt, 3-phase, 60-hertz input to a higher voltage single-phase output with a frequency ranging between 1,000 and 10,000 hertz to each generator. 2. The power supply enclosure shall include an IGBT based Converter and Inverter. Each inverter and rectifier shall be certified for a mean time between failures of 30,000 hours when the generators are operated at design conditions. 3. The IGBT Converter shall operate at greater than 0.95 power factor throughout the normal operating range between 40 and 100 percent of the design ozone generator production capacity. 4. All components shall be rated for an ambient room temperature between 40 and 105 degrees Fahrenheit and 100 percent relative humidity. 5. All components shall be rated at not less that 120 percent of the maximum anticipated power load, on a KVA basis. 6. Each power supply shall include a main circuit breaker. 7. Each power supply shall include a step down control power transformer to provide 120 VAC to power supply instrumentation and accessories. C. High Voltage Transformer: Each power supply shall include a high voltage transformer designed to step up line voltage for the power to the ozone generator cells. Design the high voltage transformer in accordance with the following criteria: 1. Minimum Efficiency: 97 percent at full load. 2. Maximum Skin Temperature: 65 degrees Celsius. 3. Dry transformer suitable for indoor installation. 4. Design the transformer enclosure such that vaults, liquid confinement systems or automatic fire extinguishing systems are not required in agreement with NEC 450-23. 5, Maximum Noise Level: 83 dBA at five feet in any direction from the transformer. 6. Provide appropriate lifting lugs on each transformer. `1EW May 09 11264C-7 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienUTX/FortWorth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecU11264C (FS-Clean) D. Power Supply Enclosures: 1. NEMA 12 enclosure completely gasketed on construction seams and doors. All gaskets shall be constructed of material suitable for ozone service. 2. Provide complete, self-contained power supply cooling system as recommended by the Ozone System Supplier. Connections for the cooling water shall be located on the side of the power supply that faces the ozone generator and shall be no more than 24 inches above the bottom of the power supply. 3. Provide sufficient doors to allow ready access to all components within the enclosure. 4. Maximum Size of Each Enclosure: a. Ozonia: 1) Length: 16 feet. 2) Width: 7.5 feet. 3) Height: 8 feet. b. Fuji: 1) Length: 19.5 feet. 2) Width: 8 feet. 3) Height: 9.5 feet. c. Clearance: Each power supply shall require a maximum of 4 feet on both ends of each enclosure. Maximum required clearance for the front and back of each enclosure shall be 5 feet. 5. Install lights in enclosures with manually operated hand switches. 6. Design enclosure tops to be watertight with minimum slope to prevent moisture from entering the top. Include minimum 3-inch awnings on four sides to protect enclosure sides from drainage off the enclosure top. E. Power Supply System Protection: Each power supply system shall include the Nwaso" following protection equipment: 1. A temperature probe/switch on the high -voltage winding and in the magnetic core that shall shut down the transformer and ozone generator in the event of high core temperature. 2. A three-phase power sensing feedback circuit to maintain power input to the generator within 112 percent of the set point over the entire operating range of the generator. 3. Automatic current and/or voltage limitation with annunciator to limit current and/or voltage flowing to the silicon control rectifiers independent of the ozone generator status. 4. Transient over voltage protection at the ozone generator shell, smoothing capacitor and low voltage resonant circuit capacitor. Continuous peak voltage monitoring of the silicon control rectifiers in both conducting and non- conducting direction shall be provided. 5. Over current/amperage protection with alarms lights and/or trip indicators to reveal the cause of the power supply shutdown. 6. Power supply cabinet temperature switches with dual settings. The lower _ temperature switch shall be for alarm purposes only while the higher temperature switch shall shut down the ozone generator unit. 7. Cooling system failure alarm to shutdown system and indicate of high cooling water temperature and/or low cooling water flow. 8. High voltage alarm and short circuit. r May 09 11264C-8 8205A10 N%00.1 pw://Carollo/DocumentsfCtienUMFort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Select/11264C (FS-Clean) 9. Power supply cabinet doors shall be equipped with interlocks to discontinue power to and from the unit when a door is opened or when a panel is removed from the enclosure. 10. Maximum dielectric failure rate while maintaining ozone production shall be 10 percent of the total number of dielectrics the generator. 11. The power supplies shall be designed with protection from temporary brownouts where inlet line voltage may vary a maximum of 10 percent of the normal line voltage. 12. Monitoring and control features supplied with each generator/power supply unit shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Door Ajar Indicator. b. Emergency System Trip Indicator. c. Excessive Dielectric Failure Indicator. d. Auxiliary Circuit Breaker Trip Indicator. e. Enclosure Temperature High Indicator. f. Converter Overload Indicator. g. Enclosure Temperature High Indicator. h. Inverter Malfunction Indicator. i. Transformer High Temperature Indicator. j. ON/OFF indicators for all equipment. k. Alarm Acknowledge/Reset and Test Switches. I. Power Supply On/OFF/Emergency Stop Switches. m. Local/Remote Control Selector Switch. n. Local Control Set Point Dial. o. Kilowatts Meter. p. DC Voltage Meter. q. DC Current Meter. r. Kilowatt Hour Meter, F. Voltage Distortion Protection and Line Notching: Design each power supply to operate from a power bus that may contain up to five percent voltage distortion and 22,800-volt microsecond line notches as defined by IEEE 519. G. Harmonic Mitigation Equipment: Provide isolation transformers, harmonic filters, high -pulse inverters, or other equipment, as approved by the ENGINEER, to meet the harmonic standards specified herein. All harmonic mitigation equipment shall be installed within the power supply unit. H. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC): Provide PLC hardware in each ozone generator power supply as shown on the Drawings and specified in Section 17720. Provide PLC hardware as required to implement the control strategies shown in Section 17110. Program PLC hardware with PLC programming software as specified in Section 17761. Provide an uninterruptible power supply for the PLC. Size the uninterruptible power supply to provide 20 minutes of power at full load and in accordance with Section 17712. Local Operator Interface: Provide local operator interface in each ozone generator power supply as shown on the Drawings and specified in Section 17721 - Local Operator Interface. Provide local operator interface hardware as required to implement the control strategies shown in Section 17110, Program local operator interface with local operator interface programming software as specified in Section 17765. May 09 11264C-9 8205A10 pwJlCamllolD=menWCkentfffort WarthMMSA101SpedficationslPm-Seled/11264C (FS-Clean) 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Testing: 1. Subject each ozone generator to hydrostatic tests of both gas and water sides prior to shipment. The shop test pressure shall be 1.5 times the design operating pressure and held for not less than one hour. Any leaks detected shall be repaired and the unit retested until no leaks are reported. 2. Subject each transformer to the following factory testing. a. Transformer turns ratio at no load. b. Short-circuit test. c. Resistance test. d. Leakage inductance test. B. Provide certification to document successful factory testing to the ENGINEER prior to installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions and accepted shop drawing and as indicated on the Drawings. 3.02 TESTING A. Conduct system start-up testing in accordance with Section 01650. B. Conduct system performance testing in accordance with Section 11264F. END OF SECTION r May 09 11264C-10 8205A10 p+rJlCaroHM)oc=wtstC5enVTXTortWorth8 W10159edfic4Ws/Pm-Se19W1264C(FS-Clean) SECTION 11264D OZONE DIFFUSION SYST& PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: and d appurtenances, 1. Equipment specifications for the ozone diffusion systems for the ozonation contactors at theshall be as described heorth and South irein and supplied by 2. The ozone diffuser assemblies the Ozone System Supplier. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 11264A - Ozone Generation System, 1.02 REFERENCES A. Compressed Gas Association (CGA): 1. Standard G-4.1 Cleaning Equipment for Oxygen Service. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Ozone Contactor Train: The individual flow paths through the ozonation contactors. There are two trains at the North Holly WTP and two trains at the South Holly WTP. B. Ozone Contactor Cell: The individual compartments that comprise each ozone contactor train. There are 8 cells within each contactor train. C. Ozone Diffusion System: The complete independent equipment system to supply ozone to each of the cells with diffusers. D. Ozone Diffuser Assembly: The assembly of materials including the aluminum oxide ceramic dome diffuser, a orifice bolt, baseplate, a threaded adapter, gaskets and washers to form a complete diffuser assembly that can be threaded onto the distribution piping in the ozone contactors as shown on the Drawings. 1.04 OZONE SYSTEM SUPPLIER SCOPE OF SUPPLY A. Provide new ozone diffuser assemblies as indicated on the Drawings for the North and South Holly WTP ozone contactors. &1 1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. General System Design: Each system shall consist of porous gas diffuser domes spaced evenly along the bottom of each cell as indicated on the Drawings to provide even ozonated feed gas distribution. 3 B. General Service Conditions and Design Criteria: 1. Water Column Pressure over Diffusers: 25 feet maximum. May 09 11264D-1 pwllCaro1WDocumenWCWnVWFort Worth/8205AtO1SpecifirationslPre-Select/11264D (Fs�clew) 8205A10 2. Maximum Ozo 3 Maximum Gas rb Gas Temperature: 120 degrees Fahrenheit. 4 Minimum Gas F� per Diffuser: 1.5 scfm per diffuser. �v per Diffuser: 0.3 scfm per diffuser 5. Maximum Pressde Loss Through Diffuser Assemblies at Maximum 1 •fl pound per sgtare inch. Gas Flow: 6- Water Te 7 Maximu mPeraty� Range: 40 to 90 degrees Fahrenheit. m Gas Bibble Diameter Emitted from Diffuser: 2.0 mm. 8• All materials shal be compatible with gaseous oxygen and ozonated feed gas. � C. Ozone Diffuser Assembly Criteria: 1. Factory assembled and cleaned diffuser assemblies, each consisting of a ceramic dome, baseplate, dome gasket, flow control device, hold-down bolt with gasket, and threaded adaptor for attachment to threaded connection on diffuser grid piping. 2. Diffuser gasket shall be Viton. (CHECK WITH CITY ON THEIR PREFERENCE). 3. Diffuser height from centerline of 2-inch manifold to top of ceramic dome shall be 3 inches plus or minus 112 inch. 4. All diffuser assemblies shall be of identical size and design and supplied by one manufacturer. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer size, type, materials of construction and number of ozone diffuser assemblies to be installed in each cell. B. Certifications: Certificates to document successful completion of all testing as specified herein. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Factory Cleaning: All items to be wetted with oxygen or ozone shall be cleaned in accordance with CGA Standard G-4.1 prior to shipping. B. Packing, Delivery and Unpacking: Deliver all components in factory packaging and protect all components from environmental exposure before installation. 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Spare Parts: Furnish one set of spare parts, as defined in the following, for each plant. Clean all parts in accordance with CGA Standards and deliver to OWNER in factory packaging. 1. Complete standard ozone diffuser assemblies including gaskets: 20. 2. Additional ozone diffuser assembly gasket sets: 100. i PART PRODUCTS 2.01 OZONE DIFFUSION SYSTEMS A. Ozone Diffuser Assemblies: 1. Supplier and Model: a. Ozonia North America — Elmwood Park, NJ. 11264D-2 8205A10 May 09 W t� n,zsw (FSCle-) �r�c� ctron Model AF-30 of crystalline b. Refra Series. �_,� c FiltrOs FAO Characteristics: umina oo ^'.Ming rnate� Ozone Diffuser Assembhtamic bonded fusi� GO- 2. ��bie a Individual domed 4num oxide) wdh OFA fused alumina ( exposure. cure tree o; resistant to ozone eXp eneous stru tion b, Uniform porous and homog residual concentra chipping, spalling, or other structural defects- b. " Free of any material soluble in water witttan an ozone c. r liter. en having UP to 5 milligrams per subject to corrosion in air or oxygen d Free of any material to15 percent by weight. shall be in the same concentration up tus or minus e. The flat sealantsurfaceurface of he ceramic diffuser within p level with them 9 0.03 inches. ty een the diffuser grid piping f. Provide an airtight screw-tYpa connection bet and the diffuser assembly. The fastening connection shall not extend into the diffuser grid piping. g, Diffuser dome dimensional tolerances: 1) Diameter: Plus or minus 1/8-inch. 2) Thickness: Plus or minus 1/16-inch. 3) Maximum hold-down bolt and orifice (ffusee assemblyer tas spe� feed. h. Provide a flow control device with each i. Minimum diffuser dome strength trn h diameter when the diffuser is supported by applied to the center one the edge in a manner identical to the proposed field installation. j. Maximum allowable warp or irregularity in diffuser dome surface: 0.03 inch. k. Diffuser element permeability rating: 8 to 10 standard cubic feet per minute per square foot per one inch at 2 inches water column. 3. Flow Control Devices: Size each flow control device to provide equal gas flow distribution throughout the entire ozone diffusion system in each ozone contactor cell, to provide equal gas flow distribution over the horizontal surface of each diffuser dome and in accordance with the following: a. Each flow control device shall consist of one flow control orifice and hold- down bolt, which connects the diffuser to the baseplate. b. The hold-down bolt shall be removable to facilitate cleaning of the orifice and baseplate. c. Flow control device shall be centered over the diffuser grid piping. d. The hold-down bolt shall be of sufficient length to allow engaging a minimum of three full threads before compression of the hold-down top gasket begins. e. There shall be no interference between the orifice and the hold-down bolt threads when the system is tightened to the required torque. 4. Diffuser Accessories: Provide the following accessories with each diffuser: a. Type 316L stainless steel baseplate with orifice control nozzle, end caps and gaskets where appropriate. Permanently fix the orifice control nozzle so that it cannot be dislodged during installation. b. Gaskets to affect a seal between the ceramic diffuser dome and the holder. Gaskets shall be a minimum of 1/8-inch thick. r .%"we May 09 11264D-3 8205A10 pwJJCaraIbftcumenWClienUTX/Fort Worthf8205A10/SpecificationslPte-SelecU112640 (FS-Clean) ,140W SECTION 11264D OZONE DIFFUSION SYSTEM PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment specifications for the ozone diffusion systems and appurtenances, for the ozonation contactors at the North and South Holly WTPs. 2. The ozone diffuser assemblies shall be as described herein and supplied by the Ozone System Supplier. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 11264A - Ozone Generation System. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Compressed Gas Association (CGA): 1. Standard G-4.1 Cleaning Equipment for Oxygen Service. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Ozone Contactor Train: The individual flow paths through the ozonation contactors. ,"moo, There are two trains at the North Holly WTP and two trains at the South Holly WTP. B. Ozone Contactor Cell: The individual compartments that comprise each ozone contactor train. There are 8 cells within each contactor train. C. Ozone Diffusion System: The complete independent equipment system to supply ozone to each of the cells with diffusers. D. Ozone Diffuser Assembly: The assembly of materials including the aluminum oxide ceramic dome diffuser, a orifice bolt, baseplate, a threaded adapter, gaskets and washers to form a complete diffuser assembly that can be threaded onto the distribution piping in the ozone contactors as shown on the Drawings. 1.04 OZONE SYSTEM SUPPLIER SCOPE OF SUPPLY A. Provide new ozone diffuser assemblies as indicated on the Drawings for the North and South Holly WTP ozone contactors. 1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. General System Design: Each system shall consist of porous gas diffuser domes spaced evenly along the bottom of each cell as indicated on the Drawings to provide even ozonated feed gas distribution. B. General Service Conditions and Design Criteria: 1. Water Column Pressure over Diffusers: 25 feet maximum. '""190, May 09 11264D-1 8205A10 pN:l/CarollolDocumenlslClienUTX/Foa Wodhl8205A10/SpeciOcationslPre-SelecU11264D (FS-Clear) 2. Maximum Ozone Gas Temperature: 120 degrees Fahrenheit. 3. Maximum Gas Flow per Diffuser: 1.5 scfm per diffuser. 4. Minimum Gas Flow per Diffuser: 0.3 scfm per diffuser 5. Maximum Pressure Loss Through Diffuser Assemblies at Maximum Gas Flow: 1.0 pound per square inch. 6. Water Temperature Range: 40 to 90 degrees Fahrenheit. 7. Maximum Gas Bubble Diameter Emitted from Diffuser: 2.0 mm. 8. All materials shall be compatible with gaseous oxygen and ozonated feed gas. C. Ozone Diffuser Assembly Criteria: 1. Factory assembled and cleaned diffuser assemblies, each consisting of a ceramic dome, baseplate, dome gasket, flow control device, hold-down bolt with gasket, and threaded adaptor for attachment to threaded connection on diffuser grid piping. 2. Diffuser gasket shall be Viton_ (CHECK WITH CITY ON THEIR PREFERENCE). 3. Diffuser height from centerline of 2-inch manifold to top of ceramic dome shall be 3 inches plus or minus 1/2 inch. 4. All diffuser assemblies shall be of identical size and design and supplied by one manufacturer. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer size, type, materials of construction and number of ozone diffuser assemblies to be installed in each cell. B. Certifications: Certificates to document successful completion of all testing as specified herein. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Factory Cleaning: All items to be wetted with oxygen or ozone shall be cleaned in accordance with CGA Standard G-4.1 prior to shipping. B. Packing, Delivery and Unpacking: Deliver all components in factory packaging and protect all components from environmental exposure before installation. 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Spare Parts: Furnish one set of spare parts, as defined in the following, for each plant. Clean all parts in accordance with CGA Standards and deliver to OWNER in factory packaging. 1. Complete standard ozone diffuser assemblies including gaskets: 20. 2. Additional ozone diffuser assembly gasket sets: 100. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 OZONE DIFFUSION SYSTEMS A. Ozone Diffuser Assemblies: 1. Supplier and Model: a. Ozonia North America — Elmwood Park, NJ. May 09 11264D-2 8205A10 pwJ/Cardlo/Docwm1s0enVTX/F0rt Worth18 M101Spedicadon mSeledI11264D (FS-Clean) b. Refractron Model AF-30 c. Filtros FAO Series. 2, Ozone Diffuser Assembly Characteristics: a. Individual domed ceramic bonded fused alumina composed of crystalline fused alumina (aluminum oxide) with a suitable ceramic bonding material resistant to ozone exposure. b. Uniform porous and homogeneous structure free of cracks, soft spots, chipping, spalling, or other structural defects. c. Free of any material soluble in water with an ozone residual concentration up to 5 milligrams per liter. d. Free of any material subject to corrosion in air or oxygen having an ozone concentration up to 15 percent by weight. e. The flat sealant surface of the diffuser baseplates shall be in the same level with the mating surface of the ceramic diffuser within plus or minus 0.03 inches. f. Provide an airtight screw -type connection between the diffuser grid piping and the diffuser assembly. The fastening connection shall not extend into the diffuser grid piping. g. Diffuser dome dimensional tolerances: 1) Diameter: Plus or minus 1/8-inch. 2) Thickness: Plus or minus 1/16-inch. 3) Maximum hold-down bolt and orifice off -center deviation: 1/8-inch. h. Provide a flow control device with each diffuser assembly as specified. i. Minimum diffuser dome strength requirement: 750 pound vertical load applied to the center one inch diameter when the diffuser is supported by the edge in a manner identical to the proposed field installation. j. Maximum allowable warp or irregularity in diffuser dome surface: 0.03 inch. k. Diffuser element permeability rating: 8 to 10 standard cubic feet per minute per square foot per one inch at 2 inches water column. 3. Flow Control Devices: Size each flow control device to provide equal gas flow distribution throughout the entire ozone diffusion system in each ozone contactor cell, to provide equal gas flow distribution over the horizontal surface of each diffuser dome and in accordance with the following: a. Each flow control device shall consist of one flow control orifice and hold- down bolt, which connects the diffuser to the baseplate. b. The hold-down bolt shall be removable to facilitate cleaning of the orifice and baseplate. c. Flow control device shall be centered over the diffuser grid piping. d. The hold-down bolt shall be of sufficient length to allow engaging a minimum of three full threads before compression of the hold-down top gasket begins. e. There shall be no interference between the orifice and the hold-down bolt threads when the system is tightened to the required torque. 4. Diffuser Accessories: Provide the following accessories with each diffuser: a. Type 316L stainless steel baseplate with orifice control nozzle, end caps and gaskets where appropriate. Permanently fix the orifice control nozzle so that it cannot be dislodged during installation. b. Gaskets to affect a seal between the ceramic diffuser dome and the holder. Gaskets shall be a minimum of 1/8-inch thick. Iftow May 09 11264D-3 8205A10 pwl/Carollo/DDCumentslCllenUT)UFod Worth/8205At OIS pecifications/Pre-SelecUt l264D (FS-Clean) c. For each diffuser, provide a screw -type threaded boss welded to the header pipe. The threaded bosses shall be welded to the new header pipe at the factory and shall be gas -tight when installed. 2.02 FACTORY ASSEMBLY A. Factory assemble all ozone diffuser assemblies, connection hardware, orifice plates and diffuser grid piping prior to shipment. 2.03 SHOP TESTING A. General Testing Requirements: The Contractor shall submit written certification to the ENGINEER that the testing was successfully accomplished prior to shipping. 1. Inspect each ozone diffuser assembly and shop test a minimum of five randomly selected diffuser assemblies out of each 100 diffuser assemblies supplied for permeability, uniformity, strength and dimensions, as specified herein. 2. Submit a testing plan to the ENGINEER at least 60 days prior to shop testing for approval. 3. Submit seven copies of all testing results to ENGINEER prior to shipment of the ozone diffusion assemblies. 4. If any ozone diffuser assembly batch is found to have a greater variability than specified for permeability, uniformity, strength or dimension criteria, all diffusers of that batch shall be shop tested and only those that conform to the specifications shall be accepted. B. Permeability Testing Procedure: Test ozone diffuser assemblies to show that 95 percent of all production diffusers within a given batch fall within plus or minus 15 percent of the design permeability rating specified in accordance with the following testing procedure. 1. Testing Conditions: a. Gas Temperature: 70 degrees Fahrenheit plus or minus 5 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Gas Relative Humidity: 10 to 25 percent. c. Differential Pressure: 2 inches of water column. d. Room Temperature: 70 degrees Fahrenheit plus or minus 5 degrees Fahrenheit. e. Ambient Relative Humidity: 10 to 50 percent. f. Testing Period: minimum one minute after the two-inch water column headloss is achieved. 2. Test each diffuser individually in apparatus design to hold diffuser assembly in place and completely seal the diffuser assembly against the passage of air except through the exposed face. Apparatus shall include individually calibrated instruments to measure all variables. 3. Bring ozone diffuser assemblies to room temperature a minimum of three hours prior to testing. Store diffusers in a clean dry atmosphere at 70 degrees Fahrenheit plus or minus 10 degrees Fahrenheit prior to testing. C. Uniformity Test Procedure: Test diffuser assemblies to show that 95 percent of all production diffusers within a given batch fall within the specified uniformity in accordance with the following: 1. Saturate the diffuser assemblies with tap water prior to uniformity testing. May 09 11264D-4 8205A10 prrJlC=1WDocuments1C6enVTX1F0r1 WUt!V82D5A1WSpeafipt0mPre-Se"11264D (FS-Clean) 2. Attach saturated diffuser to apparatus and submerge in potable water under two inches water column. 3. Airflow Rate: 14 standard cubic feet per minute per square foot of effective surface area for one minute. 4. After the 14 standard cubic feet per minute airflow is established, reduce airflow to one standard cubic foot per minute per square foot of effective surface area. 5. Observe and record uniformity of distribution. D. Strength Test Procedure: Test ozone diffuser assemblies to show that 95 percent of all production diffusers within a given batch fall within the specified strength requirements in accordance with the following: 1. Secure the diffuser assembly in strength testing apparatus so the assembly is supported on the edge in a manner identical to its proposed field installation. 2. Apply a minimum of 750 pounds vertical force to the center one -inch diameter of the diffuser. E. Dimension Test Procedure: Test ozone diffuser assemblies to show that 95 percent of all production diffusers within a given batch fall within the dimension requirements in accordance with the following: 1. Provide a heavy steel plate with a true plane surface, dimension gauges and squares to measure dimensions of each diffuser assembly. 2. Reject all elements with appreciable irregularities of corners or warping in excess of the maximum allowable specified in this section. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Iftow A. Factory Cleaning Procedures: 1. Clean all diffusers and diffuser holders, in accordance with CGA standards prior to shipment. 2. Package and clearly label the cleaned equipment to prevent environmental exposure. 3. Ship and deliver the ozone diffusion assemblies in the original packaging. 4. The Ozone System Supplier shall incur all costs related to recleaning any equipment exposed to the environment during shipping and delivery. B. CONTRACTOR Responsibilities: 1. Maintain the equipment's original packaging until immediately prior to installation. 2. After installation, protect all surfaces from environmental exposure, including atmospheric moisture. 3. Whether or not the upstream piping has been cleaned, temporarily seal off all openings except where installation is actively in progress. Temporarily seal off any opening where installation is actively in progress at any time installation is suspended for any reason. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall incur all costs related to recleaning any equipment that, in the judgement of the ENGINEER, was contaminated at any point between unpackaging of the equipment and Substantial Completion of the Project. 4"or May 09 11264D-5 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienUTX/Fort Worth/8205At01Specifications/PreSelect/11264D (FS-Clean) PART 3 EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION May 09 11264D-6 8205A10 pwJ/CardbVoomwftfCNenU1'X/FaI Worth05A10/Specficabons/Pre-Rdecd11264D (FS-Clean) SECTION 11264E OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEMS PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. All equipment associated with the ozone destruct systems. 2. The ozone destruct system skids, demisters and pressure/vacuum relief valves in this section shall be supplied by the Ozone System Supplier and installed by the Contractor as shown on the Drawings. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 11264A - Ozone System. 2. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. 3. Section 15052 - Basic Piping Materials and Methods. 4. Section 15110 - Valves. 5. Section 15111 - Ball Valves. 6. Section 15112 - Butterfly Valves. 7. Section 15114 - Check Valves. 8. Section 15120 - Piping Specialties. 9. Section 15255 - Stainless Steel Piping and Tubing. 10. Section 15268 - Miscellaneous Piping, Tubing, and Hose. 11. Section 16222 - Motors. 12. Section 17404 - Pressure/Vacuum Measurement - Gauges 13. Section 17505 - Analytical Measurement - Ozone Gas Concentration Monitors. 14. Section 17710 - Control Systems - Panels, Enclosures and Panels Components. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA): 1. ANSI/ABMA 9, Ball Bearings, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for 10,000 hours. 2. ANSI/ABMA 11, Roller Bearings, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for 10,000 hours. B. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. Section D10.4 - Recommended Practices for Welding Stainless Steel Piping and Tubing. C. Compressed Gas Association (CGA): 1. Standard G-4.1 Cleaning Equipment for Oxygen Service. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Each ozone destruct system consists of the following major equipment: 1. Ozone destruct system inlet valve. 2. Preheater. May 09 11264E-1 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientrTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Select/11264E (FS-Clean) 3. Catalytic destruct media bed and vessel. 4. Off -gas blower. 5. Silencer. 6. Low ozone gas concentration analyzer. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Provide ozone destruct systems capable of destroying the ozone in the off -gas before discharging the treated gas to the atmosphere. 2. Destruct System Capacity: Each ozone destruct system shall be capable of treating 256 standard cubic feet per minute of off -gas. 3. Power supply to each system: 480-volts, 3-phase, 60-hertz 4. Maximum Outlet Gas Ozone Concentration: <0.08 ppm (by volume). 5. Design Inlet Ozone Concentration: 1.0 percent by weight. 6. Normal Contactor Headspace Gas Pressure: 2-inch to 4-inch water column vacuum. 7. Off -gas Temperature Range: 40 to 90 degrees Fahrenheit. 8. Off -gas Humidity: 100 percent. 9. Noise level at system design capacity shall not exceed 85 dBA at 3 feet for free field conditions. 10. All equipment shall be fully operational over the entire range of ozone contactor off -gas flows. C. Process piping for each ozone destruct system shall be Type 316L stainless steel pipe and shall be as specified in Section 15255. 1. Ozone destruct system horizontal piping shall be installed with a 1/8-inch to 1 foot slope, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2. Piping and valves not specified in this section shall be provided as specified in Section 15268, Section 15110, Section 15111, Section 15112 and Section �/ 15114. D. Nameplates shall be provided on each piece of equipment. Each nameplate shall bear the titles of the equipment as indicated in the performance and design requirements and as specified in the following sections. E. All anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be furnished for the equipment as required. Anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be 316 stainless steel with sleeves. F. SUBMITTALS. G. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01300. H. Product Data: 1. Demister characteristics and performance data. 2. Preheater characteristics and performance data. 3. Catalyst bed characteristics and performance data. 4. Blower characteristics and performance data. 5. Silencer characteristics and performance data. 6. Pressure/vacuum relief valve characteristics and performance data. Templates or setting plans, with tolerances, for anchor bolts. R Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit for all mechanical equipment, in accordance with Section 01730. May 09 11264E-2 8205A10 pwl/Carollo/Documents/Cllent(IX/Fort Worth/8205At0/Specifications/Pre-SelecVl 1264E (FS-Clean) �,. K. Certified test data that shows that systems meet specified performance criteria " throughout the range of potential off -gas flows. Design Drawings with system dimensions. M. Submittal information as specified in Section 17050 for the instrumentation and controls portion of the ozone destruct systems work. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: 1. All welds shall be done and inspected in accordance with AWS code as required. 2. Correct deficiencies until accepted by the ENGINEER. 1.05 SPARE PARTS A. Furnish the Following Spare Parts for the System Components: 1. Catalyst, enough for one replacement in one catalytic destruction unit. 2. One set of catalytic destruction unit gaskets. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Local Control Panel: 1. The control devices for each ozone destruct system shall be mounted in NEMA 4X stainless steel local control panels. Mount each local control panel on the skid of each ozone destruct system. Provide the local control panel in accordance with Section 17710. Provide an air conditioning unit sized for the heat loads generated within the panel and outdoor installation in full sun. 2. Provide dry contacts for the remote indication of the following: a. Blower run status, remote mode status and failure. b. Preheater run status and remote mode status. 3. Provide the following local control devices: a. Local/Remote selector switch for preheater. b. On/Off selector switch or pushbuttons for preheater. c. Local/Remote selector switch for blower. d. On/Off selector switch or pushbuttons for blower. 4. Provide the preheater solid state power controller and the variable frequency drive for the off -gas blower in the local control panel associated with each ozone destruct system. 5. The Ozone System Supplier shall provide the wire and conduit between the local control panel and all the elements provided with the ozone destruct system. B. Demisters: 1. Install one demister on the off -gas outlet on each ozone contactor. 2. Housings, flanges, elements shall be AISI 316L stainless steel. 3. Provide demisters with free-standing, independent support grids constructed of AISI 316L stainless steel. May 09 11264E-3 8205A10 pw/lCarollo/Documents/ClienVMFortWorth/8205AlOtSpecifications/Pre-SelecUl 1264E (FS-Clean) 4. Demisters shall remove at least 99.9 percent of entrained moisture droplets without allowing water droplets to pass through the element. 5. Install the demisters as shown on the Drawings. 6. Demisters shall be fabricated with stainless steel flanges, which allow for demister replacement without disassembling other connection piping: 7. Demisters shall be cleaned for oxygen service in accordance with CGA G-4.1. 8. Manufacturer: Demisters shall be Koch - Otto York or equal with 8-inch thick, mesh pad. Diameter of mesh pad shall be appropriate to accommodate 256 scfm of off -gas but shall not be less than 12 inches in diameter. Mesh style shall be 326 QRW 316L or equal. C. Preheaters: 1. Provide one preheater for each ozone destruct system as indicated on the Drawings. 2. The minimum gas temperature rise shall be 40 degrees Fahrenheit at all ozone system production capacity ranges and inlet temperatures as low as 40 degrees Fahrenheit_ 3. The maximum preheater element skin temperature shall not exceed 300 degrees Fahrenheit at design gas flow conditions. 4. Maximum pressure drop across each preheater shall be 2 inches of water column at design gas flow. 5. Each preheater shall incorporate a thermocouple welded to the element sheath surface and wired to a terminal strip. 6. Each preheater shall have over -temperature protection, which shall shut down the preheater in a no -gas flow condition. 7. Any components which may come in contact with off -gas shall be passivated 316L stainless steel. 8. Preheater external surfaces shall be insulated with 2 inches of fiberglass material contained in a weatherproof steel jacket. 9. All preheaters shall be installed and supported on a painted carbon steel support frame designed by the Ozone System Supplier and approved by the ENGINEER. 10. Inlet and outlet connections of preheaters shall be 4-inch 316 stainless steel Class 150 raised face flanges. 11. Power supply to preheaters shall be 480-volt, 3-phase. The terminal enclosure on the preheaters shall be NEMA 4. 12. Preheater Manufacturer: Watlow Industries or equal. D. Preheater Controls: 1. Preheater control equipment shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Temperature control shall be thermocouple or RTD temperature control type for modulating temperature control. Switches and indicating lights shall be heavy-duty, weatherproof. 2. Preheater controls shall include Local/Remote selector switch and remote on/off control from plant PLC system. „ E. Catalytic Destruct Units: 1. Provide catalytic destruct units as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. 2. Catalyst material shall be Carulite 200, 4 x 8 mesh extrusions manufactured by Carus Chemical Company. 3. The catalytic destruction unit shell shall be AISI Type 316L stainless steel. Provide seals and gaskets as specified in Section 11264A. May 09 11264E-4 8205A10 pwinamkMowmenWaieM/ ort WOA1V8205A101SpedcationslPre-SeleWI1264E (FS-aean) `L 4. Install each destruction unit on a painted carbon steel support frame dt - by the Ozone System Supplier and accepted by the ENGINEER. 5. Fabricate each destruct unit so that the ends of the unit are flange -bolted the unit body. 6. Design the catalyst exterior housing to withstand a maximum internal press, of 10 psig and a vacuum of 20 inches of water. 7. As indicated on the Drawings, provide a differential pressure indicator on eact, catalytic unit to measure pressure drop across the catalyst. Provide gauges as specified in Section 17404. F. Off -Gas Blowers: 1. Provide one off -gas blower for each ozone destruction system as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. 2. The rated differential pressure for the blowers shall be designed for the (05btS incurred through the Ozone Destruct System at the DeStrUCt System Capacity flowrate pulling from a 4-inch water column vacuum from the ozone contactor headspace. 3. Maximum motor speed shall be 3600 rpm on all off -gas blowers. 4. Operating gas inlet temperature will range from 80 degrees Fahrenheit to 120 degrees Fahrenheit. 5. Blowers shall not surge at maximum inlet temperature, minimum inlet pressure and maximum discharge pressure operating conditions. 6. Blowers shall be single width, single inlet, non -overloading, centrifugal type. 7. All blower components including the housings and wheels shall be constructed of stainless steel. Provide a drain connection at the low point of the scroll and a cleanout door on each blower. 8. The fan wheel and shaft assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced -� at the factory prior to shipping. 9. The first critical speed shall not be less the 125 percent of the maximum recommended speed. 10. Bearings shall be heavy-duty grease lubricated anti -friction type with an ABMA rating of L-10 for 100,000 hours continuous operation. 11. Provide blowers with inlet and outlet flanged connections. 12. Install each blower and its drive motor on a structural channel subbase suitable for bolting to a concrete base. 13. Provide vibration dampeners between each blower frame and the concrete base. 14. The blowers shall be as manufactured by Cincinnati Fan, Series HP, or equal. G. Off -gas Blower Equipment: 1. Motors: a. Provide motors in accordance with Section 16222. b. Provide the off -gas blowers with a variable frequency drive. The variable frequency drive shall be controlled by the off -gas pressure in the headspace of the ozone contactors. c. Install motors on a subbase with an adjustable motor slide base sized to accommodate the motor frame. d. Each motor shall be shall be rated at 480-volts, 3-phase, 60-hertz and shall be 5 horsepower. e. Motors shall not overload at minimum inlet temperature, maximum inlet pressure, and minimum discharge pressure operating conditions. f. Motor Enclosure: TEFC. May 09 11264E-5 8205A10 pwl/Carolla/DocumenWClienttfX/Fort Wortht8205A101Specificabons/Pre-SeleeVI1264E (FS-Clean) 4. Install each destruction unit on a painted carbon steel support frame designed 10 by the Ozone System Supplier and accepted by the ENGINEER. 5. Fabricate each destruct unit so that the ends of the unit are flange -bolted to the unit body. 6. Design the catalyst exterior housing to withstand a maximum internal pressure of 10 psig and a vacuum of 20 inches of water. 7. As indicated on the Drawings, provide a differential pressure indicator on each catalytic unit to measure pressure drop across the catalyst. Provide gauges as specified in Section 17404. F. Off -Gas Blowers: 1. Provide one off -gas blower for each ozone destruction system as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. 2. The rated differential pressure for the blowers shall be designed for the losses incurred through the Ozone Destruct System at the Destruct System Capacity flowrate pulling from a 4-inch water column vacuum from the ozone contactor headspace. 3. Maximum motor speed shall be 3600 rpm on all off -gas blowers. 4. Operating gas inlet temperature will range from 80 degrees Fahrenheit to 120 degrees Fahrenheit. 5. Blowers shall not surge at maximum inlet temperature, minimum inlet pressure and maximum discharge pressure operating conditions. 6. Blowers shall be single width, single inlet, non -overloading, centrifugal type. 7. All blower components including the housings and wheels shall be constructed of stainless steel. Provide a drain connection at the low point of the scroll and a cleanout door on each blower. 8. The fan wheel and shaft assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory prior to shipping. 9. The first critical speed shall not be less the 125 percent of the maximum recommended speed. 10. Bearings shall be heavy-duty grease lubricated anti -friction type with an ABMA rating of L-10 for 100,000 hours continuous operation. 11. Provide blowers with inlet and outlet flanged connections. 12. Install each blower and its drive motor on a structural channel subbase suitable for bolting to a concrete base. 13. Provide vibration dampeners between each blower frame and the concrete base. 14. The blowers shall be as manufactured by Cincinnati Fan, Series HP, or equal. G. Off -gas Blower Equipment: 1. Motors: a. Provide motors in accordance with Section 16222. b. Provide the off -gas blowers with a variable frequency drive. The variable frequency drive shall be controlled by the off -gas pressure in the headspace of the ozone contactors. c. Install motors on a subbase with an adjustable motor slide base sized to accommodate the motor frame. d. Each motor shall be shall be rated at 480-volts, 3-phase, 60-hertz and shall be 5 horsepower. e. Motors shall not overload at minimum inlet temperature, maximum inlet pressure, and minimum discharge pressure operating conditions. f. Motor Enclosure: TEFC. May 09 11264E-5 8205A10 pwJ/Carollo(Documents/Cllent/T)UFort Worlh/8205At01SpecificaGons/Pre•SelecUl 1264E (FS-Clean) 2. Guards: Provide guards for all exposed rotating shafts, sheaves, and couplings in accordance with Section 15050. 3. Control Equipment: a. Control equipment shall be as indicated on the Drawings and shall include variable frequency drives, magnetic circuit breaker type combination starters, start -stop push buttons, 120 volt control power transformer, externally reset ambient compensated bimetallic, thermal overloads and indicating lights. b. Provide dry contacts for the remote indication of blower status and failure. c. Push buttons and indicating lights shall be heavy-duty, weatherproof. d. Blower controls shall include Local/Remote selector switch and remote on/off control from plant PLC system. 4. Flexible Connections: a. Provide flexible connections in accordance with Section 15121. b. Install flexible connections on each destruct system as indicated on the Drawings. c. Flexible connections shall be compatible with gas oxygen and ozone. H. Silencers: 1. Provide a discharge silencer for each blower as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide silencers that incorporate annular adsorptive type media. 3. Silencer housings shall be of steel construction and shop painted. 4. Design the silencers such that maximum noise levels at design operating capacity of the destruct system shall be 85 dBa at three feet for free field conditions. 5. Manufacturers: Silencers shall be as manufactured by Kittell, Burgess Manning or equal. Pressure/Vacuum Relief Valves: 1. Provide one pressure/vacuum relief valve through a single connection in the roof of each ozonation contactor as indicated on the Drawings. 2. The pressure/vacuum relief valve shall be sized at 6 inches and be provided with a 150 pound ANSI raised face flange. 3. Vacuum Relief Setting: The pressure/vacuum relief valve shall have a vacuum relief setting shall be 6 inches of water vacuum. 4. Pressure Relief Setting: The pressure/vacuum relief valve pressure relief setting shall be 10 inches of water. 5. Body material shall be 316 stainless steel. 6. Valve shall be cleaned for oxygen service in accordance with CGA G-4.1. 7. Manufacturer and Model Number: a. The pressure/vacuum relief valve shall be supplied by 1) Tyco Varec, Inc. 2021 B-6-4-T-FR-TS-02-02 2) Groth, equivalent product 3) Shand & Jurs, equivalent product Low Ozone Gas Concentration Analyzers 1. Provide a low ozone gas concentration analyzer for each ozone destruct system and as specified in Section 17505. 2. Mount analyzer on the ozone destruct system skid. Provide sunshield to cover the analyzer. 3. Power for the analyzer shall originate from the ozone destruct system skid control panel. May 09 11264E-6 8205A10 pwi/Com dDocunwWCHentT)VFortWorM205AlV," kabwr.tPn}Seledll264E (FS-Clean) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for installation of all equipment as specified herein, as indicated on the Drawings, and as directed by the Ozone System Supplier. B. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with Ozone System Supplier regarding equipment installation pads, foundations and anchoring systems. CONTRACTOR shall provide and install equipment installation pads, foundations and anchoring systems, as specified by the Ozone System Supplier. C. Perform system start-up and testing on all equipment in accordance with Section 01650 and manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION Nmope May 09 11264E-7 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienVTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/PreSelectl11264E (FS-Clean) This Page Intentionally Left Blank '*w.o May 09 11264E-8 8205A10 p-jXwdd'DOwnenla kn1rrffmt WortlJ82O i 71264E (FS-Clean) SECTION 11264F OZONE SYSTEM TESTING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Performance testing requirements for the ozone generators and their power supplies and selected ancillary equipment involved in the generation of ozone. 2. Work in this section shall be performed by the Ozone System Supplier. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 11264A - Ozone Systems. 2. Section 11264C - Ozone Generators and Power Supplies 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, Current Edition. B. Ozone Science and Engineering (International Ozone Association): 1. Volume 18, Guideline for Measurement of Ozone Concentration in the Process Gas From an Ozone Generator, Rakness, et al., 1996. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Average Rate of Energy Consumption (AVE-KW): The average value of the rate of energy consumption over a specific period of operation, measured in kilowatts (kW). B. Time -Factored Specific Energy Consumption: The amount of energy consumed per pound of ozone produced (kWh/pound) at a specific production level, multiplied the percentage which the generator would operate at the given production level. C. Ozone Generator Specific Energy Consumption (SEC): The amount of energy consumed per pound of ozone produced (kWh/pound) during operation under a specific set of operating conditions. 1.04 PERFORMANCE TESTING GENERAL CRITERIA A. Performance Testing General Protocol: The Ozone System Supplier shall conduct the following performance tests on each ozone generator: 1. Energy Consumption Efficiency (ECE) Test: Designed to evaluate the energy required to produce specific amounts of ozone by each generator at various levels of generator operation and at average cooling water temperatures. 2. Design Production Capacity (DPC) Test: Designed to evaluate the design production capacity of each ozone generator and power supply and the associated energy consumed, under average cooling water conditions. *4=0e May 09 11264F-1 8205A10 pw:I/Carollo/Documents/Client/TX/Fort Worth/820M10ISpecifications/Pre-SelecU11264F (FS-Clean) B. Performance Testing Period: 1. The performance testing period will be dictated by the temperature of the nonpotable water supply. 2. All performance testing shall be completed within ninety days of Substantial Completion of the project at a time agreed upon by the ENGINEER. 3. All testing, including the pretesting procedures, shall be started and completed on weekdays, exclusive of City Holidays, within the hours of 7:00 am and 6:00 pm. C. Performance Testing Equipment and Instrumentation: Use equipment and instrumentation incorporated into the ozone system during the performance testing. D. Ozone System Supplier Responsibility: Unless otherwise specified, the Ozone System Supplier shall be responsible for all aspects of the performance testing, modifications and retesting if required, as specified herein, including, but not limited to the following: 1. Develop performance test protocol and submit protocol to ENGINEER at least 30 days prior to testing period. 2. Provide independent calibration for all instrumentation associated with the performance testing as specified herein. 3. Provide personnel to operate all elements of the ozone system as defined in Section 11264A during the performance testing, including the pretesting, and to conduct all aspects of the performance testing including the following: a. Provide personnel to make pretest adjustments to the ozone system and to set up each performance test. b. Collect and label all samples for laboratory analysis; c. Perform all required laboratory analyses; d. Make necessary field adjustments; e. Collect and record all data necessary to document system performance; and f. Prepare reports with testing results. 4. Provide, install and maintain any temporary monitoring equipment and meters required to complete the performance testing. 5. Provide personnel to perform any system modifications and operate the ozone system during any retesting. E. OWNER Responsibility: 1. Provide electricity, liquid oxygen and personnel to operate the plant, including the ozone systems, during the pretest and the performance test periods. 2. At the discretion of the OWNER, provide additional services of a consultant or an independent testing laboratory to observe test procedures, test results, and perform laboratory analyses. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Qualifications Documentation: At least 30 days prior to the start of the performance testing, the Ozone System Supplier shall submit documentation specified under Article 1.06. B. Performance Testing Protocol: At least 30 days prior to the start of the performance testing, the Ozone System Supplier shall submit a complete description of the planned performance testing, including a minimum of the following information: May 09 11264F-2 8205A10 pwJJCamkJDDcumentdC1enVrffod Wath182054101S4)ecfic bwm PreSelecU11264F (F&Oean) *"We 1. Approximate date of each performance test. 2. A detailed protocol for each performance test. 3. Approximate duration of pretest and performance test periods. 4. A description of any field adjustments that may be made by the Ozone System Supplier. C. Calibration Data: At least seven days prior to the start of the performance testing, the Ozone System Supplier shall submit documentation to show that all instrumentation associated with the performance testing has been calibrated in accordance with Paragraph 3.01.6. D. Performance Testing Results Report: Within 30 days of the successful completion of the performance testing, the Ozone System Supplier shall submit five copies of a report to document the performance testing. At the minimum, the report shall include the following: 1. A complete description of the performance testing procedures with emphasis on any deviations from the proposed protocol previously submitted. 2. Complete results of the performance testing including all laboratory analysis data. 3. A description of any failures, the required adjustments and the results of the retesting. 4. A certification section verifying the authenticity of the report with the signature of the representative of the Ozone System Supplier. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ozone System Supplier Representative Qualifications: The primary representative .,,/ of the Ozone System Supplier shall have performed a minimum of one other ozone system performance test on a system of similar size within the previous two years. The name and phone number of a reference related to the experience shall be included in the submittal. B. Third Party Agents or Consultants: Any outside agency or consultant participating in the performance testing, including the testing laboratory and the calibration consultant, shall be approved to practice and meet minimum industry standards. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL PERFORMANCE TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. Performance Tests: Conduct the following performance tests, as specified herein, on each ozone generator and power supply: 1. Energy Consumption Efficiency Test. 2. Design Production Capacity Test. B. Calibration of Testing Equipment: *"001 May 09 11264F-3 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienUTX/Fort Worthl8205At0ISpecifications/Pre-Select/11264F (FS-Clean) Approximately 30 days prior to the initiation of any performance test, the Ozone System Supplier shall commission an independent contractor to calibrate all instrumentation associated with the performance testing with the exception of the high concentration ozone analyzers. Adjust the high concentration ozone analyzer to reflect sample cell temperature and pressure. Verify the accuracy of each high concentration ozone analyzer by the procedure given as Method B - Instrument (UV) Method Verified by Wet -Chemistry as described by Rakness, et al. If retesting of any generator or an entire ozone system is required, the Ozone System Supplier shall have the independent contractor recalibrate all instruments associated with the retest if they have not been calibrated within the previous 30 days and submit that information to the ENGINEER prior to retesting. C. Cooling Systems: 1. The ozone generators shall only be cooled with nonpotable water from the plant finished water system as provided by the design of each ozone system, with a range of quality as specified in Section 11264A. 2. Power supplies shall only be cooled with systems provided and installed as permanent components of the ozone system. D. Energy Consumption Measurement: 1. Measure rate of energy consumption, in kilowatts (kW), for each generator at the generator power meter located in the ozone system motor control center. Add the rate of energy consumption for any closed -loop cooling system equipment including pumps and the nitrogen generation system to the generator power meter reading to determine the total rate of energy consumption for the ozone generator. Average the rate of energy consumption over each specific testing period to determine the AVE-KW used in the calculations. E. Ozone Production Measurement: Base the ozone production calculation on the mass gas flow rate and gas phase ozone concentration in accordance with the following: 1. Measure gas flow at the orifice plate flow meters located on the GOX piping immediately upstream of each ozone generator. Adjust for actual pressure and temperature conditions. 2. Measure gas phase ozone concentration by the procedure given as Method B - Instrument (UV) Method Verified by Wet -Chemistry as described by Rakness, et al. F. Product Gas Concentration: The ozone product gas concentration shall be within the range of 8 percent to 10 percent during all tests. G. Flow Rate Deviation: The calculated ozone mass flow rate for a specific energy consumption test shall be within one percent of the desired production level. H. Data Collection: 1. Direct readings from the instruments shall be used in the calculations to determine conformance with the Specifications. 2. Readings shall be obtained from digital trends from the ozone system control system or by manually recording the values directly from the instrument. May 09 11264F-4 8205A10 pwllCardbDo=wtslCl'rendTkTortWaftB205A101SpeOcatioWPreSeledl11264F(FS-Clean) •.,,i 3. Record (and round if necessary) to the level of accuracy of the instrument before any calculations. 4. Collect manual instrument readings at 30-minute intervals during the performance tests. Average the data collected during each test before the calculations. 5. There shall be no adjustment to readings or calculations due to random or R systematic instrumentation error or accuracy limitations. Equipment Operation During Performance Testing: 1. Operate all ozone equipment, as defined in Section 11264A, as it was designed to operate in the automatic mode. 2. Operate ozone diffusion system under normal hydraulic conditions. Operate all diffusers and ozone contactors under normal hydraulic conditions. J. Equipment Modifications: The Ozone System Supplier shall be responsible for all ozone system modifications in accordance with the following: 1. If any aspect of the performance testing is not satisfied, modify equipment as required so that the entire ozone system conforms with the Specifications at the expense of the Ozone System Supplier. 2. All modifications shall be reviewed and accepted by the ENGINEER and shall conform with the Drawings and Specifications. 3. Design all modifications to be permanently installed for continuous service. 4. Maintain, as much as practical, ozone system operation prior to and during the modifications. Provide temporary facilities and make temporary modifications as necessary to keep the ozone system in operation prior to and during the modifications. 5. The Ozone System Supplier shall document all modifications and amend the operations and maintenance manuals and record drawings to reflect the modifications. K. Retesting: The Ozone System Supplier shall be responsible for all retesting in accordance with the following: 1. Reconduct the performance testing in the event of any system fails to meet the testing protocol or the performance criteria specified herein, in accordance with the following: a. If a generator fails the ECE test and has not yet passed the DPC test, modify the generator as required and reconduct the ECE test on that generator. b. If a generator fails the ECE test and has already passed the DPC test, modify the generator as required and reconduct the ECE test on that generator and the DPC on that system with that generator in service. c. If an ozone system fails the DPC test, modify the system as required and reconduct all performance tests specified herein. d. If a process parameter (i.e., cooling water temperature or flow rate or ozone mass flow rate) varies from the range specified herein, immediately reconduct only the specific performance testing unless significant modifications, as judged by the ENGINEER, are required. 2. Complete all retesting within six months after completion of the start of the performance testing. 3. Recalibrate all instrumentation associated with the retest in accordance with specified requirements for testing equipment if the instrumentation had not be calibrated within the 30 days immediately prior to the retest. May 09 11264F-5 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienVWFort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecUll264F (FS-Clean) 4. Reimburse the OWNER for all OWNER's labor costs associated with the retesting, including engineering fees and administration costs. 3.02 ENERGY CONSUMPTION EFFICIENCY TESTS A. Conduct the ECE tests on each ozone generator and power supply. B. Cooling Water Temperature: Conduct the ECE tests when the nonpotable water supply temperature is 70 degrees Fahrenheit plus or minus two degrees Fahrenheit or adjust the AVE-KW values in accordance with the efficiency versus cooling water temperature curves for the new ozone generators as submitted by the Ozone System Supplier. C. Test Production Capacities: Test each new generator at the following generator operating capacities at a concentration of 8 percent by weight: 1. 3080 pounds ozone per day. 2. 2250 pounds ozone per day. 3. 1560 pounds ozone per day. 3.03 DESIGN PRODUCTION CAPACITY TESTS A. Conduct the DPC tests on each ozone generator and power supply. B. Cooling Water Temperature: Conduct the DPC tests when the plant's non -potable water supply temperature is 70 degrees Fahrenheit plus or minus two degrees Fahrenheit. C. Operate each ozone generator at Ozone Generator Design Production Capacity `! and under design conditions, as specified in Section 11264C, during the DPC test. 3.04 ENERGY CONSUMPTION EFFICIENCY TESTING PROCEDURE A. Conduct the following ECE testing procedure on each new ozone generator: 1. Immediately prior to the ECE testing, operate the generator at an operating level greater than 3080 pounds ozone per day for a minimum of two hours. 2. Reduce the operating level of the generator to a stable production level of 3080 pounds ozone per day. 3. Operate the generator at the 3080-pound ozone per day operating level for two hours. Record the rate of energy consumption, in kW, during the test as specified herein. 4. Reduce the operating level of the generator to a stable operating level of 2250 pounds per day. 5. Operate the generator at the 2250-pound ozone per day operating level for two hours. Record the rate of energy consumption, in kW, during the test as specified herein. 6. Reduce the operating level of the generator to a stable operating level of 1560 pounds per day. 7. Operate the generators at the 1560-pound ozone per day operating level for two hours. Record the rate of energy consumption, in kW, during the test as specified herein. May 09 11264F-6 8205A10 pwJlCa,cidDocmnents aonOXTcd Wath182OMIWSpecilca6onslPwSdeWI1264F (FS-Clean) "ow, B. Calculations: Calculate the ozone generator actual SEC (kW-h/pound ozone) for these operating conditions by summing the time -factored specific energy consumption at each of the operating levels according the following equation: (AVE-KW3080 pp, kW/(3080 x 0.0417) x 0.33 + (AVE-KW2250 ppa kW/(2250 x 0.0417) x 0.34 + (AVE-KW1560 ppa kW/(1560 x 0.0417) x 0.33 = actual specific energy consumption, SECACT for these operating conditions. Average the SECACT obtained for each ozone generator and utilize in the calculations of Section 11264A. 3.05 DESIGN PRODUCTION CAPACITY TESTING PROTOCOL A. Conduct the following DPC testing protocol on each ozone generator: 1. Immediately prior to each DPC testing, operate the ozone generator to be tested at the Ozone Generator Design Production Capacity under design operating conditions, as specified in Sections 11264A and 11264C, for a minimum of six hours. 2. Following the pretest period, operate the ozone generator being tested at the Ozone Generator Design Production Capacity under design operating conditions, as specified in Sections 11264A and 11264C, for a minimum of two hours. Record mass flow rate of ozone being produced, in lb/day, and the rate of energy consumption, in kW, during the test as specified herein. 3. Calculate the actual specific energy consumption, SECACT, under design production conditions by the following equation: kW x 24 SECACT _ Ozone Generator Design Production Capacity END OF SECTION 1-.. May 09 11264F-7 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientrrX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Select/11264F (FS-Clean) 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Pump head (total dynamic head, TDH), flow capacity, pump efficiency, net positive suction head available (NPSHa), and net positive suction head required (NPSHr): As defined in HI 1.1-1.5 and 9.1-9.5 and as modified in this Section. B. Suction head: Gauge pressure available at pump intake flange or bell in feet of fluid above atmospheric; average when using multiple suction pressure taps, regardless of variation in individual taps. C. Tolerances: In accordance with HI 1.1-1.5, 1.6, and 9.1-9.5, unless specified more restrictively. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Horizontal, centrifugal, ASME B73.1 end suction pump. Provide components as specified and other items as required for a complete and operational system. B. Design requirements: 1. Pump performance characteristics: As specified in the Pump Schedule. 2. Motor characteristics: As specified in the Pump Schedule. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 15050. B. Torsional analysis: Submit as specified in Section 15050 when scheduled below. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 15050. B. Provide pumps in this Section from same manufacturer. C. Require pump manufacturer to furnish and coordinate pump, driver, drive, and pump components as scheduled below and to provide written installation and check out requirements. D. Manufacturer qualifications: 1. Experience: Demonstrate minimum 5 years experience in manufacture of ASME B73.1 horizontal end suction pumps which have been successfully utilized in municipal water/wastewater applications. 2. References: Provide a reference list of at least 5 different installations in municipal water/wastewater applications in the continental United States, where the manufacturer has supplied equipment substantially similar in design and characteristics to that proposed here. The installations listed must: a. Have been designed and fabricated by the manufacturer. b. Be at least equal to the horsepower to that of the largest unit specified. c. Have been in continuous operation for last 5 years. d. Include in the list the name, address, and telephone number of the OWNER, horsepower, and the time in operation. May 09 113120-2 8205A10 pwJlCarolWl =menWCGenVTXIFort WoffA2OMlo Speafica§orWPre-SeleWll3120 (FSClean) ...i 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING r A. As specified in Section 15050. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental requirements: As specified in Section 15050. 1.09 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 15050. 1.10 MAINTENANCE A. Special tools: Deliver 1 set for each furnished pump type and size needed to assemble and disassemble pump system. B. Spare parts: Deliver the following as specified in Section 01600: 1. Pump thrust bearing set. 2. Pump radial bearing set. 3. Gasket set. 4. Motor bearing set of each type. 5. Pump impeller, trimmed to match installed impeller. 6. Mechanical seal rebuild set. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Pump: One of the following or equal: 1. Flowserve Corporation, model as scheduled. 2. ITT Industries, similar to scheduled model. 2.02 MATERIALS A. General: Materials in the Pump Schedule shall be the type and grade as specified below. B. Cast iron: ASTM A 48, Class 30 minimum. C. Ductile iron: ASTM A 395. D. Steel: ASTM A 108, Grade as scheduled or ASTM A 322, Grade as scheduled. E. Stainless steel: ASTM A 276, type as scheduled. F. Iron -chromium alloy: ASTM A 743, Grade CA40. G. Structural steel: ASTM A 283, Grade D. H. Hastalloy C: ASTM A494, Grade CW-12M-2. ...i May 09 113120-3 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienUTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Select/113120 (FS-Clean) I. Titanium: ASTM B367, Grade C-3. 2.03 GENERAL PUMP CONSTRUCTION A. Type: Horizontal centrifugal, end suction pumps manufactured in accordance with ASME B73.1, except as modified in this Section. B. Other requirements: 1. Vibration: In accordance with ASME B73.1 or as specified in Section 15958, whichever is more stringent. 2.04 PUMP CASINGS A. Type: 1 piece volute type with integral suction and discharge nozzles. B. Material: As scheduled. C. Design Working Pressure: Minimum 1.10 times maximum shutoff total dynamic head with maximum installable impeller diameter at maximum operating speed plus maximum suction static head. D. Hydrostatic test: 10 minute hydrostatic test at minimum 1.5 times Design Working Pressure. 2.05 IMPELLERS A. Type: As scheduled. B. Material: As scheduled. C. Method of securing to shafts: Threaded impeller in accordance with ASME B73.1. D. Balance: As specified in Section 15050 and vibration criteria as specified in Section 15958. 2.06 PUMP SHAFTS A. Material: As scheduled. B. Strength: Able to withstand minimum 1.5 times maximum operating torque and other loads. C. Solid shaft without sleeve. 2.07 STUFFING BOXES A. Type: In accordance with ASME B73.1, Figure 3, with universal cover adapter. B. Materials: As scheduled. C. Shaft seal type: As scheduled and as specified in Section 15050. D. Drain: Minimum 3/8-inch size, with drain line to nearest equipment floor drain. May 09 113120-4 8205A10 pwJ1Car0k1D0MrWWCWntlrX 0M WvtdL S 1WS9=ficafts9r&SekU113120 (FS-Clean) 2.08 BEARINGS AND BEARING FRAME A. Bearing type: Anti -friction meeting ABMA standards; self -aligning spherical roller type radial bearings; double row ball type or tapered roller for thrust bearings. B. Bearing lubrication: Grease or oil lubricated as scheduled. 1. For oil lubricated, provide pressure lubricating system or separate oil reservoir type system with oil filler pipe and external level indicator gauge. 2. For grease lubricated, provide external grease fittings with grease relief pipe. 3. Size sufficiently to safely absorb heat energy normally generated in bearing under maximum ambient temperature of 60 degrees Celsius. C. Bearing life: In accordance with ASME B73.1. D. Pump bearing frames: 1. Material: As scheduled. 2. Provide a 1-piece rigid construction with bearing housing at outboard (pump) end, and end cover or housing at inboard (driver) end. E. Grease seals and deflectors: Lip type seals and labyrinth type deflectors at both ends of bearing housings, able to prevent entrance of contaminants. F. Bearing isolators: Provide bearing isolators on each end with integral locking ring to prevent leakage past the shaft. 1. Manufacturers: Inpro Model VBX, or equal. 2.09 COUPLINGS A. Types: As scheduled and as specified in Section 15050. B. Design coupling to withstand a minimum of 1.5 times the maximum operating torque and other imposed loads. 2.10 SUPPORTS, PEDESTALS, AND BASEPLATES A. Type: Provide baseplate and supports in accordance with ASME B73.1. B. Materials: Same as pump casing or ASTM A 283 steel, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and coated as specified in Section 09960. C. Pump and driver support strength: Able to withstand minimum 1.5 times maximum imposed operating loads or imposed seismic loads, whichever is greater. 2.11 EQUIPMENT GUARDS A. Provide equipment safety guards as specified in Section 15050. 2.12 DRIVERS A. Horsepower: As scheduled. Listed driver horsepower is the minimum to be supplied. Increase driver horsepower if required to prevent driver overload while operating at any point of the supplied pump operating head -flow curve including runout. However, electrical equipment is sized for scheduled horsepower. NOW1011 May 09 113120-5 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienVMFort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Select/113120 (FS-Clean) B. Motors: As scheduled and as specified in Section 16222. C. Variable frequency drives: As scheduled and as specified in Sections 16261. D. Other drivers: As scheduled and as specified in sections listed in the Schedule. E. Non -reverse ratchets, type: When scheduled, able to prevent reverse rotation of pump and driver. 2.13 CONTROL SYSTEM A. Provide control system with equipment protective devices for safe operation in a local control panel and with remote inputs and outputs as indicated on the Drawings to provide the control functions as specified in Sections 17100 and 17710. 2.14 FINISHES A. Prepare surfaces and apply protective finishes as specified in Section 09905. 2.15 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Witnessing: Source or factory testing shall be witnessed by the ENGINEER or OWNER when scheduled; provide advanced notice of source testing as specified in Section 15958. B. Equipment performance test: test level as scheduled; test as specified in Section 15958. C. Vibration test: Test level as scheduled; test as specified in Section 15958. D. Noise test: Test level as scheduled; test as specified in Section 15958. E. Variable frequency drive and motor factory tests: Test as specified in scheduled section. F. Hydrostatic pressure tests: As specified for components in this Section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Products shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified in Section 15050. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Witnessing: All field-testing shall be witnessed by the ENGINEER; provide advanced notice of field-testing as specified in Section 15958. B. Inspection and checkout: As specified in Sections 15050 and 15958. May 09 113120-6 8205A10 pv j C=ftDocumentS aWntlfXf ort Wartt=5AWI54ecffiwWmPre-SekV113120 (FSClean) ..i C. Equipment performance test: Test level as scheduled; test as specified in Section 15958. D. Vibration test: Test level as scheduled; test as specified in Section 15958. E. Noise test: Test level as scheduled; test as specified in Section 15958. F. Operational testing: As specified in Section 01650. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Manufacturer shall inspect system before initial start-up and certify that system has been correctly installed and prepared for start-up as specified in this Section and in Sections 15050 and 15958. B. Training: As specified in Section 01650. 3.04 PUMP SCHEDULE NH-OZD101-PMP01, NH-OZCW01- PMP02, NHOZD102-PMP01, NHOZCW02-PMP02, NH-OZD103- Tag Numbers PMP01, NH-OZCW03-PMP03 General Characteristics: Service Ozone Generator Cooling Water Pump Quantity 6 Maximum Noise, dBA at 3 feet 85 Torsional Analysis Not Required Minimum Pumped Fluid degrees Fahrenheit 50 Normal Pumped Fluid degrees Fahrenheit 70 Maximum Pumped Fluid degrees Fahrenheit 85 Pump Characteristics: Impeller Type Enclosed Bearing Lubrication Grease Shaft Seal Type Double Mechanical Coupling Type Spacer R Speed Control Fixed Maximum Pump Revolutions per Minute 1800 Minimum Pump Revolutions per Minute 500 Suction Flange Size, minimum (in.) Sized by Ozone System Manufacturer Discharge Flange Size, minimum (in.) Sized by Ozone System Manufacturer May 09 113120-7 8205A10 pw:IlCarollolDocuments/Client fX/Fort Worth/8205A1NSpecifications/Pre-Seleetl113120 (FS-Clean) Tag Numbers Rated Desiqn Point (at maximum rpm): Flow, Gallons per Minute Head, Feet Minimum Efficiency, Percent Required Condition 2 (at maximum rpm): Flow, Gallons per Minute Head Range, Feet Minimum Efficiency, Percent Required Condition 3 (at maximum rpm): Flow, Gallons per Minute Head Range, Feet Minimum Efficiency, Percent Other Conditions: Maximum NPSHr at Every Specified Flow, Feet Minimum NPSHa at Every Specified Flow, Feet Minimum Suction Static Head, Feet Maximum Suction Static Head, Feet Pump Casing Impeller Impeller Wear Ring Casing or Suction Head Wear Ring Shaft Shaft Sleeve Stuffing Boxes NH-OZD101-PMP01, NH-OZCW01- PMP02, NHOZD102-PMP01, NHOZCW02-PMP02, NH-OZD103- PMP01, NH-OZCW03-PMP03 Sized by Ozone System Manufacturer Sized by Ozone System Manufacturer Sized by Ozone System Manufacturer Sized by Ozone System Manufacturer Sized by Ozone System Manufacturer Sized by Ozone System Manufacturer Sized by Ozone System Manufacturer Sized by Ozone System Manufacturer Sized by Ozone System Manufacturer Sized by Ozone System Manufacturer Sized by Ozone System Manufacturer Sized by Ozone System Manufacturer Sized by Ozone System Manufacturer Pump Materials: May 09 113120-8 pwJ/Carold0omments/ClienVTXJFort WorftV8205A101Specificalions/PraSaleci1113120 (FS-Clean) Ductile Iron 316 SS 420 Stainless 420 Stainless 316 Stainless 316 Stainless Ductile Iron 8205A10 �.. NH-OZD101-PMP01, NH-OZCW01- PMP02, NHOZD102-PMP01, NHOZCW02-PMP02, NH-OZD103- Tag Numbers PMP01, NH-OZCW03-PMP03 Driver Characteristics: Driver Type i Motor Variable Frequency Drives/Other Driver VFD Specification Section Drive Arrangement Horizontal, Coupled Non -reverse Ratchets None Minimum Driver Horsepower Sized by Ozone System Manufacturer Maximum Driver Speed, Revolutions per Minute 1800 Motor Characteristics (when motor is driver type): Motor Specification Section 16222 Service Factor 1.15 Voltage/Phases/Hertz 460/3/60 NEMA Enclosure Type TEFC Source Quality Control Testinq: Test Witnessing Not Witnessed Performance Test Level 1 Vibration Test Level 1 Noise Test Level 1 1 Field Quality Control Testing: Performance Test Level 1 Vibration Test Level 1 Noise Test Level 1 END OF SECTION rr Iftwe May 09 113120-9 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientlTX/Fort Worthl8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecU113120 (FS-Clean) This Page Intentionally Left Blank N%0/ May 09 113120-10 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienNTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specificabons/Pre-Selectlt 13120 (FSClean) SECTION 13446 VALVE OPERATORS • PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Valve Operators. 2. Key Operated Valves. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Aluminum Association (AA): 1. DAF-45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include shop drawings for valve operators integral with valve. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide valve operators integral with valve, except for valve operators utilizing T- wrenches or keys, and portable operators intended to operate more than 1 valve. B. Provide similar operators by 1 manufacturer. C. Provide valve operators and motorized operators by 1 manufacturer. 1.05 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: 1. Key Operated Valve Keys or Wrenches: Furnish a minimum 4 keys with 4 foot shafts and 3 foot pipe handles or wrenches with 4 foot shafts and 3 foot handles for operating key operated valves. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVE OPERATORS A. Position Indicators: 1. Tail rods on hydraulic cylinders, or dial indicators with clear full -open and closed position indicators, calibrated in number of turns or percentage of opening. B. Manual or Power Operator Size: 1. Sized to deliver maximum force required under most severe specified operating condition, including static and dynamic forces, seat and wedge 19400, May 09 13446-1 8205A10 pwJ/Carollo/Documents/ClienVTX/Forl Worthl8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Select/13446 (FS-Clean) friction, and seating and unseating forces with safety factor of 5, unless otherwise specified. C. Operator Size: Capable of supporting weight of suspended shafting unless carried by bottom thrust bearings; shaft guides with wall mounting brackets. D. Provisions for Alternate Operation: Where specified or indicated on the Drawings, position and equip crank or handwheel operated geared valve operators. E. Operation: Counterclockwise to open with suitable and adequate stops, capable of resisting at least twice normal operating force to prevent overrun of valve in open or closed position. F. Open Direction Indicator: Cast arrow and legend indicating direction to rotate operator on handwheel, chain wheel rim, crank, or other prominent place. G. Worm Gear Operators: Provide gearing on worm gear operators that is self-locking with gear ratio such that torque in excess of 160 foot-pounds will not need to be applied to operate valve at most adverse conditions for which valve is designed. H. Traveling Nut Operators: Capable of requiring maximum 100 foot-pounds of torque when operating valve under most adverse condition; limit stops on input shaft of manual operators for fully open and closed positions; non-moving vertical axis of operating nut when opening or closing valve. 2.02 HAND -CRANKED GEARED OPERATORS A. Type: Single removable crank; fully enclosed. B. Mounting: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings position operator 36 inches (nominal) above top of walkway surface. C. Operating Nut: When scheduled for portable operators. D. Geared Lifts: 2-speed with minimum ratio of 4 to 1. E. Teeth on Gears, Spur Pinions, Bevel Gears, and Bevel Pinions: Cut. F. Lift Nuts: Cast manganese bronze. G. Exterior Surfaces on Cast -Iron Lift Parts: Smooth. H. Bearings above and below Flange on Lift Nuts: Ball or roller; capable of taking thrust developed by opening and closing of gates under maximum operating head; with bronze sleeve bearings and sufficient grease fittings for lubrication of moving parts, including bearings and gears. Crank Rotation Indicator: Cast arrow with word OPEN in prominent location readily visible indicating correct rotation of crank to open gate. Hand Cranks: 15 inch radius; requiring maximum 25 pounds pull to operate gate at maximum operating head; with: 1. Revolving brass sleeves. May 09 13446-2 8205A10 pWjjCardldDoa WhCkn0XlF0rt WVW8205At015p dficationsJPm_-&cU13446 (F&Clmn) i 2. Gears, spur pinions, bevel gears, and bevel pinions with cut teeth. 3. Cast manganese bronze lift nuts. 4. Cast-iron lift parts with smooth exterior surfaces. K. Indicator: Dial position type mounted on gear operator; enclosed in cast-iron or aluminum housing with clear plastic cover; marked with fully open, 3/4, 1/2, 1/4, and closed positions. 2.03 ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT A. Wall Brackets or Haunches: As indicated on the Drawings. B. Stems: As specified in individual equipment sections. C. Stem Couplings: As specified in individual equipment sections. D. Stem Guides: As specified in individual equipment sections. E. Wall Brackets: As specified in individual equipment sections. F. Stem Stuffing Boxes: Cast-iron, with adjustable gland and packing. G. Fasteners and Anchor Bolts: As specified in individual equipment sections. H. Geared Valve Operators: Provided with cut gears, either spur or worm; sized to operate valves at most adverse design condition; with maximum 40 pound pull at handwheel or chain wheel rim. I. Geared Valve Traveling Nut Operators: Acceptable only where specified or indicated on the Drawings. J. Accessory Equipment for Valves Requiring Remote Operators: Operating stems, stem couplings, stem guides, wall brackets, and stem stuffing boxes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCHEDULES A. Geared Operators: Provide geared operators for following valves: 1. Butterfly valves larger than 6 inches, nominal size, on liquid service. 2. Butterfly valves larger than 10 inches, nominal size, on gas and air service. 3. Plug valves 6 inches, nominal size, and larger. B. Chain Wheel Operators: Provide chain wheel operators for valves mounted more than 6 feet to centerline above floors. END OF SECTION May 09 13446-3 8205A10 pw:/ICarollo/Documents/Client/TX/Forl Worth/8205A10/Specificabons/Pre-SelecUl3446 (FS-Clean) b) LOCAL -STOP -REMOTE selector switch. c) LOCAL mode control devices: (1) Operate valve when LOCAL -STOP -REMOTE integral to actuator is in REMOTE and LOCAL -STOP -REMOTE on remote control station is in LOCAL. (2) OPEN -CLOSE spring -return switch or OPEN and CLOSE pushbuttons. d) Pilots lights to indicate valve position: (1) Fully open. (2) Fully closed. 5. Control inputs: a. Capable of using 120 VAC inputs. b. Controls the valve when LOCAL -STOP -REMOTE is in REMOTE. c. Isolated inputs capable of operating from external control voltage source or internal power supply. 1) Furnish 120 VAC control power supplies within the actuator. d. Provide the following inputs: 1) OPEN. 2) CLOSE. 3) STOP. e. OPEN and CLOSE inputs configurable between maintained (actuator runs until end of travel, high torque, or a STOP input) and momentary (actuator stops when command is removed). 6. Status outputs: a. Monitor relay output: Dry contact, normally closed, opens when actuator is not in REMOTE or in the event of any internal fault or alarm condition. b. Dry contact outputs configured for the functions indicated on the Drawings. Provide the following outputs for all actuators: 1) Fully closed. 2) Fully open. 3) LOCAL -STOP -REMOTE in REMOTE position. c. Capable of being configured for the following additional functions: 1) Communications failure. 2) High motor temperature. 3) Valve opening or closing. 4) Valve moving (continuous or pulsing). 5) Motor tripped on torque in mid -travel. 6) Motor stalled. 7) Actuator being operated by hand wheel. 8) Open or close interlock active. 9) ESD active. 10) Motor tripped on torque in mid -travel. 11) Motor tripped on torque going open. 12) Motor tripped on torque going closed. 13) Pre-set torque exceeded. 14) Valve jammed. 15) Lost main power phase. 16) Control supply lost. 17) Battery low. 18) Internal failure detected. d. All output contacts rated for 5 amps, 120VAC. 7. Analog input: May 09 13447-4 8205A10 pWMW�eW /TVGdWUN820 IWSpedka*XmPreSeled113447(FS-Clean) a. Provide a 4-20 milliampere analog input for analog modulating valves when indicated on the Drawings. b. Modulate valve to maintain position based on analog input value. c. Maximum input impedance 250 ohms. 8. Analog output[s]: a. Provide an isolated 4-20 milliampere analog output[s] when indicated on the Drawings. 1) Loop power sourced from the actuator power supply. 2) Capable of driving into a load up to 500 ohms. 3) Output proportional to process value(s) indicated on the Drawings: 4) Valve or gate position. 5) Operating torque. 9. Network communications: a. Communications and control between the actuator and plant's control system shall utilize the following protocol: 1) DeviceNET. B. Features: 1. Time delay on reversal: Incorporate time delay between stopping actuator and starting in opposite direction to limit excessive current, torque, and heating from instantaneous reversal. 2. Data logging: a. Store diagnostic data and reference data. 1) Time -stamped historical operating data, including number of operations and most recent operations. 2) Torque profiles showing actual torque at each valve position through the operating range. 3) Store reference data (recorded during commissioning) and data from last operation. 3. Provide display of logged data on the actuator, or provisions to download to a personal computer. C. Materials: 1. Construct motorized actuators of materials suitable for the environment in which the valve or gate is to be installed. D. Components: 1. Motors: a. Specifically designed for valve actuator service with high starting torque, totally enclosed non -ventilated construction. b. Torque ratings equal to or greater than that required for valve seating and dynamic torques with a 25 percent factor of safety. 1) Design requirements for rubber -seated AWWA butterfly valves: a) Design actuators for maximum valve operating torque, in accordance with and using safety factors required in AWWA C504 and AWWA C540. (1) Valve actuator torque requirement for open -close service: Not less than the required valve seating and dynamic torques under design operating conditions in accordance with AWWA C504. (2) Valve actuator torque requirement for modulating service: Not less than twice the required valve dynamic torque "ftw May 09 13447-5 8205A10 PwJ1CaMkM=mWftC16fW1Xf0d W0W 205A1MP8dit8b0WPM-SekMY13447 (FSGean) design operating conditions in accordance with %under - AWWA C504. 2) Design requirements for slide gates, gate valves, knife gate valves, globe valves, and diaphragm valves: a) Design actuators for maximum gate or valve operating torque, in accordance with and using safety factors required in AWWA C540. as b) Design for the maximum torque and thrust running load over the full cycle. c) Maximum torque or thrust rating: The actuator stall torque or maximum thrust output shall not exceed the torque or thrust capability of the valve or gate, as determined by the valve or gate manufacturer. c. Capable of being removed and replaced without draining the actuator gear case. d. Motor bearings shall be amply proportioned of the anti -friction type and permanently lubricated. e. Rated for operating under the following conditions without exceeding temperature limits with ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celsius. 1) Continuous operation for 15 minutes or twice the open -to -close operating time (whichever is greater) at normal operating torque or 33 percent of maximum torque (whichever is greater). 2) 60 starts per hour for open/close service or 1,200 starts per hour for modulating service. f. Provide the following motor protection features: 1) Jammed valve (no valve motion detected through a time delay). 2) High motor temperature (sensed by a embedded thermostats). 3) High torque. 4) Single phasing protection. 2. Enclosures: a. Actuator housing ratings as indicated in the Motorized Actuator Schedule. b. Stainless steel external fasteners. c. Provide 'O' ring seals for each of the following areas: 1) Between the terminal compartment and the internal electrical elements. 2) Between the mechanical and electrical portions to protect from the ingress of oil, and to protect the mechanical components of oil from dust and moisture when the electrical terminal is open. d. Provide the following minimum enclosure ratings: 1) NEMA 4X for general applications. e. NEMA 7 certified by Factory Mutual for Class 1, Division 1, Groups C, D, E, F and G, for actuators installed in Class 1, Division 1 and 2 areas. 3. Position sensing: a. Electronic and adjustable using a solid-state encoder wheel. Mechanical limit switches and potentiometers are not acceptable. b. Capable of retaining position and monitoring valve or gate motion when valve is manually actuated and when main power is not present. c. Valve range and position switch outputs field adjustable. 4. Torque sensing: a. Torque shutdown setting: 40 percent to 100 percent rated torque. 1) Adjustable in 1 percent increments. b. Torque display: 0 to 100 percent -rated torque. May 09 13447-6 8205A10 J aoomg�m*jCierWWptWWVV&pMIC/Spemt*r&PmSdedl3441(FS-Clean) c. Capable of interrupting control circuit during both opening and closing and when valve torque overload occurs. d. Electrical or electronic torque sensing: 1) Extrapolating torque from mechanically measured motor speed is not acceptable due to response time. e. Independent of variations in frequency, voltage, or temperature. f. The actuator shall store actual operational torque curves for retrieval by plant maintenance staff. g. Provide a temporary inhibit of the torque sensing system during unseating or during starting in mid -travel against high inertia loads. h. Provide visible verification of torque switch status without any housing disassembly. 5. Manual operators: a. Hand wheel for manual operation. 1) Maximum 80 pound pull on rim when operating gate or valve under maximum load. 2) Provide pull chain when motorized actuator is located more than 6 feet above floor surface. Chain shall be of sufficient length to reach approximately 4 feet above the operating level. Where the chain obstructs an aisle or walkway, provide holdback or other means to ensure chain does not create a nuisance or hazard to operating personnel. b. Declutch lever: Padlockable, capable of mechanically disengaging motor and related gearing and freeing hand wheel for manual operation. 6. Gearing: Hardened alloy steel spur or helical gears and self-locking, alloy bronze worm gear set. a. Accurately cut to assure minimum backlash. 7. Bearings: a. Anti -friction bearing with caged balls or rollers throughout. b. Sealed -for -life type thrust bearings housed in a separate thrust base. 8. Drive bushing: a. Easily detachable for machining to suit the valve stem or gearbox input shaft. b. Positioned in a detachable base of the actuator. c. Lubrication: Provide totally enclosed actuator gearing with oil filled gear case suitable for operation at any angle. Suitable for standard SAE80EP gear oil. Actuators requiring special or exotic lubricants are not acceptable. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Software: 1. Furnish PC -based diagnostic and configuration software to display diagnostic data and configure actuators. 2. Provide software communications to the valve actuator and hand-held setting tool using Bluetooth wireless or IrDA infrared communications. a. Provide all accessories and drivers required for operation and communications with a standard personal computer running Microsoft Windows XP. B. Setting Tool: May 09 13447-7 8205A10 pw://Carollo/DocumentsClienUTXlFort Worth/8205A10/SpecificationsrPre-Selectl13447 (FS-Clean) If required for setting or configuring the actuator, provide a hand-held setting tool. Provide a hand-held setting tool capable of non -intrusive calibration and interrogation of the actuator. a. Furnish 1 setting tool for every 10 actuators. b. Capable of communicating with PC -based configuration software, and transferring the following in either direction between the computer and programmer and setting tool, and between the setting tool and actuator: c. Actuator configurations. 1) Capable or storing up to ten different configurations. d. Diagnostic data. 1) Capable of storing 4 complete sets of diagnostic data. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Test: 1. Test each actuator in the factory, and submit an individual test certificate for each actuator. 2. Perform a high potential test and record the following information: a. Test voltage. 3. Simulate a maximum and typical valve loads and record the following information: a. Current and power factor at maximum and set torque values. b. Torque as measured by the actuator. c. Actuator output speed or operating time. 4. Performance testing: Conduct performance test for each actuator simulating valve operating torque from full -open to full -close and from full -close to full -open. The following information shall be recorded during each performance test: a. Torque at maximum torque setting. b. Current at maximum torque setting. c. Test voltage and frequency. d. Actuator output speed and operating time for full -open to full -close. e. Amperage draw on motors at breakaway and under normal operation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install actuators in accordance with manufacturers instructions. END OF SECTION May 09 13447-8 8205A10 pwjJ CaroAdD=mentstClierWWort WorthMSAi(YSWdcabo(r.PreSekxU13441(F&Clean) ` SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Basic design and performance requirements for mechanical equipment. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09905 - Protective Coatings. 2. Section 15082 - Piping Insulation. 3. Section 17050 - Process Control and Instrumentation General Requirements. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Gear Manufacturer's Association (ALMA) Standards: 1. AGMA 2001-1388 - Fundamental Rating Factors and Calculation Methods for Involute Spur and Helical Gear Teeth. 2. AGMA 6000-A88 - Specification for Measurement of Linear Vibration on Gear U nits. 3. AGMA 6010-E88 - Standard for Spur, Helical, Herringbone, and Bevel Enclosed Drives. 4. AGMA 6019-E89 - Standard for Gear motors using Spur, Helical, Herringbone, Straight Bevel or Spiral Bevel Gears. 5. AGMA 6025-C90 - Sound for Enclosed Helical, Herringbone, and Spiral Bevel Gear Drives. B. American Society of Mechanical (ASME): 1. ASME PTC 8.2 - Performance Test Code for Centrifugal Pumps. 2. ASME PTC 10 - Performance Test Code - Compressors and Exhausters. 3. ASME PTC 17 - Performance Test Code - Reciprocating Internal -Combustion Engines. 4. ASME PTC 11 - Performance Test Code - Measurement of Shaft Horsepower - Instruments and Apparatus. C. American Bearing Manufactures Association (ABMA) Standards: 1. ABMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. 2. ABMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A 36 - Standard Specification for Structural Steel. 2. A 48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 3. A 526 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Hot Dip Process, Commercial Quality. 4. B 61 - Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings. 5. B 62 - Standard specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. Iftow May 09 15050-1 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/CIIenVTX/Fod Wodh/8205A10/Specificaticns/Pre-Select/15050 (FS-Clean) 6. E 527 - Standard Practice for Numbering Alloys and Metals (UNS). E. Hydraulic Institute Standards (HI): 1. HI 1.1-1.5 - Centrifugal Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application, and Operation. 2. HI 1.6 - Centrifugal Pump Tests. 3. HI 2.1-2.5 - Vertical Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application, and Operation. 4. HI 2.6 - Vertical Pump Tests. 5. HI 3.1-1.5 - Rotary Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application, and Operation. 6. HI 3.6 - Rotary Pump Tests. 7. HI 4.1-4.6 - Sealless Rotary Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application, Operation, and Test. 8. HI 5.1-1.6 - Sealless Centrifugal Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application, Operation, and Test. 9. HI 6.1-6.5 - Reciprocating Power Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application, and Operation. 10. HI 7.1-7.5 - Controlled Volume Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application, and Operation. 11. HI 9.1-9.5 - Pumps - General Guidelines for Types, Definitions, Application, and Sound Measurement. F. American Petroleum Institute (API): 1. ANSUAPI 682 - Shaft Sealing Systems for Centrifugal and Rotary Pumps. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Special Tools: Tools that have been specifically made for use on unit of equipment for assembly, disassembly, repair, or maintenance. B. Resonant Frequency: That frequency at which a small driving force produces an ever -larger vibration if no dampening exists. C. Rotational Frequency: The revolutions per unit of time usually expressed as revolutions per minute. D. Critical Frequency: Same as resonant frequency for the rotating elements or the installed machine and base. E. Peak Vibration Velocity: The root mean square average of the peak velocity of the vibrational movement times the square root of 2 in inches per second. Rotational Speed: Same as rotational frequency. G. Maximum Excitation Frequency: The excitation frequency with the highest vibration velocity of several excitation frequencies that are a function of the design of a particular machine. H. Critical Speed: Same as critical frequency. May 09 15050-2 8205A10 pwJlCwWa3=ffwWChenVT)UFatWathf8 M101SpedksWns1PmSeknU15050(FS-Clean) 14"00. I. Free Field Noise Level: Noise measured without any reflective surfaces (an idealized situation),- sound pressure levels at 3 feet from the source unless specified otherwise. Operating Weight: The weight of unit plus weight of fluids or solids normally contained in unit during operation. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: 1. Provisions specified under each technical equipment specification prevail over and supersede conflicting provisions as specified in this Section. 2. Provide equipment and parts that are suitable for stresses, which may occur during fabrication, transportation, erection, and operation. 3. Provide equipment that has not been in service prior to delivery, except as required by tests. 4. Like parts of duplicate units are to be interchangeable. 5. When 2 or more units of equipment for the same purpose are required, provide products of same manufacturer. 6. Equipment manufacturer's responsibility extends to selection and mounting of gear drive units, motors or other prime movers, accessories, and auxiliaries required for proper operation. 7. When necessary, modify manufacturer's standard product to conform to specified requirements or requirements indicated on the Drawings and contained in Laws and Regulations. B. Material Requirements: 1. Materials: Suitable for superior corrosion resistance and for services under conditions normally encountered in similar installations. 2. Dissimilar Metals: Separate contacting surfaces with dielectric material. C. Power Transmission Systems: 1. Power Transmission Equipment: V-belts, sheaves, shaft couplings, chains, sprockets, mechanical variable -speed drives, variable frequency drives, gear reducers, open and enclosed gearing, clutches, brakes, intermediate shafting, intermediate bearings, and U-joints are to be rated for 24 hour -a -day continuous service or frequent stops -and -starts intermittent service, whichever is most severe, and sized with a minimum service factor of 1.5. a. Apply 1.5 service factor to nameplate horsepower and torque of prime source of power and not to actual equipment loading. b. Apply service factors higher than 1.5 when recommended for continuous 24 hour -per -day operation and shock loadings specified in AGMA 6010-E88, other applicable AGMA standards, or other applicable referenced standards. c. When manufacturer recommends service factor greater than 1.5, manufacturer's recommendation takes precedence. D. Vibration: 1. Resonant Frequency: Ensure there are no natural resonant torsional, radial, or axial frequencies within 25 percent above or below the operating rotational frequencies or multiples of the operating rotational frequencies that may be excited by the equipment design. 140... May 09 15050-3 8205A10 pwJ/Carollo/Documents/Client/TX/Fort Worth/8205A101Specifications/Pre-SelecU15050 (FS-Clean) Design, balance and align equipment to meet the vibration criteria specified in �-- Section 15958. E. Equipment Mounting and Anchoring: 1. Mount equipment on cast iron or welded steel bases with structural steel support frames. Utilize continuous welds to seal seams and contact edges between steel members. Grind welds smooth. s 2. Provide bases and supports with machined support pads, dowels for alignment of mating of adjacent items, adequate openings to facilitate grouting, and openings for electrical conduits. 3. Provide jacking screws in bases and supports for equipment weighing over 1,000 pounds. 4. Anchorage of Equipment to Concrete: Perform calculations and determine number, size, type, strength, and location of anchor bolts or other connections. 5. Provide bolt sleeves for anchor bolts for heavy equipment. Adjust bolts to final location and fill sleeve with non -shrink grout. 6. Anchorage of Equipment to Metal Supports: Perform calculations and determine number, size, type, strength, and location of bolts used to connect equipment to metal supports. 7. Design equipment anchorage, supports, and connections for dead load, running loads, loads during start-up, seismic load, and other loads as required for proper operation of equipment. F. Seismic Design: 1. Design equipment anchorage and related details for seismic design criteria as specified in Section 01612. 2. For equipment with operating weight of 400 pounds or more, provide calculations for: a. Determine operating weight and centroid of equipment. b. Calculate forces and overturning moments. c. Calculate shear and tension forces in equipment anchorages, supports, and connections. d. Design equipment anchorage, supports, and connections based on calculated shear and tension forces. G. Equipment Units Weighing 50 Pounds or More: Provide with lifting lugs or eyes to allow removal with hoist or other lifting device. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. For Each Item of Equipment: a. Design features. b. Load capacities. c. Efficiency ratings. d. Material designations by UNS alloy number or ASTM Specification and Grade. e. Data needed to verify compliance with the Specifications. f. Catalog data. g. Name plate data. h. Clearly mark submittal information to show specific items, materials, and accessories or options being furnished. May 09 15050-4 8205A10 pwJ1CardWDoc nwWC1W*rrXlFortWorth/M5A1U/SpedfleadmoPm-Seled15050(FSC1=) .i 2. Gear Reduction Units: a. Engineering information per applicable AGMA standards. b. Gear mesh frequencies. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Drawings for Equipment: a. Drawings that include outline drawings, cut -away drawings, parts lists, material specification lists, and other information required to substantiate that proposed equipment complies with specified requirements. 2. Outline drawings showing equipment, driver, driven equipment, pumps, seal, motor(s) or other specified drivers, variable frequency drive, shafting, U-joints, couplings, drive arrangement, gears, baseplate or support dimensions, anchor bolt sizes and locations, bearings, and other furnished components. 3. Installation and checkout instructions including leveling and alignment tolerances, grouting, lubrication requirements, and initial start-up procedures. 4. Wiring, control schematics, control logic diagrams and ladder logic or similar for computer based controls. 5. Recommended or normal operating parameters such as temperatures and pressures. 6. Alarm and shutdown set points for all controls furnished. C. Calculations: 1. Calculations and other information to substantiate equipment base plates, supports, bolts, anchor bolts, and other connections meet minimum design strength requirements and seismic design criteria specified in Section XXXX. 2. Bearing L,D life calculations in accordance with ABMA 9 or ABMA 11 calculation methods for drivers, pumps, gears, shafts, motors, and other drive line components with bearings. 3. Calculations and other information to substantiate that operating rotational frequencies meet the requirements of this Section. 4. Torsional Analysis of Power Transmission Systems: When torsional analysis specified in the equipment Sections, provide: a. Sketch of system components identifying physical characteristics including mass, diameter, thickness, and stiffness. b. Results of analysis including first and second critical frequencies of system components and complete system. 5. Calculations shall be signed and stamped by a civil or structural engineer registered to practice in the state where the Project is located. D. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Source quality control reports and certified test data as specified in Section 15958. 2. Submit factory test reports before shipment. 3. Certified static and dynamic balancing reports for rotating equipment. 4. Field quality control reports and test data as specified in Section 15958. 5. Certificate of Proper Installation: As specified in Section 01650. 6. Submit material test reports a specified in the equipment sections. E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. As specified in Section 01730. 2. Submit prior to training of OWNER's personnel. ..pwl May 09 15050-5 8205A10 pw://CaroliNDocumenls/ClienVTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecU15050 (FS-Clean) 3. Make available at project site complete copy of manuals for use by field personnel and ENGINEER during start-up and testing of equipment. 4. Include manufacturer and model number of every bearing; include calculated ball pass frequencies of the installed equipment for both the inner and outer raceways. 5. Include motor rotor bar pass frequencies. F. Project Closeout Documents: As specified in Section 01700. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Field Service: 1. Furnish services of authorized representative specially trained in installation of equipment. a. Visit project site and perform tasks necessary to certify installation. b. Furnish Certificate of Proper Installation as specified in Section 01650. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: 1. Equipment: Pack in boxes, crates, or otherwise protect from damage and moisture, dust, or dirt during shipment, handling, and storage. 2. Bearings: Separately pack or otherwise suitably protect during transport. 3. Spare Parts: Deliver in boxes labeled with contents, equipment to which spare parts belong, and name of CONTRACTOR. B. Storage: 1. Equipment Having Bearings: Instruct CONTRACTOR to store in enclosed facilities. Rotate units at least once per month or more often as recommended by the manufacturer to protect rotating elements and bearings. 2. Gear Boxes: Oil filled or sprayed with rust preventive protective coating. C. Protection: 1. Equipment: Instruct CONTRACTOR to protect equipment from deleterious exposure. 2. Painted Surfaces: Instruct CONTRACTOR to protect against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Equipment for project is to be suitable for performance in domestic water treatment plant with ozone environment and under following conditions: a. Ambient Temperatures: 0 to 110 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Relative Humidities: 10 to 95 percent. c. Site Elevation: Approximately 550 feet above mean sea level. 1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Equipment Anchoring: Provide anchoring material and templates or setting drawings in adequate time for anchors to be cast -in -place when concrete is placed. B. General Start -Up and Testing of Equipment: May 09 15050-6 8205A10 pwj Cardb/Dwnents/CWnMJFortWorttM5AI01SM kati =ftSe 15050 (FS-Clean) I . Assist CONTRACTOR with general start-up and testing procedures after operation and maintenance manuals for equipment have been received. 2. Conduct functional testing of mechanical or electrical systems when each system is substantially complete and after general start-up and testing procedures have been successfully completed. 3. Functional testing requirements as specified in Sections 01650, 15958, 16950, 17050, and the equipment sections. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Warrant equipment free of defects in material and workmanship for 2 years from the date of acceptance or date of first beneficial use of the equipment by the OWNER; cover parts and labor. B. Where an extended warranty beyond 2 years is required by the detailed equipment specification Section, manufacturer's extended warranty shall be issued in the OWNER's name. 1.11 MAINTENANCE A. Special Tools: 1. When specified, provide special tools required for operation and maintenance. 2. Mark or tag and list such tools in maintenance and operations instructions. Describe use of each tool. B. Spare Belts: 1. When spare belts are specified, furnish 1 spare belt for every different type and size of belt -driven unit. a. Where 2 or more belts are involved, fumish matched sets. b. Identify as to equipment, design, horsepower, speed, length, sheave size, and use. c. Package in boxes labeled with identification of contents. C. Spare Parts: 1. Assume responsibility until turned over to OWNER. 2. Store in enclosed facilities. 3. Furnish itemized list and match identification tag attached to every part. 4. List parts by generic title and identification number. 5. Furnish name, address, and telephone number of supplier and spare parts warehouse. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Ferrous Materials: 1. Steel for Members used in Fabrication of Assemblies: ASTM A 36. 2. Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, tough, close -grained gray iron, free from blowholes, flaws, and other imperfections. 3. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526, minimum 0.0635 inch (16 gauge). 4. Expanded Metal: ASTM A 36, 13 gauge, 1/2-inch flat pattern expanded metal. "F May 09 15050-7 8205A10 pwJlCaro1bDocuments1CknV Fort WotVB205A10/SpedfintionslPreSelectl15050 (FSClean) B. Nonferrous Materials: 1. Stainless Steel: Type 304 or 316 as specified. Provide L grade where welding required. 2. Bronze in Contact with Liquid: Composition of not more than 2 percent aluminum nor more than 6 percent zinc; UNS Alloy C83600, C92200 or C92700 in accordance with ASTM B 61, B 62, B 505, or B 584, when not specified otherwise. C. Dielectric Materials for Separation of Dissimilar Metals: 1. Neoprene, bituminous impregnated felt, heavy bituminous coatings, nonmetallic separators or washers, or other materials. 2.02 SHAFT COUPLINGS A. General: 1. Type and Ratings: Provide nonlubricated type, designed for not less than 50,000 hours of operating life. 2. Sizes: Provide as recommended by manufacturer for specific application, considering horsepower, speed of rotation, and type of service. 3. Use: Use of couplings specified in this Section does not relieve CONTRACTOR of responsibility to provide precision alignment of driver -driven units as required by equipment manufacturer and alignment criteria specified elsewhere in this section. B. Shaft Couplings - Close Coupled: Shaft couplings for close coupled electric motor driven equipment 1/2 horsepower or larger and subject to sudden torque reversals or shock loading: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. T.B. Woods, Dura-Flex, L-Jaw C-Jaw or G-Jaw. b. Lovejoy, S-Flex. 2. Provide flexible couplings designed to accommodate angular misalignment, parallel misalignment, and end float. 3. Manufacture flexible component of coupling from synthetic rubber, or urethane. 4. Provide service factor of 2.5 for electric motor drives and 3.5 for engine drives. 5. Do not allow metal -to -metal contact between driver and driven equipment. 6. Examples of loads where sudden torque reversals may be expected: a. Reciprocating pumps, blowers, and compressors. b. Conveyor belts. c. Reversing equipment. C. Shaft Couplings - Direct Connected: Shaft couplings for direct connected electric motor driven equipment 1/2 horsepower or larger and subject to normal torque, non - reversing applications: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Falk, WA Torus. b. T.B. Woods, Dura-Flex, Sure -Flex or Form -Flex. 2. Provide flexible couplings designed to accommodate shock loading, vibration, and shaft misalignment or offset. 3. Provide flexible connecting element of rubber and reinforcement fibers. 4. Connect stub shafts through collars or round flanges, firmly keyed to their shafts with neoprene cylinders held to individual flanges by through pins. May 09 15050-8 8205A10 pwJ/CamlWD=menWCrimVWFod WwOVU IO/SpedcaOmsPm-qeWd15050 (FS-Clean) ..r D. Spacer Couplings: Where cartridge type mechanical seals or non -split seals are specified, provide a spacer type coupling of sufficient length to remove the seal without disturbing the driver or driven equipment unless noted otherwise in the individual equipment specifications. E. Specialized Couplings: Where requirements of equipment dictate specialized features, supply coupling recommended for service by manufacturer. 2.03 STUFFING BOX, SEAL CHAMBER, AND SHAFT SEALS A. General: 1. Unless otherwise noted in the equipment section, provide cartridge type, double mechanical shaft seals for pumps. 2. Provide a stuffing box large enough for a double mechanical seal. 3. Where packing is specified, provide stuffing box large enough to receive a double mechanical seal. 4. Provide seal or packing flush connections, (3/4 inch size unless another size is indicated on the Drawings). Provide and route leakage drain line to nearest equipment floor drain indicated on the Drawings. 5. For pumps with packing, design packing gland to allow adjustment and repacking without dismantling pump except to open up packing box. 6. Seal or packing flush requirements shall comply with API Standard 682 requirements. Unless otherwise indicated, specified or required by the equipment and seal manufacturers, the following API flushing Plan arrangements shall be utilized as appropriate for the application: a. Single seal, clean water applications: Plan 11 (Discharge bypass to seal). b. Single seal, vertical pump applications: Plan 13 (Seal bypass to suction). c. Single seal, clean hot water (>180 degrees F) applications: Plan 23 ( Seal cooler and pumping ring). d. Single seal, solids, or contaminants containing water applications: Plan 32 (External seal water- see Carollo typical detail # M262). e. Double seal applications: Plan 54 (External seal water- see Carollo typical detail # M262). B. Packing: When specified in the equipment section of the specifications, provide the following type of packing: 1. Drinking Water Service: a. Approved by the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) or National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). b. Asbestos free. c. Material: Braided PTFE (Teflon). d. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Chesterton, 1725. 2) John Crane, Inc., equivalent product. C. Mechanical Seals: Provide seal types specified in the equipment sections and as specified herein. 1. Provide seal types meeting the following requirements: a. Balanced hydraulically. b. Spring: Stationary, out of pumping fluid, Hastelloy C; Type Elgiloy or 17-7 PH stainless steel for split seals. c. O-Ring: Viton 747. May 09 15050-9 8205A10 pw//Carollo/Dowments/ClienUTXIFoO Worth/8205At0ISpecifications/Pre-SelecUI5050 (FS-Clean) d. Gland: Type 316L stainless steel. e. Set Screws: Type 316L stainless steel. f. Faces: Reaction bonded, Silicon Carbide. g. Seal designed to withstand 300 pounds per square inch gauge minimum differential pressures in either direction; no requirement for seal buffer pressure to be maintained when pump is not operational even though process suction head may be present in pump. 2. Cartridge Type Single Mechanical: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Chesterton, S10. b. John Crane, 5610 Series. 3. Cartridge Type Double Mechanical: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Chesterton, S20. b. John Crane, 5620 Series. 4. Split Face Single Mechanical: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Chesterton, 442. b. John Crane, 3710. 2.04 GEAR REDUCTION UNITS A. Type: Helical or herringbone, unless otherwise specified. B. Design: 1. Made of alloys treated for hardness and for severe service. 2. AGMA Class II Service: a. Use more severe service condition when such is recommended by unit's manufacturer. 3. Cast iron housing with gears running in oil. 4. Anti -friction bearings. 5. Thermal horsepower rating based on maximum horsepower rating of prime mover not actual load. 6. Manufactured in accordance with applicable AGMA standards. C. Planetary gear units are not to be used. 2.05 BELT DRIVES A. Sheaves: 1. Separately mounted on bushings by means of at least 3 pull-up bolts or cap tightening screws. 2. When 2 sheave sizes are specified, provide separate belts sized for each set of sheaves. 3. Statically balanced for all; dynamically balanced for sheaves that operates at peripheral speed of more than 5,500 feet per minute. 4. Key bushings to drive shaft. B. Belts: Anti -static type when explosion -proof equipment or environment is specified. C. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Dodge, Dyna-V belts with matching Dyna-V sheaves and Taper -Lock bushings. May 09 15050-10 8205A10 pnj/CamWDo=entUCkntlfWort Wa0V=M101Sp dkaWmP&,9&W15050 (FS-Clean) ..i 2. Wood's, Ultra-V belts with matching Sure -Grip sheaves and Sure -Grip bushings. 2.06 BEARINGS A. Type: Oil or grease lubricated, ball or roller antifriction type, of standard manufacture. B. Oil Lubricated Bearings: Provide either pressure lubricating system or separate oil reservoir splash type system. 1. Size oil lubrication systems to safely absorb heat energy generated in bearings when equipment is operating under normal conditions and with the ambient temperature 15 degree Fahrenheit above the maximum ambient temperature specified elsewhere in this Section. 2. Provide an external oil cooler when required to satisfy the specified operating conditions. Provide air cooled system if a water cooling source is not indicated on the Drawings. Equip oil cooler with a filler pipe and external level gauge. C. Grease Lubricated Bearings, Except Those Specified to Be Factory Sealed: Fit with easily accessible grease supply, flush, drain, and relief fittings. 1. Lubrication Lines and Fittings: a. Lines: Minimum 1/4-inch diameter stainless steel tubing. b. Multiple Fitting Assemblies: Mount fittings together in easily accessible location. c. Use standard hydraulic type grease supply fittings. 1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a) Alenite. NNOW b) Zurk. D. Ratings: Rated in accordance with ABMA 9 or ABMA 11 for L10 rating life of not less than 50,000 hours. 1. Higher ratings, when specified in other Sections, supersede preceding requirement. 2.07 SAFETY GUARDS A. Drive Assemblies: Enclose sprockets, belts, drive chains, gearings, couplings, and other moving parts on drive assemblies in safety enclosures that are in compliance with applicable Laws and Regulations. B. Shafts: Provide guards that protect personnel from rotating shafts or components within 7.5 feet of floors or operating platforms. C. Guard Requirements: 1. Allow visual inspection of moving parts without removal. 2. Allow access to lubrication fittings. 3. Prevent entrance of rain or dripping water for outdoor locations. 4. Size belt and sheave guards to allow for installation of sheaves 15 percent larger and addition of one belt. D. Materials: 1. Sheet Metal: Carbon steel, 12 gauge minimum thickness, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. ..i May 09 15050-11 8205A10 pw.1/CarolblDocunrentslCllent/TX/Fort Worth/8205A101SpecificationsiPreSelecN15050 (FS-Clean) 2. Fasteners: Type 304 stainless steel. 2.08 SPRING VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Design Requirements: 1. Telescopic top and bottom housing with vertical stabilizers to resist lateral and vertical forces. 2. Use steel coil springs. 3. Design vibration isolators in accordance with seismic design criteria as specified in Section 01612. B. Performance Requirements: Minimum spring deflection of 1 inch under static load and capable of limiting transmissability to 10 percent maximum at design operating load. C. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. California Dynamics Corporation, Type RJSD. 2. Mason Industries, equivalent product. D. Materials: 1. Fabricate isolators using welded steel or shatterproof ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A 536 Grade CS45-12. E. Spring Steel: ASTM A 125 2.09 FABRICATION A. Nameplates: 1. Engraved or stamped on Type 304 stainless steel and fastened to equipment at factory in an accessible and visible location. 2. Indicate Following Information as Applicable: a. Manufacturer's name. b. Equipment model number and serial number. c. Maximum and Normal rotating speed. d. Horsepower. e. Rated capacity. f. Service class per applicable standards. 3. Nameplates for Pumps: Include: a. Rated total dynamic head in feet of fluid. b. Rated flow in gallons per minute. c. Impeller, gear, screw, diaphragm, or piston size. 4. Gear Reduction Units: Include: a. AGMA Class of service. b. Service factor. c. Input and output speeds. B. Bolt Holes in Equipment Support Frames: Do not exceed bolt diameter by more than 25 percent, up to limiting maximum diameter oversize of 1/4 inch. C. Shop Finishing: 1. Provide factory coating as specified in Section 09905. If not specified in Section 09905, provide coating as follows: May 09 15050-12 8205A10 pwjCarollo =rmnt&UienVrMFodWaW820 IVopearK*r"s(Pn:SelecU15W(FS-Clean) �,. a. Bases and Support Frames in Contact with Concrete or Other Material: Coat contacting surfaces with minimum of 2 coats of zinc chromate primer before installation or grouting. b. Shop Primer for Steel and Iron Surfaces, Unless Specified Otherwise: 1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a) Ameron, Amercoat 185 Universal Primer. b) Cook, 391-N-167 Barrier Coat. c) Kop-Coat, Pug Primer. d) Tnemec, 37-77 Chem -Prime. e) Valspar, 13-R-28 Chromox Primer. c. Coat machined, polished, and nonferrous surfaces which are not to be painted with rust -preventive compounds. 1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a) Houghton, Rust Veto 344. b) Rust-Oleum, R-9. d. Coating for Ferrous Metal Surfaces, Except Stainless Steel: High solids polyamine epoxy. e. Finish Painting of Motors: Shop finish paint with manufacturer's standard coating, unless otherwise specified in Section 09905. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 15958 for testing requirements and the individual equipment sections of the Specifications. 2.11 INSULATING FLANGE KITS �..i A. Insulating flange kits shall be installed between piping of dissimilar metals, and shall include insulating flange gaskets, insulating sleeves for studs, and insulating washers for both sides of flanges. Steel washers shall be installed between the insulating washers and nuts. Insulating flange joints shall be assembled in the shop and tested as specified. 1. The insulating gasket material shall be J.M. Clipper Corp., Red Devil Style 940; Coltec Industries, Inc/Garlock Mechanical Packing Div., Blue -Gard Style 3000; or equal. Two laminated 1/8-inch gaskets may be used to attain the required 1/4-inch thickness. Each gasket shall be furnished in one piece. The circular ring gaskets shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of ASTM F104. Insulating gaskets shall have a dielectric strength of not less than 500 volts per mil as tested in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D149 in an insulated oil bath. The gasket material shall not protrude beyond the flange perimeters. 2. Insulating sleeves shall be fabricated from DuPont, Mylar, or equal, having a dielectric strength of not less than 1200 volts per mil. Sleeves shall be spiral - wound to 1/32-inch thickness and be cut to length in the shop after the finished thickness of the flange has been determined. 3. Insulating washers shall be, Pyrox, Nema G-10, as manufactured by PSI Products, or equal, having a dielectric strength of no less than 700 volts per mil and a compressive strength of 50,000 psi. The washer shall have an inside diameter to fit snugly over the outside diameter of the companion sleeve and be 1/4-inch thick. 4. Steel washers shall be 1/8-inch thick hot -rolled steel designed to fit snugly over the insulating sleeve in accordance with the requirements of ASTM F844. May 09 15050-13 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienUTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecU15050 (FS-Clean) B. Insulating flange kits for oxygen/ozone process/off-gas/vent service shall be , approved for oxygen and ozone compatibility. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect all components for shipping damage, conformance to specifications, and proper torques and tightness of fasteners. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. B. Lubrication Lines and Fittings: 1. Lines from Fittings to Point of Use: Support and protect. 2. Fittings: a. Bring fittings to outside of equipment in manner such that they are readily accessible from outside without necessity of removing covers, plates, housings, or guards. b. Mount fittings together wherever possible using factory -mounted multiple fitting assemblies securely mounted, parallel with equipment lines, and protected from damage. c. Fittings for Underwater Bearings: Bring fittings above water surface and mount on edge of structure above. C. Alignment of Drivers and Equipment: 1. Where drive motors or other drivers are connected to driven equipment by flexible coupling, disconnect coupling halves and align driver and equipment after complete unit has been leveled on its foundation. 2. Comply with procedures of appropriate Hydraulic Institute Standards, AGMA Standards, alignment tolerances of equipment manufacturers and the following requirements to bring components into angular and parallel alignment: a. Maximum Total Coupling Offset (not the per plane offset): Not to exceed 0.5 mils per inch of coupling length for spacer couplings based on coupling length (not dial separation). b. Utilize jacking screws, wedges, or shims as recommended by the equipment manufacturer and as specified in the equipment sections. 3. Use reverse -indicator arrangement dial type or laser type alignment indicators: Mount indicators on the driver/coupling flange and equipment/coupling flange. Alignment instrumentation accuracy shall be sufficient to read angular and radial misalignment at 10 percent or less of the manufacturer's recommended acceptable misalignment. 4. Alignment and calculations shall include measurement and allowance for thermal growth, spacer coupling length, indicator separation and axial spacing tolerances of the coupling. 5. When alignment satisfies most stringent tolerance of system components, grout between base and foundation. Allow minimum 48 hours for grout to harden. After grout hardens, remove jacking screws, tighten anchor bolts and other connections, and recheck alignment. Correct alignment as required. May 09 15050-14 8205A10 Pw-AW0k/D0eirnent&C1ft1V 0rtWotV820SAlWSpwficabms(PMSekcV15050(FSClean) ..i 6. After operational testing is complete, dowel motor or drivers and driven equipment. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. D. Warning Signs: Mount securely with stainless fasteners at equipment that can be started automatically or from remote locations. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Equipment shall be tested as specified in Section 15958 and the individual equipment Section of the Specifications. B. Operational testing shall be performed as required by Section 01650. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. Field Checkout: Before field-testing and start-up, provide services of factory -trained field service representative to certify the equipment has been installed, aligned, and checked in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the Specifications. B. Testing: Provide services of factory trained representative to observe and advise the CONTRACTOR during field quality control testing. C. Training: When training is specified, provide services of factory -trained representative to perform training as specified in Section 01650. END OF SECTION '"NOW, May 09 15050-15 8205A10 pw:f/Cardlo/DocumentslClientfTX/Fort Worth/8205Al0/Spedfications/Pre-Selectil5050 (FS-Clean) This Page Intentionally Left Blank May 09 15050-16 8205A10 pwe0Caro WDocu wtssrUientlT%IFort WatIhI OM1N5pedkatbra4 ,Sele<i115050 (FS-Clean) ..i 41 SECTION 15052 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Basic piping materials and methods. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09905 - Protective Coatings. 2. Section 15956 - Piping Systems Testing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. F 37 - Standard Test Methods for Sealability of Gasket Materials. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Buried Pipe: Pipe that is buried in the soil, or cast in a concrete pipe encasement that is buried in the soil. B. Exposed Pipe: Pipe that is located above ground, or pipe that is located inside a structure, supported by a structure, or case into a concrete structure. C. Underground Piping: Piping actually buried in soil or cast in concrete. D. Underwater Piping: Piping below tops of walls in basins or tanks containing water. E. Wet Wall: Wall with water on at least 1 side. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Escutcheons. 2. Link -type seals. 3. Gaskets. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 ESCUTCHEONS A. Material: Chrome -plated steel plate. B. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Dearborn Brass Company, Model Number 5358. 2. Keeney Manufacturing Company, Model Number 102 or Number 105. 3. Beaton and Corbin, Model Number 1 or Number 13. May 09 15052-1 8205A10 pv:l/Carollo/Documents/ClienKtX/Fort Worth18205A10/Speu(cations/Pre-SelecUl5052 (FSClean) 2.02 LINK TYPE SEALS —„ A. Characteristics: 1. Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking neoprene or synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and wall opening. 2. Assemble links solely with stainless steel bolts and nuts to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe. 3. Provide a nylon polymer pressure plate with 316 Stainless Steel hardware. Isolate pressure plate from contact with wall sleeve. B. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Calpico, Incorporated. 2. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc., Link -Seal. 2.03 GASKETS A. Gaskets for Non -Steam Cleaned Ductile Iron and Steel Piping: 1. Suitable for pressures equal to and less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, temperatures equal to or less than 250 degrees Fahrenheit, and raw sewage service. 2. Gasket Material: a. Neoprene elastomer with minimum Shore A hardness value of 70. b. Reinforcement: Inserted 13-ounce nylon fabric cloth for pipes 20 inch or larger. c. Thickness: Minimum 3/32-inch thick for less than 10-inch pipe; minimum 1/8 inch thick for 10-inch and larger pipe. 3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Pipe less than 20 inches in diameter: 1) Garlock, Style 7797. 2) John Crane, similar product. b. Pipe 20 inches in diameter and larger: 1) Garlock, Style 8798. 2) John Crane, similar product. B. Gaskets for Steam Cleaned Non Glass -Lined Ductile Iron and Steel Piping: 1. Suitable for pressures equal and less than 150-pounds per square inch gauge, temperatures equal or less than 360 degrees Fahrenheit, and raw sewage service. 2. Material: a. Neoprene elastomer, compressed, non -asbestos fiber reinforcement. 3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Garlock, Bluegard 3300. b. John Crane, similar product. C. Gaskets for Flanged Joints in Polyvinyl Chloride and Polyethylene Piping: 1. Suitable for pressures equal to or less than 150-pounds per square inch gauge, with low flange bolt loadings, temperatures equal and less than 120 degrees Fahrenheit, and polymer, chlorine, caustic solutions, and other chemicals, except chemicals which liberate free fluorine including fluorochemicals and gaseous fluorine. 2. Material: 0.125-inch thick Viton rubber. May 09 15052-2 8205A10 pwj1Ca oh WoaA205AIOISpecirimbo" Pm-SeWl5052 (FS-gean) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Garlock. b. John Crane, similar product. D. Gaskets for Flanged Joints in Gas or Liquefied Petroleum Gas Piping: 1. Chlorine Gas Application in Black Steel Piping: Suitable for pressures equal to or less than 300 pounds per square inch gauge, temperatures equal to or less than 100 degrees Fahrenheit, and chlorine gas application. 2. Liquefied Petroleum, Propane, and Natural Gas Applications in black steel piping: suitable for pressures equal to or less than 250 pounds per square inch gauge, temperatures equal to or less than 100 degrees Fahrenheit and liquefied petroleum gas, propane gas, and natural gas application. 3. Material: a. Microcellular Teflon outer layers with rigid center layer. b. Sealability in accordance with ASTM F 37, less than 0.55 millimeters per hour leakage of iso-octane at 1,000 pounds per square inch gasket load and 9.8 pounds per square inch fluid pressure. 4. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Garlock, Style 3545. b. John Crane, similar product. E. Gaskets for Flanged Joints in Low Pressure Air Piping: 1. Suitable for pressures equal to or less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, temperatures equal to or less than 300 degrees Fahrenheit, and compressed air service. 2. Material: EPDM elastomer, 1/8 inch thick, 60 Shore hardness, smooth surface. 3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: .✓ a. Garlock, Style 8314. b. John Crane, similar product. F. Gaskets for Flanged Joints in Ductile Iron or Steel Water Piping: 1. Suitable for hot or cold water, pressures equal to or less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, and temperatures equal to or less than 160 degrees Fahrenheit. 2. Material: a. Neoprene elastomer, compressed, with non -asbestos fiber reinforcement. b. Teflon ring; or teflon envelope with non -asbestos filler. 3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Garlock, Bluegard 3300. b. John Crane, similar product. G. Gaskets for any other fluids or any other pressure or temperature conditions shall be suitable for the specific fluids and pressure and temperature conditions. 141mir May 09 15052-3 8205A10 pvc//Carollo/Documents/ClienUTX/Fort Worth/8205A70/Specifications/Pre-Select/15052 (FS-Clean) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION Not Used 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Exposed Piping: 1. Install exposed piping in straight runs parallel to the axes of structures, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings: a. Install piping runs plumb and level, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Slope plumbing drain piping with a minimum of 1/4 inch per foot downward in the direction of flow. 2. Install exposed piping after installing equipment and after piping and fitting locations have been determined. 3. Support Piping: a. Do not transfer pipe loads and strain to equipment. b. Properly support, suspend, or anchor expose pipe, fittings, valves, and appurtenances to prevent sagging, overstressing, or movement of piping; and to prevent thrusts or loads on or against connected pumps, and other equipment. c. Support Spacing: 1) Support 2-inch and smaller piping on horizontal and vertical runs at maximum 5 feet on center, unless otherwise specified. 2) Support larger than 2-inch piping on horizontal and vertical runs at maximum 10 feet on center, unless otherwise specified. 3) Support exposed polyvinyl chloride and other plastic pipes at maximum 5 feet on center, regardless of size. 4) Support tubing, copper pipe and tubing, and rubber hose and tubing at intervals close enough to prevent sagging greater than 1/4 inch between supports. d. Install Supports at: 1) Horizontal bends. 2) Both sides of flexible pipe connections. 3) Base of risers. 4) Connections to pumps and other equipment. 5) Valves and appurtenances. e. Do not use chains, plumbers' straps, wire, or similar devices for permanently suspending, supporting, or restraining pipes. f. Supports, clamps, brackets, and portions of support system bearing against copper pipe: Copper plated, copper throughout, or isolated with neoprene or polyvinyl chloride tape. g. Where pipe is insulated, install over -sized supports and hangers. h. Install insulation shield in accordance with MSS SP-69, Type 40. Shield shall be galvanized steel unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. i. Coat support system components as specified in Section 09905. 4. In addition to the joints indicated on the Drawings, provide unions, flexible couplings, flanged joints, flanged coupling adapters, and other types of joints or means which are compatible with and suitable for the piping system, and necessary to allow ready assembly and disassembly of the piping. May 09 15052-4 8205A10 pwJ/Caro1b0 cuments1C5enYWort WoM18205A101Specificabons/Pre-SelecU15052 (FS-Gean) 5. Assemble Piping Without Distortion or Stresses Caused by Misalignment: a. Match and properly orient flanges, unions, flexible couplings, and other connections. b. Do not subject piping to bending or other undue stresses when fitting piping. Do not correct defective orientation or alignment by distorting flanged joints or subjecting flange bolts to bending or other undue stresses. c. Flange bolts, union halves, flexible connectors, and other connection elements shall slip freely into place. d. Alter piping assembly to fit, when proper fit is not obtained. e. Install eccentric reducers or increasers with the top horizontal for pump suction piping. B. Connections Between Ferrous and Nonferrous Metals: 1. Connect ferrous and nonferrous metal piping, tubing, and fittings with dielectric couplings especially designed for the prevention of chemical reactions between dissimilar metals. 2. Nonferrous metals include aluminum, copper, and copper alloys. C. Flanged connections between dissimilar metals such as ductile iron pipe and steel pipe: 1. Provide stainless steel bolts with isolation bushings and washers, and full -face flange gaskets. 3.03 CLEANING A. Piping Cleaning: 1. Upon completion of installation, clean piping interior of foreign matter and debris. Perform special cleaning when required by the Contract Documents. B. Cleaning Ozone and Oxygen Piping: 1. Clean all ozone, gaseous oxygen, and liquid oxygen piping in accordance with CGA Standard G-4.1. 3.04 PIPING ALTERNATIVES A. Provide piping in accordance with this Section and as scheduled, unless indicated on the Drawings or specified otherwise. B. Alternative Pipe Ratings: Piping with greater pressure rating than specified may be substituted in lieu of specified piping without changes to the Contract Price. Piping of different material may not be substituted in lieu of specified piping. C. Valves in Piping Sections: Capable of withstanding specified test pressures for piping sections and fabricated with ends to fit piping. D. For flanged joints, where one of the joining flanges is raised face type, provide a matching raised face type flange for the other joining flange. 3.05 PIPING SCHEDULE t A. Piping schedule at the end of this Section. ,%ago, May 09 15052-5 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Ciient(FX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Select/15052 (FS-Clean) END OF SECTION May 09 15052-6 8205A10 pwJXardb0=menWCfianOI cd WoNJ8205At01SpeQfim&x*lPre,Se"15052 (FS-aean) PIPING SCHEDULE d� Test �D Process Joints/ Test Pressure/ Abbrev. Service Piping Fittings Pressure Method GOX Gaseous Oxygen Copper Pipe Brazed 150 psi AM s - outside, o exposed and 0 buried Gaseous SS 316L, Socket- 50 spi AM n Oxygen, inside Schedule 40S Weld < 2-inch diameter = Gaseous SS 316L, Butt -Weld 50 psi AM Oxygen, Inside, Schedule 10S m >_ 2 1/2 inch m diameter � 0 o OZG Ozone Feed Gas SS 316L, Socket- 50 spi AM N <_ 2-inch diameter Schedule 40S Weld T C1 ~ — Ozone Feed Gas SS 316L, Butt -Weld 50 psi AM — >_ 2 1/2-inch Schedule 10S diameter Analyzer 316 SS tubing 1/4 inch 50 psi AM NPT fittings V Vent SS 316L, Butt -Weld or 25 psi AM Schedule 10S Flanged Plant Nonpotable Steel Welded or 200 psi HH co Water Water > 12- Flanged o inches, exposed Cn D Nonpotable Steel Welded or 200 psi HH o Water <_ 12- Flanged inches and >_ 4- inches exposed Lining Coating Comments -- -- Cleaned for oxygen service -- -- Cleaned for oxygen service -- -- Cleaned for oxygen service Cleaned for oxygen service -- - Cleaned for oxygen service -- -- Cleaned for oxygen service -- -- Ozone Generation Building Only Epoxy Primer/Paint Heat trace piping < 12-inch and insulate all exterior Epoxy Primer/Paint exposed piping go CO Process Abbrev. Service � Nonpotable Water 5 3-inches, other than Basin Complex service water CW Cooling Water s CD ^' Note: 2 °' 1. Abbreviations: AM Air Method HH High Head N O D 0 Piping Copper SST PIPING SCHEDULE Test Joints/ Test Pressure/ Fittings Pressure Method Soldered 200 psi HH Butt -Welded 200 psi or Flanged HH Lining Coating Comments Heat trace and _ Insulate exterior exposed piping SECTION 15110 VALVES PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Basic requirements for valves. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09905 - Protective Coatings. 2. Section 15052 - Basic Piping Materials and Methods. 3. Section 15251 - Ductile Iron Piping. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ ASME): 1. B16.21 - Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges. 2. B16.34 - Valves - Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A 126 - Specification for Gray Iron Casting for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. .,r 2. A 167 - Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 3. A 536 - Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 4. E 527 - Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS). C. American National Standards Institute/American Water Works Association (ANSI/AWWA): 1. C 111/A21.11 - Standard for Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe Fittings. D. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C 504 - Standard for Rubber -Seated Butterfly Valves. E. SSPC — Society for Protective Coatings: 1. SSPC SP - 1 - Solvent Cleaning. 2. SSPC SP 2 - Surface Preparation Specification for Hand Tool Cleaning. 3. SSPC SP7 - Brush -Off Blast Cleaning. 4. SSPC SP10 - Surface Preparation Specification for Near -White Blast Cleaning. May 09 15110-1 8205A10 PirX8rdldDocun*nW0ienUWcd WorM205A10/Spedficabonslpre.Se1ecV15110 (FS-CLw) 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Pressure Rating: 1. Suitable for service under minimum working pressures of 150 pounds per square inch gauge. 2. When a piping system is specified in the Piping Schedule to be tested at a pressure greater than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, provide valves for - that piping system with design working pressure which is sufficient to withstand the test pressure. B. Valve to Piping Connections: 1. Valves 3 inch nominal size and larger: Flanged ends. 2. Valves less than 3 inch nominal size: Screwed ends. 3. Plastic Valves in Plastic Piping: a. Up to 2.5 Inches: Provide solvent or heat welded unions. b. 3 inches and above: Provide solvent or heat welded flanges. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submittals Prior to Installation: 1. Product Data: Submit detailed technical information relating to the valve including description of component parts, materials of construction, performance, dimensions, and weights. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Furnish bound sets of installation, operation, and maintenance instructions for ka each type of manual valve 4 inch in nominal size and larger, and all non - manual valves. Include information on valve operators in operation and maintenance instruction manual. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Valves: Manufactured by manufacturers whose valves have had successful operational experience in comparable service. 1.06 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect valves and protective coatings from damage during unloading, handling and installation; repair coating where damaged. PART PRODUCTS n1 2.01 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167, Type 316, or Type 304, UNS Alloy S31600 or S30400. x May 09 15110-2 8205A10 px,J/CaroWD= nenWCliwVWFa1 WaNJB'2054lMMdkafi -V SelecU15110 (F&a-n) ..� B. Valve and Operator Bolts and Nuts: 1. Fabricated of stainless steel for the following installation conditions: a. Submerged. b. In an enclosed space above sewage or water. c. In structures containing sewage or water, below top of walls. d. At openings in concrete or metal decks. e. For ozone service. f. For gaseous oxygen service inside the Ozone Generation Building. 2. Where dissimilar metals are being bolted, use stainless steel bolts with isolation bushings and washers. C. Bronze and Brass Alloys: Use bronze and brass alloys with not more than 6 percent zinc and not more than 2 percent aluminum in the manufacture of valve parts; UNS Alloy C83600 or C92200 unless specified otherwise. D. Valve Bodies: Cast iron in accordance with ASTM A 126, Class 30 minimum or ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 minimum unless specified otherwise. 2.02 INTERIOR PROTECTIVE LINING A. When specified in the particular valve specification, provide valves with type of protective lining specified in the particular valve Specification. B. Apply protective lining to interior, non -working surfaces, except stainless steel surfaces. C. Lining Types: 1. Powder Epoxy: a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) 3-M Company, ScotchKote 134; certified to NSF 61 for drinking water use. b. Clean surfaces to meet SSPC SP-7 or SP-10, as recommended by epoxy manufacturer. c. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. d. Coating Thickness: 0.010 to 0.012 inches except that: 1) Coating thickness in grooves for gaskets: 0.005 inches. 2) Do not coat seat grooves in valves with bonded seat. e. Quality Control: 1) Lining thickness: Measured with a non-destructive magnetic type thickness gauge. 2) Verify lining integrity with a wet sponge -testing unit operating at approximately 60 volts, or as recommended by the lining manufacturer. 3) Consider tests successful when lining thickness meets specified requirements and when no pinholes are found. 4) Correct defective lining disclosed by unsuccessful tests, and repeat test. 5) Repair pinholes with liquid epoxy recommended by manufacturer of the epoxy used for lining. *41UW May 09 15110-3 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientlTX/Forl Worth/8205A10/Specificafions/Pre-SelecU15110 (FS-Clean) 2. High Solids Epoxy: a. Product: As specified in Section 09905. 1) Certified to NSF 61 for drinking water use. b. Clean surfaces to meet SP-7 or SP-10, or as recommended by coating manufacturer. c. Apply coating in accordance with Section 09905 and coating manufacturer's recommendations. d. Quality Control: After coating is cured, check coated surface for porosity with a holiday detector set at 1,800 volts, or as recommended by coating manufacturer. 1) Repair holidays and other irregularities and retest coating. 2) Repeat procedure until holidays and other irregularities are corrected. 2.03 VALVE OPERATORS A. Valve operator "Open" direction: Open counterclockwise. B. Provide valves located below operating level or deck with extensions for key operation or floor stands and handwheels. C. Provide manually operated valves located not more than 6 feet above the operating level with tee handles, wrenches, or handwheels. 1. Make the valve operator more conveniently accessible by rolling valves, located more than 5 feet but less than 6 feet above the operating level, toward the operating side. 2. Secure tee handles and wrenches to the valve head or stem, except where a handle or wrench so secured constitutes a hazard to personnel; in which case, stow handle or wrench immediately adjacent to the valve on or in a suitable hanger, bracket, or receptacle. D. Fit valves located more than 6 feet above operating level with chain operated handles or valve wheels. 1. Chains: Sufficient length to reach approximately 4 feet above the operating level. 2. Where chains constitute a nuisance or hazard to operating personnel, provide holdbacks or other means for keeping the chains out of the way. E. Provide an operator shaft extension from valve or valve operator to finished grade or deck level when buried valves, and other valves located below the operating deck or level, are specified or indicated on the Drawings to be key operated; provide 2 inch square AWWA operating nut, and box and cover as specified, or a cover where a box is not required. Operating nut shall be within 6" of finished grade for buried valves with stem extensions. May 09 15110-4 8205A10 pwllcardWDommenWa enbIX/Fort War VB205A101Spea abon&Pr&,SelecU15110 (FS-gean) '"wave PART 3 EXECUTION el 3.01 EXAMINATION Not Used 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Provide incidental work and materials necessary for installation of valves including flange gaskets, flange bolts and nuts, and protective coating. B. Install valves so that handles clear obstructions when the valves are operated from fully open to fully closed. END OF SECTION 14MOV, May 09 15110-5 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienUTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifica6ons/Pre-SelecV15110 (FS-Clean) This Page Intentionally Left Blank May 09 15110-6 8205A10 pwjICamWDOa,menlsUwnurxlFanworOMSnlasveQkg-Seledi5llO(Fsaean) SECTION 15111 BALL VALVES T PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Metal body ball valves and plastic body ball valves. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09905 - Protective Coatings. 2. Section 13446 - Valve Operators. 3. Section 13447 - Motorized Operators. 4. Section 15110 - Valves. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME): 1. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. B. American Petroleum Institute (API): 1. 6D - Specification for Pipeline Valves (Gate, Ball, and Check Valves). C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A 351 - Specification for Castings, Austenitic, Austen itic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure -Containing Parts. D. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C 507 - Standard for Ball Valves 6 Inch Through 48 Inch. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings use: 1. Metal body ball valves on metallic pipelines. 2. Plastic body ball valves on plastic pipelines. B. Valve materials of construction shall be compatible with the application it is being used in. The valve material and gasket materials shall be resistant to the chemicals it will be subjected to. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog data describing Design and technical features for products specified. B. Certifications: 1. Metal Body Ball Valves: Submit affidavit of compliance with AWWA C 507. May 09 15111-1 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienUTX/Fort Worth/8205A70/Specifications/Pre-SelecU15ll1 (FS-Clean) 1.05 WARRANTY A. As specified in Section 15050. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL BODY BALL VALVES, 6 INCH SIZE AND LARGER A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. APCO Willamette: Metal seated valve_ 2. GA Industries: Metal seated valve. 3. Crane Co., Inc.: Metal seated valve. 4. Henry Pratt: Metal seated valve. B. General: 1. Type: Non -lubricated, metal seated and capable of sealing in either flow direction. 2. Conform to AWWA C 507. 3. Stem packing: Manually adjustable while valve is under pressure. 4. ASME B16.1, Class 125 flanged ends. C. Materials: 1. Body: ASTM A48 cast iron with 400 series Monel seats and integrally cast bronze bushed trunnions. 2. Ball: Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel. 3. Seats: 300 series stainless steel. 4. Stem seals: PTFE or Viton. D. Valve actuator: 1. Manually operated valves: Self-locking worm gear type actuator with position indicator. Gearing shall be permanently lubricated. Provide adjustable screws to stop travel at both open and closed positions. 2. Electric motor operated valves: Provide electric motor operator as specified in Section 13447. 2.02 METAL BODY BALL VALVES, LESS THAN 6 INCH SIZE A. Manufacturers: One of the following, or equal: 1. Apollo Valves as manufactured by Conbraco Industries, Inc. 2. Metso Automation/Jamesbury. 3. NIBCO, Inc. B. General: 1. Type: Non -lubricated and capable of sealing in either direction. 2. End Connections: a. Threaded or solder ends for sizes 3-inch and smaller. b. Class 150 flanged for sizes larger than 3 inch. Flanges shall conform to ANSI/ASME B16.1 standards. 3. Stem Packing: Manually adjustable while valve is under pressure. 4. Shafts: Rigidly connected to the ball by a positive means. The connection shall be designed to transmit torque equivalent to at least 75 percent of the torsional strength of the shaft. May 09 15111-2 8205A10 pwJlcaraldoo«,menWVientrrxlFodWvh O5AIaspedktons/Pre-Stle 15111(FS-Geao) ...� 5. Handles: Stainless steel latch lock handle with vinyl grip and stainless steel nut designed to open and close the valve under operating conditions 6. Temperature Limits: Suitable for operation between minus 20 and 350 degrees Fahrenheit. C. Materials: 1. Valves in Copper Lines: Bronze body. 2. Valves in Steel and Ductile Iron Piping: Ductile iron or cast steel body. 3. Valves in Stainless Steel Piping: Stainless Steel body, material type to match piping material specified in Section 15052. 4. Ball: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. 5. Seats: TFE. 6. Stem Seals: TFE or Viton. 7. Bearings: Self -lubricated, corrosion resistant material that will not contaminate potable water. 8. Valves for combustible fluid applications (natural gas, fuel oil, etc.) shall be of fire safe design. 2.03 PLASTIC BODY BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Asahi America. 2. Chemtrol Division, NIBCO, Inc. 3. George Fisher. B. General: 1. Type: Non -lubricated and capable of sealing in either flow direction. 2. End Connections: True union; solvent or heat welded to piping. 3. Operator Handle: Lever. C. Materials: Shall be compatible for use in intended service. 1. Body: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC). 2. Ball: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC). 3. Seats: TFE (Teflon). 4. O-rings: CSM 2.04 STAINLESS STEEL BODY BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: One of the Following: 1. Neles-Jamesbury. 2. Approved Equal. B. General: 1. Valves scheduled for oxygen or ozone service shall be specially cleaned, sealed and packaged in compliance with CGA Standard G-4.1. 2. Valves scheduled for cryogenic service shall be as specified in this Section. C. Materials: 1. Valves shall be 316 stainless steel. a. Threaded for sizes less than 3 inches and smaller. b. Flanged for sized 3 inches and larger. 2. Ball: type 316 stainless steel. 3. Seats: Reinforced TFE. ...or May 09 15111-3 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienUTX/Fort Worth/8205A1D/Specifications/Pre-SelecU15111 (FS-Clean) 4. Stem seals: Reinforced TFE. 2.05 BRASS OXYGEN SERVICE BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: The following, or approved equal: 1. Neles-Jamesbury. 2 B. General: 1. Valves scheduled for oxygen service shall be specially cleaned, sealed and packaged in compliance with CGA Standard G4.1. C. Materials: 1. Valves in copper oxygen lines shall be brass body with brazed ends. 2. Ball: Brass. 3. Seats: TFE. 4. Stem Seals: TFE. 2.06 CRYOGENIC OXYGEN SERVICE BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: One of the following, or approved equal: 1. Worcester Controls series C4 or C51. 2. TBV Series 2100. B. General: 1. Valves scheduled for cryogenic oxygen service (liquid oxygen service) shall be specifically cleaned, sealed and packaged in compliance with CGA Standard G-4.1. 2. All ball valves used in liquid oxygen systems shall have extended stems. 3. All motor operators for the valves, as shown on the Drawings, shall be supplied as specified in Section 13447. 4. Valves for use in liquid oxygen service shall be supplied by the Ozone System Supplier with the liquid oxygen tank so that all materials are compatible with the system. C. Materials: 1. Valves shall be brass for use in copper lines: a. Tubing ends for brazing in copper lines for size smaller than 3 inches. b. Flanged for sizes 3 inches and larger. 2. Ball: Brass (as coordinated with Ozone System Supplier). 3. Seats: Polyfill or Cyrofil. 4. Stem seals: TFE. 2.07 INSTRUMENT ISOLATION VALVES A. Manufacturers: One of the following: 1. Whitey. 2. Nupro. 3. Approved Equal. B. General: 1. All instrument isolation valves shall be ball valves, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 2. Valves scheduled for oxygen or ozone service shall be specially cleaned, May 09 15111-4 8205A10 pw-I/CamlolDoa nentsUientrMFoFtWorhW0 lQSpeckatmslPmSeIWM5111(FS-Clean) �...� sealed and packaged in compliance with CGA Standard G-4.1. C. Materials: 1. Valves in copper oxygen lines shall be brass body with brazed ends. 2. Valves in stainless steel oxygen or ozone lines shall be 316 stainless steel with threaded ends. 3. Valves in other lines shall be of the same material as the piping system with threaded ends. 4. Ball: Same as body material. 5. Seats: TFE. 6. Stem seals: TFE. 2.08 BALL VALVE OPERATORS A. Comply with Sections 13446 and 13447 for motorized operators. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install each type of valve in accordance with manufacturers' printed instructions. 3.02 BALL VALVE SCHEDULE Service Valve Material Gaseous Oxygen (Inside Ozone Generator Building) 316 Stainless Steel Gaseous Oxygen (Outside Ozone Generator Building) Brass Oxygen Service Ozone 316 Stainless Steel Sample 316 Stainless Steel Ozone Instrument Isolation 316 Stainless Steel Oxygen Instrument Isolation Brass Oxygen Service Other Instrument Isolation General Purpose Brass END OF SECTION *4000, May 09 15111-5 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/TX/FortWorth/8205A10/SpeafiraGons/Pre-Select/15l 11 (FS-Clean) This Page Intentionally Left Blank May 09 15111-6 8205A10 pwJ/CardldDo=enWO enVfffo t WaW8MAt01Spadi a6on re-SedeW15111(FS-Clean) "No, SECTION 15112 BUTTERFLY VALVES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Metal body butterfly valves. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09905 - Protective Coatings. 2. Section 13446 - Valve Operators. 3. Section 13447 - Motorized Operators. 4. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. 5. Section 15052 - Basic Piping Materials and Methods. 6. Section 15110 - Valves. 7. Section 15251 - Ductile Iron Piping. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers/American National Standards Institute/ (ASME/ANSI): 1. ASME/ANSI B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Classes 25, 125 and 250. 2. ASME/ANSI B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, NPS 1/2 through NPS 24. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. 2. A216 - Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for Higher -Temperature Service. 3. A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 4. A351 - Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, Austen itic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure -Containing Parts. 5. A395 - Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure -Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures. 6. A479 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure Vessels. 7. A515 - Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate - and Higher -Temperature Service. 8. A516 - Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate - and Lower -Temperature Service. 9. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 10. A564 - Standard Specification for Hot -Rolled and Cold -Finished Age - Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 11. A743 - Standard Specification for Castings, Iron -Chromium, Iron -Chromium - Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for General Application. 12. B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General May 09 15112-1 8205A10 pwJlCarolWDocumenlslClienVlXlFort Worth18205At01Speci6calionslPre-SelecV15112 (FSClean) 2.05 BUTTERFLY VALVE ACTUATORS A. Motorized actuators are specified in Section 13447. Additional requirements for manual actuators are in Section 13446. B. Manual actuators for aboveground valves, 4 inches in nominal size and smaller for liquid service, and 10 Inches in nominal size and smaller for aeration air service: 1. For valves operating at pressures up to and including 250 pounds per square inch, provide hand lever type with locking device so that the valve can be locked in any position with a wing nut. a. Locking Device: Rigid, allowing no vibration or chattering of the valve. b. Hand Lever: 12 inches long, with hand grip. 2. For valves operating at pressures above 250 pounds per square inch, provide totally enclosed worm gear actuator mounted on the valve and be in compliance with AWWA C 504 with bronze gear segment. C. Manual actuators for aboveground valves in nominal sizes and in service applications other than specified above, except for valves 30 inches and larger: 1. For valves operating at pressures up to and including 250 pounds per square inch, provide either a totally enclosed worm gear actuator or a totally enclosed traveling nut actuator mounted on the valve and be in compliance with AWWA C 504 with bronze gear segment. 2. For valves operating at pressures above 250 pounds per square inch, provide totally enclosed worm gear actuator mounted on the valve and be in compliance with AWWA C 504 with bronze gear segment. D. Manual actuators for aboveground valves 30 inches in nominal size and larger, all pressures: 1. Provide totally enclosed worm gear actuator mounted on the valve and be in compliance with AWWA C 504 with bronze gear segment. E. Manual actuators for buried or submerged valves, all sizes and pressures: 1. Provide totally enclosed worm gear actuator mounted on the valve. 2. Actuators for buried or submerged valves shall be hermetically sealed and grease packed. 3. For buried valves, provide 2-inch square AWWA nut on enclosed actuator. 4. For buried valves, provide extension stem, valve box and valve box cover in accordance with Section 15110. 5. For submerged valves, provide extension stem as indicated on the Drawings. F. Position Indication: 1. For all aboveground worm gear or traveling nut manual actuators, provide position indication on the actuator enclosure. G. Limit Switches: Provide limit switches on manually actuated valves where indicated on the Drawings. 1. Limit Switches: Heavy-duty, industrial grade, oil tight, with not less than two auxiliary contacts. 2. Rating: Rated for 10 amps, 120 volts AC. 3. Enclosure: NEMA 4X enclosure and with stainless steel levers and arms. Provide switch with NEMA 7 enclosure when switch is located within areas with NEC Class 1, Division 1 or Class 1, Division 2 designations as indicated on the Drawings. May 09 15112-8 8205A10 pwjr,wojo0oaxrw%CWnVTX/Fcd WoAIMSA1NSpedficalbns9reSeled l5ll2 (FSLIean) .V 4. Limit switches shall be completely assembled at the factory and adjusted to correct settings prior to delivery to the job site. 2.06 COATING A. Shop coat interior and exterior metal surfaces of valves, except as follows: 1. Interior machined surfaces. 2. Surfaces of gaskets and elastomeric seats and stem seals. 3. Bearing surfaces. 4. Stainless steel surfaces and components. B. Coating Material for Potable Water Applications: 1. Formulate coating material from materials accepted by the Food and Drug Administration, Title 21 of the Code of Federal Regulations on Food Additives. C. Applied Coatings: 1. Coat valve exterior to match the epoxy or epoxy/polyurethane paint system called for in Section 09905. D. Surface Coatings: 1. Interior surfaces, except for valves used in low-pressure air service: High solids epoxy. 2. Interior surfaces of valves used in low-pressure air service: High temperature coating for range of 150 to 350 degrees Fahrenheit, per Section 09905. 3. Exterior Surfaces of Valves, Actuators, and Accessories: a. Submerged Valves: High solids epoxy. b. Buried Valves: Coal tar epoxy. c. Other Valves: High solids epoxy. 4. Polished and machined surfaces: Apply rust -preventive compound. E. Coating Materials: 1. High Solids Epoxy and Coal Tar Epoxy: a. Products: As specified in Section 09905. 1) Coating product in contact with potable water must be acceptable under AWWA C550 and NSF-61. 2. High temperature coating: In accordance with Section 09905 and AWWA C550. 3. Rust -preventive compound or high solid epoxy: One of the following or equal: a. Houghton, Rust Veto 344. b. Rust-Oleum, R-9. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install valves with valve shafts horizontal, unless a vertical shaft is required to suit a particular installation, and unless a vertical shaft is indicated on the Drawings. Furnish stainless steel bolts, nuts, washers and gaskets. B. Install pipe spools or valve spacers in locations where butterfly valve disc travel may be impaired by adjacent pipe lining, pipe fittings, valves, or other equipment. Iftlow May 09 15112-9 8205A10 pve/lCarollo/Documents/Client(TX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecUl5112 (FS-Clean) 3.02 BUTTERFLY VALVE APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Acceptable butterfly valve types and body styles are listed in the Butterfly Valve Application Schedule provided at the end of this Section. Furnish and install butterfly valves in accordance with this Schedule. BUTTERFLY VALVE APPLICATION SCHEDULE Valve Type and Style General Purpose AWWA Butterfly Valves — Flanged Body Design General Purpose AWWA Butterfly Valves — Mechanical Joint Body Design Acceptable Applications Aboveground or submerged in the following service applications only: - Acceptable in all service applications except oxygen and ozone service and high pressure service. - May be used in buried applications when required by the specified piping system. Buried in the following service applications only: - Acceptable in all service applications except oxygen and ozone service and high pressure service. General Purpose AWWA Butterfly Valves — Aboveground in the following service Lugged Wafer Body Design applications only: - Aeration Air Systems General Purpose AWWA Butterfly Valves — Wafer (not lugged) Body Design General Purpose AWWA Butterfly Valves — Grooved End Body Design High Pressure Butterfly Valves — Flanged Body Design High Pressure Butterfly Valves — Wafer or Lugged Wafer Body Design Industrial Class Butterfly Valves — Lugged Wafer Body Design Industrial Class Butterfly Valves — Wafer (not lugged) Body Design Stainless Steel Butterfly Valves - Lugged Wafer Body Design Not allowed. Aboveground, in sizes 20-inch and less, with piping system test pressure less than 100 psi, and in the following service applications only: - Acceptable in all service applications, except oxygen and ozone service, where piping for that service is specified in the Piping Schedule to have grooved end joints. Service applications with piping system test pressure greater than 250 psi. Acceptable in aboveground and buried installations. Not allowed. Aboveground in the following service applications only: - Aeration Air Systems - Natural Gas Systems - Digester Gas Systems - Chilled and Hot Water Systems Not allowed. Aboveground in the following service applications only: - Oxygen Systems - Ozone Systems May 09 15112-10 8205A10 pw'Jf-ar0ldD0cuments0enMFa1 WmtVMSA1Q1SpeakatbnS/Pre-Seled115112 (FSC1ean) �-! BUTTERFLY VALVE APPLICATION SCHEDULE Valve Type and Style Acceptable Applications Stainless Steel Butterfly Valves — Wafer (not Not allowed. lugged) Body Design END OF SECTION May 09 15112-11 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/CllentfrX/Fod Worth/8205A10/SpecificaGons/Pre-Selectl15112 (FS-Clean) This Page Intentionally Left Blank v May 09 15112-12 8205A10 pwrJrArd1dD=mentsQenUWofl WWM2M1&SpedBratiwm/Ne-SeleW5112 (FS-Gean) SECTION 15114 CHECK VALVES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Center guide (silent). 2. Swing. 3. Cushioned swing. 4. Flapper type. 5. High pressure gas. 6. Plastic ball check valves. 7. Cryogenic liquid oxygen service check valves. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A 48 - Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 2. A 126 - Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. 3. A 276 - Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 4. B 582 - Specification for Nickel -Chromium -Iron -Molybdenum -Copper Alloy Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 5. B 584 - Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. B. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C 508 - Standard for Swing -Check Valves for Waterworks Service 2 Inch Through 24 Inch NPS. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A, Design Requirements: 1. Check Valves: When not otherwise specified as indicated on the Drawings, provide check valves suitable for service as follows: a. In either horizontal or vertical position. b. Under pressures equal and less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 CENTER GUIDE (SILENT) CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. APCO, Model Number 600. 2. Crispin, Series GC. B. Valve Design: 1. Center guided, spring loaded plug. May 09 15114-1 8205A10 pwjiCaraloCwumentstCClientlTXlFat Wor1 VM!iA10/SRed5mfi ns/Pre-SeleCII5114 (FS Umn) 2. Replaceable seat and plug. 3. Shaft guide bushing. 4. Non -slam, silent shut-off. 5. Flanged body. C. Materials: 1. Body: Cast-iron, ASTM A 126 Grade B. 2. Plug and Seat: Bronze, ASTM B 584 C83600. 3. Spring: Stainless steel, ASTM A 276 Type 316. 4. Shaft and Bushing: Bronze, ASTM B 584 C83600. 2.02 SWING CHECK VALVES A. Valves 1/4 inch through 3 inch: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Crane Valve Company, Number 36. b. Lunkenheimer Company, Figure 554Y. 2. Valve Design: a. Threaded joints. b. Y-pattern body with integral seat. c. Hinged disc. d. Access to valve seat for regrinding without disassembly of piping. 3. Materials: a. Body, cap, hinge, and disc: Bronze B. Valves 4 inch through 24 inch: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Kennedy, Figure 106LW. b. Mueller Company, Model A-2600. c. M&H, Model 159. 2. Valve Design: a. Conform to AWWA C 508. b. Constructed to permit top entry and removal of internal components without removing the valve. c. Equipped with outside lever and weight. 3. Materials: a. Body: Cast-iron, ASTM A 126 Class B. b. Disc: 1) 4-inch valves: Bronze. 2) 6 inches and larger valves: Bronze faced. c. Hinge Pins: Stainless steel. 2.03 CUSHIONED SWING CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Crispin, Series SWC-AC, 2. APCO, Air Cushioned Swing -Check, Series 6000. B. Valve Design: 1. Counter -weighted. 2. Rubber seated and drip tight. 3. Totally enclosed pneumatic dampening chambers with adjustment for closing speed. May 09 15114-2 P J1Ca0'nDOa.ne WCGenMT_0'tw0 M1V49dk3 WPra-Sel W15114(FS-Clean) 8205A10 ...� C. Materials: ' 1. Valve Body, Cover, and Disc: Cast-iron, ASTM A 126, Class B. 2. Disc Seat: Buna N. 3. Shaft: Stainless steel. 4. Cushion Cylinder: Corrosion resistant metal. 5. Disc Ring Seat: Bronze. 6. Seat Pins and Lock Screws: Stainless steel. 2.04 FLAPPER TYPE CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal_ 1. Crane Company, Crane Valve Group, Duo Chek Check Valves. 2. Techno Corporation, equivalent product. B. Valve Design: 1. Spring -assisted dual valve plates with metal hinge. Springs designed to close valve plates upon flow reversal. 2. Replaceable elastomeric seal secured to valve plates with clamp plates and fasteners. 3. Valve seats integral with valve body. Eliminate leakage when valve plates are fully closed with elastomeric seal in full contact with valve seat. 4. Wafer style valve body. 5. Stops on valve shaft which prevent valve plates from opening more than 90 degrees from closed position. C. Materials: 1. Body: Cast-iron. NNEW 2. Valve Plates: Bronze. 3. Seal: Buna N. 4. Trim: Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Spring: Type 316 stainless steel. 2.05 HIGH PRESSURE GAS CHECK VALVES A. Valves for high pressure air, gas, or steam: Regrinding check valves suitable for service under pressures equal to and less than 200 pounds per square inch gauge, steam working pressure; and not less than 400 pounds per square inch gauge, water, oil, and gas. 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Lunkenheimer Company, Figure H3 or 418. b. Crane, Figure 366E. c. Jenkins, Figure 966. 2. Do not use these check valves for compressor discharge or for air service involving frequent flow reversals. ,. B. High pressure compressor discharge check valves or check valves in other gas or air service involving frequent flow reversals: 1. Guided and air cushioned vertical lift check valves with stainless steel or hard composition discs, suitable for service under pressures equal to and less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, steam working pressure; and not less than 300 pounds per square inch gauge, water, oil, and gas. May 09 15114-3 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Clien7TX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Selecl/15ll4 (FS-Clean) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Lunkenheimer Company, Figure 1616. b. Walwork, Number 97. 2.06 PLASTIC BALL CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal.- 1 . Chemtrol Division of Nibco. 2. R. G. Sloane Company, Inc. B. Valves: Ball type. 1. Polyvinyl chloride. 2. Double or single union -type end connections. 3. Seals: Viton. 2.07 CRYOGENIC LIQUID OXYGEN SERVICE CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: One of the following: 1. Goddard Valve Corp., Series 886. 2. Approved Equal. B. Valve Design: 1. Rated to a pressure of 300 psig. 2. Capable of service between the temperatures of - 325 degrees Fahrenheit and +100 degrees Fahrenheit. 3. Cleaned for liquid oxygen service in accordance with CGA Standard G-4.1. C. Materials: 1. Disc: PCTFE. 2. Disc Washer: Type 316 stainless steel. 3. Cap and Body: Stainless steel, Grade ASTM - A 351 grade CF3M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install valves in accordance with Section 15110 and the manufacturer's instructions. B. Flapper Type Check Valves: 1. Install with proper orientation of flow direction arrow on valve body. 2. When installed in horizontal pipelines, mount with shaft on vertical locations. 3. When mounted in a vertical pipeline, directly downstream of an elbow, mount with the shaft perpendicular to the outermost portion of the elbow. 4. Mount on downstream side of discharge silencer when used on positive displacement and centrifugal blowers. May 09 15114-4 8205A10 pvjr,xolldDww*aW0jenVWort Wor#MM1Vopecifir4ms1PmSelecV15114 (FS-Clean) t ..i 3.02 ADJUSTING w A. Adjust cushioned swing check valves in the field by means of external adjustment devices to minimize pressure surges. B. Adjust weight on swing check valves to affect proper closing action on equipment shutdown. END OF SECTION NOW, May 09 15114-5 8205A10 pw://CarollolDocuments/ClienUMFort Worth/8205A10/Specdications/PreSelect/15114 (FS-Clean) This Page Intentionally Left Blank May 09 15114-6 8205A10 p�rllCsrotdooa.nentslcli�tlrxlFonwanhl8'm5a101sp6o�P�eseleculstta (Fs -clean) �,!ftwv R SECTION 15115 GLOBE AND ANGLE VALVES PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A A. Section Includes: Globe, angle, plug disc and plain hose valves. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15110 - Valves. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. B 98 - Specification for Copper -Silicon Alloy Rod, Bar, and Shapes. B. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C 509 - Standard for Resilient -Seated Gate Valves for Water -Supply Service (includes addendum C509a-95). 2. C 550 - Standard for Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants. C. Compressed Gas Association (CGA): 1. Standard G-4.1, Cleaning for Oxygen Service. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. B. Affidavit of Compliance with CGA-G.41 for oxygen service valves. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 GLOBE AND ANGLE VALVES A. General Purpose Globe and Angle Valves: 1. Valves 3 inches and smaller: a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal except in welded steel piping: 1) Crane, No. 1 Globe or No. 2 Angle. 2) Lunkenheimer Company Figure No. 2140 Globe or No. 2141 Angle. b. Design: 1) Valve: Class 125 threaded ends, rated for 250 degrees Fahrenheit at pressure of 170 pounds per square inch. c. In welded steel piping: One of the following or equal: 1) Crane, No. 351. 2) Lunkenheimer Company, Figure No. 1123; or equal with flanged ends. 2. Valves larger than 3 inches: May 09 15115-1 8205A10 pwJ/Carollo/Documents/CtienUTX/Fort WorW8205A10/Specilicahons/Pre-Select/15115 (FS-Clean) but at no greater intervals than recommended by the joint manufacturer in published instructions. Space intermediate supports a minimum of 10 feet, and tack weld the protective saddles to the pipe. B. Vibration Control Joints: 1. Install vibration control joints at piping connections to or from mechanical equipment to prevent transmitting equipment vibration through the piping system. C. Transition Couplings: 1. Application: a. Use transition couplings with function and design similar to flexible couplings and flanged coupling adapters for connecting piping having different outside diameters. 2. Install transition -coupling products specifically designed and manufactured for that application. D. Pipe Saddles: 1. Coat threads on bolts with anti -gall coating prior to installation. E. Tapping Sleeves: 1. Coat threads on bolts with anti -gall coating prior to installation. END OF SECTION May 2009 15120-6 8205A10 pw11Caro1o0wment901enVrRFod WarttV8 MI01Specific b0nsRM S*led15120 (FS-Clean) ... R ft SECTION 15121 PIPE COUPLINGS R PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Bolted, split -sleeve coupling. 2. Bolted, split -sleeve flange adapter coupling. 3. Dismantling joints. 4. Flanged coupling adapters. 5. Flexible couplings. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09905 - Performance Coatings. 2. Section 15052 - Basic Piping Materials and Methods. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. A 36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. A 53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dip, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3. A 193 - Standard Specification for Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature Service. 4. A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 KSC Minimum Tensile Strength. 5. A 536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 6. A 563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 7. A 576 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot -Wrought, Special Quality. 8. D 2000 - Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. 9. F 593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. B. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C111 - AWWA Standard for Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings. 2. C207 - AWWA Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In. (100mm through 3,600mm). C. National Science Foundation (NSF). 1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings, detailing dimensions, and materials. May 09 15121-1 8205A10 pwJ/Carollo/DocumentslClientfXlFort Worth/8205A10/Specificabons/Pre-SelecVl5121 (FS-Clean) B. Piping Layout Drawings: Coordinate preparation of required piping layout drawings such that coupling center sleeve sizes are clearly identified on drawings. C. Manufacturer's published installation instructions. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE COUPLINGS FOR DUCTILE IRON PIPING A. Dismantling Joints: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Romac Industries, Inc., Style DJ400. b. Smith -Blair, Inc., Series 975. 2. Materials: a. Flanged Spool: 1) C207 Schedule 40 steel pipe in accordance with ASTM A 53 for sizes 3 inches to 12 inches. 2) Steel for pipe in accordance with ASTM A 36 for sizes 14 inches to 72 inches. b. End Ring and Body: 1) For sizes 3 inches to 12 inches, ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A 536. 2) For sizes 14 inches to 72 inches, steel in accordance with ASTM A 36 or A 53. c. Follower Ring: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A 536 or steel in accordance with ASTM A 36 or A 576. d. Bolts and Hex Nuts: 1) Aboveground: High strength, low alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C111. 2) Buried and Underwater: Type 316 stainless steel bolts in accordance with ASTM F 593. e. Tie Rods: High tensile steel in accordance with ASTM A 193 Grade B7. 3. Flange Design: Class D steel ring flange in accordance with AWWA C207, compatible with ANSI Class 125 and 150 bolt circles. 4. Coating and Lining: Manufacturer's standard fusion bonded epoxy, NSF 61 certified. B. Flanged Coupling Adapters: 12 inch size and smaller. 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Dresser, Inc., Style 227. b. Romac Industries, Inc., Style FCA501. c. Smith -Blair, Inc., Series 912. 2. Materials: a. Flanged Body: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A 536. b. Follower Ring: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A 536. c. Bolts and Hex Nuts: 1) Aboveground: High strength, low alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C111. 2) Buried and Underwater: Type 316 stainless steel bolts in accordance with ASTM F 593. May 09 15121-2 8205A10 PWJlCWdolD=MwtslChenffffort Wwb&'DM101SpedficaftsPm-geledl5121 (FSCIean) 3. Flange Design: Class D steel ring flange in accordance with AWWA C207 compatible with ANSI Class 125 and 150 bolt circles. 4. Coating and Lining: Manufacturer's standard fusion bonded epoxy, NSF 61 certified. C. Flanged Coupling Adapters: Greater than 12 inch size: „ 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Dresser, Inc., Style 128-W. b. Romac Industries, Inc., Style FC400. c. Smith -Blair, Inc., Series 913. 2. Materials: a. Flange and Flanged Body: Ductile iron or low carbon steel having a minimum yield strength of 30,000 pounds per square inch. b. Follower Ring: Low carbon steel having a minimum yield strength of 30,000 pounds per square inch. c. Bolts and Hex Nuts: 1) Aboveground: High strength, low alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C111. 2) Buried and Underwater: Type 316 stainless steel bolts in accordance with ASTM F 593. 3. Flange Design: Class D steel ring flange in accordance with AWWA C207 compatible with ANSI Class 125 and 150 bolt circles. 4. Coating and Lining: Manufacturer's standard fusion bonded epoxy, NSF 61 certified. D. Flexible Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: r..r a. Dresser, Inc., Style 253. b. Romac Industries, Inc., Style 501. c. Smith -Blair, Inc., Series 441. 2. Materials: a. Center Rings: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A 536. b. Follower Rings: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A 536. c. Bolts and Hex Nuts: 1) Aboveground: High strength, low alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C111. 2) Buried and Underwater: Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F 593. 3. Coating and Lining: Manufacturer's standard fusion bonded epoxy, NSF 61 certified. 4. Center Sleeve Dimensions: Provide center sleeves with lengths in accordance with following table: Nominal Pipe Size Sleeve Length 3 inch and smaller Manufacturer's standard 4 inch through 8 inch 7 inches 10 inch through 14 inch 12 inches F Greater than 16 inch Use steel flexible coupling per Paragraph 2.02 4"Nope May 09 15121-3 8205A10 pwJ/Carollo/DocumentslClient/TX/Fort Worth/8205At01Specifications/Pre-Selectl15121 (FS•Clean) E. Restrained Flange Coupling Adapter: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Romac Industries, Inc., Style RFCA. 2. Materials: a. Flange and Flanged Body: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A 536. b. Follower Ring: Lug type restraint system. 1) Follower Ring: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A 536. 2) Restraining Lugs: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A 536. a) Designed to contact the pipe and apply forces evenly. 3) Restraining Bolts. Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A 536. Bolt heads shall be designed to twist off when the proper torque has been applied. c. Bolts and Hex Nuts: 1) Aboveground: High strength, low alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C111. 2) Buried and Underwater: Type 316 stainless steel bolts in accordance with ASTM F 593. 3. Flange Design: Class D steel ring flange in accordance with AWWA C207 compatible with ANSI Class 125 and 150 bolt circles. 4. Coating and Lining: Manufacturer's standard fusion bonded epoxy, NSF 61 certified. 5. Angular Deflection: Restrained flange coupling adapter must allow angular deflection after assembly. 2.02 PIPE COUPLINGS FOR STEEL PIPING A_ Bolted, Split -Sleeve Couplings: 1. Split -sleeve type pipe coupling with double arch cross section. Coupling shall be designed to close around the pipe ends, confining the gaskets beneath the arches of the sleeve. A water -tight, axial seal is created by tightening the bolts to pull the coupling against the outside wall of the pipe. 2. Coatings: Couplings shall be epoxy -coated on the inner diameter and outer diameter prior to delivery. Buried couplings shall receive additional protection against corrosion that matches the pipe as specified in Section 09960. 3. Couplings: Wall thickness that is adequate for the test pressure as specified in the Piping Schedule in Section 015052. a. Provide split -sleeve type coupling in a shouldered, "expansion x expansion" configuration where indicated on the Drawings. b. Where restrained pipe joints are required or are indicated on the Drawings, provide split sleeve type coupling in a "fixed x fixed" configuration. Coordinate with pipe supplier to provide restraint rings on pipe. c. Where axial pipe expansion must be accommodated or where they are indicated on the Drawings, provide split -sleeve type coupling in a "fixed x expansion" configuration. Coordinate with pipe supplier to provide restraint ring on fixed side of coupling. d. Axial Restraint and Angular Deflection: 1) Where axial restraint is required to resist pipe thrust and angular deflection is required to provide flexibility in the piping or where they are indicated on the Drawings, provide split -sleeve type coupling in a "fixed x fixed modified" configuration. May 09 15121-4 8205A10 pw-J/CarofiolClocuments/CfienVWFortWaVV8205AtplSpecifications/Pm Seledi5121(FS-Clean) 2) Install coupling with full 1-1/2-inch gap between ends of piping with the shoulders of coupling bearing on the inner restraint rings that are welded to the piping at both ends of coupling. 3) Coupling shall be designed for an angular deflection of not less than the angular defection indicated in the following table unless a larger angular deflection in indicated on the Drawings. Nominal Pipe Diameter 18 inch and smaller 20 inch 24 inch 30 inch 36 inch 42 inch 48 and 54 inch 60 and 66 inch 72 and 78 inch Allowable Angular Deflection 3 degrees 2.75 degrees 2.375 degrees 2 degrees 1.5 degrees 1.375 degrees 1 degree 0.875 degrees 0.75 degrees 4. Restraint Rings: Provide where required to create a restrained joint. Coordinate with piping manufacturer. Shop fabricate pipe with restraint rings that engage the interior edge of the coupling shoulder. a. Weld for restraint ring: Suitable for test pressures indicated in the Piping Schedule as specified in Section 15052. 5. Gaskets: The sealing members are comprised of 2 "O" ring gaskets. Internal pressure shall not be required to affect the seal. For water service, the gasket supplied shall be Isoprene or Buna-N in accordance with ASTM D 2000 for design pressure within temperature range of minus 20 to 180 degrees Fahrenheit. Elastomers shall have properties in accordance with ASTM D 2000. 6. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. "Expansion x Expansion Configuration: 1) Victaulic, Depend-O-Lok, E x E, Type 2 Coupling. b. "Fixed x Expansion" Configuration: 1) Victaulic, Depend-O-Lok, F x E, Type 2 Coupling. c. "Fixed x Fixed" Configuration: 1) Victaulic, Depend-O-Lok, F x F, Type 2 Coupling. d. "Fixed x Fixed Modified" Configuration: 1) Victaulic, Depend-O-Lok, F x F, Type 2 Modified Restrained Coupling. 7. Materials: a. Couplings: Steel in accordance with ASTM A 36. b. Bolts and Nuts: In accordance with ASTM A 325 and ASTM A 563. 8. Pipe Preparation: Pipe ends shall be smooth for expansion or contraction requirements. Where thrust restraint is required or is indicated on the Drawings, pipe ends shall include restraint rings affixed for pipe end restraint requirements. The coupling manufacturer shall provide restraint rings that shall be shop welded to the pipe in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Follow coupling manufacturer's recommendation for size and amount of welding required to attach the restraint rings to the pipe. May 09 15121-5 pw://Carolb/Documents/Client[TX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Speccfications/Pre-SelecU15121 (FS•Clean) 8205A10 B. Bolted, Split -Sleeve Flanged Adapter Couplings: 1. Flanged adapter with split -sleeve type coupling with double arch cross section. Coupling shall be designed to confine the gaskets beneath the arches of the sleeve. A water -tight, axial seal is created by tightening the bolts to pull the coupling together and seat the gaskets against the outside wall of the pipe and adapter. 2. Coatings: Couplings shall be epoxy -coated on the inner diameter and outer diameter prior to delivery. Buried couplings shall receive additional protection against corrosion that matches the pipe as given in Section 09960. 3. Couplings: Wall thickness that is adequate for the test pressure specified in the Piping Schedule in Section 15052. a. Provide coupling in a "flanged x expansion" configuration where indicated on the Drawings. b. Where axial pipe movement must be restrained, provide coupling in a "flanged x fixed" configuration. Coordinate with pipe supplier to provide restraint ring on fixed side of coupling. c. Where axial restraint is required to resist pipe thrust and angular deflection is required to provide flexibility in the piping, provide sleeve type coupling in a "flanged fixed x fixed modified" configuration. Install coupling with full 1-1/2-inch gap between ends of pipe with shoulder of coupling bearing on ring welded to pipe at both ends of coupling. Coupling shall be designed for an angular deflection of not less than the angular deflection indicated in the following table unless a larger angular deflection in indicated on the Drawings. Nominal Pipe Diameter Allowable Angular Deflection 18 inch and smaller 3 degrees i 20 inch 2.75 degrees 24 inch 2.375 degrees 30 inch 2 degrees 36 inch 1.5 degrees 42 inch 1.375 degrees 48 and 54 inch 1 degree li 60 and 66 inch 0.875 degrees 72 and 78 inch 0.75 degrees Ij 4. Restraint Rings: Provide where required to create a restrained joint. Coordinate with piping manufacturer. Shop fabricate pipe with restraint rings that engages the interior edge of the coupling shoulder. a. Weld for restraint ring: Suitable for test pressures as specified in the Pipe Schedule as specified in Section 15052. 5. Gaskets: The sealing members are comprised of 2 "O" ring gaskets. Internal pressure shall not be required to affect the seal. For water service, the gasket supplied shall be Isoprene or Buna-N in accordance with ASTM D 2000 for design pressure within temperature range of minus 20 to 180 degrees Fahrenheit. Elastomers shall have properties in accordance with ASTM D 2000. 6. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. "Flanged x Expansion" Configuration: May 09 15121-6 8205A10 pvrJJCaroAM)ommwWChanVTYJFort Wath1 SA10/Speakation&PMSeledl5121(F&Clean) .� 1) Victaulic, Depend-O-Lok, F x E, Type 2 Flanged Adapter Coupling. b. "Flanged x Fixed" Configuration: 1) Victaulic, Depend-O-Lok, F x F, Type 2 Flanged Adapter Coupling. c. "Flanged x Fixed Modified" Configuration: 1) Victaulic, Depend-O-Lok, F x F, Type 2 Modified, Flange Adapter Coupling 7. Materials: a. Couplings: Steel in accordance with ASTM A 36. b. Bolts and Nuts: In accordance with ASTM A 325 and ASTM A 563. 8. Pipe Preparation: Pipe ends shall be smooth for expansion or contraction requirements. Where thrust restraint is required or is_indicated on the Drawings, pipe ends shall include restraint rings affixed for pipe end restraint requirements. The coupling manufacturer shall provide restraint rings that shall be shop welded to the pipe in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Follow coupling manufacturer's recommendation for size and amount of welding required to attach the restraint rings to the pipe.] C. Dismantling Joints: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Romac Industries, Inc., Style DJ400. b. Smith -Blair, Inc., Series 975. 2. Materials: a. Flanged Spool: 1) C207 Schedule 40 pipe in accordance with ASTM A 53 for sizes 3 inches to 12 inches. 2) Steel for pipe in accordance with ASTM A 36 or A 53 for sizes 14 inches to 72 inches. b. End Ring and Body: 1) For sizes 3 inches to 12 inches, ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A 536. 2) For sizes 14 inches to 72 inches, steel in accordance with ASTM A 36. c. Follower Ring: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A 536 or steel in accordance with ASTM A 36 or A 576. d. Bolts and Hex Nuts: 1) Aboveground: High strength, low alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C111. 2) Buried and Underwater: Type 316 stainless steel bolts in accordance with ASTM F 593. e. Tie Rods: High tensile steel in accordance with ASTM A 193 grade B7. 3. Flange Design: Class D steel ring flange in accordance with AWWA C207 compatible with ANSI Class 125 and 150 bolt circles. 4. Coating and Lining: Fusion bonded epoxy certified in accordance with NSF 61. D. Flanged Coupling Adapters: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Dresser, Inc., Style 128-W. b. Romac Industries, Inc., Style FCA501 (10 inch and smaller) or Style FC400 (12 inch and larger). c. Smith -Blair, Inc., Series 913. 2. Materials: *4move May 09 15121-7 8205A10 pw://Carollo/DocumentslClient/TX/Fat Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecV1S121(FS-Clean) l a. Flange and Flanged Body: Ductile iron or low carbon steel having a At V minimum yield strength of 30,000 psi. b. Follower Ring: Low carbon steel having a minimum yield strength of 30,000 pounds per square inch. c. Bolts and Hex Nuts: 1) Aboveground: High -strength, low -alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C111. ! 2) Buried and Underwater: Type 316 stainless steel bolts in accordance with ASTM F 593. 3. Flange Design: Class D steel ring flange in accordance with AWWA C207 compatible with ANSI Class 125 and 150 bolt circles. 4. Coating and Lining: Manufacturer's standard fusion bonded epoxy, NSF 61 certified. E. Flexible Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Dresser, Inc., Style 38. b. Smith -Blair, Inc., Series 411. c. Romac Industries, Inc., Style 511 or Style 400. 2. Materials: a. Center Sleeve and Follower Flanges: Ductile iron or low carbon steel having a minimum yield strength of 30,000 pounds per square inch. b. Bolts and Hex Nuts: 1) Aboveground: High strength, low alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C111. 2) Buried and Underwater: Type 316 stainless steel bolts in accordance with ASTM F 593. 3. Coating and Lining: Manufacturer's standard fusion bonded epoxy, NSF 61 certified. 4. Center Sleeve Dimensions: Provide center sleeves with lengths in accordance with following table: Nominal Pipe Diameter Sleeve Length 2-1/2 inch and smaller Manufacturer's standard 3 inch through 6 inch 7 inch 8 inch through 14 inch 7 inch Greater than 14 inches 10 inch 2.03 PIPE COUPLINGS FOR STAINLESS STEEL PIPING A A. Flexible Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Dresser, Inc., Style 38. 2.04 GASKETS FOR FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS AND FLANGED COUPLING ADAPTERS A. Provide gasket materials for process piping applications as follows: 1. Low Pressure and High Pressure Air, Steam, Hot Water: EPDM. May 09 15121-8 8205A10 purl/CarolldDaumenWC ienO-)VFort WorN182MIO/Speckations/Pre,%dK 115121(FS-Clean) .OP, 2, All Other Process Piping Applications: EPDM. 2.05 EXTERIOR COATINGS FOR SUBMERGED APPLICATIONS A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Tapecoat Company, Inc., T.C. Mastic. 2. Kop-Coat Company, Inc., Bitumastic Number 50. B. Thickness: Minimum 0.040 inch. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. In underwater installations, coat the exterior of coupling with a protective coating after installation. B. Joints and flexible connections shall be installed centered with no angular deflection unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. C. Flexible Couplings and Flange Coupling Adapters: Install with gap between pipe ends in accordance with the following table unless a greater gap is indicated on the Drawings. Maximum gap tolerance shall be within 1/8 inch. 1. Install flexible coupling with pipe gap located in middle of center sleeve. 2. Install flanged coupling adapter with end of plain end pipe in middle of flanged coupling body. Center Ring Length Gap Dimension and Tolerance 4 inch through 6 inch 3/8 inch 7 inch 5/8 inch 10 inch and greater 7/8 inch D. Provide harnesses (tie -downs) for flexible couplings unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings with a written note. 1. Design harnesses (tie -downs) for the test pressures as specified in the Piping Schedule in Section 15052. E, Bolted, Split -Sleeve Couplings: 1. Inspect each coupling to insure that there are no damaged portions of the coupling. Particular attention should be paid to the sealing pad/sealing plate area. Before installation, thoroughly clean each coupling of any foreign substance which may have collected thereon and shall be kept clean at all time thereafter. 2. Wrenches used shall be of a size and type recommended by the manufacturer. Bolts and studs shall be tightened so as to secure a uniform gasket compression between the coupling and the body of the pipe with all bolts or studs tightened approximately the same amount. Final tightening shall be done by hand (no air impact wrenches) and is complete when the coupling is in uniform contact around the circumference of the pipe. May 09 15121-9 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/TX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Speci5cations/Pre-SelecU15121 (FS-Clean) 8205A10 3. No joint shall be misfit any amount that would be detrimental to the strength _ and water tightness of the finished joint. 4. On the fixed ends of bolted, split -sleeve couplings, the shoulders shall bear on the restraint rings all around with no gap. END OF SECTION May 09 15121-10 8205A10 PwJlCardM)DcLnenhCtienVrXfForlwa tA2D5AlV,peaficafim$/Pm-c4ecV15121 (FS-Oean) a, SECTION 15251 DUCTILE IRON PIPING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Ductile iron piping, joints, fittings, gaskets, and pipe lining and coating. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15052 - Basic Piping Materials and Methods. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME): 1. B 16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1 _ A 47 - Specifications for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. 2. A 183 - Specifications for Carbon Steel Tank Bolts and Nuts. 3. A 283 - Specifications for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates. 4. A 536 - Ductile Iron Castings. 5. A 674 - Practice for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe for Water or Other Liquids. 6_ D 792 - Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement. 7. D 1248 - Specifications for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials. C. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C 104 - Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile -Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. 2. C 105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Pipe Systems. 3. C 110 - Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Fittings, 3 Inches Through 48 Inches, for Water and Other Liquids. 4. C 111 - Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 5. C 115 - Flanged Ductile -Iron Pipe with Ductile -Iron or Gray -Iron Threaded Flanges. 6. C 150 - Thickness Design of Ductile -Iron Pipe. 7. C 151 - Ductile -iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water or Other Liquids. 8. C 153 - Ductile -Iron Compact Fittings, 3 Inches Through 24 Inches, and 54 Inches Through 64 Inches, for Water Service. 9. C 600 - Installation of Ductile -Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances. 10. C 606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints. May 09 15251-1 8205A10 pwitCaroibDocumenLsfC6enVTXIFort WOAIV8205AIMpecficaaons/PreSeL-015251 (FS-Cean) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Detailed layout drawings showing alignment of pipes, location of valves, fittings, and appurtenances, types of joints, connections to structures and thrust restraint system layouts. 2. Thrust Restraint Systems: Layouts and supporting calculations for restrained joint thrust restraint systems. B. Pipe Design Calculations: Calculations for required wall thickness in accordance with AWWA C 150. C. Product Data: Photographs, drawings, and descriptions of fittings, gaskets, couplings, grooving of pipe and fittings, pipe linings, and coatings. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Block piping material for shipment, prevent damage to castings and linings. B. Carefully handle piping material during loading, unloading, and installation. Do not drop piping material from cars or trucks. Lower piping material by mechanical means. Do not drop or pound pipe to fit grade. C. Repair damaged cement mortar lining to match quality, thickness, and bonding of original lining in accordance with AWWA C 104. When lining cannot be repaired or repairs are defective, replace defective piping with undamaged piping. D. Protect gaskets and polyethylene encasement from long term exposure to sunlight. E. Store fittings and other accessories such that they do not accumulate and hold rainwater, dirt, and debris. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Install work of this Section in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. 1.06 THRUST RESTRAINT SYSTEM DESIGN A. Assume responsibility for the restrained joint thrust restraint system design. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Ductile Iron Piping: 1. Type, Typical: AWWA C 150 and AWWA C 151 with minimum pressure class wall thickness that meets project pressure and structural requirements, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. 2. Type with Screw -on Flanges: AWWA C 115 with minimum special thickness Class 53 wall thickness that meets project pressure and structural requirements, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. May 09 15251-2 8205A10 pwjJ Ga dlolDoc a tCGenUfXtFat wath=W01SNafim6ons7PreSe6dl15251 (F&Clean) .� B. Joints: 1. Flanged Joints: a. Flanges, Screw -On: Comply with the diameter, thickness, drilling, and other characteristics in accordance with ANSI B 16.1. In addition, comply with the following requirements: 1) Ductile iron. 2) Long hub, threaded, and specially designed for ductile iron pipe. 3) After attaching to pipe, machine flange face to make pipe end and flange even and perpendicular to the axis of the pipe. b. Bolt Holes on Flanges: 2-holed and aligned at both ends of pipe. c. Cap Screw or Stud Bolt Holes: Tapped. d. Bolts and Nuts: As specified in ANSI/ASME B 16.1 except when connecting flanges underground, in concrete pipe valve boxes, or underwater, use Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel. Cut and finish bolts to project a maximum of 1/4 inch beyond nut when joints are assembled_ e. Gaskets: As specified in Section 15052. 2. Grooved Joints: AWWA C 606, as complemented and modified below, radius - cut type, with following components: a. Couplings: Rigid type, cast from ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 or malleable iron in accordance with ASTM A 47, Grade 32510. b. Bolts and nuts in accordance with ASTM A 183, Grade 2. c. Gaskets: Capable of being applied on surface of piping with cavities to provide for an improved seal with the internal piping pressure; material for following services: 1) For Liquid Service: Buna-N. 2) For Air Service: Fluoroelastomer. 3) For Hot Water Service: EPDM d. Fittings: AWWA C 606, rigid radius -cut groove. 1) Center -to -Center Dimensions: AWWA C 110/ANSI A 21.10. 2) Wall Thickness and Other Characteristics: AWWA C 153. e. Flanged Unit Connections: Flanged to grooved joint adapters or a long enough spool with 1 end flanged and the other grooved to prevent interference with the operation of adjacent valves, pumps, or other items. 2.02 FITTINGS A. Fittings: Ductile iron conforming with AWWA C 110/ANSI A 21.10 or AWWA C 153/ANSI A 21.53. B. Joint Type: Same as that of the associated piping as specified in Section 15052. C. Plain end -to -flanged joint connectors using set screws are not acceptable. 2.03 PIPE LININGS AND COATINGS A. Asphaltic Base Coating: Apply over cement mortar linings and to outside surface of pipes which will not receive another coating. Apply in accordance with AWWA C151/ANSI A21.51. c B. Cement -Mortar Lining: AWWA C 104/ANSI A 21.4, apply on clean bare metal surfaces; extended to faces of flanges, ends of spigots, and shoulders of hubs. May 09 15251-3 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienU7X/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specificafions/Pre-SelecU15251 (FS-Clean) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install ductile iron piping in accordance with AWWA C 600, modified as specified in Section 15052. '' 3.02 JOINTS A. Install types of joints as specified in piping schedule in Section 15052. 3.03 GROOVED JOINTS A. Install piping with grooved joints where specified or indicated on the Drawings. B. Assemble grooved joints in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. C. Support grooved -end pipe in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. Install at least 1 support between consecutive couplings. D. Grooved joints may be installed where flanged joints are scheduled, except under the following conditions: 1. In underground and underwater installations. 2. In piping subject to test pressure of 150 pounds per square inch gauge or more. 3. In steam and in combustible gas piping systems. 4. When wall thickness of pipe is less than the minimum recommended in published instructions by the manufacturer of the grooved end coupling. E. Make connections to flanged valves, pumps and piping appurtenances by either: 1. Flanged -to -grooved joint adapters. 2. Flanged -by -grooved end pipe spool of sufficient length to prevent interference with the operation of adjacent valves, pumps or other items. 3. Integrally cast flanged -by -grooved end pipe fittings. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test ductile iron piping as specified in Section 15052. 1. Do not test sections longer than 1 /2 mile in total pipe length. END OF SECTION May 09 15251-4 8205A10 pwJ/CamHdDowwtdChwVr /Fort WorbVl 5At01Spadficabon&Pr&Se"15251(F&Oean) IP a i 7 3. Data on joint types and components used in the system including stub ends, backing flanges, flanged joints, grooved joint couplings and screwed joints. C. Manufacturing Certifications: D. Welder and weld operator qualification certificates and welding procedures. A schedule of weld operators and identification symbols, as required in Article 2.01 F. E. Cleaning procedures used for oxygen and ozone piping systems in accordance with CGA Standard G4.1. F. Design pressure de -rating calculations for schedule 40 or schedule 80 pipes that have threaded or grooved connections. G. Source quality control test reports. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE A. General: 1. Pipe sizes specified in the Specifications and indicated on the Drawings are nominal. B. Wall Thickness: 1. Piping 3 inches in nominal diameter and greater: Minimum wall thickness corresponding to Schedule 10S. 2. Piping less than 3 inches in nominal diameter: Minimum wall thickness corresponding the Schedule 40S. 3. Piping with threaded or grooved joints: Minimum wall thickness corresponding the Schedule 40S. C. Piping Material and Manufacturing: Comply with the requirements outlined in the following table: Service Stainless Steel Grade I Pipe Manufacturing Process Oxygen and Ozone Service Piping 3 inches in nominal diameter and larger Piping less than 3 inches in nominal diameter Type 316L stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 240 Type 316L stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 240 In accordance with ASTM A 778 In accordance with ASTM A 312 D. Fittings for Piping 3 Inches in Nominal Diameter and Greater: 1. Material: ASTM A 240 stainless steel, grade to match the pipe. 2. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM A 774. 3. Wall Thickness of Fitting: In accordance with ANSI B 36.19 for the schedule of pipe specified. 4. End Configuration: As needed to comply with specified type of joint_ 5. Dimensional Standards: a. Fittings with Weld Ends: In accordance with ANSI B 16.9. May 09 15255-3 pwJ(CarWUDDcumentslCbenVrXlFort WorM205A101Specfications/PreSelecVl5255 (FS-Clean) 8205A10 b. Fittings with Flanged Ends: In accordance with ANSI B16.5, Class 150. E. Fittings for Piping Less than 3 Inches in Diameter: 1. Material: ASTM A 240 stainless steel, grade to match the pipe. 2. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM A 403, Class WP. 3. Wall Thickness and Dimensions of Fitting: In accordance with ANSI B16.3 or ANSI B16.9 as appropriate and as required for the schedule of pipe specified. 4. End Configuration: As needed to comply with specified type of joint. 5. Forgings conforming to ASTM A182, Grade F304 or Grade F316; or barstock conforming to ASTM A276, Type 304 or Type 316. Forging or barstock material shall match the piping materials. F. Piping Joints: 1. Joint Types, Piping Greater than 2 Inches in Diameter, General: a. Where type of joint is specifically indicated on the Drawings or specified, design and shop -fabricate piping sections utilizing type of joint illustrated or scheduled. b. Where type of joint is not specifically indicated on the Drawings or specified in the Piping Schedule, design and shop -fabricate piping sections utilizing any of the following joint types: 1) Piping stub ends with backing flanges. 2) Welded joints. 3) Flanged joints. c. Joints at Valves and Pipe Appurtenances: Provide flanged valves and flanged pipe appurtenances in stainless steel piping systems with flanged ends. Design and fabricate piping sections to make connections with flanged valves and pipe appurtenances using piping stub ends with backing flanges, flanged coupling adapters or flanged joints. 1) Flexible Couplings and Flanged Coupling Adapters: Provide stainless steel construction with materials matching the piping system, and conforming to requirements of Section 15121. d. Joints in Digester Gas, Ozone and Oxygen Piping Systems, Membrane and Reverse Osmosis Filtration Systems: 1) Aboveground Piping: Welded, flanged or stub ends with backing flanges. 2) Underwater Piping: Welded or flanged. 2. Joints in Piping 2 Inches in Diameter and Smaller: Flanged or screwed with Teflon tape thread lubricant, as scheduled per Section 15052. 3. Welded Joints: a. Pipe 12 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Automatically weld joints using gas tungsten -arc procedures. b. Piping 4 Inches Through 12 Inches in Diameter: Double butt welded joints c. Piping less than 4 Inches in Diameter: Single butt -welded joints. d. Each weld shall be marked with a symbol that identifies the welder. 4. Flanged Joints: Conforming to the requirements of ANSI B16.5, Class 150. 5. Piping Stub Ends and Backing Flanges for Pipe 3 inches and Larger: a. Piping Stub Ends: Cast Type 304L or 316L stainless steel to match the pipe material with machined gasket and wetted surfaces of stub ends free of crevices, pits, cracks and protrusions. Manufacturers: Alaskan Copper Works, Figure SK-38 or equal. May 09 15255-4 8205A10 pwJ/CerddD=menM0enVrXlFort Wodh18ZMIO/Spedfcabom&PMSe"15255 (FSCim) U•i C. Provide written certification that the fittings as supplied conforms to the requirements of ASTM A774. Supplementary testing is not required. D. Examine 3 Percent of the Welds by X-Ray Methods: .1. For each weld found to be defective by X-ray methods, examine three additional welds using the same method. 2. Provide interpretation of X-ray pictures by an independent testing laboratory acceptable to ENGINEER, and submit written report of the findings issued by the laboratory. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ASSEMBLY OF SHOP -FABRICATED PIPING SECTIONS A. Join shop -fabricated piping sections together using backing flanges, flexible couplings, flanged coupling adapters, grooved couplings or flanges. B. Slope horizontal lines so that they can be drained completely. C. Provide valve drains at low points in piping systems. D. Install eccentric reducers where necessary to facilitate draining of piping system. E. Provide access for inspection and flushing of piping systems to remove sediment, deposits, and debris. ,"No, 3.02 QUALITY CONTROL IL A. Test Piping to Pressure and by Method Specified in Piping Schedule. 1. If pressure testing is accomplished with water, only potable quality water shall be used. 2. If pressure testing is accomplished with water, piping shall be thoroughly drained and dried. B. Visually inspect pipe for welding defects such as crevices, pits, cracks, protrusions, and oxidation deposits. C. Welds in oxygen and ozone service piping shall be examined and inspected in accordance with ANSI B31.3. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Preserve appearance and finish of stainless steel piping by providing suitable protection during handling and installation and until final acceptance of the Work. 1. Handling methods and equipment used shall prevent damage to the coating and shall include the use of wide canvas slings and wide padded skids. 2. Bare cables, chains, hooks, metal bars, or narrow skids shall not be used. END OF SECTION ,%move May 09 15255-7 8205A10 pw//Carollo/Documents/Cllent/TX/Fort Worth/8205AlMpecifications/Pre-SelecYl5255 (FS-Clean) This Page Intentionally Left Blank May 09 15255-8 8205A10 p+rACaMWDoarne WCl"WOn Ww hl820MI O/SpedkAwsn>r& Seled115255 (FS-Clean) SECTION 15755 PLATE AND FRAME HEAT EXCHANGERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Specifications for plate and frame heat exchangers associated with the Ozone System. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09960 - Coatings (Title?) 2. Section 11264A - Ozone System 3. Section 11264C - Ozone Generators and Power Supplies 1.02 REFERENCES A. General 1. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. 2. Where a date is given for reference standards, the edition of that date shall be used. Where no date is given for reference standards, the latest edition available on the date of Notice Inviting Bids shall be used. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2-Inch through NPS 24 Inches C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 1. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC), Section Vill, Division 1, Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A193, Standard Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High -Temperature Service 2. ASTM A194, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High -Pressure and High -Temperature Service 1.03 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Heat exchangers shall be of a double -walled design such that any leakage from ' either side of the heat exchanger will drain to atmosphere. B. Heat exchanger performance calculations shall include a minimum of ten percent additional surface area for fouling. Calculated heat transfer coefficients, with and without the additional fouling surface, shall be indicated on the manufacturer's submitted computer performance calculation data sheets. Nuple May 09 15755-1 8025A10 pwitCarollo/Documents/ClientrFX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecVl5755 (FS-Clean) C. The design of the heat exchanger unit shall not use more than 40 percent of the allowed pressure drop in the ports and port entry area. D. The manufacturer shall indicate on his data sheets the port velocities for each liquid being handled in the plate and frame heat exchahger. In no instance shall the port velocities exceed 20 fps. ` IR R 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The manufacturer of the plate and frame heat exchanger equipment shall submit documentation demonstrating that it has had five years, minimum, of successful industry experience in the fabrication and installation of plate and frame heat exchangers. B. Design calculations shall be submitted. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certifications 1. The Contractor shall certify that the plate and frame heat exchangers shall be designed, fabricated, and tested in accordance with the requirements of ASME BPVC, Section VIII, Division 1 and shall bear a permanently affixed nameplate with the appropriate code stamp and National Board Registration Number. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The plate and frame heat exchangers shall be shipped to the site as completely assembled units. B. The plate and frame heat exchangers shall be pressure tested and flushed clean at the factory prior to shipment. All nozzle connections shall be factory sealed to prevent the entrance of foreign matter into the heat exchangers during shipment, storage, and installation. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER'S A. One of the following or approved equal 1. APV Heat Transfer Technology; 2. Alfa -Laval 2.02 FABRICATION A. Frame Construction Requirements 1. Preference shall be given to a single pass design with all the connections located on the head (fixed cover). 2. The head (fixed cover) and follower (movable cover) shall be constructed of carbon steel in sufficient thickness and strength to operate within the designated design and test pressures. Design strength calculations shall be submitted. Welded reinforcements or stiffeners are prohibited. May 09 15755-2 8025A10 pwJCamloCoarnentslCfenVT%IFort WortlJ8MMIOISpecirmbonstPreSek)cUI5755 (FS-0e ) 3. The follower (movable cover) shall be provided with a steel bearing supported roller assembly for units greater than 36 inches in height, measured from the floor to the top of the unit. The roller assembly shall allow the follower to slide more easily when opening or closing the unit. 4. The top and bottom carrying bars and tightening bolts shall be designed to allow for at least a 15 percent expansion of the plate pack. 5. The heat exchanger frame shall be bolted together to permit easy replacement of top and bottom carrying bars for expansion beyond the original frame size supplied. Welded construction is prohibited. 6. The top and bottom carrying bars shall have a smooth finished stainless steel surface where the heat transfer plates come in contact with it. 7. The design of the plate and frame heat exchanger shall permit the removal of any plate in the plate pack without the need to remove any other plates. 8. Frame tightening bolts, conforming to ASTM A193, B7 with ASTM A194, 2H nuts, shall be mechanically retained to prevent accidental side removal. The design shall be such that there is positive tie bar retention within the frame without having to completely disassemble the tightening bolts to remove the plates. 9. Tightening bolts shall be equipped with a captive nut at the head (fixed cover) and a keyed working nut at the follower (movable cover) to allow for easy opening and closing of the units. 10. The plate pack and tightening bolts shall be covered with a Type 316 stainless steel shroud. 11. The plate and frame heat exchanger shall be supplied with lifting holes, as required, to facilitate the safe movement of the unit. 12. Plate alignment shall be maintained mechanically through the use of the top and bottom carrying bars to minimize horizontal and vertical movement of the plates. 13. The gasket design shall include raised lugs that interlock in a tongue and groove fashion to further prevent plate movement during heat exchanger tightening and to ensure alignment of sealing surfaces. 14. All exposed frame parts shall be surface prepared and painted in accordance with Section 09960. Fasteners shall be coated with zinc -rich primer only prior to shipping, and finish coated after field installation. B. Connections 1. Connections shall be Type 316L, Schedule 10, stainless steel nozzles with 150 psi lap joint flanges in accordance with ANSI B16.5. C. Heat Transfer Plates 1. The heat transfer plates shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 2. The dual plates shall be welded together to ensure any leak would drain to atmosphere under static pressure. 3. The heat transfer plates shall be pressed from a homogeneous single sheet of metal in one step. No multi -stage pressing of one sheet is allowed. 4. All plates and gaskets shall be permanently marked to identify the material and quality associated with its manufacturer. In addition, each plate shall be identified to ensure its proper location within the plate pack. 5. The plates shall be of herringbone (Chevron) pattern to provide the highest " possible heat transfer. 6. Plates shall be reinforced on the upper and lower mounting slots to avoid bending hangers on the plates. May 09 15755-3 8025A10 pvrl/Carollo/Documents/Clien7TX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Select/15755 (FS-Clean) 7. Plates shall have a minimum thickness of 0.020 inch. The design shall be such that the plate can withstand the maximum operating pressure with no pressure on the adjacent plates. 8. Each plate shall have a reinforced, rolled edge integral hanging eye to help the plate slide more smoothly along the top and bottom carrying bars. Separate hanging clips are not acceptable for either support or positioning. 9. No welded reinforcing strips are allowed on the heat transfer plate. 10. Gasket grooves in the plate shall be designed to retain the gaskets yet allow for thermal expansion. 11. The gasket groove shall provide 100 percent support of the gasket periphery. No part of the gasket shall be unsupported or exposed to guard against gasket blowout. D. Gaskets 1. The gaskets shall be made of EPDM. 2. Gaskets shall be of a one piece molded interlocking tongue and groove design. Gaskets shall interlock between plate gasket channels providing a mechanical alignment system to prevent plate movement during exchanger tightening, and to prevent the gasket from being forced out of the channel under operating pressure. 3. Inactive port gasket areas shall be vented to the exterior in such a manner that no mixing can occur between the fluid circuits. 4. It is preferred that the gaskets be pressed in (glue free). No special tools shall be required to attach the gasket. All gaskets shall be identical except the end plate gasket between the end plate and the frame. 5. If glue is used to hold the gasket on the plate, then it shall be compatible with the gasket material and the process fluids being handled. Glued in gaskets shall be heat -cured to ensure that it is properly bonded to the plate. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Certifications 1. All factory hydrostatic testing of the plate heat exchanger shall be scheduled in conjunction with the Engineer to determine if a factory representative will be required to be present. 2. The hydrostatic test shall be in accordance with ASME BPVC, Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-99. 3. The hydrotest water shall not have a chloride content that exceeds 50 ppm and the unit shall be completely drained prior to shipment. 4. The Contractor shall ensure that the plate heat exchanger manufacturer is required to make factory representation available for thermal or pressure testing, as required. 5. If field testing of the heat exchanger indicates failure to meet the performance requirements of these specifications, the Ozone System Supplier shall be responsible for whatever additions, modifications or replacements and retesting that may be necessary to provide a heat exchanger which fully conforms to the specified requirements. May 09 15755-4 8025A10 perXardoiDmmwts1CGeM7X/Fat WorW 05A10/Sma k;atlons f15755 (FSLlean) s PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The plate and frame heat exchangers shall be installed on skids, one skid for each ozone generator, with other closed -loop cooling water equipment by the Ozone System Manufacturer. END OF SECTION May 09 15755-5 8025A10 perJ/Card1dDoa ments/ClienVTXlFort Wath18205A101SpecificatiorrslPr&SelecV15755 (FS-Clean) This Page Intentionally Left Blank 4 May 09 15755-6 8025A10 pvrJlCm#dDo mmts/CHenVrX/Fon WorCY84 *A1 15755 (FS-Clean) 1p SECTION 15956 PIPING SYSTEMS TESTING ., PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes.- Test requirements for piping systems. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15052 - Basic Piping Materials and Methods. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC). B. National Fuel Gas Code: ANSI Z 223.1 or NFPA 54. C. American National Standards Institute/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME): 1. B31.8 - Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems. 2. B31.1 - Power Piping. 3. B31.3 - Process Piping. ',.o, D. Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC). 1.03 TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. General Requirements: 1. Testing requirements are stipulated in Laws and Regulations; are included in the Piping Schedule in Section 15052; are specified in the specifications covering the various types of piping; and are specified herein. 2. Requirements in Laws and Regulations supersede other requirements of Contract Documents, except where requirements of Contract Documents are more stringent, including higher test pressures, longer test times, and lower leakage allowances. 3. Test plumbing piping in accordance with Laws and Regulations, the Uniform Plumbing Code, and UL requirements. 4. When testing with water, the specified test pressure is considered to be the pressure at the highest point of the piping section under test. Lower test pressure as necessary to prevent testing the lowest point above a safe test pressure. B. Furnish necessary personnel, materials, and equipment, including bulkheads, restraints, anchors, temporary connections, pumps, water, pressure gauges, and other means and facilities required to perform tests. R C. Pipes to be Tested: Test only those portions of pipes that have been installed as part of this Contract. `%'ipe May 09 15956-1 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienUTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Select/15956 (FS-Clean) D. Unsuccessful Tests: � 1 1. Where tests are not successful, correct defects or remove defective piping and appurtenances and install piping and appurtenances that comply with the specified requirements. 2. Repeat testing until tests are successful. E. Test Completion: Drain and leave piping clean after successful testing. 1.04 SEQUENCE A. Clean piping before pressure or leak tests. B. Test piping for visible leaks. PART2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING ALIGNMENT, GRADE, AND DEFLECTION A. Alignment and Grade: 1. Visually inspect the interior of gravity piping with artificial light, reflected light, or laser beam. 2. Consider inspection complete when no broken or collapsed piping, no open or poorly made joints, no grade changes that affect the piping capacity, or no other defects are observed. B. Deflection Test: 1. Pull a mandrel through the clean piping section under test. 2. Use a 9 rod mandrel with a contact length of not less than the nominal diameter of the pipe within one percent plus or minus. 3. Consider test complete when the mandrel can be pulled through the piping with reasonable effort by 1 person, without the aid of mechanical equipment. 3.02 AIR TESTING METHOD FOR PRESSURE PIPING A. Air test piping, indicated with "AM" in the Piping Schedule, with air or another nonflammable or inert gas. B. Test gas, air, liquefied petroleum gas, liquid chlorine, and chlorine gas piping by the air test method. 1. Test chlorine piping with dry air or nitrogen having a dew point of minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit or less. Supply temporary air dryers as necessary. C. Test at pressure as specified in Piping Schedule in Section 15052. 1. Provide temporary pressure relief valve for piping under test. Set at the lesser of 110 percent of the test pressure or 50 pounds per square inch gauge over the test pressure. May 2009 15956-2 8205A10 pwJ/CarolWoaane WClienVr&FortWWW8MI0/Specifications/P2Seled/15M(FS-Clean) a 2. Air method test pressures shall not exceed 110 percent of the piping maximum �-! allowable working pressure calculated in accordance with the most stringent of ANSI/ASME B31.1, ANSI/ASME B31.3, ANSI/ASE B31.8, or the pipe manufacturer's stated maximum working pressure. 3. Gradually increase test pressure to an initial test pressure equal to the lesser of one-half the test pressure or 25 pounds per square inch gauge. 4. Perform initial check of joints and fittings for leakage. 5. Gradually increase test pressure in steps no larger than the initial pressure. Check for leakage at each step increase until test pressure reached. 6. At each step in the pressure, examine and test piping being air tested for leaks with soap solution. 7. Consider examination complete when piping section under test holds the test pressure for 15 minutes without losses. 3.03 TESTING GRAVITY FLOW PIPING A. Test Gravity Flow Piping Indicated with "GR" in the Piping Schedule, as Follows: 1. Unless Specified Otherwise, Subject Gravity Flow Piping to the Following Tests: a. Alignment and grade. b. For plastic piping test for deflection. c. Visible leaks and pressure with maximum leakage allowance, except for storm drains and culverts. 2. Inspect piping for visible leaks before backfilling. Provide temporary restraints when needed to prevent movement of piping. Pressure test piping with maximum leakage allowance after backfilling. 3. With the lower end plugged, fill piping slowly with water while allowing air to escape from high points. Keep piping full under a slight head for the water at least 24 hours. a. Examine piping for visible leaks. Consider examination complete when no visible leaks are observed. b. Maintain piping with water, or allow a new water absorption period of 24 hours for the performance of the pressure test with maximum leakage allowance. c. After successful completion of the test for visible leaks and after the piping has been restrained and backfilled, subject piping to the test pressure for minimum of four hours while accurately measuring the volume of water added to maintain the test pressure. 1) Consider the test complete when leakage is equal to or less than the following maximum leakage allowances: a) For Concrete Piping with Rubber Gasket Joints: 80 gallons per day per inch of diameter per mile of piping under test. (1) Advise manufacturer of concrete piping with rubber gasket joints of more stringent than normal maximum leakage allowance. ` b) For Vitrified Clay and Other Piping: 500 gallons per day per inch of diameter per mile of piping under test. ... May 09 15956-3 8205A10 pw:!/Carollo/Documents(CIIenUTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/SpecificationslPre-SelecUl5956 (FS-Clean) 3.04 TESTING HIGH -HEAD PRESSURE PIPING A. Test piping for which the specified test pressure in the Piping Schedule is 20 pounds per square inch gauge or greater, by the high head pressure test method, indicated "HH" in the Piping schedule. B. General: 1. Test connections, hydrants, valves, blowoffs, and closure pieces with the piping. 2. Do not use installed valves for shutoff when the specified test pressure exceeds the valve's maximum allowable seat differential pressure. Provide blinds or other means to isolate test sections. 3. Do not include valves, equipment or piping specialties in test sections if test pressure exceeds the valve, equipment or piping specialty safe test pressure allowed by the item's manufacturer. 4. During the performance of the tests, test pressure shall not vary more than plus or minus 5 pounds per square inch gauge with respect to the specified test pressure. 5. Select the limits of testing to sections of piping. Select sections that have the same piping material and test pressure. 6. When Test Results Indicate Failure of Selected Sections, Limit Tests to Piping: a. Between valves. b. Between a valve and the end of the piping. c. Less than 500 feet long. 7. Test piping for minimum 2 hours for visible leaks test and minimum 2 hours for the pressure test with maximum leakage allowarrce. C. Testing Procedures: 1. Fill piping section under test slowly with water while venting air. Use potable water for all potable waterlines and where noted on the Piping Schedule 2. Before pressurizing for the tests, retain water in piping under slight pressure for a water absorption period of minimum 24 hours. 3. Raise pressure to the specified test pressure and inspect piping visually for leaks. Consider visible leakage testing complete when no visible leaks are observed. D. Pressure Test with Maximum Leakage Allowance: 1. Leakage allowance is zero for piping systems using flanged, National Pipe Thread threaded and welded joints. 2. Pressure test piping after completion of visible leaks test. 3. For piping systems using joint designs other than flanged threaded or welded joints, accurately measure the makeup water necessary to maintain the pressure in the piping section under test during the pressure test period. a. Consider the pressure test to be complete when makeup water added is less than the allowable leakage and no damage to piping and appurtenances has occurred. b. Successful completion of the pressure test with maximum leakage allowance shall have been achieved when the observed leakage during the test period is equal or less than the allowable leakage and no damage to piping and appurtenances has occurred. c. When leakage is allowed, calculate the allowable leakage by the following formula: May 2009 15956-4 8205A10 pwJ/CardW)w meWGienU Wort WartlU8 M101SpedkalimslPre.Seled1lM (FS-Clean) R L=SxDxP1f2x133,200-' wherein the terms shall mean: L = Allowable leakage in gallons per hour. S = Length of the test section in feet. D = Nominal diameter of the piping in inches. P = Average observed test pressure in pounds per square inches, gauge, at the lowest point of the test section, corrected for elevation of the pressure gauge. x = The multiplication symbol. 3.05 TESTING LOW -HEAD PRESSURE PIPING A. Test piping for which the specified test pressure is less than 20 pounds per square inch gauge, by the low head pressure test method, indicated "LH" in the Piping Schedule. B. General: 1. Test pressures shall be as scheduled in Section 15052. 2. During the performance of the tests, test pressure shall not vary more than plus or minus 2 pounds per square inch gauge with respect to the specified test pressure. 3. Test connections, blowoffs, vents, closure pieces, and joints into structures, including existing bell rings and other appurtenances, with the piping. 4. Test piping for minimum 2 hours for visible leaks test and minimum 2 hours for the pressure test with maximum leakage allowance. C. Visible Leaks Test: 1. Subject piping under test to the specified pressure measured at the lowest end. 2. Fill piping section under test slowly with potable water while venting air. 3. Before pressurizing for the tests, retain water in piping under slight pressure for the water absorption period of minimum 24 hours. 4. Raise pressure to the specified test pressure and inspect piping visually for leaks. Consider testing complete when no visible leaks are observed. D. Pressure Test with Maximum Leakage Allowance: 1. Pressure test piping after completion of visible leaks test. 2. Accurately measure the makeup water necessary to maintain the pressure in the piping section under test during the pressure test period. a. Consider the pressure test to be complete when makeup water added is less than the allowable leakage of 80 gallons per inch of nominal diameter, per mile of piping section under test after 24 hours and no damage to piping and appurtenances has occurred. r May 09 15956-5 8205A10 pw:11Carcllo/DocumentstClienffXlFort WorlhI8205A10/SpecificabonsiPre-Select/15956 (FS-aean) b. Successful completion of the leakage test shall have been achieved when the observed leakage is equal or less than the allowable leakage and no damage to piping and appurtenances has occurred. E. Optional Joint Test.- 1 When Joint Testing Is Allowed by Note in the Piping Schedule, the Procedure Shall Be as Follows: a. Joint testing will be allowed only for low head pressure piping. 2. Joint testing may be performed with water or air. 3. Joint test piping after completion of backfill and compaction to the top of the trench. 4. Joint Testing with Water: a. Measure test pressure at the invert of the pipe. Apply pressure of 4 feet plus the inside diameter of the pipe in water column within 0.20 feet in water column. b. Maintain test pressure for one minute. c. Base the allowable leakage per joint on 80 gallons per inch nominal diameter, per mile of piping, per 24 hours equally distributed to the actual number of joints per mile for the type of piping. d. Consider the pressure test to be complete when makeup water added is less than the allowable leakage. e. Successful completion of the joint test with water shall have been achieved when the observed leakage is equal or less than the allowable leakage. 5. Joint Testing with Air: a. Apply test pressure of 3 pounds per square inch gauge with a maximum variation of plus 0.20 and minus 0.00 pounds per square inch. b. Maintain test pressure for 2 minutes. c. Consider the pressure test to be complete when the test pressure does not drop below 2.7 pounds per square inch for the duration of the test. END OF SECTION May 2009 15956-6 8205A10 purl/CardWDomenfslCHenYWortWat1Y8Z05 IaSpeafica mslPreSeWP5956(FS-Clean) SECTION 15958 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING W = PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Testing of mechanical equipment and systems. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15956 - Piping Systems Testing. 2. Section 16222 - Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower. 3. Section 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests. 4. Section 17950 - Testing, Calibration, and Commissioning. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI S1.4 Specification for Sound Level Meters. B. American National Standards Institute/Hydraulic Institute (ANSI/HI): 1. ANSI/HI 1.1-1.5 Standard for Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation. 2. ANSI/HI 1.6 Standard for Centrifugal Pump Tests. �..i 3. ANSI/HI 2.1-2.5 Standard for Vertical Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation. 4. ANSI/HI 2.6 Standard for Vertical Pump Tests. 5. ANSI/HI 3.1-3.5 Standard for Rotary Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation. 6. ANSI/HI 3.6 Standard for Rotary Pump Tests. 7. ANSI/HI 4.1-4.6 Standard for Sealless Rotary Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application, Operation and Test. 8. ANSI/HI 5.1-5.6 Standard for Sealless Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application, Operation and Test. 9. ANSI/HI 6.1-6.5 Standard for Reciprocating Power Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation. 10. ANSI/HI 6.6 Standard for Reciprocating Pump Tests. 11. ANSI/HI 7.1-7.5 Standard for Controlled Volume Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation. 12. ANSI/HI 8.1-8.5 Standard for Direct Acting for Steam Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation. 13. ANSI/HI 9.1-9.5 Standard for Pumps - General Guidelines for Types, } Definitions, Application and Sound Measurement. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of factory tests and field tests as specified in this Section. .. B. Test instrumentation calibration data. May 09 15958-1 8205A10 pwJ/Carollo/Documents/ClientrTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Spedficafions/Pre-SelecVl5958 (FSClean) C. Test result reports. PART PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING AND REPORTING A. Scheduling and Notification: 1. Witnessed Source Quality Control Tests: Schedule test date and notify ENGINEER at least 30 days prior to start of test. 2. Field Quality Control Tests: Schedule test date and notify ENGINEER at least 7 days prior to start of test. B. Testing Levels: 1. Test equipment based on test levels specified in the equipment Section of the Specifications. 2. Requirements for Test Levels 1 to 4 are defined below, 3. Test levels apply for both Source (Factory) Quality Control Tests and Field Quality Control Tests as specified in the individual equipment Sections of the Specifications. 4. If testing is not specified in the equipment Section, provide Level 1 testing. C. Witnessing: Source Quality Control Tests not witnessed unless specified otherwise in the equipment specification Section; Field Quality Control Tests shall be witnessed. D. Instrumentation: Provide necessary test instrumentation which has been calibrated within one year from date of test to recognized test standards traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology, Washington, D.C. or approved source. Properly calibrated field instrumentation permanently installed as a part of the Work may be utilized for Field Quality Control Tests. E. Temporary Facilities and Labor: Provide necessary fluids, utilities, temporary piping, temporary supports, temporary access platforms or access means and other temporary facilities and labor necessary to safely operate the equipment and accomplish the specified testing. With OWNER's permission, some utilities may be provided by fully tested permanently installed utilities that are part of the Work. F. Test Fluids: 1. Factory Tests: Use water or air as appropriate at ambient conditions unless specified otherwise in the equipment Section. 2. Field Tests: Use specified process fluid at available conditions. G. Pressure Testing: Hydrostatically pressure test pressure containing parts in the factory at the appropriate standard or code required level above the equipment component specified design pressure or operating pressure, whichever is higher. Submit pressure test reports before shipping. May 09 15958-2 8205A10 pud/CardldDocuments 0WnVWFort WaUM5A10/Sped catiomlPm-SelKY15958 (FS40m) -� H. Test Measurement and Result Accuracy: 1. Use test instruments with accuracies as recommended in the appropriate referenced standards. When no accuracy is recommended in the referenced standard, use 1 percent or better accuracy test instruments. Improved (lower error tolerance) accuracies specified elsewhere prevail over this general requirement. 2. Do not adjust results of tests for instrumentation accuracy. Measured values and values directly calculated from measured values shall be the basis for comparing actual equipment performance to specified requirements. Field Testing: 1. Submit test plan as specified this Section. Indicate test start time and duration, equipment to be tested, other equipment involved or required; temporary facilities required, number and skill or trade of personnel involved; safety issues and planned safety contingencies; anticipated effect on OWNER's existing equipment and other information relevant to the test. Provide locations of all instruments to be used for testing. Provide calibration records for all instrumentation. 2. Perform general start-up and testing procedures as specified in Section 01650. 3. Prior to testing, verify equipment protective devices and safety devices have been installed, calibrated, and tested. J. Reports: Submit reports for Source and Field testing. Submit Source Quality Control Test result reports before shipping equipment to the field. Report features: 1. Report results in a bound document in generally accepted engineering format with title page, written summary of results compared to specified requirements, and appropriate curves or plots of significant variables in English units. Iftwor 2. Include appendix with a copy of raw, unmodified test data sheets indicating test value, date and time of reading, and initials of person taking the data. 3. Include appendix with sample calculations for adjustments to raw test data and for calculated results. 4. Include appendix with the make, model, and last calibration date of instrumentation used for test measurements. 5. Include in body of report a drawing or sketch of the test system layout showing location and orientation of the test instruments relative to the tested equipment features. 3.02 EQUIPMENT TESTING, GENERAL A. Tests for Pumps, All Levels of Testing: 1. Test in accordance with applicable Hydraulic Institute Standards in addition to the requirements in this and other Sections. 2. Test Tolerances: In accordance with appropriate Hydraulic Institute Standards, except the following modified tolerances apply: a. From 0 to plus 5 percent of head at the specified flows. b. From 0 to plus 5 percent of flow at the rated design point head. c. No negative tolerance for the efficiency at design point. d. No positive tolerance for vibration limits. Vibration limits and test methods in Hydraulic Institute Standards do not apply, use limits and methods specified in this or other Sections of the Specifications. May 09 15958-3 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientrrX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/PreSelecU15958 (FS-Clean) B. Tests for Drivers: Test motors as specified in Section 16222. Test other drivers as specified in the driver equipment Section. 3.03 REQUIREMENTS FOR VIBRATION TESTING A. Definitions: 1. Peak to Peak Displacement: The root mean squared average of the peak to peak displacement multiplied by the square root of 2. 2. Peak Velocity: The root mean squared average of the peak velocity multiplied by the square root of 2. 3. Peak Acceleration: The root mean squared average of the peak acceleration multiplied by the square root of 2. 4. High Frequency Enveloping: A process to extract very low amplitude time domain signals associated with impact or impulse events such as bearing or gear tooth defects and display them in a frequency spectrum of acceleration versus frequency. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Rockwell Automation, Entek Group, "Spike Energy" analysis. b. CSI, "PeakVue." 5. Low Speed Equipment: Equipment or components of equipment rotating at less than 600 revolutions per minute. 6. High Speed Equipment: Equipment and equipment components operating at or above 600 revolutions per minute. B. Vibration Instrumentation Requirements: 1. Analyzers: Use digital type analyzers or data collectors with anti-aliasing filter, 12 bit A/D converter, fast fourier transform circuitry, phase measurement capability, time wave form data storage, high frequency enveloping capabilities, 35 frequency ranges from 21 to 1,500,000 cycles per minute, adjustable fast fourier transform resolution from 400 to 6,400 fines, storage for up to one hundred 3,200 line frequency spectra, RS232C data output port, circuitry for integration of acceleration data to velocity or double integration to displacement. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Entek-IRD, Division of Rockwell Automation, Enpac 1200 with applicable data analysis software or Entek Model 838 analyzer with built in printer. b. Computational Systems Inc., (CSI) Division of Emerson Electric, Model 2120A, Data Collector/analyzer with applicable analysis software. 2. Analyzer Settings: a. Units: English, inches/second, mils, and g's. b. Fast Fourier Transform Lines: Most equipment 1,600 minimum; for motors, enough lines as required to distinguish motor current frequencies from rotational frequencies, use 3,200 lines for motors with a nominal speed of 3,600 rpm; 3,200 lines minimum for High Frequency Enveloping; 1,600 lines minimum for low speed equipment. c. Sample Averages: 4 minimum d. Maximum Frequency (Finax): 40 times rotational frequency for rolling element bearings, 10 times rotational frequency for sleeve bearings. e. Amplitude Range: Auto select but full scale not more than twice the acceptance criteria or the highest peak, whichever is lower. f. Fast Fourier Transform Windowing: Hanning Window. g. High Pass Filter: Minus 3 dB at 120 cycles per minute for high speed equipment. Minus 3 dB at 21 cycles per minute for low speed equipment. 3. Accelerometers: May 09 15958-4 8205A10 pwitCarold = neWCienUTYJFat Wffb 2M lV4eaficaWnWm-ce;eWl59,8 (FS-Clean) � a. For Low Speed Equipment: Low frequency, shear mode accelerometer, ^ 500 millivolts per g sensitivity, 10 g range, plus/minus 5 percent frequency response from 0.5 hertz to 850 hertz, magnetic mount. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Wilcoxon Research, Model 797L. 2) PCB, Model 393C. ,t b. For High Speed Equipment: General purpose accelerometer, 100 millivolts per g sensitivity, 50 g range, plus/minus 3dB frequency response range from 2 hertz to 12,000 hertz when stud mounted, with magnetic mount holder. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Wilcoxon Research, Model 793. 2) Entek-IRD Model 943. C. Accelerometer Mounting: 1. Use magnetic mounting or stud mounting. 2. Mount on bearing housing in location with best available direct path to bearing and shaft vibration. 3. Remove paint and mount transducer on flat metal surface or epoxy mount for High Frequency Enveloping measurements. D. Vibration Testing Results Presentation: 1. Provide equipment drawing with location and orientation of measurement points indicated. 2. For each vibration measurement take and include appropriate data on equipment operating conditions at the time vibration data is taken; for pumps, compressors, and blowers record suction pressure, discharge pressure, and flow. 3. When Vibration Spectra Data Required: a. Plot peak vibration velocity versus frequency in cycles per minute. b. Label plots showing actual shaft or part rotation frequency, bearing inner and outer race ball pass frequencies, gear mesh frequencies and relevant equipment excitation frequencies on the plot; label probable cause of vibration peaks whether in excess of specification limits or not. c. Label plots with equipment identification and operating conditions such as tag number, capacity, pressure, driver horsepower, and point of vibration measurement. d. Plot motor spectra on a log amplitude scale versus frequency. 4. For low speed equipment, plot peak vibration displacement versus frequency as well as velocity versus frequency. 5. Provide name of manufacturer and model number of the vibration instrumentation used, including analyzer and accelerometer used together with mounting type. 3.04 TESTING LEVELS or A. Level 1 Quality Control Tests: 1. Level 1 General Equipment Performance Test: a. For equipment, operate, rotate, or otherwise functionally test for 15 minutes minimum after components reach normal operating temperatures. .. b. Operate at rated design load conditions. May 09 15958-5 8205A10 pw://Carollo/UocumenWClient/TX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifcatons/Pre-Selectl15958 (FS-Clean) c. Confirm that equipment is properly assembled, equipment moves or rotates in the proper direction, shafting, drive elements and bearings are installed and lubricated in accordance with proper tolerances, and that no unusual power consumption, lubrication temperatures, bearing temperatures, or other conditions are observed. 2. Level 1 Pump Performance Test: • a. Measure flow and head while operating at or near the rated condition; for ;lZ factory testing, testing may be at reduced speeds with flow and head corresponding to the rated condition when adjusted for speed using the appropriate affinity laws. b. Use of a test driver is permitted for factory tests when actual driver is given a separate test at its point of manufacture as specified in Section 16222 or the applicable equipment Section. Use actual driver for field tests. c. Record measured flow, suction pressure, discharge pressure, and make observations on bearing temperatures and noise levels. 3. Level 1 Vibration Test: a. Test Requirement: 1) Measure filtered vibration spectra versus frequency in three perpendicular planes at each normally accessible bearing housing on the driven equipment, any gears and on the driver; one plane of measurement to be parallel to the axis of rotation of the component. 2) Vibration spectra versus frequency shall be in accordance with paragraph 15958-3.07. b. Equipment Operating Condition: Test at specified maximum speed. 4. Level 1 Noise Test: a. Measure unfiltered overall A -weighted sound pressure level in dBA at 3 feet horizontally from the surface of the equipment and at a mid -point of the equipment height. B. Level 2 Quality Control Tests: 1. Level 2 General Performance Test: a. For equipment, operate, rotate, or otherwise functionally test for at least 2 hours after components reach normal operating temperatures. b. Operate at rated design load conditions. c. Confirm that equipment is properly assembled, equipment moves or rotates in the proper direction, shafting, drive elements and bearings are installed and lubricated in accordance with proper tolerances, and that no unusual power consumption, lubrication temperatures, bearing temperatures, or other conditions are observed. 2. Level 2 Pump Performance Test: a. Test 2 hours minimum for flow and head at the rated condition; for factory testing, testing may be at a reduced speeds with flow and head corresponding to the rated condition when adjusted for speed using the appropriate affinity laws. b. Use of a test driver is permitted for factory tests when actual driver is given a separate test at its point of manufacture as specified in Section 16222. Use actual driver for field tests. c. Test for flow and head at two additional conditions; one at 25 percent r,.. below the rated flow and one at 10 percent above the rated flow. d. Record measured flow, suction pressure, discharge pressure, and observations on bearing temperatures and noise levels at each condition. May 09 15958-6 8205A10 p` i/CarolaDowments/ClienllrX/FortWorltM5A1mSpedfica0arGflk-�15958 (FS-CL-m) 3. Level 2 Vibration Test: a. Test Requirement: 1) Measure filtered vibration spectra versus frequency and measure vibration phase in three perpendicular planes at each normally accessible bearing housing on the driven equipment, any gears and on the driver; one plane of measurement to be parallel to the axis of rotation of the component; measure actual rotational speeds for each vibration spectra measured using photometric or other tachometer input connected directly to the vibration data collector. 2) Vibration spectra versus frequency shall be in accordance with paragraph 15958-3.07. b. Equipment Operating Condition: Repeat test requirements at design specified maximum speed and at minimum speed for variable speed equipment. c. Natural Frequency Test of Field Installed Equipment: 1) Excite the installed equipment and support system in 3 perpendicular planes, use same planes as operating vibration measurement planes, and determine the as -installed natural resonant frequency of the driven equipment, the driver, gears and supports. 2) Perform test at each bearing housing, at each support pedestal, and for pumps on the suction and discharge piping. 3) Perform with equipment and attached piping full of intended service or process fluid. 4. Level 2 Noise Test: a. Measure filtered A -weighted overall sound pressure level in dBA for each of 8 octave band mid -points beginning at 63 hertz measured at 3 feet horizontally from the surface of the equipment at mid -point height of the ...� noise source. C. Level 3 Quality Control Tests: 1. Level 3 General Equipment Performance Tests: a. For equipment, operate, rotate, or otherwise functionally test for at least 4 hours after components reach normal operating temperatures. b. Operate at rated design load conditions for one half the specified time; operate at each of any other specified conditions for a proportionate share of the remaining test time. c. Confirm that equipment is properly assembled, equipment rotates in the proper direction, shafting and bearings are installed and lubricated in accordance with proper tolerances, and that no unusual noise, vibration or temperatures are observed. d. Take appropriate capacity, power or fuel consumption, torque, revolutions per minute, pressure and temperature readings using appropriate test instrumentation to confirm equipment meets specified performance requirements at the design rated condition. e. Bearing Temperatures: During maximum speed or capacity performance testing, measure and record the exterior surface temperature of each bearing versus time. 2. Level 3 Pump Performance Test: a. Test 4 hours minimum for flow and head at or near the rated condition; for factory testing, testing may be at a reduced speeds with flow and head corresponding to the rated condition when adjusted for speed using the appropriate affinity laws. May 09 15958-7 8205A10 pvd/CarollolDocument4Clien7TxlFort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecVt5958 (FS-Gean) b. Use of a test driver is permitted for factory tests when actual driver is 16 given a separate test at its point of manufacture as specified in Section 16222. Use actual driver for field tests. c. Test each specified flow and head condition at the rated speed and test at minimum as well as maximum specified speeds; operate at each test condition for a minimum of 15 minutes; for factory testing, test at other _ speeds may be omitted if test driver at reduced speeds is used for rated condition testing. d. Record measured shaft revolutions per minute, flow, suction pressure, discharge pressure; record measured bearing temperatures (bearing housing exterior surface temperatures may be recorded when bearing temperature devices are not required by the equipment specification) and record observations on noise levels. 3. Level 3 Vibration Test: a. Requirements: Same as Level 2 vibration test except data taken at each operating condition tested and with additional requirements below. b. Perform High Frequency Enveloping Analysis for gears and bearings. 1) Measure bearing element vibration directly on each bearing cap in a location close as possible to the bearing load zone that provides a smooth surface and direct path to the bearing to detect bearing defects. 2) Report results in units of acceleration versus frequency in cycles per minute. c. Perform Time Wave Form analysis for gears, low speed equipment and reciprocating equipment; plot true peak amplitude velocity and displacement versus time and label the period between peaks with the likely cause of the periodic peaks (relate the period to a cause). d. Plot vibration spectra on three different plots; peak displacement versus frequency, peak acceleration versus frequency and peak velocity versus frequency. 4. Level 3 Noise Test: Measure filtered, un-weighted overall sound pressure level in dB at 3 feet horizontally from the surface of the equipment at mid -point height and at four locations approximately 90 degrees apart in plan view; report results for each of 8 octave band mid -points beginning at 63 hertz. D. Level 4 Quality Control Tests: 1. Level 4 General Equipment Performance Test: a. For equipment, operate, rotate, or otherwise functionally test for at least 8 hours after components reach normal operating temperatures. b. Operate at rated design load conditions for one half the specified time; operate at each of any other specified conditions for a proportionate share of the remaining test time. c. Confirm that equipment is properly assembled, equipment rotates in the proper direction, shafting and bearings are installed and lubricated in accordance with proper tolerances, and that no unusual noise, vibration or temperatures are observed. d. Take appropriate capacity, power or fuel consumption, torque, revolutions per minute, pressure and temperature readings using appropriate test instrumentation to confirm equipment meets specified performance requirements at the design rated condition. May 09 15958-8 8205A10 pwJ]CardldDocummL;rlieM/TXEort WwKW05A101SpecikWmnslPreSelecUt5%8 (FSClean) ,%M! e. Bearing Temperatures: During maximum speed or capacity testing, measure and record the exterior surface temperature of each bearing versus time. 2. Level 4 Pump Performance Test: a. Test 8 hours minimum for flow and head; begin tests at or near the rated r condition; for factory and field testing, test with furnished motor at full speed. b. Test each specified flow and head condition at the rated speed and test at minimum as well as maximum specified speeds; operate at each test condition for a minimum of 20 minutes or longer as necessary to measure required performance, vibration and noise data at each test condition. c. Record measured shaft revolutions per minute, flow, suction pressure, discharge pressure; record measured bearing temperatures (bearing housing exterior surface temperatures may be recorded when bearing temperature devices not required by the equipment specification) and record observations on noise levels. d. Bearing Temperatures: During maximum speed or capacity testing, measure and record the exterior surface temperature of each bearing versus time. e. Perform efficiency and/or Net Positive Suction Head Required (NPSHr) and/or priming time tests when specified in the equipment Section in accordance with the appropriate ANSI/HI standard and as follows: 1) Perform NPSHr testing at maximum rated design speed, head and flow with test fluids at ambient conditions; at maximum rated speed, test at 15 percent above rated design flow, and 25 percent below rated design flow. 2) Perform efficiency testing with test fluids at maximum rated speed. 3) Perform priming time testing with test fluids at maximum rated speed. 3. Level 4 Vibration Test: Same as Level 3 vibration test. 4. Level 4 Noise Test: Same as Level 3 Noise Test except with data taken at each operating condition tested. 3.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test equipment as specified for each type of test at the test levels specified in individual equipment sections. Prepare and submit test reports as specified. B. Inspection and Balancing: 1. Statically and dynamically balance each of the individual rotating parts as required to achieve the required field vibration limits. Statically and dynamically balance the completed equipment rotating assembly and drive shaft components. 2. Furnish copies of material and component inspection reports including balancing reports for equipment system components and for the completed rotating assembly. C. Critical Speed of Rotating Equipment: Satisfy the following: 1. The first lateral and torsional critical speed of all constant, variable, and 2-speed driven equipment that is considered rigid such as horizontal pumps, all non -clog pumps, blowers, air compressors, and engines shall be at least 41 25 percent above the equipment's maximum operating speed. ..� May 09 15958-9 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/CllentlTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecU75958 (FS-Clean) The first lateral and torsional critical speed of all constant, variable, and 2-speed driven equipment that is considered flexible or flexibly mounted such as vertical pumps (vertical in -line and vertical non -clog pumps excluded) and fans shall at least 25 percent below the equipment's lowest operating speed. The second lateral and torsional critical speed of all constant, variable, and 2-speed equipment that is considered flexible or flexibly mounted shall be at least 25 percent above the maximum operating speed. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test equipment as specified for each type of test at the test levels specified in individual equipment Sections. Prepare and submit test reports as specified. Comply with latest version of applicable standards. B. For variable speed equipment, conduct test to establish performance over the entire speed range and at the average operating condition. Establish performance curves for: 1. The speed corresponding to the rated maximum capacity. 2. The speed corresponding to the minimum capacity. 3. The speed corresponding to the average operating conditions. 3.07 VIBRATION ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA A. Testing of Rotating Mechanical Equipment: Tests are to be performed by an experienced, factory trained, and independent authorized vibration analysis expert. B. Vibration Displacement Limits: Unless otherwise specified, equipment operating at speeds 600 RPM or less is not to exhibit unfiltered readings in excess of following: Operating Speed (revolutions per minute) 0 - 300 301 -600 Unfiltered (Overall) Peak -to -Peak Amplitude (mils) All Rotating Equipment 6.5 4.5 Note: For all equipment, axial shaft displacements not to exceed 50 percent of the maximum radial shaft displacements shown in the table relative to the casing. C. Vibration Velocity Limits: Unless otherwise specified, equipment operating at speeds greater than 600 rpm is not to exceed the following peak velocity limits: Item Horizontal In -Line Centrifugal Pumps (other than Non -Clog type) Unfiltered Overall Limit (inches per second) 0.18 (Input BHP 25 or less) 0.22 (Input BHP more than 25 but less than 100) Any Filtered Peak Limit (inches per second) 0.14 (Input BHP 25 or less) 0.18 (Input BHP more than 25 but less than 100) May 09 15958-10 8205A10 pwJrarolWDogxnentslClienVrXIFort WaW8205A165peakabvzPre-Se$eWI5958 (FS-Clean) Any Filtered Peak Unfiltered Overall Limit Limit Item (inches per second) (inches per second) 0.25 (Input BHP 100 or 0.20 (Input BHP 100 or more) more) Motors See Applicable Motor Specification Gear Reducers, Radial Not to exceed AGMA 6000-A88 limits Other Reducers, Axial 0.10 0.10 Other Equipment, Axial I 0.10 0.10 D. Equipment Operation: Measurements are to be obtained with equipment installed and operating within capacity ranges specified and without duplicate equipment running. E. Additional Criteria: 1. No narrow band spectral vibration amplitude components, whether sub -rotational, higher harmonic, or synchronous multiple of running speed, are to exceed 40 percent of synchronous vibration amplitude component without manufacturer's detailed verification of origin and ultimate effect of such excitation. 2. The presence of discernable vibration amplitude peaks in Test Level 2 or 3 vibration spectra at bearing inner or outer race frequencies shall be cause for rejection of the equipment. 3. For Motors, the Following Shall be Cause for Rejection: a. Stator eccentricity evidenced by a spectral peak at 2 times electrical line frequency that are more than 40 percent of the peak at rotational frequency. b. Rotor eccentricity evidenced by a spectral peak at 2 times electrical line frequency with spectra side bands at the pole pass frequency around the 2 times line frequency peak. c. Other rotor problems evidenced by pole pass frequency side bands around operating speed harmonic peaks or 2 times line frequency side bands around rotor bar pass frequency or around two times the rotor bar pass frequency. d. Phasing problems evidenced by one third line frequency side band spectral peaks around the 2 times electrical line frequency peak. 4. The presence of peaks in a High Frequency Enveloping spectra plot corresponding to bearing, gear or motor rotor bar frequencies or harmonics of these frequencies shall be cause for rejection of the equipment; since inadequate lubrication of some equipment may be a cause of these peaks, lubrication shall be checked, corrected as necessary and the high frequency envelope analysis repeated. 3.08 NOISE REQUIREMENTS AND CONTROL A. Make measurements in relation to reference pressure of 0.0002 microbar. ` B. Make measurements of emitted noise levels on sound level meter meeting or exceeding ANSI S1.4, Type II. May 09 15958-11 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientrrX/Fort Worth/8205A70/Specifications/Pre-SelecYl5958 (FS-Clean) C. Set sound level meter to slow response. D. Unless otherwise specified, maximum free field noise level not to exceed 85 dBA measured as sound pressure level at 3 feet from the equipment. 3.09 FUNCTIONAL AND OPERATIONAL TESTING OF EQUIPMENT A. Functional testing as specified in this Section. B. General Checkout: Prior to operating equipment, inspect, test, and check supporting systems, including but not limited to power systems, control systems, piping systems, lubrication systems, and safety systems. 1. Test and calibrate instrumentation and electrical devices as specified in Sections 16950 and 17950. 2_ Test and prepare piping as specified in Section 15956. 3_ As a minimum for control systems associated with the equipment, perform the following: a. Individual Loop Tests: Test from field device to intermediate terminations to controller and back to controlled element. b. End to End Test: Simulate input at field device and observe control system response at the final field control element. 4. Prior to testing, provide signed and dated certificates of calibration for test instrumentation and equipment. C. Operation of Related Existing Equipment: OWNER will operate related existing equipment or facilities necessary to accomplish the testing. D. Acceptable Tests: Demonstrate the equipment performance meets the requirements of this Section and the equipment Section; when the equipment fails to meet the specified requirements, perform additional more detailed testing to determine the cause, correct, repair, or replace the causative components and repeat the testing that revealed the deficiency. E. Operational Testing: As specified in Section 01650. END OF SECTION May 09 15958-12 8205A10 pwXarWblDocumenW0ient/ Wort WoAtM5AlOtSw kationsi Seled115958 (FS-Clean) ` SECTION 16050 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. General requirements applicable to all electrical work performed by the Ozone System Supplier. 2. General requirements for electrical submittals. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Ozone System Supplier and its subcontractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project: a. Items involving electrical, control, and instrumentation construction may be indicated on the Drawings or referred to in specifications that do not apply specifically to electrical, control and instrumentation systems. C. Interfaces to equipment, instruments, and other components: 1. The Drawings, Specifications, and overall design are based on preliminary information furnished by various equipment manufacturers which identifies a minimum scope of supply from the manufacturers. This information pertains to, but is not limited to, instruments, control devices, electrical equipment, packaged mechanical systems, and control equipment provided with mechanical systems. 2. Provide all material and labor needed to install the actual equipment furnished, and include all costs to add any additional conduit, wiring, terminals, or other electrical hardware to the work, which may be necessary to make a complete, functional installation based on the actual equipment furnished: a. Make all changes necessary to meet the manufacturer's wiring requirements. 3. Submit all such changes and additions to the ENGINEER for acceptance in accordance with the General Conditions. 4. Review the complete set of Drawings and Specifications in order to ensure that all items related to the electrical power and control systems are completely accounted for. Include any such items that appear on Drawings or in Specifications from another discipline in the scope of Work: a. If a conflict between Drawings and Specifications is discovered, refer conflict to the ENGINEER as soon as possible for resolution. D. All electrical equipment and systems for the entire project must comply with the requirements of Division 16, whether referenced in the individual equipment specifications or not: 1. The requirements of Division 16 apply to all electrical work specified in other t Divisions and Sections, including packaged mechanical systems, LCPs, VCPs, etc. v May 09 16050-1 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Cllenl/TX/Fod Worlhl8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecUl6050 (FS-Clean) Inform all vendors supplying electrical equipment or systems of the .' requirements of Division 16. E. Contract Documents: 1. General: a. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary and are to be used 0 together in order to fully describe the Work. 2. Specifications: a. The General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract Documents govern the Work. b. These requirements are in addition to all General Requirements. 3. Contract Drawings: a. The electrical drawings show in a diagrammatic manner, the desired locations, and arrangements of the components of the electrical work. Follow the drawings as closely as possible, use professional judgment and coordinate with the other trades to secure the best possible installation. Use the entire drawing set for construction purposes. b. Locations of equipment, control devices, instruments, boxes, panels, etc. are approximate only, exercise professional judgment in executing the Work to ensure the best possible installation: 1) The equipment locations and dimensions shown on plans and elevations are approximate. Use the shop drawings to determine the proper layout, foundation, and pad requirements, etc. for final installation. Coordinate with all subcontractors to ensure that all electrical equipment is compatible with other equipment and space requirements. Make changes required to accommodate differences in equipment dimensions. 2) The Ozone System Supplier has the freedom to select any of the named manufacturers as identified in the individual specification sections; however, the ENGINEER has designed the spatial equipment layout based upon a single manufacturer and has not confirmed that every named manufacturer's equipment fits in the allotted space. It is the Ozone System Supplier's responsibility to ensure that the equipment being furnished fits within the defined space. c. Installation Details: 1) The Contract Drawings include typical installation details, which show the means and methods the Ozone System Supplier is to use to construct electrical equipment. For cases where a typical detail does not apply, develop installation details that may be necessary for completing the Work, and submit these details for review by the ENGINEER. d. Schematic Diagrams: 1) All controls are shown de -energized. 2) Schematic diagrams show control function only. Incorporate other necessary functions for proper operation and protection of the system. 3) Add slave relays, where required, to provide all necessary contacts for the control system or where needed to function as interposing relays for control voltage coordination, equipment coordination, or control system voltage drop considerations. May 09 16050-2 8205A10 pwJlcarolo%c ment/C%nVTWort Wath182 MI O/Speakabons/Pre-SeWdl6050 (FS40ean) 4) Mount all devices shown on motor controller schematic diagrams in the controller compartment enclosure, unless otherwise noted or indicated. 5) Control schematics are to be used as a guide in conjunction with the descriptive operating sequences found in the Drawings or Specifications. Combine all information and furnish a coordinated and fully functional control system. F. Alternates/Alternatives: 1. Refer to the General Conditions for substitute item provisions. G. Changes and Change Orders: 1. Refer to the General Conditions. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Code Compliance: 1. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. The latest edition accepted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction of referenced publications in effect at the time of the bid governs. 2. The standards listed are hereby incorporated into these specifications: a. National Electrical Code (NFPA No 70). b. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). c. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). d. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). e. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). f. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA). �..i g. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). h. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM). i. National Bureau of Standards. j. Institute of Power Cable Engineers Association National Board of Fire Underwriters (NBFU). k. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) of North America. I. Safety Orders of Industrial Accident Commission. m. Rules of the National Board of Fire Underwriters. n. Requirements of the serving Utilities. B. Compliance with laws and regulations: 1. Refer to the General Conditions, 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions of terms and other electrical and instrumentation considerations as set forth in the: 1. National Electrical Code. t 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. 3. Instrumentation Systems and Automation Society. 4. National Fire Protection Association. 5. International Electrical Testing Association. B. Specific Definitions: 1. FAT: Factory Acceptance Test. 2. ICSC — Instrumentation and Controls Subcontractor. May 09 16050-3 8205A10 pwJ/Carolic/Documents/ClienUTX/Fort Worth/6205A101Specificatons/Pre-SelecVl6050 (FS-Clean) 3. PCIS — Process Control and Instrumentation System. 4. Space: That portion of the switchgear, motor control center, panelboard, switchboard or control panel that does not physically contain a device but is capable of accepting a device with no modifications to the equipment, i.e. provide all standoffs, bus, and hardware, as part of the space. 5. Spare: That portion of the switchgear, motor control center, panelboard, switchboard or control panel that physically contains a device with no load ' connections to be made. 6. Unequipped Space: That portion of the switchgear, motor control center, panelboard, switchboard or control panel that does not physically contain a device, standoff, bus, hardware, or other equipment. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General Requirements: 1. The Work includes everything necessary for and incidental to executing and completing the electrical work described in the Drawings and Specifications and reasonably inferable therefrom. 2. It is the intent of these Specifications that the entire electrical power, instrumentation, and control system be complete and operable. 3. Defective work: a. Refer to the General Conditions. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Furnish submittals that are fully indexed with a tabbed divider for every component. 2. Sequentially number pages within the tabbed sections. Submittals and Operation and Maintenance manuals that are not fully indexed and tabbed with sequentially numbered pages, or are otherwise unacceptable, will be returned without review. 3. Edit all Submittals and Operation and Maintenance Manuals so that the submittal specifically applies to only the equipment furnished. Neatly cross out all extraneous text, options, models, etc. that do not apply to the equipment being furnished, so that the information remaining is only applicable to the equipment being furnished. 4. Instruct all equipment suppliers of Submittal and Operation and Maintenance Manuals of the requirements in Section 16050. 5. Submittal requirements: a. Submit copies of shop drawings, and product data, in accordance with the requirements of this Section: 1) Show dimensions, construction details, wiring diagrams, controls, manufacturers, catalog numbers, and all other pertinent details. b. Where submittals are required, provide a separate submittal for each specification section. In order to expedite construction, the Ozone System Supplier may make more than one submittal per specification section, but a single submittal may not cover more than 1 specification section: 1) The only exception to this requirement is when 1 specification section covers the requirements for a component of equipment specified in ` another section. (For example, circuit breakers are a component of switchgear. The switchgear submittal must also contain data for the May 09 16050-4 8205A10 pw-JPCardlo1Doc menLS !enVrA1Farl WoflhW05A105p9&ka0oreVm-SeWd16050 (FS-Clean) �-►' JK associated circuit breakers, even though they are covered in a different specification section.) 6. Exceptions to Specifications and Drawings: a. Include a list of proposed exceptions to the Specifications and Drawings ,.along with a detailed explanation of each. = b. Any exceptions to the Specification and Drawings must be noted and the reason for the exception explained. c. If there is insufficient explanation for the deviation, the submittal will be returned requiring Revision and Re -submittal. d. Acceptance of any exception is at the sole discretion of the ENGINEER. Furnish all items (materials, features, functions, performance, etc.) that are not listed as exceptions strictly in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings. e. Replace all items that do not strictly meet the requirements of the Specifications, which were not previously accepted as exceptions, even if the submittals contained information indicating the failure to meet the requirements. 7. Submittal organization: a. First page: 1) Specification section reference. 2) Name and telephone number of individual who reviewed submittal before delivery to ENGINEER. 3) Name and telephone number of individual who is primarily responsible for the development of the submittal. 4) Place for Ozone System Supplier's review stamp and comments. b. Next pages: 1) Provide confirmation of specification compliance in a tabular form that individually lists each specification section, paragraph, and sub- paragraphs and unequivocally states compliance with said requirement or takes exception to the requirement and lists the reason for said exception and offers alternative means for compliance. 2) Include a response in writing to each of the ENGINEER's comments or questions for submittal packages which are re -submitted: a) In the order that the comments or questions were presented throughout the submittal. b) Referenced by index section and page number on which the comment appeared. c) Acceptable responses to ENGINEER's comments are either: (1) ENGINEER's comment or change is accepted and appropriate changes are made. (2) Explain why comment is not accepted or requested change is not made. (3) Explain how requirement will be satisfied in lieu of comment �. or change requested by ENGINEER. d) Any re -submittal, which does not contain responses to the ENGINEER's previous comments shall be returned for Revision and Re -submittal. e) No further review by the ENGINEER will be performed until a response for previous comments has been received. c. Remaining pages: 1) Actual submittal data: May 09 16050-5 8205A10 pw://Camllo/Documents/ClientrrX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Select/16050 (FS-aean) a) Organize submittals in exactly the same order as the items are referenced, listed, and/or organized in the specification section. b) For submittals that cover multiple devices used in different areas under the same specification section, the submittal for the individual devices must list the area where the device is intended to be used. • 8. Specific submittal requirements: a. Furnish the submittals required by each Section in Division 16 in accordance with the following requirements. b. Shop drawings: 1) Required for materials and equipment listed in this and other sections. 2) Furnish sufficient information to evaluate the suitability of the proposed material or equipment for the intended use, and for compliance with these Specifications. 3) Shop drawings requirements: a) Front, side, and, rear elevations, and top and bottom views, showing all dimensions. b) Locations of conduit entrances and access plates. c) Component layout and identification. d) Schematic and wiring diagrams with wire numbers and terminal identification. e) Connection diagrams, terminal diagrams, internal wiring diagrams, conductor size, etc. f) Anchoring method and leveling criteria, including manufacturer's recommendations for the project site seismic criteria. g) Weight. h) Finish. i) Temperature limitations, as applicable. c. Product Data: 1) Submitted for non -custom manufactured material listed in this and other sections and shown on shop drawings. 2) Include: a) Catalog cuts. b) Bulletins. c) Brochures. d) Quality photocopies of applicable pages from these documents. e) Identify on the data sheets the project name, applicable specification section, and paragraph. f) Identify model number and options for the actual equipment being furnished. g) Neatly cross out options that do not apply or equipment not intended to be supplied. h) Manufacturer's original electronic file on CD-ROM time -current characteristic curves for all fuses, circuit breakers, and protective relays in 11-inch by 17-inch or 8 1/2 by 11-inch format. d. Detailed sequence of operation for all equipment or systems. e. Completely fill out a Motor Data Sheet, refer to Section 16222, for every motor furnished: 1) Submit one copy of the Motor Data Sheet to the ENGINEER for review as part of the associated equipment submittal. May 09 16050-6 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/TX/FortWorth18205A10lSpecificationslPre-Select/16050 (FS-aean) "'P f. Wiring numbering: 1) Uniquely number each wire. 2) Wire numbers must appear on all equipment drawings. g. Only use equipment and instrument tags, as depicted on the Drawings, for all submittals. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1- Furnish the ENGINEER with a complete set of written Operation and Maintenance Manuals 8 weeks before energization start-up and/or commissioning. 2. Furnish in accordance with Section 01730, and the following additional requirements: a. Completely index manuals with a tab for each section: 1) Each section containing applicable data for each piece of equipment, system, or topic covered. 2) Assemble manuals using the approved shop drawings, and include, the following types of data: a) Complete set of 11-inch by 17-inch drawings of equipment. b) Complete set of 11-inch by 17-inch drawings of the control system. c) Complete set of control schematics. d) Complete parts list for all equipment being provided. e) Catalog data for all products or equipment furnished. C. Material and Equipment Schedules: 1. Furnish a complete schedule and/or matrix of all materials, equipment, apparatus, and luminaries that are proposed for use: Now apparatus, Include sizes, names of manufacturers, catalog numbers, and such other information required to identify the items. D. Installation Recommendations: 1. Submit the manufacturer's printed recommendations for installation of electrical equipment. E. Test Reports: 1. Include the following: a. A description of the test. b. List of equipment used. c. Name of the person conducting the test. d. Date and time the test was conducted. e. All raw data collected. f. Calculated results. 2. Each report signed by the person responsible for the test. F. Calculations: 1. Where required by specific Division 16 Specifications: a. Because these calculations are being provided by a Registered Professional Engineer, they will be reviewed for form, format, and content but will not be reviewed for accuracy and calculation means. G. Factory Acceptance Test: 1. Include complete test procedure and all forms to be used during test. May 09 16050-7 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienirrX/Fort Worth/8205A10/SpedficafionstPre-Select/16050 (FS-Clean) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Furnish all equipment listed by and bearing the label of Underwriters' Laboratories, Incorporated (UL) or of an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the ENGINEER and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. r 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Shipping Precautions: 1. After completion of shop assembly and successful factory test, pack all equipment in protective crates, and enclose in heavy duty polyethylene envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete protection from damage, dust, and moisture. 2. Place dehumidifiers, when required, inside the polyethylene coverings. 3. Skid -mount the equipment for final transport. 4. Provide lifting rings for moving without removing protective covering. 5. Display boxed weight on shipping tags together with instructions for unloading, transporting, storing, and handling at the job site. B. Delivery and Inspection: 1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original container or packaging with identifying labels intact and legible. Include date of manufacture on label. C. Special Instructions: 1. Securely attach special instructions for proper field handling, storage, and installation to each piece of equipment before packaging and shipment. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Conditions: 1. Provide an electrical, instrumentation and control system, including all equipment, raceways and any other components required for a complete installation that meets the environmental conditions for the site as specified in the General Requirements and below. 2. Seismic classification: a. Provide all electrical equipment and construction techniques suitable for the seismic requirements for the site, as specified in Section 01612. 3. Wind: a. Provide all electrical equipment and construction techniques suitable for the site wind loading criteria, as specified in Section 01614. 4. Altitude, temperature and humidity: a. Provide all electrical components and equipment fully rated for continuous operation at this altitude, with no additional derating factors applied. b. Provide additional temperature conditioning equipment to maintain all equipment in non -conditioned spaces subject to these ambient temperatures, with a band of 10 degrees Fahrenheit above the minimum operating temperature and 10 degrees Fahrenheit below maximum operating temperature, as determined by the equipment manufacturer's guidelines: 1) Provide all power conduits wiring for these devices (e.g. heaters, fans, etc.) whether shown on the drawings or not. 5. Outdoor installations: May 09 16050-8 8205A10 pwJ/CardWDxumenWC5enffXlFort Warth18 WITSpeci�r&-Se"l6050 (FS-Clean) a. Provide electrical, instrumentation and control equipment suitable for operation in the ambient conditions where the equipment is located. b. Provide heating, cooling, and de -humidifying devices incorporated into and included with electrical equipment, instrumentation and control panels to maintain the enclosures within the rated environmental operating ranges as specified in this Section for the equipment: - 1) Provide all wiring necessary to power these devices. B. Provide enclosures for electrical, instrumentation and control equipment, regardless of supplier or subcontractor furnishing the equipment, that meet the requirements outlined in NEMA Standard 250 for the following types of enclosures: 1. NEMA 1 Enclosures: Intended for indoor use, primarily to provide a degree of protection from accidental contact with energized parts or equipment. 2. NEMA 4 Enclosures: Intended for indoor or outdoor use, primarily to protect equipment from exposure to windblown dust and rain, splashing or hose directed water, ice formation and freezing. 3. NEMA 4X Enclosures: Made from corrosion resistant materials (Fiberglass reinforced plastic, 316 Stainless Steel or equal) and are intended for indoor or outdoor use, primarily to protect equipment from exposure to windblown dust and rain, splashing or hose directed water, ice formation and freezing, and corrosion. 4. NEMA 12 Enclosures: Intended for indoor use, primarily to provide a degree of protection from dust, falling dirt and dripping non -corrosive liquids. 5. NEMA 6 Enclosures: Rated for submergence. 6. NEMA 6P Enclosures: Rated for prolonged submergence. C. Plant Area Electrical Work Requirements: 1. Provide all electrical work in accordance with the following table, unless otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings : ENVIRONMENT NEMA W = WET PLANT AREA ENCLOSURE EXPOSED D = DAMP SUPPORT CONDUIT TYPE C = CLEAN/DRY MATERIALS TYPE X = CORROSIVE H = HAZARDOUS Outdoors NEMA 4X PVC -Coated W Rigid Steel Indoors NEMA 12 Rigid Steel C 1.09 SCHEDULING A. Pre -submittal Conference: - 1. Before producing any submittals, schedule a pre -submittal conference for the purposes of reviewing the entire project, equipment, control philosophy, W. schedules, and submittal requirements. B. Factory Acceptance Testing: 1. Where factory acceptance testing is required for equipment covered by these Specifications, notify the ENGINEER in writing when the equipment is completed and ready for factory inspection and testing: a. Indicate the desired dates for inspection and testing. May 09 16050-9 8205A10 pw://Car011o/DOcuments/Cllent/TX/Fort Wo*8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecUl6050 (FS-Clean) b. Schedule the FAT after Approval of the FAT Procedures Submittal: `Rc 1) Submit a copy of the test procedures including all forms at least 21 days before any scheduled test date 2) Notify the ENGINEER of the scheduled tests a minimum of 15 days before the date of the test. t_ 1.10 WARRANTY A. Warrant the electrical Work in accordance with the General Conditions: 1. Provide additional warranty as specified in the individual Division 16 Specifications. 1.11 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish all spare parts as required by other Sections of the Specifications. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide similar items of same manufacturer throughout the electrical and instrumentation portion of the project. B. Allowable manufacturers are specified in individual electrical and equipment specifications in other Sections of Division 16. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Furnish all materials under this Contract that are new, free from defects, and standard products produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of these products and that bear all approvals and labels as required by the specifications. B. Provide materials complying with the applicable industrial standard in accordance with the General Conditions. C. Stainless Steel: 1. Where stainless steel is indicated or used for any portion of the electrical work, provide a non-magnetic, corrosion -resistant alloy, ANSI Type 316, satin finish. 2. Provide exposed screws of the same alloys. 3. Provide finished material free of any burrs or sharp edges. 4. Use only stainless steel hardware, when chemically compatible, in all areas that are or could be in contact with corrosive chemicals. 5. Use stainless steel hardware, when chemically compatible, in all chemical areas or areas requiring NEMA 4X construction. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide all equipment that is new, free from defects, and standard products produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of these products. May 09 16050-10 8205A10 purl/CarddDowmen C*ntfWortWorthB205 IMpedricatimWPreSeledl6050(FS-aean) B. Arrange with all manufacturers of the electrical equipment, to allow the OWNER and ENGINEER to inspect and witness the testing of the equipment at the site of fabrication: 1. Testing includes the cabinets, special control systems, power equipment, and other pertinent systems and devices. C. Factory testing is specified in the individual sections of Divisions 16. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all conduit and equipment in such a manner as to avoid all obstructions and to preserve headroom and keep openings and passageways clear: 1. Install all conduits and equipment in accordance with working space requirements as outlined in Article 110, Requirements for Electrical Installations of the National Electrical Code. B. Terminations: 1. Provide and terminate all conductors required to interconnect power, controls, instruments, panels, and all other equipment. C. Miscellaneous installation requirements: 1. Circuits of different service voltage: a. Voltage and service levels: 1) Low voltage: 120V to 480V. 2) Instrumentation: less than 50VDC. b. Install in separate raceways, junction boxes and pullboxes. D. Labeling: 1. Provide all nameplates and labels as indicated on the Drawings for all equipment and devices. E. Equipment Tie -Downs: 1. Design for the proper anchorage of all instruments, control panels, and equipment by methods that comply with seismic and wind bracing criteria, which apply to the site. 2. All control panels, VCPs, LCPs, RTUs, PCMs, etc., must be permanently mounted and tied down to structures in accordance with the project seismic criteria. 3.02 QUALITY CONTROL A. Workmanship: r 1. Leave wiring in panels, manholes, boxes, and other locations neat, clean, and organized. 3.03 CLEANING A. General Requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material and restore all damaged finishes to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER and OWNER. ..� May 09 16050-11 8205A10 pw://CamlldDocumenls/ClienUTX/Fort Worthl8205At0/Specifications/Pre-SelecU16050 (FS-Clean) B. Clean and vacuum all enclosures to remove all metal filings, surplus insulation and any visible dirt, dust or other matter before energization of the equipment or system start up: 1. Use of compressors or air blowers for cleaning is not acceptable. END OF SECTION May 09 16050-12 8205A10 pv JCwok/DommmWClienV X1Fod WodhW IO/Speofimfior&Vre,',G*Wl6050 (FS-Clean) SECTION 16123 600 VOLT OR LESS WIRES AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. 600 Volt Class wire and cable. 2. Instrumentation Class wire and cable. B. Related Sections: 1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its subcontractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 16050. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. B 3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. 2. B 8 - Specification for Concentric -Lay —Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, `.. Medium -Hard, or Soft. C. Federal Specification J-C 30A. D. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA): 1. IPCEA S-61-402 for thermoplastic insulated wire and cable for the transmission and distribution of electrical energy. 2. IPCEA S-61-402 for rubber insulated wire and cable for the transmission and distribution of electrical energy. E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. Article 101 - Life Safety Code. 2. Article 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air -Handling Spaces. F. Underwriter's Laboratories Inc., (UL): 1. 1063 - Standard for Machine -Tool Wires and Cables. 2. 1277 - Standard for Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional W. Optical -fiber Members. 3. 1581 - Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords. 4. 2196 - Standard for Tests for Fire Resistive Cables. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 16050. May 09 16123-1 8205A10 pw://Camllo/DocumentstClienUTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Speci6cabons/Pre-SelecU16123 (FS-aean) B. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the: 1. Insulated Cable Engineering Association (ICEA). 2. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM). 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and install the complete wire and cable system. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 16050. B. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer of wire and cable. 2. Insulation: a. Type. b. Voltage class. 3. American Wire Gauge size. 4. Conductor material. 5. Pulling compounds. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 16050. B. All wires and cables shall be UL listed and labeled. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 16050. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 16050. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. 600 Volt class wire and cable: a. General Cable. b. Okonite Company. c. Southwire Company. 2. Instrumentation class wire and cable: a. Alpha Wire Company. b. Belden CDT. c. General Cable BICC Brand. d. Okonite Company. e. Rockbestos Surprenant Cable Corporation. 3. Network cables: a. Belden CDT. May 09 16123-2 8205A10 pwi/CardlolDom me WCftnUfXlFort Wont O5A1NSpedkatiorm Pm-Seled/16123 (FS-Clean) 11 b. General Cable. c. Lucent. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Conductors: 1. Copper per ASTM B 3. 2. Minimum 97 percent conductivity. 2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General: 1. Provide new wires and cables manufactured within 1 year of the date of delivery to the site. 2. Permanently mark each wire and cable with the following at 24 inch intervals: a. American Wire Gauge (AWG) size. b. Voltage rating. c. Insulation type. d. UL symbol. e. Month and year of manufacture. f. Manufacturer's name. 3. Identify and mark wire and cable as specified in Section 16075: a. Use integral color insulation for Number 2 AWG and smaller wire. b. Wrap colored tape around cable larger than Number 2 AWG. B. 600 Volt class wire and cable: 1. Provide American Wire Gauge (AWG) or kcmil sizes as indicated on the Drawings: a. When not indicated on the Drawings, size wire as follows: 1) In accordance with the National Electrical Code: a) Use 75 degree Celsius ampacity ratings. b) Ampacity rating after all derating factors, equal to or greater than rating of the overcurrent device. 2) Provide Number 12 AWG minimum for power conductors. 3) Provide Number 14 AWG minimum for control conductors. 2. Provide Class B Stranding Per ASTM B 8: a. Provide Class C stranding where extra flexibility is required. 3. Insulation: a. XHHW-2. b. 90 degrees Celsius rating in wet or dry locations. 4. Multiconductor cables: a. Number and size of conductors as indicated on the Drawings. b. Individual conductors with XHHW-2 insulation. _ c. Overall PVC jacket. d. Tray Cable rated. e. Color -coding for control wire per ICEA Method 1, E-2. f. Ground Conductor: Insulated, green: 1) Sized per NEC. C. Instrumentation class cable: 1. Type TC. 2. Suitable for use in wet locations. May 09 16123-3 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienUTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specificabons/Pre-SelecVl6123 (FS-Clean) 3. Voltage rating: 600 volts. 4. Temperature rating: 90 degrees Celsius wet or dry location. 5. Conductors: a. Insulation: 1) Flame-retardant PVC, 15 mils nominal thickness, with nylon jacket 4 mils nominal thickness. + b. Number 16 AWG stranded and tinned. c. Color code: 1) Pair: Black and white. 2) Triad: Black, white and red. 3) Multiple Pairs or Triads: a) Color -coded and numbered. 6. Drain wire: a. 18 AWG. b. Stranded, tinned. 7. Jacket: a_ Flame retardant, moisture and sunlight resistant PVC. b. Ripcord laid longitudinally under jacket to facilitate removal. 8. Shielding: a. Individual pair/triad: 1) Minimum 1.35-mil double-faced aluminum foil/polyester tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. b. Multiple pair or triad shielding: 1) Group Shield: Minimum 1.35-mil double-faced aluminum foil/polyester tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. 2) Completely isolate group shields from each other. 3) Cable Shield: 2.35 mils double-faced aluminum and synthetic polymer backed tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. c. All shielding to be in contact with the drain wire. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Wire Ties: 1. One of the following or equal: a. T&B "Ty -Rap" cable ties. b. Panduit cable ties. B. Wire Markers: 1. Reference Section 16075. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Assembly and testing of cable shall comply with the applicable requirement of ICEA Publication No. S-68-516. B. Test type XHHW-2 in accordance with the requirements of UL 44. PART 3 EXECUTION r] 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 16050. May 09 16123-4 8205A10 W1/CadaDww*nh0e,u ortworlt=sa1aspecikauowareseWM61z3(Fs.ciea,) �! B. Color -Coding: 1. Color -coding shall be consistent throughout the facility. 2. The following color code shall be followed for all 240/120 Volt and 208/120 Volt systems: a. Phase A - Black. • b. Phase B"- Red. c. Single Phase System - Black for one hot leg, red for the other. d. Neutral - White. e. Equipment Ground - Green. 3. The following color code shall be followed for all 480/277 volt systems: a. Phase A - Brown. b. Phase B - Orange. c. Phase C - Yellow. d. Neutral - Gray. e. Equipment Ground - Green. 4. The following color code shall be followed for all 120 VAC control wiring: a. Power - Red. b. Neutral - White. 5. Wire colors shall be implemented in the following methods: a. Wires manufactured of the desired color. b. Continuously spiral wrap the first 6 inches of the wire from the termination point with colored tape: 1) Colored tape shall be wrapped to overlap 1/2 of the width of the tape. C. Install conductors only after the conduit installation is complete, all enclosures have been vacuumed clean, and the affected conduits have been swabbed clean and dry: '"Mol 1. Install wires only in approved raceways. D. Install and terminate all wire in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Neatly arrange and lace conductors in all panelboards, pull boxes, and terminal cabinets by means of wire ties: 1. Do not lace wires in gutter or panel channel. 2. Install all wire ties with a flush cutting wire tie installation tool. 3. Do not leave sharp edges on wire ties. F. Terminate solid conductors at equipment terminal screws with the conductor tightly wound around the screw so that it does not protrude beyond the screw head: 1. Wrap the conductor clockwise so that the wire loop is closed as the loop is tightened. 2. Do not use crimp lugs on solid wire. G. Terminate stranded conductors on equipment box lugs such that all conductor strands are confined within the lug: 1. Use ring type lugs if box lugs are not available on the equipment. H. Apply wire markers to all wires at each end after being installed in the conduit and before termination. I. Instrumentation class cable: 1. Install instrumentation class cables in separate raceway systems from power cables: NOW., May 09 16123-5 8205A10 pN.//Carollo/Documents/ClienVTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Select/l6123 (FS-Clean) 2. Refer to Section 16050 for shield grounding requirements. Multi -conductor cable: 1. Where cable is not routed in conduit with a separate ground conductor, use one conductor in the cable as a ground conductor: a) Use an internal ground conductor, if it is no smaller than as indicated on the Drawings, and meets NEC requirements for equipment ground conductor size. K. Signal cable: 1. Separate and isolate electrical signal cables from sources of electrical noise and power cables by minimum 12 inches_ 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 16050. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 16050. END OF SECTION May 09 16123-6 8205A10 pvrJ/CaroUdDom mentsVenNr 0rt WotN82(15AlVp) i6cations/Pm-SeledM6123 (B-Clean) NWMW� SECTION 16130 CONDUITS PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Metallic Conduits: a. Rigid Galvanized Steel (GRC). b. Polyvinyl Chloride Coated Metallic (Steel - PCS). c. Liquid -Tight Flexible Metal Conduit (SLT). 2. Conduit bodies. 3. Conduit fittings and accessories. 4. Conduit installation. B. Related Sections: 1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its subcontractors to review all Sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 16050. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit - Zinc Coated. 2. C80.3 - Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing. C. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): 1. RN-1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Steel Conduit. D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. 6 - Standard for Safety for Rigid Metal Conduit. 2. 360 - Standard for Safety for Liquid -Tight Flexible Steel Conduit. 3. 1660 - Standard for Safety for Liquid -Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 16050. B. Specific definitions and abbreviations: 1. Conduit Bodies: A separate portion of a conduit system that provides access through a removable cover to the interior of the system at a junction of 2 or more conduit sections. Includes, but not limited to: shapes C, E, LB, T, X, etc. 2. Conduit Fitting: An accessory that serves primarily a mechanical purpose. Includes, but not limited to: bushings, locknuts, hubs, couplings, reducers, etc. s 3. GRC: Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit. 4. PCS: PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit. May 09 16130-1 8205A10 pwJ/Carollo/Documents/ClientrrX/Fort Woft8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Select116130 (FS-Clean) 5. SLT: Sealtight — Liquid -Tight Flexible Conduit. 6. NPT: National Pipe Thread. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide conduits, conduit bodies, fittings, junction boxes and all necessary components, whether or not indicated on the Drawings, as required, to install a complete electrical raceway system. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 16050. B. Product Data: 1. Furnish complete manufacturer's catalog sheets for every type and size of conduit, fitting, conduit body, and accessories to be used on the project. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 16050. B. All conduits, conduit bodies, and fittings shall be UL listed and labeled. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 16050. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 16050. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 16050. 1.10 SYSTEM START-UP A. Refer to Section 16050. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Galvanized rigid steel conduit (GRC): 1. One of the following or equal: a. Western Tube and Conduit. b. Allied Tube and Conduit. c. Wheatland Tube Co. B. Polyvinyl chloride -coated rigid steel conduit (PCS): 1. One of the following or equal: a. Robroy Industries. May 09 16130-2 8205A10 pwi/CaroUoDo=enWCknVTXIFat Wa8d82MI 16130 (FS-Nan) b. OCAL, Inc. c. Perma Kote. C. Sealtight liquid -tight flexible conduit (SLT): 1. One of the following or equal: 4 a. Southwire. b. AFC Cable Systems. c. Electriflex. d. Anaconda. D. Conduit bodies: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Crouse -Hinds. b. Appleton. c. O-Z / Gedney. d- Ocal. e. Robroy. f. Carlon. E. Conduit mounting strut: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Unistrut. b. Globe Strut. c. B-Line Strut. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Galvanized rigid steel conduit and couplings (GRC): 1. All Threads: NPT standard conduit threads with a 3/4-inch taper per foot: a. Running conduit threads are not acceptable. 2. Hot -dip galvanized inside and out: a. Ensures complete coverage and heats the zinc and steel to a temperature that ensures the zinc alloys with the steel over the entire surface. b. Electro-gaIvan izing is not acceptable. 3. Manufactured in accordance with: a. UL6. b. ANSI C801. B. PVC coated steel conduit and conduit bodies (PCS): 1. The steel conduit, before PVC coating, shall be new, unused, hot -dip galvanized material, conforming to the requirements for type GRC. 2. Coated conduit conforms to NEMA Standard RN-1: a. The galvanized coating may not be disturbed or reduced in thickness during the cleaning and preparatory process. ' 3. Factory Bonded PVC Jacket: a. The exterior galvanized surfaces shall be coated with primer before PVC coating to ensure a bond between the zinc substrate and the PVC coating. b. Nominal thickness of the exterior PVC coating shall be 0.040 inch except where part configuration or application of the piece dictate otherwise. c. PVC coating on conduit and associated fittings shall have no sags, blisters, lumps, or other surface defects and free of holes and holidays. May 09 16130-3 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienVMFort Worth/8205A10/Specificahons/Pre-SelecU16130 (FS-Clean) d. The PVC adhesive bond on conduit and fittings shall be greater than the tensile strength of the PVC plastic coating: 1) Confirm bond with certified test results. 4. A urethane coating shall be uniformly and consistently applied to the interior of all conduit and fittings: a. Nominal thickness of 0.002 inch. b. Conduit having areas with thin or no coating are not acceptable. c. All threads shall be coated with urethane. 5. The PVC exterior and urethane interior coatings applied to the conduit shall afford sufficient flexibility to permit field bending without cracking or flaking at temperature above 30 degrees Fahrenheit (-1 degree Celsius). 6. PCS conduit bodies: a. The conduit body, before PVC coating, shall be new, unused material and shall conform to appropriate UL standards. b. The PVC Coating on the outside of conduit bodies shall be 0.040 inches thick and have a series of longitudinal ribs to protect the coating from tool damage during installation. c. A PVC sleeve extending 1 conduit diameter or 2 inches, whichever is less, shall be formed at each female conduit opening. C. Liquid -tight flexible metallic conduit (SLT): 1. Temperature rated for use in the ambient temperature at the installed location but not less than the following: a. General purpose: 1) Temperature range —20 degrees Celsius to +80 degrees Celsius. b. Oil resistant: 1) Temperature range -20 degrees Celsius to +60 degrees Celsius. 2. Sunlight resistant, weatherproof, and watertight. 3. Manufactured from single strip steel, hot dip galvanized on all 4 sides before conduit fabrication. 4. Strip steel spiral wound resulting in an interior that is smooth and clean for easy wire pulling. 5. Overall polyvinyl chloride jacket. 6. With integral copper ground wire, built in the core, in conduit trade sizes 1/2-inch through 1-1/4-inch. D. Conduit bodies: 1. Material consistent with conduit type: a. Malleable iron bodies and covers when used with type GRC conduit. b. Cast aluminum bodies and covers when used with type RAC. c. PVC bodies and covers when used with type PVC. d. PVC coated malleable iron bodies and covers when used with type PCS. e. Malleable iron or aluminum bodies with pressed steel or aluminum covers when used with EMT conduit. 2. Conduit bodies to conform to form 8, mark 9, or mogul design: a. Mogul design conforming to NEC requirements for bending space for large conductors for conduit trade sizes of 1 inch and larger with conductors #4 AWG and larger, or where required for wire bending space. 3. Gasketed covers attached to bodies with stainless steel screws secured to threaded holes in conduit body. ' 4. PVC coated malleable iron conduit bodies and covers: May 09 16130-4 8205A10 pwl/CamUoDocu wtslclieiWTXfFM WotvW 5A10/Speafimbons?m-q lectJ16130 (FS-Clean) ..� a. Bodies before coating shall meet requirements for malleable iron conduit bodies. b. 0.040-inch exterior PVC coating and 0.002 inch interior urethane coating as required for type PCS conduit and fittings. c. Utilize the PVC coating as an integral part of the gasket design. d. Stainless steel cover screws heads shall be encapsulated with plastic to assure corrosion protection. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Connectors and fittings: 1. Manufactured with compatible materials to the corresponding conduit. B. Insulated throat metallic bushings: 1. Construction: a. Malleable iron or zinc plated steel when used with steel conduit. b. Aluminum when used with aluminum conduit. c. Positive metallic conduit end stop. d. Integrally molded non-combustible phenolic insulated surfaces rated 150 degrees Celsius. e. Use fully insulated bushings on nonmetallic conduit system made of high impact 150 degrees Celsius rated non-combustible thermosetting phenolic. C. Insulated grounding bushings: 1. Construction: a. Malleable iron or steel, zinc plated, with a positive metallic end stop. b. Integrally molded non-combustible phenolic insulated surfaces rated 150 degrees Celsius. c. Tin plated copper grounding saddle for use with copper or aluminum conductors. D. Electrical unions (Erickson Couplings): 1. Construction: a. Malleable iron for use with steel conduit. b. Aluminum for use with aluminum conduit. c. Concrete tight, 3-piece construction. d. Rated for Class I Division 1 Group D in hazardous areas. E. PVC coated rigid steel conduit (PCS) fittings: 1. All hollow conduit fittings, which serve, as part of the PCS conduit system must be coated with an exterior PVC coating and interior urethane coating as described for the conduit. 2. The conduit fitting, before coating, shall be new, unused material and shall conform to appropriate UL standards. 3 3. A PVC sleeve extending 1 pipe diameter or 2 inches, whichever is less, shall be formed at every female conduit opening on fittings except unions: a. The inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside diameter of the conduit to be used. 4. Flexible overlapping sleeves on all hubs and couplings shall provide a vapor and moisture tight seal at every connection. F. Sealtight - liquid -tight flexible conduit (SLT) fittings: 1410we May 09 16130-5 8205A10 para/Carollo/Documents/Client TX/Fort Worth18205Al O/SpecificabonsiPre-SelecYl6130 (FS-aean) Construction:'" a. Malleable iron. b. Furnished with locknut and sealing ring. c. Liquid -tight, rain -tight, oil -tight. d. Insulated throat. e. Furnish as straight, 45 degree elbows and 90 degree elbows. f. Designed to prevent sleeving: 1) Verify complete bonding of the raceway jacket to the plastic gasket seal. g. Equipped with grounding device to provide ground continuity irrespective of raceway core construction. Grounding device if inserted into raceway and directly in contact with conductors shall have rolled over edges for sizes under 5 inches. h. Where terminated into a threadless opening using a threaded hub fitting, a suitable moisture resistant/oil resistant synthetic rubber gasket shall be provided between the outside of the box or enclosure and the fitting shoulder. Gasket shall be adequately protected by and permanently bonded to a metallic retainer. G. Corrosion resistant and outdoor sealtight - liquid -tight flexible conduit (SLT) fittings: 1. Construction: a. PVC coated liquid -tight fittings with a bonded 0.040 inch thick PVC coating on the metal connector to form a seal around the SLT conduit. b. Connectors shall have an insulated throat and an integral sealing ring. H. Hubs for threaded attachment of steel conduit to sheet metal enclosures: 1. Construction: a. Shall have an insulated throat. b. When used in corrosive areas shall be PVC coated. c. Bonding locknut. d. Recessed neoprene O-ring to assure watertight and dust tight connector. e. One half -inch through 1-1/4-inch steel zinc electroplated. f. One and one half -inch through 6-inch malleable iron zinc plated. g. Aluminum with aluminum conduit. 2. Usage: a. All conduits in damp, wet, outdoor, and corrosive areas shall use threaded hubs for connections to sheet metal enclosures. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 16050. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 16050. 1. Provide adequate clearances from high -temperature surfaces for all conduit runs. Provide minimum clearances as follows: a. Clearances of 6 inches from surfaces 113 degrees Fahrenheit to 149 degrees Fahrenheit. May 09 16130-6 8205A10 pw•JlCaroldDocmnenWaienVTX]FortWMhWM1U5pedfcaborwPmSeled/16130 (F&aean) b. Clearances of 12 inches from surfaces greater than 149 degrees Fahrenheit. c. Keep conduit at least 6 inches from the coverings on hot water and steam pipes, 18 inches from the coverings on flues and breechings and 12 inches from fuel lines and gas lines. d. Where it is necessary to route conduit close to high -temperature surfaces, provide a high -reflectance thermal barrier between the conduit and the surface. 2. Run conduit exposed to view parallel with or at right angles to structural members, walls, or lines of the building: a. Install straight and true conduit runs with uniform and symmetrical elbows, offsets, and bends. b. Make changes in direction with long radius bends or with conduit bodies. 3. Install conduit with total conduit bends between pull locations less than or equal to 270 degrees. 4. Route all exposed conduit to preserve headroom, access space and work space and to prevent tripping hazards and clearance problems: a. Install conduit runs so that runs do not interfere with proper and safe operation of equipment and not block or interfere with ingress or egress, including equipment removal hatches. b. Route conduit to avoid drains or other gravity lines. Where conflicts occur, relocate conduit as required. 5. Install complete conduit systems before conductors are installed. B. Conduit usage: 1. Exposed conduits: a. Rigid conduit: 1) Install the rigid conduit type for each location as specified in Section 16050. 2) Minimum Size: 3/4-inch. b. Flexible conduit: 1) Use flexible conduit for final connections between rigid conduit and motors, vibrating equipment, instruments, control equipment or where required for equipment servicing: a) Use type SILT with rigid metallic conduit. 2) Minimum size: 3/4-inch: a) 1/2 when required for connection to instruments. 3) Maximum length: 36 inches. 2. PVC coated rigid metallic conduit (PCS, PCA): a. Use specifically manufactured or machined threading dies to manufacturer's specifications to accommodate the PVC jacket. 3. Galvanized rigid steel conduit (GRC). a. Conduit shall be cut square and reamed before threading. C. Conduitjoints and bends: 1. General: a. Keep bends and offsets in conduit runs to an absolute minimum. b. All bends shall be symmetrical. 2. Threaded conduit: a. Cut threads on rigid metallic conduit with a standard conduit cutting die that provides a 3/4-inch per foot taper and to a length such that all bare metal exposed by the threading operation is completely covered by the May 09 16130-7 8205A10 pwalCarollo/Documents/ClientrrX/Fort Worth/8205A10/SpecificatiDns/Pre-SelecU16130 (FS-Clean) couplings or fittings used. In addition, cut the lengths of the thread such that all joints become secure and wrench tight just preceding the point where the conduit ends would butt together in couplings or where conduit ends would butt into the ends or shoulders of other fittings. b. Thoroughly ream conduit after threads have been cut to remove burrs. c. Use bushings or conduit fittings at conduit terminations. d. On exposed conduits, repair scratches and other defects with galvanizing repair stick, Enterprise Galvanizing "Galvabar" or CRC "Zinc It." e. Coat conduit threads with an approved electrically conductive sealant and corrosion inhibitor that is not harmful to the conductor insulation: 1) Use KOPR-Shield as manufactured by T&B on threads of ferrous conduit. 2) Use AP* ALUMA-Shield as manufactured by T&B on threads of aluminum conduit. 3) Apply to the male threads and tighten joints securely. 4) Clean excess sealant from exposed threads after assembly. f. Securely tighten all threaded connections. g. Any exposed threaded surface must be cleaned and coated with a galvanizing solution so that all exposed surfaces have a galvanized protective coating. D. Conduit supports: 1. General: a. Provide appropriate hangers, supports, fasteners, and seismic restraints to suit applications: 1) Provide support materials consistent with the type of conduit being installed: a) Hot -dipped Galvanized steel for type GRC. b) Stainless steel for types PCSor RAC. b. Support conduit at the intervals required by the National Electrical Code. c. Perforated strap and plumbers tape are not acceptable for conduit supports. 2. Conduit on metal decking: a. Use 1-hole malleable iron straps with 1-inch long cadmium -plated Type A panhead sheet metal screws. Fully or partially hammer -driven screws are not acceptable. 3. Suspended conduit: a. Use malleable iron factory -made split -hinged pipe rings with threaded suspension rods sized for the weight to be carried (minimum 3/8-inch diameter), Kindorf, or equal. b. For grouped conduits, construct racks with threaded rods and tiered angle iron or preformed channel cross members. Clamp each conduit individually to a cross member. Where rods are more than 2 feet long, provide rigid sway bracing. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 16050. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 16050. END OF SECTION May 09 16130-8 8205A10 pwJram1a0=menWC5enVrXIFaIWaAl MSAI&Spedficabons/PreSdecVl6130(FS43m) i SECTION 16222 LOW VOLTAGE MOTORS UP TO 500 HORSEPOWER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Low voltage motors up to 500 horsepower (hp): a. Furnished separately. b. Part of driven equipment specified in other Sections. c. Other electric motors required for a complete installation. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its subcontractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 16050. B. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA): 1. 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. 2. 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. C. American Petroleum Institute (API): 1. 670 - Vibration, Axial Position, and Bearing Temperature Monitoring Systems. D. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): 1. 43 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation Resistance of Rotating Machinery. 2. 112 - IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. 3. 114 - Standard Test Procedure for Single -Phase Induction Motors. 4. 303 - Recommended Practice for Auxiliary Devices for Motors in Class 1, Groups A, B, C, and D, Division 2 Locations. 5. 841 - Standard for Petroleum and Chemical Industry - Severe Duty Totally Enclosed Fan -Cooled (TEFC) Squirrel Cage Induction Motors - Up to and Including 500 hp. 6. 1349 - Guide for the Application of Electric Motors in Class I, Division 2 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. E. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA): 1. MG-1 - Motors and Generators. 2. MG-2 - Safety Standard for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation, and Use of Electric Motors and Generators. May 09 16222-1 8205A10 pvr./ICarollolDocuments/ClienUMFort Worth/8205A10ISpecificatlonslPre-SelecUI6222 (FS•aean) F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 674 - Standard for Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Division 1 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 16050. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and install electric motors and accessories in conformance with this Section, and the Sections specifying driven equipment to provide a complete and operable installation. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 16050. B. Submit completed motor data sheets for each motor supplied: 1. Conform to data sheet in the appendix of this Section. 2. Manufacturer's or other data sheets are not acceptable. C. Product Data: 1. Descriptive bulletins. 2. Machine tag and loop number as identified in the P&IDs, and Specification Section number of the driven machine. 3. Complete electrical data. 4. Torque, current, and power factor vs. speed curves at 100 percent rated voltage. 5. Accessories Data: a. Motor Winding Heaters: 1) Voltage. 2) Watts. b. Winding Temperature Detectors: 1) Type. 2) Rating. c. Moisture Detectors. 6. Mechanical Data: a. Bearing design and bearing life calculations. D. Shop Drawings: 1. Motor weight. 2. Frame size. 3. Conduit box(es), size(s), and location(s). 4. Outline drawings with dimensions. 5. Installation details for the project seismic criteria. E. Test Reports: 1. Factory test reports with test reference standard identified. F. Certification: 1. When motors are driven by variable speed drive systems, submit certification that selected motor: May 09 16222-2 8205A10 pwIr wok1D=mwb1C1*nNTX/Fort WoAN205A101SpwAcabonsRr&,%a &1 GM (FS-Clean) `.. a. Is capable of satisfactory performance under the intended load. b. Meets the requirements of the latest edition of NEMA MG-1 Part 31. c. Is matched to the type of variable frequency drive specified. G. Calculations: y 1. Where site conditions specified in Section 16050 exceed manufacturer's ratings, provide derating calculations for each motor. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 16050. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 16050. B. Motors 200HP and larger: 1. Rotate shaft 90 degrees once per month. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 16050. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 16050. 14=01 1.10 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Refer to Section 16050. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. US Motors. 2. General Electric. 3. Reliance. 4. Toshiba. 5. Baldor. 2.02 EQUIPMENT T A. 3-Phase Induction Motors - General: 1. Voltage: a. All motors 1/2 hp and larger shall be 460V, 3-phase unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. b. Dual voltage motors rated 230/460V, 3-phase are acceptable provided all leads are brought to the conduit box. 2. Motors driving identical machines shall be identical. May 09 16222-3 8205A10 pw://CarollolDocuments/ClienYTX/Fort Worth/8205A70/SpecificaGcns/Pre-SelecU16222 (FS-Clean) 3. All motors 1 hp and larger shall be "Premium Efficiency" motors as defined in NEMA MG-1. 4. Horsepower as indicated on the Drawings: a. Horsepower ratings shown on the drawings are based on Vendor's estimates. Provide motors sized for the load of the actual equipment furnished without operating in the service factor. 5. Service Factor: a. Provide motors rated at 1.15 Service Factor. 6. Torque: a. Provide motors that develop sufficient torque for acceleration to full speed at voltage 10 percent less than motor nameplate rating. b. When started using reduced voltage starters: 1) Provide motors that develop sufficient torque for acceleration to full speed. c. NEMA Design B except where driven load characteristics require other than normal starting torque: 1) In no case shall starting torque or breakdown torque be less than the values specified in NEMA MG-1. 7. Enclosures: a. As indicated in the individual equipment specifications or as specified in this Section. b. Totally enclosed fan cooled: 1) Cast iron conduit box. 2) Tapped drain holes with Type 316 stainless steel plugs for frames 286T and smaller, and automatic breather and drain devices for frames 324T and larger. c. Explosion -Proof: 1) Tapped drain holes with corrosion resistant plugs for frames 286T and smaller and automatic breather and drain devices for frames 324T and larger. d. Lifting Devices: All motors weighing 265 pounds (120 kilograms) or more shall have suitable lifting devices for installation and removal. 8. Manufactured with cast iron frames in accordance with NEMA MG-1. 9. Nameplates: a. Provide all motors with a permanent, stainless steel nameplate indelibly stamped or engraved with: 1) NEMA Standard motor data. 2) Bearing description and lubrication instructions. 10. Hardware: a. Type 316 stainless steel. 11. Conduit Boxes: a. Cast iron or stamped steel. b. Split from top to bottom. c. Provide gaskets at the following interfaces: } 1) Frames and conduit boxes. 2) Conduit boxes and box covers. d. Rotatable through 360 degrees in 90 degree increments. e. Exceeding the dimensions defined in NEMA MG-1. f. Provide grounding lugs inside conduit boxes for motor frame grounding. 12. Motor Bearings: a. Antifriction. b. Regreasable and initially filled with grease. May 09 16222-4 8205A10 pwJ/Carollo/Documents/ClienVTX/Fort WWW8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Select/16222 (FS-Clean) c. Bearings and lubrication suitable for ambient temperature and ^ temperature rise. d. Suitable for intended application and have ABMA L-10 rating life of 60,000 hours or more. e. Fit bearings with easily accessible grease supply, flush, drain, and relief fittings using extension tubes where necessary. jr f. Where specified in the equipment specifications, provide split -sleeve type hydrodynamic radial bearings. Provide a bearing isolator to protect bearings from contaminants. 13. Insulation Systems: a. Motors installed in ambient temperatures 40 degrees Celsius or less: 1) Provide Class F insulation. 2) Design temperature rise consistent with Class B insulation. 3) Rated to operate at an ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celsius at the altitude where the motor will be installed. b. Motors installed in ambient temperatures between 40 degrees Celsius and 50 degrees Celsius: 1) Provide Class F insulation. 2) Design temperature rise consistent with Class B insulation. 3) Rated to operate at an ambient temperature of 50 degrees Celsius at the altitude where the motor will be installed. c. Motors installed in ambient temperatures between 50 degrees Celsius and 65 degrees Celsius: 1) Provide Class H insulation. 2) Design temperature rise consistent with Class F insulation. 3) Rated to operate at an ambient temperature of 65 degrees Celsius at the altitude where the motors will be installed. 14. Motor Leads: a. Insulated leads with non -wicking, non-hydroscopic material. Class F insulation. 15. Noise: a. Maximum operating noise level of 85dB measured as per IEEE 85. B. Vertical Motors: 1. Enclosures: a. Totally enclosed fan cooled for motors 200 hp and less installed outdoors. 2. Thrust bearings: a. Selected for combined rotor and driven equipment loads. b. Coordinate with driven equipment supplier for maximum vertical thrust of driven equipment. 3. Anti -reverse ratchet. C. Variable Frequency Drive Motors: 1. Compatible with the variable frequency drives specified. 2. Inverter duty rated and labeled. 3. Meet the requirements of NEMA MG-1 Part 31. 4. Winding insulation meets the requirements of NEMA MG-1 Part 31.4.4.2. 5. Capable of running continuously at 1/10th of full speed, with no harmful effects or overheating. 6. Service factor of 1.0 when driven by VFD. lft..• May 09 16222-5 8205A10 pw://Carollo/DocumentslClienUTX/Fort Worth/6205A101SpecficafionstPre-SelecYl6222 (FS-Clean) D. Single Phase Motors:" 1. Capacitor start type rated for operation at 115 volts, 60 hertz, unless otherwise specified or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Totally enclosed, fan cooled motors manufactured in accordance with NEMA MG 1. 3. Ball Bearings: Sealed. s 4. 1/2 hp or less fan motors: i a. Split -phase or shaded pole type when standard for the equipment. b. Open type when suitably protected from moisture, dripping water, and lint accumulation. 5. Wound rotor or commutator type single-phase motors only when their specific characteristics are necessary for application and their use is acceptable to the ENGINEER. 6. Integral overload protection. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Motor Winding Heaters: 1. Provide all 3-phase motors with belted or cartridge space heaters mounted within the motor enclosure. 2. Space heater rating shall be 120 volts, single-phase, unless otherwise shown. 3. Power leads for heaters wired into conduit box. 4. Installed within motor enclosure adjacent to core iron. B. Winding Temperature Detectors: 1. Provide factory installed winding temperature detector with leads terminating in the conduit box: a. Where required by the driven equipment Specification or as indicated on the Drawings. b. RTD type, two per phase. 2. Temperature switches with normally closed contacts as indicated on the Drawings. C. Vibration Detectors: 1. Where required by the driven equipment specification. 2. In accordance with the driven equipment specification. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Testing: 1. Perform factory tests in accordance with: a. IEEE 112 for 3-phase motors. b. IEEE 114 for single-phase motors. 2. Furnish copies of test reports. 3. Include testing of: a. No load current. b. Locked rotor current. c. Winding resistance. d. High potential. May 09 16222-6 8205A10 pw'JIC=AaD=nenWCA enVWort WmW820SAt01Speakabon$ Preselect 6M (FS-Ciean) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 16050. B. Install motors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 16050. B. Before start-up, perform insulation resistance test on each motor furnished or installed on this project: 1. Windings energized to 1,000 volts D.C. for 1 minute. 2. Resistance measured at the end of the test, recorded, and submitted to the ENGINEER for review. 3. Inform the ENGINEER of any unusual or unacceptable test results. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 16050. END OF SECTION lftvwo� May 09 16222-7 8205A10 pwalCarollotDocumentstClienUFXlFort WorthIO205AtOISpecificabonslPre-Selectl16222 (FS-Clean) Er n&era...wb#0v Wondam Mh Wow MOTOR DATA SHEET ., MOTOR/ EQUIPMENT TAG MOTOR NUMBER SPECIFICATION NUMBER OF DRIVEN MACHINE MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA MANUFACTURER MODEL/SERIES MODEL NO. FRAME ENCLOSURE NEMA DESIGN HP SERVICE FACTOR RPM INSULATION CLASS VOLTS FULL LOAD AMPS AMBIENT TEMP PHASE NO LOAD AMPS DESIGN TEMP RISE HERTZ LOCK ROTOR AMPS INRUSH CODE LETTER 100% LOAD 75% LOAD 50% LOAD GUARANTEED MINIMIMUM EFFICIENCIES: GUARANTEED MINIMIMUM POWER FACTOR: MAXIMUM SIZE OF POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITOR: KVAR ACCESSORIES MOTOR WINDING HEATER VOLTS WATTS WINDING THERMAL PROTECTION WINDING TEMP SWITCHES (YES/NO) RTD: TYPE QUANTITY PER PHASE # OF WIRES NOMINAL RESISTANCE NOMINAL TEMP COEFFICIENT RECOMMENDED DEGREES RECOMMENDED DEGREES ALARM CELSIUS TRIP CELSIUS SPECIAL APPLICATIONS INVERTER DUTY* (YES/NO) PART WINDING (YES/NO) WYE -DELTA (YES/NO) 2 SPEED, 1 WINDING (YES/NO) 2 SPEED, 2 WINDING (YES/NO) AREA CLASSIFICATION: CLASS DIVISION GROUP TEMP CODE Conforms to NEMA MG-1 Part 31. May 09 16222-8 8205A10 purl/CeraoV=mewLsXhen0X Fod WortlMMlNp aka0onslPm-Seledl6222 (FS-Clean) ` SECTION 16261 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 0.50 - 10 HORSEPOWER PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes Requirements for: 1. Variable Frequency Drives, (VFD), for control of fractional and small horsepower, NEMA Design B squirrel cage induction motors installed as: a. Standalone. b. As part of vendor furnished equipment. B. Related Sections: 1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions, Sections and Drawings apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its subcontractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated contract. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 16050. B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Iftmov, 1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000-volt maximum). 2. MGI, Part 31 - Motors with higher peak voltage capability. C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. 519 - Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems. D. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): 1. 50 Standards for Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 2. 508A Standard for Safety for Industrial Control Panels. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 16050. B. Specific Definitions: 1. Point of Common Coupling: the point of common coupling for harmonic calculation and field measurements for both voltage and current distortions shall be defined as the closest directly connected panelboard or motor control center bus that is supplying power to the VFDs. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: Iftwoo, May 09 16261-1 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documenis/ClienVTXlFort Worthl8205A101Specificafions/Pre-SelecUl6261 (FS-Clean) Each variable frequency drive system shall consist of system components required to meet the performance, protection, safety, testing and certification criteria of this specification. The VFD System shall: a. Be a fully integrated package. b. Include material necessary to interconnect VFD system elements, even if ., shipped separately. B. Any modifications to a standard product necessary to meet this specification shall be made only by the VFD manufacturer: 1. Each VFD shall be completely factory pre -wired, assembled and then tested as a complete package by the VFD manufacturer to ensure a properly coordinated, fully integrated drive system. 2. The VFD shall be capable of operating standard NEMA Design B motors. It is the responsibility of the VFD manufacturer to ensure that the drive will not damage motor insulation due to high carrier frequency, reflected wave, dv/dt or other drive electrical characteristics based upon the installed conditions: a. Provide equipment necessary to mitigate potential damage to motor insulation. C. Performance: 1. Operating Envelope: a. Speed and Torque Requirements: 1) Provide a variable torque or constant torque VFD as required by the driven load. 2) The VFD shall be capable of producing a variable alternating voltagelfrequency output to provide continuous operation over the 0-400 hertz speed range. b. Current Requirements: " 1) Deliver 100 percent of rated current output on a continuous basis. 2) Variable Torque VFD: a) Minimum 110 percent current overload for 1 minute. 3) Constant Torque VFD: a) Minimum 150 percent current overload for 1 minute. 2. Minimum VFD System Efficiency: a. Ninety-six percent. b. VFD System Efficiency shall be Calculated as Follows: Power (Load) Efficiency (%) = x 100 Power (Supply) Power (Load) is the total power measured at the output terminals of the drive system. Power (Supply) is the total power measured at the input terminals of the VFD including line reactors, and auxiliary equipment (e.g., controls, fans) for complete system operation. 3. Frequency Accuracy: a. Frequency accuracy shall be within 0.05 percent. 4. Speed Regulation: x a. Within 1.0 percent of base speed across a 60:1 speed range. May 09 16261-2 8205A10 pwi/CamidDocumenlslClienUWorl Wort 6M5A101SpedfieabonslPm-Sded]16261 (FS-Clean) `,, 1.05 SUBMITTALS . 4C A. Furnish Submittals in Accordance with Sections 01300 and 16050.. 1. Custom prepared by the VFD manufacturer and specific to the equipment being furnished. ~ B. Product Data: " 1. Manufacturer of the VFD. 2. Manufacturer of all components of the VFD. 3. Dimensions: a. Height. b. Width. c. Depth. 4. Weight. 5. Nameplate Schedule. 6. Bill of material. 7. Ratings: a. Voltage. b. Phase. c. Current. d. Interrupting rating. e. Momentary current rating. 8. Design Data: a. Device electrical ratings shall be clearly indicated. b. Efficiency and power factor values. c. Certification that the drive is sized for the full nameplate motor horsepower and current of the driven load at the installed altitude. *41MV, d. Certification that based upon VFD design, cable length to motor, and motor dielectric insulation level that the VFD will not damage motor insulation due to carrier frequency, reflected wave, dv/dt, or other VFD produced characteristics. 9. Catalog Cut sheets for major components. 10. List of recommended spare parts. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Complete Plan and Elevation Drawings Showing: a. All dimensions. b. Panel, sub -panel and component layout indexed to the Bill of Material. c. Conduit connections. 2. Block diagram showing the basic control and protection systems, specifying the protection, control, trip and alarm functions, the reference signals and commands and the auxiliary devices. 3. Complete schematic, wiring and interconnection diagrams showing connections to both internal and external devices: r a. Wiring diagrams shall include terminal number and wire numbers. D. Test Reports. E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Start-up and commissioning instructions and data. 2. Operating Manuals: �..i May 09 16261-3 8205A10 pw:YCarollo/Documents/ClientrWFort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Select/16261 (FS-Clean) a. Submit operating instructions and a maintenance manual presenting full 3 details for care and maintenance of each model of VFD provided under this contract. 3. Operating Instructions: a. The written descriptions shall detail the operational functions of all controls on the front panel. ,r 4. Maintenance Manual -. a. Furnish maintenance manuals with instructions covering all details pertaining to care and maintenance of all equipment as well as identifying all parts. b. Manuals shall Include but are not limited to the following: 1) Adjustment and test instructions covering the steps involved in the initial test, adjustment and start-up procedures. 2) Detailed control instructions which outline the purpose and operation of every control device used in normal operation. 3) All Schematic Wiring and External Diagrams: a) Drawings shall be furnished in a reduced 11-inch by 17-inch format and shall be fully legible at that size. F. Record Documents: 1. Certified record documents of equipment with information listed above. G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: 1. Certification letter from the VFD manufacturer that the VFD(s) has been inspected and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. 2. Report listing the setting of all VFD adjustable parameters and their values after start-up. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 16050. B. Qualifications: 1. Any third party certification, safety or protection requirements shall be applied to the VFD system as a whole. Certification or protection of system elements or individual components by themselves is not acceptable. 2. VFD Systems shall be UL listed and labeled. 3. Variable Frequency Drives shall be manufactured by the VFD manufacturer at its own facility which shall have a quality assurance program that is certified in conformance with ISO 9001. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 16050. B. Each VFD shall be delivered to the site pre -assembled and wired. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 16050. May 09 16261-4 8205A10 pw'JtC&vldl)= nen4raWVrX(Fon WodtA MIO/SpecificabonslPwSdecU16261 (FS-Clean) M. s 1.09 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 16050. 1.10 MAINTENANCE A. Spare Parts: 1. As a Minimum, Provide the Following Spare Parts: a. One complete VFD of each size provided under this specification. b. Any special dedicated tool for emergency service and troubleshooting. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the Following or Equal: 1. General Electric. 2. Allen Bradley. 3. Square D. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. General: 1. Sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulated, (PWM) Type Drive: a. Six -pulse insulated gate bipolar transistor, (IGBT), power section. b. Microprocessor based controls. c. Line reactor. d. Input isolation contactors. B. Ratings: 1. Voltage: a. Input voltage: 480 volts, 3-phase 60 hertz. C. Operational Features: 1. Protective Features: a. The VFD shall Include the Following Protective Features: 1) Motor overload protection. 2) Drive overload. 3) Ground fault. 4) Overvoltage. 5) Undervoltage. 6) Phase loss. 7) VFD output short circuit. 8) VFD output ground fault. 2. Control Mode: a. The VFD shall Operate in Either a Volts/Hertz or Sensorless Vector Mode: 1) Control mode selectable via the keypad. b. The VFD shall utilize slip compensation to compensate for speed decreases when operating at constant speed. 3. Frequency Control: a. Minimum of three selectable skip frequencies with adjustable bandwidths. May 09 16261-5 8205A10 pw:/ICamlloiDocumentslClienUTX1Fod Worth/6205A10/SpecificabonslPre-SelecV16261 (FSCIean) b. Programmable minimum frequency. c. Programmable maximum frequency. 4. Acceleration/Deceleration: a. Separately Adjustable Acceleration and Deceleration Rates: 1) Each rate shall be adjustable from 0.01 to 3,600 seconds. 5. Spinning Load: a. The VFD shall be capable of determining the speed and direction of a spinning load, "catch" the load and accelerate or decelerate it without damage to the load. 6. Programmable Loss of Signal: a. Upon Loss of Speed Reference the VFD shall be Programmable to Either: 1) Stop. 2) Maintain current speed. 3) Default to pre -selected speed. 7. Power Interrupt Ride -Through: a. The VFD shall be capable of continuous operation in the event of a power loss of five cycles or less. 8. Input/Output: a. Analog Inputs: 1) The VFD shall have one 4-20 mA analog input, which shall be proportional to speed. b. Analog Outputs: 1) The VFD shall have one 4-20 mA analog output which shall be proportional to speed. c. Discrete Inputs: 1) The VFD shall have a minimum of three programmable discrete inputs. d. Additional Inputs/Outputs: 1) Stop. ' 2) Start. 3) Forward/Reverse. 4) Emergency Stop input. 5) Potentiometer 3-wire input. 6) Form C VFD fault relay contact. 7) Run status discrete contact. 9. Diagnostics: a. Store a minimum of four fault conditions in non-volatile memory on a first in -first out basis. b. Operational Parameters Stored at the Time of a the Fault: 1) Operating frequency. 2) Drive status. 3) Power mode. c. Fault memory accessible via RS-232, RS-422 or RS-485. 10. Filtering: a. Provide the VFD with integral filtering and meet Class A and Class B EMC requirements. 11. Automatic Restart: a. User -selectable automatic restart feature allowing the VFD to restart following a momentary power failure or other VFD fault: 1) Programmable for up to nine restart attempts. 2) Adjustable time delay between restart attempts. May 09 16261-6 8205A10 WJ/CaroloCmmwtdCgmVTXIFW Warth1820 lOfSped6rd6ons/PMSeled116261 (FSClean) 1400-01, 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Enclosure: 1. NEMA 1 Wall mount enclosure: a. At temperatures up to 40 degrees Celsius, the VFDS shall be suitable for mounting side -by -side with no space in between units. 2. Provide cooling devices required to maintain the VFD within the manufacturers specified temperature limits for the project conditions: a. Cooling device failure shall be alarmed. B. Reactors: 1. Provide a 3 percent input line reactor. C. Keypad: 1. Provide each VFD with integral keypad for programming and control. 2. Keypad Requirements: a. Multiple levels of password security to protect drive parameters. b. Back -lit LCD with a minimum of two lines with a minimum of 16 characters each. c. Programming and Display Features Language: English. d. Capable of Displaying the Following Parameters: 1) Speed (percent). 2) Output current (Amperes). 3) Output frequency (Hertz). 4) Input voltage. 5) Output voltage. 6) Total 3-phase Kilowatt. 7) Kilowatt hour meter. 8) Elapsed run time meter. 9) Revolutions per minute. 10) Direct current bus voltage. e. Controls: 1) Programming controls. 2) Speed potentiometer. 3) Automatic/Manual selector. 4) Start pushbutton. 5) Stop pushbutton. 6) RUN LED indicator. 7) PROGRAM LED indicator. 8) FAULT LED indicator. 2.04 FINISHES A. Manufacturer's standard. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Testing: 1. Component Tests: a. Incoming inspection of components and raw materials based on strategic supplier base and experience. Sampling plans based on MIL STD 105E. b. MIL STD 45662 calibration system. May 09 16261-7 8205A10 p`v lCarollo/DocumentslClienVMFort WoM18205MMpecifications/Pre-SelecV16261 (FS-Clean) c. All products subject to 100 percent testing and final inspection; no 4- sampling plans permitted. r 2. Complete VFD Tests: a. Test each VFD to the specific manufacturers factory tests procedures. e PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 16050. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 16050. 3.03 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 16050. 3.04 DEMONSTATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 16050. B. Demonstrate the operation to the ENGINEER's and OWNER's satisfaction. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 16050. END OF SECTION A May 09 16261-8 8205A10 pwJlCar tMocumenWChenVTX/Fort WwhWO5At01Spedficagm9re-Sded116261(FS-Clean) r R SECTION 16412 LOW VOLTAGE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Low voltage molded case circuit breakers as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the OZONE SYSTEM SUPPLIER and its Sub -Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 16050. B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. AB 1. - Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and Circuit Breaker Enclosures. a.i 2. AB 3. - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Their Application. C. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL): 1. Standard No. UL 489- Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures. 2. UL 943- Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 16050. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Molded case thermal magnetic or motor circuit protector type circuit breakers as indicated on the Drawings and connect to form a completed system: 1. Molded case circuit breakers used to open and close a circuit, and to open a circuit automatically on a predetermined overload or over current, without damage to itself when properly applied within its rating. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 16050. B. Product Data: 1. Catalog cut sheets. May 09 16412-1 8205A10 pw:llCarolloMocumentslClientlTXlFort Worthl8205At01SpecificafionslPre-Select/16412 (FS-Clean) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 16050. B. Low voltage molded case circuit breakers shall be UL listed and labeled. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 16050. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 16050. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 16050. 1.10 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Refer to Section 16050. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Cutler -Hammer. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Square D Company 4. ABB. B. General: 1. Operating mechanism: a. Quick -make, quick -break, non -welding silver alloy contacts. b. Common Trip, Open and Close for multi -pole breakers such that all poles open and close simultaneously. c. Mechanically trip free from the handle. d. Trip indicating handle - automatically assumes a position midway between the manual ON and OFF positions to clearly indicate the circuit breaker has tripped. e. Lockable in the "OFF" position. 2. Arc Extinction: a. In arc chutes. 3. Voltage and Current Ratings: a. Minimum ratings as indicated on the Drawings. b. Minimum frame size 100A. 4. Interrupting Ratings: a. Minimum ratings as indicated on the Drawings. b. Not less than the rating of the assembly (Panelboard, Switchboard, Motor Control Center, etc.) r ; \./ May 09 16412-2 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienVTX/FortWorth/6205A70/Specifications/Pre-Select/16412 (FS-Clean) C. Motor Circuit Protectors: 1. Instantaneous only circuit breaker as part of a listed combination motor controller. 2. Each pole continuously adjustable in a iinear scale with TO' and `HI' settings factory calibrated. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Terminals: 1. Non -aluminum type steel or copper line and load terminals suitable for the conductor type, size, and number of conductors. 2. UL listed for Copper or Aluminum conductors. B. Case: 1. Molded polyester glass reinforced. 2. Tamper proof. 3. Ratings clearly marked. C. Trip units: 1. Instantaneous short circuit protection. 2. Inverse time delay overload. 3. Ambient or enclosure compensated by means of a bimetallic element. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test breakers in accordance with: 1. UL 489. 2. Manufacturer's standard testing procedures. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install breakers to correspond to the Manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 16950. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust motor circuit protectors in accordance with NEC and the manufacturer's recommendation based on the nameplate values of the installed motor. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 16050. END OF SECTION May 09 16412-3 8205A10 pwPCaro1WD=ments/CFenVTWcrt WvM205A1WSpecftatims/Pre-SelecU16412 (Fs -Clean) This Page Intentionally Left Blank May 09 16412-4 8205A10 PWJ/CWOIWDoWWL%tlkmVrX/Fat WorUJ8 MI 16412 (FS-Clean) ^ SECTION 17050 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. General requirements applicable to all process control and instrumentation work performed by the Ozone System Supplier. 2. Requirements for Ozone Control System and instrumentation submittals. B. Related sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Ozone System Supplier to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project: a. Items involving electrical, control, and instrumentation construction may be shown on Drawings or referred to in Specifications that do not apply specifically to electrical, control and instrumentation systems. C. Interfaces to Equipment, Instruments, and Other Components: 1. The Drawings, Specifications, and overall design are based on preliminary information furnished by various equipment manufacturers, which identify a minimum scope of supply from the manufacturers. This information pertains to, but is not limited to, instruments, control devices, electrical equipment, packaged mechanical systems, and control equipment provided with mechanical systems. 2. Submit all such changes and additions to the ENGINEER for acceptance in accordance with the General Conditions. 3. Review the complete set of Drawings and Specifications in order to ensure that all items related to the instrumentation and control systems are completely accounted for. a. If a conflict between Drawings and Specifications is discovered, refer conflict to the ENGINEER as soon as possible for resolution. 4. Loop Drawings: a. Provide complete loop drawings for all Ozone System equipment furnished as part of the pre -purchased equipment. D. Provide all instrumentation, and control equipment and systems to comply with the requirements of Division 17, whether referenced in the individual equipment specifications or not: 1. The requirements of Division 17 apply to all instrumentation and control work specified in other Specifications, including packaged systems,and VCPs, etc. 2. Inform all vendors supplying instrumentation, control systems, panels, and/or equipment of the requirements of Division 17. 3. The OWNER is not responsible for any additional costs due to the failure of the Ozone System Supplier to notify all Subcontractors and Suppliers of the Division 17 requirements. *4V..p1K May 09 17050-1 8205A10 pw:IlCarollo/DocumentslClienUMFort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Select/17050 (FS-Clean) E. Contract Documents: 1. General: �+ a. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary and are to be used together in order to fully describe the Work. 2. Specifications: a. The General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract Documents govern the Work. b. These requirements are in addition to all General Requirements. 3. Contract Drawings: a. The instrumentation and control Drawings show in a diagrammatic manner, the desired locations, and arrangements of the components of the instrumentation work. Follow the Drawings as closely as possibleand coordinate with the other trades to secure the best possible installation. b. Locations of equipment, control devices, instruments, boxes, panels, etc. are approximate only. Execute the work to ensure the best possible installation. 1) c. Schematic Diagrams: 1) All controls are shown de -energized. 2) Schematic diagrams show control function only. Incorporate other necessary functions for proper operation and protection of the system. 3) Add slave relays, where required, to provide all necessary contacts for the control system or where needed to function as interposing relays for control voltage coordination, equipment coordination, or control system voltage drop considerations. 4) Control schematics are to be used as a guide in conjunction with the descriptive operating sequences found in the Drawings or Specifications. Combine all information and furnish a coordinated and fully functional control system. F. Alternates/Alternatives: 1. Refer to the General Conditions for substitute item provisions. G. Changes and Change Orders: 1. Refer to the General Conditions. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Code Compliance: 1. The latest edition accepted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction of referenced publications in effect at the time of Bid governs. 2. The following codes and standards are hereby incorporated into these Specifications: a. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1) NFPA 70 - National Electric Code (NEC). 2) NFPA 496 - Purged and Pressurized Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, where applicable. 3) NFPA 820 - Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities. b. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1) UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment. May 09 17050-2 8205A10 pwJlCardUDocvmenWC5enV X/Fat WatN8 M10/SpKMcat nslPreSelecV17050 (FS-Clean) c. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): - 1) ANSI B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. d. American Petroleum Institute (API): 1) API RP551 - Process Measurement Instrumentation. 2) API RP552 - Transmission Systems. 3) API RP553 - Refinery Control Valves. r 4) API RP554 - Process Instrumentation and Control. 5) API RP555 - Process Analyzers. 6) API RP556 - Fired Heaters & Steam Generators. 7) API RP557 - Guide to Advanced Control Systems. e. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1) ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. f. International Society of Automation (ISA): 1) ISA-5.1 - Instrumentation Symbols and Identification. 2) ISA-5.2 - Binary Logic Diagrams for Process Operations. 3) ISA-5.3 - Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control/Shared Display Instrumentation, Logic, and Computer Systems. 4) ISA-5.4 - Instrument Loop Diagrams. 5) ISA-5.5 - Graphic Symbols for Process Displays. 6) ANSI/ISA-7.00.01 - Quality Standard for Instrument Air. 7) ISA-RP - 12.4 - Pressurized Enclosures. 8) ANSI/ISA-18.1 - Annunciator Sequences and Specifications. 9) ISA-20 - Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements, and Control Valves. 10) ISA-TR20.00.01 - Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments Part 1: General Considerations Updated with 27 `r New Specification Forms in 2004-2005. 11) ANSI/ISA-50.00.01 - Compatibility of Analog Signals for Electric Industrial Process Instruments. 12) ISA-51.1 - Process Instrumentation Terminology. 13) ISA-RP60.3 - Human Engineering for Control Centers. 14) ISA-71.01 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and Control Systems: Temperature and Humidity. 15) ISA-71.02 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and Control Systems: Power. 16) ISA-71.03 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and Control Systems: Mechanical Influences. 17) ISA-71.04 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and Control Systems: Airborne Contaminants. B. Compliance with Laws and Regulations: 1. Refer to the General Conditions. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions of terms and other electrical and instrumentation considerations as set forth in the: 1. International Society of Automation (ISA). 2. International Electro Technical commission (IEC). 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 4. International Organization for Standardization (ISO). *-ftwl May 09 17050-3 8205A10 pw:f(Carollo/Documents/ClientrFX/Fort Worth/8205A10ISpeeci8cafions/Pre-SelecYl7050 (FS-Gean) 5. Factory Mutual or FM Global (FM). 6. National Electrical Code (NEC). 7. National Electrical Testing Association (NETA). 8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 9. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). 10. Underwriter Laboratories (UL). B. Specific Definitions: 1. Control Circuit: Any circuit operating at 120 volts AC or DC or less, whose principal purpose is the conveyance of information (including performing logic) and not the conveyance of energy for the operation of an electrically powered device. 2. Panel: An instrument support system that may be either a flat surface, a partial enclosure, or a complete enclosure for instruments and other devices used in process control systems. Unless otherwise specified or clearly indicated by the context, the term "panel' in these Contract Documents is interpreted as a general term, which includes flat surfaces, enclosures, cabinets and consoles. 3. Power Circuit: Any circuit operating at 90 volts (AC or DC) or more, whose principal purpose is the conveyance of energy for the operation of an electrically powered device. 4. Signal Circuit: Any circuit operating at less than 50 volts AC or DC, which conveys analog information or digital communications information. 5. Digital Bus: A communication network, such as Profibus, Foundation Fieldbus, or DeviceNet, allowing instruments and devices to transmit data, control functions and diagnostic information. 6. 2-Wire Transmitter (Loop Powered): A transmitter that derives its operating power supply from the signal transmission circuit and requires no separate power supply connections. As used in this Specification, two -wire transmitter refers to a transmitter that provides 4 to 20 mA current regulation of a signal in a series circuit with an external 24 VDC driving potential: a. Field Bus Communications signal or both. 7. Powered Transmitters: A transmitter that requires a separate power source (120 VAC, 240 VAC, etc.) in order for the transmitter to develop its signal. As used in this Specification, the produced signal may either be a 4 to 20 mA current signal, a Digital Bus communications signal or both. C. Acronym Definitions: 1. DPDT: Double -Pole, Double -Throw. 2. ES: Enterprise System: Computer based communications or data sharing system utilized for non -process control functions such as E-mail, sharing files, creating documents, etc. 3. FAT: Factory Acceptance Test. 4. HART: Highway Addressable Remote Transducer. 5. HOA: Hand -Off -Auto control function that is totally PLC based. In the Hand mode, equipment is started or stopped, valves are opened or closed through operator direction under the control of the PLC software. In the Auto mode, equipment is started or stopped and valves are opened or closed through a control algorithm within the PLC software. In the Off mode, the equipment is prohibited from responding from the PLC control. 6. HMI: Human Machine Interface: PLC based operator interface device consisting of an alphanumeric display and operator May 09 17050-4 8205A10 pw )CaroldDocwnenLvVienVrAfFod WarIM5A10/Specifimations/Pre-S&W17050 (FS-Clean) �.. input devices. The HMI is typically a flat panel type of display with either a touch screen or tactile button interface. 7. ICSC: Instrumentation and Control System Contractor: Subcontractor who specializes in the design, construction, fabrication, software development, installation, testing, and commissioning of industrial instrumentation and control systems. 8. IJB Instrument Junction boxes. A panel designed with cord sets to easily remove, replace or relocate instrument signals. 9. 1/0 Input / Output. 10. IP: Internet Protocol or Ingress Protection. 11. LCP: Local Control Panel: Operator interface panel that may contain an HMI, pilot type control devices, operator interface devices, control relays, etc. and does not contain a PLC or RIO. 12. LAN: Local Area Network: A control or communications network that is limited to the physical boundaries of the facility. 13. LOR: Local -Off -Remote control function. In the Remote mode, equipment is started or stopped, and valves are opened or closed through the PLC based upon the selection of the HOA. In the Local mode, equipment is started or stopped, valves are opened or closed based upon hardwired control circuits completely independent of the PLC with minimum interlocks and permissive conditions. In the Off mode, the equipment is prohibited from responding to any control commands. 14. OIT: Operator Interface Terminal. PC based interface device used for operator interface with the SCADA system. 15. P&ID: Process and Instrumentation Diagram. 16. PC: Personal Computer. r..s 17. CONTROL Process Control and Instrumentation System: includes the SYSTEM: entire instrumentation system, the entire control system, and all of the work specified in Division 17 and depicted on the Instrumentation Drawings. 18. PCM: Process Control Module: An enclosure containing any of the following devices: PLC, RIO. 19. PJB: Power Junction Box: An enclosure with terminal blocks that distribute power to multiple instruments. 20. PLC: Programmable Logic Controller. 21. RIO: Remote 1/0 device for the PLC consisting of remote 1/0 racks, or remote 1/0 blocks. 22. RTU: Remote Telemetry Unit: A controller typically consisting of a PLC, and a means for remote communications. The remote communications devices typically are radios, modems, etc. 23. SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition system consists of the computer -based software system that includes the operator interface, data storage, data retrieval, archiving, alarming, historian, reports, trending, and other higher level ' control system software. 24. SPDT: Single -Pole, Double -Throw. 25. SPST: Single -Pole, Single -Throw. 26. UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply. 27. VCP: Vendor Control Panel: Control panels that are furnished with .. particular equipment by a vendor other than the ICSC. These panels may contain PLCs, RIO, OIT, HMI, etc. May 09 17050-5 8205A10 pw:llCarollo/Documents/ClienVTX/Fort Worth/8205A101Specifications/Pre-SelecV17050 (FS-Clean) 28. WAN: Wide Area Network: A control or communications network that extends beyond the physical boundaries of the facility. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General Requirements: 1. The Work includes everything necessary for and incidental to executing and completing the general requirements for the instrumentation and control system Work described in the Contract Drawings and Specifications and reasonably inferable there from including but not limited to: a. Preparing hardware submittals for field instrumentation. b. Design, develop, and draft loop Drawings, control panel designs, and all other submittals specified in Division 17. c. Prepare the test plan, the training plan, and the spare parts submittals. d. Procure all hardware. e. Provide all CONTROL SYSTEM hardware and software. f. Fabricate panels. g. Perform factory tests on panels. h. Perform instrument calibration and verify calibration after installation. L Oversee and certify installation of the CONTROL SYSTEM. j. Oversee, document, and certify loop testing. k. Oversee, document, and certify system pre -commissioning. I. Conduct the Performance Tests. m. Prepare Operation and Maintenance Manuals. n. Conduct training classes. o. Prepare Record Drawings. p. Integrate the CONTROL SYSTEM with instrumentation and control devices provided under other sections. y' q. Develop all loop drawings and record drawings associated with the Ozone Control System. r. Resolve signal, power, or functional incompatibilities between the CONTROL SYSTEM and interfacing devices. s. Perform all required corrective and preventative maintenance. 2. It is the intent of these Specifications that the entire Ozone System instrumentation, and control system be complete and operable. Provide all necessary material and labor for the complete system. 3. Provide the complete operating CONTROL SYSTEM to perform the specified monitoring, communications, alarm, control, display, and reporting functions in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Furnish complete operations and maintenance documentation, including Operations Manuals, Maintenance Manuals, As -Built Wiring Drawings, Training Manuals, As -Built Software Documentation, and all other documentation required to operate, modify, and maintain all parts of the OZONE CONTROL SYSTEM. 5. CONTROL SYSTEM Defective Work: a. Refer to the General Conditions. B. Ozone Control System The Ozone Control System shall include a redundant Programmable Logic Control System and Operator Interface to control Ozone generation, distribution, and destruct systems. The Control System shall control: 1. Liquid oxygen/gaseous supply to Ozone Generators. May 09 17050-6 8205A10 p jjCar k0=me W0jenVWFW WorthBPOM1&SpedrKatio *Pm,%k tl17050 (Fs47ean) ""W--, 2. Three Ozone Generators, 3. One Nitrogen Generation System, 4. Distribution to four Ozone Contactors, 5. Destruction of Ozone off gas at six Ozone Destruct Systems. 6. The system shall include all Control Panels, field instruments, power supplies, s and UPS equipment required. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Furnish Submittals that are fully indexed with a tabbed divider for every component. 2. Sequentially number pages within the tabbed sections. Submittals and Operation and Maintenance manuals that are not fully indexed and tabbed with sequentially numbered pages, or are otherwise unacceptable, will be returned without review. 3. Edit all Submittals and Operation and Maintenance Manuals so that the submittal specifically applies to only the equipment furnished. Neatly cross out all extraneous text, options, models, etc. that do not apply to the equipment being furnished, so that the information remaining is only applicable to the equipment being furnished. 4. Instruct all equipment suppliers of Submittal and Operation and Maintenance Manuals of the requirements in Section 17050. 5. Submittal Requirements: a. Submit copies of shop drawings, and product data, in accordance with Section 01300 in addition to the requirements of this Section: 1) Show dimensions, construction details, wiring diagrams, controls, ,..i manufacturers, catalog numbers, and all other pertinent details. b. Where Submittals are required, provide a separate submittal for each Specification section. In order to expedite construction, the CONTRACTOR may make more than one submittal per Specification section, but a single submittal may not cover more than one Specification section: 1) The only exception to this requirement is when one specification section covers the requirements for a component of equipment specified in another section. 6. Exceptions to Specifications and Drawings: a. Include a list of proposed exceptions to the Specifications and Drawings along with a detailed explanation of each. b. Any exceptions to the Specification and Drawings must be noted and the reason for the exception explained. c. If there is insufficient explanation for the deviation, the submittal will be returned requiring Revision and Re -submittal. d. ENGINEER approval of any exception is at the sole discretion of the ENGINEER. Furnish all items (materials, features, functions, • performance, etc.) that are not listed as exceptions strictly in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings. e. Replace all items that do not strictly meet the requirements of the Specifications, which were not previously approved as exceptions, even if the Submittals contained information indicating the failure to meet the requirements. *I"'rl May 09 17050-7 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client7X/Fort Worth/8205AlO/SpecificatonslPre-SelecYl7o5o (FS-Clean) Submittal Organization: a. First page: 1) Specification Section reference. 2) Name and telephone number of individual who reviewed submittal before delivery to ENGINEER. 3) Name and telephone number of individual who is primarily responsible for the development of the submittal. 4) Place for CONTRACTOR's review stamp and comments. b. Next pages: 1) Provide confirmation of Specification compliance in a tabular form that individually lists each Specification section, paragraph, and sub- paragraphs and unequivocally states compliance with said requirement or takes exception to the requirement and lists the reason for said exception and offers alternative means for compliance. 2) Include a response in writing to each of the ENGINEER's comments or questions for submittal packages which are re -submitted: a) In the order that the comments or questions were presented throughout the submittal. b) Referenced by index section and page number on which the comment appeared. c) Acceptable responses to ENGINEER's comments are either: (1) ENGINEER's comment or change is accepted and appropriate changes are made. (2) Explain why comment is not accepted or requested change is not made. (3) Explain how requirement will be satisfied in lieu of comment or change requested by ENGINEER. d) Any re -submittal, which does not contain responses to the ENGINEER's previous comments shall be returned for Revision and Resubmittal. e) No further review by the ENGINEER will be performed until a response for previous comments has been received. c. Remaining pages: 1) Actual Submittal data: a) Organize Submittals in exactly the same order as the items are referenced, listed, and/or organized in the Specification section. b) For Submittals that cover multiple devices used in different areas under the same Specification section, the Submittal for the individual devices must list the area where the device is intended to be used. Specific Submittal requirements: a. Furnish the submittals required by each Section or Division 17: 1) Product Data. 2) Shop Drawings. b. Use equipment and instrument tags as depicted on the P&IDs for all submittals. c. Adhere to wiring numbering scheme outlined in Section 16075 throughout the Project: 1) Uniquely number each wire per the Specifications. d. Wire numbers must appear on all equipment drawings. May 09 17050-8 8205A10 pwXaru1oD=menWC5en0)VFatWwh18 M101SPOGfic bmrtPr&SeleLI17050(FS-Clean) 9. In these Contract Documents, some items of Work are represented -P schematically, and are designated for the most part by numbers, as derived from criteria in ANSI/ISA S5.1: a. Employ the nomenclature and numbers designated herein and on the Drawings exclusively throughout shop drawings, data sheets, and similar submittals. b. Replace any other symbols, designations, and nomenclature unique to a manufacturer's, Suppliers, or Subcontractor's standard methods with those identified herein and on the Drawings. 10. Furnish submittals in the following general order, each in a separate bound set: a. Schedule of Values including a list of submittals. b. Product Data. c. After approval of the Product Data, submit the Project Shop Drawing submittals d. Loop Description Submittal. e. The Process Control Submittal including, control system software, . programming, and HMI screens. f. Testing, Calibration and Start-up procedures. g. Operation and Maintenance Data. h. Training Submittals. i. Record Documents. B. Product Data: 1. General: a. Submitted for non -custom manufactured material listed in this and other sections and shown on shop drawings. b. Furnish sufficient information to evaluate the suitability of the proposed material or equipment for the intended use, and for compliance with these Specifications. c. Include: 1) Catalog cuts. 2) Bulletins. 3) Brochures. 4) Quality photocopies of applicable pages from these documents. 5) Identify on the data sheets the project name, applicable specification section, and paragraph. 6) Identify model number and options for the actual equipment being furnished. d. Legibly cross out options that do not apply or equipment not intended to be supplied. 2. Material and Equipment Schedules: a. Furnish a complete schedule and/or matrix of all materials, equipment, apparatus, and instruments that are proposed: b. Include sizes, names of manufacturers, catalog numbers, and such other information required to identify the items. 3. Instrument Data Sheets and Cut Sheets: a. Furnish fully completed data sheets, both electronically in Microsoft Word or Excel and in hardcopy, for each instrument and component according to ISA S20 Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements and Control Valves. Include the following information on the data sheet: ,%OR0" May 09 17050-9 8205A10 pwJ/Carollo/Documents/ClienUTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Seled/17050 (F&Clean) 1) Component functional description used herein and on the Drawings. 2) Manufacturers model number or other product designation. 3) Tag number used herein and on the Drawings. 4) System or loop of which the component is a part. 5) Location or assembly at which the component is to be installed. 6) Input and output characteristics. 7) Scale range with units and multiplier. ► 8) Requirements for electric supply. 9) Requirements for air supply. 10) Power consumption. 11) Response timing. 12) Materials of construction and of component parts that are in contact with, or otherwise exposed to, process media, and or corrosive ambient air. 13) Special requirements or features, such as specifications for ambient operating conditions. 14) Features and options that are furnished. b. Provide a technical brochure or bulletin ("cut sheet") for each instrument on the project. Submit with the corresponding data sheets: 1) Where the same make and model of instrument is used in 2 or more applications on the project, and the process applications are nearly identical, and the materials, features and options are identical submit one brochure or bulletin for the set of identical instruments. 2) Include a list of tag numbers for which it applies with each brochure or bulletin_ 3) Furnish technical product brochures that are complete enough to verify conformance with all Contract Document requirements, and to reflect only those features supplied with the device. 4) Cross out models, features, options, or accessories that are not being provided. 5) Clearly mark and identify special options and features. c. Organization: Index the data sheets and brochures in the submittal by systems or loops. 4. Control Panel Hardware Submittal: a. Submit the following in one submittal package. b. Complete and detailed bills of materials: 1) Including quantity, description, manufacturer, and part number for each assembly or component for each control panel. 2) Include all items within an enclosure. c. Complete grounding requirements for each system component including any requirements for PI -Cs, process LANs, and SCADA equipment. d. Requirements for physical separation between control system components and 120 VAC, 480 VAC, and medium voltage power cables. e. UPS and battery load calculations to show that the backup capacity and time meet the specified requirements. f. Provide a data sheet for each control system component together with a technical product brochure or bulletin, which include: 1) The manufacturer's model number or other identifying product designation. 2) Tag and loop number. 3) System to which it belongs. 4) Site to which it applies. May 09 17050-10 8205A10 pwJ1C=1o/D=menWCMnVWod Wath UOM1NSpedeatiDnslPreSekdll?050 (FS-Clean) ..WI 5) Input and output characteristics. ` 6) Requirements for electric power. 7) Device ambient operating requirements. 8) Materials of construction. C. Shop Drawings: 1. General: i a. Coordinate all aspects of the Work so that a complete, instrumentation, computer, and control system for the facility is supported by accurate shop and record drawings: 1) Clearly show every wire, circuit, and terminal provided under this contract on one or more submitted wiring diagrams. b. Show all interfaces between any of the following: instruments, vendor control panels, motor control centers, motor starters, variable speed drives, control valves, flow meters, chemical feeders and other equipment related to the CONTROL SYSTEM. c. Generate all drawings developed for this project utilizing AutoCAD by Auto Desk Version 2000 or later: 1) Furnish on CD-ROM disks, as well as hard copies on 11 inch by 17 inch plain bond paper. d. Organize the shop drawing submittals for inclusion in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1) Furnish the initial shop drawing submittal bound in one or more standard size, 3-ring, D-ring, loose leaf, vinyl plastic, hard cover binders suitable for bookshelf storage. 2) Binder ring size: 2 inches. e. Include the letterhead and/or title block of the firm responsible for the preparation of all shop drawings. Include the following information in the title block, as a minimum: 1) The firm's registered business name. 2) Firm's physical address, email address, and phone number. 3) OWNER's name. 4) Project name and location. 5) Drawing name. 6) Revision level. 7) Personnel responsible for the content of the drawing. 8) Date. 2. Shop drawing requirements: a. Front, side, and, rear elevations, and top and bottom views, showing all dimensions. b. Locations of conduit entrances and access plates. c. Component layout and identification. d. Schematic and wiring diagrams with wire numbers and terminal identification. e. Connection diagrams, terminal diagrams, internal wiring diagrams, conductor size, etc. f. Anchoring method and leveling criteria, including manufacturer's recommendations for the seismic specified in Section 01612 and wind conditions specified in Section 01614. g. Weight. h. Finish. i. Nameplates: 14owe May 09 17050-11 8205A10 pW://CarolldDocuments/ClienVTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecU17050 (FSClean) 1) Refer to Section 16075. j. Temperature limitations, as applicable. 3. Loop Drawings: a. Submit loop drawings for every analog, discrete, and fieldbus signal and control circuit: 1) Provide a loop drawing submittal that completely defines and documents the contents of each monitoring, alarming, interlock, and control loop on this Project. 2) This requirement applies to all signal and control circuits associated with equipment provided under Division 17, Division 16, as well as equipment provided under other Sections including vendor supplied equipment packages and control panels. b. Show every instrument and 1/0 point on at least one loop diagram. c. Provide a complete index in the front of each bound volume: 1) Index the loop drawings by systems or process areas. d. Provide drawings showing definitive diagrams for every instrumentation loop system: 1) Show and identify each component of each loop or system using requirements and symbols from ANSI/ISA S5.4 - Instrument Loop Drawings as amended by the Contract Drawings, as defined by the most recent revision in ISA 2) Furnish a separate drawing sheet for each system or loop diagram. e. In addition to the ISA S5.4 requirements, show the following details: 1) Functional name of each loop. 2) Reference name, drawing, and loop diagram numbers for any signal continuing off the loop diagram sheet. 3) Show all terminal numbers, regardless of the entity providing the equipment. 4) MCC panel, circuit, and breaker numbers for all power feeds to the loops and instrumentation. 5) Designation of and, if appropriate, terminal assignments associated with, every manhole, pull -box, junction box, conduit, and panel through which the loop circuits pass. 6) Show vendor control panel, instrument panel, conduit, junction box, equipment and CONTROL SYSTEM terminations, termination identification, wire numbers and colors, power circuits, and ground identifications. 7) If a circuit is continued on another drawing show the name and number of the continuation drawing on the loop drawing. Provide complete references to all continuation drawings whether vendor control panels, other loop drawings, drawings provided under Division 16, or other drawings. 4. Instrument Installation Drawings: a. Submit instrument installation, mounting, and anchoring details for all �. components and assemblies, including access requirements and conduit connection or entry details. b. Furnish for each instrument a dedicated 8 1/2-inch by 11-inch installation detail that pertains to the specific instrument by tag number. c. For each detail, provide certification and the hard copies, by the instrument manufacturer, that the proposed installation is in accordance ! with the instrument manufacturers recommendations and is fully warrantable. May 09 17050-12 8205A10 pwJJCaroJoVo=wtslC1ienVDVFa1 Watld8M10/Specifications/Pre-SWOW11050 (FSgean) 5. Control Panel Drawings: ' a. Layout Drawings: 1) Submit panel, enclosure, console layout drawings for all items provided. 2) As a minimum, include the following information: a) To scale front, side, and plan views. b) Dimensions. c) Interior and exterior arrangements. d) Mounting information, including conduit entrance location. e) Finish data. f) Tag number and functional name of items mounted in and on each panel, console, and cabinet. g) Nameplate legend including text, letter size, and colors. b. Wiring and Piping Diagrams: 1) Submit panel wiring and piping diagrams for every panel that contains wiring and/or piping. 2) Include the following information: a) Name of panel. b) Wiring and piping sizes and types. c) Terminal strip numbers. d) Wire tags and labels. e) Functional name and manufacturer's designation for items to which wiring and piping are connected. f) Electrical control schematics in accordance with ANSI standards. c. Installation drawings: 1) Provide site -specific installation drawings for all control equipment ,%wool panels, including dimensions. 2) Provide scaled drawings and show the position of the equipment at its intended installation location. 3) Show the placement of all equipment being provided under this Contract and its spatial relationship to all other equipment located in the abutting and adjoining areas. 4) Show all required access and clearances associated with the equipment with a statement of compliance to manufacturer's recommendations, NEC, and other applicable codes. 6. Schematic Diagrams: a. Submit schematic diagrams for all electrical equipment in ladder diagram format. b. Include device and field connection terminal numbers on all schematic diagrams. c. Incorporate equipment manufacturer's shop drawing information into the schematic diagrams in order to document the entire control system. 7. Control System Diagram: a. Submit a complete control system diagram including the following information: 1) All PLCs, workstations, printers, communication devices, and communication links: a) Show all PLCs with their current 1/0 allocation, and future 1/0 = space allocation, current plus spares provided, and maximum potential 1/0 based on available slots. 2) All cables required for communication requirements. ,%""' May 09 17050-13 8205A10 pwJ/Carolle/Documents/Cllent(rX/Fort Worth18205A10/Specifications/Pre-Selectl17050 (FS-Clean) 3) Show each component fully annotated with conduit size and number associated with the power source. D. Process Control Software Submittal: 1. In accordance with Product Data and Shop Drawing general requirements. 2. Submit a complete description of the standard application software programs, including modifications and explanation of how the specific functional requirements are met: 3. A complete listing of the CONTROL SYSTEM system point 1/0 database: a. Include for each data point, relevant parameters such as range, contact orientation, limits, incremental limits, 1/0 card byte, 1/0 hardware address, and PLC assignment. b. Organize on a site -by -site basis, separate by point type. c. In addition to the active 1/0 points, list the implemented spare 1/0 points and the available 1/0 points remaining on each card, as well as other defined future points specified or shown. 4. Detailed descriptions of procedures used to implement and modify control strategies and database construction. 5. Preliminary overview, screens, station graphic displays, and preliminary reports. 6. Refer to Section 17765 for additional requirements. E. Control Descriptions: 1. For each control loop, provide a detailed functional description of the operation of the equipment, signals, and controls as shown on the P&IDs: a. Include all functions depicted or described in the Contract Documents. b. Include within the Control Description content: 1) All specific requirements. 2) All common requirements that pertain in general to all loops. F. Testing, Calibration, and Start-up Submittal: 1. General testing submittal requirements are specified in this Section. Additional requirements are specified in Section 17950 and other Sections. 2. Test Procedure Submittals: a. Submit the proposed procedures to be followed during tests of the CONTROL SYSTEM and its components in two parts: 1) Preliminary Submittal: Outline of the specific proposed tests and examples of proposed forms and checklists. 2) Detailed Submittal: After successful review of the Preliminary Submittal, submit the proposed detailed test procedures, forms, and checklists. Include a statement of test objectives with the test procedures. 3. Provide certified and witnessed test and calibration checklists for each of the following tests: a. Calibration, adjustment, and test details for all components and systems. b. Factory Acceptance Tests. c. Loop Validation Tests: 1) Loop Validation Certifications: a) After the field device loop tests have been successfully completed for all individual instruments, all separate analog control networks, all valves, all VCPs, all motors, all local operator interface panels, all motor control centers, etc., submit May 09 17050-14 8205A10 pwJ/Cam loMo=ents 0wnVrff d WathMMI O/spearasorsPre-sWecu»aso (FSCbm) a certified copy of all test forms signed by the Ozone Systme Supplier and the OWNER'S Representative, with test data entered, together with a clear and unequivocal statement that all instrumentation has been successfully calibrated, inspected, and tested. d. Pre -commissioning Test. e. Performance Test. 4. Factory Acceptance Test: a. Include complete test procedures and forms to be used during the test. G. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Furnish the ENGINEER with a complete preliminary set of written Operation and Maintenance Manuals 8 weeks before calibration, start-up and/or testing. 2. Furnish in accordance with Section 01730 and the following additional requirements. 3. Submit preliminary sets of these manuals to the ENGINEER for review of format and content: a. ENGINEER will return 1 set with comments. b. Revise and/or amended as required and submit the requisite number of copies to the ENGINEER 15 days before Pre -commissioning of the systems. 4. Incorporate changes that occur during startup and submit as part of the final manuals. 5. Provide comprehensive information on all systems and components to enable operation, service, maintenance, and repair. 6. Include Record Documents and the approved shop drawing submittals, modified for conditions encountered in the field during the work. ,%WWI 7. Include signed results from Calibration, Loop Validation Tests, Pre - commissioning, and Performance Testing. 8. Provide installation, connection, operating, calibration, setpoints (e.g., pressure, pump control, time delays, etc.), adjustment, test, troubleshooting, maintenance, and overhaul instructions in complete detail. 9. Provide exploded or other detailed views of all instruments, assemblies and accessory components together with complete parts lists and ordering instructions. 10. Operational Manual: a. Prepare and provide a simplified version of the standard manufacturer's HMI software and system operations manual that includes basic instructions in the application of the system as required for operators in day-to-day operations. 11. Spare Parts List: a. Include a priced list of recommended spare parts for all the equipment furnished under this Contract: 1) Include recommended quantities sufficient to maintain the furnished system for a period of 5 years. b. Annotate the list to indicate which items, if any and quantity are furnished as part of this Contract. c. Provide the name, address, and phone number of manufacturer and manufacturer's local service representative of these parts. May 09 17050-15 8205A10 pwJ/Carollo/Documents/Client/TX/Fort Worth18205A10/SpeciBcations/Pre-SelecU17050 (FS-Clean) 12. Control System Software Record Documents: a. Include complete documentation of all the software programs provided for the entire control systems, including: 1) Listings of all application software on both hard copy and CD-ROM. 2) Database, both hard copy and CD-ROM. 3) Communication protocols. 4) All documentation necessary to maintain, troubleshoot, modify, or ^s update the software system. 13. Organize the Operation and Maintenance Manuals for each process in the following manner: a. Section A - Process and Instrumentation Diagrams. b. Section B - Control Descriptions. c. Section C - Loop Drawings. d. Section D - Instrument Summary. e. Section E - Instrument Data Sheets and Brochures. f. Section F - Sizing Calculations. g. Section G - Instrumentation Installation Details. h. Section H - Test Results. i. Section I - Operational Manual. j. Section J - Spare Parts List. k. Section K - Control System Software. H. Training Submittals: 1. Develop and submit for review a General Training Plan. Include complete descriptions of all planned training classes, a preliminary training schedule, a list of all proposed instructors along with resumes, examples of proposed training manuals, and a description of any special training tools to be used (simulators, self -paced modules, personal computer -based training, etc.). 2. The ENGINEER will review the General Training Plan. Special emphasis will be placed on review of the qualifications of the proposed instructors and the timing of the individual courses to maximize their effectiveness. If, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, the proposed instructors are not sufficiently qualified to conduct the specified training courses, or lack experience, where required, on the specific configuration of the system, provide more qualified instructors. 3. Training Course Plan submittals: a. For each training course or other training activity, submit a detailed, complete outline and agenda for each lesson. b. Describe any student pre -requisites for the course or training activity. c. Provide an updated schedule for all sessions of the course, including dates, times, durations, and locations. d. Submit training materials. 4. Incorporate all submittal review comments into the course. 5. Do not conduct training courses before review and acceptance of the Course Plan submittal for the course. Record Documents: 1. Provide Record Documents of all instrumentation Drawings. 2. Record Drawing requirements: a. Update Record Drawings weekly. ' b. Record Drawings must be fully updated as a condition of the monthly progress payments. May 09 17050-16 8205A10 perlr,amlaOocmmWaienVfX/Fod Wor WBMA1a5peckabons/Pre-Selectl17050 (FS-Clean) �.. c. Submit final fully updated Record Drawings upon completion of the Work for final review. 3. Shop Drawings: a. Upon completion of the Work, update all shop drawings to indicate the final as -built configuration of the systems: 1) Should an error be found in a shop drawing during installation or startup of equipment, note the correction, including any field changes found necessary, on the drawing and submit the corrections in the Record Documents. 2) Update, check, and revise all wiring drawings and other submitted drawings and documents to show final installed conditions. b. Provide "As -Built" Shop Drawings for all instrumentation equipment. c. Provide electronic copies of these documents on CD-ROM disks. Size all Drawings to be readable and legible on 11-inch by 17-inch media. 4. Submittal Documents: a. Provide an interim submittal of Record Documents after the CONTROL SYSTEM Pre- testing. b. Submit final Record Documents prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Review and Corrections: a. Correct any Record Documents or other documents found to be incomplete, not accurate, of poor quality, or containing errors. b. Promptly correct and re -submit Record Documents returned for correction. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacture equipment and instruments at facilities certified to the quality NftWVr standards of ISO 9001 - Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation and Servicing. B. Furnish all equipment listed by and bearing the label of Underwriters' Laboratories, Incorporated (UL) or of an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the ENGINEER and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. C. Ozone System Supplier(OSS): 1. Ozone System Supplieris responsible for the implementation of the CONTROL SYSTEM and the integration of the CONTROL SYSTEM with the plant wide control system. . 2. The Ozone System Supplier assumes full responsibility select, furnish, install, program, test, calibrate, and place into operation all instrumentation, controls, and control panels, including application software, for a complete, integrated and functional control system. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store all equipment and materials delivered to the job site in a location that will not interfere with the construction or the OWNER's operations. B. Shipping Precautions: 1. After completion successful Factory Acceptance Test (FAT), pack all equipment, cabinets and panels, in protective crates and enclose in heavy duty polyethylene envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete protection from damage, dust, and moisture. V May 09 17050-17 8205A10 pv //Carolto/Documents/Client/TXIFort Warlhl8205A10ISpeofica6ons/Pre-SelecV17050 (FS-Clean) 2. Place dehumidifiers when required, inside the polyethylene coverings. 3. Skid -mount the equipment for final transport. ' 4. Provide lifting rings for moving without removing protective covering. 5. Display boxed weight on shipping tags together with instructions for unloading, transporting, storing, and handling at the job site. C. Special Instructions: 1. Securely attach special instructions for proper field handling, storage, and installation to each piece of equipment before packaging and shipment. D. Tagging: 1. Tag each component and/or instrument to identify its location, instrument tag number, and function in the system. 2. Firmly attach a permanent tag indelibly machine marked with the instrument tag number, as given in the tabulation, on each piece of equipment constituting the CONTROL SYSTEM. 3. Tag instruments immediately upon receipt in the field. 4. Prominently display identification on the outside of the package. 5. Utilize the Tag and Loop Number identifications shown on the P&IDs. E. Delivery and Inspection: 1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original container or packaging with identifying labels intact and legible. Include date of manufacture on label. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Conditions: �- 1. Provide a CONTROL SYSTEM, including all equipment, and any other components required for a complete installation that meets the environmental conditions for the Site as specified in the General Requirements and below. 2. Seismic Classification: a. Provide all equipment and construction techniques suitable for the seismic requirements for the site, as specified in Section 01612. 3. Wind: a. Provide all equipment and construction techniques suitable for the Site wind loading criteria, as specified in Section 01614. 4. Altitude, Temperature and Humidity: a. Refer to Section 15050. b. Provide all equipment and instrumentation fully rated for continuous operation at this altitude, temperature and humidity conditions with no additional derating factors applied. c. Provide additional temperature conditioning equipment to maintain all equipment and instrumentation in non -conditioned spaces or outdoors r subject to these ambient temperatures 10 degrees Fahrenheit above the minimum operating temperature and 10 degrees Fahrenheit below maximum operating temperature as determined by the equipment manufacturer's guidelines: 1) Provide all power wiring for these devices (e.g., heaters, fans, etc.), whether or not shown on the plans. May 09 17050-18 8205A10 pwir,ardldDocumentslO*nVr/JFortWaBd MM16 Spe�Sek,dl7050 (FS-Clean) 5. Area Classifications: a. Furnish enclosures that match the area classifications as specified in Section 16050. 6. Site Security: a. Abide by all security and safety rules concerning the work on the Site. 1.09 SEQUENCING A. General: 1. Testing requirements are specified in Section 17950 and other Sections. B. Pre -Submittal Conferences: 1. Before producing any submittals, schedule a pre -submittal Conference for the purposes of reviewing the entire project, equipment, control philosophy, schedules, and submittal requirements. 2. Review the system configuration, the system database, control schemes, displays, report formats, etc. with the ENGINEER and OWNER. 3. Bring to this meeting, examples of displays, display symbols, reports, etc to show the capabilities of the HMI system software. 4. C. Factory Acceptance Test (FAT): 1. Submit a copy of the test procedures for review at least 21 days before any scheduled test date. Include all test forms in the test procedure. 2. Schedule the FAT after receiving approval of the FAT procedure submittal. 3. Coordinate the Factory Acceptance Test schedule with the ENGINEER a minimum of 15 days before the date of the test. 4. Successful perform the FAT prior to packing and shipment of of the control system to the job site. D. Loop Validation Test. 1. Notify the ENGINEER of scheduled tests a minimum of 30 days before the estimated completion date of installation and wiring of the CONTROL SYSTEM. 2. Complete testing a minimum of 5 days before the Pre -commissioning phase of the project. E. Training: 1. Refer to Section 16050. 2. Complete all training before the pre -commissioning phase of the project may start. 3. Schedule the training sessions a minimum of 15 days before the start date of the courses. 4. Submit training manuals to the ENGINEER a minimum of 10 days before starting the training session. 5. Within 10 days after the completion of each session, submit the following: a. A list of all OWNER personnel that attended the session. b. A copy of the training materials utilized during the lesson with all notes, diagrams, and comments. F. Pre -Commissioning Test: 1. Commence the Pre -Commissioning Test after acceptance of all training, wire test, calibration tests, and loop validation tests, and all inspections have '— May 09 17050-19 8205A10 pwJlCarolbV=menWClientrrX/Fort Worth/8205Al O/Spedfica ior* PmSele 17050 (FS-Gean) demonstrated that the CONTROL SYSTEM complies with all Contract --- requirements. 2. Acceptance of the CONTROL SYSTEM Pre -Commissioning testing must be provided in writing by the ENGINEER before the performance testing may begin. G. Provide all special tools and spare parts, refer to Paragraph 1.15 of this Section, before performance testing commences, suitably wrapped and identified. H. Performance Testing: 1. Complete Pre -commissioning test a minimum of 5 days before the Performance Test. 2. Conduct a thirty -day Performance Test. Substantial Completion: The following conditions be fulfilled before the CONTROL SYSTEM is considered complete: 1. All submittals have been completed and approved. 2. The CONTROL SYSTEM has been calibrated, loop tested and pre - commissioned. 3. The OWNER training has been performed. 4. All required spare parts, expendable supplies, and test equipment have been delivered to the OWNER. 5. The performance test has been successfully completed. 6. All debris associated with installation of instrumentation has been removed. 7. All probes, elements, sample lines, transmitters, tubing, and enclosures have been cleaned and are in like -new condition. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Warrant the CONTROL SYSTEM in accordance with the General Conditions: 1. Provide additional warranty as specified in the individual Division 17 Specifications. 1.11 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Replace or modify equipment, software, and materials that do not achieve design requirements after installation in order to attain compliance with the design requirements: 1. Following replacement or modification, retest the system and perform additional testing to place the complete system in satisfactory operation and obtain compliance acceptance from the ENGINEER 1.12 MAINTENANCE A. Before Substantial Completion, perform all maintenance activities required by any " sections of the Specifications including any calibrations, final adjustments, component replacements or other routine service required before placing equipment or systems in service. B. Furnish all spare parts as required by other sections of the Specifications. C. Provide additional spare parts specified in other sections of Division 17. May 09 17050-20 8205A10 pwJICam ldD= nwrtsl kmVTXTod wat MSAtaSpedficabm$IPM-Sdect/170W (F&Oean) D. Submit all special tools and spare parts, suitably wrapped and identified, before r performance testing commences. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide similar items from a single manufacturer throughout the CONTROL SYSTEM portion of the project. B. Allowable manufacturers are specified in individual instrument and equipment Specifications in other sections of Division 17. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Furnish all materials under this Contract that are new, free from defects, and standard products produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of these devices and that bear all approvals and labels as required by the Specifications. B. Provide materials complying with the applicable industrial standard in accordance with the General Conditions. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Furnish all meters, instruments, and other components that are the most recent field proven models marketed by their manufacturers at the time of submittal of the Shop v Drawings unless otherwise specified to match existing equipment. B. Unless otherwise specified, furnish individual instruments that have a minimum accuracy of ±0.5 percent of full scale and a minimum repeatability of ±0.25 percent of full scale. C. Signal Transmission: 1. Analog Signals: a. Furnish analog measurements and control signals that vary in direct linear proportion to the measured variable, unless otherwise indicated. b. Furnish electrical analog signals outside control panels that are 4 to 20 mA 24 VDC, except as indicated. c. Analog signals within enclosures may be 1 to 5 VDC. d. Electrically or optically isolate all analog signals from other signals. e. All pneumatic signals: 3 to 15 psig. f. Furnish regulated analog signals that are not affected by changes in supply voltage or load resistance within the unit's rating. g. Maintain the total 4 to 20 mA loop impedance to 10 percent below the published value at the loop operating voltage. h. Where necessary, reduce loop impedance by providing current -to -current (1/1) isolation amplifiers for signal re -transmission. D. Discrete Circuit Configuration: 1. Furnish discrete input signals as indicated in the controller hardware specification. Nftmwl� May 09 17050-21 8205A10 pw://Carollo/DocumentslClienUrXIFod Worth/8205At01Specificabons/Pre-Selecd17050 (FS-Clean) a. Dry contacts or TRIAC outputs (with express written approval by the ENGINEER) as needed to coordinate with the field device. b. Provide external terminal block mounted fuse with blown fuse indication for all discrete outputs. 2. Configure discrete control circuits to fail safe, on loss of continuity or loss of power. 3. Alarm contacts: Fail to the alarm condition. 4. Control contacts fail to the inoperative condition.. E. Grounding: 1. Provide control panels with a signal ground bus, isolated from the power ground bus: a. Provide multiple panels in one location with a common point for signal ground bus connection to ground. 2. Single point ground shields and measurement loops at the source panel external terminals, unless otherwise noted, by bonding to the control panel signal ground bus. 3. Provide isolating amplifiers within control panels for field equipment possessing a grounded input or output, except when the panel circuit is galvanically isolated. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Provide flow conditioning devices or other required accessories if necessary to meet the accuracy requirements in the Contract Documents. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide all equipment that is new, free from defects, and standard products produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of these products that bear all approvals and labels as required by the Specifications. B. Arrange with all manufacturers of the equipment and fabricators of panels and cabinets, to allow the OWNER and ENGINEER to inspect and witness the testing of the equipment at the site of fabrication: 1. Equipment includes the cabinets, special control systems, flow measuring devices, and other pertinent systems and devices. C. Factory Testing is specified in Section 17950 and other sections of Divisions 16 and 17. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. The Ozone System Supplier is encouraged to visit the site and examine the premises completely before bidding. It is the Ozone System Supplier's responsibility to be fully familiar with the existing conditions and local requirements and regulations. B. Review the existing site conditions for the various items of equipment in order to determine exact routing and final terminations for all wiring and cables. May 09 17050-22 8205A10 pwj/C�WClfe M[For1 Waft 0WGtSpwficabwsRmSelec07050 (FS-0san) v C. Provide a complete instrumentation and control system: 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Equipment locations shown on the Drawings may change due to variations in equipment size or minor changes made by others during construction: 1. Verify all dimensions as indicated on the Drawings: 2. Actual field conditions govern all final installed locations, distances, and levels. 3. Make minor changes in location of equipment before rough in, as directed by the OWNER or ENGINEER. B. The control system configurations are diagrammatic: 1. The locations of equipment are approximate unless dimensioned. 2. Where Project conditions require make reasonable changes in locations and arrangements. C. Field Instruments Installation: 1. Install field instruments in accordance with the Contract Documents, ANSI/API 550 and 551, and the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Mount field instruments so that they can be easily read, readily approached, and easily serviced, and so they do not restrict access to mechanical equipment: a. Mount field instruments on a pipe stand or local panel, if they are not directly mounted. b. Provide sun shields for all field electronic instruments exposed to direct sunlight: 3. Make connections from rigid conduit systems to field instruments with PVC �r coated flexible conduit: a. Type of flexible conduit required for the area classification: 1) Refer to Section 16050 for area classification. b. Maximum length of 18 inches. 4. Connect field instruments with cable as specified in Division 16, except when the manufacturer requires the use of special cable, or otherwise specified herein: a. Special cable applications shall be in accordance with the NEC. 5. Verify the correctness of each installation: a. Polarity of electric power and signal connections. b. Ensure all process connections are free of leaks. D. Process Sensing Lines and Air Tubing: 1. Install individual tubes parallel and/or perpendicular to and near the surfaces from which they are supported. 2. Provide supports for rigid tubing at intervals of not more than 3 feet. 3. Slope horizontal runs of instrument tubing at a minimum of 1/16th-inch per foot to allow for draining of any condensate. 4. Bends: a. Use proper tool. b. Make bends for parallel lines symmetrical. c. Make bends without deforming or thinning the walls of the tubing. 5. Square -cut and clean all ends of tubing before being inserted in the fittings. 6. Provide bulkhead fittings at all panels requiring pipe and/or tubing entries. 14ME"01 May 09 17050-23 8205A10 pwJlCarollo/DocumenlslClienUMFort Worthl8205A10ISpecificatons/Pre-Selecl/17050 (FS-Clean) 7. Use stainless steel tubing for all piping hard piped from the air header, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or not compatible with the fluids or atmosphere in the area: a. Use flexible connections only on moving equipment and under the constraint that the length shall be less than 1.5 times maximum travel of the equipment. E. Conduit, Cables, and Field Wiring: 1. Provide all CONTROL SYSTEM equipment cables, and process LAN communication networks under Division 17. 2. Provide terminations and wire identification as specified in Division 16. 3. Protect all wiring from sharp edges and corners. 4. Provide all conduits, fittings, boxes, etc. in accordance with all the requirements of Division 16. F. Equipment Tie -Downs: 1. Anchor all instruments, control panels, and equipment by methods that comply with seismic and wind bracing requirements, which apply to the site. 2. All control panels shall be permanently mounted and tied down to structures. G. Instrument Tagging: 1. Refer to Section 16075. 2. Provide all field -mounted instruments with nameplates: a. Nameplates engraved with the instrument's full tag number as indicated on the Drawings: 1) Affix tags with stainless steel wire fasteners. 3. Provide all back of panel instruments with nameplates: a. Engraved with the instrument's full tag number as indicated on the Drawings: 4. Provide all front of panel instruments with a nameplate: a. Engraving to include the instrument's full tag number and service description. b. Secure nameplates to the panel with stainless steel screws. c. Use an approved adhesive if screws would violate the NEMA or other ratings of the enclosure. H. Cable and Conductor Termination: 1. Terminate all cables and conductors on terminal blocks. 2. Terminal Block Enclosures: a. Suitable for the area classification as specified in Section 16050. Surge Protection: 1. Provide outdoor field instrument loops with voltage surge protection units installed on the instruments. 2. Individually fuse each 4-20 mA DC loop with a 1/16-ampere fuse between power supplies and receiver surge protectors. 3. Provide voltage surge protection for 4 wire transmitters and analyzers: a. Protect both power source and signal loop. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Provide any assistance necessary to support inspection activities. May 09 17050-24 8205A10 pwJ/Cmk/DocumenWOienVfX/Fat Wath1820 ID/Sped5cabw&Pre.SoWI7050 (FS-(dean) 0 ..� 2. ENGINEER inspections may include the following: a. Inspect equipment and materials for physical damage. b. Inspect installation for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. c. Inspect installation for obstructions and adequate clearances around equipment. d. Inspect equipment installation for proper leveling, alignment, anchorage, ` and assembly. e. Inspect equipment nameplate data to verify compliance with design requirements. f. Inspect cable terminations. g. Inspect/witness instrument calibrations/verifications. 3. Inspection activities conducted during construction do not satisfy inspection requirements outlined in Section 17950. B. Field Testing is specified in Section 17950. Additional general requirements are specified in Section 01650. C. Installation Supervision: 1. Ensure that the entire CONTROL SYSTEM is installed in a proper and satisfactory manner. At a minimum, the Ozone System Supplier shall provide the following services: a. Installation Resources: b. Provide technical assistance to installation personnel by telephone: c. Furnish installation personnel with at least one copy of the approved submittals, including all installation details. d. Periodic inspections during the construction period. e. A complete check of the completed installation to ensure that it is in conformance with the requirements of the equipment manufacturer and the Contract Documents. f. Field verify accuracy and calibration of all instruments. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Control Valves: 1. Stroke all control valves, cylinders, drives and connecting linkages from the control system as well as local control devices and adjust to verify proper control action, hand switch action, limit switch settings, torque settings, remote control actions, and remote feedback of valve status and position. 2. Check control valve actions and positioner settings with the valves in place to ensure that no changes have occurred since the bench calibration. B. Make all revisions necessary to the control system software. It is understood that the Ozone System supplier knows and agrees that changes will be required in the control system software during the Factory Acceptance Tests, the Pre - Commissioning, Performance Testing, Start-up and during the warranty period: 3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Demonstration requirements are specified in Section 17950. B. Training: ' 1. General: ..W� May 09 17050-25 8205A10 pw:IlCarollolDocumentslCGenVTX/Fort Wort4l8205A101SpecificabonslPre-SelecU17050 (FS•Clean) a. Provide system maintenance and operator training courses for all the instrumentation, control systems furnished. b. Conduct all training at the Project Site unless another location is approved by the ENGINEER and OWNER: 1) Include instruction on the use of all maintenance equipment and special tools provided under the contract. Y c. Tailor training classes to the specific needs of the class participants: 1) Develop separate courses for operators, maintenance staff, and supervisors: a) The specific categories and number of personnel in each category are identified below. 2) Furnish training courses that are a combination of classroom and hands-on training: a) To the greatest extent possible, utilize components from the OWNER's CONTROL SYSTEM system. b) Limit classes that include extensive hands-on activities to a maximum of 5 students per class. 3) Present the minimum number of sessions, specified in Table 17050- 3.10-T1, for each course in order to satisfy class size restrictions and limitations scheduling OWNER staff. 4) Furnish additional sessions if required to accommodate the total number of personnel identified for each course. d. Temporarily install a test PLC and 2 user workstations in the training area for SCADA system training classes conducted on -site: 1) Configure the workstations as full -function operator stations during the training classes. 2) Connect these components with a LAN in order to fully simulate system operation. e. Schedule individual training classes with the OWNER at least 3 weeks before the start of the class: 1) Schedule all training classes Monday - Friday between 7:30 AM and 3:30 PM. 2) Each individual daily training session, travel time excluded: a) Minimum duration of 4 hours_ b) Maximum duration of 7 hours. c) Breaks scheduled at least every 90 minutes and one hour for lunch. 3) Complete training for maintenance personnel 90-days before Performance Testing. 4) Complete operator training classes before startup of the SCADA system, or any part of it: a) Refer to Paragraph 1.09 of this Section. 5) Schedule follow-up training classes after SCADA startup on a schedule determined by the OWNER. f. Furnish highly qualified training instructors for technical training with demonstrated expertise in not only control system functionality but also professional training techniques: 1) Instructors are subject to the approval of the ENGINEER. 2) Furnish training instructors thoroughly familiar with the CONTROL SYSTEM system, who are members of the SCADA system implementation team. May 09 17050-26 8205A10 pwJ/Caroodoocu wts0ent rffod wornM5A1mspetaraons/PwSe49d170W (Fs Ivan) 3) One of the individuals conducting system training course must have been responsible for the majority of the programming that was performed for the instrumentation and control system. 2. Training Manuals and Materials: a. Furnish training manuals and other materials for training courses. b. Manuals are to be professionally written to present the course material in a format that is easy to comprehend. c. The manuals are to serve as teaching aids during presentation of the training classes. d. Manuals are to serve as reference material after the training has been completed. Minimum Personnel Course (Estimated Minimum Length In Number Number Course Title hours of Students) of Sessions System Overview 4 10 1 Operator Training - Basic 24 5 2 Operator Training - Advanced 16 5 2 PLC Hardware 8 4 1 PLC Software 8 4 1 HMI Hardware and Software I 4 4 1 Instrument Training 16 4 1 3. Training Course Requirements: a. System Overview Training: 1) Furnish training courses that give the OWNER'S supervisory level personnel an overview of all elements of the CONTROL SYSTEM System, that focus on the overall functional aspect of elements of the control system and provide an understanding of the interaction of the various components. b. Operator Training: 1) Furnish training courses that instruct system operators in the efficient operation of all aspects of the CONTROL SYSTEM that include not only the general operation of the control system but also the operation of specific system features. 2) Operator's Training shall include: a) Control system overview:: (1) Logging ON and OFF the system (2) Description of the security and access system equipment functions, b) Display navigation, overview, and types of displays. c) Process and equipment monitoring and control: basic principles and operation. d) . e) Alarm subsystem. f) Trending: provide a thorough session on how to use all trending functions. g) Reports: How to access, print, and review content. h) Control strategies: present an average 15-minute review of each control strategy, including a hands-on demonstration of screens and operator functions for each. May 09 17050-27 pwa/Carollo/Documents/ClienUTXJFort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Select/17050 (FS-Clean) 8205A10 i) Instruction on the use of all operational functionality alarm logging, trending, displays, database, reports, and control software developed for the project and incorporated in the installed CONTROL SYSTEM System. c. PLC Hardware Training: 1) Furnish training on PLC hardware and on related components, including battery backup equipment, UPSs, HMI hardware, control circuits, and analog circuits. 2) Furnish training on PLC hardware principles, product features, proper installation, operation, troubleshooting, and maintenance. 3) PLC training may be provided by manufacturer's certified trainers. d. PLC Software Training: 1) Furnish training on PLC software. 2) Two types of training are required, basic and project -specific: a) Basic PLC software training covers the principles of PLC programming and the specific features and function of the PLC products used on this project, provided by one of the PLC Manufacturer's certified trainers. b) Project -specific PLC software training covers the programming conventions, new standardized software modules, specific control strategy programs, and documentation created for the work performed under this Contract. e. HMI Hardware and Software Training: 1) Provide the following: a) Overview of hardware and firmware, including starting, stopping, and PLC interface. b) Configuration of tag database. c) Creating, editing, and saving display screens. d) Troubleshooting. f. Follow-up Training: 1) Provide a series of on -site follow-up training classes beginning after startup of the CONTROL SYSTEM system. The intent for these classes is to provide the OWNER's personnel the opportunity for a review and "refresher" of the training topics and material after they have had some experience using the system. 2) Mutually schedule and develop the content of these classes with the OWNER no later than 1 month before the beginning of the first session: a) Schedule at the OWNER's discretion on non-consecutive days spaced out over the start-up and warranty period. g. Instrumentation Training: 1) Furnish training covering all instruments and control panels. 2) Furnish the specified quantity of training, allocated to cover new instruments and hardwired controls as described herein and specifically determined in the approved Training Plan. 3) Train maintenance staff in the use, cleaning, calibration, maintenance, and troubleshooting of all the instruments furnished within this project. 4) Furnish training on the operation of new hardwired controls. 4. Recording training Sessions: ' a. Record all training. ' b. Furnish Digital Video Disk (DVD) format. *40ple May 09 17050-28 8205A10 pw://CarollolDocumenWClienVTX/FoA Worthl8205A10/Specifcations/PreSelecVl7o50 (FS•Clean) c. These disks become the property of the OWNER and cover, in detail, the • training for the specific hardware and software of all the systems provided for the project. d. Provide all the necessary cameras and recording equipment. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect all Work from damage or degradation until date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION May 09 17050-29 8205A10 pw:I/Carollo/Documents/ClionVTX/Fort Worth/8205A10ISpecificabons/Pre-SelecVI7050 (FS-Clean) This Page Intentionally Left Blank Ua May 09 17050-30 8205A10 pwJ]CwdWWamenlslUwVrXIFod Wa #d8205AlVI peciflcdw&Pm-Sektfl7050 (FS-Clean) SECTION 17110 OZONE SYSTEM CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Common control functions and control descriptions. B. The control descriptions that follow shall be implemented in the programmable logic controllers (PLCs) provided by the Ozone System Supplier. C. Some but not all PLC control logic is described in this Section. The Ozone System Supplier shall be responsible for the programming of any logic not included herein that is required for safety or proper operation of the Supplier provided equipment. 1.02 COMMON CONTROL FUNCTIONS A. Alarms: 1. Discrepancy Alarms: Each device capable of being controlled by the DCS in REMOTE mode shall have a discrepancy alarm which shall be displayed at the DCS workstations. The discrepancy alarms shall be derived by the PLC as follows: a. Device is commanded to start, and the starter auxiliary contact or VFD does not echo the command after an operator -adjustable time delay. b. Device is commanded to stop, and the starter auxiliary contact or VFD does not echo the command after an operator -adjustable time delay. c. Device is commanded to open, and the open limit switch does not echo the opened condition after an operator -adjustable time delay. An initial setting of two times the normal full travel time shall be used. d. Device is commanded to close, and the closed limit switch does not echo the closed condition after an operator -adjustable time delay. An initial setting of two times the normal full travel time shall be used. e. For modulating valves, the alarm shall activate if the valve position is not within an operator -adjustable percent of scale of the set -point position after an operator -adjustable time delay. An initial setting of 3 percent of scale shall be used. f. The discrepancy alarms shall only be active if the LOCAL/REMOTE selector switch at the device is in REMOTE mode. g. Once a discrepancy alarm occurs, the PLC shall terminate the command to the device. The command to the device can not be reinitiated until the discrepancy alarm is acknowledged by the operator from the OIS or HMI graphic screen. 2. Within program logic, configure each alarm to eliminate nuisance alarms that would otherwise activate when equipment is not in operation. For example, a low flow alarm on a pump discharge shall not be activated if the pump is off. 3. All alarms derived in program logic, whether from analog measurements, discrete inputs, or discrepancy alarms, shall have an operator -adjustable proving timer to limit nuisance alarms. The timer shall start when an alarm May 09 17110-1 8205A10 pwJ/Carollo/Documents/Client/TX/For1 Worth/8205A101Specirications/Pre-SelecVl7110 (FSClean) condition is first detected, and shall only activate the alarm after the timer has -�- expired. If the alarm condition clears while the timer is running, the timer shall be reset, and the alarm shall not be activated. Alarms Based on Analog Measurements Shall be Derived as Follows: a. The PLC shall derive alarms by comparing the process measurement to an operator -adjustable set point. _ B. Flow Totalizers: Each liquid flow rate transmitted to the PLC shall have a flow total calculated by the PLC as follows: 1. The current day's total flow shall be calculated by the PLC and displayed at the OIS and HMI. 2. These flow totals shall be calculated and displayed even if they are not shown on the P&IDs (Process and Instrumentation Drawings). C. PID Control Algorithms: 1. Each PID control algorithm shall have a faceplate that shall be displayed at the OIS and HMI. The Face Plate Shall Have the Following Functions: a. Display process variable. b. Display set point. c. Display output. d. Allow for operator selection of Automatic or Manual control of output. e. Under manual control of output allow the operator to enter the desired output value. f. Allow for input of the three PID tuning parameters. 2. The PID algorithm shall include set point and output tracking to provide bumpless control when switching between control modes. D. Data Validation: 1. The OIS and HMI graphic screens shall accept manually -entered set point data only if it is within valid process range. 2. The OIS and NMI shall require low -low set point to be lower than a low set point, high -high set point higher than a high set point, etc. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. The following definitions shall apply throughout this specification section: 1. DCS: Distributed Control System, consisting of PLCs and HMIs (Human - Machine Interfaces) computers. 2. HMI: Human Machine Interface. 3. OIS: Operator Interface Station. Computer running HSQ MISER human machine interface (HMI) software. 4. GOX: Gaseous (vaporized) oxygen. 5. LOX: Liquid Oxygen. 6. MCC: Motor Control Center. 7. PID: Proportional, integral, derivative controller used for feedback control. 8. PLC: Programmable Logic Controller. 9. PR: Performance Ratio. 1.04 PROGRAMMING RESPONSIBILITY A. All graphic screens and logic resident in operator interface stations shall be programmed by HSQ Technology. May 09 17110-2 8205A10 pwJCaD1aDoamentslC5enffffodwamr 5Alaspecifica6mis/Pr&Sdecu17110(FS-Oean) ,"mole B. All logic resident in NH-PLC-G-04, NH-PLC-G-05, NH-HMI-G-19, NH-PLC-Z-16, NH-PLC-Z-46, NH-PLC-Z-47, NH-HMI-Z-17, NH-HMI-Z-47 and NH-HMI-Z-56 shall be programmed by the Ozone System Supplier. NH-PLC-G-04 and NH-PLC-G-05 are hot -standby redundant PLC processors located in the Ozone Generation Building PLC Panel. C. The Ozone Generation Building PLC system human machine interface (NH-HMI-G- 19) shall be programmed to serve as a back-up to the operator interface station NH- OIS-G-02. NH-HMI-G-19 shall provide the same ozone system data and control setpoints as NH-OIS-G-02. In the event of a communications or DCS failure, the operator shall have full control of the ozone system through NH-HMI-G-19. D. Data transfer via peer -to -peer communications will be required between the existing HSQ Technology system and the PLCs provided by the Ozone System Supplier. The minimum requirements for this data transfer are described in this specification section. HSQ Technology will be responsible for coordinating this data transfer with the Ozone System Supplier. Ozone System Supplier shall coordinate this data transfer with HSQ Technology. PART PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION v 3.01 LOX STORAGE AND VAPORIZATION A. Summary: 1. The equipment and instrumentation described in this Article will be supplied by the Contractor. The Ozone System Supplier shall provide the programming for this equipment as described herein. Tag numbers shown herein are preliminary and are subject to change. 2. General Description: a. Two LOX tanks will be provided. b. Liquid oxygen is evaporated in three static ambient vaporizers; typically one will be in service, one in defrost and one in stand-by. Each ambient vaporizer is able to handle 100% of the design oxygen flow. Each vaporizer consists of the vaporizer itself and a motorized outlet valve. c. Two redundant oxygen particulate filters will be provided. B. Field Controls and Instrumentation: 1. Instrumentation: a. LOX Storage Tank No. 1 Level Transmitter. (NH-LXTK01-L101) b. LOX Storage Tank No. 2 Level Transmitter. (NH-LXTK02-L101) c. LOX Storage Tank No. 1 High Pressure Switch. (NH-LXTK01-PH01) d. LOX Storage Tank No. 2 High Pressure Switch. (NH-LXTK02-PH01) e. Vaporizer Outlet GOX Temperature Transmitter. (NH-GX-T101) f. GOX Particulate Filter No. 1 Differential Pressure Transmitter. (NH- GXFLT01-DP01) g. GOX Particulate Filter No. 2 Differential Pressure Transmitter. (NH- GXFLT02-DP01) May 09 17110-3 8205A10 pwl/Carollo/Documents/ClienUMFort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecYl7110 (FS-Clean) h. Pressure Regulating Valve Outlet GOX Pressure Transmitter. (NH-GX- P101) i. GOX Dew Point Analyzer. (NH-GX-DPT01). 2. Final Control Elements: a. LOX Vaporizer No. 1 Outlet Valve. (NH-GX-VAP01-BFV) b. LOX Vaporizer No. 2 Outlet Valve. (NH-GX-VAP02-BFV) c. LOX Vaporizer No. 3 Outlet Valve. (NH-GX-VAP03-BFV) 3. Local Control Devices: a. The LOX vaporizer outlet valves are each equipped with Local/Off/Remote selector at the valve actuator. b. The LOX vaporizer outlet valves are each equipped with Open/Close controls at the valve actuator. 4. Local Process Indicators and Alarms: a. None. 5. Hard -wired Interlocks: a. LOX vaporizer outlet valves shall close upon activation of the ozone system emergency shutdown circuit or the plant power failure shutdown circuit. C. P&ID Drawing Number: In General Contract Drawing Set D. PLC/SCADA Monitoring and Control Functions: 1. Monitoring Signals: a. LOX storage tank level. (2) b. LOX vaporizer outlet valves. (3) 1) Open status. 2) Closed status. 3) Remote mode status. c. Vaporizer outlet GOX temperature. d. GOX particulate filter differential pressure. (2) e. Pressure regulating valve outlet GOX pressure. f. GOX dew point. 2. Control Signals: a. LOX vaporizer outlet valves. (3) 1) Open command. 2) Close command. 3. Manual Control. a. The LOX vaporizer outlet valves may be manually opened and closed from the SCADA graphic screen. 4. Automatic Control. a. The operator shall have the option to turn on or off the "defrosting" sequence. There are two modes of automatic sequence control for the vaporizers. One is based on a time delay setpoint and the other is based on a rotation command in SCADA. Any single vaporizer unit alarm (low vaporizer outlet GOX temperature) shall also trigger a rotation. LOX vaporizer outlet valves must be in remote to enable the automatic sequence. b. If there is no unit shutdown alarm and all LOX Vaporizer discharge valves are in remote, the SCADA graphic screen shall indicate that the LOX system is in AUTO READY. The LOX system at this point shall implement the automatic rotation logic. The operator shall have the option to change the automatic sequence to MANUAL if the operator decides to do the May 09 17110-4 8205A10 pw-J1Cwok0ocumenWCbenVT)VFort Worthl82 I(YSpecficabon&Pre-SeleWI7110 (FS-Clean) vaporizer operational rotation in manual by activating a momentary pushbutton on the SCADA GRAPHIC SCREEN. c. Any sequence mode shall involve a rotation in operation between the three vaporizers: one vaporizer is in SERVICE and its discharge valve is open; one vaporizer is in DEFROST and its discharge valve is closed; and one vaporizer is in STANDBY and its discharge valve is closed. The operator shall designate which of the three vaporizers is in STANDBY mode from the SCADA GRAPHIC SCREEN. The operator shall also designate which of the remaining two vaporizers is to start as the SERVICE vaporizer. Upon system start-up, the rotation sequence first opens the SERVICE vaporizer's discharge valve. After the SERVICE vaporizer's initial duty, the rotation sequence first opens the DEFROST vaporizer's discharge valve and after the valve opens, a time delay shall close the previous SERVICE vaporizer's discharge valve and it state changes to DEFROST. The status then changes between the vaporizers; the SERVICE unit becomes the DEFROST unit and the DEFROST one becomes the SERVICE vaporizer. The following are events and control that shall enable a rotation to occur: 1) TIME CONTROL — a retentive timer - adjustable from 0 to 24 hours, associated with an operator entered time setpoint shall be used as a means of shifting operation between vaporizers. When the preset time has elapsed, a rotation occurs. This feature is only available if the LOX system control is on AUTO and is the default rotation control for the vaporizer discharge valves. 2) MANUAL CONTROL — there shall also be an option in SCADA to activate a MANUAL ROTATION command. This shall be available only if the LOX System control is changed to MANUAL on the SCADA GRAPHIC SCREEN. 3) VAPORIZER UNIT SHUTDOWN - an existing temperature transmitter located downstream of the vaporizers shall send a signal to the control system. Upon reaching a low temperature set point, the Ozone System Area Control Panel PLC shall automatically initiate a rotation to the DEFROST vaporizer and provide an alarm. This feature shall be only available if the LOX system control is on AUTO. 5. Alarms: a. LOX tank high level. (2) b. LOX tank low level. (2) c. LOX tank high pressure. (2) d. Vaporizer outlet GOX low temperature. e. Oxygen particulate filter high differential pressure. (2) f. Pressure reducing valve outlet GOX high pressure. g. GOX high dew point. h. GOX high -high dew point. 6. Software interlocks: None. E. Calculations: 1. Calculate the volume of oxygen in gallons for each LOX tank based on the level of liquid in the horizontal cylinder of the tank. F. Operator Functions from SCADA Screens: 1. Initial LOX vaporizer selection for SERVICE and STANDBY mode in auto sequence. ..� May 09 17110-5 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienUTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/SpecificaGons/PreSelecU17110 (FS-Clean) 2. LOX vaporizer outlet valves: (3) a. Manual/auto selection. b. Open/Close controls. 3. LOX tank high level alarm set point. (2) 4. LOX tank low level alarm set point. (2) 5. LOX tank high pressure alarm set point. (2) 6. Vaporizer outlet GOX low temperature alarm set point. 7. Oxygen particulate filter high differential pressure alarm set point. (2) 8. Pressure reducing valve outlet GOX high pressure alarm set point. 9. GOX high dew point alarm set point. 10. GOX high -high dew point alarm set point. 3.02 NITROGEN GENERATOR CONTROL DESCRIPTION A. Summary 1. This control description applies to the nitrogen generator. The addition of small amounts of nitrogen into the GOX feed line can improve the performance of the ozone generators. The nitrogen generator shall be equipped with a local control panel. 2. Two oil -free, reciprocating compressors (one SERVICE and one STANDBY) are provided to compress the air. An air receiver holds the compressed air and controls the operation of the compressors. Air flows from the receiver to a two desiccant dryers (one SERVICE and one STANDBY). Dried air is analyzed in a dew point analyzer prior to introduction into the gaseous oxygen stream. A flow controller regulates the nitrogen flow into the gaseous oxygen stream. B. Field Controls and Instrumentation: 1. Instrumentation: a. Nitrogen Generator Dew Point Analyzer. (NH-GOX-AT02) b. Nitrogen Generator Flow Meter with Integral Flow Control Valve. (NH- GOX-FC01) c. Nitrogen Generators Air Receiver Tank Pressure Gauge. (NH-GOX- PG01) d. Nitrogen Generators Air Receiver Tank High Pressure Switch. (NH-GOX- PH01) e. Nitrogen Generators Air Receiver Tank High -High Pressure Switch. (NH- GOX-PH02) f. Nitrogen Generators Air Receiver Tank Low Pressure Switch" (NH-GOX- PL01) g. Nitrogen Generators Air Receiver Tank Low -Low Pressure Switch. (NH- GOX-PL02) 2. Final Control Elements: a. Nitrogen Generator Compressor No. 1. (NH-GOX-CP01) b. Nitrogen Generator Compressor No. 2. (NH-GOX-CP02) c. Nitrogen Generator Desiccant Dryer No. 1. (NH-GOX-DY01) d. Nitrogen Generator Desiccant Dryer No. 2. (NH-GOX-DY02) e. Nitrogen Generator Coalescing Filter Drain Solenoid Valve No. 1. (NH- GOX-VL11) f. Nitrogen Generator Coalescing Filter Drain Solenoid Valve No. 2. (NH- GOX-VL12) 3" Local Control Devices: May 09 17110-6 8205A10 p+J/C&"o M=nenWClienVMFdtWo#A205A1W$pK*mtionsPre-Sded1l7110(FS 18w) a. The nitrogen generation system is equipped with a local control panel that includes the following local control devices: Hand/Off/Auto selector for each of the nitrogen generator compressors. 4. Local Process Indicators and Alarms: a. The nitrogen generation system local control panel includes the following local process indicators and alarms. ' 1) Running status light for each of the nitrogen generator compressors. 2) Overload alarm light for each of the nitrogen generator compressors. 3) Air receiver tank high -high pressure alarm light. 4) Air receiver tank low -low pressure alarm light. 5) On status light for each of the nitrogen generator desiccant dryers. 5. Hardwired Interlocks: a. The nitrogen generator compressors shut down on motor overload. b. The nitrogen generator compressors shut down on high dew point. c. One of the compressors starts on receiver tank low pressure and stops on receiver tank high pressure. The compressors automatically alternate starts. C. P&ID Drawing Number: 7-N-104. D. PLC/SCADA Monitoring and Control Functions: 1. Monitoring Signals: a. Nitrogen Generator Compressors. (2) 1) Running status. b. Nitrogen Generator Desiccant Dryers. (2) 1) On status. c. Nitrogen generator dew point. *Ift,.r d. Nitrogen generator flow rate. 2. Control Signals: a. Nitrogen Generator Coalescing Filter Drain Solenoid Valves. (2) 1) Open command. b. Nitrogen generator flow control set point. 3. Manual Control. a. The flow meter with integral control valve may be given a manual flow set point. 4. Automatic Control. a. The nitrogen generation system flow rate shall be automatically controlled by the PLC based on flow -paced set point. b. The operator enters a Flow Ratio set point (scfm nitrogen/scfm total GOX flow). c. The PLC shall automatically modulate the flow meter with integral control valve to maintain the Flow Ratio set point. d. The PLC shall automatically open the coalescing filter drain valve for an `On' desiccant dryer for an operator entered timed duration and at an - operator entered time set frequency. _ 5. Alarms: a. Compressor overload. (2) b. Receiver tank high -high pressure. c. Receiver tank low -low pressure. d. High dew point. 6. Software interlocks: None. May 09 17110-7 8205A10 pw:UCarollo/DocumentsrClient/ WFoO Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecU17110 (FS-Clean) E. Calculations: None. F. Operator Functions from SCADA Screens: 1. Flow meter with integral control valve Auto/Manual selection. 2. Flow meter with integral control valve manual flow rate set point. 3. Nitrogen generation system Flow Ratio set point. 4. Coalescing filter drain valve time duration and frequency set points. 5. High dew point alarm set point. 3.03 OZONE GENERATORS A. Summary: 1. Three new ozone generators are being provided to serve both the North and South Holly Water Treatment Plants. These generators will be manifolded so that any generator can serve any plant. During low ozone production periods, one generator may serve both plants. 2. The cooling water control descriptions herein are written around an open -loop cooling water system. If a closed -loop cooling system is required as shown in P&IDs 7-N-106, 7-N-108 and 7-N-110, then the Ozone System Supplier shall develop the additional control descriptions as required for a fully -functional and operational cooling water system. The control descriptions herein for the open - loop cooling system shall be incorporated into the open -loop portion of the closed -loop cooling system, if provided. 3. Each ozone generator will be provided with a dedicated power supply. Each power supply will be provided with a PLC and HMI. B. Field Controls and Instrumentation: 1. Instrumentation: a. Ozone Generator No. 1 GOX Pressure Indicator (NH-OZ01-PG01) b. Ozone Generator No. 2 GOX Pressure Indicator (NH-OZ02-PG01) c. Ozone Generator No. 3 GOX Pressure Indicator (NH-OZ03-PG01) d. Ozone Generator No. 1 High Range GOX Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ01- FT01 A) e. Ozone Generator No. 2 High Range GOX Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ02- FT01 A) f. Ozone Generator No. 3 High Range GOX Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ03- FT01 A) g. Ozone Generator No. 1 Low Range GOX Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ01- FT01 B) h. Ozone Generator No. 2 Low Range GOX Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ02- FT01 B) i. Ozone Generator No. 3 Low Range GOX Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ03- FT01B) j. Ozone Generator No. 1 GOX Pressure Transmitter (NH-OZ01-PT01) k. Ozone Generator No. 2 GOX Pressure Transmitter (NH-OZ02-PT01) I. Ozone Generator No. 3 GOX Pressure Transmitter (NH-OZ03-PT01) m. Ozone Generator No. 1 GOX Temperature Transmitter (NH-OZ01-TT03) n. Ozone Generator No. 2 GOX Temperature Transmitter (NH-OZ02-TT03) o. Ozone Generator No. 3 GOX Temperature Transmitter (NH-OZ03-TT03) p. Ozone Generator No. 1 Product Gas Pressure Indicator (NH-OZ01-PG03) q. Ozone Generator No. 2 Product Gas Pressure Indicator (NH-OZ02-PG03) r. Ozone Generator No. 3 Product Gas Pressure Indicator (NH-OZ03-PG03) May 09 17110-8 8205A10 pwi/CamkMwxrn-ntsICAW MFat WahW5AtU5peaGcakonslPmSeleWl7110 (FS-Clean) s. Ozone Generator No. 1 Product Gas High Pressure Switch (NH-OZ01- PH01) t. Ozone Generator No. 2 Product Gas High Pressure Switch (NH-OZ02- PH01) u. Ozone Generator No. 3 Product Gas High Pressure Switch (NH-OZ03- PH01) v. Ozone Generator No. 1 Product Gas Low Pressure Switch (NH-OZ01- PL01) w. Ozone Generator No. 2 Product Gas Low Pressure Switch (NH-OZ02- PL01) x. Ozone Generator No. 3 Product Gas Low Pressure Switch (NH-OZ03- PL01) y. Ozone Generator No. 1 Product Gas Temperature Indicator (NH-OZ01- TG01) z. Ozone Generator No. 2 Product Gas Temperature Indicator (NH-OZ02- TG01) aa. Ozone Generator No. 3 Product Gas Temperature Indicator (NH-OZ03- TG01) bb. Ozone Generator No. 1 Product Gas High Temperature Switch (NH- OZ01-TH01) cc. Ozone Generator No. 2 Product Gas High Temperature Switch (NH- OZ02-TH01) dd. Ozone Generator No. 3 Product Gas High Temperature Switch (NH- OZ03-TH01) ee. Ozone Generator No. 1 Product Gas Ozone Concentration Analyzer (NH- OZ01-AT01) ff. Ozone Generator No. 2 Product Gas Ozone Concentration Analyzer (NH- OZ02-AT01) gg. Ozone Generator No. 3 Product Gas Ozone Concentration Analyzer (NH- OZ03-AT01) hh. Ozone Generator No. 1 Product Gas Pressure Indicator (NH-OZ01-PG04) ii. Ozone Generator No. 2 Product Gas Pressure Indicator (NH-OZ02-PG04) jj. Ozone Generator No. 3 Product Gas Pressure Indicator (NH-OZ03-PG04) kk. Ozone Generator No. 1 Cooling Water Inlet Pressure Indicator (NH-OZ01- PG02) II. Ozone Generator No. 2 Cooling Water Inlet Pressure Indicator (NH-OZ02- PG02) mm. Ozone Generator No. 3 Cooling Water Inlet Pressure Indicator (NH-OZ03- PG02) nn. Ozone Generator No. 1 Cooling Water Inlet Temperature Transmitter (N H-OZ01-TT01) oo. Ozone Generator No. 2 Cooling Water Inlet Temperature Transmitter (N H-OZ02-TT01) pp. Ozone Generator No. 3 Cooling Water Inlet Temperature Transmitter (N H-OZ03-TT01) qq. Ozone Generator No. 1 Cooling Water Inlet Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ01- FT03) rr. Ozone Generator No. 2 Cooling Water Inlet Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ02- FT03) ss. Ozone Generator No. 3 Cooling Water Inlet Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ03- FT03) May 09 17110-9 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienUMFort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecU17110 (FS-Clean) ft. Ozone Generator No. 1 Cooling Water Outlet Temperature Transmitter (N H-OZ01-TT02) uu. Ozone Generator No. 2 Cooling Water Outlet Temperature Transmitter (NH-OZ02-TT02) vv. Ozone Generator No. 3 Cooling Water Outlet Temperature Transmitter (NH-OZ03-TT02) ww. Ozone Generator No. 1 PSU Cooling Water Inlet Flow Indicator (NH- OZ01-F101) xx. Ozone Generator No. 2 PSU Cooling Water Inlet Flow Indicator (NH- OZ02-F101) yy. Ozone Generator No. 3 PSU Cooling Water Inlet Flow Indicator (NH- OZ03-FI01) 2. Final Control Elements: a. Ozone Generator No. 1 GOX Inlet Valve (NH-OZ01-VL05) b. Ozone Generator No. 2 GOX Inlet Valve (NH-OZ02-VL05) c. Ozone Generator No. 3 GOX Inlet Valve (NH-OZ03-VL05) d. Ozone Generator No. 1 Ozone Flow Control Valve (NH-OZ01-VL02) e. Ozone Generator No. 2 Ozone Flow Control Valve (NH-OZ02-VL02) f. Ozone Generator No. 3 Ozone Flow Control Valve (NH-OZ03-VL02) g. Ozone Generator No. 1 Cooling Water Inlet Valve (NH-OZ01-VL01) h. Ozone Generator No. 2 Cooling Water Inlet Valve (NH-OZ02-VL01) i. Ozone Generator No. 3 Cooling Water Inlet Valve (NH-OZ03-VL01) 3. Local Control Devices: a. The ozone generator GOX inlet, ozone flow control and cooling water inlet valves are each equipped with Local/Off/Remote selector at the valve actuator. b. The ozone generator cooling water, GOX flow, and ozone flow control valves are each equipped with Open/Stop/Close controls at the valve actuator. c. Each ozone generator power supply local control panel is equipped with a dedicated PLC and panel -mounted HMI. From the HMI, the operator may select "LOCAL" or "REMOTE" control mode. d. The ozone generator power supply local control panel shall control the solenoid valve on each generator's power supply cooling water inlet line. 4. Local Process Indicators and Alarms: a. Those specified for the power supply in Section 11264C. 5. Hard -wired Interlocks: a. Interlocks internal to the power supply as specified in Section 11264C and required by the Ozone System Supplier. b. The on-line ozone generators shall ramp to zero ozone production upon activation of the ozone system emergency shutdown circuit. C. P&ID Drawing Numbers: 7-N-105, 7-N-107, and 7-N-109_ D. PLC/SCADA Monitoring and Control Functions: 1. Monitoring Signals: a. Ozone generator GOX inlet valves (3) 1) Valve position 2) Open status 3) Closed status 4) Remote mode status b. Ozone generator ozone flow control valves (3) May 09 17110-10 8205A10 pwJ1CardbDDa me WCknV XlFort WortW82 101SpecficabonslPmSdecU17110 (FS-Clean) �..i 1) Valve position 2) Open status 3) Closed status 4) Remote mode status c. Ozone generator cooling water inlet valves (3) 1) Valve position 2) Open status 3) Closed status 4) Remote mode status d. Ozone generator high range GOX flow (3) e. Ozone generator low range GOX flow (3) f. Ozone generator GOX pressure (3) g. Ozone generator GOX temperature (3) h. Ozone generator product gas ozone concentration (3) i. Ozone generator cooling water inlet temperature (3) j. Ozone generator cooling water flow (3) k. Ozone generator cooling water outlet temperature (3) I. Ozone generator power supply run status (3) m. Ozone generator shut -down status (3) n. Ozone generator power supply power input (3) 2. Control Signals: a. Ozone generator GOX inlet valve (3) 1) Position control b. Ozone generator ozone flow control valve (3) 1) Position control c. Ozone generator cooling water inlet valves (3) 1) Position control d. Ozone generator on/off control (3) e. Ozone generator power input set point (3) 3. Manual Control. a. The GOX inlet valves, the ozone flow control valves, and the cooling water inlet valves shall be capable of being manually positioned from the HMI or SCADA screens. b. The ozone generator shall be capable of being manually started and stopped from the HMI or SCADA screens. c. The ozone generator power set point shall be manually selectable from the HMI or SCADA screen. 4. Automatic Control. a. Ozone Generator Inlet Oxygen Pressure Control 1) The oxygen gas pressure control maintains pressure entering each ozone generator while in operation. The GOX inlet valve is modulated based on an operator entered adjustable set point pressure. 2) A PID control algorithm shall be programmed in the ozone generator individual PLC control logic. The set point for the PID algorithm shall ` be the inlet pressure set point from the main ozone control system. The process variable for the PID shall be the ozone generator GOX inlet pressure. The controlled variable of the PID shall be the position input to the GOX inlet valve. 3) In ozone generator local mode, the operator shall have the option to manually enter the inlet oxygen pressure setpoint (SP) at the ozone generator HMI. In Auto SCADA mode, the ozone generator PLC shall May 09 17110-11 8205A10 pwJtCarollo/Documents/ClienVTX/Fort Wortht8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecU17110 (FS-Clean( use a pressure setpoint from the Ozone System Area Control Panel PLC and identical to the pressure setpoint for all other online ozone generators. The ozone generator Manual/Auto pressure selector mode shall be a selection on the ozone generator HMI screen. b. Ozone Generator Product Gas Concentration Control 1) A constant ozone product gas concentration output shall be maintained for each generator, regardless of changes in ozone production requirements, by varying the power output of the PSU to the generator in response to an ozone concentration setpoint from the main ozone control system. 2) A PID control algorithm shall be programmed in the ozone generator individual PLC control logic. The set point for the PID algorithm shall be the ozone concentration setpoint from the main ozone control system. The process variable for the PID shall be the ozone generator product gas concentration as measured by the ozone concentration analyzer on the generator discharge. The controlled variable of the PID shall be the power output of the PSU to the generator. 3) In ozone generator local mode, the operator shall have the option to manually enter the ozone concentration setpoint (SP) at the ozone generator HMI. In Auto SCADA mode, the ozone generator PLC shall use a concentration setpoint from the Ozone System Area Control Panel PLC and identical to the ozone concentration setpoint for all other online ozone generators. The ozone generator Manual/Auto concentration selector mode shall be a selection on the ozone generator HMI screen. c. Ozone Generator Cooling Water Control 1) The generator cooling water flow rate shall be automatically controlled via two control modes: delta temperature (AT) control, or flow control. 2) In delta temperature control mode, a PID control algorithm shall be programmed in the ozone generator individual PLC control logic. The set point for the PID algorithm shall be an operator -entered delta temperature set point in the range of 5 OF to 20 OF in increments of 1 OF. The process variable for the PID shall be cooling water delta temperature as measured by the cooling water inlet and outlet temperature transmitters. The controlled variable of the PID shall be the flow setpoint for the cooling water. The flow setpoint shall be then be used to modulate inlet control valve position as described below in flow control mode. 3) In Flow control mode, a PID control algorithm shall be programmed in the ozone generator individual PLC control logic. The set point for the PID algorithm shall be an operator -entered flow set point. The process variable for the PID shall be cooling water flow rate as measured by the cooling water inlet flow transmitter. The controlled variable of the PID shall be cooling water inlet control valve position. 4) The open -loop cooling water loop to the power supply units shall be controlled from the power supply by control of a solenoid valve on the cooling water inlet. d. Ozone Generator Lead -Lag Operation 1) The operator shall be capable of designating each of the three ozone generators as LEAD, LAG and STAND-BY from the HMI or SCADA May 09 17110-12 8205A10 pwl/CardbJDo xwWClimVrk vd WwtvW IWSpedkabmdPm,%I VI7110 (FSClean) screens. The operator shall also be able to designate any or all of the - ozone generators as OUT -OF -SERVICE, so that the auto sequence algorithm will not attempt to start an OUT -OF -SERVICE ozone generator. The LEAD ozone generator will operate alone if the total ozone required for both plants is lower than an adjustable production rate (initial setting = 2700 lb/day). As the total ozone required _ exceeds the adjustable rate, the ozone system will automatically bring on line the LAG ozone generator. The ozone system will verify that all necessary devices associated with an ozone generator are in REMOTE prior to initiating the start command to the LAG ozone generator. When two ozone generators are operating, the ozone system will automatically take off line the LAG ozone generator when the total ozone required goes below an adjustable production rate (initial setting = 2400 lb/day). e. Ozone Generator Shutdown 1) In the event of an ozone generator shutdown, an automatic re -start of an off-line ozone generator shall be attempted provided all permissives are met. The auto -start shall include purge sequence of the off-line generator and once on-line, the generator will operate based on production demand. 5. Alarms. a. Ozone generator GOX high range low flow alarm (3) b. Ozone generator GOX low range low flow alarm (3) c. Ozone generator product gas high pressure alarm (3) d. Ozone generator product gas low pressure alarm (3) e. Ozone generator product gas high temperature alarm (3) f. Ozone generator product gas high ozone concentration alarm (3) g. Ozone generator product gas low ozone concentration alarm (3) h. Ozone generator cooling water low flow alarm (3) i. Ozone generator cooling water low -low flow alarm (3) j. Ozone generator cooling water outlet high temperature alarm (3) k. Ozone generator power supply high temperature alarm (3) 1. Ozone generator power supply failure alarm (3) 6. Software interlocks a. The ozone generators shall go to STANDBY mode upon activation of the plant power failure shutdown signal. E. Calculations: None. F. Operator functions from each ozone generator HMI Screen: 1. Ozone generator: (3) a. On/Off control. b. Power input. 2. GOX inlet valves: (3) a. Manual/auto selection. b. Open/Close controls. 3. Ozone flow control valves (3) a. Manual/auto selection. b. Open/Close controls. 4. Cooling water inlet valves: (3) a. Manual/auto selection. b. Open/Close controls. *400. May 09 17110-13 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienUTX/Fort Worlh/8205A101Specificabons/Pre-SelecVl7110 (FS-Clean) 5. Ozone generator inlet pressure set point *%Me 6. Ozone generator cooling water differential temperature set point ' 7. Ozone generator cooling water flow set point 8. Ozone generator concentration set point 9. GOX low flow alarm set point. 10. Cooling water low flow alarm set point. 11. Cooling water low -low flow alarm set point. 12. Cooling water outlet high temperature alarm set point. 13. Ozonated product gas high ozone concentration alarm set point. 14. Ozonated product gas low ozone concentration alarm set point. G. Operator Functions from SCADA Screens: 1. Ozone generators (3) a. Manual/Auto selection. b. On/Off control. c. Shutdown time duration set point. d. Oxygen purge time duration set point. e. Kilowatt power set point. 2. GOX inlet valves (3) a. Manual/Auto selection. b. Open/Close controls. 3. Cooling water inlet valves (3) a. Manual/Auto selection. b. Open/Close controls. 4. Ozone flow control valves (3) a. Manual/Auto selection. b. Valve position set point. 5. Ozone generator inlet pressure set point (3) 6. Ozone generator cooling water differential temperature set point (3) 7. Ozone generator cooling water flow set point (3) 8. Ozone generator concentration set point. (3) 9. GOX low flow alarm set point. (3) 10. Cooling water low flow alarm set point. (3) 11. Cooling water low -low flow alarm set point. (3) 12. Cooling water outlet high temperature alarm set point. (3) 13. Ozone generator power supply high temperature alarm set point. (3) 14. Ozone generator power supply failure alarm set point. (3) 15. Ozonated product gas high pressure alarm set point. (3) 16. Ozonated product gas low pressure alarm set point. (3) 17. Ozonated product gas high temperature alarm set point. (3) 18. Ozonated product gas high ozone concentration alarm set point. (3) 19. Ozonated product gas low ozone concentration alarm set point. (3) 3.04 OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM A. Summary: 1. The following control descriptions are written for the Holly North Ozone Contactors. The exact programming shall be provided for both the Holly North and South Ozone Contactors by the Ozone System Supplier. 2. The ozone destruct system catalytically destroys ozone in the contactor off - gas stream. Each ozone destruct system is equipped with a local control panel. May 09 17110-14 8205A10 pwJ/Carollo/Documents/ClienVTXIFod Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecVl7110 (FS-Clean) r..i B. Field Controls and Instrumentation: 1. Instrumentation: a. North Ozone Destruct System No. 1 Off -Gas Ozone Concentration Analyzer (NH-OZOF01-01). b. North Ozone Destruct System No. 2 Off -Gas Ozone Concentration Analyzer (NH-OZOF02-01). W c. North Ozone Destruct System No. 3 Off -Gas Ozone Concentration Analyzer (NH-OZOF03-01). d. North Ozone Destruct System Inlet Pressure Transmitter (NH-OZOF01- PT01). e. North Ozone Destruct System No. 1 Inlet Temperature Transmitter (NH- OZOF01-TT01). f. North Ozone Destruct System No. 2 Inlet Temperature Transmitter (NH- OZOF02-TT01). g. North Ozone Destruct System No. 3 Inlet Temperature Transmitter (NH- OZOF03-TT01). h. North Ozone Destruct System No. 1 Preheater High Temperature Switch (NH-OZOF01-TH01). i. North Ozone Destruct System No. 2 Preheater High Temperature Switch (NH-OZOF02-TH01). j. North Ozone Destruct System No. 3 Preheater High Temperature Switch (NH-OZOF03-TH01). k. North Ozone Destruct System No. 1 Heated Off -gas Temperature Transmitter (NH-OZOF01-TT02). 1. North Ozone Destruct System No. 2 Heated Off -gas Temperature Transmitter (NH-OZOF02-TT02). m. North Ozone Destruct System No. 3 Heated Off -gas Temperature `✓ Transmitter (NH-OZOF03-TT02). n. North Ozone Destruct System No. 1 Blower Feed Gas Low Pressure Switch (NH-OZOF01-PL01). o. North Ozone Destruct System No. 2 Blower Feed Gas Low Pressure Switch (NH-OZOF02-PL01). p. North Ozone Destruct System No. 3 Blower Feed Gas Low Pressure Switch (NH-OZOF03-PL01). q. North Ozone Destruct System No. 1 Off -Gas Ozone Concentration Analyzer (NH-OZOF01-AT01). r. North Ozone Destruct System No. 2 Off -Gas Ozone Concentration Analyzer (N H-OZOF02-AT01). s. North Ozone Destruct System No. 3 Off -Gas Ozone Concentration Analyzer (NH-OZOF03-AT01). 2. Final Control Elements: a. North Ozone Destruct System No. 1 Inlet Valve (NH-OZOF01-VL01). b. North Ozone Destruct System No. 2 Inlet Valve (NH-OZOF02-VL01). c. North Ozone Destruct System No. 3 Inlet Valve (NH-OZOF03-VL01). d. North Ozone Destruct System No. 1 Preheater (NH-OZOF01-HTR01). - e. North Ozone Destruct System No. 2 Preheater (NH-OZOF02-HTR01). f. North Ozone Destruct System No. 3 Preheater (NH-OZOF03-HTR01). g. North Ozone Destruct System No. 1 Off -Gas Blower (NH-OZOF01-BR01). h. North Ozone Destruct System No. 2 Off -Gas Blower (NH-OZOF02-BR01). - i. North Ozone Destruct System No. 3 Off -Gas Blower (NH-OZOF03-BR01). 3. Local Control Devices: `"'pe May 09 17110-15 8205A10 pwJ/Carollo/Documents/ClienUTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifica8cns/Pre-SelecU17110 (FS-Clean) a. Each ozone destruct system is equipped with a local control panel that -a includes the following local control devices: 1) Local/Off/Remote selector and local On/Off switch for the preheater. 2) A single loop controller to modulate the preheater power output. Ozone destruct system preheater power output shall be modulated to maintain an adjustable temperature differential between the heated off -gas temperature and the inlet temperature. Initial differential temperature set point shall be 30 degrees F. 3) Local/Off/Remote selector, local On/Off switch, and speed control for the off -gas blower. 4. Local Process Indicators and Alarms: a. Each ozone destruct system local control panel includes the following local process indicators and alarms. 1) On status light for the preheater. 2) Failure alarm light for the off -gas blower. 3) Speed indication for the off -gas blower. 5. Hardwired Interlocks: a. Each off -gas blower shuts down on VFD failure. b. Each ozone destruct system preheater shall be interlocked to shut down on high temperature as detected by the ozone destruct system preheater high temperature switch. c. Each ozone destruct system preheater shall be interlocked to the position status of the corresponding destruct system inlet valve. The preheater shall not operate unless the inlet valve is not closed. C. P&ID Drawing Numbers: North - 7-N-111, 7-N-112, 7-N-113, South - 7-N-114, 7-N-115, 7-N-116. D. PLC/SCADA Monitoring and Control Functions: 1. Monitoring Signals: a. Ozone destruct system inlet pressure. b. Ozone destruct system inlet temperature. (3) c. Ozone destruct system inlet valves. (3) 1) Open -closed status. 2) Control mode status. d. Ozone destruct system preheater. (3) 1) On status. 2) Control mode status. 3) High temperature alarm. e. Ozone destruct system heated off -gas temperature. (3) f. Ozone destruct system blower feed gas low pressure alarm. (3) g. Ozone destruct system blower. (3) 1) Speed indication. 2) Overload alarm. 3) Control mode status. 4) Run status. h. Ozone destruct system off -gas concentration. (3) 2. Control Signals: a. Ozone destruct system inlet valves. (3). 1) Open command. 2) Close command. b. Ozone destruct system preheater. (3) May 09 17110-16 8205A10 pwj Cwdlmtw"mWlienVrXIFat Worth1 SA101SpecifimWmPm-qelftll7110 (FSClean) 1) On -off control. c. Ozone destruct system blower. (3) 1) Speed control. 2) Start -stop control. 3. Manual Control. a. Each ozone destruct system inlet valve shall be capable of being . _ manually opened and closed from the SCADA graphic screen. b. Each ozone destruct system preheater shall be capable of being manually turned on and off from the SCADA graphic screen. c. Each ozone destruct system blower shall be capable of being manually started and stopped from the SCADA graphic screen. d. Each ozone destruct system blower speed shall be capable of being manually controlled from the SCADA graphic screen. 4. Automatic Control. a. Each ozone destruct system blower speed shall be modulated to maintain an adjustable ozone destruct system inlet pressure. Each operational ozone destruct system blower shall be controlled to the same speed. Initial inlet pressure set point shall be 6 inches of water - vacuum. b. The operator shall be capable of designating each of the three ozone destruct systems at each plant as LEAD, LAG and STAND-BY from the HMI or SCADA screens. The operator shall also be able to designate any or all of the ozone destruct systems as OUT -OF -SERVICE, so that the auto sequence algorithm described below in the article entitled 'Ozone System Control' will not attempt to start an OUT -OF -SERVICE ozone destruct system. The LEAD ozone destruct system will operate alone if the feed gas to a plant as measured by the Plant Feed Gas Flow Meter is lower than an adjustable gas flow rate (initial setting = 230 scfm). As the total feed gas exceeds the adjustable rate at either plant, the ozone system will automatically bring on line the LAG ozone destruct system for that plant. The ozone system will verify that all necessary devices associated with an ozone destruct system are in REMOTE prior to initiating the start command to the LAG ozone destruct system. When two ozone destruct systems are operating, the ozone system will automatically take off line the LAG ozone destruct system when the total gas flow goes below an adjustable feed rate (initial setting = 200 scfm). c. In the event of an ozone destruct system shutdown as a result of a VFD failure, an automatic re -start of an off-line ozone destruct system shall be attempted provided all permissives are met. Once on-line, the ozone destruct system will operate in the automatic control mode as described herein. Alarms: a. Ozone destruct system preheater high temperature alarm. (3) b. Ozone destruct system heated off -gas low temperature. (3) c. Ozone destruct system blower feed -gas low pressure alarm. (3) d. Ozone destruct system blower VFD failure alarm. (3) e. Ozone destruct system off -gas high ozone concentration alarm. (3) f. Ozone destruct system off -gas high -high ozone concentration alarm. (3) Software interlocks: None. E. Calculations: None. F. Operator Functions from SCADA Screens: May 09 17110-17 8205A10 pw://Carollo/DocumentstClieN/iX/Fort WorOV8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Select/17110 (FS-Clean) I . Ozone destruct system Lead/Lag/Standby selection - 2. Ozone destruct system inlet valve open and closed commands (3) 3. Ozone destruct system preheater start and stop control (3) 4. Ozone destruct system blowers manual/auto control 5. Ozone destruct system blowers manual speed control 6. Ozone destruct system inlet pressure set point 7. Auto start LAG ozone destruct system feed gas flow rate set point 8. Auto stop LAG ozone destruct system feed gas flow rate set point 9. Preheated gas low temperature alarm set point 10. Blower feed gas low pressure alarm set point 11. Off -gas high concentration alarm set point 12. Off -gas high -high concentration alarm set point 3.05 OZONE CONTACTORS - CT CALCULATION A. Summary: 1. The instrumentation described in this Article will be supplied by the Contractor. The Ozone System Supplier shall provide the programming for this equipment as described herein. Tag numbers shown herein are preliminary and are subject to change. 2. The following control descriptions are written for the two Holly North Ozone Contactors. The exact programming shall be provided for both the Holly North and the two South Ozone Contactors by the Ozone System Supplier except for the plant specific requirements noted below. 3. Calculation of CT (Concentration x Time) is necessary to determine ozone contactor disinfection credit. The Surface Water Treatment Rule (SWTR) requires 0.5-log Giardia and 2-logs virus inactivation required from disinfection. The operating target will be 2-logs virus inactivation. Partial direct credit for virus or Giardia may be taken in Ozone Contactor Cell 1, depending on the ozone residual at the outlet of Cell 1. Downstream of Cell 1, CT will be calculated using the effluent method for virus and Giardia inactivation. Calculated CT will be converted to log inactivation credit based on water temperature. The total disinfection credit from ozone is the sum of the direct and CT credit. Disinfection performance ratio will be determined from the total credit (calculated) and the target (required) credit. B. Field Controls and Instrumentation: 1. Instrumentation: a. North Ozone Contactor No. 1 Ozone Residual Analyzer No. 1 (NH- OZCB01-AT01). b. North Ozone Contactor No. 1 Ozone Residual Analyzer No. 2 (NH- OZCB01-AT02). c. North Ozone Contactor No. 1 Ozone Residual Analyzer No. 3 (NH- OZCB01-AT03). d. North Ozone Contactor No. 1 Ozone Residual Analyzer No. 4 (NH- OZCB01-AT04). e. North Ozone Contactor No. 2 Ozone Residual Analyzer No. 1 (NH- OZCB02-AT01). f. North Ozone Contactor No. 2 Ozone Residual Analyzer No. 2 (NH- OZCB02-AT02). g. North Ozone Contactor No. 2 Ozone Residual Analyzer No. 3 (NH- OZCB02-AT03). May 09 17110-18 8205A10 prrJ1CamftdDwmentafCWVWFodwor#M5A10/Spedkati mPm-Seled/17110(FS4ban) h. North Ozone Contactor No. 2 Ozone Residual Analyzer No. 4 (NH- OZCB02-AT04). i. North Ozone Contactor Plant Water Temperature Transmitter (NH-OZCB- T101). j. North Raw Water Flowmeters (existing). _ 2. Final Control Elements: None. 3. Local Control Devices: None. 4. Local Process Indicators and Alarms: None. 5. Hardwired Interlocks: None. C. P&ID Drawing Number: In General Contract Drawing Set D. PLC/SCADA Monitoring and Control Functions: 1. Monitoring Signals: a. Plant flow rate b. Plant water temperature c. Ozone residual concentration from each analyzer d. The PLC shall calculate and display total effluent CT, virus log inactivation, Giardia log inactivation, virus performance ratio, and Giardia performance ratio for each contactor. 2. Control Signals: None. 3. Manual Control: None. 4. Automatic Control: None. 5. Alarms: a. Low virus performance ratio for each contactor b. Low Giardia performance ratio for each contactor c. High virus performance ratio for each contactor Nwoe d. High Giardia performance ratio for each contactor 6. Software Interlocks: None. E. Calculations: 1. General: a. CT credit is not allowed in the first cell where ozone is added. A direct credit is allowed if the ozone residual at the outlet of the cell exceeds a threshold value as described below in the calculations. b. Ozone residual will normally be measured at the outlet of Cell 1, Cell 2, and two other downstream cells. The Cell 1 residual is used to determine direct log inactivation credit. The downstream residuals are used to calculate CT value. CT values are converted to virus and Giardia log inactivation credit. Total ozone disinfection credit will be the sum of the direct credit and credit from CT. c. Ozone will normally be added in both Cell 1 and Cell 2. Ozone can be added to Cell 3 in the event that Cell 1 or Cell 2 ozone diffusers are unavailable. Residual sampling points will be located at the outlet of each of the 8 contactor cells. Each sampling point shall be connected to a separate analyzer probe tee -fitting located in the contactor access corridor. The probes for the analyzers may be moved between probe tee - fittings to provide flexibility in residual measurement. The analyzer/cell assignment will be a manual operator input from the OIS and HMI graphic screen. The following analyzer/cell combinations will be allowed. 1) Analyzer No. 1: Cells 1 or 2. This analyzer probe will be located at the outlet of the first cell where ozone is added, normally Cell 1. This ..or May 09 17110-19 8205A10 pw://Camllo/Documenls/Client/TX/Fort Worth/8205A1D/Specificafions/Pre-SelecVl7110 (FS-Clean) analyzer is used to determine disinfection direct credit and is not used for CT calculation. 2) Analyzer No. 2: Cells 2, 3, or 4. 3) Analyzer No. 3: Cells 3, 4, 5, or 6. 4) Analyzer No. 4: Cells 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8. 2. TY_x (Theoretical hydraulic detention time): a. Plant Flow = Total raw water flow rate to the ozone contactors as measured by the raw water flowmeters (mgd). The flow rate used in these calculations shall be averaged over an operator -adjustable time interval of 0-10 minutes, initially set at 1 minute. b. Number of Contactors = Number of contactors in service. To be input by the operator. c. Cell Volume = Volume of one contactor cell (MG). The volume of each cell in the North Plant is 0.0426 MG. The volume of each cell in the South Plant is 0.0568 MG. d. Ty_x = Theoretical hydraulic detention time between the outlet of Cell X and the outlet of Cell Y (minutes). TY x _(Cell Volume)J x (Y — X) x (Number of Contactors) x (1,440) Plant Flow e. Example: Assume North Plant Flow = 75 mgd, 2 contactors in service, cell volume = 0.0426 MG. Find theoretical hydraulic detention time between Cell 2 outlet and Cell 4 outlet. T4 z _ (0.0426) x (4 — 2) x (2) x (1,440) = 3.1 minutes 3. CT (Concentration x Time): a. CT value is calculated using the effluent method for each section of the contactor preceding a residual analyzer. For the equations that follow, Cell Y is the cell with residual measurement at its outlet. Cell X is the next cell upstream with residual measurement at its outlet. b. T101T = hydraulic efficiency ratio. Initial value of 0.70, but may be changed based on results of tracer studies of the ozone contactors. Allowable range is 0.01 to 0.99. c. Cy = Residual measured at the outlet of Cell Y (mg/Q. d. Ty.x = Theoretical hydraulic detention time between the outlet of Cell X and the outlet of Cell Y as calculated above (minutes). e. CTy_x = CT value between the end of Cell X and the end of Cell Y (mg/L*minutes). CTr-x =C TT / x (Cr) x (Tr-x ) The above equation shall only be calculated if Cy is greater than or equal to an operator -adjustable minimum residual setpoint, normally set at 0.05 14- mg/L. If Cy is less than the minimum residual setpoint, then CTy_x equals 0.0 mg/L*minutes. Example: Analyzer No. 2 is measuring Cell 2 outlet residual. Analyzer No. 3 is measuring Cell 4 outlet residual of 0.08 mg/L. Theoretical hydraulic detention time between Cell 2 outlet and Cell 4 outlet is 3.1 minutes as calculated in the previous example. Find CT value between the end of Cell 2 and the end of Cell 4. May 09 17110-20 8205A10 pN•J/CamOolDocumenls/ClmVr /Fort WahtMS410/SpedficWOWPm,ca6cUl7110 (FS-Clean) T =((l0.7) x (0.08) x (3.1) = 0.17 (mg / L' minutes', C 4_2 4, Total Effluent CT: a. Total effluent CT for the contactor is the sum of the CT for each section 0 calculated above. Cell 4 Aga yzec b. Example: Analyzer No. 1 is measuring Cell olu�tllet3es'measuring 2 is measuring Cell 2 outlet residual; Analyzer0.25 outlet; Analyzer No. smeasuring �e t- Assume GT2-1 mg/L*min; assume CT�/m n as calculated above assume or the CT" = 0.12 mglL'min. Find total effluent CT1 Llu � nutes) onto or. CT,.,., = (0.25) + (0.17) + (0.12) = 0.54 (mg 5. Giardia and virus inactivation rate. Inactivation rate is a function of water temperature. a. Virus inactivation rate: 1) WT = Water temperature as measured by the ozone contactor plant water temperature transmitter (Degrees C). 2) e = 2.718 3) Kv = Virus inactivation rate ((Log 1)/(mg/L;min)). K v = (2.1507) x (e(0-0707 X WT)) b. Giardia inactivation rate: 1) WT = Water temperature as measured by the ozone contactor plant water temperature transmitter (Degrees C). 2) e = 2.718. 3) KG = Giardia inactivation rate ((Log 1)/(mg/L*min)). KG = (1.0237) x (e(O.0722 X wr)) c. Example: Find virus inactivation rate if the water temperature = 20 degrees C. K„ _ (2.1507) x (e(0.0707) x (zo) Log I 1 = 8.84(mg1L " minutes ) 6. Giardia and virus inactivation credit from CT: a. Virus Log Inactivation from CT (Logs 1): Virus Log Inactivation (from CT) = K„ x CTr.,a, b. Giardia Log Inactivation from CT (Logs 1): Giardia Log Inactivation (from CT) = CT,-o,a, c. Example: Assume CTTW,11= 0.54 mg/L`min and Kv = 8.84 (Log 1)/ (mg/L'min) as calculated above. Find virus log inactivation (from CT), Virus Log Inactivation (from CT) = 8.84 x 0.54 = 4.8 Logs I Total Giardia and virus inactivation credit: a. CT credit is not allowed in the first cell where ozone is added. A direct credit is allowed if the ozone residual at the outlet of the cell exceeds the following values: 1) 0.5 log direct Giardia credit if the initial residual is > 0.30 mg/L. 2) 1.0 log direct virus credit if the initial residual is > 0.10 mg/L. b. Total Virus Log Inactivation (Logs 1). 'F May 09 17110-21 8205A10 pw7lCarollolDocumenWCllenVWFort Worth18205A101Spedfirations/Pre-SeloWI7110 (FSClean) Total Viru: , r inactivation = Virus Log inactivation (from CT) + Direct Virus Credit C. Total Giardia Log Inactivation (Logs 1): Total Giardia Log Inactivation = Giardia Log inactivation (from CT) Direct Virus Credit d• Example: Assume 4.4 log virus removal as calculated above and 1.0 log direct credit from Cell 1 Total Virus Log Inactivation = 4.8 + 1.0 = 5.8 Logs i 8. Virus and Giardia performance ratio: a• PRv = Virus performance ratio. Total Virus Log Inactivation PRv — Required Virus Log Inactivation �. PRE = Giardia performance ratio. __ (Total Giardia Log inactivation) PRE (Required Giardia Log Inactivation) c. Example: Assume 5.8 log virus inactivation credit. Required virus inactivation is 2.0 log. PRv = �2.Q� = 2.9 9. Analyzer Maintenance Mode: a. Ozone residual analyzers undergoing maintenance or calibration should not be included in the CT calculation. b. The PLC program shall include a maintenance mode setting for each ozone residual analyzer. The operator shall have the ability to place an analyzer in maintenance mode from the OIS or HMI. The PLC shall not use residual values from any analyzer in maintenance mode. c. The alarms will be inactive for that contactor until the analyzer is removed from maintenance mode. F. Operator Functions from SCADA Screens: 1. A display screen or pop-up screen at the OIS and HMI shall be provided for the CT calculation parameter entry and display of calculated values. This screen shall display the following as a minimum: a. The following alarms shall be provided on the OIS and HMI graphic screen: 1) Virus performance ratio low alarm. Set point shall be operator adjustable between 0.00 and 9.99, initially set at 1.10. 2) Giardia performance ratio low alarm. Set point shall be operator adjustable between 0.00 and 9.99, initially set at 1.10. 3) Virus performance ratio high alarm. Set point shall be operator adjustable between 0.00 and 9.99, initially set at 3.0. 4) Giardia performance ratio high alarm. Set point shall be operator adjustable between 0.00 and 9.99, initially set at 3.0. b. The following control set points, selectors, and push buttons shall be 2 provided on the OIS and HMI graphic screen: 1) Number of contactors in service. Operator shall select 0, 1, or 2. May 09 17110-22 8205A10 px•J/C;a�c�dolDoaanmtyCienllfXlFort War�l8T05A1 ti11Q (FSCJean) 2) Analyzer/contactor cell assignment. Operator shall input which cell's _ ozone residual each analyzer is measuring, with input choices as stated in this Article. 3) Hydraulic efficiency ratio. Value shall be adjustable between 0.00 and 0.99, initially set at 0.70. 4) Minimum residual for CT calculation. Value shall be adjustable between 0.00 and 0.20, initially set at 0.05. 3.06 OZONE SYSTEM CONTROL A. Summary: 1. The following algorithms are developed for the entire ozone system. 2. The control descriptions herein shall reside in the Ozone Generation Building PLC. 3. The raw water flow meters, plant feed gas flow transmitters, and plant feed gas flow control valves described in this Article will be supplied by the Contractor. The Ozone System Supplier shall provide the programming for this equipment and all other programming as described herein. Tag numbers shown herein are preliminary and are subject to change. B. Field Controls and Instrumentation: 1. Instrumentation: a. North Plant Raw Water Flow Meter b. South Plant Raw Water Flow Meter c. North Plant Feed Gas Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ-FT01) d. South Plant Feed Gas Flow Transmitter (NH-OZ-FT02) 2. Final Control Elements: a. North Plant Feed Gas Flow Control Valve (NH-OZ-VL01) b. South Plant Feed Gas Flow Control Valve (NH-OZ-VL02) 3. Local Control Devices: The plant feed gas control valves are each equipped with Local/Off/Remote selector at the valve actuator. 4. Local Process Indicators and Alarms: None. 5. Hardwired Interlocks: None. C. P&ID Drawing Number: In General Contract Drawing Set D. PLC/SCADA Monitoring and Control Functions: 1. Monitoring Signals: a. Plant raw water flow (2) b. Plant feed gas flow (2) c. Plant feed gas control valves (2) 1) Valve position 2) Open status 3) Closed status 4) Remote mode status d. Automatic start sequence active status. e. Current automatic start sequence step. f. Automatic shutdown sequence active status. g. Current automatic shutdown sequence step. 2. Control Signals: a. Plant feed gas control valves (2) 1) Position control May 09 17110-23 8205A10 pH://Carollot0ocuments/CllenttTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Selectl17110 (FS-Clean) Manual Control: a. The plant feed gas control valves shall be capable of being manually positioned from the HMI or SCADA screens. Automatic Control: a. The ozone system will perform all of the automatic control functions described herein if the ozone system is designated by the operator as in AUTO from the HMI or SCADA screens. If the ozone system is not in AUTO, it will be in MANUAL. b. The total mass flow rate (pounds per day or PPD) of ozone required for generation will be calculated and become the basis for operating the ozone generation system. c. The total mass flow rate of ozone required for each plant will be calculated. The total ozone produced will be divided in accordance with each plant's requirements. PID control algorithms shall be programmed for each plant. The set point for the PID algorithms shall be the sum of the ozone contactor feed gas flow rates calculated below for each plant. The process variable for each PID shall be the plant gas flow as measured by the plant gas flow transmitters. The controlled variable of the PID shall be the plant feed gas flow control valve position. d. The ozone system shall be capable of executing an automatic start sequence. Prior to initiating the auto start sequence, the control system shall verify that the following devices are in AUTO READY status: 1) The LOX vaporizer outlet valve of the SERVICE LOX vaporizer. 2) The LEAD ozone generator 3) The North Plant or South Plant Feed Gas Flow Control Valve 4) Ozone contactor feed gas control valve for any on-line contactor 5) The LEAD ozone destruct system for any plant with an on-line contactor The operator will manually activate the nitrogen system and initiate water flow into any ozone contactors. An automatic start sequence shall be capable of being initiated from the HMI or SCADA screens. The automatic start sequence shall perform the following steps: 1) Start the LEAD ozone destruct system for any plant with an on-line contactor. Verify LEAD ozone destruct system is operating. 2) Open the SERVICE LOX vaporizer outlet valve. Verify SERVICE LOX vaporizer outlet valve is open. Initiate automatic LOX vaporizer rotation logic. 3) Open the LEAD ozone generator GOX inlet valve. Verify the LEAD ozone generator GOX inlet valve is open. 4) Confirm that LEAD ozone generator GOX pressure is at least 21 psig after an adjustable time delay. Once the pressure is confirmed, open the LEAD ozone generator ozone flow control valve. Verify the LEAD ozone generator ozone flow control valve is open. 5) Begin oxygen pre -purge step on LEAD ozone generator. 6) After an adjustable time delay, start the LEAD ozone generator. 7) Start the ozone system automatic control functions described in this section. If any of the above steps cannot be performed or verified, an automatic start sequence failure alarm shall be activated. a. The ozone system shall be capable of executing an operator -initiated automatic controlled stop sequence if the ozone system is operating in May 09 17110-24 8205A10 pwJtCaro9olDocumenhQenff)VFort WortN8 M1 17110 (FS Clem) AUTO. The automatic controlled stop sequence shall also be initiated if any of the following alarms are active for any operating ozone generator and a LAG or STANDBY ozone generator is not available: - cooling water low -low flow alarm - GOX low flow alarm - PSU failure The following steps will be performed as part of the automatic controlled stop sequence: 1) Stop the LEAD and LAG (if LAG is operating) ozone generators. Verify ozone generators are off. 2) Begin oxygen post -purge step on previously -operating ozone generators. 3) After an adjustable time delay, the SERVICE LOX vaporizer outlet valve, the LEAD and LAG (if LAG is operating) ozone generator GOX inlet valve, and the LEAD and LAG (if LAG is operating) ozone generator ozone flow control valve all close. Verify all valves have closed. 4) Stop the LEAD and LAG (if LAG is operating) ozone destruct system for any plant with an on-line ozone contactor. If any of the above steps cannot be performed or verified, an automatic stop sequence failure alarm shall be activated. 5. Alarms: a. Ozone system automatic start sequence failure. b. Ozone system automatic stop sequence failure. 6. Software Interlocks: None. E. Calculations: 1. All calculations will be performed in the Ozone Generation Building PLC. 2. Mass flow rate per contactor: a. The raw water flow rate per contactor for a plant is calculated as follows: Raw Water = Raw Water Flow Number of Basins Online Where: Raw Water Flow values are in MGD Based on this contactor raw water flow, the PLC shall calculate the contactor -required pounds per day for both North and South Holly contactors using this equation: Required PPD 1 _ (Raw Water.,,,,r, x Dosage x 8.345) ± CT Trim PPD,o,,,, Where: Required PPD and CT Trim PPD is in Ibs/day, Raw Water is in MGD, and Dosage is in mg/I, separate set points for the North and South Holly plants. b. This contactor required pounds per day value shall be the basis of several calculations involving choice of constant concentration control or constant gas flow control. The CT Trim PPD can be enabled or disabled on the operator interface. CT Trim PPD shall be calculated based on the difference between the required CT and the actual real time CT as May 09 17110-25 8205A10 pwJ/Carollo/Documents/Client/TX/Fort Worth/8205A10/SpecificahonsrPre-SelecN17110 (FS-Clean) This Page Intentionally Left Blank May 09 17110-34 8205A10 pwJlCmOdDoawxnerdslCJ*iffX/Fort wmt d8205A1 npedkatg mPm SS*N17110 (FS-am) SECTION 17302 FLOW MEASUREMENT - MAGNETIC FLOW METERS ,' PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Full -body magnetic flow meters. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub -Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Drawings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 17050. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc. 2. Physical conditions: a. Installation and mounting requirements. b. Location within the process. c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation. C. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050. May 09 17302-1 8205A10 pwalCamllo'Documents/ClienVTXIFort Worth18205AIMpecificatons/Pre-SelecU17302 (FS•Clean) 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS N%Wl A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following: 1. Siemens Sitrans F 2. Endress-Hauser - Promag TM 50/30 Series, 3. Rosemount -Emerson 8700 Series. 4. Krohne - IFC300/IFS4000 KC. 5. Yokogawa AXF 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Magnetic Flow Meter: 1. General: a. Magnetic flow meters obtain the flow velocity by measuring the changes of induced voltage of the conductive fluid passing across a controlled magnetic field. b. Complete zero stability shall be an inherent characteristic of the flow meter system. c. Include for each magnetic flow metering system: 1) A metering tube with electrodes (sensor). 2) Signal cable. 3) Transmitter remote Mounted on Unistrut or nearby wall. 4) Flow meter grounding rings. 2. Performance requirements: a. Accuracy: 1) 0.25 percent of flow rate from 10 to 100 percent of full scale for velocities ranging between 0.3 to 10 feet per/second. b. Repeatability: 1) 0.25 percent of rate. 3. Element: K a. Metering Tube: 1) Constructed of 304 stainless steel (unless specifically noted otherwise in the Instrument Data Sheets or Instrument Index) with flanged connections to match with piping material. 2) Liner in conformance with: a) Manufacturer's recommendations for the intended service. b) NSF Certified. 3) Electrodes in conformance with: May 09 17302-2 8205A10 pwllCarollolDocumentslClienVWFort Worthl8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecVl7302 (FS-Clean) a) Manufacturer's recommendations for the intended service. . ' b) Utilize a minimum of 2, self-cleaning electrodes. 4) Meter terminal housing NEMA 4X. 5) Meter coating consisting of epoxy painted finish. 6) Components: a) Two grounding rings: ~ (1) Which are in conformance with the manufacturer's bore and material recommendation for the meter's intended service. (2) Designed to protect and shield from abrasion of the liner's edge interface at the meter's end. 4. Transmitter: a. Power supply: 1) 120 VAC. 2) Power consumption: 60 VA maximum. b. Outputs: 1) Isolated 4-20mA DC with HART communication protocol. 2) Relay outputs: a) One Form C contact. b) Rated 5 amps at 120 VAC. c) Programmable. c. Microprocessor -based signal converter/transmitter. d. Utilize DC pulse technique to drive flux -producing coils. e. Contain a 6-digit display for flow rate, percent of span, and totalizer. f. Operator keypad interface. g. Integral zero return to provide a consistent zero output signals in response to an external dry contact closure. h. Integral low flow cut-off zero return. i. Empty pipe detection. j. Automatic range change. k. Programmable parameters including: 1) Meter size. 2) Full-scale flow rate. 3) Magnetic field frequency. 4) Time constant. 1. Data retention for a minimum of 5 years without auxiliary main or battery power. m. Self -diagnostics and automatic data checking. n. Protected terminals and fuses in a separate compartment which isolates field connection from electronics. o. Ambient operating temperature limits of -5 to 140 degrees Fahrenheit (-29 to 60 degrees Celsius). p. Maximum pressure up to 580 psi. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Provide one HART 375 Field calibration instrument compatible with the Flow meters provided. B. Stainless steel tag - labeled to match the Contract Documents. C. Provide sunshades and signal surge voltage protection for all transmitters located outdoors. '""RO, May 09 17302-3 8205A10 pwJ/Carollo/DOcumenls/ClienUTX/Fod Worth/8205At01Specifications/Pre-SelecU17302 (FS-Clean) D. Provide galvanic isolation gaskets, nyloniTeflon flange bolt insulation bushings, and -- nylon washers on all meters installed on pipes with cathodic protection. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Factory calibrate each flow metering system at a facility that is traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). C. A real-time computer generated printout of the actual calibration data indicating apparent and actual flows at 20 percent, 40 percent, 60 percent, 80 percent and 100 percent of the calibrated range shall be submitted to the ENGINEER at least 30 days before shipment of the meters to the project site. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Provide manufacturer's services to perform start-up and calibration or verification. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions: 1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field verification requirements for calibration. 3.04 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before commissioning. C. Furnish 4 hours of OWNER training. May 09 17302-4 8205A10 pwlr-dWD=rw &CHe,u k'FoM W r VB20M1 s WnPm 1, u17302 (Fsclean) 3.06 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. See Specification Section 17901. B. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: END OF SECTION S %..r May 09 17302-5 8205A10 prrJ/CardWD=mentslCEer affort Worth1820MIOISpedhca#m&Pre SeLnUI7302 (FSpean) A/E: Carollo Engineers MAGNETIC FLOWMETERS Contractor: No By Date Revision Project: Customer: Plant: Location: BOM No.: I File: 1 Instrument Tag No. FE/FIT- 2 Service 3 P&ID 4 C Line Size / Schedule 5 O Line Material 6 N Connection Type 7 N Connection Materials 8 Tube Size E 9 Tube Material L 10 Liner Material E 11 M Electrode Type i M 12 E Electrode Material E 13 T Meter Ca") N 14 E Power Spply� Elect Code By Transmitter T 15 R Grounding Type & Mail. 16 Enclosure Class 17 Other 18 Fluid 19 F Max Flow 20 L Min Velocity Ft/s 21 U Min Flow Norm Flow 22 1 Min Temp I Max Temp I I 23 D Min Press Max Press 24 Vacuum Possibility 25 Conductivity T 26 Function Pulsed DC R 27 Mounting A 28 Enclosure Class N 29 Length Signal Cable S 30 Type Span Adjustment Mfr. Sid. M 31 Power Supply 115VAC, 60Hz I 32 Transmitter Output 4-20mA T 33 Accuracy T 34 Calibrated Range E 35 Other R 36 Display Scale Size Range 16 Char. LCD Adjustable 37 Alarm Contact No. I Form Mfr. Sid. I Mfr. Std. I 38 Manufacturer 39 Element (Meter) Model No. 40 Transmitter (Inst.) Model No. Notes: Refer to Specification 17302 for additional requirements. Sheet I of I as Spec. No. Rev. 17302 Contract Date Req. P.O. By I Chk I APp I « i SECTION 17312 FLOW MEASUREMENT - ORIFICE PLATE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Orifice Plate flow measuring instruments. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub -Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 17050. B. The orifice handle shall be permanently marked on the inlet side with the: 1. Orifice tag number. 2. Orifice diameter, "d" - inches (to nearest 0.001 inch). 3. Beta ratio. 4. Plate material. 5. Line size and flange rating. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: " 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc. 2. Physical conditions: a. Installation and mounting requirements. 1ter May 09 17312-1 8205A10 pw://Cardlo/Documents/ClienUTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specificabons/Pre-Selectl17312 (FS-Clean) b. Location within the process. c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation. C. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following: 1. Wyatt Engineering. 2. Meriam Instrument. 3. ABB. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Orifice Plates: 1. General: 2. Performance requirements: a. Calibrated accuracy t0.5 percent of actual flow. 3. Elements: a. Orifice plates consist of a flat metal disc with a concentric circular hole: b. Orifice diameters shall be selected so that the ratio of orifice diameter to actual internal pipe diameter (d/D) does not exceed: 1) 0.75 for liquids. 2) 0.70 for gas and steam. 3) Not less than.0.25 (recommended). 4) A d/D ratio between 0.4 and 0.6 is preferred. c. Orifice plate: d. Unless otherwise specified or stated in the instrument index, provide square -edged concentric orifice plate with 1/8-inch thickness up to 6-inch diameter pipe. For pipe size larger than 8 inch, the orifice plate thickness has to be calculated for higher pressure application. Quadrant type thickness shall be depending upon its radius. May 09 17312-2 8205A10 purl/Cm1dDDc=enWClienVrMFort WortM5A101SpecftbDns1Pre.SeleW17312 (FS-Clean) r e. Flange types: Use orifice flange - 300 pound minimum or higher to match with piping rating. f. All hardware for complete assembly shall be provided, including studs, bolts, nuts, jackscrews, and gaskets. g. Special Integral Orifice Plate Assembly (For 1-1/2 inch, 1 inch and 1/2 inch and smaller pipe sizes: 1) Hone internal upstream and downstream section of integral orifice assembly. 2) Provide and mount the appropriate differential pressure flow transmitter with the integral orifice assembly. Calibrate and span the transmitter to meet the process and orifice plate differential pressure. The transmitter shall be the one specified. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Differential Pressure Transmitters: 1. Refer to Section 17406. B. Provide sun shield for outdoor installations for all transmitters. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Factory calibrate each flow metering system hydraulically at a facility that is traceable to the Nation Institute of Testing Standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Provide manufacturer's services to perform start-up and calibration or verification. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions: 1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field verification requirements for calibration. 3.04 CLEANING ,%'' May 09 17312-3 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/TX/Fort Worth/8205AIO/Specifications/Pre-Select/17312 (FS-aean) A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before commissioning. C. Furnish four hours of OWNER training. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be shown on the Drawings, in the Specifications or both. END OF SECTION r i May 09 17312-4 8205A10 p-JlC&rddDoam-WaienVT -t Wort M0M101Speafi *fim lPreSdedM7312 (FS-Nan) **Ampi A/E Carollo Engineers ORIFICE PLATE FLOWMETERS Contractor: No By Date Project: Customer: Plant: Location: BOM No.: File: 1 Instrument Tag No. FE- 2 Service 3 P&ID 4 Type Concentric: X Other: 5 Material 316 Stainless Steel: Other: 6 Beta (d/D) 7 P Orifice Bore Diameter 8 L Pipe Size 9 A Pipe Inside Diameter 10 T Plate Thickness Revision Sheet 1 of 1 Spec. No. Rev. 17312 Contract Date Req. P.O. By I Chk I App Concentric: X Other: 316 Stainless Steel: Other: 11 E Taps Flange: Vena Contracta: Pipe: Other: Flange: Vena Contracta: Pipe: Other: 12 Tap Size 112-Inch: Other: 1/2-Inch: Other: 13 Pressure Drop at Norm Flow 14 Perm. Press. Drop at Norm Flow 15 Other 16 Other 17 F Type Weld Neck: Slip -On: Threaded: Weld Neck: Slip -On: Threaded: 18 L Flange Material 316 Stainless Steel: Other: 316 Stainless Steel: Other: 19 A Flange Rating ANSI 150 lb.: ANSI 300 lb.. Other: ANSI 150 lb.: ANSI 300 lb.: Other: 20 N Other 21 G Other 22 E Other 23 Fluid 24 Fluid State Liquid: Gas: Liquid: Gas: 25 Pressure 26 F Temperature 27 L Specific Gravity 28 U Reynolds Number 29 I Max Flow Units 30 D Max Velocity Units 31 Norm Flow Min Flow 32 Max Temp I Min Temp I I 33 Max Press Min Press 34 Other 35 Transmitter See Transmitter Data Sheet and Spec. 17406 See Transmitter Data Sheet and Spec. 17406 36 Calibrated Range 37 Combined Accuracy 38 Orifice Plate Manufacturer 39 Orifice Plate Model No. Notes: Refer to Specification 17312 for additional orifice plate requirements. Refer to Specification 17406 for additional differential pressure transmitter requirements This Page Intentionally Left Blank SECTION 17401 PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT - DIAPHRAGM SEALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Diaphragm seals. 2. Annular seals. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub -Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. C. Provide all seals identified in the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 17050. B. Additional Requirements: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's installation instructions. b. Seal type. c. Body materials. d. Diaphragm material. e. Fill fluid type. f. Seal size. g. Options. h. Process connection. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc. 2. Physical conditions: May 09 17401-1 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientrrX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Spedficabons/Pre-Selectl17401 (FS-Clean_a) a. Installation and mounting requirements. b. Location within the process. ' c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation. C. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Provide spare annular seal for every size indicated in the project. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Diaphragm Seals: 1. For, liquids containing solids, and liquids with pulsating flow having pressures less than or equal to 15 psi: One of the following [or equal]: a. Ashcroft, Type 301. b. Mansfield and Green, Type LG. c. Wika. d. Rosemount. 2. For liquids containing solids, and liquids with pulsating flow having pressures greater than or equal to 15 psi: One of the following [or equal]: a. Ashcroft, Type 101. b. Mansfield and Green, Type RG. c. Wika. d. Rosemount. 3. For chemical applications: One of the following [or equal]: a. Ashcroft, Type 101. b. Mansfield and Green, Type RG. c. Wika. d. Rosemount. May 09 17401-2 8205A10 pwi/Ca bD=meNs O enVrYJFat Wo hWO5AlQfSwaralimslPreSdecU17401(FS-Ciean_a) 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Diaphragm Seals: 1. General: a. Diaphragm seal and pressure instrument shall be assembled by pressure instrument manufacturer and shipped as an assembly. t 2. Requirements: a. Seal Type: Welded. b. Process Connection: 1 inch NPT. c. Instrument Connection: 112 inch NPT. d. Provide 1/4-inch flushing connection in diaphragm housing or provide flushing ring. e. Provide fill/bleed connection. f. Provide bonded diaphragm. g. Mounting: As indicated in the Contract Documents.. h. Nuts and Bolts: 316 stainless steel. a) Materials of Construction: 2) Ozone: a) Diaphragm: 316 stainless steel. b) Lower Housing: 316 stainless steel. c) Upper Housing: Manufacturer's standard. d) Fill Fluid: Halocarbon. 3) Other Process Fluids: As recommended by manufacturer and with Engineer's approval. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Provide field fill kits. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Provide manufacturer's services to perform start-up and calibration or verification. May 09 17401-3 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienTWFort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Select/17401 (FS-Clean_a) 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions: 1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field verification requirements for calibration. t 3.04 CLEANING M A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before commissioning. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be shown on the Drawings, in the Specifications or both. END OF SECTION May 09 17401-4 8205A10 pwjlC=IolDoaxne WCHwffX/Fal W*td82 lOtSpedric bm&PmSeledl7401 (FS-Oean_a) SECTION 17402 PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT - INSTRUMENT VALVES t PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Valve manifolds and instrument valves. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub -Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. C. Provide all valve manifolds and instrument valves identified in the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 17050. B. Additional Requirements: 1. Product Data: a. Valve type. b. Body material. c. Size. d. Options. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Mounting details for all manifold valves. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc. 2. Physical conditions: a. Installation and mounting requirements. b. Location within the process. May 09 17402-1 8205A10 pwJ/Carollo/Documents/ClienVTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecU17402 (FS-Clean) c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are %_ compatible with the process conditions and physical installation. 'r C. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Protect valve manifolds and protective coatings from damage during handling and installation. Repair coating where damaged. 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Valve Manifold Manufacturers: One of the following: 1. Anderson Greenwood. 2. Hex Valve. 3. Rosemount. B. Block and Bleed Valve Manufacturers: One of the following: 1. Anderson Greenwood. 2. Hex Valve. C. Gauge Valve Manufacturers: One of the following: 1. Anderson Greenwood. 2. Hex Valve. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Valve Manifolds: 1. General: a. Provide 2-Valve or 3-valve as specified in Division 17901. b. Valve manifolds shall have one piece bonnet with a metal to metal seal to the valve body below the bonnet threads. 2. Requirements: a. Bonnet lock pin to prevent accidental loosening. ` b. Gas leak tested metal -to -metal hard seat design for hard seat valves. May 09 17402-2 8205A10 pw:/1CarollolDocuments/ClienVTX/Fort Worth18205At01Specificabons/PreSelecU17402 (FS-Clean) c. Gas leak tested soft seat design with replaceable seat for soft seat valves. y d. Manifold valves shall have straight through portion for bi-directional flow and easy roddable cleaning. e. Manifold valves shall allow for direct or remote instrument mounting. f. Shall be able to withstand pressures up to 6,000 psi for soft seat valves and 10,000 psi for hard seat valves at maximum 200 degrees Fahrenheit. g. Materials of Construction: 1) Body Material: 316 Stainless Steel. 2) O-Ring: Teflon. h. 2-Valve Manifolds: 1) One isolation valve and one drain/vent and calibration valve. i. 3-Valve Manifolds: 1) Two isolation valves and one equalizing valve for differential pressure applications. 2) Plugged vent connections used for vent/drain or calibration. 3) B. Block and Bleed Valves: 1. General: a. Valve shall provide process isolation and venting/draining capabilities. b. Gas leak tested metal -to -metal hard seat design for hard seat valves. c. Gas leak tested soft seat design with replaceable seat for soft seat valves. 2. Requirements: a. Materials of Construction: 1) Body Material: 316 Stainless Steel. 2) O-Ring: Teflon. C. Gauge Valves: 1. General: a. Valve shall provide process isolation from pressure instrument. b. Gas leak tested metal to metal hard seat design for hard seat valves. c. Gas leak tested soft seat design with replaceable seat for soft seat valves. 2. Requirements: a. Materials of Construction: 1) Body Material: 316 Stainless Steel. 2) O-Ring: Teflon. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Provide tube fitting, female NPT, or pipe butt weld connections if necessary. B. Provide stainless steel concentric or eccentric pipe nipples when necessary. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Factory calibrate each instrument at a facility that is traceable to the National Institute of Testing Standards (NIST). May 09 17402-3 8205A10 pm/lCarollD/Documents/Cllent/TX/Fort Worth/8205A70/Specifications/Pre-SelecU17402 (FS-Clean) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 1.7050. B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Provide manufacturer's services to perform start-up and calibration or verification. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions: 1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field verification requirements for calibration. 3.04 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.05 DEMONSTATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before commissioning. C. Furnish two hours of OWNER training. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be shown on the Drawings, in the Specifications or both. END OF SECTION May 09 17402-4 8205A10 pwjr-rd olD=an rWCkn0 XIFat WaW82M1p5pedfira%WPm SdecV17402 (FSClesn) SECTION 17403 PRESSURENACUUM MEASUREMENT - SWITCHES ,. PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Pressure/vacuum switch instruments. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub -Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.03 DEFINITIONS N..i A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 17050. B. Additional Requirements: 1. Product Data: a. Accessories such as diaphragm seals, valve manifold, snubbers, and pulsation dampeners. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc. 2. Physical conditions: a. Installation and mounting requirements. b. Location within the process. c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation. C. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. ...i May 09 17403-1 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienUTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecVl7403 (FS-Clean) 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Mechanical Type Pressure Switch: One of the following: 1. Ashcroft B Series Type 400. 2. United Electric Controls 400 Series. 3. SOR Static-0- Ring 4. Mercoid 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS '**../ A. Mechanical Type Pressure Switches: 1. General: a. Pressure switch shall be diaphragm or diaphragm -sealed piston type. 2. Performance requirements: a. Pressure Range: 1) As specified in instrument list. b. Accuracy: 1) ±1.0 percent of range. c. Repeatability: 1) ±1.0 percent of range. 3. Element: a. Type: Diaphragm, diaphragm -sealed piston, or bourdon tube. b. Overpressure: 1) Minimum 130 percent of maximum range pressure without damage to switch or sensing element. 2) Minimum 400 percent of nominal range without leakage or rupture. c. Sensing element shall not require ambient temperature compensation. d. Wetted Materials: Stainless Steel. e. Set point: 1) Switch shall activate at set point on increasing pressure for high- pressure alarm applications and on decreasing pressure for low- pressure alarm applications. f. Fixed deadband. g. Switch elements: May 09 17403-2 8205A10 pw:/ICarollo/DocumentslClient/TX/Fort Worth18205A101Specifcations/Pre-SelecUl7403 (FS-Clean) 1) Snap acting. ' 2) Single pole -double throw (SPDT) 3) Rated at 10A, 125/250VAC. 4) Manual reset type. h. Enclosure: Epoxy coated NEMA 4X. i. Switch Mounting: " 1) Process connection: 1/2-inch NPT. 4. Components: a. Provide all necessary hardware for pressure switch mounting. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Provide integral diaphragm seals as specified in instrument list and as specified in Section 17401: 1. Diaphragm seal and pressure switch shall be assembled by Manufacturer and shipped as an assembly. B. Furnish block and bleed valves as specified in Section 17402. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Factory calibrate each instrument at a facility that is traceable to the National Institute of Testing Standards (NIST). 11#MVW PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Provide manufacturer's services to perform start-up and calibration or verification. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions: 1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field verification requirements for calibration. 3.04 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050. ,%moll May 09 17403-3 8205A10 pwJ/Carollo/Documents/Client TXlFoa Worth/8205A10/SpecificatonstPreSeleWl7403 (FS-Clean) 3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before commissioning. C. Furnish two hours of OWNER training. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be shown on the Drawings, in the Specifications or both. END OF SECTION May 09 17403-4 8205A10 pvJPC=WW=wWaWVr)lFort WotCd8 W10tSMdf!c wstPr-Se1e 17403 (FS-Nan) A/E: Carollo Engineers Contractor: Project: Customer: Plant: Location: BOM No.: File: 1 Type D 2 Setting E 3 Dead Band V 4 Mtl : I Body Seat Tube I 5 Element Type C 6 Material E 7 Connection 8 Mounting 9 Accuracy 10 Other 11 Type 12 Quantity, S 13 Form W 14 Rating: I Amps Volts Hertz 1 15 Other T 16 Load C 17 Enclosure H 18 Enclosure Class 19 Conduit Connection 20 Other 21 Manufacturer 22 Model No. PRESSURE SWITCHES No By Date Revision Sheet I of 1 Spec. No. Rev. 17403 Contract Date Req. P.O. By I Chk I App Press: Vacuum: Comp.: Diff.Press: Other Set in Field: Factory Set: Internal: External: Dial: Fixed: Adj.: Min.: Other: Diaphragm: Bourdon: Bellows: Other Bronze: SS: Alloy St.: Other '/2 in NPT 4 Bottom: Back: Local: Surface: Flush: Mercury: Snap: Other Single: Dual: Other SPST: SPDT: DPDT: Other 10 1 120 60 Inductive: Non -Inductive: J _ General Purpose: Weatherproof. None: Explosion proof. MFR STD: Other Rev Tag Number Adj. Range SP Process Signal SP Op. Temp. P&ID Service Notes PSL- or PSH- Notes: Refer to Specification 17403 for additional pressure switch requirements. Refer to Specification 17401 for additional diaphragm seal requirements. Refer to Specification 17402 for additional instrument valve requirements. This Page Intentionally Left Blank ` SECTION 17404 PRESSURENACUUM MEASUREMENT - GAUGES -I PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Pressure/Vacuum gauges. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub -Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.03 DEFINITIONS NOW A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 17050. B. Additional Requirements: 1. Product Data: a. Accessories such as diaphragm seals, valve manifold, snubbers, and pulsation dampeners. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc. 2. Physical conditions: a. Installation and mounting requirements. b. Location within the process. c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation. C. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. May 09 17404-1 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienVTX/Fort Worth18205A10/Speci5cabons/Pre-SelecUl7404 (FS-Clean) 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: One of the following: 1. Ashcroft 1279. 2. WEKSLAR 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General: 1. Pressure gauge assembly shall include pressure sensing element, gauge case, and dial mechanism. B. Performance requirements: 1. Pressure Range: a. As specified in instrument list. 2. Accuracy: a. ±1.0 percent of span after friction errors are eliminated by tapping or vibration. b. Maximum allowable friction inaccuracy: 0.5percent of span. 3. Element: a. Type: Bourdon tube. b. Overpressure: Minimum 130 percent of maximum range pressure without damage to gauge or sensing element. c. Wetted Materials: Stainless Steel. d. Dial Gauge: e. Dial Size: 4-1/2 inches. f. Dial case material: Stainless Steel. g. Dial face: Gasketed [Shatterproof Glass. h. Connection and Mounting: 1) Direct mounted and suitable for outdoor installation. 2) Connection Location: Lower. 3) 1/2 inch NPT. 4) Connection Material: Stainless Steel. i. Pointer: Fixed. May 09 17404-2 8205A10 p jrmdbDoc mwds1Ckn0XIFod WarBd82MIO/sp okafonslPreSekctl1704 (FS Dean) 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Provide integral diaphragm seals as specified in instrument list and as specified in Section 17401: 1. Diaphragm seal and pressure gauge shall be assembled by Manufacturer and shipped as an assembly. • B. Furnish block and bleed valves as specified in Section 17402. C. Provide 2-valve manifold as specified in Section 17402: 1. Mount valve manifold integrally to the gauge. 2. Valve manifold and pressure gauge shall be assembled by Manufacturer and shipped as an assembly. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Factory calibrate each pressure gauge at a facility that is traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). C. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration instruments. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Provide manufacturer's services to perform start-up and calibration or verification. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions: 1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field verification requirements for calibration. 3.04 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050. May 09 17404-3 8205A10 pvr.//Carollo/DocumenWClientfTX/Forl Worth/8205A10/Speci0cabons/Pre-SelecUl7404 (FS-Clean) 3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING �IP A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before commissioning: 1. Furnish two hours of OWNER training. ' 3.06 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be shown on the Drawings, in the Specifications or both. END OF SECTION May 09 17404-4 8205A10 pxJlCerdlaDoa CRentlTXlFaI Wortld820 IO/Spedfirati m Pre.Seled17404 (FS-Clean) PRESSURE Sheet 1 of 1 esA/E: Carollo Engineers GAUGES Spec. No. Rev. Contractor: No By Date Revision 17404 Project: Contract Date Customer: Plant: Req. P.O. Location: BOM No.: By Chk App File: 1 Type Direct Rdg .: J 3-15 psi. Receiver: Other: 2 Mounting Surface: Local: Flush: 3 Dial Diameter: Color: 4 Case Cast Iron: Aluminum: Phenolic.: Polished SS Other: 5 Ring Screwed: Hinged: Slip: Std: Other: 6 Blowout Protection None: Disc: Front: Other: Mfr. Std. 7 Lens Glass: Plastic: 8 Options Syphon: N/A Material: 9 Other Snubber: 10 Other Pressure Limit Valve: N/A 11 Other Movement Damping: N/A 12 Nominal Accuracy Required 13 Pressure Element Bourdon: J Bellows: Other: 14 Element Material Bronze: Steel: Type SS: 316 Other: 15 Socket Material Bronze: Steel: SS: 316 Other: 16 Connection '/4 in.: %2 in.: Bottom: Other: 17 Movement Dampened: Standard: Other: 18 Diaphragm Seal Mfr.: Wetted Part Mat'l: Type: 19 Other Other Mat'l: Fill Fluid: Model: 20 Manufacturer 21 Model No. Rev Tag Number Range P&ID Service Notes PI- _ Notes: Refer to Specification 17404 for additional pressure gauge requirements. Refer to Specification 17401 for additional diaphragm seal requirements. Refer to Specification 17402 for additional instrument valve requirements. This Page Intentionally Left Blank SECTION 17406 PRESSUREIVACUUM MEASUREMENT - DIFFERENTIAL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Differential pressure transmitters and indicators. B. Related Sections: 1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub -Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.03 DEFINITIONS ,".s A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Specific Definitions: 1. Lower Range Value (LRV): Lowest pressure that the pressure transmitter is capable of measuring. 2. Calibrated Range: The range that the pressure transmitter is configured to measure. The low end of the calibrated range must be greater than the LRV of the transmitter. The high end of the calibrated range must be less than the URV. The calibrated range corresponds to the pressure signal sent from the transmitter. 3. Upper Range Value (URV): Highest pressure that the pressure transmitter is capable of measuring. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 17050. B. Product Data: 1. Accessories such as diaphragm seals, valve manifold, snubbers, and pulsation dampeners. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. May 09 17406-1 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/TX/Fort Worth18205A10/Specifications/Pre-Select/17406 (FS-Clean) B. Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc. 2. Physical conditions: a. Installation and mounting requirements. b. Location within the process. c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation. C. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following: no equal accepted: 1. Rosemount 3051 C Series. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Pressure Transmitters - Differential: 1. General: a. Differential pressure transmitter assembly shall include a diaphragm type pressure transducer and microprocessor based transmitter for measurement of differential pressure. b. Differential pressure transmitters shall be used for flow, measurement as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Performance requirements: a. As specified in the instrument index. b. Maximum ratio of total instrument range to calibrated span: 10 to 1. c. Accuracy: 1) Reference Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.075 percent of calibrated span, including effects of hysteresis, nonlinearity, and repeatability. May 09 17406-2 8205A10 pw-J/Cam0a0=n*nWC5entlrXlFor1 WorbIB205A10f5peckationslPr&,WecUl7406 (FSClean) Plus or minus 0.30 percent of 2) Total Performance Accuracyerence accuracy effects, static pressure .� calibrated span, including and ambient temperature effects. upper range limit over 5 3) Stability: Plus or minus 0.15 percent Of years. 3. Element: integral to differential pressure transmitter. transducer a. Diaphragm type b. Diaphragm material: Stainless steel or ceramic- C. Wetted Materials: 1) Process Material Compatibility'.compatibilities with the instrument a) Verify all material Manufacturer. d. Diaphragm Fill Fluid: Silicon Oil. e. Process Connection: 1/2 inch Class 300 Raised Face Flange. 4. Transmitter: a. Power supply: 1) 24 VDC - loop powered. 2) Power consumption: 3 VA maximum. b, Outputs: 1) isolated 4-20mA DC with HART communication protocol. c. Provided with electronic microprocessor. d. Adjustments'. Adjustable electronic zero anpan,withelevated shall e possible suppressed zero as required by application. 'Adjustment without mechanical fulcrum points or handheld configurator. e. Square root extraction for flow calculation. f. Local Display: 1) 5-digit LCD. .� 2) Scaled in engineering units. g. Enclosure: NEMA 4X. h. Overrange Protection: To maximum process line pressure. i. Conduit Connection: 1/2 inch male NPT. 5. Components: a. Transmitter Mounting: 1) As specified in the data sheets or instrument index. 2) Provide all necessary hardware for transmitter mounting. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Provide 3-valve manifold as specified in Section 17402: 1. Mount valve manifold integrally to the transmitter. 2. Valve manifold and transmitter shall be assembled by Manufacturer and shipped as an assembly. B. Provide sun shield for outdoor installations. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Each differential pressure transmitter shall be factory calibrated with 5-point calibration at a facility that is traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology. May 09 17406-3 8205A10 pwl/CarolWDocuments(ClienUT)/Fort Wo(M205AI0/SpecifigbonslPce-SeiEcVI7406 (FS-CWn) C. Provide complete do ntsitilncovering instruments g the traceability of all calibration PART 3 EXECUTION 41( 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-Jets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Provide manufacturer's services to perform start-up and calibration or verification. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions: 1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field verification requirements for calibration. 3.04 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before commissioning: 1. Furnish four hours of OWNER training. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.07 SCHEDULES .. A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be shown on the Drawings, in the Specifications or both. END OF SECTION may 09 174064 8205A10 pMrJ atYwand82�1►1 7�06tgs.C�n) A/E: Carollo Engineers DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE Sheet 1 of 1 %mow TRANSMITTERS — Spec. No. Rev. Contractor: No By Date Revision 17406 Project: Contract Date Customer: Plant: Req. P.O. r► Location: BOM No.: By I Chk I App File: 1 Instrument Tag No. DPIT- GENERAL 2 Service 3 P&1D 4 Pressure SERVICE 5 Process Temperature 6 Ambient Temperature 7 Manufacturer 8 Model No. 9 Pressure Transmitter Type TRANSMITTER 10 Calibrated Span 11 Accuracy 12 Adjustable Range 13 Output Signal 4-20 mA 14 Body Rating 15 Process Flange Type 16 DrainfVent 17 Process Flange 18 Adapters *ftw BODY 19 Wetted O-Ring 20 Housing 21 Bolts 22 Mounting Brackets 23 Conduit Entry Size ELEMENT 24 Isolating Diaphragm 25 Fill Fluid 26 Certification / Approval Type 27 Meter OPTIONS 28 Zero Span & Adjustment 29 Transient Protection 30 Custom Configuration 31 Manufacturer MANIFOLD 32 Model Number 33 Manifold Style 34 Manifold Type Notes: Refer to Specification 17406 for additional differential pressure transmitter requirements. Refer to Specification 17401 for additional diaphragm seal requirements. Refer to Specification 17402 for additional instrument valve requirements. This Page Intentionally Left Blank z LM SECTION 17504 ANALYTICAL MEASUREMENT - GAS MONITORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes requirements for: 1. Ozone gas concentration monitors for permanent installation. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all DIVISIONS and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub -Contractors to review all Sections for a complete and coordinated project. C. Furnish all instruments identified on the P&IDs, Instrument Lists. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with the format specified in Sections 01300 and 17050. B. Furnish complete Product Data, Shop Drawings, Test Reports, Operating Manuals, Record Drawings, Manufacturer's Field Reports, and other submittals as specified in Section 17050. C. Shop Drawings shall Include the following.- 1 . Product Data. 2. Shop Drawings. 3. Test Reports. 4. Operating Manuals. 5. Connection and loop diagrams. 6. Sensor transducer mounting requirements with dimensions and elevations. 7. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Including mounting details. 8. Certified factory and field calibration data sheets for instruments and devices that require set-up and calibration. D. Factory 5 point calibration for each analyzer with stated accuracy. May 09 17504-1 8205A10 pwJ/CardWDoa *Ms(C§enVTWort WotMO5A10ISpmfip4ons/PreSelwVl7504 (FS-Gean) 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide instruments manufactured at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO Standard 9001 - Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation, and Servicing. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Store all instruments in a dedicated structure with space conditioning to meet the recommended storage requirements provided by the Manufacturer: 1. Replace any instruments that are not stored in strict conformance with the manufacturer's recommendation. 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions including, but not limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, process and ambient temperature, and humidity conditions. B. Refer to Section 17050 for project environmental conditions. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish all parts, materials, fluids, etc. necessary for maintenance and calibration purposes throughout the warranty period. Deliver all of these supplies before project substantial completion. B. Provide additional spare parts and spare instruments as specified in Section 17050. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The following, no equal: 1. High ozone gas concentration: Teledyne 465H. a. Range 0 to 10% b. Range 0 to 15% 2. Medium ozone gas concentration: Teledyne 465M a. Range 0 to 2% b. Range 0 to 5%. 3. Low ozone gas concentration: Teledyne 465L a. Range 0 to 10 ppm. b. Range 0 to 50 ppm May 09 17504-2 8205A10 per -I Caro dDoctmw aienMT-on War11J8 MlOf5pecifntbn$ Pr"elactf17504 (FS-Clean) 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General: 1. Measures ozone gas concentration based on UV absorption (Beer Lambert Law). ' B. Performance Requirements: 1. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent full scale. 2. Response Time: 30 seconds to 95%. C. Technical Characteristics: 1. Microprocessor based. 2. Gas flow rate: a. 465H: 0.5 - 2.0 LPM. b. 465M: 0.8 LPM. c. 465L: 0.8 LPM. 3. Automatic pressure and temperature compensation. 4. Temperature: 5 - 45 Degrees C. 5. Humidity: 10 - 90% relative humidity, non -condensing. 6. Output: Isolated 4-20 mA, 24 VDC capable of driving up to 600 ohm load. 7. Relay outputs: a. 465H and 465M: System OK, Invalid reading, UV Lamp Fault b. 465L System: OK, Invalid reading, UV Lamp Fault, Plus SPDT alarm for Hi alarm and Hi -Hi alarm. 8. Housing: NEMA 4X. D. Process connection: E. Power Supply: 1. 100 to 240 VAC. 2. 60 Hz. 3. 74 watt Maximum 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Calibration Equipment: 1. Provide calibration kit including appropriate gas with all necessary hardware to calibrate the gas monitoring/indication units for a 1 year period. 2. Furnish carrying case. B. Sun shield for outdoor Multi -channel Controllers, Sensor Flow Cap, and Rainshield. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory calibrate each gas monitoring system before shipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the complete set of plans, the process fluids, pressures, and temperatures and furnish instruments that are compatible with installed process condition. *4000, May 09 17504-3 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienOTX/Fort Worthl8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Selecttl7504 (FS-Clean) B. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed. C. Notify the Engineer promptly if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Install all instruments in strict conformance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. C. Notify the ENGINEER of any installation conditions that appear to be at variance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17950. B. Site Test and Inspection: 1. Perform installed tests in accordance with Section 17050. C. Provide manufacturer's field services as specified in Section 17050. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Calibrate all instruments in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions. B. Perform any supplemental calibration specified in Section 17050. 3.06 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.07 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Fully protect all instruments after installation and before commissioning. Replace any instruments damaged before commissioning: 1. Sole party responsible for determining the corrective measures is the ENGINEER. May 09 17504-4 8205A10 per]tCarobD=nenbrAmtrrffW WaNMMIO/Speaficadom PreSdmUl7SD4 (FS-aean) 11 3.09 SCHEDULES A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Furnish all instruments identified on the Contract Drawings or in the Contract Specifications. If an instrument is shown on one of these Documents, it shall be considered to be shown on all. B. Produce completed Instrument Data Sheets for all instruments required under this Contract: 1. See Section 17050 for additional requirements. 2. Submit all Instrument Data Sheets for review. 3. Instrument Data Sheets shall be furnished in both hard copy and electronic format. C. The Instrument Schedule is included as a guideline for the supply of instruments. The Instrument Schedule is not complete. Some information needed to order and specify the required instruments is not included. END OF SECTION May 09 17504-5 8205A10 PWXar01bDocumentS1CWnVW0rt WorthMO5A70/Speakatons/Pre-SelecUI7504 (FSGean) This Page Intentionally Left Blank May 09 17504-6 8205A10 pwwJKoadDocum ienO)UFodWathMOSAlWSWdicatiaislPmSeledl7504(FS-Clean) SECTION 17514 RESIDUAL OZONE ANALYZERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Residual Ozone Analyzers. B. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub -Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050. B. CE Electromagnetic Compatibility Standards: 1. EN50081-1. 2. EN50081-2. 3. EN50082-1. 4. EN50082-2. C. CE Safety Reference: 1. EN61010-1. D. ISO 9001. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 17050. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc. 2. Physical conditions: a. Installation and mounting requirements. b. Location within the process. ...r May 09 17514-1 8205A10 pw]/CarolldDocumentslCfientlr/JFort Worthl8205A101Specificabons/Pre-SelecV17574 (FS-Clean) c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation. C. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Furnish all parts, materials, fluids, etc., necessary for maintenance and calibration purposes for one year: 1. Deliver all supplies before substantial completion. C. Provide the following: 1. Digital Thermometer. 2. Digital Barometer. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following: 1. Orbisphere Model ROS: a. Model 26506 Indicator. b. Model 313xx Sensor. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General: 1. The Ozone Analyzer system shall consist of a probe and remote transmitter with a fixed zero, and an adjustable span. 2. Calibrated in air, with built-in subsequent conversion to measurement of ozone. 3. 0 to 45 degrees Celsius operating limits. B. Probe: 1. 316 Stainless Steel construction. 2. 3 probe technology including: a. Anode. May 09 17514-2 8205A10 pwJ/C"o/Domm**/ClienVrMFort WorthI8 MI 17514 (FS-Clean) e b. Cathode. c. Platinum Guard Ring. C. Transmitter: .1. NEMA 4X, 316 Stainless Steel enclosure. 2. Backlit display. 3. Isolated 4-20 mA output. 4. Alarm outputs, programmable threshold: a. High Alarm relay Contact. b. Low Alarm relay contact. c. Contacts rated 2 Amp 1120 VAC /50 VA. 5. Programmable parameters including: a. Upper level span. b. Fixed zero. D. Performance Requirements: 1. Measurement Range: a. 0 to 10 ppm. 2. Accuracy: a. +/- 1 percent of signal or +/- 10 ppb. 3. Signal Drift: a. < 1 percent of reading. 4. Response Time: a. 30 seconds for 90 percent change at 25 degrees Celsius. E. Power Supply: 1. 120 VAC ± 10 percent. 2. 60 Hz. 3. 10 VA Maximum. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Digital Barometer / Thermometer: 1. Range 8.2 to —32.4 in Hg: a. Resolution:.05 in Hg. 2. Temperature range —5 to 140 degrees Fahrenheit: a. Resolution: 1 degree Fahrenheit. 3. Suunto Model Escape 203. B. Provide sun shield for outdoor installations. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050 and noted herein. B. Factory calibrate each analyzer at a facility that is traceable to the NIST. C. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration instruments. May 09 17514-3 8205A10 pallCimbD=n16nts/C1ienVTXJFort Wmtd=5A10(Specikabons/Pm-gdecU17514 (FSClean) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments. C. Install the sensor on a horizontal pipe segment within the sample pipe using the proper setback. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Provide manufacturer's services to perform start-up and calibration or verification. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions: 1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field verification requirements for calibration. 3.04 CLEANING ,%woe A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before commissioning. C. Furnish 8 hours of OWNER training. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.07 SCHEDULES a A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be shown on the Drawings, in the Specifications or both. END OF SECTION May 09 17514-4 8205A10 pw:I/Carollo/Documents/Client/TX/Fon Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Select/l7514 (FS-Clean) A/E: Carollo Engineers Contractor: Project: Customer: Plant: Location: BOM No.: File: G 1 Tag No.1 Sample Unit I Transmitter E 2 Service N 3 P&ID S 4 Type M 5 Enclosure P 6 Sampling Method L 7 Operating Temperature Range 8 Sample Temperature Range U 9 Sample Flow Required N 10 Manufacturer 1 11 Model No. T 12 Other C 13 Style A 14 Length B 15 Model No. L 16 Other E 17 Other 18 Type T 19 Enclosure R 20 Mounting A 21 Accuracy N 22 Range S 23 Power Requirements M 24 Display I 25 Resolution T 26 Output T 27 Calibration E 28 Manufacturer R 29 Model No. 30 Other 31 Other 32 Other 33 O 34 P 35 T 36 S 37 38 Notes: Refer to Specification 17514 for additional requirements OZONE RESIDUAL ANALYZERS No I By Date Revision AE/AIT- Control Unit and Display 115 VAC, 60 HZ 4-20 mA Sheet i of 1 Spec. No. Rev. 17514 Contract Date Req. P.O. By I Chk I App This Page Intentionally Left Blank r 4 Md r• SECTION 17530 ANALYTICAL MEASUREMENT - DEW POINT PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Dew Point Analyzers for permanent installations. B. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all DIVISIONS and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub -Contractors to review all Sections for a complete and coordinated project. C. Furnish all instruments identified on the P&IDs, instrument lists, and instrument data sheets. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050. B. ISO 9001. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with the format specified in Sections 01300 and 17050. B. Furnish complete Product Data, Shop Drawings, Test Reports, Operating Manuals, Record Drawings, Manufacturer's Field Reports, and other submittals as specified in Section 17050. C. Shop Drawings shall Include the following: 1. Product Data. 2. Shop Drawings. 3. Test Reports. 4. Operating Manuals. 5. Connection and loop diagrams. 6. Sensor transducer mounting requirements with dimensions and elevations. 7. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Including mounting details. 8. Certified factory and field calibration data sheets for instruments and devices that require set-up and calibration. D. Factory 5 point calibration for each analyzer with stated accuracy. 14..i May 09 17530-1 8205A10 pw:/1Carollo/Documents/ClienVTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specificafions/Pre-Selec1117530 (FS-Clean) 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Factory -calibrate Dew Point Analyzers with certified accuracy traceable to NIST. B. Manufacture instruments at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO Standard 9001 - Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation, and Servicing. ` 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions including, but not limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, process and ambient temperature, and humidity conditions. B. Refer to Section 17050 for project environmental conditions. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Provide all parts, materials, fluids, etc. necessary for maintenance and calibration purposes throughout the warranty period. Deliver all of these supplies before project substantial completion: B. Provide two spare dew point analyzers in addition to the analyzers shown on the Drawings. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The following or equal: 1. GE Panametrics MMS35 analyzer with M2LR probe. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General: 1. The Dew Point Analyzer system shall consist of a thin-film aluminum oxide probe with and microprocessor -based transmitter. 2. All components of the Dew Point Analyzer system shall be contained inside a single enclosure. B. Sensing Probe: 1. Thin-film aluminum oxide. 2. Allowable inlet pressure: 0 to 5000 psig. 3. Sample temperature: 32 to 140 Degrees F. May 09 17530-2 8205A10 pwJ/CwdbDowmanlslClia VWFCd WoreMMl 17MO (F&Man) ..ow' C. Transmitter: 1. Backlit display. 2. Isolated 4-20 mA output. 3. Alarm outputs, programmable threshold: a. High Alarm relay contact. b. Low Alarm relay contact. c. Contacts rated 2 Amp 1120 VAC /50 VA. 4. Programmable parameters including: a. Upper level span. b. Fixed zero. D. Enclosure: 1. NEMA 4X. E. Performance Requirements: 1. Measurement Range: 140°F to -166°F 2. Accuracy: a. ±1.1 °F from 140°F to -85°F dew point. b. ±1.6°F from -86°F to -166°F dew point. 3. Repeatability: a. ±0.27°F from 140°F to -85°F dew point. b. ±0.5°F from -86°F to -166°F dew point. F. Power Supply: 1. 120 VAC ± 10 percent. 2. 60 Hz. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050 and noted herein. B. Factory calibrate each analyzer at a facility that is traceable to the NIST. C. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration instruments. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the complete set of plans, pressures, and temperatures and furnish instruments that are compatible with installed process condition. B. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed. C. Notify the ENGINEER promptly if any installation condition does not meet the instrument Manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Refer to Section 17050. ""..i May 09 17530-3 8205A10 pwJ/Carollo/DocumentstClient/iX/Forl Worth/8205A10/SpecificabonsrPre-SelecYI7530 (FS-Clean) 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17950. B. Site Test and Inspection: 1. Perform installed tests in accordance with Section 17050. C. Demonstrate the performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before commissioning. D. ENGINEER to witness all instrument calibration verification in the field. E. Each instrument shall be tested before commissioning and the ENGINEER to witness the response in the PLC control system and associated registers. F. Provide manufacturer's field services as specified in Section 17050. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions: 1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field verification requirements for calibration. B. Perform any supplemental calibration specified in Section 17050. 3.06 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.07 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Fully protect all instruments after installation and before commissioning: 1. Replace any instruments damaged before commissioning: 2. The ENGINEER is the sole party responsible for determining the corrective - measures. C. All standards and reagents shall be isolated from the analyzer's electronics and located in separate plastic containers. May 09 17530-4 8205A10 pwJ/Cero1dDwment&Qenurffort waNV820M1W4eak*wslPraSdecu1 7530 (Fsaew) 3.09 SCHEDULES A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Furnish all instruments identified on the Contract Drawings or in the Contract Specifications. If an instrument is shown on one of these Documents, it shall be_. considered to be shown on all. B. Produce completed Instrument Data Sheets for all instruments required under this Contract: 1. See Section 17050 for additional requirements. 2. Submit all Instrument Data Sheets for review. 3. Instrument Data Sheets shall be furnished in both hard copy and electronic format. C. The Instrument Schedule is included as a guideline for the supply of instruments. The Instrument Schedule is not complete. Some information needed to order and specify the required instruments is not included. END OF SECTION May 09 17530-5 8205A10 pwJ/Cardld =n*rWCknVWod Wo"205AIWSpecdolons/Pre-SelecUI75M (FS(7ew) This Page Intentionally Left Blank May 09 17530-6 8205A10 pvrjCaadD=nwtsOi9nVFVFat WorIhI=M1Qf5pedkaknslPm,%ed17530 (FS-Clean) SECTION 17601 TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT - TEMPERATURE SWITCH PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Temperature switch instruments. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub -Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 17050. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc. 2. Physical conditions: a. Installation and mounting requirements. b. Location within the process. c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation. C. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050. *"wool May 09 17601-1 8205A10 pw.1/Carollo/Documents/ClienUTX/FortWorth/8205A10/SpecificatonsJPre-SelecUl7601 (FS-Clean_a) 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following: 1. Ashcroft B Series. 2. United Electric 400 Series. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Temperature Switches: 1. General: a. Temperature switch shall be bulb type with snap -action switch element. 2. Performance requirements: a. Temperature Range: 1) Refer to Instrument Schedule b. Accuracy: 1)' ±2.0 percent of range. c. Repeatability: 1) t2.0 percent of range. 3. Element: a. Sensing element material: Stainless steel. b. Sensing element shall not require ambient temperature compensation. c. Switch elements: 1) Snap acting. 4. Transmitter: a. Set point: 1) Single. 2) Activate switch at set point on increasing temperature for high temperature alarm applications and on decreasing temperature for low temperature alarm applications. b. Fixed deadband. c. Manual reset type. d. Enclosure: Epoxy coated NEMA 4X. e. Switch Mounting: 1) Remote mount with surface -mounting hardware. 2) Process connection: 1/2-inch NPT. 3) Provide all necessary hardware for temperature switch mounting. May 09 17601-2 8205A10 pwjrarojh0 ar"jts(ClienVWat WorUJMM1=peafic WndPm_c6eW17601(F&4>9n_a) f. Outputs: 1) Relay outputs: a) 1 Form C contact. b) Rated at 10A, 125/250VAC. 5. Components: a. Length: As Required. b. Material: Stainless steel capillary with stainless steel armor. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Thermowell: 1. Unless otherwise noted, provide thermowell with each temperature switch. 2. Process connection: 112 inch NPT. 3. Thermowell material: 316L stainless steel 4. Stem Style: Manufacturer Standard. 5. Immersion Depth: a. Minimum 3 inches or 10 times the diameter of the thermowell, whichever is larger. b. Where pipe diameter is inadequate for appropriate immersion depth, install thermowell in an elbow on the axis of the pipe. B. Provide sun shield for outdoor installation. 2.04 SOURCE -QUALITY -CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. 14..i B. Factory calibrate each instrument at a facility that is traceable to the National Institute of Testing Standards (NIST). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Provide manufacturer's services to perform start-up and calibration or verification. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions: 1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field verification requirements for calibration. Nknow May 09 17601-3 8205A10 pw:1/CarollolDOcuments/ClienVTX/FortWortht8205A10/SpecificabonslPre-Select117601 (FS-aean_a) 3.04 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before commissioning. C. Furnish two hours of OWNER training. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be shown on the Drawings, in the Specifications or both. END OF SECTION May 09 17601-4 8205A10 pw-jXa dldD=xmts/CiwVrXrrDd WwhWD5A1 7601(F&4C*an_a) Op A/E: Carollo Engineers Contractor: Project: Customer: Plant: Location: BOM No.: File: I Type D 2 Setting E 3 Dead Band V 4 Wetted Material I 5 Connection C 6 Mounting E 7 Thermowell Type 8 Thermowell Material 9 Thermowell Insertion Length 10 Process Connection 11 Other 12 Type 13 Quantity S 14 Form W 15 Rating: Amps I Volts Hertz 1 16 Other T 17 Load C 18 Enclosure H 19 Enclosure Class 20 Conduit Connection 21 Accuracy 22 Other 23 Manufacturer 24 Model No. TEMPERATURE Sheet 1 of 1 SWITCHES Spec. No. Rev. No By Date Revision 17601 Contract Date Req. P.O. By I Chk I App Set in Field: Factory Set: hitemal: External: Dial: Fixed: Adj.: Min.: Other: MFR STD: Bottom: Back: Local: Surface: Flush: Thermowell: Remote: Straight: Tapered: Stepped: Stainless Steel: Other: 1/2-inch Thread: 3/4-inch Thread: Flange: Weld Mount: Mercury: Snap: Other Single: Dual: Other; SPST: SPDT: DPDT: Other 10 1 120 60 Inductive: Non -Inductive: 4 General Purpose: Weatherproof: None: Explosion proof: MFR STD: Other Rev Tag Number Adj. Range SP Process Signal SP Op. Temp. P&ID Service TSL- or TSH- Notes: Refer to Specification 17601 for additional requirements. Notes This Page Intentionally Left Blankwar it A N%./ .� w SECTION 17602 TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT - TEMPERATURE GAUGE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Temperature gauges. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub -Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.03 DEFINITIONS lft.►r A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 17050. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc. 2. Physical conditions: a. Installation and mounting requirements. b. Location within the process. c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation. C. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050. May 09 17602-1 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/TX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/PreSelect/17602 (FS-Clean) 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Bimetallic Type Temperature Gauge: One of the following: 1. Ashcroft Type Cl. 2. Weiss Instruments Series BM. 3. Noshok 300 Series. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Bimetallic Type Temperature Gauges: 1. General: a. Temperature gauges shall consist of a bimetallic temperature sensor with a dial -type temperature gauge. 2. Performance requirements: a. Temperature Range: 1) As specified in instrument list. b. Accuracy: 1) ±1.0 percent of range. 3. Element: a. Type: Bimetallic. b. Stem material: Stainless Steel. c. Temperature gauge sensor shall be tamperproof, hermetically sealed, and silicon dampened. d. Process Connection: 1/2 inch NPT. 4. Dial Gauge: a. Dial Size: Three inches. b. Dial case material: Stainless Steel]. c. Dial face: Gasketed Glass. d. Orientation: Straight or angled as required to provide most convenient direct viewing. e. Mounting: Direct mounted and suitable for outdoor installation. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Thermowell: 1. Unless otherwise noted, provide thermowell with each temperature gauge. 2. Process connection: 1/2 inch NPT. 3. Thermowell material: 316L stainless steel May 09 17602-2 8205A10 p.//CamNolDoarnen4slQmVrAfFwtWathW5A1Q5pwkabonwPmSaleW7602 (FStlean) R� 4. Stem StyleTemperature Gauge Manufacturer Standard. 5. Immersion Depth: a. Minimum 3 inches or 10 times the diameter of the thermowell, whichever is larger. B. Provide sun shield for outdoor installations. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Factory calibrate each instrument at a facility that is traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (MIST). C. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration instruments. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Provide manufacturer's services to perform start-up and calibration or verification. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions: 1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field verification requirements for calibration. 3.04 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before commissioning. C. Furnish 8 hours of OWNER training. ..i May 09 17602-3 8205A10 pw.//CarollotDocuments/ClienYTX/Fort WorN/8205A10/Specficatons/Pre-SelecVl7602 (FS-Clean) 3.06 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be shown on the Drawings, in the Specifications or both. END OF SECTION May 09 17602-4 8205A10 PWJr,%'dQV000n ents 0WnNrAfFort WoftA205Al O/SPedkabonstPreSeWA7602 (F&C ean) R 419 TEMPERATURE Sheet I of I AIE: Carollo Engineers GAUGES Spec. No. Rev. Contractor: No By Date Revision 17602 Project: Contract Date Customer: Plant: Rey. P.O. Location: BOM No.: By Chk I App File: 1 Type Bimetallic: Gas Actuated: 2 Mounting Surface: Local: Flush: ( Thermowell: 3 Stem Material Stainless Steel: Other: 4 Thermowell Type Straight: Tapered: Stepped: 5 Thermowell Material Stainless Steel: Other: 6 Thermowell Insertion Length I 7 Process Connection 1/2-inch Thread: 3/4-inch Thread: Flange: I Weld Mount: 8 Dial Diameter: Color: 9 Case Polypropylene: ( Aluminum: Phenolic.: Polished SS Other: 10 Lens Polycarbonate: Glass: Shatterproof Glass: 11 Accuracy 12 Manufacturer 13 Model No. 14 Other 15 Other Rev Tag Number Range P&ID Service Notes TI- Notes: Refer to Specification 17602 for additional requirements. This Page Intentionally Left Blank A" 40 104;V SECTION 17604 TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT - RTD PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. RTD temperature instruments. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub -Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Specific Definitions: 1. RTD - Resistance Temperature Detector. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 17050. B. Furnish complete Product Data, Shop Drawings, Test Reports, Operating Manuals, Record Drawings, Manufacturer's certifications, Manufacturer's Field Reports, and other submittals as specified in Section 17050, and below. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc. 2. Physical conditions: a. Installation and mounting requirements. b. Location within the process. c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation. IWAMW May 09 17604-1 8205A10 pwJ/Carollo/Documents/ClienVWFort Worth/8205At01Specificetions/Pre-SelecUl7604 (FS-Clean) C. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturers recommendations or specifications. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Rosemount Model 3144P transmitter with Series 68 sensor. 2. Moore Industries Model RIY. 3. Siemens SITRANS T. 4. Foxboro Model RTT25. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. RTDs: 1. General: a. Temperature measuring instrument shall include an RTD temperature element, transmitter, and thermowell. 2. Performance requirements: a. Accuracy: 1) Within 0.25 percent of calibrated span. b. Repeatability: 1) 0.25 percent of full scale. c. Sensor lead wire compensation: maximum zero shift of 0.2 percent of the temperature range. 3. Element: a. 100-Ohm platinum thin film resistance temperature detector (RTD). b. 3-wire. c. Hermetically sealed, and enclosed in 316 stainless steel outer sheath. d. Single element temperature sensor shall be spring -loaded. 4. Transmitter: a. Microprocessor based. b. Compatible with 3-wire and 4-wire RTD inputs: c. Local Display: May 09 17604-2 8205A10 pvJ1CaroUdDocwnentsl0=Vrffcd Wv td=M1NpediicaftvPre-Seled17804 (FS-Clean) 1) 5-digit LCD. ` 2) Scaled in engineering units. d. Power supply: 1) 24 VDC - loop powered. 2) Power consumption: 15 VA maximum. e. Outputs: " 1) Isolated 4-20mA DC with HART communication protocol. f. Transmitter enclosure: NEMA 4X g. Transmitter Mounting: 1) As specified on the Instrument Data Sheets or Instrument Index. 2) Connection to thermowell: 1,2-inch NPT. 3) Provide all necessary hardware for transmitter mounting. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Thermowell: 1. Unless otherwise noted, provide thermowell with each RTD. 2. Process connection: One inch NPT. 3. Thermowell material: 316L stainless steel. 4. Stem Style: RTD Manufacturer Standard. 5. Immersion Depth: a. Minimum 3 inches or 10 times the diameter of the thermowell, whichever is larger. b. Where pipe diameter is inadequate for appropriate immersion depth, install thermowell in an elbow on the axis of the pipe. B. Provide sun shield for outdoor installations. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Factory calibrate each temperature transmitter with 5-point calibration at a facility that is traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology. C. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration instruments. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments. C. Apply thermally conductive silicone grease to the sensor tip before insertion in thermowell. ..� May 09 17604-3 8205A10 pw://Camllo/Documents/ClienUMFort Worth/8205A70/Specificafions/Pre-Select/17604 (FS-Clean) 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL a A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Provide manufacturer's services to perform start-up and calibration or verification. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions: 1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field verification requirements for calibration. 3.04 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before commissioning. C. Furnish four hours of OWNER training. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be shown on the Drawings, in the Specifications or both. END OF SECTION May 09 17604-4 8205A10 pwJ/Caraaa0wi nenL%Ck nVWForl WoW82MIDspedficabom Prowled l76oa (Fs -clean) w A/E: Carollo Engineers Contractor: Project: Customer: Plant: Location: BOM No.: File: 1 Instrument Tag No. GENERAL 2 Service 3 P&ID SERVICE 4 Process Temperature 5 Ambient Temperature 6 Manufacturer 7 Model No. 8 Display TRANSMITTER 9 Calibrated Span 10 Adjustable Range 11 Accuracy 12 Output Signal 13 Body Rating 14 Manufacturer 15 Model No. 16 Type TEMPERATURE 17 Temperature Range ELEMENT 18 Mounting 19 Connection 20 Leads 21 Sheath Material 22 Element Length 23 Type THERMOWELL 24 Material 25 Insertion Length 26 Process Connection 27 28 OPTIONS 29 30 31 Notes: Refer to Specification 17604 for additional requirements. TEMPERATURE Sheet I of 1 TRANSMITTERS -RTD Spec. No. I Rev. No By Date I Revision 17604 I` Contract I Date Req. P.O. By Chk I APp TE/TIT- 2-Wire: 3-Wire: 4-Wire: Standard: Potted: Hermetically Sealed: Stainless Steel Straight: Tapered: Stepped: 1/2-inch Thread: 3/4-inch Thread: Flange: Weld Mount: This Page Intentionally Left Blank N%M/ N%M/ ' SECTION 17710 CONTROL SYSTEMS - PANELS, ENCLOSURES, AND PANEL COMPONENTS ' PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Design, fabrication and assembly of all instrumentation enclosures, control panels and components provided under this contract including: a. Control panels furnished as part of equipment systems specified in other Divisions, such as vendor control panels (VCP) and chemical feed panels. b. Control components. c. Control panel installation. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Subcontractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Specific References: 1. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): a. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). b. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems. 2. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): a. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. b. UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment. c. UL 508A - Standard for Industrial Control Panels. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Specific Definitions: 1. The term "panel" in this Section is interchangeable with the term "enclosure." • 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Panel Dimensions: 1. Dimensions indicated on the Drawings and are based upon manufacturer's non -certified information. It is the responsibility of the Contractor or Manufacturer to design and size all panels: a. Size panels to provide space for all equipment, wiring, terminations, and other items in the panel, including space for future build out. May 09 17710-1 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienUMFort Worth/8205A10/Specificatons/Pre-Select/17710 (FS-Clean) b. Panel sizes that substantially deviate (±3 inches in any dimension) from �' the sizes shown on the Drawings must be approved by the ENGINEER. c. Maximum panel depth: 30 inches, unless otherwise indicated. B. Structural Design: 1. Completed and installed panel work shall safely withstand seismic requirements at the project site indicated in Section 16050. Enclosures and internal equipment shall be braced to prevent damage from specified forces. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 17050. B. Provide a control panel hardware submittal, for each control panel and enclosure being provided on this project, including: 1. Product Data: a. Enclosure construction details and NEMA type. b. Manufacturer's literature and specification data sheets for each type of equipment to be installed within or on the panel or enclosure. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Scaled, detailed exterior panel (front and side views) and interior panel layout showing equipment arrangement and dimensional information b. Complete nameplate engraving schedule. c. Structural details of fabricated panels. 3. Calculations: a. Provide installation details based on calculated shear and tension forces: 1) Calculations shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the state where the cabinets and panels will be installed. b. For assembled enclosures and other equipment with a weight of 200 pounds or more, provide calculations for: 1) Weight including panel internal components. 2) Seismic forces and overturning moments. 3) Shear and tension forces in connections. c. Cooling Calculations, to include: 1) Highest expected ambient temperature for the enclosure's location 2) Internal heat load. 3) Exposure to direct sunlight. 4) Dimensions of the enclosure in inches. 5) Maximum allowable temperature inside the enclosure, based on the lowest operating temperature limit of the installed components. C. Seismic Design: 1. Seismic Panel Construction: a. Seismic Anchorage: Provide seismic design calculations and installation r details for anchorage of all panels, enclosures, consoles, etc. to meet seismic requirements in Section 01612: 1) Stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the state where the project is being constructed. b. For floor mounted free standing panels weighing 200 pounds or more (assembled, including contents), submit calculations, data sheets, and other information to substantiate that panel, base, and framing meet minimum design strength requirements and seismic requirements at the May 09 17710-2 8205A10 pvd orl WatdM5A1dSMakaW%Pm-SeWW17710 (FS-am) *ftwwl project site. Calculations shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the state where the cabinets and panels will be installed. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE ► A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Assemble panels, enclosures, and rack systems along with all internal and external devices, wiring, equipment, and materials in a facility that is recognized by Underwriters Laboratories to assemble and certify UL-labeled control panels: 1. Provide all components and equipment with UL508 listing. 2. All control panels shall be UL 508A labeled. 3. Provide fuses for all equipment that is not UL or UR listed. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A_ Refer to Section 17050. B. Crate all panels for shipment using a heavy framework and skids: 1. Provide factory -wrapped waterproof flexible barrier material for covering materials, where applicable, to protect against physical damage in transit. 2. Provide suitable shipping stops and cushioning material for all instruments shipped with the panel to prevent damage due to mechanical shock during shipment. 3. Provide each separate panel unit with removable lifting lugs to facilitate handling. C. Ship all panels by dedicated air ride van, unless otherwise specified or approved. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Provide enclosures suitable for the location and environmental conditions in which they are located, and in the NEMA types in accordance with Section 16050, unless otherwise indicated. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. As listed below in the individual component paragraphs. B. Provide instruments and other components performing similar functions of the same type, model, or class, and from one Manufacturer. May 09 17710-3 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientFrX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Select/17710 (FS-Clean) 2.02 MATERIALS A. Construct and finish enclosures using materials capable of withstanding the mechanical, electrical, and thermal stresses, as well as the effects of humidity and corrosion that are likely to be encountered in normal service: 1. Enclosures shall have the following properties: a. NEMA 1: Steel. b. NEMA 4: Steel with gasketed door, rain tight. c. NEMA 4X: Stainless steel 316 (unless indicated 304 on the drawings) d. NEMA 4X: polycarbonate or fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP) in corrosive areas where stainless steel is incompatible. e. NEMA 12: Steel with gasketed door, dust -tight. f. NEMA 7: Cast aluminum. B. Bolting Material: 1. Commercial quality 1/2-inch diameter, stainless steel hex -head grade 5 bolts, nuts and washers, with unified coarse (UNC) threads. 2. Carriage bolts for attaching end plates. 3. All other bolted joints shall have S.A.E. standard lock washers. 2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Panels/Enclosures: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following: a. Rittal. b. Hoffman Engineering. c. Hammond Industrial Enclosures d. Saginaw Control & Engineering. 2. Panel assembly: a. General guidelines for panel fabrication include: 1) Continuous welds ground smooth. 2) Exposed surfaces free of burrs and sharp edges. 3) Base formed of heavy channel iron, either galvanized or powder coated, minimum 1/2 inch holes at 12 inch spacing to accommodate anchoring of freestanding enclosures to floor. b. Construct enclosure and mounting panel using stretcher level sheet metal having minimum thickness not less than the following sizes (U.S. Standard Gauge): Enclosure Height (inches) Up to 57 57-69 69-82 82 or more Minimum Enclosure Steel Thickness (gauge) 12 12 12, except 10 on back 10 Minimum Back Mounting Panel Thickness (gauge) 12 10 10 10 1) Use heavier sheet metal to meet seismic requirements at the project site or when required due to equipment requirements. c. Construct supporting frame structure with angled, channeled, or folded rigid section of sheet metal, rigidly attached to and having essentially the May 09 17710-4 8205A10 pwj/CarC le/Docunentslglen"ort Worh(L 10/SpeCfttbra/Pre-Sek)W17710 (FS-Clean) 49 • same outer dimensions as the enclosure surface and having sufficient torsional rigidity to resist the bending moments applied via the enclosure surface when it is deflected. d. Provide stiffeners for back mounting panels in enclosures larger than 4 feet. In addition, secure the panels in place by collar studs welded to the enclosure. ' e. Door construction: 1) Turned -back edges suitably braced and supported to maintain alignment and rigidity without sagging. 2) Sufficient width to permit door opening without interference with rear projection of flush mounted instruments. 3) Heavy gauge piano type continuous stainless steel hinges. 4) For NEMA 12, 4 and 4X, provide oil resistant neoprene sealing gasket and adhesive to seal cover to enclosure. 5) Gasket installed to seal against roll lip on the enclosure opening. f. Latches: 1) For panels each door provided with a 3-point latching mechanism and locking handle with rollers on the ends of the latch rods. Latch rods connected to a common door handle, hold doors securely, forming a compressed seal between door and gasket, at the top, side, and bottom. 2) Include an oil -tight key -locking, 3-point latching mechanism on each door: a) Provide 2 keys per panel. b) All locks keyed the same. 3) For large type NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X cabinets, not available with 3-point latching hardware, provide multiple clips and padlock hasps. 4) Provide quick release latches for all NEMA 4 and 4X enclosures. g. Panel cut-outs: 1) Cut, punch, or drill cutouts for instruments, devices, and windows. Smoothly finish with rounded edges. 2) Allow a minimum of 3-inch envelope around all displays, controllers, and monitors. 3) Reinforce around cut-outs with steel angles or flat bars for the following: a) Large panel cutouts; for example, openings for local operator interfaces. b) Pilot device groupings, where the removed metal exceeds 50 percent of the available metal. 3. Outdoor Panels. Supplementary requirements for panels located outdoors are as follows: a. All enclosures located outdoors shall be explicitly designed and rated for outdoor service by the manufacturer. b. Door hardware: stainless steel. c. Provide rain canopy and sun shield. d. Bases: Heavy channel, gasketed iron bases, flanges up, for anchoring to pad. B. Arrangement of Components: 1. Arrange panel internal components for external conduit and piping to enter into panel either from above or below. May 09 17710-5 8205A10 pwJ/Carollo/Documents/ClienUMFort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecU17710 (FS-Clean) 2. Arrange panel instruments and control devices in a logical configuration associating pushbutton and selector switches with related readout devices, or as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Mount internal control components on an internal back -panel. Devices may be mounted on the side -panel only by special permission from the ENGINEER. 4. All control panel mounted operator interface devices shall be mounted between 3 feet and 6 feet above finished floor. C. Overcurrent Protection: 1. Main overcurrent device: a. Where the electrical power supply voltage to the control panel is more than 120 VAC, provide the panel with a flange mounted disconnect handle operating a molded case circuit breaker, and provide a control power transformer for 120 VAC circuits: 1) Door -mounted disconnect handles are not acceptable. 2) Mechanically interlocked the disconnect switch with the control enclosure doors so that no door can be opened unless the power is disconnected, and the disconnect switch cannot be closed until all doors are closed. 3) Provide means to defeat the interlock. b. Control panels supplied with 120 VAC: 1) Provide an internal breaker with the line side terminals covered by a barrier. 2) Provide a nameplate prominently positioned on the control panel identifying the location of the power source and a warning statement requiring the source to be disconnected before opening the door to the enclosure. 2. Provide circuit breakers in accordance with Section 16412. " 3. Selection and ratings of protective devices: a. Interrupting ratings: Not less than the system maximum available fault current at the point of application. b. Voltage rating: Not less than the voltage of the application. c. Select current rating and trip characteristics to be suitable for: 1) Maximum normal operating current. 2) Inrush characteristics. 3) Coordination of the protective devices to each other and to the source breaker feeding the panel. 4. Provide a separate protective device for each powered electrical device: a. An individual circuit breaker for each 120 VAC instrument installed within its respective control panel and clearly identified for function. 1) An individual fuse for each PLC discrete output on the 1/0 module or terminal block. Provide with individual fuse with blown fuse indication. b. An individual 1/2-amepre loop for each 4-20mA analog loop powered from the control panel. c. Install protective devices on the back mounting panel and identify by a service nameplate in accordance with the wiring diagrams. 5. Fuse holders: a. Modular type: 1) DIN rail mounting on 35mm rail. 2) Touch safe design: All connection terminals to be protected against accidental touch. 3) Incorporates blown fuse indicator. May 09 17710-6 8205A10 pwXarao0ocu nwWOienl/TX cd Wortli18205,A10ISpeffca6ow Pre Q&d17710 (FSgean) b. Provide nameplate identifying each fuse: 1) In accordance with Section 16075. c. Manufacturer: One of the following: 1) Phoenix Contact. 2) Allen Bradley 1492-FB Series B. 6. Control Circuit Breakers: a. DIN rail mounting on 35mm rail. b. Manual OPEN -CLOSE toggle switch. c. Rated 250 VAC. d. Interrupting Rating: 10kA. e. Current ratings: As indicated on the Drawings or as required for the application. f. Provide nameplate identifying each circuit breaker: 1) In accordance with Section 16075. g. Manufacturer: One of the following: 1) Phoenix Contact. 2) Allen Bradley Series. D. Conductors and Cables: 1. Power and Control Wiring: a. Materials: Stranded, soft annealed copper. b. Insulation: 600V type MTW. c. Minimum Sizes: 1) Primary power distribution: 12 AWG. 2) Secondary power distribution: 14 AWG. 3) Control: 18 AWG. d. Color: 1) AC power (line and load): BLACK. 2) AC power (neutral): WHITE. 3) AC control: RED. 4) DC power and control: BLUE. 5) Ground: GREEN. 2. Signal Cables: a. Materials: Stranded, soft annealed copper. b. Insulation: 600V, PVC outer jacket. c. Minimum Size: 18 AWG paired triad. d. Overall aluminum shield (tape). e. Copper drain wire. f. Color: 1) 2 Conductor: a) Positive (+): BLACK. b) Negative (-): WHITE, RED. 2) 3 Conductor: a) Positive (+): BLACK. b) Negative (-): RED. c) Signal: WHITE. g. Insulate the foil shielding and exposed drain wire for each signal cable with heat shrink tubing. E. Conductor Identification: 1. Identify all conductors and cables with wire markers in accordance with Section 16075. May 09 17710-7 8205A10 pwJ/Cardb%cu=nWCBMVr/lFort Wof#MO IO/Spedfipfions/Pn}Se[wUI7710 (FSgean) Readily identified without twisting the conductor. General Wiring Requirements: 1. Wiring Methods: Wiring methods and materials for panels shall be in accordance with the NEC requirements for General Purpose (no open wiring) unless otherwise specified. 2. Install all components in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions ' included in the listing and labeling. 3. Provide a nameplate on the cover of the control panel identifying all sources of power supply and foreign voltages within the control panel. 4. Provide transformers, protective devices, and power supplies required to convert the supply voltage to the needed utilization voltage. 5. Provide surge protection device on input supply power. 6. Provide nonmetallic ducts for routing and organization of conductors and cables: a. Size ducts for ultimate build -out of the panel, or for 20 percent spare, whichever is greater. b. Provide separate ducts for signal and low voltage wiring from power and 120 VAC control wiring: 1) 120 VAC: Grey colored ducts. 2) 24 VDC: White colored ducts. 7. Cables shall be fastened with cable mounting clamps or with cable ties supported by any of the following methods: a. Screw -on cable tie mounts. b. Hammer -on cable tie mounting clips. c. Fingers of the nonmetallic duct. 8. The free ends of cable ties shall be cut flush after final adjustment and fastening. 9. Provide supports at the ends of cables to prevent mechanical stresses at the termination of conductors. 10. Support panel conductors where necessary to keep them in place. 11. Wiring to rear terminals on panel -mount instruments shall be run in nonmetallic duct secured to horizontal brackets run adjacent to the instruments. 12. Conductors and cables shall be run from terminal to terminal without splice or joints. 13, The control panel shall be the source of power for all 120 VAC devices interconnected with the control panel including: a. Solenoid valves. b. Instruments mounted in the control panel and remotely connected to the control panel. 2.04 COMPONENTS A. Thermal Management: 1. Provide heating, cooling, and dehumidifying devices in order to maintain all instrumentation and control devices to within a range as specified in Section 17050. 2. Air Conditioner: a. Provide solid-state cabinet coolers or air conditioning units on all outdoor panels containing electronic components such as Human -Machine interface (HMI) units, panel instruments, programmable logic controllers, or programmable logic controller remote 1/0 chassis. May 09 17710-8 8205A10 pwJlCamWDocument&fChenNfX/Fort w«aV=M10/Specirica6er 0h-Se1e 17710 (Fs -clean) b. Provide filters on intake and exhaust openings. c. Increase panel sizes as needed to accommodate cooling units. d. Enclosure rating: NEMA 4X. e. Closed loop design. f. Power Supply: 120 VAC.. g. Utilize a CFC-free refrigerant. h. Manufacturers: The following or approved equal: 1) Kooltronic Integrity Series 21. 2) Pfanningberg USA 3. Heating: a. Provide all panels located in areas that are not climate controlled with thermostatically controlled strip heaters; except, where all of the following conditions apply: 1) The panel is not supplied with 120 VAC power. 2) There are no electronics or moisture -sensitive devices in the enclosure. 3) The panel is smaller than 38 inches high. 4. Heat Exchanger: a. Closed -loop design ensuring separation of ambient air and clean air inside the cabinet. b. Filterless design to facilitate easy cleaning of the core. c. Mounting: indicated on the Drawings. 5. Enclosure Temperature Sensor: a. Provide wall mount RTD transmitter to measure internal cabinet temperature, in all enclosures containing electrical components such as PLCs, RTUs, RIO, and VFDs. b. Platinum RTD. c. 4-20 mA output. d. Sensor and electronic enclosure. e. Accuracy: ±2.0 degrees Fahrenheit. f. Manufacturer: One of the following: 1) Omega, EWS series. 2) TCS Basys Controls, TS Series. 6. Enclosure Temperature Switch: a. Provide wall mount RTD transmitter (to measure internal cabinet temperature in all enclosures) containing electrical components such as PLCs, RTUs, RIO, and VFDs. b. Sensor and electronic enclosure. c. Accuracy: ±2.0 degrees Fahrenheit. d. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: 1) Hoffman ATEMNC. 7. Fan Ventilation: a. Muffin style: 1) Provide two enclosure mounted vent fans for every 72 inches of cabinet width. 2) Provide Finger Guard kit. 3) Filter kit with 2 spare filters for each intake fan. 4) Provide bezel and gasket kit. 5) Provide fan shroud. b. Temperature control switch and alarm: 1) Power: 120VAC. 2) Bimetallic temperature senor. May 09 17710-9 8205A10 pw.//Carollo/Documents/ClienVTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specdica6ons/Pre-Select/17710 (FS-Clean) 3) Adjustable set point range 30 degrees Fahrenheit to 140 degree Fahrenheit. 4) Hoffman ATEM series or equal. B. Panel Meters: 1. Pointer Type: a. Suitable for panel mounting. �. b. Minimum scale length: 3-inches. 1) OTEK. c. Calibrated in engineering units. d. Accuracy: ±2 percent of span. e. NEMA 4/IP65 sealed front metal bezel. f. Manufacturer: One of the following: 1) OTEK. 2) Yokogawa, 2. Digital process indicators: a. General: 1) Integral provisions for scaling. 2) Scale to process engineering units. 3) Switch programmable decimal points. 4) NEMA 4/IP65 sealed front bezel. b. Current and Voltage indicators: 1) 3 1/2 - digit minimum. 2) Minimum character height: 0.5 inches. 3) Accuracy: a) AC/DC volts: ± (0.1 percent of reading + 2 digit). b) DC current: 4 - 20mA: ± (0.1 percent of reading + 1 digit). c) DC voltage: 0 -10V: ± (0.1 percent of reading + 1 digit). c. Operating voltage: 120 VAC. d. Operating temperature: 0 degrees Celsius to 60 degrees Celsius. 1) Manufacturer: One of the following: a) OTEK, b) Red Lion. c) Action Instruments Visipak. 3. Digital Bar Graph Meter: a. Self-contained instruments that display process signals directly in engineering units, both in decimal format and as a bar graph display. b. Suitable for panel mounting. c. LED display: 1) Not less than 3 decimal digits. 2) Not less than a 101 segment LED bar graph. d. Input signal: 1) All conventional current loops and voltage control signals. e. Minimum sample rate of once per second. • f. Provisions for field adjustable scaling and/or offset. g. Accuracy shall be ±1 least significant digit. h. Manufacturer: One of the following: 1) OTEK, 2) Ametek Dixson. 3) Weschler Instruments. May 09 17710-10 8205A10 pwj/CarW&DwjmwWCUwVrXIFort WofltvJ 1 17710 (FS-Gean) 4. Counters: a. 6 digits. b. Switch selectable inputs: 1) Switch contacts. 2) CMOS. 3) TTL. ► 4) Magnetic pickup. 5) RLC sensors. c. Selectable up/down control via external signal. d. Remote reset. e. Remote Inhibit to prevent accumulating counts. f. Programmable to enable or disable front panel reset. g. Non-volatile memory to retain all data upon loss of supply power. h. Sunlight readable. i. Operating Temperature: 0 degrees Celsius to 50 degrees Celsius. j. Manufacturer: One of the following: 1) OTEK, 2) Red Lion PAX Series. C. Pilot Devices: 1. General: a. Provide operator pushbuttons, switches, and pilot lights, from a single manufacturer. b. Size: 1) 30.5mm. c. Heavy duty. d. Pushbuttons: `�•� 1) Contacts rated: a) NEMA A600. 2) Furnish one spare normally open and normally closed contact with each switch. e. Selector switches: 1) Contacts rated: a) NEMA A600. b) Knob type: 2) Furnish one spare normally open contact and normally closed contact with each switch. 3) Provisions for locking in the OFF position where lockout provisions are indicated on the Drawings. f. Pilot lights: 1) Type: a) LED for interior installations. b) Incandescent for exterior installations. 2) Push to Test. 3) Lamp Color: a) On/Running/Start: Red. b) Off/Stop: Green. c) Power: White. d) Alarm: Amber. e) Status or Normal Condition: White. f) Opened: Amber. g) Closed: Blue. Nwoe May 09 17710-11 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientrrX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specificahons/Pre-SelecU17710 (FS-Clean) h) Failure: Red. 2. Indoor and Outdoor Areas: a. NEMA type 4/13. b. Manufacturer: One of the following: 1) Allen Bradley Type 800T. 2) Cutler Hammer Type E34 3) Square D Class 9001 Type K. 4) General Electric Type CR104P. 5) [DEC TWTD. 3. Corrosive Areas: a. NEMA 4X. b_ Corrosion resistant. c. Exterior parts of high impact strength fiberglass reinforced polyester or multiple -layer epoxy coated zinc. d_ Manufacturer: One of the following: 1) Allen Bradley Type 800H 2) Cutler Hammer Type E34. 3) Square D Class 9001 Type SK. 4) General Electric Type CR. 5) IDEC TWTD. 4. Hazardous (Classified) Areas/Class I Division 2: a. NEMA 4X. b. Corrosion resistant. c. Exterior parts of high impact strength fiberglass reinforced polyester or multiple -layer epoxy coated zinc: 1) All contacts contained within a hermetically sealed chamber: a) Pushbuttons. b) Selector switches. c) Push -to -test contacts on pilot lights. 2) UL listed and labeled for Class I Division 2 areas. d. Manufacturer: One of the following, or equal: 1) Cutler Hammer Type E34. 2) Allen Bradley Type 800H. D. Potentiometer and Slidewire Transmitters: 1. Provide a DC output in proportion to a potentiometer input. 2. Potentiometer input: a. 100 ohms to 100K ohms. b. Impedance 2:1 M ohms. c. Zero Turn -Up: 80 percent of full scale input. d. Span Turn -Down: 80 percent of full scale input. 3. Field configurable output: a. Voltage and Current: All conventional current loops and voltage control signals. 4. Accuracy including linearity and hysteresis ±0.1 percent max at 25 degrees Celsius. 5. Operating temperature: 0 degrees Celsius to 55 degrees Celsius. 6. Supply power: 9 to 30 VDC. 7. Manufacturer: One of the following: a. Phoenix Contact. May 09 17710-12 8205A10 purl/ &dWD= nenNrAentlWort Wah&'*MlOtSpecika6mvPmS&dl7710 (FSClean) ...� E. Signal isolators and converters: 1. Furnish signal isolators that provide complete isolation of input, output, and power input: a. Minimum isolation level: 1.5 kV AC/50 Hz for at least 1 minute. b. Adjustable span and zero. c. Accuracy: ±1.0 percent of span. ' d. Ambient temperature range: -20 degrees Celsius to +65 degrees Celsius. 2. Manufacturer: One of the following: a. Phoenix Contact MCR Series. b. Acromag 1500, 600T, 800T, Flat Pack or ACR Series. c. Action Instruments Q500 Series or Ultra SlimPakll. d. AGM electronics Model TA-4000. F. Relays: 1. General: a. For all types of 120 VAC relays, provide transient surge protection across the coil of each relay. b. For all types of 24 VDC relays, provide a free -wheeling diode across the coil of each relay. 2. General Purpose: a. Magnetic control relays. b. NEMA A300 rated: 1) 300 Volts. 2) 10 Amps continuous. 3) 7,200 VA make. 4) 720 VA break. c. Plug-in type. d. LED indication for relay energized. e. Coil voltages: As required for the application. f. Minimum poles: 2PDT. g. Touch safe design: All connection terminals to be protected against accidental touch. h. Enclose each relay in a clear plastic heat and shock -resistant dust cover. i. Quantity and type of contact shall be as shown on the Drawings or as needed for system compatibility. j. Relays with screw -type socket terminals. k. Provide additional (slave/interposing) relays when the following occurs: 1) The number or type of contacts shown exceeds the contact capacity of the specified relays. 2) Higher contact rating is required in order to interface with starter circuits or other equipment. I. DIN rail mounting on 35mm rail. m. Ice Cube type relays shall be provided with retainer clips to secure relay in _ socket. n. Integrated label holder for device labeling. o. Manufacturer: One of the following: 1) Phoenix Contact PLC series. 2) Potter and Brumfield Type KRP or KUP. 3) IDEC R* series. (* = H, J, R, S, U). 3. Time Delay: a. Provide time delay relays to control contact transition time. b. Contact rating: ..we May 09 17710-13 8205A10 pwl/Cardb/Documents/ClientffMFort Worth18205A101SpecificabonslPre-Selecl/17710 (FS-aean) 1) 240 Volts. 2) 10 Amps continuous. 3) 3,600 VA make. 4) 360 VA break. c. Coil voltage: as required for the application. d. Provide Pneumatic or Electronic type with on -delay, off -delay, and on/off delay: 1) For off delay use true power off time delay relays. Where the required timing range exceeds capability of the off delay relay use signal off delay where power loss will not cause undesirable operation or pneumatic time delay relays. e. Minimum poles: DPDT. f. Units include adjustable dial with graduated scale covering the time range in each case. g. Minimum timing range: 0.1 seconds to 10 minutes, or as required for the application. h. Manufacturer: One of the following: 1) Idec GT3 series. 2) Agastat type Series 7000 series (pneumatic). G. Terminal blocks: 1. Din rail mounting on 35mm rail. 2. Suitable for specified AWG wire. 3. Rated for 30 amperes at 600 Volts. 4. Screw terminal type. 5. Provide mechanism to prevent wire connection from loosening in environments where vibration is present. This mechanism shall not cause permanent deformation to the metal body. 6. Finger safe protection for all terminals for conductors. 7. Construction: Polyamide insulation material capable of withstanding temperature extremes from - 40 degree Celsius to 105 degrees Celsius. 8. Terminals: Plainly identified to correspond with markings on the diagrams: a. Permanent machine printed terminal identification. 9. Disconnect type field signal conductor terminals with socket/screw for testing. 10. Identify terminals suitable for use with more than 1 conductor. 11. Position: a. So that the internal and external wiring does not cross. b. To provide unobstructed access to the terminals and their conductors. 12. Provide minimum 25 percent spare terminals. 13. Manufacturer: One of the following: a. Phoenix Contact UK5 Series. b. Allen Bradley Series 1492. 14. Wire duct: a. Provide flame retardant plastic wiring duct, slotted with dust cover. b. Type: 1) Wide slot. 2) Narrow slot. 3) Round hole. c. Manufacturer: One of the following: 1) Panduit. 15. Fuses (holders) and circuit breakers: a. Fuse holders: May 09 17710-14 8205A10 pwJEcatosdDo=wtsJC1WnunCffon Work zMIOtspKAcdwsmre-SdWVm10 (FS-CWn) **AWWI 1) Modular type: a) DIN rail mounting on 35mm rail. b) Touch safe design: All connection terminals to be protected against accidental touch. c) Incorporates blown fuse indicator. 2) Provide nameplate identifying each fuse: jr a) In accordance with Section 16075. 3) Manufacturer: One of the following: a) Phoenix Contact. b) Allen Bradley 1492-FB Series B. H. Transient/Surge Protection Devices: 1. Provide Surge Protection Device (SPD) for Power Entrances: a. Nominal 120 VAC with a nominal clamping voltage of 200 Volts. b. Non -faulting and non -interrupting design. c. A response time of not more than 5 nanoseconds. 2. Control Panel Power System Level Protection, non -UPS powered: a. Design to withstand a maximum 10 kA test current of a 8/20ps waveform according to ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1-2002 Category C Area. b. Provide both normal mode noise protection (between current carrying conductors) and common mode (between current carrying conductor and neutral) surge protection. c. DIN rail mounting. d. Attach wiring to the Surge Protection Device by means of a screw type cable -clamping terminal block: 1) Gas -tight connections. 2) The terminal block: Fabricated of non-ferrous, non -corrosive materials. e. Visual status indication of MOV status on the input and output circuits. f. Dry contact rated for at least 250 VAC, 1 Amp for remote status indication. g. Meeting the following requirements: 1) Response time: :5100 ns. 2) Attenuation: >_ -40dB at 100 kHz as determined by a standard 50 ohms insertion test. 3) Safety approvals: a) UL 1283 (EMI/RFI Filter). b) UL 1449 2nd Edition. h. Manufacturer: One of the following: 1) Phoenix Contact type SFP TVSS/Filter. 2) Liebert Accuvar series. 3) Islatrol. 3. Data and Signal Line Protectors — Panel Mounted: a. Surge protection minimum requirements: Withstand a 10 kA test current of a 8/20ps waveform in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1-2002 Category C Area. b. DIN rail mounting on 35mm rail (except field mounted SPDs). c. Surge Protection Devices consisting of 2 parts: 1) A base terminal block. 2) A plug protection module: a) Replacing a plug does not require the removal of any wires nor interrupt the signal. b) Base and plug coded to accept only the correct voltage plug. ,"No, May 09 17710-15 8205A10 pw://CarollotDocuments/Client/TX/Fort Worth/8205A1015pecifications/Pre-SelecVl7710 (FSClean) d. Surge Protection Device Manufacturer: One of the following: 1) Phoenix Contact Plugtrab Series. 2) Bournes Series 1800. 4. Data and Signal Line Protectors — Field Mounted: a. Surge protection minimum requirements: Withstand a minimum 10 kA test current of a 8/20ps waveform in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1- 2002 Category C Area. b. Manufacturer: One of the following: 1) Phoenix Contact Pipetrab. 2) Joslyn JMD Series. Beacons: 1. Manufacturer: a. One of the following, or equal: 1) Federal Signal Corp Starfire Series. 2) Allen Bradley 855 B "-' 10 Series. 3) Edwards Model: Model 102. Horns: 1. Electromechanical: a. Manufacturer: 1) One of the following, or equal: a) Federal Signal 350 or 31X Series b) Edwards: 878EX or 879EX Series. 2. Rated 80 dB minimum at 10 feet. K. Power supplies: 1. Design power supply systems so that either the primary or backup supply can be removed, repaired, and returned to service without disrupting the system operation. 2. Convert 120 VAC to 24 volt DC or other DC voltages required or as required for the application. 3. Provide backup 24 VDC power supply units to automatically supply the load upon failure of the primary supply. 4. Provide power supply arrangement that is configures with several modules to supply adequate power in the event of a single module failure: a. Provide Automatic switchover upon module failure. b. Alarm contacts monitored by the PLC. 5. Sized to provide 40 percent excess rated capacity. 6. UL508C listed to allow full rated output without de -rating. 7. Provide fuse or short-circuit protection. 8. Provide a minimum of 1 set of dry contacts configured to change state on failure for monitoring and signaling purposes. 9. Output regulation: ±0.05 percent for a 10 percent line change or a 50 percent ., load change: a. With remote voltage sensing. 10. Operating temperature range: 0 degrees Celsius to 50 degrees Celsius. 11. Touch safe design: All connection terminals to be protected against accidental touch. 12. DIN rail mounting on 35mm rail. 13. Provide self -protecting power supplies with a means of limiting DC current in case of short circuit. May 09 17710-16 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientrTX/Forl Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecU17710 (FS-Clean) ..s 14. Manufacturer: One of the following: ` a. Phoenix Contact Quint series. b. IDEC PSSR series. c. PULS Dimension Q Series. d. Acopian. L. Limit Switches: 1. NEMA-4X. 2. AC contact rating 120V, 10A. 3. DC contact rating 125V, 0.4A. 4. Provide robust actuation mechanism not prone to degradation. 5. Provide complete actuator mechanism with all required hardware. 6. Allows for contact opening even during contact weld condition. 7. UL approved. 8. Operating Temperature Range: -18 degrees to +110 degrees Celsius (0 degrees to 230 degrees Fahrenheit). 9. Manufacturer: a. Allen Bradley 802. b. Honeywell HDLS. c. Omron D4. d. Eaton E47, E49, E50. e. ABB equal. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Refer to Section 17050. r..s B. Provide panels with an inside protective pocket to hold the panel Drawings. Ship panels with 1 copy of accepted Shop Drawings including schematic diagram, connection diagram, and layout drawing of control wiring and components in a sealed plastic bag stored in the panel drawing pocket. C. Provide 15 inch floor stands or legs where needed or as indicated on the Drawings. D. Provide a folding shelf for enclosures that contain programmable controllers. The shelf shall be mounted on the inside surface of the door, capable of supporting a laptop computer. E. Provide nameplate to each panel as indicated on the Drawings: 1. Provide in accordance with Section 16075 on all internal and external instruments and devices. 2. Provide a nameplate with the following markings that is plainly visible after installation: a. Manufacturer's name, trademark, or other descriptive marking by which the organization responsible for the panel can be identified. b. Supply voltage, phase, frequency, and full -load current. 3. Provide enclosures with a flange mounted disconnect that is interlocked with the doors. F. Provide a window kit where indicated on the Drawings. The window shall meet the following requirements: 1. Safety plate glass. 2. Secured by rubber locking seal. `400pe May 09 17710-17 8205A10 pwJ/Carollo/Documents/ClienTrX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecU17710 (FS-Clean) Allow full viewing of devices issuing visual process data or diagnostics. G. Lighting: Provide 1 luminaire for each section, on the interior of the panel, spaced evenly along the top -front of the enclosure door opening(s): 1. Covered or guarded. 2. Provide On -Off door -activated switches where indicated on the Drawings. 3. Provide 18-watt fluorescent lamp for indoor enclosures less than 30 inches wide. 4. Provide 40-watt fluorescent lamp for enclosures larger than 30 inches wide: a. Provide additional fixtures for every 36 inches of width. 5. Provide 40 watt incandescent lamp for exterior enclosures: a. Provide additional fixtures for every 36 inches of width. H. Receptacles: 1. Provide one duplex receptacle located every 4 feet of enclosure width, spaced evenly along the back mounting panels. 2. GFCI, 125-volt, single-phase, 15-ampere. Grounding: 1. Provide grounding strap between enclosure doors and the enclosure. 2. Provide equipment grounding conductor terminals. 3. Provide equipment ground bus with lugs for connection of all equipment grounding wires. 4. Provide bond multi -section panels together with an equipment grounding conductor or an equivalent grounding bus. 5. Identify equipment grounding conductor terminals with the word "GROUND," the letters "GND" or the letter "G," or the color green. 6. Signal (24 VDC) Grounding: Terminate each drain wire of a signal (shielded) cable to a unique grounding terminal block, or common ground bus at the end of the cable as shown on the Loop Drawings. 7. Ensure the continuity of the equipment grounding system by effective connections through conductors or structural members. 8. Design so that removing a device does not interrupt the continuity of the equipment grounding circuit. 9. Provide an equipment -grounding terminal for each incoming power circuit, near the phase conductor terminal. 10. Size ground wires in accordance with NEC and UL Standards, unless noted otherwise. 11. Connect all exposed, noncurrent -carrying conductive parts, devices, and equipment to the equipment grounding circuit. 12. Connect the door stud on the enclosures to an equipment -grounding terminal within the enclosure using an equipment -bonding jumper. 13. Bond together all PLC processor racks, RIO Chassis and conductive enclosures of power supplies and connect to the equipment grounding circuit. 2.06 FINISHES A. Finishes: 1. Metallic (Non -Stainless): a. Metal surfaces of panels shall be prepared by chemical cleaning and mechanical abrasion in accordance with the finish manufacturer's recommendations to achieve a smooth, well -finished surface. May 09 17710-18 8205A10 pxJlC"oDv--ts1ClienVTVor1 Wa#V M10/Spe�m SN%dhT710 (FS-Nan) b. Scratches or blemishes shall be filled before finishing. One coat of zinc phosphate shall be applied per the manufacturer's recommended dry film thickness, and allowed to dry before applying the finish coat. c. Finish coat shall be a baked polyester urethane powder, aliphatic air-dry polyurethane, or epoxy enamel to meet NEMA rating specified application. d. Exterior of enclosures located outdoors shall be UV resistant polyester powder coating. Total dry film thickness shall be 3 mils, minimum. 2. Stainless Steel: a. Stainless enclosures shall be provided with a Number 4 brushed finish - not painted. B. Colors: 1. Exterior color of panels mounted indoors shall be manufacturer's standard. 2. Exterior of panels mounted outdoors shall be manufacturer's standard. 3. Panel interiors shall be manufacturer's standard. 2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosures so that their surfaces are plumb and level within ±1/8 inch over the entire surface of the panel; anchor securely to wall and structural supports at .WARV, each corner, minimum. Direct attachment to dry wall is not permitted. B. Install the enclosure per guidelines and submitted installation instructions to meet the seismic requirements at the project site. C. Provide floor stand kits for wall -mount enclosures larger than 48 inches high. D. Provide 3-1/2 inch high concrete housekeeping pads for free-standing enclosures. E. Install gasket and sealing material under panels with floor slab cutouts for conduit: F. Provide a full size equipment -grounding conductor in accordance with NEC included with the power feeder. Terminate to the incoming power circuit -grounding terminal. G. All holes for field conduits, etc. shall be cut in the field, there shall be no additional holes, factory cut holes, or hole closers allowed. Incorrect holes, additional holes, or miss -cut holes shall require that the entire enclosure be replaced. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.03 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050. `'o*K May 09 17710-19 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Cllent/TX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Select/17710 (FS-Clean) 3.04 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050. END OF SECTION May 09 17710-20 8205A10 pv J/CardolDoprnentsVWNrMFod WoNdE2MIC/5pedgmUmPe,SeloW17710 (FS-Clean) SECTION 17712 CONTROL SYSTEMS - UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES 10 KVA AND BELOW PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Single-phase line -interactive uninterruptible power supplies rated 10 kilovolt - amperes and below B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract documents are a single integrated document, and as such, all Divisions and sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub -Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Sections 16050 and 17050. B. Federal Communications Commission: 1. FCC Part 15, Class A. 2. FCC Part 15, Class B. C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 1778 - Standard for Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems and Equipment. D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA PE1 - Uninterruptible Power Systems Specification and Performance Verification. E. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): 1. IEEE 519 - Standard Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems. 2. IEEE 1184 - Guide for the Selection and Sizing of Batteries for Uninterruptible Power Systems. F. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI C62.41 (IEEE 587) - Guide for Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits. G. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): 1. ISO 9001. 1.03 DEFINITIONS ` A. Refer to Sections 16050 and 17050. ..i May 09 17712-1 8205A10 pw:llCarollo/Documents/Client/TX/Fort WorOV8205A10/SpecificabonslPre-SelecU17712 (FSClean) B. Specific Definitions: 1. Critical Load: load supplied by the UPS. 2. MOV: Metal Oxide Varistor. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide complete, factory -assembled, wired, and tested, line -interactive UPS equipment including, but not limited to, rectifier, DC bus, inverter, battery charger, batteries, automatic bypass, and ancillary components as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings. B. UPS loads as indicated on the Drawings. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01330 and 17050. B. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer and model number. 2. Catalog Data. 3. Dimensions: a. Height. b. Width. c. Depth. d. Weight. 4. Ratings: a. Input voltage. b. Output voltage. c. Input/output power factor. d. Efficiency. e. Harmonic distortion. f. Runtime. 5. Noise specifications. 6. Heat dissipation. 7. All communications requirements such as software, cards, etc. 8. Alarms and status available for remote monitoring and system health. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Power distribution block diagrams. 2. Front and rear views of equipment enclosures: a. Front elevation including all control and indicating devices. 3. Weight of overall equipment. 4. Schematic and control wiring diagrams including: a. Line and load terminals. b. Alarm and status terminals. c. Manual Maintenance bypass switch terminals. d. External wiring requirements for all communication signals. 5. Switching and overcurrent protective devices. D. Calculations: 1. Include derating for temperature and elevation as necessary. 2. UPS sizing computation: a. Apply safety factors as specified herein. May 09 17712-2 8205A10 pwJ/CamluDmmrenWOienUWort WoMVMOSA165podkativwPr&,Oeled117712 (FS-Clean) a b. Provide itemized list of critical loads, including individual VA and Watt 4 ratings. 3. Battery time calculation based on specified runtime. 4. Total battery recharge time as a function of capacity utilized. E. Record Documents: 1. Provide record drawings of installed unit(s) including layout and wiring. F. Manufacturer's Field Reports. G. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. System instruction manuals that describe troubleshooting, installation, operations, and safety procedures. 2. Recommendations for maintenance procedures and intervals. 3. Battery data / replacement information. 4. Parts list. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. A minimum of 10 years experience in the design, manufacture, and testing of solid-state UPS systems. 2. ISO 9001 certified. B. Regulatory Requirements for complete UPS system: 1. UL listed per UL Standard 1778 2. IEEE C62.41, Categories A & B. *#M./ 3. FCC 15: a. Greater than 2000 VA - Class A. b. Less than 2000 VA - Class B. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Line -interactive UPS manufacturers, one of the following or equal: 1. Free-standing UPS, 700-3000 VA: a. American Power Conversion (APC). b. Emerson Network Power - Liebert. c. Eaton Corporation - Powerware 9120. ..ol May 09 17712-3 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/C:ienVWFort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecU17712 (FS-Clean) Rack -mounted UPS, 700-3000 VA:" a. American Power Conversion (APC). b. Emerson Network Power - Liebert. c. Eaton Corporation - Powerware 9125 RM. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Line -interactive UPS requirements: 1. System characteristics: a. Provide rack -mount or free-standing UPS as specified and as indicated on the Drawings. b. The minimum VA rating of the UPS shall be greater than or equal to the safety factor (as indicated in the UPS schedule) times the connected load or 700 VA, whichever is greater. c. Battery runtime of sixty (60) minutes at full load and site ambient temperature. d. Efficiency greater than 85 percent AC -AC, all modes. e. Acoustical Noise: 1) Less than 55 dBA at 5 feet. f. Output connections: 1) Receptacles: a) 700-2500 VA units: (1) Provide a minimum of four NEMA 5-15R or 5-20R receptacles. b) 3000 VA units: (1) Provide a minimum of four NEMA 5-20R receptacles. (2) Provide at least one NEMA L5-30R receptacle. c) Greater than 3000 VA units: ' (1) Provide a minimum of four NEMA 5-20R receptacles. (2) Provide at least one NEMA L14-30R receptacle. g. Protection: 1) Undervoltage: a) Operate on battery power if incoming source voltage goes below UPS system limits of operation. 2) Overvoltage: a) Operate on battery power if incoming source voltage exceeds UPS system limits of operation. 3) Overcurrent: a) Provide input and output current -limiting protection to ensure adequate overcurrent protection for UPS. 4) Surge Protection: a) MOV-based. 2. Electrical Characteristics: a. AC Input: .* 1) Single phase. 2) Voltage: a) Fully functional within +10 percent, -15 percent of nominal voltage at full load without depleting battery. b) 120V input: (1) 2-wire plus ground. 3) Current: May 09 17712-4 8205A10 pwj CamkMoaxwts,0ian0X/Fort wart=SA1015pedicabons/Pre-SdecUm12 (FS-Clean) a) Reflected total harmonic distortion (THD) less than 25 percent at rated load. 4) Frequency range of operation: a) 57-63 Hz. 5) Power factor: a) Not less than 0.95 lagging at rated load. b. AC Output: 1) Single Phase. 2) Voltage: a) Regulation: (1) ±3 percent for 3000 VA rating and below. (2) ±5 percent for greater than 3000 VA rating - static load. (3) ±10 percent for greater than 3000 VA rating - dynamic load. b) Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) when operating on incoming power: (1) Not more than 3 percent for linear loads with a crest factor of 3: 1. (2) Not more than 5 percent for non -linear loads with a crest factor of 3:1. c) Transient Response: (1) ±7 percent for a 20-100 percent step load. (2) Transient recovery time to nominal voltage within 90 milliseconds. 3) Load power factor: a) UPS shall be capable of supporting the critical loads for all power factors experienced for their full range of operation. 4) Frequency regulation: a) Within ±3.5 Hz when on utility power. b) Within ±1.0 Hz when on UPS power. 3. Environmental Requirements: a. Operating Ambient Temperature: 1) UPS Module: 50 degrees Fahrenheit to 104 degrees Fahrenheit (10 degrees Celsius to 40 degrees Celsius). 2) Battery: 68 degrees Fahrenheit to 86 degrees Fahrenheit (20 degrees Celsius to 30 degrees Celsius). b. Operating Altitude: 1) Refer to Sections 16050 and 17050 for project site conditions. 4. System Components: a. Transient voltage surge suppression: 1) MOV-supplied protection. b. Inverter: 1) Pulse -width modulated AC output signal. 2) Overload withstand minimum time without transferring to bypass: a) 101 to 110 percent for 2 minutes. b) 111 to 125 percent for 10 seconds. c) 126 to 150 percent for 1 second. d) Greater than 150 percent for 96 milliseconds. 3) Transfer load to bypass when overload capacity is exceeded. c. Battery Rectifier/charger: 1) Recharge batteries to 90 percent in 6 hours or less. d. Batteries: 1) VRLA (Valve regulated lead acid), sealed, maintenance free. May 09 17712-5 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Cllent/TX/Fort Worth/8205A101Specificadons/Pre-SelecU17712 (FS-Clean) 2) Minimum 3-year float service life at 25 degrees Celsius. 3) Integral to UPS enclosure or housed in a matching enclosure. 4) Less than and including 6000 VA: hot-swappable. 5) Automatically perform routine battery health monitoring and provide visual, audible, and/or serial warnings if abnormal battery conditions exist. e. Automatic bypass switch: 1) Integral to UPS system. 2) Sense UPS overload, inverter failure, or over temperature, and automatically transfer loads to utility power. 3) Maximum detect and transfer time of 4-6 milliseconds. 4) Automatic re -transfer without power interruption to critical load. 5) Input shall match output in phase, voltage, frequency, and grounding. 6) Rated to carry the full input current of the UPS. 7) Provide ability for manual operation. f. Provide manual maintenance bypass switch: 1) Provides isolation of the UPS for maintenance purposes. 2) Make -before -break design so that UPS can be isolated from the critical loads by placing these loads on utility power without interruption of operation. 3) Utility and UPS status indications. 4) Supply necessary input/output cords and receptacles for connections with power source and UPS. 5) Transfer time less than 6 milliseconds. 6) Rated to carry the full input current of the UPS. 7) Standalone UL-listed. 8) Input match output in phase, voltage, frequency, and grounding. 9) UPS input connection and UPS output plug: a) 700 to 3000 VA units: NEMA receptacle and plug to match UPS connections. b) Above 3000 VA units: NEMA receptacle and plug or hardwiring to match UPS connections. 10) Utility and load connections: a) As indicated on the Drawings. 11) 700 to 3000 VA units - one of the following [or equal]: a) American Power Conversion (APC) b) Liebert Micropod 2U. c) Powerware Powerpass 9125. 12) Above 3000 VA units - by manufacturer of UPS, with connections matched for operation with UPS. g. UPS Chassis: 1) Electrically isolate from AC output neutral. 2) Include an equipment ground terminal- h. Cooling: 1) Forced air cooled. i. Locally displayed system indicators: 1) Audible alarms during abnormal conditions: a) UPS fault or overload condition. b) Battery On. c) Low battery. d) Automatic Bypass On/Off. e) Input Power On. May 09 17712-6 8205A10 pwjraroloUmu ntslCtie VrffatWAV8205Ato/SpecifimWns/Pm--- tl17712(F&Clean) f) Battery testing mode. ' j. Controls: 1) Front -panel pushbuttons: a) UPS start-up, shutdown, and manual bypass (for automatic bypass). b) Testing. ' c) Visual/audible alarms reset. 2) Applicable controls as specified in Communications Requirements. k. Alarm contacts: 1) Provide relay interface card and required interposing relays for 120 VAC discrete input status signals: a) Low Battery. b) UPS Alarm. c) On UPS Power. I. Communications Requirements: 1) RS-232. 2) Ethernet via SNMP - allow remote indication of all alarms and status signals present in the UPS: a) Provide Manufacturer's software as required. 3) USB - allow remote indication of all alarms and status signals present in the UPS: a) Provide Manufacturer's software as required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not utilize extension cords, adapters, or other electrical connectors for UPS input. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform inspections and test procedures before UPS startup: 1. Inspect equipment for signs of damage. 2. Verify installation per drawings and specifications. 3. Inspect cabinets for foreign objects. 4. Verify neutral and ground conductors are properly sized and terminated. 5. Inspect battery cases. 6. Inspect batteries for proper polarity. 7. Check power and control wiring for tightness. 8. Check terminal connectors for tightness. ` 9. Assure connection and voltage of the battery string(s). 3.03 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050. ...011 May 09 17712-7 8205A10 pw://Carollo/DocumentsJClienUMFort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Selecl/17712 (FS-Clean) 3.05 SCHEDULES TAG MINIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE / RUNTIME CONNECTION 60 Minutes 120 VAC 60 Minutes 120 VAC 60 Minutes 120 VAC 60 Minutes 120 VAC 60 Minutes 120 VAC 60 Minutes 120 VAC 60 Minutes 120 VAC END OF SECTION May 09 17712-8 pwJlCamjWDommwftrXwVrffc t Worth18205 lWVedk:e nslPm--e6Wl 712 (FS-Clean) SAFETY FACTOR NOTES 8205A10 SECTION 17720 CONTROL SYSTEMS — PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS HARDWARE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) based control systems hardware. B. Related Sections: 1, Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub -Contractors to review all Sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Specific Definitions: 1. CPU: Central Processing Unit. 2. 1/0: Input/Output. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide all PLC hardware as indicated on the Drawings and in this specification. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 17050. B. Product Data: 1. CPU: a. Processor type. b. Processor speed. c. Memory. d. Internal processor battery back-up time. 2. 1/0 Modules: a. Type. b. Standard wiring diagram. C. Calculations: 1. Submit calculations or documented estimate to verify that memory requirements of this Section are met, including spare requirements. If possible, use PLC manufacturer's calculation or estimating worksheet. May 09 17720-1 8205A10 pw://Carollo/DocumentstChent/T)UFort WorN8205A10/Specifip6ons/Pre-SelecVI7720 (FS-Clean) 2. Submit calculations to verify that spare 1/0 requirements of this Section are met. 3. Submit calculations to verify that PLC power supply requirements of this Section are met. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE t A. Provide PLC hardware manufactured at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO Standard 9001 - Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation, and Servicing. B. Additional Requirements: 1. Provide PLC system components by a single Manufacturer: a. Third -party communication modules may be used only for communication or network media functions not provided by the PLC manufacturer. 2. Use PLC Manufacturer approved hardware, such as cable, mounting hardware, connectors, enclosures, racks, communication cable, splitters, terminators, and taps. 3. All PLC hardware, CPUs, 1/0 devices, and communication devices shall be new, free from defects and produced by Manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of these products. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.10 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. B. In addition to the spare parts requirements in Section 17050, furnish: 1. One spare 1/0 card for every type of 1/0 card in the system. 2. One spare Power Supplies for every type of Power Supply in the system. 3. One spare communications card for every communications card in the system. 4. One spare remote adaptor for every remote adaptor in the system. C. Installed Spare Requirements: 1. 1/0 Points: a. Twenty percent spare capacity for each type of 1/0 signal at each PLC or RIO. Calculate the spare capacity as the number of unused points on 1/0 modules for the given 1/0 type divided by the total number of points on existing 1/0 modules for given 1/0 type. b. Wire all spare 1/0 points to field terminal blocks in the enclosure. 2. PLC Memory: a. Twenty-five percent spare program memory. May 09 17720-2 8205A10 pwXaro1ioU=maTLUC en0)UFa1Wwft8 M1Npe&5cabon&9re.SekKU17720(FS-dean) *ftwo" PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Modicon Quantum. 2. Allen-Bradley ControlLogix. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Programmable Logic Controller: 1. Construction: a. Furnish plug-in modular system. b. Chassis wired logic is not acceptable. c. Provide PLCs capable of operating in a hostile industrial environment without fans, air conditioning, or electrical filtering: 1) Temperature: 0 - 60 degrees Celsius. 2) RFI: 80 - 1000 MHz. 3) Vibration: 10 - 500 Hz. 4) Humidity: 0 - 95 percent. d. Provide internal power supplies designed to protect against over voltage and frequency distortion characteristics frequently encountered with the local power utility. e. Design the PLC system to function as a stand-alone unit that performs all of the control functions described herein completely independent from the functions of the SCADA system PC -based Operator Interfaces: 1) Failure of the SCADA system shall not impact data acquisition, control, scaling, alarm checking, or communication functions of the PLC. 2. Components General: a. Provide each PLC with the functionality required to implement the control strategies and database shown and specified in the Contract Documents. b. Furnish each PLC with floating point math and PID controller modulating algorithms. c. Provide each CPU with internal fault analysis incorporating a fail-safe mode and a dry contact output for remote location alarming, as well as a local indicator on the PLC frame in the event of a fault in the PLC. 3. Central Processing Unit: a. Configure each central processor unit so that it contain all the software relays, timers, counters, number storage registers, shift registers, sequencers, arithmetic capability, and comparators necessary to perform the specified control functions. b. Capable of interfacing with all discrete inputs, analog inputs, discrete outputs, and analog outputs to meet the specified requirements including the spare and expansion requirements c. Capable of supporting and implementing closed loop floating-point math and PID control that is directly integrated into the CPU control program. d. Design the power supply to contain capacitors to provide for orderly shutdown in the event the incoming power does not meet specifications: 1) Cease operation, under this condition and force all outputs Off. 4. Memory: a. CPU Program Memory Minimum 2.0 Mbytes ...i May 09 17720-3 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienUTXlFod Worth/8205A10/Specifica6ons/Pre-SelecYI7720 (FS-Clean) b. Non-volatile memory: On -Board PCMCIA, Compact Flash card, or SD card. c. Supply with sufficient memory to implement the specified control functions plus a reserve capacity in accordance with the requirements of this Section: 1) This reserve capacity: a) Totally free from any system use. 2) Programmed in a multi -mode configuration with multiple series or parallel contacts, counters, timers, and arithmetic functions. 5. Programming: a. Provide a system where processors are programmed by: 1) Portable laptop computer locally and. 6. PLC Power Supply: a. Input: 120 VAC. b. Provide each PLC power supply sized to meet the following requirements: 1) 120 VAC RMS plus or minus 15 percent, continuously. 2) 120 VAC RMS plus or minus 30 percent, maximum 30 seconds. 3) 120 VAC RMS plus or minus 100 percent, maximum 17 milliseconds. 4) Line spikes at 1000 VAC: a) 5000 microseconds duration. b) 0.05 percent maximum duty cycle. c. Mounted in the PLC housing. d. Sized to power all modules mounted in that housing including an average module load for any empty housing slots plus 50 percent above that total. 7. PLC Input/Output, 1/0 Modules: a. General: 1) Compatible with all of the PLCs being furnished under the contract and by the same Manufacturer as the PLCs. 2) Provide 1/0 modules that: a) Isolated and conform to IEEE Surge Withstand Standards and NEMA Noise Immunity Standards. b) Provide A/D and D/A converters with optically or galvanically isolated inputs and outputs. c) Accept dual ended inputs. 3) The commoning of grounds between 1/0 points is not acceptable. 4) Modules that are removable without having to disconnect wiring from the module's terminals: a) Utilize a swing -arm or plug-in wiring connector. 5) Provide at each PLC location the 1/0 modules required to provide the 1/0 points, including designated future 1/0 points, contained in the 1/0 Lists and/or shown on the P&IDs, control schematics, or described in the control strategies: a) Provide at each PLC location an installed spare capacity in accordance with the requirements of this Section. b) Wire all spares provided to the field terminal strip. 6) Condition, filter, and check input signals for instrument limit conditions. 7) Filter, scale, and linearize the raw signal into an engineering units based measurement. 8) Alarm measurements for high, low, rate -of -change limits, and alarm trends. May 09 17720-4 8205A10 pwitCaroaofDocume WCaenHTXTM WaM205 IMpeaficetionslP SeWW17720 (FS-aean) ...� 9) Provide external fuses mounted on the field connection terminal block for all discrete input, discrete output, and analog input 1/0 points. b. Discrete Input Modules: 1) Defined as contact closure inputs from devices external to the input module. 2) Provide inputs that are optically isolated from low energy common mode transients to 1500 volts peak from users wiring or other 1/0 Modules. 3) Individually isolated inputs. 4) With LED's to indicate status of each discrete input. 5) Input signal level: 120 VAC. 6) Provide input module points that are individually fused with blown fuse indicator lights, mounted external of the module on the output terminal strip: c. Discrete Output Modules: 1) Defined as contact closure outputs for ON/OFF operation of devices external to the output module: a) Triac outputs may be used, with the permission of the ENGINEER, care must be used in applying this type of modules to ensure that the leakage current through the output device does not falsely signal or indicate an output condition. 2) Optically isolated from inductively generated, normal mode and low energy, common mode transients to 1500 volts peak. 3) LED's to indicate status of each output point. 4) Each output point: Individually isolated. d. Analog Input Modules: 1) Signal Type: 4 to 20 mA DC. 2) Analog to digital conversion: Minimum 12-bit precision with the digital result entered into the processor. 3) The analog to digital conversion updated with each scan of the processor. Individually isolated each input.Provide individually fused analog input module points with blown fuse indicator lights, mounted external of the module on the output terminal strip: e. Analog Output Modules: 1) Signal Type: 4 to 20 mA DC. 2) Individual isolated output points each rated for loads of up to 1200 Ohms. 3) Provide individual point external fuses. f. Pre -Wired 1/0 Cable System: 1) Provide the pre -wired 1/0 cables to eliminate field wiring between the 1/0 module and field wiring terminal blocks. 2) The pre -wired 1/0 cable system consists of the following: a) Interface module terminal block assembly. (1) Installed on standard DIN rail. (2) Provided with terminals for necessary field wiring for one 1/0 module. (3) Equipped with a Manufacturer standard connector port. b) Pre -wired 1/0 cable: (1) One end terminated with Manufacturer standard connector to connect to the interface module. 14..61K May 09 17720-5 8205A10 pw://Carcilo/Documents/Client/TX/Forl Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecUl7720 (FS-Clean) (2) One end pre -wired to a removable terminal block that plugs into the front of the 1/0 module. 8. Communications Modules: a. Remote 1/0 Adapter Module: 1) For any PLC location requiring more than one housing to mount all of the 1/0 modules, or is identified as an RIO, provide the appropriate remote 1/0 adapter module for communication with the secondary housing(s). 2) Install the RIO adapter module in the PLC backplane and the RIO backplane. 3) Provide adapter modules that supports all available types of 1/0 modules required. 4) Provide all network taps, connectors, termination resistors, drop cables, and trunk cables necessary for remote 1/0 communications. 5) Complete diagnostic LEDs. b. Network Communications Modules: 1) General: a) Install communications modules in the PLC backplane. 2) Ethernet: a) Ports:2RJ-45. b) Communication Rate: 100 Mbit/s. 3) Standard Modbus PlusRS-485 orControlNet Ports 4) Provide all network taps, connectors, termination resistors, drop cables, and trunk cables necessary for remote 1/0 communications. 9. PLC Housing: a. Mount the PLC power supply, CPU, rack, and 1/0 modules in a suitable standard PLC backplane or housing. b. Provide spare slots in each PLC and RIO location in accordance with the requirements of this Section. c. Provide blank slot filler module for each spare slot. 10. Hot Standby Modules: a. Hot standby configuration requires 2 PLC processors, installed in 2 separate PLC backplanes with each processor containing the identical PLC logic application. b. Provide a hot standby synchronization module in each of the 2 PLC backplanes, linked via fiber optic cable. c. Configure the PLC processors as primary and standby controllers, with each controller running the PLC logic program and scanning associated 1/0 simultaneously. In the event of a primary controller failure, automatically switch over to the standby controller. d. The associated 1/0 signals as a result of an automatic hot standby switchover are to remain continuous and unaffected. e. Alarm at the SCADA system and locally with LED indication failure of the primary controller. B. Factory Communication: 1. Provide a communications link capability to be used by the Ozone System Supplier for on-line factory access for troubleshooting and system interaction at the owners discretion: a. Provide on-line concurrent interaction between the factory and the operator. b. Data transmission: High security Internet access. May 09 17720-6 8205A10 pwJr.vo16VowmwWC ienVfX(For1 Worh=5Al U/Speakabons/Pm-SelecV17720 (FSGean) Y C. Programming: 1. Refer to Section 17761. D. Remote Inputs and Outputs (RIOs): 1. Compatible with the vendor supplied PI -Cs being furnished under this Contract and shall be by the same Manufacturer as the PI -Cs and as a minimum includes: a. Power supply. b. Rack. c. Backplane. d. Communications module. e. 1/0 modules. f. Enclosure. 2. Provide all cables and software needed for a complete and operational RIO system as shown in the Contract Documents. 3. House the RIO system in enclosures specified in Section 17710 and consistent with the area classifications as specified in Division 16. 4. Power to the RIO modules shall be provided by the enclosure's power supplies. 5. The RIO communications modules for each RIO system shall have diagnostic LEDs. 6. Provide a group of preassigned diagnostic registers to report RIO system faults to the driver PLC. 7. The control system must continue operation should a fault occur on a single RIO drop: a. Upon clearing the fault, restart communications to that drop automatically. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 17050. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Utilize personnel to accomplish, or supervise the physical installation of all elements, components, accessories, or assemblies: 1. Employ installers who are skilled and experienced in the installation and connection of all elements, components, accessories, and assemblies. C. All components of the control system including all data network cables are the installation responsibility of the ICSC unless specifically noted otherwise. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.03 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050. May 09 17720-7 8205A10 pwJ/Cam4M)ocuments1C6en0)VFort WotVB205A10/SpeaficabwA'reSeled117720 (FS-Clean) 3.04 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. As specified in Section 17050. B. Tailor training specifically for this project that reflects the entire control system installation and configuration. C. Perform training by pre -approved and qualified representatives of the ICSC and or Manufacturer of the PLC hardware: 1. A representative of the ICSC may perform the training only if the representative has completed the Manufacturer's training course for the PLC hardware. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Refer to Section 17050. END OF SECTION OWN May 09 17720-8 8205A10 pw:UCarollo/Documents/ClienI TX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Speci0catlons/Pre-SelecU17720 (FS-Clean) ...i SECTION 17721 CONTROL SYSTEMS — HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes requirements for: 1. Human machine interface (HMI) control systems hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub -Contractors to review all Sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide all HMI hardware as identified in the Contract Documents. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 17050. B. Product Data: 1. Complete Manufacturer's brochures for each item of equipment. 2. Manufacturer's operation and installation instructions. 3. Additional requirements: a. Display type and size. b. Operator input. c. Processor type and speed. d. Memory size. e. Programming protocols. - f. Communication protocols. g. Power requirements. h. Operating temperature and humidity ranges. NEMA ratings. C. Shop drawings: 1. At a minimum, furnish the following: a. System block diagram showing relationship and connections between HMI and other devices provided. Include Manufacturer model information, and address settings. May 09 17721-1 8205A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienVTX/Fort Woft82o5A10/Specificafions/Pre-Select/17721 (FS-Clean) b. Mounting drawings with dimensions and elevations for each equipment location, including identification of all components, preparation and finish data, and nameplates. c. Electrical connection diagrams. d. Complete grounding requirements. Furnish data sheets for each component together with a technical product brochure or bulletin: a. Manufacturer's model number. b. Project equipment tag. Complete and detailed bills of materials identified by each cabinet. Include with each bill of material item the following: a. Quantity. b. Description. c. Manufacturer. d. Part numbers. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Complete installation, operations, calibration, and testing manuals as described in Section 17050. E. Record Documents: 1. Electrical connection diagrams revised to reflect any changes made in the field and submitted as record Drawings. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide HMI hardware manufactured at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO Standard 9001 - Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation, and Servicing. B. Additional Requirements: 1. Use HMI manufacturer approved hardware, such as cable, mounting hardware, connectors, enclosures, communication cable, splitters, terminators, and taps. 2. Provide hardware that is new, free from defects, of first quality, and produced by Manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of HMI products. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050. May 09 17721-2 8205A10 pwjX ,dlo+ooW ntsr wOrOutwortnl8zMIO/spedicab m-celedlMI (FS-clean) PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following: 1. Allen-Bradley: PanelView Plus. 2. Telemecanique: Magelis. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Human Machine Interface: 1. General: a. Provide Human Machine Interfaces located on the face of the enclosure as indicated on the Drawings. b. NEMA rated to maintain enclosure rating. c. Human Machine Interface consists of graphical display screen with operator input capabilities. d. Capable of stand-alone operation in conjunction with a PLC. e. Equipped with data network communication capabilities. 2. Display: a. Type: ColorTFT LCD screen. b. Resolution: 800 by 600 pixels. c. Screen size: 12.1 inch. d. Easy display viewing at any angle in various ambient light conditions. e. Operator Input: [Configurable touch screen. f. Screen Update speed: The screen update speed and screen change speed less than 1 second. �.► 3. Graphic Configuration: a. Easily configured graphics by: 1) Portable laptop computer both locally and via the PLC data network. 2) SCADA Engineer's Console via the PLC data network. b. In accordance with Section 17765. 4. Memory: a. Application: 128 MB Flash Memory 5. CPU: 650 MHz. 6. Communications: Ethernet 7. Environment: a. Temperature: 0 to 50 degrees Celsius. b. Relative Humidity: 10 to 90 percent. 8. Electrical: a. Power Supply: 120 VAC or 24 VDC 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Human Machine Interface Programming Software: 1. Refer to Specification Section 17765. B. Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS): 1. Power the HMI from the UPS at the associated Panel enclosure. C. Provide sun shield for outdoor installations. ...i May 09 17721-3 8205A10 pw:IlCarollo/DocumentslClienVTX/Fort Worth/8205A10l SpecificabonslPre-SelecV17721 (FS-Clean) 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050. B. All components of the control system including all data network cables are the installation responsibility of the ICSC unless specifically noted otherwise. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.03 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 17050. 3.04 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Provide training specifically tailored to the project that reflects the entire control system installation and configuration. C. Provide training by Manufacturer of the HMI hardware: 3.05 SCHEDULES A. Furnish all HMI hardware identified on the Contract drawings, and in the specifications. If HMI hardware is shown on one of these documents, it shall be considered to be shown on all. END OF SECTION May 09 17721-4 8205A10 pwJ/Cwdk/DocumenWCr*nurwFortWwhWMlaspeck&ms/Pm-Sdecutml (Fs -dean) SECTION 17765 HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE SOFTWARE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Application software to be used in conjunction with the specified Human Machine Interface (HMI) hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub -Contractors to review all Sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide all HMI hardware as indicated in section 17721. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 17050. B. Product Data: 1. Complete Manufacturer's brochures that identify HMI software and options. Mark up to clearly show options and components to be provided, and cross out any options or components that will not be provided. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Graphic screens: 1. Color printouts of each graphic screen and control pop -ups. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Complete installation, operation, and testing manuals. 2. Complete color printouts of each graphic screen and control pop -ups. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. May 09 17765-1 8205A10 ' pwJ1Ca Mt Wap VMA1WMdks#msFre-SeI8Wt7755 (FSLIean) B. System Compatibility: 1 • The software must be the standard operating software system designed specifically for use with the Human Machine Interface hardware. 2. The software must be furnished and developed by the Manufacturer of the HMI hardware. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17050. Y 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Provide system upgrades and maintenance fixes for a period of three years from substantial completion. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide the HMI graphic software system manufactured by the HMI hardware Manufacturer. B. One of the following or equal: 1. Rockwell Software RSView. 2. Mod►con Vijeo Designer. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Human Machine Interface Software: 1. Provide a complete software package to be used for programming the necessary screens and operator interaction with the HMIs. 2. Furnish software with preconfigured symbols, objects, graphics, and imported bitmaps for the generation of the displays. 3. Software must allow bitmaps to be imported or exported to or from other applications. 4. Capable of generating custom reports, complete with screen prints. 5. Capable of working with multiple screens concurrently. 6. Provide dialog boxes for defining object attributes. 7. Configure objects using fill in dialog boxes. 8. Furnish graphic and text editor that allows custom formatting in order to customize and change the appearance of objects and text: a. Allow selection of different fill patterns to define object status. 9. As a minimum, provide the following object capabilities: a. Operator Inputs: 1 i Momentary Push Button. May 09 17765-2 8205A10 pwJr.irokJDowmentsC%nVWonworaJaiMI ?M01s0m) 2) Maintained Push Button. 3) Latched Push Button. 4) Multistate Push Button. 5) Keypad Enable Button. 6) Cursor Point. b. Control List Selectors: ' 1) Standard Control List. 2) Piloted Control List. c. Display Objects: 1) Bar Graph. 2) Scale. 3) Message Display. 4) Multistate Indicator. 5) List Indicator. 6) Numeric Data Display. d. Screen Selector Objects: 1) Go To. 2) Return. 3) Screen List Selector. e. Embedded Variables: 1) Time. 2) Date. 3) Numeric Variable. f. Graphics: 1) Lines. 2) Shapes. 3) Freeform Drawings. 4) Imported Graphics. 5) Background Text. 6) Selection Table for standard ISA symbols. 7) PID Controller Faceplate. g. Alarm screens. 10. Documentation: a. Provide complete user documentation, including examples of how to operate the various modules within the system. b. Provide the documentation in electronic format, HTML based with the ability to search for topics by keyword or search or specific text. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 17050. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050. B. All tags used and/or assigned as part of the application programming work are to use the Tag and Loop identifications found on the P&IDs. May 09 17765-3 8205A10 140MV, pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienVrX/Fort Worth/8205A10/SpedBcations/Pre-SelecVl7765 (FS-Clean) C. Station Graphics: .. 1. Configure the graphic displays for each device in the Ozone process area, including but not limited to: a. Symbols for: 1) Pumps. 2) Valves. 3) Major instruments. " 4) Flowmeters. 5) Pressure transmitter. 6) Compressors. 7) Blowers- b. Alarm symbols including intrusion alarm. c. Relevant test and operational data. d. Status for each controller or controlled device: 1) Hand. 2) Off. 3) Automatic. 4) Local. 5) Remote. 6) Run. 7) Call. 8) Fail. 9) Open. 10) Close. 11) Hold, 12) Modulate. e. Depict a change of state of equipment by a change in color. 2. Production and Usage Bar Graph: a. Depict the production for each major piece of equipment, as determined during the requisite graphics meeting, within the treatment plant, summarized to type, and total usage, with a bar graph and numeric value for each analog value. 3. Furnish a minimum of 15 screens, to be directed by the ENGINEER and OWNER, during construction for each HMI. 3.02 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Perform the training using a pre -approved and qualified representatives of the ICSC and or Manufacturer of the HMI software: 1. A representative of the ICSC may perform the training only if the representative has completed the Manufacturer's training course for the HMI software. END OF SECTION May 09 17765-4 8205A10 pwXardWocWWWGienUfX/Fort W0rhW 5A1V4edkationslPmSe"1r755 (FS-Clean) SECTION 17901 SCHEDULES - FIELD INSTRUMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The Schedules Field Instrument is not a take -off list. Refer to Drawings and Specifications for additional information. Where any discrepancies between this list and the P&ID drawings arise, the P&ID shall govern. B. Abbreviations used in the Instrument Index are defined on the Drawings. PART PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCHEDULES FIELD INSTRUMENTS A. Schedules Field Instruments attached. END OF SECTION ..i May 09 17901-1 8205A10 pw://Carollo/DOcuments/Cllenti-WFort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-Seled/17901 (FS-Clean) This Page Intentionally Left Blank May 09 17901-2 8205A10 perJlCa dWDocumntslCNen1Wort WoiMO5A7Q5Wdkabom/Pre-Seled17901(FS-Clean) T 4 SECTION 17903 I/O LIST y PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The 1/0 list is not a take -off list. Refer to Drawings and Specifications for additional information. Where any discrepancies between this list and the P&ID drawings arise, the P&ID shall govern. B. Abbreviations used in the 1/0 list are defined on the Drawings. PART PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 1/0 LIST A. 1/0 list attached. END OF SECTION May 5, 2009 - DRAFT s-QW) 'this Page Intentionally Left Blank m rai May 5, 2009 - DRAFT 17903-2 kd pwJrarolblDDcum9nWCH9nVWFort Wohh1M5A10ISpecificabonslPreSelectl17903 (FS-Clean) SECTION 17903 1/O LIST PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The 1/0 list is not a take -off list. Refer to Drawings and Specifications for additional information. Where any discrepancies between this list and the P&ID drawings arise, the P&ID shall govern. B. Abbreviations used in the 1/0 list are defined on the Drawings. PART PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 1/0 LIST A. 1/0 list attached. END OF SECTION May 5, 2009 - DRAFT 17903-1 pwJlCaroibDocumentslClienffXIFort Worthl8205A101SpecificebmslPre-SelwVl79D3 (FSgean) This Page Intentionally Left Blank =f --1 May 5, 2009 - DRAFT 17903-2 VAdXadWDocument9/C5wtrr lFort WmMMSAIO/Specifirabong'rL SelecUl7903 (FSGean) SECTION 17950 TESTING, CALIBRATION, AND COMMISSIONING PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Testing requirements that apply to Ozone process control and instrumentation system. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the OZONE SYSTEM SUPPLIER and its Sub -Ozone System Suppliers to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to Section 17050. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Specific Definitions: 1. PTO: Profibus Trade Organization. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01330. B. General: 1. Reference additional detailed test submittal scheduling and prerequisite requirements in Section 17050, Article 1.09. 2. Submit Test Plans, Procedures, Forms, and Binders for approval by the ENGINEER before scheduling or performing tests. C. Overall Test Plan: 1. Develop and submit an overall testing plan for the OZONE CONTROL SYSTEM. The Overall Test Plan to be reviewed and approved by the ENGINEER before detailed test plans, procedures, and forms will be reviewed. 2. Provide a preliminary testing schedule to show the sequence of tests and commissioning as they apply to each process system and each PLC. 3. Provide examples of proposed forms and checklists. D. Test Procedures: 1. Develop and submit a detailed test procedures to show that the integrated OZONE CONTROL system hardware and software is fully operational and in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. May 09 17950-1 8205A10 NUMVP pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientrTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/SpeciBcadons/Pre-SeiecU17950 (FS-Clean_a) 2. Provide a statement of test objectives for each test. 3. Describe sequentially the steps to be followed in verifying the correct operation of each process system, including all features described in the loop descriptions, control strategies, and shown in the P&IDs. Implied or generic test procedures are not acceptable. 4. Specify who will perform the tests, specifically what testing equipment will be used (including serial numbers and NIST-traceable calibration), how the testing equipment will be used. 5. Describe the expected role of the ENGINEER, as well as any requirements for assistance from OWNER's staff. 6. Provide the forms and checklists to be used. E. Test Forms: 1. Provide test and calibration forms and checklists for each of the following: a. Calibration. b. Factory Acceptance Tests. c. Loop Validation Tests. d. Functional Test. e. Performance Test. 2. Test forms shall include the detailed test procedures, or shall include clear references to separate pages containing the complete test procedure applicable to each form. If references to procedures are used, the complete procedure shall be included with each test binder. 3. Every page of each test form shall include project name, date, time, name of person conducting the test, signature of person conducting the test, and for witnessed tests, place for signature of person (ENGINEER and OWNER) witnessing the test. F. Factory Acceptance Test Procedure additional minimal requirements: 1. Prepare and submit a factory acceptance test procedure which includes: a. Control system testing block diagram. b. Estimated test duration. c. Details on the simulator construction, components, and operation. G. Test Reports: 1. At the conclusion of each test, submit a complete Test Report, including all test results and certifications. 2. Include all completed test binders, forms, and checklists. 3. Record test results and verify that all test requirements and conditions have been met. 4. Submission, review, and acceptance of each Test Report is generally required before the start of the sub -system. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test Personnel: 1. Furnish qualified technical personnel to perform all calibration, testing, and verification. The test personnel are required to be familiar with this project and the equipment, software, and systems before being assigned to the test program. May 09 17950-2 8205A10 , prJlCarddDoCi atelClient(WOd WolhWOM1&SpwkationslPreSeWW17950 (FS-Clean_a) 1.06 SCHEDULING r A. Refer to Section 17050. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Acceptance Test - General: 1. Before shipment to the project site, the complete OZONE CONTROL SYSTEM including all operator stations, PLCs, VCPs, communications equipment, and other equipment, shall be assembled, connected, and all software loaded for a full functional Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) of the integrated system. 2. Perform tests to show that the integrated system hardware and software is fully operational and in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. The Ozone System Supplier test personnel shall be responsible for performing tests and recording results. 4. The Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) will be witnessed by the ENGINEER and/or other representatives of the OWNER. 5. Right of Observation: The OWNER retains the right to observe all factory test activities including any and all subsystem preparation, pretests, troubleshooting, retests, warm-up, and software modification and/or update. 6. The OWNER reserves the right to test any specified function, whether or not explicitly stated in the test submittal. 7. Costs for Repeating Testing: The OZONE SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall pay for ENGINEER's and other OWNER's representatives' travel, subsistence, for witnessing the repetition of failed tests. 8. Correction of Deficiencies: Any deficiencies observed during the test shall be corrected and retested before completion of the test. 9. Any changes and/or corrections shall be noted on the test forms. ENGINEER shall witness the revisions and/or corrections prior to leaving the test site. 10. If the corrections and/or revisions are too extensive to be made while the ENGINEER is scheduled to be at the FAT test site, the FAT shall be, at the ENGINEER's sole discretion, considered failed, and the test shall be restarted at a later date. All costs for the re -test shall be borne by the OZONE SYSTEM SUPPLIER. B. Testing Simulation: 1. The FAT may make use of hardware simulators that contain switches, pilot lights, variable analog signal generators, and analog signal level displays, which shall be connected to the 1/0 points within the OZONE CONTROL System. All inputs and outputs shall be simulated and proper control and system operation shall be validated. 2. The hardware simulator may consist of a PLC, operating under a SCADA software package, or other approved software that has its 1/0 points wired to PLC's 1/0 points. Software operating on a PC may then act as the switches, pilot lights, variable analog signal generators, and analog signal level displays. May 09 17950-3 8205A10 44/ pwllCarollo/Documents/ClienUTX/Fort Worth/8205A70/Specifications/Pre-Select/17950 (FS-Clean_a) C. Panel Inspections: 1. The ENGINEER to inspect each control panel for completeness, workmanship, fit and finish, and compliance with the Contract Documents and the approved shop drawings. 2. Provide panel inspection forms as part of the Factory Acceptance Test procedures submittal. 3. Inspection to include: layout, mounting, wire and data cable routing, wire tags, power supply, components and wiring, 1/0 components layout (including terminals, wiring and relays), device layout on doors and front panels, and proper ventilation operation. D. 1/0 Test: 1. Verify that 1/0 is properly wired to field terminals and is properly mapped into the PLC and the rest of the OZONE CONTROL system, including all operator interface devices. 2. Test Methodology: a. Discrete inputs: Apply appropriate input at panel terminal, observe input card indicator, observe data value at each indicated data address, observe data received on all operator interface displays b. Discrete outputs: Issue commands from operator interface screen verify output card indicator light and measure response at field wiring terminals. c. Analog inputs: Apply appropriate analog input signal at panel terminals, observe data value at each indicated data address, and observe data properly received at each operator screen. Check each point at 0 percent, 50 percent, and 100 percent of scale. d. Analog outputs: Enter scaled values in the output buffer file, observe the output data file value, and measure appropriate response at panel wiring terminals. 3. Test forms to include, but not be limited to: a. PLC and panel number. b. 1/0 Type. c. 1/0 tag name. d. Panel terminal block numbers. e. Rack/slot/number of 1/0 point. f. Check -off for correct response for each 1/0 point. g. Space for comments. h. Initials of individual performing test. i. Date test was performed_ j. Witness' signature lines. E. System Configuration Test: 1. Demonstrate and test the setup and configuration of all operator stations. 2. Demonstrate all general OZONE CONTROL system functions. 3. Demonstrate proper operation of log -on and other access security functions. 4. Demonstrate the proper operation of all historical data storage, trend, display, backup, and report functions. 5. Demonstrate the proper operation of the alarm display and acknowledgement functions. 6. Test Forms: a. For each test, list the specification page and paragraph of the function demonstrated, and provide a description of the function. b. List the specific tests and steps to be conducted. May 09 17950-4 8205A10 N%0011 pw:IlCarollWDocuments/ClienUTX/Fort WorthIB205A10/SpecificalionslPre-SelecVl7950 (FS-Clean_a) N..- c. For each function, list all of the different sub -functions or ways the function �61can be used, and provide a test check -off for each: 1) Include signature and date lines. F. Control Logic Test: 1. The purpose of this test is to verify that all software functions and logic work as lo specified, along with any hardwired logic or functions in the tested control panels. 2. Testing Requirements: a. Demonstrate each function described in Section 17110. Demonstrate in detail how each function operates under a variety of operating scenarios. b. Demonstrate the proper operation of the programming and configuration for the Ozone Control Strategy. Test the Strategy function by function basis. Loops with similar or identical logic must each be tested individually. c. Demonstrate the proper operation of all digital communication links and networks. Verify each digital communication 1/0 point. d. Failure Testing: In addition to demonstrating correct operation of all specified features, special effort shall be made to demonstrate how the system responds to and recovers from abnormal conditions including,: equipment failure, operator error, communications subsystem error, communications failures, simulated/forced software lockups, power failure (both utility power and power to SCADA hardware), process equipment failure, and high system loading conditions. 3. Test Forms: a. Include the fully revised and approved for the loop being tested. b. Any deficiencies or operational changes shall be noted on the forms for ,%M." correction and documentation: 1) Include signature and date lines. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17050. B. Installation Supervision: 1. Provide in accordance with Section 17050. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: 1. The OWNER reserves the right to test any specified function, whether or not explicitly stated in the test submittals. 2. Failure Testing: a. In addition to demonstrating correct operation of all specified features, demonstrate how the system reacts and recovers from abnormal conditions including, but not limited to: 1) Equipment failure. 2) Operator error. 3) Communications sub -system error. 4) Power failure. May 09 17950-5 8205A10 ,%..e pw://CarollolDocuments/ClienUMFort Worth/8205A10/Speaficafions/Pre-Select/17950 (FS-Clean_a) 5) Process equipment failure. —` 6) High system loading conditions. 3. Conduct testing Monday through Friday during normal working hours for no more than 8 hours per day. Testing at other times requires approval of the ENGINEER. B. Manufacturer Services: 1. Provide in accordance with Section 17050. C. Sequencing: 1. See additional requirements in Section 17050, Article 1.09, Sequencing. D. Calibration: 1. After installation but before starting other tests, calibrate and adjust all instruments, devices, valves, and system, in conformance with the component Manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with these Specifications. 2. Components having adjustable features are to be set carefully for the specific conditions and applications of this installation. Test and verify that components and/or systems are within the specified limits of accuracy. 3. Replace either individually or within a system, defective elements that cannot achieve proper calibration or accuracy. 4. Calibration Points: a. Calibrate each analog instrument at 0 percent, 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent of span, using test instruments with accuracies traceable to National Institute of Testing Standards. 5. Field verify calibration of instruments that have been factory -calibrated to determine whether any of the calibrations are in need of adjustment. 6. Analyzer Calibration: a. Calibrate and test each analyzer system as a workable system after installation. Follow the testing procedures directed by the Manufacturers' technical representatives. 7. Complete instrument calibration sheets for every field instrument and analyzer. B. Calibration Tags: a. Attach a calibration and testing tag to each instrument, piece of equipment, or system. b. Sign the tag when calibration is complete. E. Loop Check/Validation: 1. Check all control loops under simulated operating conditions by causing a range of input signals at the primary control elements and observing appropriate responses of the respective control and monitoring elements, final control elements, and the graphic displays associated with the OZONE CONTROL System. Issue commands from the OZONE CONTROL system and verify proper responses of field devices. Use actual process inputs wherever available. 2. Provide "End -to -End" tests: a. Test OZONE CONTROL System inputs from field device to OZONE CONTROL system operator workstations. b. Test OZONE CONTROL System outputs from OZONE CONTROL System operator workstations to field devices and equipment. c. Observe and record responses at all intermediate devices. May 09 17950-6 8205A10 pvJXard0Dmment!dCknVTXJFat WathI6 M1015padkatio mRm,9eled17950 (FS-Oean_a) d. Test and record operator commands and signal readouts to each operator device where there is more than one operator interface point. e. For each signal, perform separate tests for computer screens, local operator interface (LOI) screens, and local control panels. 3. Retest any loop following any necessary corrections. 4. Apply simulated sensor inputs corresponding to 0 percent, 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent of span for networks that incorporate analog elements, and monitor the resulting outputs to verify compliance to accuracy tolerance requirements. 5. Apply continuously variable up and down analog inputs to verify the proper operation and setting of discrete devices (signal trips, etc.). 6. Apply provisional settings on controllers and alarm set points. 7. Record all analog loop test data on test forms. 8. Exercise each field device requiring an analog command signal, through the OZONE CONTROL System. Vary, during the validation process, the output from the PLC System and measure the end device position, speed, etc. to confirm the proper operation of the device for the supplied analog signal. Manually set the output from the HMI screen at 0 percent, 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent and measure the response at the final device and at any intermediate devices. 9. Exercise each field device providing a discrete input to the OZONE CONTROL System in the field and observe the proper operation at the operator workstation: a. Test limit switches, set limits mechanically, and observe proper operation at the operator workstation. b. Exercise starters, relay contacts, switch contacts, and observe proper operation. c. Calibrate and test instruments supplying discrete inputs, and observe proper operation. 10. Test each device accepting a discrete output signal from the OZONE CONTROL System. Perform the appropriate operator action at the OZONE CONTROL operator stations (including LOls, if present) and confirm the proper operation of the field device: a. Stroke valves through outputs from the OZONE CONTROL System, and confirm proper directional operation. Confirm travel limits and any feedback signals to the OZONE CONTROL System. b. Exercise motors starters from the OZONE CONTROL System and verify proper operation through direct field observation. c. Exercise solenoids and other field devices from the OZONE CONTROL System and verify proper operation through direct field observation. 11. Include in the test forms: a. Analog input devices: 1) Calibration range. 2) Calibration data: Input, output, and error at each test value. 3) Analog input associated PLC register address. 4) Value in PLC register at each test point. 5) Value displayed at each operator interface station. b. Analog output devices: 1) Calibration range. 2) Test value at each test point. 3) Analog output associated PLC register address. 4) Control variable value at field device at each test point. May 09 17950-7 8205A10 ,"MOP pw://CarollolDocuments/ClienVTXlFort Worth/8205A10/SpecficationslPre-Select/17950 (FS-Clean_a) 5) Physical device response at each test point:' a) Response to be actual valve position, or motor speed, etc. c. Discrete instrument input devices: 1) Switch setting, contact action, and dead band. 2) Valve position switches: a) Response in the PLC as the valve is stroked from the PLC. b) Field observed actual valve position, and valve indicator position as the valve is stroked from the PLC. 3) Operator interface switches (control stations and other pilot devices) and associated response. 4) Starter and drive auxiliary device contact response. 5) Response of all other discrete inputs to the PLC. d. Discrete output devices: 1) Observed response of field device to the discrete output from the PLC. 2) Observe the proper operation of Open, Close, Start, Stop, On, Off, etc. F. Functional Test: 1. General: a. Commence Functional tests after completion of all loop check/validation tests: 1) Reference Section 17050, Article 1.09, Sequencing and Scheduling. b. Functional to demonstrate proper operation of all systems with process equipment operating over full operating ranges under conditions as closely resembling actual operating conditions as possible. c. Functional testing to generally occur in conjunction with Functional Testing specified in Section 01756. d. Additional tests are specified in other Division 17 sections. e. Follow approved detailed test procedures and check lists for all Functional and test activities. 2. Control Logic Operational Validation: a. The purpose of Control Logic Validation is to field test the operation of the complete control system, including all parts of the OZONE CONTROL System, all vendor control panels all monitored/controlled equipment, and final control elements. b. Demonstrate all control functionality shown on the P&IDs, and specified in the Control Strategies. c. Test in detail on a function -by -function basis. d. Thoroughly test all hardware and software functions: 1) Including all hardwired and software control circuit interlocks and alarms. e. Test final control elements, controlled equipment, control panels, and ancillary equipment under start-up, shut down, and steady-state operating conditions to verify all logic and control is achieved. f. Control Logic Validation tests to include: a repeat of all Control Logic Tests from the Factory Acceptance Tests, modified and expanded to include all field instruments, control panels, circuits, and equipment. 3. Loop Tuning: a. Optimally tune all electronic control stations and software control logic incorporating proportional, integral, or derivative control. Apply control May 09 17950-8 8205A10 prlramOdDomwftUienVWonWorh MIMpedica d m-Sdedi795o(Fs-Ckan_a) 1 �1� e rocs t disturbances - • a� � red to gain, reset, or rate settings as requ {1tS o�vkjat1'�g b. Verify the transient stability of final control c signal d�S'�UCb2.C10E� range of operating conditions, by applying Q1 monitoring the amplitude and decay rate of control parametef OSClli fMnS and making necessary controller adjustments as required to eliminate excessive oscillatory amplitudes and decay rates. As a minimum, achieve 1/4 wave amplitude decay ratio damping (subsidence ratio of 4) under the full range of operating conditions. c. if excessive oscillations or system instability occur, as determined by the ENGINEER, continue tuning and parameter adjustments, or develop and implement any additional control algorithms needed to achieve satisfactory control loop operation. 4. Functional Certification: a. Document via a certified report the completion of all Functional and test activities: 1) Including all test forms with test data entered, submitted to the ENGINEER with a clear and unequivocal statement that all Functional test requirements have been satisfied. 3.03 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Performance Tests: 1. After successful completion of the Functional test as accepted by the ENGINEER and OWNER, the performance test can proceed. 2. Complete training and instruction of the OWNER's personnel in conformance with paragraph 1.09 Sequencing and Scheduling of Section 17050. B. The Performance Test may be performed concurrently with the 7-Day Operational Test noted in Section 01650. C. General: 1. The performance test is part of the Work that must be completed as a condition of substantial completion for the entire project. 2. The complete OZONE CONTROL system must run continuously for the duration of the performance test. During this period, exercise all system functions, and log for cause of failure, any system interruption and accompanying component, subsystem, or program failure: a. Include time of occurrence and duration of each failure. 3. Provide a competently trained technician or programmer on call for the project site during all normal working days and hours from the start of the performance test until final acceptance of the system. Response time to the project site: a. 24 hours or less, for a major failure. 4. The Performance Test duration: a. Seven days. 5. Test and use; the entire process control system under standard operating conditions. May 09 pw17950-9 llCarollWpocuments/C6enUT)(/Fort Worth182"A10/SpeCiAGBUonslPreSeleCV1795D (F&Clean_a) 8205A10 OZONEWNTRO system Testing: 1• Exercise each system function, e.g., status report, alarms, logs, and displays several times at a minimum, and in a manner that approximates "normal" system operation. 2. Failure of the OZONE CONTROL System during testing shall be considered as indicating that the programs and operating system do not meet the requirements of the specifications. a. Corrective action is required before restarting the acceptance test. E. Failures: 1. Classify failures as either major or minor. a. Minor Failure: 1) A small and non -critical component failure or software problem that can be corrected by the OWNER's operators. 2) Log this occurrence but this is not a reason for stopping the test and is not grounds for non -acceptance. 3) Should the same or similar component failure occur repeatedly, this may be considered as grounds for non -acceptance. 4) Failure of one printer, or operator station is considered a minor failure providing all functions can be provided by backup equipment, i.e. alternate printers and operator station, and repairs can be made and equipment returned to service within 3 working days. b. Major Failure: 1) Considered to have occurred when a component, subsystem, software control, or program fault causes a halt in or improper operation of the system and/or when a technician's work is required to make a repair or to re -initiate operation of the system. 2) Cause termination of, the performance test. 3) Start a new acceptance test when the causes of a major failure have been corrected. 4) A failure is also considered major when failure of any control system that results in an overflow, underflow, overdose, or underdose condition occurs. F. Technician Report: 1. Each time a technician is required to respond to a system malfunction, he or she must complete a report which includes details concerning the nature of the complaint or malfunction and the resulting repair action required and taken. 2. If a malfunction occurs which clears itself or which the operator on duty is able to correct, no report is required or logged as specified above. 3. If a technician has performed work but no report is written, then a major failure is considered to have occurred. 4. Each report shall be submitted within 24 hours to the ENGINEER and the - OWNER, or its representative. 3.04 SCHEDULES A. Example Test Forms: 1. Example test forms are attached at the end of this Section. They may be used Y as a starting point for the development of project -specific test forms for this project. 17950-10 8205A10 May 09 �7g6Q(FS-gear x) �J r 2. The example test forms are not intended to be complete or comprehensive. Edit and supplement the forms to meet the requirements for testing and test forms specified in this Section and other Contract Documents. May 09 17950-11 8205A10 pwJ/CamHoD=rnentslQwVTUoA Worthla205At01Specificabons/Pre•SelecVl7950 (FS-Oean_a) INSTALLATION AND CERTIFICATION CHECKLIST DOCUMENTATION INSTRUMENT LOOP NO. SERVICE DESCRIPTION A COPY OF LATEST ISSUE OF THE FOLLOWING DOCUMENTS ARE INCLUDED IN THIS INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION FILE: ❑ INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEETS (FOR ALL INSTRUMENTS IN THE LOOP) ❑ INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS (FOR ALL INSTRUMENTS IN THE LOOP) ❑ INSTRUMENT LOOP WIRING DIAGRAMS ❑ INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION CHECKLIST ❑ SIZING CALCULATIONS ❑ INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE (APPLICABLE PART) ❑ NAMEPLATE SCHEDULE (APPLICABLE PART) ❑ VENDOR LITERATURE CALIBRATION INFORMATION INSTRUMENT LOOP IS PART OF AN EQUIPMENT START UP/SHUTDOWN INTERLOCKS? REMARKS: CHECKED BY (COMPANY) SIGNATURE DATE ACCEPTED BY (COMPANY) SIGNATURE DATE May 09 17950-12 prJC -dWD-- sCienUWod WodM82MIWSp okabm$PreSeledl7950 (FSgean_a) ❑ ❑ No Yes 8205A10 --e I i r SWITCHES INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION CHECKLIST INSTRUMENT LOOP NO. SERVICE DESCRIPTION CHECK BELOW, WHEN COMPLETED: ❑ BENCH CALIBRATED PER SPEC SHEET ❑ VERIFIED PER P81D NO ❑ CORRESPONDS TO SPECIFICATION SHEET NO. ❑ WIRING CORRECT PER INSTRUMENT LOOP DRAWING NO. ❑ INSTALLATION CORRECT PER DETAIL NO. ❑ ACCESSORIES ARE PRESENT AND PROPERLY INSTALLED ❑ INSTRUMENT IS ACCESSIBLE FOR MAINTENANCE OR REMOVAL ❑ ENGRAVED LAMINATED NAMEPLATE (NO SPELLING ERRORS) PERMANENTLY INSTALLED ❑ ❑ INSTRUMENT LOOP IS PART OF AN EQUIPMENT START UPlSHUTDOWN INTERLOCKS? No Yes %mw May 09 17950A3 8205A10 PwJX- bDwAMW KA"'m ffcfft W008MIOVSpe0rx9W=Pre,%WV17%0 ff$- an s) FIELD CALIBRATION CHECK 1 CONTACT FOR CONTACTIS NO. FUNCTION SIGNAL TO AT SPECIFIED VALUE FOR ACTUAL TRIP POINT WAS... 1 ❑ ALARM ❑ INCR ❑ OPEN SET PT = SET PT = ,r ❑ S/D PERM ❑ DECR ❑ CLOSE RESET = RESET = 2 ❑ ALARM ❑ INCR ❑ OPEN SET PT = SET PT = ❑ S/D PERM ❑ DECR ❑ CLOSE RESET = RESET = 3 ❑ ALARM ❑ INCR ❑ OPEN SET PT = SET PT = ❑ S/D PERM ❑ DECR ❑ CLOSE RESET = RESET = 4 ❑ ALARM ❑ INCR ❑ OPEN SET PT = SET PT = ❑ S/D PERM ❑ DECR ❑ CLOSE RESET = I) RESET = I NOTE: PERM IS ABBREVIATED FOR PERMISSIVE Q May 09 17950-14 8205A10 pwjr-v leV wv wrMsdU-CXXW WoAh MM1Opedfkaft lPm Seledl795D (FS Clean_a) SWITCHES INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION CHECKLIST REMARKS: CHECKED BY (COMPANY) ACCEPTED BY (COMPANY) SIGNATURE SIGNATURE DATE DATE May 09 17950-15 8205A10 \u/ pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/TX/Fort Worth/8205A70/Specifiglions/Pre-Select117950 (FS-Clean_a) TRANSMITTER/CONTROLLER/INDICATOR INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION CHECKLIST INSTRUMENT LOOP IS PART OF AN EQUIPMENT START UP/SHUTDOWN INTERLOCKS? INSTRUMENT TYPE INDICATOR ❑ TRANSMITTER ❑ CONTROLLER ❑ ❑ OTHER DESCRIPTION INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERIAL NO. SERVICE DESCRIPTION BENCH CALIBRATION CHECK INPUT RANGE = I OUTPUT RANGE _ HEAD CORRECTION = I ❑ LINEAR CALIBRATED SPAN = ❑ SQUARE ROOT % CALIB SPAN DESIRED VALUE ACTUAL VALUE EXPECTED VALUE II 0 50 - -- 100 CHECK BELOW, WHEN COMPLETED: ❑ BENCH CALIBRATED PER SPEC SHEET ❑ VERIFIED PER P&1D NO ❑ CORRESPONDS TO SPECIFICATION SHEET NO. ❑ WIRING CORRECT PER INSTRUMENT LOOP DRAWING NO. ❑ INSTALLATION CORRECT PER DETAIL NO. Cl ACCESSORIES ARE PRESENT AND PROPERLY INSTALLED ❑ INSTRUMENT IS ACCESSIBLE FOR MAINTENANCE OR REMOVAL ❑ ENGRAVED LAMINATED NAMEPLATE (NO SPELLING ERRORS) PERMANENTLY INSTALLED FIELD CALIBRATION CHECK INPUT RANGE = OUTPUT RANGE _ % CALIB SPAN DESIRED VALUE ACTUAL VALUE EXPECTED VALUE 0 50 100 ❑ ❑ No Yes ACTUAL VALUE ACTUAL VALUE *-mm/ May 09 17950-16 8205A10 N%woe pw.11Carollol0ocuments/ClienKiXlFort Worthl9205A10/Specirutions/Pre Selectl17950 (FS-aean_a) u TRANSMITTER/CONTROLLER/INDICATOR INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION CHECKLIST ❑ DIRECT ❑ REVERSE ❑ ACTION VERIFIED AT 50% SPAN ❑ ACTION VERIFIED AT SPAN r SETTING PRE -TUNE POST -TUNE CONTROLLER SETTINGS GAIN PB RESET DERIV. HIGH LOW ELEV. ZERO (INTEGRAL) (RATE) LIMIT LIMIT ZERO SUPP I I I GAIN PB FLOW: 1.0 100 LEVEL 1.0 100 PRESSURE 2.0 50 TEMP. 4.0 25 REMARKS CHECKED BY (COMPANY) SIGNATURE DATE) PRE -TUNE SETTINGS RESET (REPEAT/MIN) RESET (MIN/REPEAT) 10 0.1 MIN. MAX. 2.0 0.5 0.1 10 ACCEPTED BY (COMPANY) SIGNATURE DATE May 09 17950-17 pwJ/Carollo/Documents/ClienYMFort Worth/8205A1DlSpecificatons/Pre-SelecU17950 (FS-Clean_a) DERIVATION (MINUTES) N/A N/A NIA OFF 8205A10 ANALYZERS INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION CHECKLIST INSTRUMENT LOOP IS PART OF AN EQUIPMENT START UP/SHUTDOWN INTERLOCKS? TYPE OF INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT TAG NO. SERVICE DESCRIPTION SERIAL NO. CHECK BELOW, IF TRUE: ❑ BENCH CALIBRATED PER SPEC SHEET ❑ VERIFIED PER P&ID NO. ❑ CORRESPONDS TO SPECIFICATION SHEET NO. ❑ WIRING CORRECT PER INSTRUMENT LOOP DRAWING NO. ❑ INSTALLATION CORRECT PER DETAIL NO. ❑ ACCESSORIES ARE PRESENT AND PROPERLY INSTALLED ❑ INSTRUMENT IS ACCESSIBLE FOR MAINTENANCE OR REMOVAL ❑ ENGRAVED LAMINATED NAMEPLATE (NO SPELLING ERRORS) PERMANENTLY INSTALLED REMARKS CHECKED BY (COMPANY) SIGNATURE DATE DATE ACCEPTED BY (COMPANY) SIGNATURE ❑ ❑ NO YES May 09 17950-18 8205A10 %wool pwJ/Camllc/DocumentslClienVFX/Fort Worth/8205A10ISpeciFicationslPre-SelecUl7950 (FS-Clean_a) w CONTROLVALVES INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION CHECKLIST INSTRUMENT LOOP IS PART OF AN EQUIPMENT START UP/SHUTDOWN INTERLOCKS? NO YES VALVE TAG NO. SERIAL NO. ❑ TRANSDUCER TAG NO. SERIAL NO. ❑ SOLENOID TAG NO. SERIAL NO. ❑ VOLUME BOOSTER TAG NO. SERIAL NO. ❑ POSITIONER SERIAL NO. SERVICE DESCRIPTION TRANSDUCER CHECK INPUT RANGE _ OUTPUT RANGE _ CALIBRATED SPAN = CALIBRATED SPAN = I BENCH SPAN DESIRED ACTUAL SPAN EXPECTED ACTUAL 0% 0% 50% 50% 100% 100% FIELD Now I SPAN DESIRED ACTUAL SPAN EXPECTED ACTUAL 0% 0% 50% 50% 100% 100% CHECK BELOW, IF TRUE: ❑ BENCH CALIBRATED PER ABOVE ❑ VERIFIED PER P&ID NO. ❑ CORRESPONDS TO SPECIFICATION SHEET NO. ❑ VALVE SPECIFICATION NO. ❑ TRANSDUCER SPECIFICATION NO. ❑ SOLENOID SPECIFICATION NO. ❑ WIRING CORRECT PER INSTRUMENT LOOP DRAWING NO. ❑ INSTALLATION CORRECT PER INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS ❑ VALVE DETAIL NO. ❑ TRANSDUCER DETAIL NO. ❑ SOLENOID DETAIL NO. May 09 17950-19 8205A10 \✓ pw:/ICarollo/DocumenWClienVTX/Fort Worth/8205A10/Specifications/Pre-SelecV17950 (FS-Clean_a) CONTROL VALVES INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION CHECKLIST ❑ ACCESSORIES ARE PRESENT AND PROPERLY INSTALLED ❑ INSTRUMENT IS ACCESSIBLE FOR MAINTENANCE OR REMOVAL ❑ ENGRAVED LAMINATED NAMEPLATE (NO SPELLING ERRORS) PERMANENTLY INSTALLED VALVE CHECK FLOW ❑ PROCESS FLOW DIRECTION THRU THE VALVE IS CORRECT CHECK ON LOSS OF AIR VALVE FAILS ON LOSS OF POWER SOLENOID FAILS SAFETY CHECK ❑ OPEN ❑ CLOSE ❑ TO VENT ❑ TO VALVE FULL OPEN AT FULL CLOSED AT MEASURED TRAVEL TRAVEL CHECK PSI PSI INCHES SEATING ❑ ON BENCH RESULTS ACTUATOR BENCH SET CHECK ❑ IN -LINE POSITIONER CHECK VALVE FULL OPEN AT PSI TO POSITIONER VALVE FULL CLOSED AT PSI TO POSITIONER VOLUME BOOSTER CHECK BYPASS VALVE (GAIN) ADJUSTING SCREW BACKED OUT TURNS FROM CLOSED TO ENSURE QUICK BUT STABLE OPERATION (TYPICALLY 1-1/2 TO 2 TURNS) REMARKS CHECKED BY (COMPANY) SIGNATURE DATE ACCEPTED BY (COMPANY) SIGNATURE DATE END OF SECTION May 09 17950-20 8205A10 Nftwol pwY/Carollo/Documents/CliendTX/Fort Worthl8205AIOISpecifications/Pre-SelecUI795O (FS-Clean_a) APPENDIX A GENERAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS PART C GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT SECTION A DEFINITIONS, PROCEDURES AND INTERPRETATIONS A-1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: By the term Contract Documents is meant all of the written and drawn documents setting forth or affecting the rights of the parties, including but not necessarily limited to, the Contract, Notice to Bidders, Proposal, General Conditions, Special Conditions, Specifications, Plans, Bonds and all Addenda, Amendments signed by all parties, Change Orders, written Interpretations and any written Field Order for a minor change in the Work. A-2 ENTIRE AGREEMENT: The Contract Documents represent the entire agreement between the Parties, and no prior or contemporaneous, oral or written agreements, instruments or negotiations shall be construed as altering the terms and effects of the Contract Documents. After being executed, the Contract Documents can be changed only by a written Amendment signed by the Contractor and the Owner, or Change Order, or by a written Field Order for a minor change. A-3 WORK: By the term Work is meant all labor, supervision, materials and equipment necessary to be used or incorporated in order to produce the construction required by Contract Documents. A-4 EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Contract Documents shall be executed in six originals, with all required attachments, including required bonds and insurance certificates, by the Contractor and the Owner in such form as may be prescribed by law and returned to the Owner within ten business days of notification to Contractor. Failure to execute contracts and provide required enclosures will be grounds for revocation of award and taking of Bid Bond. A-5 FAMILIARITY WITH PROPOSED WORK: Before filing a Proposal, the bidder shall examine carefully the plans, specifications, special provisions, and the form of contract to be entered into for the work contemplated. He shall examine the site of work and satisfy himself as to the conditions that will be encountered relating to the character, quality and quantity of work to be performed and materials to be furnished. The filing of a bid by the bidder shall be considered evidence that he has complied with these requirements and has accepted the site as suitable for the work. Claims for additional compensation due to variations between conditions actually encountered in construction and as indicated by the plans will not be allowed. A-6 ONE UNIFIED CONTRACT: Insofar as possible, the Contract Documents will be bound together and executed as a single unified Contract. The intention of the Contract Documents being to provide for all labor, supervision, materials, equipment and other items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. Words that have well -recognized technical or trade meanings are used herein in accordance with such recognized meanings. A-7 DIVISION OF WORK: The arrangement of Drawings and/or Specifications into Divisions, Sections, Articles, or other Subdivisions shall not be binding upon the Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Trades. A-8 INTERPRETATIONS: The Engineer will furnish such Interpretations of the Plans and Specifications as may be necessary for the proper execution or progress of the work. Such Interpretations shall be furnished at the initiation of the Engineer or at the request of the Contractor, or Owner, and will be issued with reasonable promptness and at such times and in accordance with such schedule as may be agreed upon. Such Interpretations shall be consistent with the purposes and intent of the Plans and Specifications and may be effected by Field Order. In the event of any dispute between any of the parties to the Contract and the Engineer or each other involving the interpretation of the Contract Documents, the evaluation of work or materials performed or furnished by the Contractor, or any subcontractor or materialsman, or involving any question of fault or liability of any party, the decision of the Owner shall be final and binding. In the event of inconsistency in the contract documents, the following sequence for interpretation shall be used in order of precedence: Change Orders and/or Field Orders (by date of issuance); Addenda (by date of issuance); Drawings; Notes and dimensions on Drawings; Technical Specifications; Special Provisions; Supplementary General Conditions; General Conditions; and, Construction Contract. A-9 COPIES OF WORKING DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS: The Engineer will furnish to Contractor free of charge 5 sets of working Drawings and 5 sets of Specifications. Contractor shall pay the cost of reproduction for all other copies of Drawings and Specifications furnished to him. All Drawings, Specifications and copies thereof furnished by the Owner or the Engineer are and shall remain the property of the Owner. They are not to be used on any other project and, with the exception of one Contract set for each Party to the Contract, are to be returned to the Owner on request at the completion of the work. C-1 Part C —General Conditions ofthe Contract 05/29/09 A-10 MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE 1M/WBE) POLICY: The City of Fort Worth has goals for the participation of Minority and Women Business Enterprises (M/WBE) in City contracts. Compliance with the policies designed to t meet these goals is mandatory in order to be considered a responsive bidder. The City policy and procedures to be followed in submitting bids is included. The City of Fort Worth MWBE Program will take precedence over other subcontractor utilization programs on Block Grant and other federally funded Projects. A-11 CORRELATION AND INTENT: In general, the drawings indicate dimension, locations, positions, quantities, and kinds of a construction; the specifications indicate the quality and construction procedures required. Work indicated on the drawings and not specified or vice -versa, shall be furnished as though set forth in both. Work not detailed, marked or specified shall be the same as similar parts that are detailed, marked or specified. If the drawings are in conflict or conflict with the specifications the better quality or greater quantity or work or materials shall be estimated and shall be furnished or included. Dimensions on drawings shall take precedence over small-scale drawings. Drawings showing locations of equipment, piping, ductwork, electrical apparatus, etc., are diagrammatic and job conditions may not allow installation in the exact location shown. Relocation shall not occur without the Engineer's approval. A-12 AGE: In accordance with the policy ("Policy") of the Executive Branch of the federal government, Contractor covenants that neither it nor any of its officers, members, agents, employees, program participants or subcontractors, while engaged in performing this contract, shall, in connection with the employment, advancement or discharge of employees or in connection with the terms, conditions or privileges of their employment, discriminate against persons because of their age except on the basis of a bona fide occupational qualification, retirement plan or statutory requirement. Contractor further covenants that neither it nor its officers, members, agents, employees, subcontractors, program participants, or persons acting on their behalf, shall specify, in solicitations or advertisements for employees to work on this contract, a maximum age limit for such employment unless the specified maximum age limit is based upon a bona fide occupational qualification, retirement plan or statutory equipment. Contractor warrants it will fully comply with the Policy and will defend, indemnify and hold City harmless against any claims or allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractor against City arising out of Contractor's and/or its subcontractors' alleged failure to comply with the above referenced Policy concerning age discrimination in the performance of this agreement. A-13 DISABILITY: In accordance with the provisions of the Americans With Disabilities Act of 1990 ("ADA"), Contractor warrants that it and any and all of its subcontractors will not unlawfully discriminate on the basis of disability in the provision of services to the general public, nor in the availability, terms and/or conditions of employment for applicants for employment with, or employees of Contractor or any of its subcontractors. Contractor warrants it will fully comply with ADA provisions and any other applicable federal, state and local laws concerning disability and will defend, indemnify and hold City harmless against any claims or allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractors against City arising out of Contractor's and/or its subcontractors' alleged failure to comply with the above -referenced laws concerning disability discrimination in the performance of this agreement. SECTION B IDENTITY OF ENGINEER B-1 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION: Where the term "Engineer" is used in the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction". it shall refer to the Director, Water Department or his designated Construction Manager. The Director, Water Department will designate a Project Manager and Construction Manager (CM) to administer this contract and perform the functions of the "Engineer" as indicated in the General Conditions. The design engineer or consulting engineer may also be designated to perform the duties of "Engineer". The term "City' and "Owner" are used interchangeably and refer to the City of Fort Worth as represented by the Director of the Fort Worth Water Department or his designated representative. B-2 TERMINATION AND SUSPENSION OF WORK: The Owner has the right to terminate the Project for any reason. If the project is terminated, the Contractor shall: a) Stop work under the Contract on the date and to the extent specified on the notice of termination. b) Place no further orders or subcontracts except as may be necessary for the completion of the work not terminated. s c) Terminate all orders and subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the performance of the work terminated by the notice of termination. After termination as above, the City will pay the Contractor a proportionate part of the contract price based on the work completed; provided, however, that the amount of payment on termination shall not exceed the total contract price as reduced by the portion thereof allocatable to the work not completed and further reduced by the amount of payments, if, any otherwise made. Contractor shall submit its claim for amounts due after termination as provided in this paragraph within 30 days after receipt of such claim. In ■ the event of any dispute or controversy as to the propriety or allowability of all or any portion of such claim under this paragraph, such dispute or controversy shall be resolved and be decided by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth, and the decision by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth shall be final and binding upon all parties to this contract. C-2 Part C -General Conditions of the Contract 05/29/09 �.� B-3 DUTIES OF THE ENGINEER: As used herein, the term Engineer means the Engineer or his authorized representative. • Nothing contained in these Contract Documents shall create any privity of Contract between the Engineer and the Contractor. B-1 ENGINEER AS REPRESENTATIVE OF THE OWNER: The Construction Manager will provide general administration of the Contract on behalf of the Owner and will have authority to act as the representative of the Owner to the extent provided in the Contract Documents unless changed in writing by the Owner. The Engineer will be available for conferences and consultations with the Owner or the Contractor at all reasonable times. o- B-5 ACCESS TO JOB SITES: The Engineer shall at all times have access to the Work whenever it is in preparation and progress. The Contractor shall provide facilities for such access so the Engineer may perform its assigned functions under the Contract Documents. The Engineer will make periodic visits to the Site to familiarize himself with the progress and quality of the work and to determine if the work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract documents. On the basis of on -site observations, the Engineer will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work of the Contractor. Based upon such observations and the Contractor's applications for payments, the Construction Manager will make determinations and recommendations concerning the amounts owing to the Contractor and will issue certificates for payment amounts. B-6 INTERPRETATIONS: The Engineer will be, in the first instance, the interpreter of the requirements of the Plans and Specifications and the judge of the performance thereunder by the Contractor, subject to the final decision of the Owner. The Engineer's decisions in matters relating to artistic effect will be final if consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents, B-7 AUTHORITY TO STOP WORK: The CM will have authority to reject work that does not conform to the Plans and Specifications. In addition, whenever, in its reasonable opinion, the CM considers it necessary or advisable in order to ensure the proper realization of the intent of the Plans and Specifications, the CM will have authority to require the Contractor to stop the Work or any portion thereof, or to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not such Work be then fabricated, installed or completed. B-8 MISCELLANEOUS DUTIES OF ENGINEER Shoo Drawinas. The Engineer will review Shop Drawings and Samples. Two copies of each approved Shop Drawing and submittal will be provided to the Owner by the Engineer. Three copies will be returned to the Contractor. `0, Chanae Orders. Change Orders and Field Orders for Minor Changes in the Work will be issued by the Owner Guarantees. The Owner will receive all written guarantees and related documents required of the Contractor. Upon completion of the project the Contractor shall provide the Owner five copies of each guarantee. Inspections The Owner will conduct inspections for the purpose of determining and making his recommendations concerning the dates of substantial completion and final completion. The Engineer will conduct the final acceptance inspection and issue the Certificate of Completion. Operation and Maintenance Manuals The Owner will receive six copies of all applicable equipment installation, operation, and maintenance brochures and manuals required of the Contractor. B-9 TERMINATION OF THE ENGINEER: In case of the termination of the employment of the Engineer by the Owner, the Owner shall either assume the duties of the Engineer through the Director of the Water Department or shall appoint a successor Engineer against whom the Contractor makes no reasonable objection. SECTION C OWNER C-1 IDENTIFICATION: By the term Owner is meant the City of Fort Worth acting herein by its duly authorized representatives in the manner provided by law. Authorized representatives include the City Manager, Assistant City Manager, the Director of the Water Department and members of the Water Department. Generally speaking a designated representative will be a Project Manager or the Construction Manager identified from within the Water Department to act as a point of contact for day -today contract administration. C-2 DUTIES OF THE OWNER: The Owner shall furnish surveys describing the physical characteristics, legal limits and utility locations for the site of the Work; provided, however, that the Contractor hereby covenants that he has inspected the premises and familiarized himself therewith and that the locations of utilities and other obstacles to the prosecution of the Work as shown on the Owner's survey are for information only, are not binding upon the Owner, and the Owner shall not incur any liability for loss or damage by virtue of any inaccuracies or deficiencies in such surveys. The Owner shall secure and pay for title to the site and all necessary permanent or construction easements_ The Owner will cooperate with the Contractor in the prosecution of the Work in such manner and to such extent as may be reasonable and shall furnish information under its control with reasonable promptness at the request of the Contractor. C-3 Part C —General Conditions of the Contract 05/29/09 C-3 INSTRUCTIONS: The Owner shall issue all instructions to the Contractor through the CM. s C-4 ACCESS TO JOB SITE: The Owner shall at all times have access to the Work whenever it is in preparation and progress. The Contractor shall provide facilities for such access so the Owner may perform its assigned functions under the Contract Documents. C-5 PROGRESS INSPECTIONS: The Owner will make visits to the Site to familiarize themselves with the progress and quality of the Work and to determine if the work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract documents. On the basis of on -site observations and reports concerning the progress and quality of the work, the Owner will approve and authorize the Contractor's Z` applications for payments. C-6 AUTHORITY TO STOP WORK: The Owner will have authority to reject work that does not conform to the Plans and Specifications. Whenever, in its reasonable opinion, the Owner considers it necessary or advisable in order to ensure the proper realization of the intent of the Plans and Specifications, the Owner will have authority to require the Contractor to stop the work or any portion thereof, or to require the Contractor to stop the Work or any portion thereof, or to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not such Work be then fabricated, installed or completed. C-7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION: Upon agreement of the Contractor and Engineer that the Work is substantially complete, the Owner will schedule a Substantial Completion Inspection to be conducted by the Engineer and attended by representatives of the Engineer, Owner and Contractor. Items identified during this inspection as being incomplete, defective or deficient shall be incorporated into a punch list and accepted, approved and signed by the Owner and/or CM. C-8 RIGHT TO AUDIT: Contractor agrees that the City shall, until the expiration of three years after final payment under this contract, have access to and the right to examine any directly pertinent books, documents, papers and records of the Contractor involving transactions relating to this contract. Contractor further agrees to include in all his subcontracts hereunder a provision to the effect that the subcontractor agrees that the City shall, until the expiration of three years after final payment under the subcontract, have access to and the right to examine any directly pertinent books, documents, papers and records of such subcontractor, involving transactions to the subcontract. The tens "subcontract" as used herein includes purchase orders. Contractor agrees to photocopy such documents as may be requested by the city. The city agrees to reimburse Contractor for the costs of copies at the rate published in the Texas Administrative Code. SECTION D CONTRACTOR D-1 IDENTIFICATION: The Contractor is the person or organization identified as such in the Contract_ The term Contractor means the Contractor or his authorized representative. D-2 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR: Contractor shall perform all work and services hereunder as an independent contractor, not as agent. or employee of the City. Contractor shall have exclusive control of and the exclusive right to control the details of the Work and services performed hereunder, and all persons performing same, and Contractor shall be solely responsible for the acts of its officers, agents, and employees. Nothing herein shall be construed as creating a partnership or joint enterprise between City and the Contractor, its officers, agents and employees, and the doctrine of respondeat superior shall not apply. D-3 SUBLETTING: It is further agreed that the performance of this Contract, either in whole or in part, shall not be sublet or assigned to anyone else by said Contractor without the written consent of the Director of the Fort Worth Water Department. D-4 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract, Drawings, Specifications, Addenda and modifications and shall at once report to the Owner and to the Engineer any error, inconsistency or omission he may discover. The Contractor shall do no work without Drawings, Specifications and Interpretations. 0-5 SUPERVISION: The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using his best skill and attention. He shall be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, safety, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract Documents. D-6 LABOR AND MATERIALS: Unless otherwise specifically noted, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation and other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. The successful low bidder will use its reasonable best efforts to hire local laborers, workmen and materialmen. The general condition is not to be construed as limiting the right of any bidder to employ laborers, workmen or materialmen from outside local M area. The Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among his employees, and shall not employ on the Work any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the task assigned to him. C-4 Part C -General Conditions of the Contract 05/29/09 '%NOW D-7 COMPLIANCE WITH AND ENFORCEMENT OF PREVAILING WAGE RATE Dutv to Dav Prevailing Wage Rates. The Contractor shall comply with all requirements of Chapter 2258, Texas Government Code (Chapter 2258), including the payment of not less than the rates determined by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth to be the prevailing wage rates in accordance with Chapter 2258. Such prevailing wage rates are included in these contract documents. Penaltv for Violation. A contractor or any subcontractor who does not pay the prevailing wage shall, upon demand made by the City, pay to the City $60 for each worker employed for each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the prevailing wage rates stipulated in these contract documents. This penalty shall be retained by the City to offset its administrative costs, pursuant to Texas Government Code 2258.023. Comolaints of Violations and Citv Determination of Good Cause. On receipt of information, including a complaint by a worker, concerning an alleged violation of 2258.023, Texas Government Code, by a contractor or subcontractor, the City shall make an initial determination, before the 31s' day after the date the City receives the information, as to whether good cause exists to believe that the violation occurred. The City shall notify in writing the contractor or subcontractor and any affected worker of its initial determination. Upon the City's determination that there is good cause to believe the contractor or subcontractor has violated Chapter 2258, the City shall retain the full amounts claimed by the claimant or claimants as the difference between wages paid and wages due under the prevailing wage rates, such amounts being subtracted from successive progress payments pending a final determination of the violation. Arbitration Required if Violation Not Resolved. An issue relating to an alleged violation of Section 2258.023, Texas Government Code, including a penalty owed to the City or an affected worker, shall be submitted to binding arbitration in accordance with the Texas General Arbitration Act (Article 224 et seq., Revised Statutes) if the contractor or subcontractor and any affected worker do not resolve the issue by agreement before the 15th day after the date the City makes its initial determination pursuant to the preceding paragraph above. If the persons required to arbitrate under this section do not agree on an arbitrator before the 11th day after the date that arbitration is required, a district court shall appoint an arbitrator on the petition of any of the persons. The City is not a party in the arbitration. The decision and award of the arbitrator is final and binding on all parties and may be enforced in any court of competent jurisdiction. Records to be Maintained. The Contractor and each subcontractor shall, for a period of three (3) years following the date of acceptance of the Work, maintain records that show (i) the name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor in the construction of the Work provided for in this contract; and (ii) the actual per diem wages paid to each worker. The records shall be open at all reasonable hours for inspection by the City. The provisions of the Audit section of these contract documents shall pertain to this inspection. 1411111111/ Pav Estimates. With each partial payment estimate, the Contractor shall submit an affidavit stating that the Contractor has complied with the requirements of Chapter 2258, Texas Government Code. Posting of Waae Rates. The Contractor shall post the prevailing wage rates in a conspicuous place at the site of the project at all times. Subcontractor Compliance. The Contractor shall include in its subcontracts and/or shall otherwise require all of its subcontractors to comply with this section in its entirety. On projects where special wage rates apply (e.g. Davis -Bacon) the Contractor agrees to meet all requirements of such programs. D-8 WARRANTY: The Contractor warrants to the Owner and the Engineer that all materials and equipment furnished under this Contract will be new unless otherwise specified, and that all work will be of good quality, free from faults and defects, and in conformance with the Contract Documents. All work not so conforming to these standards may be considered defective. If required by the Engineer or the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. The warranty provided in this Section shall be in addition to and not in limitation of any other warranty or remedy provided by law or the Contract Documents. D-9 TAXES: The Contractor is exempt from State Sales Tax on material incorporated into the finished construction, Excise and Use Tax. D-10 LICENSES. NOTICES AND FEES: The Contractor shall obtain all Permits, Licenses, Certificates, and Inspections, whether permanent or temporary, required by law or these Contract Documents. The Contractor shall give all Notices and comply with all Laws, Ordinances, Rules, Regulations and Orders of any public authority bearing on the performance of the Work. If the Contractor observes or becomes aware that any of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith in any respect, he shall promptly notify the Engineer and Owner in writing and any necessary changes will be made. If the Contractor performs any Work knowing that it is in violation of, or contrary to, any of such Laws, Statutes, Charter, Ordinances, Orders or Directives, or Regulations without furnishing Notice to the Owner, the Contractor will assume full responsibility therefore and bear all costs attributable thereto. C-5 Part C -General Conditions of the Contract 05/29/09 D-11 NOT USED: f D-12 SUPERINTENDENT: The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during the progress of the Work. The superintendent shall be satisfactory to the Contractor and the Owner. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor and all communications given to the superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. Important communications will be confirmed in writing. Other communications will be so confirmed on written request in each case. D-13 RESPONSIBILITIES FOR EMPLOYEES AND SUB -CONTRACTORS: The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner As, for the acts and omissions of all his employees and all Sub -contractors, their agents and employees, and all other persons performing any of the Work under a contract with the Contractor. D-14 FAILURE TO COMMENCE WORK: Should the Contractor fail to begin the Work herein provided for within the time herein fixed or to carry on and complete the same according to the true meaning of the intent and terms of said Plans, Specifications and Contract Documents, then the Owner shall have the right to either demand the surety to take over the Work and complete same in accordance with the Contract Documents or to take charge of and complete the Work in such a manner as it may deem proper, and if, in the completion thereof, the cost to the said City shall exceed the contract price or prices set forth in the said plans and specifications made a part hereof, the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay said City on demand in writing, setting forth and specifying an itemized statement of the total cost thereof, said excess cost. D-15 PROGRESS SCHEDULE: The Contractor, immediately after being awarded the contract, shall prepare and submit for the Engineer's approval, an estimated progress schedule for the Work. The progress schedule shall be related to the entire Project. This schedule shall indicate the dates for the starting and completion of the various states of construction and shall be revised as required by the conditions of the Work, subject to the Engineer's approval. It shall also indicate the dates for submission and approval of shop drawings and submittals as well as the delivery schedule for major pieces of equipment and/or materials. The Contractor shall submit an updated progress schedule to the CM at least monthly for approval along with the Contractor's monthly progress payment requests. D-16 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS AT THE SITE: The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, approved Shop Drawings, Change Orders, and other Changes and Amendments in good order and marked to record all changes made during construction. These shall also be available to the Engineer. The Drawings, marked to record all changes made during construction, shall be delivered to the Owner upon completion of the Work. The Engineer will prepare, and provide to the Owner, one complete set of reproducible record drawings of the Work. D-17 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES: Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, brochures and other data which are prepared by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor, and which illustrate some portion of the Work. Samples are physical examples furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship, and to establish standards by which the Work will be judged. The Contractor shall review, stamp with his approval and submit, with reasonable promptness and in orderly sequence so as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of any other contractor, normally within the first 90 days of the work, six copies of all shop Drawings and Samples required by the Contract Documents or subsequently by the Engineer as covered by changes or amendments. Shop Drawings and Samples shall be properly identified as specified, or as the Engineer may require. At the time of submission the Contractor shall inform the Engineer in writing of any deviation in the Shop Drawings or Samples from the requirements of the Contract Documents. By approving and submitting Shop Drawings and Samples, the Contractor thereby represents that he has determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers and similar data, and that he has checked and coordinated each shop drawing given in the Contract Documents. The Engineers approval of a separate item shall not indicate approval of an assembly in which the item functions. The Engineer will review and approve Shop Drawings and Samples with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay, but only for conformance with the design concept of the Project and with the information given in the Contract Documents. The Engineers approval of a separate item shall not indicate approval of an assembly in which the item functions. The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the Engineer and shall resubmit the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings or new Samples until approved. The Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings to revisions other than the corrections requested by the Engineer on previous submissions. The Engineer's approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless the Contractor has informed the Engineer in writing of such deviation at the time of submission and the Engineer has given written approval to the specific deviation. Engineers approval shall not relieve the t Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings or Samples. No portion of the Work requiring a Shop Drawing or Sample submission shall be commenced until the Engineer has approved the submittal. All such portions of the Work shall be in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and Samples. C-6 Part C --General Conditions of the Contract 05/29/09 D-18 SITE USE: The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with any materials or equipment. Until acceptance of the Work by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth, the entire site of the Work shall be under the exclusive control, care and responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor shall take every precaution against injury or damage to persons or property by the action of the elements or from any other cause whatsoever. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore and make good at his own expenses all injuries or damages to any portions of the Work occasioned by any of the above, caused before acceptance. D-19 CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK: The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of his Work that may be required to make its several parts fit together properly, and shall not endanger any Work by cutting, excavating or otherwise altering the Work or any part of it. D-20 CLEAN UP: The Contractor at all times shall keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish. At the completion of the Work he shall remove all his waste materials and rubbish from and about the Project as well as all his tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials, and shall clean all glass surfaces and leave the Work 'Broom -clean' or its equivalent, except as otherwise specified. In addition to removal of rubbish and leaving the buildings "broom -clean", Contractor shall clean all glass, replace any broken glass, remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from decorated work, clean hardware, remove paint spots and smears from all surfaces, clean fixtures and wash all concrete, tile and terrazzo floors. If the Contractor fails to clean up, the Owner may do so, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. D-21 COMMUNICATIONS: As a general rule, the Contractor shall forward all communications to the Owner through the CM SECTION E SUBCONTRACTORS E-1 DEFINITION: A Subcontractor is a person or organization that has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform any of the Work at the site. The term Subcontractor is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine in gender and means a Subcontractor or his authorized representative. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relation between the Owner or the Engineer and any subcontractor or any of his sub -subcontractors or materialmen. E-2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS: The bidder shall furnish a list of the names of the subcontractors or other persons or 14411111111111W organizations (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for such portions of the Work as may be designated in the bidding requirements, or if none is so designated in the bidding requirements, the names of the Subcontractors proposed for the principal portions of the Work. Prior to the award of the Contract, the Engineer shall notify the successful bidder in writing if either the Owner or Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any person or organization on such list. Failure of the Owner and Engineer to make an objection to any person or organization on the list prior to the award of this Contract shall not constitute acceptance of such person or organization. If, prior to the award of the Contract, the Owner or Engineer has an objection to any person or organization on such list, and refuses to accept such person or organization, the apparent low bidder may, prior to the award, withdraw his bid without forfeiture of bid security. If such bidder submits an acceptable substitute, the Owner may, at its discretion, accept the bid or he may disqualify the bid. If, after the award, the Owner or Engineer objects in writing to any person or organization on such list, the Contractor shall provide an acceptable substitute. The Contractor shall not make any substitution for any Subcontractor or person or organization that has been accepted by the Owner and the Engineer, unless the substitution is also acceptable to the Owner and the Engineer. E-3 TERMS OF SUBCONTRACTS: All work performed for the Contractor by a Subcontractor shall be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor (and where appropriate between Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors) which shall contain provisions that: 1. Preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and the Engineer under the Contract with respect to the Work to be performed under the subcontract so that the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights; 2. Require that such Work be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents; 3. Require submission to the Contractor of applications for payment under each subcontract to which the Contractor is a party, in reasonable time to enable the Contractor to apply for payment; 4. Require that all claims for additional costs, extensions of time, damages for delays or otherwise with respect to subcontracted portions of the Work shall be submitted to the Contractor (via any Subcontractor or Sub -subcontractor where appropriate) in the manner provided in the Contract Documents for like claims by the Contractor upon the Owner; 5. Waive all rights the contracting parties may have against one another for damages caused by fire or other perils covered by the property insurance, except such rights, if any, as they may have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner, and, 6. Obligate each Subcontractor specifically to consent to the provisions of this Section C-% Part C —General Conditions of the Contract 05/29/09 All of the provisions set out in this section shall be deemed to have been included in every subcontract, and every subcontract shall be so construed and applied as to the Owner and the Engineer, whether or not such provisions are physicalty included in the sub- contract. E-4 MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (M/WBE): Should the base bid be less than $25,000, the requirements of this section do not apply. General: In accordance with City of Fort Worth Ordinance No 15530 (the "Ordinance"), the City of Fort Worth sets goals for the d participation of minority and women business enterprises (MWWBE) in City contracts. Ordinance No 15530 is incorporated in these General Conditions by reference. A copy of the Ordinance may be obtained from the Office of the City Secretary. Failure to comply with the Ordinance shall be a material breach of contract. Prior to Award: The M/WBE documentation required by the procurement solicitation must be submitted within five city business days after bid opening. Failure to comply with the City's M/WBE Ordinance, or to demonstrate a "good faith effort", shall result in a bid being considered non -responsive. Contractor shall provide copies of subcontracts or cosigned letters of intent with approved MWWBE subcontractors and or suppliers prior to award. During Construction: Contractor shall also provide monthly reports on utilization of the subcontractors to the M/WSE Office and the Construction Manager. Contractor must provide the City with complete and accurate information regarding actual work performed by an MWWBE on the contract and proof of payment thereof. Contractor further agrees to permit an audit and/or examination of any books, records or files in its possession that will substantiate the actual work performed by an MWWBE. The misrepresentation of facts and/or the commission of fraud by the Contractor will be grounds for termination of the contract and/or initiating action under appropriate federal, state, or local laws or ordinances relating to false statement. An offeror who intentionally and/or knowingly misrepresents material facts shall be determined to be an irresponsible offeror and barred from participating in City work for a period of time of not less than three (3) years. The failure of an offeror to comply with this ordinance where such non-compliance constitutes a material breach of contract as stated herein, may result in the offeror being determined to be an irresponsible offeror and barred from participating in City work for a period of time of not less than one (1) year. The Contractor may count toward the goal any tier of MWBE subcontractors and/or suppliers. The Contractor may count toward its goal a portion of the total dollar amount of the contract with a joint venture equal to the percentage of the MWWBE participation in the joint venture for a clearly defined portion of the work to be performed. All subcontractors used in meeting the goals must be certified prior to the award of the Contract. Change Orders: Whenever a change order affects the work of an MWWBE subcontractor or supplier, the MWWBE shall be given an opportunity to perform the work. Whenever a change order is $50,000 or more, the MWWBE Coordinator shall determine the goals applicable to the work to be performed under the change order. During the term of the contract the Contractor shall: 1. Make no unjustified changes or deletions in its M/WBE participation commitments submitted with the bid/proposal or during negotiation, without prior submission of the proper documentation for review and approval by the MW BE Office. 2. If substantial subcontracting and/or supplier opportunities arise during the term of any contract when the Contractor represented in its bid/proposal to the City that it alone would perform the subcontracting/supplier opportunity work, the Contractor shall notify the City before subcontracts for work and/or supplies are awarded and shall be required to comply with subsections 12.3 and 12.4 of the Ordinance, exclusive of the time requirements stated in such subsections. 3. The Contractor shall submit to the MWWBE Office for approval an MNWE REQUEST FOR APPROVAL OF CHANGE FORM, if, during the term of any contract, the Contractor wishes to change or delete one or more MWWBE subcontractors or suppliers. Justification for change of subcontractors may be granted for the following: 1. An M/WBE's failure to provide Workers' Compensation Insurance evidence as required by state law; or An M/WBE's-failure to provide evidence of general liability or other insurance -under the same or similar terms as contained in the Contract Documents with limits of coverage no greater than the lower of 1) the limits required of the Contractor by the City; or 2) the limits contained in the Contractor's standard subcontract or supply agreements used on other projects of similar size and scope and within the Contractor's normal business practice with non-MWWBE subcontractors/subconsultants or suppliers; or 2. An MWBE's failure to execute the Contractor's standard subcontract form, if entering a subcontract is required by the Contractor in its normal course of business, unless such failure is due to: a) A change in the amount of the previously agreed to bid or scope of work; or b) The contract presented provides for payment once a month or longer and the Contractor is receiving payment from the City twice a month; or C-8 Part C -General Conditions of the Contract 05/29/09 A lftmwl c) Any limitation being placed on the ability of the M/WBE to report violations of the Ordinance or any other ordinance or violations of any state or federal law or other improprieties to the City or to provide notice of any claim to the Contractor's surety company or insurance company. d) Mediation shall be a consideration before the request for change is approved. 3. An M/WBE defaults in the performance of the executed subcontract. In this event, the Contractor shall: a) Request bids from all MN/BE subcontractors previously submitting bids for the work, b) If reasonably practicable, request bids from previously non -bidding M/WBEs, and c) Provide to the M/WBE office documentation of compliance with (a) and (b) above. 4. Any reason found to be acceptable by the M/WBE Office in its sole discretion Within ten days after final payment from the City the Contractor shall provide the M/WBE Office with documentation to reflect final participation of each subcontractor and supplier, including non-M/WBEs, used on the project. E-5 PAYMENTS TO SUBCONTRACTORS: The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, an amount equal to the percentage of completion allowed to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's Work. The Contractor shall also require each Subcontractor to make similar payments to his subcontractors. If the Owner refuses to issue a Certificate for Payment for any cause which is the fault of the Contractor and not the fault of a particular subcontractor, the Contractor shall pay that Subcontractor on demand, made at any time after the Certificate for Payment would otherwise have been issued, for his Work to the extent completed, less the retained percentage. The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor a just share of any insurance monies received by the Contractor, and he shall require each Subcontractor to make similar payments to his Subcontractors. The Owner may, on request and at its discretion, furnish to any Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion certified to the Contractor on account of Work done by such Subcontractors. Neither the Owner nor the Engineer shall have any obligation to pay or to see to the payment of any monies to any Subcontractor. 14mol E-6 NOT USED: 1"0/ SECTION F SEPARATE CONTRACTS F-1 OWNER'S RIGHT: The Owner reserves the right to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Work. When separate contracts are awarded for other portions of the Work, "the Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall be the contractor who signs each separate contract. F-2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTORS: The Contractor shall afford other contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and the execution of their work, and shall properly connect and coordinate his work with theirs. If any part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of any other separate contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Owner any apparent discrepancies or defects in such work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor to inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the other contractor's work as fit and proper to receive his Work, except as to defects which may develop in the other separate contractor's work after the execution of the Contractor's Work. Should the Contractor cause damage to the work or property of any separate contractor on the site, the Contractor shall, upon due notice, settle with such other contractor by agreement, if he will so settle. If such separate contractor sues the Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been so sustained, the Owner shall notify the Contractor who shall defend against such suit at the Contractor's expense, and if any judgment against the Owner arises therefrom, the Contractor shall pay or satisfy such judgment and shall reimburse the Owner for all attorney's fees, court costs and expenses which the Owner has incurred in connection with such suit. F-3 CUTTING AND PATCHING UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS: The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of his Work that may be required to fit it to receive or be received by the work of other contractors shown in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not endanger any work or any other contractors by cutting, excavating or otherwise altering any work and shall not cut or alter the work of any other contractor except with the written consent of the Engineer. Any costs caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be borne by the party responsible therefor. C-9 Part C —General Conditions of the Contract 05/29/09 F-4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP: if a dispute arises between the separate contractors as to their responsibility for " cleaning up. the Owner may clean up and charge the cost thereof to the several contractors as the Director of the Fort Worth Water Department shall determine to be just. SECTION G MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS G-1 CONFLICT OF LAWS: The law of the place where the site is located shall govern the Contract. The Contractor must familiarize himself and strictly comply with all Federal, State, and County and City Laws, Statutes, Charter, Ordinances, Regulations, or Directives controlling the action or operation of those engaged upon the work affecting the materials used. He shall indemnify and save harmless the City and all of its officers and agents against any claim or liability arising from or based on the violation of any such Laws, Statutes. Charter, Ordinances, Regulations, or Directives, whether by himself, his employees, agents or subcontractors. G-2 GOVERNING LAWS: It is mutually agreed and understood that this agreement is made and entered into by the parties hereto with reference to the existing Charter and Ordinances of the City of Fort Worth and the laws of the State of Texas with reference to and governing all matters affecting this Contract, and the Contractor agrees to fully comply with all the provisions of the same. G-3 PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS: In performing their duties under the Statutes of the State of Texas and the Charter and Ordinances of the City of Fort Worth in connection with this Contract, or in exercising any of the powers granted the Owner herein, the officers, agents and employees of the City of Fort Worth are engaged in the performance of a governmental function and shall not incur any personal liability by virtue of such performance hereunder, except for gross negligence or willful wrong. G-4 COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS. Contractor agrees to comply with all laws, Federal, state and local, including all ordinances, rules and regulations of the City of Fort Worth, Texas. Materials incorporated into the finished Project are not subject to State Sales Tax. The Owner is responsible for obtaining the Building Permit. The Contractor and the appropriate subcontractor are responsible for obtaining all other construction permits from the governing agencies. Contractor shall schedule all code inspections with the Code Inspection Division in accordance with the permit requirements and submit a copy of updated schedule to the Construction Manager weekly. Building, plumbing, electrical and mechanical building permits are issued without charge. Water and sewer tap, impact & access fees will be paid by the City. Any other permit fees are the responsibility of the Contractor. G-5 INDEMNIFICATION: Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify Owner, Construction Manager, and Engineer, and +� their respective personnel at the project site for Contractors sole negligence. In addition, Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify, hold harmless and defend, at its own expense, the Owner, its officers, servants and employees, from and against any and all claims or suits for property loss, property damage, personal injury, including death, arising out of, or alleged to arise out of, the work and services to be performed hereunder by Contractor, its officers, agents, employees, subcontractors, licensees or invitees, whether or not anv such iniurv. damage or death is caused. in whole or in part. by the negligence or alleged negligence of Owner its officers. servants, or emolovees. Contractor likewise covenants and agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner irom and against any and all injuries to Owner's officers, servants and employees and any damage, loss or destruction to property of the Owner arising from the performance of any of the terms and conditions of this Contract, whether or not anv such iniury or damaae is caused in whole or in oart by the negligence or alleged negligence of Owner, its officers. servants or emplovees. In the event Owner receives a written claim for damages against the Contractor or its subcontractors prior to final payment, final payment shall not be made until Contractor either (a) submits to Owner satisfactory evidence that the claim has been settled and/or a release from the claimant involved, or (b) provides Owner with a letter from Contractor's liability insurance carrier that the claim has been referred to the insurance carrier. The Director may, if he deems it appropriate, refuse payment to whom a claim for damages is outstanding as a result of work performed under a City Contract. G-6 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS: Except as provided in Paragraph E-2, this contract shall be binding upon and remain to the benefit of the parties hereto, their Successors or Assigns. Contractor shall not assign or sublet all or any part of this Contract or his rights or duties hereunder without the prior written consent of the Owner. Any such purported assignment or subletting without the prior written consent of Owner shall be void. G-7 WRITTEN NOTICE: Written Notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice. G-8 SURETY BONDS: Surety Bonds are required on all City contracts in excess of $25,000_ The Contractor agrees, on the submittal of his Proposal to make, execute and deliver to said City of Fort Worth good and sufficient surety bonds for the faithful performance of the terms and stipulations of the Contract and for the payment to all claimants for labor and/or materials furnished in the prosecution of the Work, such bonds being as provided and required in Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas, as amended, in the form included in the Contract Documents, and such bonds shall be 100 percent of the total contract price, and the C-10 Part C—General Conditions ofthe Contract 05/29/09 �./ said surety shall be a surety company duly and legally authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and acceptable to the City ` Council of the City of Fort Worth. Bonds shall be made on the forms furnished by or otherwise acceptable to the City. Each bond shall be properly executed by both the Contractor and the Surety Company. Bonds required by the City shall be in compliance with all relevant local, state and federal statutes. To be an acceptable surety on the bond the name of the surety should be included on the current U. S. Treasury List of Acceptable Securities [Circular 570], and must be authorized to do business in Texas. Sureties not listed in Circular 570 may write performance and payment bonds on a project without reinsurance to the limit of 10 percent of its capital and surplus. Such a surety must reinsure any obligation over 10 percent. The amount in excess of 10 percent must be reinsured by reinsurers who are duly authorized, accredited, or trusteed to do business in the State of Texas. Should any surety for the contracted project be determined unsatisfactory at any time during same, the Contractor shall immediately provide a new surety bond satisfactory to the City. If the contract amount is less than $25,000, payment shall be made in one lump sum 30 calendar days after completion and acceptance of the Work. G-9 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK: If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or fails to perform any provision of the Contract, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other remedy he may have, enter the site and make good such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies, including the cost of the Engineer's additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. G-10 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS: The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. He shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the Owner harmless from loss on account thereof and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified; however, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the design, process or product specified is an infringement of a patent, he shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives such information to Owner. G-11 TESTS: If the Contract Documents, Laws, Ordinances, Rules, Regulations or Orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any Work to be inspected, tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness and the date arranged so the Engineer may observe such inspection, testing or approval. The Owner shall bear all costs of such ,%Now inspection, tests and approvals unless otherwise provided. If after the commencement of the Work, the Owner determines that any work requires special inspection, testing or approval not included above, the Engineer, upon written authorization from the Owner, will instruct the Contractor to order such special inspection, testing or approval, and the Contractor shall give notice as required in the preceding paragraph. If such special inspection or testing reveals a failure of the Work to comply (1) with the requirements of the Contract Documents or (2) with respect to the performance of the Work, with Laws, Statutes, Charter, Ordinances, Regulations or Orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, the Contractor shall bear all costs thereof, including the Engineer's additional services made necessary by such costs; otherwise the Owner shall bear such costs, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. The Contractor shall secure certificate of inspection, testing or approval, and three copies will be promptly delivered by him to the Engineer. The Engineer will review the certificates and forward one copy of each with his recommendation(s) to the Owner. If the Owner wishes to observe the inspections, tests or approvals required by this Section, they will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the source of supply. Neither the observations of the Engineer or the Owner in their administration of the Construction Contract, nor inspections, tests or approvals by persons other than the Contractor shall relieve the Contractor from his obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. G-12 INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES SERVICES: The Contractor shall perform the Work under this Contract with a minimum of outage time for all utilities. Interruption shall be by approved sections of the utility. In some cases, the Contractor may be required to perform the Work while the existing utility is in service. The existing utility service may be interrupted only when approved by the Owner. When it is necessary to interrupt the existing utilities, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing at least ten days in advance of the time that he desires the existing service to be interrupted. The interruption time shall be kept to a minimum. Depending upon the activities at an existing facility that requires continuous service from the existing utility, an interruption may not be subject to schedule at the time desired by the Contractor. In such cases, the interruption may have to be scheduled at a time of minimum requirements of demand for the utility. The amount of time requested by the Contractor for interruption of existing utility services shall be as approved by the Owner. G-13 LAYING OUT WORK: The Contractor shall verify dimensions and elevations indicated in layout of existing work. Discrepancies between Drawings, Specifications, and existing conditions shall be referred to Engineer for adjustment before work affected is performed. Failure to make such notification shall place responsibility upon Contractor to carry out work in satisfactory workmanlike manner at the Contractor's sole expense. C-1 I Part C —General Conditions ofthe Contract 05/29/09 The Contractor shall be held responsible for the location and elevation of all the construction contemplated by the Construction Documents. Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall carefully compare and check all Engineering, Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical drawings; each with the other that in any respect affects the locations or elevation of the work to be executed by him, and should any discrepancy be found, he shall immediately report tho*same to the Engineer for verification and adjustment. Any duplication of work made necessary by failure or neglect on his part to comply with this function shall be done at the Contractor's sole expense. G-14 MEASUREMENTS: Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements at the site or at the building and shall be wholly responsible for the correctness of same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of any difference between actual dimensions and dimensions indicated on the drawings. Any difference that may be found shall be submitted to the Engineer for consideration and adjustment before proceeding with the project. G-15 EXISTING OVERHEAD OR UNDERGROUND WORK: The Contractor shall carefully check the site where the project is to be erected and observe any existing overhead wires and equipment. Any such work shall be moved, replaced or protected, as required, at the Contractor's sole expense, whether or not shown or specified. Attention is directed to the possible existence of pipe and other underground improvements that may or may not be shown on the Drawings. All reasonable precautions shall be taken to preserve and protect any such improvements whether or not shown on the Drawings. Location of existing underground lines shown on the Drawings are based on the best available sources, but are to be regarded as approximate only. Exercise extreme care in locating and identifying these lines before excavation in adjacent areas. G-16 ALIGNMENT OF JOINTS IN FINISH MATERIALS: It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make certain in the installation of jointed floor, wall and ceiling materials that: 1. Preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and the Engineer under the Contract with respect to the Work to be performed under the subcontract so that the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights; 2. Place joints to relate to all openings and breaks in the structure and be symmetrically placed wherever possible. This includes heating registers, light fixtures, equipment, etc. If because of the non -related sizes of the various materials and locations of openings, etc., it is not possible to accomplish the above, the Contractor shall request the Engineer to determine the most satisfactory arrangement. The Contractor shall establish centerlines for all trades. G-17 INTEGRATING EXISTING WORK: The Contractor shall protect all existing street and other improvements from damages. Contractor's operations shall be confined to the immediate vicinity of the new work and shall not in any respect interfere with or obstruct the ingress or egress to and from existing adjacent facilities. Where new site work is to be connected to existing work, special care shall be exercised by the Contractor not to disturb or damage the existing work more than necessary. All damaged work shall be replaced, repaired and restored to its original condition at no cost to the Owner. G-18 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL CERTIFICATION: It is the intent of the contract documents, whether expressly stated or not, that nothing containing hazardous materials, such as asbestos, shall be incorporated into the project. The Contractor shall exercise every reasonable precaution to ensure that asbestos -containing materials are not incorporated into any portion of the project, including advising all materials suppliers and subcontractors of this requirement. The Contractor shall verify that components containing lead do not contact the potable water supply. G-19 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING: Drawings showing location of equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. are diagrammatic and job conditions may not always permit their installation in the location shown. When this situation occurs, it shall be brought to the Engineer's attention immediately and the relocation determined in a joint conference. The Contractor will be held responsible for the relocating of any items installed without first obtaining the Engineer's approval. He shall remove and relocate such items at his own expense if so directed by the Engineer. Where possible, uniform margins are to be maintained between parallel lines and/or adjacent wall, floor or ceiling surfaces. G-20 OVERLOADING: The Contractor shall be responsible for loading of any part or parts of structures beyond their safe carrying capacities by placing of materials, equipment, tools, machinery or any other item thereon. No loads shall be placed on floors or roofs before they have attained their permanent and safe strength. G-21 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS: Where it is required in the Specifications that materials, products, processes, equipment, or the like be installed or applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, direction or specifications, or words to this effect, it shall be construed to mean that said application or installation shall be in strict accordance with printed instructions furnished by the manufacturer of the material concerned for use under conditions similar to those at the job site. C- 12 Part C --General Conditions of the Contract 05/29/09 ,"move G-22 CLEANING UP: The Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish caused by employees or as a result of the Work. At completion of work, the General Contractor shall, immediately prior to final inspection of complete building, execute the following final cleaning work with trained janitorial personnel and with material methods recommended by the manufacturers of installed materials. 1. Sweep and buff resilient floors and base, and vacuum carpeting. 2. Dust all metal and wood trim and similar finished materials. 3. Clean all cabinets and casework. 4. Dust all ceilings and walls. 5. Dust, and if necessary wash, all plumbing and electrical fixtures. 6. Wash all glass and similar non -resilient materials. 7. All hardware and other unpainted metals shall be cleaned and polished and all equipment and paint or decorated work shall be cleaned and touched -up if necessary, and all temporary labels, tags, and paper coverings removed throughout the buildings. Surfaces that are waxed shall be polished. 8. The exterior of the building, the grounds, approaches, equipment, sidewalks, streets, etc. shall be cleaned similar to interior of buildings and left in good order at the time of final acceptance. All paint surfaces shall be clean and unbroken, hardware shall be clean and polished, all required repair work shall be completed and dirt areas shall be scraped and cleared of weed growth. 9. Clean all glass surfaces and mirrors of putty, paint materials, etc., without scratching or injuring the glass and leave the work bright, clean and polished. Cost of this cleaning work shall be borne by Contractor. 10. Cleaning, polishing, scaling, waxing and all other finish operations indicated on the Drawings or required in the Specifications shall be taken to indicate the required condition at the time of acceptance of all work under the Contract. 11, Burning: Burning of rubbish on the premises will not be permitted. ,%No, G-23 DUST CONTROL: Precaution shall be exercised at all times to control dust created as a result of any operations during the construction period. If serious problems or complaints arise due to air -borne dust, or when directed by the Engineer, operations causing such problems shall be temporarily discontinued and necessary steps taken to control the dust. G-24 FIRE PROTECTION: The Contractor shall at all times maintain good housekeeping practices to reduce the risk of fire damage or injury to workmen. All scrap materials, rubbish and trash shall be removed daily from in and about the building and shall not be permitted to be scattered on adjacent property. Suitable storage space shall be provided outside the immediate building area for storing flammable materials and paints; no storage will be permitted in the building. Excess flammable liquids being used inside the building shall be kept in closed metal containers and removed from the building during unused periods. A fire extinguisher shall be available at each location where cutting or welding is being performed. Where electric or gas welding or cutting work is done, interposed shields of incombustible material shall be used to protect against fire damage due to sparks and hot metal. When temporary heating devices are used, a watchman shall be present to cover periods when other workmen are not on the premises. The Contractor shall provide fire extinguishers in accordance with the recommendations of NFPA Bulletins Nos. 10 and 241. However, in all cases a minimum of two fire extinguishers shall be available for each floor of construction. G-25 CUTTING AND PATCHING: Wherever cutting and removal of portions of the existing work is indicated, such work shall be neatly sawed or cut by Contractor in a manner that will produce a neat straight line, parallel to adjacent surfaces or plumb for vertical surfaces. Care should be exercised not to damage any work that is to remain. At no time shall any structural members be cut without written consent from the Engineer. G-26 PROJECT CLOSEOUT Final Inspection. Record Drawinas: Attention is called to General Conditions Section entitled, "Substantial Completion and Final Payment". Maintenance Manual: Sheets shall be 8'/F x 11", except pull out sheets may be neatly folded to 8'/2 " x 11 ". Manuals shall be bound in plastic covered, 3 ring, loose leaf binder with title of project lettered on front and shall contain: 1) Name, address and trade of all sub -contractors. C-13 Part C —General Conditions of the Contract 05/29/09 2) Complete maintenance instructions; name, address, and telephone number of installing Contractor, manufacturer's local representative, for each piece of operative equipment. 3) Catalog data on plumbing fixtures, valves, water heaters, heating and cooling equipment, temperature control, fan, electrical panels, service entrance equipment and light fixtures. 4) Manufacturer's name, type, color designation for resilient floors, windows, doors, concrete block, paint, roofing, other materials. Submit six copies of Maintenance Manual, prior to request for final payment. Ooerational Inspection and Maintenance Instruction: The Contractor shall provide at his expense, competent manufacturer's representatives to completely check out all mechanical and electrical systems and items covered by the Drawings and Specifications. This requirement shall be scheduled just prior to and during the initial start up. After all systems are functioning properly the representatives shall instruct maintenance personnel of the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of each item. G-27 GUARANTEE AND EXTENDED GUARANTEE: Upon completion of the Project, prior to final payment, guarantees required by technical divisions of Specifications shall be properly executed in quadruplicate by subcontractors and submitted through the Contractor to Engineer. Delivery of guarantees shall not relieve Contractor from any obligation assumed under Contract. The Contractor shall guarantee the entire Project for two years. In addition, where separate guarantees, for certain portions of work, are for longer periods, General Contractor's guarantee shall be extended to cover such longer periods. Manufacturer's extended warrantees shall be included in this contract. Guarantees shall become valid and operative and commence upon issuance of Certificate of Inspection and Acceptance by Owner. Guarantees shall not apply to work where damage is result of abuse, neglect by Owner or his successor(s) in interest. The Contractor agrees to warrant his work and materials provided in accordance with this contract and the terms of the Technical Specifications contained herein. Unless supplemented by the Technical Specifications or the manufacturer's normal extended warrantees, the Contractor shall warrant all work materials, and equipment against defects for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance. The Contractor further agrees to bear all costs of making good all work that is found to be defective or not provided in accordance with the Contract Documents. Additionally if the facility or contents are damaged due to defective materials or workmanship of the Contractor, the Contractor further agrees to bear all cost of repairing and/or replacing damaged items and components to bring such items back to at least their original condition. G-28 RECORD DRAWINGS: Upon completion of the Work and prior to application for final payment, one print of each of the drawings accompanying this specification shall be neatly and clearly marked in red by the Contractor to show variations between the construction actually provided and that indicated or specified in the Contract Documents. The annotated documents shall be delivered to Engineer. Where a choice of materials and/or methods is permitted herein and where variations in the scope or character of the work from the entire work indicated or specified are permitted either by award of bidding items specified for that purpose, or by subsequent change to the drawings, the record drawings shall define the construction actually provided. The representation of such variations shall conform to standard drafting practice and shall include supplementary notes, legends and details which may be necessary for legibility and clear portrayal of the actual construction. The record drawings shall indicate, in addition, the actual location of all sub -surface utility lines, average depth below the surface and other appurtenances. G-29 CONSTRUCTION FENCE: At the Contractors option, he may provide a substantial chain -link construction fence around all or a part of the site. The fences and gates must be maintained throughout the construction period. Remove the fences and gates upon completion of the Project and restore the site to the required original or contract condition. G-30 PRODUCT DELIVERY. STORAGE. HANDLING: The Contractor shall handle, store and protect materials and products, including fabricated components, by methods and means which will prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft (and resulting delays), thereby ensuring highest quality results as the work progresses. Control delivery schedules so as to minimize unnecessary long-term storage at project site prior to installation. G-31 REMOVAL OF SALVAGED MATERIAL: The Contractor shall remove salvaged material and equipment from the Project site and dispose of it in accordance with the law. Equipment or material identified in the Specifications or Plans for Owner salvage shall be carefully removed and delivered to the Owner at any location within the City limits as directed by the City. G-32 MANUFACTURER'S REFERENCE: Catalog, brand names, and manufacturer's references are descriptive, not restrictive. Bids on brands of like nature and quality will be considered. Contractor shall inform the City of any substitutions intended for the project in writing prior to the Preconstruction Conference. Failure to inform the City of substitute products will obligate the Contractor to provide the specified material if awarded the contract. Upon request, the Contractor shall submit samples and/or detailed information as required to allow the Engineer to determine the acceptability of proposed substitutions. Where equipment has been listed as "no substitute accepted", or similar description, the City will accept no alternates to the specified equipment. C-14 Part C -General Conditions ofthe Contract 05/29/09 NOW ' SECTION H CONTRACT TIME H-1 DEFINITIONS The Contract Time is the period of time allotted in the Contract Documents for completion of the Work and is the number of calendar days elapsing between the date of commencement and the date of substantial Completion plus additional days allowed to complete punch list items in a timely manner. The Date of Commencement of the Work is the date established in the Notice to Proceed. If there is no notice to proceed, it shall be the date of the Agreement or such other date as may be established therein. The Date of Substantial Comoletion of the Work or designated portion thereof is the Date certified by the Engineer with the approval of the Owner that construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so the Owner may occupy the Work or designated portion thereof for the use for which it is intended. Final acceptance of the completed work or any portion thereof can be made only by the Assistant City Manager, and no other form of acceptance will be binding upon the Owner. A Calendar Dav constitutes 24 hours of time and is any one of the seven days of a week, including Sunday, regardless of whether a "Working Day' or not, and regardless of weather conditions or any situation which might delay construction. An extension of contract time shall be in accordance with this Section. Extensions of time will be as recommended by the CM with final approval by City of Fort Worth. A Workina Dav is defined as a calendar day, not including Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays, in which weather or other conditions not under the control of the Contractor permit the performance of work for a continuous period of not less than seven hours between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. However, nothing in these Contract Documents shall be construed as prohibiting the Contractor from working on Saturdays if he so desires. Legal holidays are defined as being New Year's Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day, Memorial Day, and Veteran's Day. H-2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION: All the time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of essence to the Contract. The Contractor shall begin the Work on the date of commencement as defined in this Section. He shall carry the Work forward expeditiously with adequate forces and shall complete it within the Contract Time. H-3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME: If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by any act or neglect of the Owner or the Engineer, or by any employee of the Owner, or by any separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by any separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in transportation, unavoidable casualties or any causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by any cause which the Engineer determines may justify the delay, then the contract time may be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as recommended by the Engineer and approved by the Owner. All claims for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Engineer no more than fifteen days after the occurrence of the delay; otherwise they shall be waived. If no schedule or agreement is made stating the dates upon which written interpretations shall be furnished, then no claim for delay shall be allowed on account of failure to furnish such interpretation until fifteen days after demand is made for them, and not then unless such a claim is reasonable. H-4 NO DAMAGE FOR DELAY: No payment, compensation or adjustment of any kind (other than the extensions of time provided for) shall be made to the Contractor for damages because of hindrances or delays from any cause in the progress of the work, whether such hindrances or delays be avoidable or unavoidable, and the Contractor agrees that he will make no claim for compensation, damages or mitigation of liquidated damages for any such delays, and will accept in full satisfaction for such delays said extension of time. SECTION I PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 1-1 CONTRACT SUM: The Contract Sum is stated in the contract and is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. 1-2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES: Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a Schedule of Values of the various portions of the Work, including quantities if required by the Engineer, aggregating the total Contract Sum, divided so as to facilitate payments to Sub -contractors, prepared in such form as specified or as the Engineer and the Contractor may agree upon, and supported by such data to substantiate its correctness as the Engineer may require. Each item in the Schedule of Values shall include its proper share of overhead and profit. This Schedule, when approved by the Engineer and the Owner, shall be used as a basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1-3 ADJUSTMENT OF QUANTITIES: (Not used for Lump Sum Type Contract) C-15 Part C -General Conditions ofthe Contract 05/29/09 1-4 PROGRESS PAYMENTS: On the first day of each month after the first month's work has been completed, the Contractor will make current estimates in writing for review by the Engineer of materials in place complete and the amount of work performed during the preceding month or period and the value thereof at the prices contracted for as shown on the approved Schedule of Values and Progress Schedule. If payments are to be made on account of materials or equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the site or in an independent, bonded warehouse such payments shall be conditioned upon submission by the Contractor of bills of sale or such other procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials or equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest including applicable insurance and transportation to the site. The Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by an Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner upon the receipt of such payment by the Contractor, free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances hereinafter referred to as 'liens"; and that no Work, materials or equipment covered by an Application for Payment will have been acquired by the Contractor, or by any other persons performing the Work at the site or furnishing materials and equipment for the Work, subject to an agreement under which an interest therein or an encumbrance thereon is retained by the seller or otherwise imposed by the Contractor or such other person. The Contractor shall prepare each application for payment on AIA Document G702, "Application and Certificate for Payment", and attached thereto AIA Document G703, "Continuation Sheet", to indicate the progress made to date and the period or month for which payment is requested for each Item listed in the Schedule of Values. A copy of the revised monthly work progress schedule must be attached before the pay request can be accepted. 1-5 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT: If the Contractor has made Application for Payment as above, the above, the Engineer will, with reasonable promptness but not more than seven days after the receipt of the Application, prepare a Certificate of Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount determined to be property due, or state in writing reasons for withholding a Certificate. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Owner, based on the CM's observations at the site and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated; that the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subsequent tests required by the Contract Documents, to minor deviations from the Contract Documents correctable prior to completion, and to any specific qualifications stated in the Certificate); and recommendations to the Owner that the Contractor be paid in the amount certified. In addition, the Engineers approval of final payment assures the Owner that the conditions precedent to the Contractors being entitled to final payment as set forth in this Section have been fulfilled. After the Engineer has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall approve or disapprove same within ten days after it has been delivered to the Director of the Fort Worth Water Department. For contracts less than $400,000, Owner shall pay 90% of the approved estimate to the Contractor within seven days after its approval, and the remaining 10% of each such estimate will be retained by the Owner until the final estimate is approved and the Work is accepted by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth. For contracts in excess of $400,000, the Owner will retain only 5% of each estimate until the final estimate is approved and work accepted by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth. No Certificate for a progress payment, nor any progress payment, nor any partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner, shall constitute an acceptance of any Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents, or relieve the Contractor of liability in respect to any warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship. The Contractor shall promptly remedy any defects in the Work and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom that shall appear within a period of two years from the date of final acceptance of the Work unless a longer period is specified. 1-6 PAYMENTS WITHHELD: The CM may decline to approve an Application for Payment and may withhold his Certificate in whole or in part if in his opinion he is unable to make the representations to the Owner as provided in this Section. The Engineer may also decline to approve any Applications for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent inspections, may nullify the whole or any part of any Certificate for Payment previously issued to such extent as may be necessary in his opinion to protect the Owner from loss because of: 1) Defective work not remedied; 2) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims; 3) Failure of the Contractor to make payments property to Subcontractors, or for labor, materials or equipment; 4) Reasonable doubt that the Work can be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; 5) Damage to another contractor: 6) Reasonable indication that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time; or 7) Unsatisfactory prosecution of the Work by the Contractor. When such grounds for the refusal of payment are removed, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. The Owner reserves the right to withhold the payment of any monthly estimate, without payment of interest, if the Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the specifications. C-16 Part C —General Conditions ofthe Contract 05/29/09 1-7 NOT USED 1-8 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: The deduction for liquidated damages shall be per Part D, Special Conditions 1-9 FAILURE OF PAYMENT: If, without fault on the part of the Contractor, the CM should fail to issue any Certificate for Payment within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, for if, without fault on the part of the Contractor, the Owner should fail to approve such estimate or to pay to the Contractor 90% or 95% (as applicable) of the amount thereof within the period of time specified, then the Contractor may, upon seven (7) days additional written notice to the Owner and to the Engineer, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. 1-10 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT: Prior to the request for final payment, the Contractor must meet all provisions for Project Closeout. When the Contractor determines that the Work is substantially complete, the Construction Manager shall inspect the project with the Contractor and prepare a "Preliminary Punch List". When the Engineer, on the basis of a subsequent inspection, determines that the Work is substantially complete, he then will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which, when approved by the Owner, shall allow the Contractor to request a Certificate of Occupancy which will establish the Date of Substantial Completion. The Certificate of Final Completion shall state the responsibilities of the Owner and the Contractor for maintenance, heat, utilities, and insurance, and shall set forth the remaining work as a "final punch list". The Contractor shall complete the remaining work listed therein within specified calendar days. When the Certificate of Occupancy has been issued, the retainage will be reduced to 4%. Upon completion of the work listed on the final punch list to the satisfaction of the City of Fort Worth, the retainage may be reduced to 2.5%. Should the Contractor fail to complete all contractual requirements of the contract, including submittals and final pay request within the fixed time, the contract time will again commence. Should the Contractor fail to complete the work within the contract duration, liquidated damages will be assessed. Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection, the City will conduct a joint inspection and certify completion of the final punch list by cosigning it with the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit the following items to the City prior to requesting final payment: 1) Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims stating that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or his property might in any way be responsible, have been paid or otherwise satisfied, 2) Consent of Surety, if any, to Final Payment, 3) Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens, and, 4) Other data establishing payment or satisfaction of all such obligations, such as receipts, releases, and waivers of liens arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. 5) Contractor's Warranty 6) Statement that all outstanding work has been completed 7) Issuance of the Final Certificate of Substantial Completion 8) Final acceptance by the City of Fort Worth. If any Subcontractor, materialman or laborer refuses to furnish a Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens, the Contractor may, at the election of the Owner, furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify him against any right, claim or lien which might be asserted by such Subcontractor, materialman or laborer. If any such right, claim or lien remains unsatisfied after all payments are made. The Contractor shall refund to the Owner all monies that the latter may be compelled to pay to discharge such right, claim or lien, including all costs and reasonable attorney's fees. The Contractor may then request final payment. The acceptance of final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the Contractor except those previously made in writing and still unsettled. The Contractor's two-year warranty will commence upon final acceptance of the Project by the City of Fort Worth. The designated representative of the City Council of the City of Fort Worth will make final acceptance and no other form of acceptance will be binding upon the Owner. Final payment and release of the retainage amount will become due within fifteen days following acceptance. 1-11 FINAL PAYMENT FOR UN -BONDED PROJECTS: Final payment will not be made for a period of 30 calendar days and until all requirements have been met, with the exception of Consent of Surety for Final Payment. C-17 Part C —General Conditions ofthe Contract 05/29/09 SECTION J PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY J-1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS: The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of his organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated in writing by the Contractor to the Engineer. J-2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY: The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions for the safety of, and shall provide all reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (1) All employees on the Work and all other persons who may be affected thereby; (2) All the Work and all materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or -off the site, under the care, custody or control of the Contractor or any of his Subcontractors or Sub -subcontractors; and (3) Other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. Until acceptance of the Work, it shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every precaution against injury or damage to the Work by the action of the elements or from any other cause whatsoever, whether arising from the execution or from the non -execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any of the above, caused before its completion and acceptance. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws, Ordinances, Rules, Regulations and Orders of any public authority having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury or loss. He shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and progress of the Work, all reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent utilities. When the use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment is necessary for the execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise the utmost care and shall carry on such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel. All damage or loss to any property referred to in the preceding paragraphs caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by the Contractor, including damage or loss attributable to faulty Drawings or Specifications and acts or omissions of the Engineer or anyone employed by him or for whose acts he may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor or anyone claiming through the Contractor for such damage or loss. The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the Work to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. J-3 HARD HATS: Hard Hats will be required at all construction sites included in this Contract from start to completion of work. Each Contractor, employee and visitor at any construction site included in the Contract will be required to wear a hard hat. The Contractor shall enforce the wearing of hard hats by Contractor, employees and visitors. Contractor shall provide ten hard hats for use by the consulting Engineers, City and visitors. J-4 EMERGENCIES: In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act at his discretion to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Any additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of emergency work shall be determined as provided in Changes in the Work. J-5 SAFE WORK PRACTICES: The Contractor shall employ safe practices in handling materials and equipment used in performing required work so as to ensure the safety of his workmen, City employees and the public. The Contractor shall keep the premise free at all times from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish. At the completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove all his wastes and rubbish from and about the work area, as well as his tools, equipment and surplus materials and shall leave the area as clean and free of spots, stains, etc., as before the work was undertaken. J-6 TRENCH SAFETY: The Contractor shall be responsible for all design and implementation of trench shoring and stabilization to meet regulatory requirements. If the Proposal requires, the Contractor shall include a per -unit cost for trench safety measures in his bid. If not included in the Proposal, the Contractor shall include a cost for trench safety measures for all trenches over 5 feet in depth in his Schedule of Values. SECTION K - INSURANCE K-1 INSURANCE REQUIRED: The Contractor shall not commence work under this Contract until he has obtained all insurance required under this Section and such insurance has been approved by the City of Fort Worth, nor shall the Contractor allow any Subcontractor to commence work to be performed under this Contract until all similar insurance of the Subcontractor has been so obtained and approved. The City of Fort Worth and their consultants and Construction Managers for the project will be listed as 'additional insured" on all policies except Worker's Compensation. C-18 Part C —General Conditions of the Contract 05/29/09 K-2 WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE 1) General a) Contractor's Worker's Compensation Insurance. Contractor agrees to provide to the Owner (City) a certificate showing that it has obtained a policy of workers compensation insurance covering each of its employees employed on the project in compliance with state law. No Notice to Proceed will be issued until the Contractor has complied with this section. b) Subcontractor's Worker's Compensation Insurance. Contractor agrees to require each and every subcontractor who will perform work on the project to provide to it a certificate from such subcontractor stating that the subcontractor has a policy of workers compensation insurance covering each employee employed on the project. Contractor will not permit any subcontractor to perform work on the project until such certificate has been acquired. Contractor shall provide a copy of all such certificates to the Owner (City). c) By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the City that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the Texas Worker's Compensation Commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties or other civil actions. d) The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the City to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the City. 2) Definitions a) Certificate of Coverage ("certificate"). A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC- 84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. b) Duration of the Project. Includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor'slperson's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the City. c) Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in section 406.096)-includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner -operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other services related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 3) Requirements a) The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the Contractor providing services of the project, for the duration of the project. b) The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. c) If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the City showing that coverage has been extended. d) The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the City: i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. e) The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. f) The Contractor shall notify the City in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing .: services on the project. g) The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. C-19 Part C —General Conditions of the Contract 05/29/09 h) The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: am i) provide coverage, based on proper reporting on the classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; ii) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; III) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; iv) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; v) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. vi) notify the City in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and vii) contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs h-i) - vii), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 4) Posting of Required Worker's Compensation Coverage a) The Contractor shall post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other Texas Workers Compensation Commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text, without any additional words or changes: "REQUIRED WORKER'S COMPENSATION COVERAGE The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by worker's compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee". Call the Texas Worker's Compensation Commission at 512-440-3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." K-3 LIABILITY INSURANCE: The Contractor shall procure and maintain during the term of this Contract such Liability Insurance as shall protect him, the City of Fort Worth and any Subcontractor performing work covered by this Contract, from claims of damage which may arise from operations under this Contract, including blasting, when blasting is done on, or in connection with the Work of the Project, whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them and the limits of such insurance shall be not less than the following: 1) Automobile Liability: $1,000,000 each accident or reasonably equivalent split limits for bodily injury and property damage. Coverage shall be on "any auto" including leased, hired, owned, non -owned and borrowed vehicles used in connection with this Contract. 2) Commercial General Liability: $1,000,000 each occurrence. Coverage under the policy shall be as comprehensive as that provided in a current Insurance Services Office (ISO) policy form approved for use in Texas and the policy shall have no exclusions by endorsement unless such are approved by the City. 3) Excess Liability Umbrella: $1,000,000 each occurrence; $2,000,000 aggregate limit. This insurance shall provide excess coverage over each line of liability insurance required herein. The policy shall follow the form(s) of the underlying policies. K-4 BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE: Unless stated otherwise in the Proposal or Invitation, the Contractor shall procure, pay for and maintain at all times during the term of this Contract, Builder's Risk Insurance against the perils of fire, lightning, windstorm, hurricane, hail, riot, explosion, civic commotion, smoke, aircraft, land vehicles, vandalism, and malicious mischief, at a limit equal to 100% of the Contract Sum. The policy shall include coverage for materials and supplies while in transit and while being stored on or off site. If specifically required in the Instructions to Bidders, the policy shall include coverage for flood and earthquake. Different sub -limits for these coverages must be approved by the City. C-20 Part C -General Conditions of the Contract 05/29/09 Consequential damage due to faulty workmanship and/or design performed by the Contractor or his agents shall be covered. Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor shall notify the City of Fort Worth in writing before terminating this insurance. K-5 PROOF OF CARRIAGE OF INSURANCE: The Contractor shall provide a certificate of insurance documenting the Fort Worth Water Department as a "Certificate Holder", and noting the specific project(s) covered by the Contractor's insurance as documented on the certificate of insurance. More than one certificate may be required of the Contractor depending upon the agents and/or insurers for the Contractor's insurance coverages specified for the project(s). K-6 OTHER INSURANCE RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1) All insurance policies for this project except Worker's Compensation shall be written with the City of Fort Worth and Engineer listed as additional insured. 2) Applicable insurance policies shall each be endorsed with a waiver of subrogation in favor of the City of Fort Worth. 3) Insurers of policies maintained by Contractor and its subcontractor(s), if applicable, shall be authorized to do business in the State of Texas, or otherwise approved by the City of Fort Worth, and such shall be acceptable to the City of Fort Worth insofar as their financial strength and solvency are concerned. Any company through which the insurance is placed must have a rating of at least A:VII, as stated in current edition of A. M. Best's Key Rating Guide. At the City's sole discretion, a less favorable rating may be accepted by the City. 4) Deductible limits on insurance policies and/or self -insured retentions exceeding $10,000 require approval of the City of Fort Worth as respects this Contract. 5) The City of Fort Worth shall be notified in writing a minimum of thirty days prior to an insurer's action in the event of cancellation, non -renewal or material change in coverage regarding any policy providing insurance coverage required in this Contract. 6) Full limits of insurance shall be available for claims arising out of this Contract with the City of Fort Worth. 7) The Contractor shall provide certificates of insurance to the City prior to commencement of operations pursuant to this Contract. Any failure on part of the City of Fort Worth to request such documentation shall not be construed as a waiver of insurance requirements specified herein. 8) The City of Fort Worth shall be entitled, upon request and without incurring expense, to review the insurance policies including NNW, endorsements thereto and, at its discretion, to require proof of payment for policy premiums. 9) The City of Fort Worth shall not be responsible for paying the cost of insurance coverages required herein. 10) Notice of any actual or potential claim and/or litigation that would affect insurance coverages required herein shall be provided to the City in a timely manner. 11) "Other insurance" as referenced in any policy of insurance providing coverages required herein shall not apply to any insurance policy or program maintained by the City of Fort Worth. 12) Contractor shall agree to either require its subcontractors to maintain the same insurance coverages and limits thereof as specified herein or the Contractor shall provide such coverage on the Contractor's subcontractors. 13) Contractor's liability shall not be limited to the specified amounts of insurance required herein. SECTION L CHANGES IN THE WORK L-1 CHANGE ORDER: The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order Changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and the Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. All Such Changes in the Work shall be authorized by Change Order, and shall be executed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. A Change Order is a written order to the Contractor signed by the Contractor, Owner and the Engineer, issued after the execution of the Contract, authorizing a Change in the Work or adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by Change Order. Any changes in work required due to changed or unforeseen conditions, or by request of either the Contractor or the City, shall be w coordinated with the Director, Fort Worth Water Department. A change order must be written and duly negotiated and executed prior to performing changed work. C-21 Part C —General Conditions of the Contract 05/29/09 The cost or credit to the Owner resulting from a Change in the work shall be determined in one or more of the following ways: 'r 1) by mutual acceptance of a lump sum property itemized, including the allowance to Contractor for overhead and profit stipulated in the original contract proposal; 2) by unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; or 3) by cost and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee. If none of the methods set forth herein above is agreed upon, the Contractor, provided he receives a Change Order, shall promptly proceed with the Work involved. The cost of such work shall then be determined on the basis of the Contractor's reasonable expenditures and savings, including a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit as indicted in the original contract proposal. In such cases, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Engineer shall prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Pending final determination of cost to the Owner, payments on account shall be made on the Engineers Certificate of Payment as approved by the Owner. If after the Contract has been executed, the Engineer requests a price proposal from the Contractor for a proposed change in scope of the work, Contractor shall process such proposal within seven days of receipt and return the price quote to the Engineer in writing. The Engineer shall review the price quotation and if approval is recommended, forward the proposed change order request and price proposal to the Owner for approval. If approval is not recommended, the Engineer will attempt to negotiate with Contractor to revise the proposal to a figure which is fair and reasonable and forward it on to the Owner for approval. If the negotiations do not result in an equitable solution, the Engineer shall prepare a cost-plus type Change Order with a price -not -to -exceed figure for approval by the City and require specific documentation to be provided by Contractor in accordance with the paragraph above. Contractor is advised that according to City of Fort Worth Charter, the City Council must approve all Change Orders and Work Orders which result in an increase in cost of the contract amount by over $25,000. Normal processing time for the City Staff to obtain City Council approval, once the recommended change order has been received at the City, is approximately thirty days. Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to identify Change Order items as early in the Construction process as possible to minimize their impact on the construction schedule. If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if the quantities originally contemplated are so changed in a proposed Change Order that application of the agreed unit prices to the quantities of Work proposed will create a hardship on the Owner or the Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted to prevent such hardship. If the Contractor claims that additional cost or time is involved because of (1) any written interpretation issued pursuant to Section A, (2) any order by the Engineer or Owner to stop the Work pursuant to Section B, where the Contractor was not at fault, or (3) any written order for a minor change in the Work, the Contractor shall make such claim. L-2 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST OR TIME: If the Contractor wishes to make a claim for an increase in the Contract Sum or an extension in the Contract Time, he shall give the Engineer written notice thereof within a reasonable time after the occurrence of the event that gave rise to such claim. This notice shall be given by the Contractor before proceeding to execute the Work, except in an emergency endangering life or property in which case the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with Section J. No such claim shall be valid unless so made. Any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time resulting from such caim, if approved by the Owner, shall be authorized by Change Order. L-3 OVERHEAD ALLOWANCES FOR CHANGES: Should any change in the work or extra work be ordered, the following applicable percentage shall be added to Material and Labor costs to cover overhead and profit: 1. Allowance to the Contractor for overhead and profit for extra work performed by the Contractor's own forces shall not exceed fifteen percent 15% . 2. Allowance to the Contractor for overhead and profit for extra work performed by a Subcontractor and supervised by the Contractor shall not exceed ten percent L-4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK: The Engineer shall have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes may be effected by Field Order or by other written order. Such changes shall be confirmed in writing by the Engineer and shall be binding on the Owner and the Contractor. L-5 FIELD ORDERS: The Engineer may issue written Field Orders which interpret the Contract Documents, or which order minor changes in the Work without change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. The Contractor shall carry out such Field Orders promptly. C-22 Part C —General Conditions of the Contract 05/29/09 SECTION M UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK M-1 UNCOVERING OF WORK: If any Work should be covered contrary to the request of the Owner, it must be uncovered for observation and replaced, at the Contractor's expense. If any other work has been covered which the Owner has not specifically requested to observe prior to being covered, the Engineer or the Owner may request to see such work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work be found in accordance with the Plans and Specifications, the cost of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be charged to the Owner. If such work be found not in accordance with the Plans and Specifications, the Contractor shall pay such costs unless it is found that this condition was caused by a separate contractor employed by the Owner. M-2 CORRECTION OF WORK: The Contractor shall promptly correct all work rejected by the Owner as defective or as failing to conform to the Plans and Specifications whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such rejected Work, including the cost of the Engineer's additional service thereby made necessary. If, within two years after the Date of Final Completion or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents, any of the work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of a written notice from the Owner to do so, unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition, describing same specifically and not generally. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. All such defective or non -conforming work under the preceding paragraphs shall be removed from the site where necessary and the work shall be corrected to comply with the Contract Documents without cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall bear the cost of making good all work of separate contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or correction. If the Contractor does not remove such defective or non -conforming work within a reasonable time fixed by written notice from the Owner, the Owner may remove it and may store the materials or equipment at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the cost of such removal and storage within ten days thereafter, the Owner may upon ten additional days' written notice sell such work at auction or at private sale and shall account for the net proceeds thereof, after deducting all the costs that should have been borne by the Contractor including compensation for additional Engineering services. If such proceeds of sale do not cover all IWA01 costs that the Contractor should have borne, the difference shall be charged to the Contractor and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. If the Contractor fails to correct such defective or non -conforming work, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section G. The obligation of the Contractor under this Section shall be in addition to and not in limitation of any obligations imposed upon him by special guarantees required by the Contract Documents or otherwise prescribed by law. M-3 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE OR NON -CONFORMING WORK: If the Owner prefers to accept defective or non- conforming work, he may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case a Change Order will be issued to reflect an appropriate reduction in the Contract Sum, or, if the amount is determined after final payment, it shall be paid by the Contractor. SECTION N TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT N-1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR: If the work is stopped for a period of 30 days under an order or any court or other public authority having jurisdiction, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing any of the work under a contract with the Contractor, or if the work should be stopped for a period of 30 days by the Contractor for the Owner's failure to make payment thereon as provided in Section I, then the Contractor may after the end of such period of 30 days and upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner, terminate the Contract. N-2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER: If the Contractor is adjudged as bankrupt, or if he makes a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of his insolvency, of if the Contractor refuses, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials, or if he fails to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or for materials or labor, or fails to comply with all Laws, Statutes, Charter, Ordinances, Regulations or Orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, or otherwise is guilty of a substantial violation of a provision of the Contract Documents, then the Owner, on its own initiative that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedy and after giving the Contractor and his surety, if any, seven (7) days' written notice, terminate the employment of the Contractor and take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor and may finish the work by whatever method he may deem expedient. In such case the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. C-23 Part C —General Conditions of the Contract 05/29/09 If the costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Engineer's additional services. exceed the unpaid balance of the Contract, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The City of Fort Worth may terminate this contract in whole, or from time to time, in part, whenever such termination is in the best interest of the City. Termination will be effected by delivering to the Contractor a notice of termination specifying to what extent performance of the work of the contract is being terminated and the effective date -of termination. After receipt of termination the Contractor shall: a) Stop work under the Contract on the date and to the extent specified on the notice of termination. b) Place no further orders or subcontracts except as may be necessary for the completion of the work not terminated. c) Terminate all orders and subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the performance of the work terminated by the notice of termination. After termination as above, the City will pay the Contractor a proportionate part of the contract price based on the work completed; provided, however, that the amount of payment on termination shall not exceed the total contract price as reduced by the portion thereof allocatable to the work not completed and further reduced by the amount of payments, if, any otherwise made. Contractor shall submit its claim for amounts due after termination as provided in this paragraph within 30 days after receipt of such claim. In the event of any dispute or controversy as to the propriety or allowability of all or any portion of such claim under this paragraph, such dispute or controversy shall be resolved and be decided by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth, and the decision by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth shall be final and binding upon all parties to this contract SECTION O SIGNS The Contractor shall construct and install the project designation sign as required in the Contract Documents and in strict accordance with the Specifications for "Project Designation Signs." This sign shall be a part of this Contract and shall be included in the Contractor's Base Bid for the Project. SECTION P TEMPORARY FACILITIES P-1 SCOPE: The Contractor shall furnish, erect, and maintain facilities and perform temporary work required in the performance of this Contract, including those shown and specified. P-2 USE OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES: All temporary facilities shall be made available for use by all workmen and subcontractors employed on the project, subject to reasonable directions by the Contractor as to their proper and most efficient utilization. P-3 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL: The Contractor shall maintain temporary facilities in a proper, safe operating and sanitary condition for the duration of the Contract. Upon completion of the Contract, all such temporary work and facilities shall be removed from the premises and disposed of unless otherwise directed or specified hereunder. P-4 FIELD OFFICES AND SHED: The Contractor is not required to provide a temporary field office or telephone for projects under $1,000,000. Contractor shall equip the Project Superintendent with a pager and provide 24-hour contacts to the City. The Contractor shall provide a temporary field office building for himself, his subcontractors and use by the Engineer. For construction contracts with a bid price in excess of $1,000,000.00, the Contractor shall provide a separate field office for the City s construction representative. This building shall be as specified in Part D of the Specifications. The Contractor shall provide and maintain storage sheds other temporary buildings or trailers on the project site as required for his use. Location of sheds and trailers shall be as approved by the Owner. Remove sheds when work is completed, or as directed. P-5 TELEPHONE: The Contractor shall provide and pay for telephone installation and service to the field offices described above. Service shall be maintained for the duration of operations under this contract. The Contractor shall provide for and pay for an automatic telephone -answering device at the site office for the duration of the project. Contractor will install separate fax lines and instruments for the City and the Contractor. P-6 TOILET FACILITIES: The Contractor shall provide proper, sanitary and adequate toilet facilities for the use of all workmen and subcontractors employed on the project. P-7 UTILITIES: Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements and provide for temporary water and electricity required during the construction. Contractor shall provide and install temporary utility meters during the contract construction period. These meters will be read and the Contractor will be billed on this actual use. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials required to tap into the utilities. The Contractor shall make the connections and extend the service lines to the construction area for use of all trades. Upon completion of the work all utility lines shall be removed and repairs made to the existing lines. Only utilities at existing voltages, pressures, frequencies, etc. will be available to the Contractor. C-24 Pan C -General Conditions of the Contract 05/29/09 ,%moi Water. Provide an ample supply of potable water for all purposes of construction at a point convenient to the project or as shown on the Drawings. Pipe water from the source of supply to all points where water will be required. Provide sufficient hose to carry water to every required part of the construction and allow the use of water facilities to subcontractors engaged on the work. Provide pumps, tanks and compressors as may be required to produce required pressures. Electric Service. Provide adequate electric service for power and lighting to all points where required. Temporary electric service shall be of sufficient capacity and characteristics to supply proper current for various types of construction tools, motors, welding machines, lights, heating plant, air conditioning system, pumps, and other work required. Provide sufficient number of electric outlets so that 50 foot long extension cords will reach all work requiring light or power. Lighting. Supply and maintain temporary lighting so that work of all trades may be properly and safely performed, in such areas and at such time that day -lighting is inadequate. Provide at least 0.75 watts of incandescent lighting per square foot and maintain a socket voltage of at least 110 volts. Use at least 100-watt lamps. In any event, the lighting intensity shall not be less than 5 foot candles in the vicinity of work and traffic areas. P-8 HEATING: Heating devices required under this paragraph shall not be electric. The Contractor shall provide heat, ventilation, fuel and services as required to protect all work and materials and to keep the humidity down to the extent required to prevent corrosion of any metal and to prevent dampness or mildew which is potentially damaging to materials and finishes. All such heating, ventilation and services shall be provided and maintained until final acceptance of all work. In addition, the Contractor shall provide heat and ventilation prior and during the following work operations as follows: a) At all times during the placing, setting and curing of concrete provide sufficient heat to ensure the heating of the spaces involved to not less than 40°F. b) From the beginning of the application of drywall and during the setting and curing period, provide sufficient heat to produce a temperature in the spaces involved of not less than 55 °F. c) For a period of seven (7) days previous to the placing of interior finish materials and throughout the placing of finish painting, decorating and laying of resilient flooring materials, provide sufficient heat to produce a temperature of not less than 60 °F. P-9 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION. EQUIPMENT AND PROTECTION: The Contractor shall provide, maintain, and remove upon completion of the work all temporary rigging, scaffolding, hoisting equipment, rubbish chutes, ladders to roof, barricades around openings, and all other temporary work as required to complete all work of the Contract. Contractor shall coordinate the use and furnishing of scaffolds with his sub -contractors. The Contractor shall provide, maintain, and remove upon completion of the work, or sooner, if authorized by the Owner, all fences, barricades, lights, shoring, pedestrian walkways, temporary fire escapes, and other protective structures or devices necessary for the safety of workmen, City employees, equipment, the public and property. All temporary construction and equipment shall conform to all regulations, ordinances, laws and other requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction, including insurance companies, with regards to safety precautions, operation and fire hazard. The Contractor shall provide and maintain pumping facilities, including power, for keeping the site free of excess water at all times, whether from underground seepage, rainfall or drainage of broken lines. The Contractor shall maintain provision for closing and locking the building at such time as possible to do so. If this is not feasible, maintain a night watchman. The Contractor shall provide and maintain all barricades or enclosures, required to protect the work in progress from outside elements, dusts, and other disturbances as a result of work under this Contract. Such protection shall be positive, shall meet the approval of the Owner and shall be maintained for the duration of the construction period or as required to provide for the protection as specified. P-10 PROJECT BULLETIN BOARD: The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain during the life of the project a weather - tight bulletin board approximately 3 feet high by 5 feet wide having not less than two hinged or sliding glass doors with provisions for locking. The bulletin board shall be mounted where and as approved by the Owner, in a prominent place accessible to employees of the Contractor and sub -contractors, and to applicants for employment. The bulletin board shall remain the property of the Contractor and shall be removed by him upon completion of the Contract work. The following information which will be furnished by the City to the Contractor shall be posted on the bulletin board and shall be maintained by the Contractor in easily readable condition at all times for the duration of the Contract. a. The Equal Opportunity Poster and Notice of Nondiscrimination of Employment (Standard Form 38). b. Wage Rate Information Poster (Form SOL 155), with the Contract Schedule of minimum wage rates as required by the Davis -Bacon Act. C. Safety Posters. SECTION Q VENUE Should any action arise out of the terms and conditions of this contract, venue for said action shall lie in Tarrant County, Texas. C-25 Part C —General Conditions of the Contract 05/29/09 r SINGLE IINF DIAGRAM ANQ CONTROL WIRING SYMBOLS TRANSFORMER WITH KVA RATING, PRIMARY -- --- AND SECONDARY VOLTAGE, NO. OF PHASES, AND FREQUENCY, AS NOTED ON DWGS. i DOAF 50AT r-� 30 o- LOW VOLTAGE THERMAL/MAGNETIC BREAKER, OR MOLDED CASE SWITCH - 3 POLE; UPPER NUMBER INDICATES FRAME SIZE, LOWER NUMBER INDICATES TRIP RATING 20A 0 0 2 POLE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER IN PANELBOARD 20A rT\ 0 3 POLE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER o o \ n o IN PANELBOARD � ^20A 3Po------ --- Tyr LOW VOLTAGE THERMAL MAGNETIC CIRCUIT BREAKER; 3 POLE, 20 AMPERE, 8OLT-IN TYPE SI ; 30 MCP 1 3,o- F+------ SIZE 2 COMBINATION MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTER - 2 SPEED, 2 WINDING (FV2S) 2 25 MCP }��� �— FULL VOLTAGE NON -REVERSING COMBINATION MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTER WITH 1 NEMA SIZE AND 3 POLE MOTOR CIRCUIT PROTECTOR (FVNR) 4c __ INDICATES ALL OR PART OF CIRCUIT IN OUCTSANK 1 �60 S00A Y—---i�----- FUSED (500 AMPERE) INTERRUPTER SWITCH, RATED 600 AMPERE FU ----324Q0:120 --------- POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER 2400 VOLT TO 120 VOLT RATIO 2 QUANTITY AS INDICATED 600:5 - rtj `• CURRENT TRANSFORMER 600 AMPERE TO 5 AMPERE RATIO 3 QUANTITY AS INDICATED 00 INDUCTION MOTOR OR MOTOR OPERATED VALVE; NUMBER INDICATES HORSEPOWER \600 -- INTERRUPTER SWITCH, 600 AMP INDICATES DEVICE LOCATED IN MCC a INDICATES DEVICE LOCATED AT OR NEAR LOAD 0 INDICATES DEVICE LOCATED IN REMOTE OR PROCESS CONTROL PANEL - SEE SCHEMATIC CONTROL DIAGRAM DRAWINGS FOR SPECIFIC NOMENCLATURE & LOCATIONS -zi y- PLC OR PLC AUXILIARY RELAY OUTPUT � VALVE OR GATE MOTOR OPERATOR _ J 1-1 OR ■ INDICATES EXTERNAL TERMINATION POINT CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER (CPT) m Q GENERAL NOTES W s 1. THIS IS A GENERAL LEGEND SHEET. NOT ALL SYMBOLS AND ABBRFVIATIONS AS SHOWN ON THIS SHEET APPEAR ON THIS PROJECT, 2. ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLANS 00 NOT SHOW ALL CONNECTIONS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS & VENDOR SHOP DWGS. FOR ADDITIONAL FIELD WIRING REQUIREMENTS. 3. ALL ELECTRICAL TYPICAL. DETAILS TYPICAL DRAWING SHEETS SHALL. BE FOLLOWED WHERE APPLICABLE WHETHER SPECIFICALLY REFERRED TO ON THE PLANS OR NOT. 4. ALL POWER AND LIGHTING CIRCUITS SHALL EACH BE PROVIDED WITH AN a INSULATEO GREEN GROUND WIRE INSTALLED IN THE SAME CONDUIT AS POWER g CONDUCTORS. E i u4i N g PROJECT NO. 6265A10 FIE+AW, PLOT TIME' $TIME$ SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM AND CONTROL WIRING SYMBOLS WIRE INTERSECTION POINT NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT YI-- NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACT FUSE - CURRENT LIMITING NOTED BY CL. DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER -- GROUND ROD OR GROUND GRID CONNECTION MCP-7 MOTOR CIRCUIT PROTECTOR -NUMBER 0 0 0 0 INDICATES CONTINUOUS CURRENT RATING OR h0 INDICATING LIGHT -LETTER DENOTES COLOR RTM RUNNING TIME METER pd OR f- E, START PUSH BUTTON ® OR Q_L_Q STOP PUSH BUTTON 101 OR CL± --) STOP LOCKOUT PUSH BUTTON L_I__i OR Q_1__Q MUSHROOM HEAD PUSH BUTTON -a-Y-r- ® OR SELECTOR SWITCH o�a l-JI OR -`--- UNFUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH - 60 NUMBER INDICATES AMP RATING F❑T OR - `�-{]_� FUSED DISCONNECT SWATCH - 60 NUMBER INDICATES AMP RATING EMS r _ `Ff _ MANUAL STARTER (W/OL) OR ter' �O NEMA SIZE 1 c ,Lrc OVERLOAD DEVICE --�.'=- - NORMALLY CLOSED GEARED LIMIT SWITCH NORMALLY OPEN GEARED LIMIT SWITCH O FLOAT SWITCH (CLOSING ON RISING LEVEL) Ct--T`f5 FLOAT SWITCH (OPENING ON RISING LEVEL) rJ� O PRESSURE SWITCH (CLOSING ON RISING PRESSURE) 0 I_T5 PRESSURE SWITCH (� (OPENING ON RISING PRESSURE) OL RTM -+[- MOTOR STARTER COIL AND OVERLOADS EX CONTROL RELAY COIL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM. CONTROL WIRING & GENERAL PLAN SYMBOLS TEMPERATURE SWITCH c 1 (CLOSING ON RISING TEMPERATURE) -, TEMPERATURE SWITCH (OPENING ON RISING TEMPERATURE) FLOW ACTUATED SWITCH u (CLOSING ON INCREASE IN FLOW) C -_ TT PLOW ACTUATED SWITCH t� (OPENING ON INCREASE IN FLOW) ,) CI TIME DELAY ON CONTACT - (NORMALLY OPEN WITH TIME DELAY CLOSING AFTER COIL IS ENERGIZED) ±' TIME DELAY OFF CONTACT W (NORMALLY OPEN WITH TIME DELAY OPENING AFTER COIL IS DE -ENERGIZED) o-r a TIME DELAY ON CONTACT l\ (NORMALLY CLOSED WITH TIME DELAY OPENING AFTER COIL IS ENERGIZED) TIME DELAY OFF CONTACT (NORMALLY CLOSED WITH TIME DELAY �V CLOSING AFTER COIL IS OE-ENERGIZEO) a 0 TORQUE SWITCH v (NORMALLY OPEN) o� TORQUE SWITCH (NORMALLY CLOSED) O LIMIT SWITCH (NORMALLY OPEN) p LIMIT SWITCH (NORMALLY OPEN, HELD CLOSED) LIMIT SWITCH: (:NORMALLY CLOSED) Cl 'O LIMIT SWITCH (NORMALLY CLOSED HELD OPEN) FAN AMMETER <Y> l+lA VOLTMETER DIGITAL- METERING (_= SYSTEM ISHI SPACE HEATER 5. PROVIDE AN JINSULATEO.GREEN GROUND CONDUCTOR IN EACH CONTROL C'RCU!T CONDUIT. 6. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY EXISTING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES BEFORE A`IY EXCAVATION. 7, FADED AREAS ON DRAWINGS INDICATE EXISTING EQUIPMENT. 8. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO DRAWINGS OF OTHER D:SCIPL.INES FOR EXACT LOCATIONS OF ALL EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES REOUIRI:NG ELECTRiCAJ_ POWER AND/OR CONTROL_ 9- S!NGLE-LINE DIAGRAMS SHOW CIRCUIT CONDUCTOR REOU!REMENTS, ANU CONO:lH- ^IZES FOR EXPOSED PORTIONS OF CIRCUITS. SEE CONDUIT SPFCIRCAIIONS ANO DUCT BANK SECTION DRAWINGSS FOR CONGU€T SIZES IN SLAOS AI40 IN DUCTRANK SECTIONS, SWITCH & OUTLET SYMBOLS SINGLE POLE TOGGLE SWITCH s2 TWO POLE TOGGLE SWITCH $3 THREE-WAY TOGGLE SWITCH $4 FOUR—WAY TOGGLE SWITCH WP WEATHERPROOF SWITCH sbl MANUAL MOTOR STARTER, WITH OVERLOADS $T MOMENTARY CONTACT TOGGLE SWITCH . TEMP. SWATCH IN FLOW SWITCH, FIRE ALARM FLOW SW, bN LEVEL SWITCH FV l VIBRATION SWITCH K11; EMERGENCY STOP El PRESSURE SWITCH rT3� TORQUE_ SWITCH ZS; LIMIT SVi!TCLi, FIRE ALARM TAMPER PR SW7TCH(SINKLER VALVE) -� SINGLE RECEPTACLE, 12OV, 20A DUPLEX RECEPTACLE. 12.OV, 20A GROUNDING TYPE _ DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, 120V, 20A, Fl GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTING TYPE 48OV, 30 WELDING RECEPTACLE AMPERE RATING NOTED TELEPHONE WALL OUTLET CONDUIT & WIRING SYMBOLS 1-5C/114, 3/4-C ONE S CONDUCTOR #14 AWG MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE, IN ONE 3/4- CONDUIT 1-IPR#16S ONE SINGLE -PAIR, TWISTED, SHIELDED INSTRUMENT CABLE 3#12, #12G, 3/4"C THREE j12 AWG CONDUCTORS, ONE #12 AWG GROUND CONDUCTOR IN ONE 3/4" CONDUIT 2 PR. 3/4" TC 2 PAIR COMMUNICATION CABLE IN 3/4" TELEPHONE CONDUIT CKT. S-5;�—_- HOME RUN -NUMBER DENOTES CIRCUIT NUMBER CONDUIT EXPOSED ------------------- CONDUIT CONCEALED IN CEILING, WALLS, OR SLAB - CONDUIT CONCEALED IN ELECTRICAL DUCT BANK G GROUND CONDUCTOR ENCASED IN CONCRETE OR DIRECT BURIED 3 CONDUIT PLUGGED FLUSH OR CAPPED EE DIRECT BURIED CONDUIT CONDUIT TURNED UP - CONDUIT TURNED DOWN COND, C OR CDT CONDUIT TC CONDUIT WITH TELEPHONE WIRE OR PAGE? WIRE TW TELEPHONE WIRE TTB TELEPHONE TERMINAL BOARD ABBREVIATIONS AFF ABOVE FINISfiED FLOOR LLCO LOW LEVEL CUT OFF PTO AEG ABOVE 1IN15HFD GRADE LCP LOCAL POWER AND CONTROL PANEL FIT C OR COT. CONOU:': LV LOW VOLTAGE SH CPT CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER MCC MOTOR CONTROL CENTER SS CR CONTROL. RELAY MCP MOTOR CIRCUIT PROTECTION SST CS CONTROz_ STATION MFR MANUFACTURER ST EC EMPTY CONDUIT NTS NOT TO SCALE F FAST, FORWARD MV L?£U!UM VOLTAGE TS F. FU`;E OPR OPEN PHASE - PHASE REVERSAL RELAY TR ±; or tND GROUND (WIRE) PF POWER FACTORVFDWa GFI G OUNID FAULT INTERRVr`TINC PLC PROGRAI,M IDLE LOGIC CONTROLLER Ur HS HAIID SWi1TCH PVR PHASE FAILURE/REVERSAL RELAY HT HEAT TRACING PCC PLANT CONTROL CENTER XFMIR ELECTRICAL CONTROL WIRING & GENERAL PLAN SYMBOLS 11 OR PC PHOTOCELL CO OR SV SOLENOID VALVE �j OR LEVEL PROBE EMERGENCY BATTERY PACK LIGHTING FIXTURE (NO. OF HEADS AS SHOWN) D i BELL 01 HORN P8 PULL BOX JUNCTION BOX T9 TERMINATION BOX ;'= p Z W �aasv►vi ♦ *it:2l ivP '0 l��f ?2 h 3 .v f aN# �Ei•:W E c3r^- i �/ (p 4C1 tli�Maa T N� O e� q I P ® r h @_�7g � � I u�.Saa? MJ MOTORIZED DAMPER OR LOUVER \ / LIGHTING FIXTURE. (REFER TO LETTER IN FIXTURE SCHEDULE) / \W W INDICATES WALK-THRU (UNSWfTCHEO) FLUORESCENT FIXTURE. (REFER TO UPPER CASE_ I--7-� r1 I A} 1 LETTER IN FIXTURE SCHEDULE) ❑ LETTER INDICATES CONTROLLING SWITCH I�Fa-� NECESSARY. NUMBER INDICATES PANEL EOWFETCASE yy WALL MOUNTED LIGHRING FIXTURE - SEE LIGHTING }--�H FIXTURE SCHEDULE y POLE MOUNTED LIGHTING FIXTURE - SEE LIGHTING ?? FIXTURE SCHEDULE 3'Y POLE MOUNTED LIGHTING FIXTURE W/OUPLEX RECEPTACLE POLE MOUNTED 4'-6' ABOVE GRADE - SEE LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE C_i THERMOSTAT I GROUND ROD IN GROUND WELL 5W, 120 VAC HEAT TAPE O MISCELLANEOUS PANEL LIGHTING PANEL LIGHTING TRANSFORMER EXISTING DEVICE/EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN EXISHNG DEVICE/EQUIPMENT TO SE REMOVED H HEAT DETECTOR SMOKE: DEFECTOR L AUDIO / VISUAL FIRE ALARM DEVICE VISUAL FIRE ALARM DFVICE FIRE ALARM PULL STATION RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTOR RUNNING TIME METER SPACE HEATER STAINLESS STEEL SOLID STATE TRIP SHUNT TRIP TFIAPIERATURE SWITCH TIMING RELAY VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE WEATHERPROOF UNDER GROUND TRANSFORMER FA r FU M OL 1 300V - FU OL - -I {�--{ {—ova td a 60NZ I � FU M OL - ti_7}—{ I--o�J..A.._.-. L111v FU Y .� Izov OFF NH-G_OiX�-PHOI NH-GO�X-.2 H_A_N_D�,� AUTO 200 1 I I (ALTERNATOR t .._o 00, l OL --{ I M �� CI�O3 ALTERNATOR �HI GOX-PLOT lIILLL �f PSL PSH OL M d ��A � MI R ar ON 5AUTO�, DRA N ORYEft — A S01-EN040 7 OVERLOAD OA SCHEMATIC--- NITROGEN GENERATOR COMPRESSOR 0 0 I NH-GOX-CPOi i I NH-cox-CP02 I X E m L� �1K0JECI NO, 02.05AI0 FIUiNAME. 1,F-toZ rMv I'(Ot TI!db' SiL•.IES o ti - 120VAG �3' �- Ms 0 ANALYZER SEE SCHEDULE I xx-xx-xxxxr _a-zoTA CABLE PER MANUFACTURER, - V AE 3/4' G) SCHEMATIC— ANALYZER TRANSMITTER DEVICE NNAE TAG NO. NITROGEN GENERATOR DEWPOiNT ANALYZER NH-GOX-AT02 OZONE GENERATOR NOA OZ.ONAiED PRODUCT GAS CONCENTRATION NH-OZOI-ATOT OZONE GENERATOR NO.2 OZONATED PRODUCT GAS CONCENTRATION NH-OZ02-AT01 OZONE GENERATOR NO.3 OZONATED PRODUCT GAS CONCENTRATION NH-OZ03-ATOI NORTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM NO,I OFF GAS ANALYZER j NH-OZOFOI-ATOI NORTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM NO.R OFF CAS ANALYZER NH-OZ.OF02-ATOI NORTH OT.ONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM NO.3 OFF GAS ANALYZER NH-OZOF03-ATOI SOUTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM No.I OFF GAS ANALYZER SH-OZOFOI-ATOI SOUTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM N0.2 OFF GAS ANALYZER I SH-OZOF02-ATOI SOUTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM N0.3 OFF GAS ANALYZER 1 SH-OZOFO3-ATOI 120VAC 0 DESICCANT DRYER - STATUS I xx-xx,-xxxxI �l) V 0 SCHEMATIC-- DESICCANT DRYER 02 1 NH-COX-OYOIt I NH-•COX-DYO2I r 1 N;, 0} z Ps:•:w, LU N$ O� y3: ,Z 5:0 �an�r coENV �� W ��wfi g.t LaJ C!) CL T) C4 r ) uj Q LLJ h Q= C) r 0 a a Cr cJ Z o O U 0 z F-- 0 z o 3- m uS e N n v W sw a ES Vt a f a C t w U — V lu NF NOTES UG OH UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, ALL POWER AND CONTROL DEVICES LOCATED IN NITROGEN t `o GENERATOR. CONTROL PANEL c � O TYPICAL FOR TWO 0 C O3 F1ELD WIRING AND CONDUIT BY CONTRACTOR �� 0 ca INDICATES DEVICE LOCATED IN MCC Q c �- A itiOICATI:S DEVICE LOCATED AT OR NEAR LOAD `r V INDICATES DEVICE LOCATED IN REMOTE OR PROCESS CONTROL PANEL - SEE SCHEMATIC CONTROL DIAGRAM - o �n- DRAWINGS FOR SPECIFIC NOMENCLATURE & LOCATIONS ;I EC _2 7-E-102 SLtl. 6 N " - 120VAC O MS Oj QL a A X2 X1 L 0 R STOP xoa OPEN 8 13 LSO 14 TSO t0 Ci X3 TS TS SEE I C ) ( LSC t/ 0 NOTE 5 Q CLOSE LSC 7 S. 4 TSC 9 Oi Cs r 5 —I oox 5 29 i"'�'` ^ 39 ��.-- / N i s d LSA -O- 3 LSB `> ...".L._ aox 30 F� 40T® u I MODULATING CONTROLLER 4-20 mA __ d._� OUTPUT rcv0 INPUT "-{�--rim i# ff ourPUT +- +- O � E S '7 I E 52 rROaEc r t.v. 0105n to OASCHEMATIC— 480 VAC VALVE OPERATOR WITH MODULATING CONTROLLER DEVICE NAME I TAG NO. OZONE GENERATOR NO.1 COOLING WATER INLET VALVE NH-OZOJ-VLO1 OZONE GENERATOR N0.2 COOLING WATER INLET VALVE NH-OZ02-VLOi OZONE GENERATOR NO.3 COOLING WATER INLET VALVE NH--OZO3-V1Ui OZONE GENERATOR NOA GASEOUS OXYGEN INLET VALVE NH--OZ01--V105 OZONE GENERATOR NO.2 GASEOUS OXYGEN IN= VALVE. NH-07.02-YL05 OZONE GENERATOR NO.3 GASEOUS OXYGEN INLET VALVE I NH-0263-'vi05 iLLNN.IE I-E-1GJ mtj 1'10111Mi- �TI>,1F$ N 120VAC MS 01, .� x1 NTR, L O R OPEN LSO STOP x0a —i-, g EMG 73 14 TSO 10 Ci X3 TS TS f -- r�AA 4 a a I r � S*.._ �•_�e SEE C i O t+t� .•. (/�''�/J LSC NOTE 5 - 1--° %O�° 6 05 1_2 I LGsa—w LSC O a 3 r 4 4rsc9 of Y a _,A a —lf c a c S Cs gip$^� m o oox r tz; aan i +CLOSE 3y a Epp -J c 0ox F I LSA -0- l56 'n .2 I Q OPETJ 3Qo 40 �`4 1 o°�x 1LSwlti� EMG W 3 � 0B SCHEMATIC— 120 VAC VALVE OPERATOR _ T WITH POSITION SWITCHES v� DEVICE NAME TAG NO. W OZONE GENERATOR NO.1 OZONE FLOW CONTROL VALVE NH-0201-VI-02 Q OZONE GENERATOR NO.2 OZONE FLOW CONTROL VALVE NH-OZ02-VLO2 OZONE GENERATOR NO.3 OZONE FLOW CONTROL VALVE NH-OZ03-VLO2 r tom- Q W NORTH OZONE DESTRUCT INLET VALVE NO.f ?dH-"OZOF"01- 1L03 U « U = NORTH OZONE Of DESTRUCT INLET VALVE N0.2 NH-OZOFQ2-VLOI W NORTH OZONE DESTRUCT INLET VALVE NO 3 i NH-4ZOf03-VL01 t— SOUTH OZONE DESTRUCT INLET VALVE NO.1 STi-OZO'r0i-Y'LOi lil SOUTH OZONE DESTRUCT INLET VALVE NO.2 SH-020'r02-VLOII W SOUTH OZONE DESTRUCT INLET VALVE NO.3 f SH-OZOFO3--VL01I � �.l --r 0 o O r S o O u' V PosmoN CHANCE { Q VALVE POSITION CONTACT v I CLOSE MID OPEN ^ X O D 7-11 O X X LST 3-4 i! O X X 1 -L-1_7 X —� O 0 9-2G O O_ __ X__ , t� 17-18 X X O Gy cr LSO 73-14 � X I X � O w _< 11-12 1 0 O X 29-30 X X: O 0 _ < LSA 23-24 27-2.8 0 O-i-X' X o 21-22� OX XO--1-0_._0 �- ' KEY NOTES } ov k�3,?7�-_3B -__X0 NEMA 4X MANUAL STARTER FOR LOC:LLSB0 \✓ COtJTRACTOR_DISCONNECT PR04"TOED AND INSTALLED B1'-32 _ �O �O -F-X X l >>PRO ISI S FOR OPEN - CLOSE CONTROL TRM NOTES DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM = r� 1. CIRCUITS SHOWN: VALVE OPEN, POWER • AND CONTROL VOLTAGE OFF. C'3� FIELD WIRING AND CONDUIT BY CONTRACTOR .- 2. 19 FACTORY WIRED TERMINALS. - 0 u 3. TORQUE SWITCHES �? o TSC TSO aa 4. Ci AND Ci n) REVERSING CONTACTOR INTERLOCKS. G Os AND Cs PUSHBUTTON MAINTAINED SEA:-tN �-- CONTACTS, 5. STD? BUTTON IS DEPRESSED WHEN THE SELECTOR SWITCH IS IN THE OFF POSITION. 120 VAC VALVE LIMIT - 7-E-103 OC 3 SWITCH DEVELOPMENT ,Ira N t SOLID STATE POWER CONTROLLER MCP 480V i-0"' . C I I * v - _I OFF OAS 30 >-o t c i c �` PREHEATER 60HZ �i''�ry t -� c ��.. LWLX__ XXX 0 4-20mA FROM OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM LOCAL CONTROL PANEL 4 � -08QV X FU it f2Dv k PREHEATER PREHEATER L R ON OFF r I I O HEATER ON r- ox To� I LCP-C-99 { M lf,K 0 HEATER OFF _E_ TO }-m- TO CT-x I LCP 1 C I LCP I OA SCHEMATIC- OFF -GAS PREHEATER I NAME TAG NO. PLC NO- INORTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM PREHEATER NO.! NH-OZ-OFOI-HTRO1 I NH-LCP-C-, OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM PREHEATER NO.2 NH-OZ-OF02-HTRO7 INH-OZ<-OF03-HTROI `+ NH-LCP-C-99___I ENORTH NORTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM PREHEATER NO.3 ! NH-LCP-C-99 SOUTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM PREHEATER NO-i ISH-OZ-OF0I -HTROi j SH-LCP-C-100 SOUTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM PREHEATER NO.2 SH-OZ-OF02-HTRol I SH-LCP-C-100 ISOUTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM PREHEATER NO.3 ISH-OZ--Of03-ttlRai I SH-LCP-C-100 FILENAME:' 7-E•104d} y PLOT UML: $tl"F;$ VARIABLE rnrUlicNCY i-� •dirar. I oRrvE FU l_ 480U FU i OV O STOP CRT L x0o START RUN F 9I PLCC S/S -a-t o °`---Y--{-i I >h-- ■- ECM --� t I 1 I i YfR i I M 1- OCOMMQN f �� REMOTE I START SPEED I HHj#ji i#t}j! Jf POTENTIOMETER 1 LOCAL VFD KEYPAD —�•-__-f_-XQO MANUAL SPEED CONTROL l o ��oox 4-20 mA SPEED 4-20 mA SPEED INDICATION t— ReMDTE SETPOINT SPEED 1•- -O REF. '_0 OL , FAULT CRT RESET M FAULT /fT,Fi RUN CR 2 -- - CRI F`<3> CR2 f- t STOP G) SCHEMATIC- OFF -GAS BLOWER TAG NO- .-. PLC NO. TH I NOROZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM BLOWER NO_T NH-OZ-OFOI-BROl NH-LCP-C-99_ C NORTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM BLOWER NO.2 NH-OZ-O_ 02 _BROI _ 'H--LCP--C-99 NORTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM BLOWER N0.3 _ _ !•JH-OZ-OF03-Bf20f mi- r'-C-99 SOUTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM BLOWER NO,1 SH-OZ-OFOI_OROi SH-LCP-C-100 SOUTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM BLOWER NO.2 SH-OZ-O_F02--BR01 SH_LCP-C-tOf, SOUTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM BLOWER N0.3 _ SH-OZ-0F03-BROi _Sti _LCP-C--iGO__ t! .r 120 VAC _ OFF \ ON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER SETPOINT O ADJUST __L_TYP 4-20mA FROM 1 LCP 4-24mA FROM TIT -- -C `7_D- 4-20mA TO (SEE SCHEDULE) u U t 1: POWER CONTROLLER a � » PREHEATER PREHEATER pLEd 04tiER BLOWER L R ON OFF L R START STOP ` _ xo TO xo TO _��# MCC • MCC _:. ,.��--is - 0. t� � Lij i ax ox 0- � U ( LCF _.___) I LCP { X L Q Wh r¢¢ Of aUS SCHEMATIC- OZONE DESTRUCT C UryU) SYSTEM LOCAL CONTROL PANEL W w ' }O O Q' E NAME TAG NO. LCP NO- I h W Z I NORTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM NO.1 CONTROL PANEL NH-OZOFOI-TT02 NH-LCP-C-99 V O O NORTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM NO.2 CONTROL PANEL NH-ULUF Ul-I IU2 NH-LCP-C-99 NORTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM NO.3 CONTROL PANEL NH-OZOF03-TT02 NH-LCP-C-99 I to N C) SOUTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM NO.I CONTROL PANEL SH-O-ZOF01-1102 IaH-LCP-C-iOO Q d SOUTH OZONE DESTTUCT SYSTEM NO.2 CONTROL PANEL SH-OZOFC2-TT02 >H-LCP-C-Iou I zz SOUTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM NO.3 CONTROL PANEL Sri-UZOF03-TTO2 ISH-LCP-C-100 i h Of CD z o c] m a N 0 w 3 o a KEY NOTES GON/OFF FROM DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM. _ c" 2/' START/STOP CONTACT FROM DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM, Jn o ALL CONTROL FOR EACH SYSTEM MOUNTED IN A NEMA 4X STAINLESS STEEL ENCLOSURE AT EACH DESTRUCT UNIT. `o n �J FIELD WIRING AND CONDUIT BY CONTRACTOR. o rb cx u c Q'- u a a oc �P Li 6 > 0 'IIXL7-E-104 SEO. SYMBOLSINSTRUMENTATION INSTRUMENT IDENTIFICATION INSTRUMENT OR FUNCTION�PP FIRST LETTER(S) SUCCEEDING LETTERS ,�ENERAI_ NOTE THE P&ID SYMBOLS AND DEVICE IDENTIFICATIONS ARE BASED ON INSTRUMENT SOCIETY OF AMERICA, STANDARD PRACTICE ISA-S5.1 (1984). SOME MODIFICATIONS, ADDITIONS, AND ALTERATIONS HAVE BEEN MADE AS NEEDED TO ACCOMMODATE THE PROJECT REQUIREMENTS. I FIRST LETTER(S) LETTER I PROCESS OR I MODIFIER INITIATING VARIABLE A ANALYSIS (-) B BURNER FLAME I C I CONDUCTIVITY I D DENSITY (S.G.) I DIFFERENTIAL E VOLTAGE I F FLOW RATE I RATIO G I GAUGE I H I HAND 0.14NUAL) I CURRENT I J I POWER I SCAN K I TIME OR SCHEDULE I L ( LEVEL I M I MOTION N I INTRUSION I 0 I TORQUE I P I PRESSURE (013 VACUUM) Q I QUANTITY I R I RATIO I S I SPEED OR FREQUENCY I SAFETY T I TEMPERATURE I U I MULTIVARIABLE (°) V I VIBRATION I W I WEIGHT X I PARTICLE COUNT Y I EVENT. STATE I Z POSITION P&ID HIERARCHY SYMBOLS DISCRETE SHARED INSTRUMENTS DISPLAY/ CONTROL eR OPERATOR ACCESSIBLE O 0 FIELD tS.1.l INACCESSIBLE SINGLE INSTRUMENT HOUSING CONTAINING TWO INSTRUMENTATION FUNCTIONS OA AND (ALL SIGNALS) OOR (ANY ONE SIGNAL) ELECTRICAL INTERLOCK XX --P--- INTERLOCK NUMBFR SXXX SOFTWARE INTERLOCK NUMBER LETTER SYMBOLS I±kNDSWITCH/INDICATOR LIGHTS FUNCTION DESIGNATION xxx YL STATUS OR EVENT LIGHT xxx YA ALARM LIGHT xxx HS SELECTOR OR PUSHBUTTON SWITCH MOMENTARY OR MAINTAINED CONTACTS MOTORIZED VALVE ACTUATOR LEGEND OPEN -STOP -CLOSE OSC TS OPEN -CLOSE SWITCHES POSITION SWITCHES LOCAL_ OFF -REMOTE LR TT 4-20MA POSITION CONTROL SWITCH TRANSMITTER OPEN -CLOSE OC ZC 4-20MA INPUT PILOT LIGHTS POSITION COMMAND SUCCEEDING LETTERS READOUT OR PASSIVE FUNCTION OUTPUT FUNCTION MODIFIER ALARM I '. I I CONTROL PRIMARY FI FMENT I I GLASS I GATE I HIGH INDICATE I I I I CONTROL STATION I LIGHT (PILOT) I I LOW I MIDDLE 1 I NORMAL ORIFICE i POINT (TEST CONNECTION) I I INTEGRATE I I RECORD OR PRINT I I I SWITCH I I TRANSMIT I MULTIFUNCTION ('} I I MUUMUNU11ON I VALVE WELL ( I I I UNCLASSIFIED LIGHT SOURCE I RELAY OR COMPUTE (-) WHEN USED, EXPLANATION IS SHOWN EITHER ADJACENT TO INSTRUMENT SYMBOL PROCESS CONTROUCONVERTOR FUNCTION DESIGNATION 'T A ANALOG 0 UFFERF_NCE, D DIGITAL = Dr::DF E VOLTAGE. X MULTIPLY q a F FREQUENCY [>] SELECT LIK-NEST SIGNAL V- I CURRENT SELECT LCWES SIGNr'.L P PNEUMATIC r SQUARE ROOT PF PULSE FREQUENCY V SUM PD PULSE DURATION SP SET POINT 0 R/1 RESISTANCE TO CURRENT CONVERTER 87 1/1 CURRENT TO CURRENT CONVERTER OR OR SIGNAL SPUTTER 0 i Plt(1lL:GT NO. 6205At0 FILL•NAAtE 1 NAU1 tlxq DRIVE, ACTUATE OR UNCLASSIFIED FINAL CONTROL ELEMENT SIGNALS ANALOG INPUT t` CISCRETE INPUT PULSE INPUT (L ANALOG MODULA:ON 1 OUTPU; LLL TX MODULATING OUTPUT X BLANK TIME DURATION (PULSE WIDTH) F PULSE TRAIN T TP.IAC YX DISCRETE OUTPUT X BLANK MAINTAINED (ELECTRICALLY HELD) L LATCHED (MAGNETICALLY OR MECHANICA11Y HELD) f'LUI ItME $ilws XXX FUNCTION DESIGNATDOt A AUTO AUX AUXILIARY C CLOSE DCS DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM ESS EMERGENCY START -STOP LLS LEAD -LAG -STANDBY L LOCAL LN LOW -NORMAL FOR LOCAL-OFF-REL40TE LOS LOCK OUT STOP MA MANUAL -AUTO MCA MANUAL -OFF -AUTO MASS MASS FLOW 0 OPEN OC OPEN -CLOSE OL OVERLOAD 00 ON -OFF ODA ON -OFF -AUTO OSC OPEN -STOP -CLOSE P PROCESS PCC PLANT CONTROL CENTER SPD SPEED SLOS START -LOCK OUT STOP SP SETPOINT SS START -STOP RST RESET TURB TURBIDITY MISC. ABBREVIATIONS OCS DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM 1/0 INPUT/OUTPUT MCC MOTOR CONTROL CENTER PLC PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER RIO REMOTE 1/0 SCR SILICON CONTROLLED RECTIFIER - - SSS SOLID STATE STARTER VFD VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE LINE SYMBOLS PRIMARY PROCESS FLOW —•—•- FIBER OPTIC CABLE SECONDARY PROCESS FLOW OR CONNECTION TO PROCESS, OR MECHANICAL LINK, OR INSTRUMENT SUPPLY — — — ELECTRIC SIGNAL />L PNEUMATIC SIGNAL, OR UNDEFINED SIGNAL_ FOR PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAMS /\ X— CAPILLARY TUBING (FILLED SYSTEM) COMPUTER OR DATA CONNECTION XXX _____> PROCESS LINE CONTINUED TO ANOTHER DWG. XXX)-- PROCESS LINE CONTINUED FROM ANOTHER DWG. PROCESS SYMBOLS QUICK CONNECTION d I 1 0 AIR OR CHEMICAL SOLUTION DIFFUSER U V U U U V AIR COMPRESSOR AIR VENT BACKFLOW PREVENTER h�Q BATCHMETER BLOWER! DIAPHRAGM SEAL - STANDARD EJECTOR ----��-"�—__ ELECTRIC MOTOR rl OR '�-�y FLEXIBLE RUBBER CONNECTION OR RUBBER HOSE FLOAT SWITCH FLOWMETER - FLUME�„� FLOWMETER - THERMAL LJ - FLOWMETER - MAGNETIC FLOWMETER - ORIFICE PLATE -� I-- FLOWMETER - PTTOT TUBE OR ANNUBAR 9 FLOWMETER - ROTOMETER j { FLOWMETER - TURBINE OR PROPELLER (�)? — oo FLOWMETER - ULTRASONIC DOPPLER FLOWMETER - VENTURI TUBE CATE - SLIDE OR SLUICE GATE - WEIR u HEATER -� LEVEL PROBE - CONDUCT04CE 9 LEVEL SENSOR U - ULTRASONIC LIQUID DETECTION UNIT MIXER PULSATION DAMPENER 4 PUMP - CENTRIFUGAL PUMP - METERING PUMP - DIAPHRAGM PUMP- POSHVE DISPLACEMENT PUMP - PROGRESSING CAVITY ROTARY CHEMICAL FEEDER v REDUCER D EYEWASH/SHOWER WITH FLOW SWITCH SAMPLE PORT SAMPLE - CALIBRATION CYUNDER SOLENOID - VALVE OPERATOR STATIC MIXER STRAINER BASKET UNION VALVE - AIR RELIEF VALVE - ANGLE VALVE - BACK PRESSURE: CONTROL VALVE - BALL VALVE - BALL CHECK VALVE - BUTTERFLY VALVE, -- CONCENTRIC PLUG VALVE - DAPHRAGM VALVE - ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVE - FLAPPER CHECK VALVE - GATE VALVE - GLOBE VALVE - NEEDLE VALVE - PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE -- PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE - SWING CHECK VALVE - TELESCOPING VALVE - THREE WAY VALVE - V-NOTCH BALL VALVE -. VACUUM BREAKER VALVE - PRESSURE AND VACUUM RELIEF WYE TYPE STRAINER WYE TYPE STRAINER W/BLOWDFF FLOW RESTRICTOR ti FS ap �TeY wok o Uj IL .F: ORO a I � �°.1" M x„ C a EPA, 10 1. n r tJ 0 W � i i� W CL _ F d LIJ W L5 OZ W W F_ Q h 1 J z LL1 O O �� S U U) cf) O Y CD O 4 U O O om a > a u � co rn� t 6 " C CO `c © �c o Al o m c° c� N 21 j31Lt' 7-N-101 FO N [---__�-- � OPERATOR WOHY,SThTICtJ � ( OZONE GENERATION BUILDING i z a I 1 f RIQ REhtE'i"FE I/O iHlO; 1 I I INH-piS--G-02I I I SEE NOTE 1 I I PLG PfrOGAh?I AHLF. .OGIC 1 I CONTROILLER TPECi i I I i I ! IIj tiOT--STANDBY RED-JUDANT ( PLC f'ROGRAMUABLE LOGIC ( I CONTROLLER I I 1 I 1 I I 1 -------------------------------------------------- ----- ----------------- i (q�® gq PAN{th MOUNTED HUMAN f r------ r------------ -{ r---- T F---- 1 8 9 01 i I ( 1 I I I I I I ! I I I ETHERNET SWITCH 1 1 I I 1 ! 1 I `--� 1 i i!NH-PPA-G-501 I i PLC _ PLC I I PLC I 1 PLC I 1 pLG ( I 1 1 SEE NOIE i 1 I 1 f 1 IHill I I IPdt3-PLC-G-04� INH-PLC-G-OSf I 161H-PLG-2-Tfil 1 1 rdf{_PLC-Z-461 I I t7H-PLG-Z-561 1 I 11 1 ( I 1 I I ( 1 I I I ! I I I I I I I I INH-HMI-G-Tai 1 1 I I I I I I ' — ' — ' --! •T-- • —{ PATCH PANEL I 1 I 1 1 1 I ( 1 I ( I li NH-PPA-G-517 I SEE NOTE I I I ff i i I I I 1 1 1 IF 1 I 1 I I I 1 I I I I I 1 OZONE GENEz5Tt0Pa ( I Du LD<>;c I I 1 fNH--REM-G-De! I I o- I 1 ppq o (j[7jj7�jj[j�7 qpq i i ppp }�` I 1 ( COi.!MUNICA.TION`,>_.... .. tl Lttti C tl U'YU f ENCLOSURE�Pdii-LCP-G-- SEE NOTE 2- ( I OZONE GENERAIION ( ( 1 ! 1 1 ( I 1 ( BUILD':NG PLC 1 LONE GENERATOR NO.T 1 (OZONE GENERATOR NG.2 1 I OZ ONE GENERATOR N0.3 1 _.-.. —. PAidEL NH-E_CP-0-0' I ! POL`{E SUPPLY UNIT CONTROL 1 I POWER _S�,IPPLY U?d'T CGNTRGI_ I 1 PGN:ErRNtiPPLY Utd1T_CONTROL I 1 SEE NufT 3 1 IPANEL�tiFi-LCP-Z-D7 I IPANELtt,,7H-LCP-Z-3, _ (( I SEE NOTE 3. t� 1 i PANEL L- ! 1>EE NOTE 3. f ISEE NOTE 3. I I I I I I f c._._._.__._._._._..._._._._._._._. III etli tlf:: 144�107,1-3 - - - - - - - ..... ------ ! _ I j I FOG-C-97 i PIORTN OZ E 1 r SOHIAGrOR MIRUIIIYNG I I 1 f I i I PdH-REM-C-O5j I ( 1 I i I � I I 1 I I f 1 I I ! I I I 1 NFigi hl -G-05 1 1 I I I I i I I I I ?,OkFH OZO11C CONTACTORS AND I I DESTRUCT UNITS REMOTE '-/G I I PANE't. NH-LC—C-9a. SEE NOI"E 3. 1 I L— --'-- T'LOr TIME. STi41E$ IV, /C j I FOC-C-IOt I SOVIIH OZONE I I Ci7ttrhCTQR MCC 1 Hi:I�SHti�. I 1 - 1 1 I i � ( I ( 1 I ( I 1 I I ' I i ( I t I i I I I I I I 1 I I SCUM OZONE_ CONTACTORS AND I I OE4RUCT UNITS REMOTE I,/O ( FAN;:LH-LCP-C'-700 SEE NOTE 3. I ( E/G 1/0 FIRER OPTIC TO COPPER CONVERTER ( u N.C1'WORI•. TAP REMOTE 1/0 NETWORK TAP THERNET CATEGORY SE GDLE ----- IX)hi'.R;NICATT01d CABLE -------- REMOIL 1,/0 CARLE - -- I18ER OPTIC C&Bi1. t4 E �s `6 �� anal r :t- Mkri,in m �, taaiaia+� GEN-RAL NOTES: 1. OWNER WILL PROVIDE OPERVJOR 'WORKSTATION, ETHERNET SWITCH, AND PATCH PANEL. 2. ENCLOSURE WITH 19-INCH MOUNTING RACK PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR, 3, ALL COMPONENTS IN OZONE GENERATION BUILDING PLC PANEL. OZOtdE GENERATORS POh4ER SUPPLY UNIT CONTROL PANELS. AND OZONE CONTACTORS REMOTE 1/0 PANEL SHALL BE PROV€DEO BY OZONE SYSTEMS SUPPLIER. 4_ CONTRACTOR WILL PROVIDE THE WIRE AND CONDUIT BETWEEN THE EOUIPMENT COh'P01-1S PROVIDED BY THE OZONE SYSTEM SUPPLER. 5. OZONE SYSTEM SUPPLIER SI-VLL SIZE THE REMOTE 1/0 O TS ON THIS SHEF.' TO ACCOMMODATE ALL THE SIGNALS INDICATED IN THE 1/0 L;ST. r. LEFT SIDE SUB —PANEL LAYOUT 1 1/2.=1°-O" 4 o � m a z w �a- re w 0 PLC BACKPLANE E t F P0JECT Na azasAla FILLI,V,-AF: /•ti-t6:i Ju.� PLOT TIME$i1METs 6'--0` �_---------------� J IL------__ i L-------------_J O ENCLOSURE 1 1/2"=1'-0" fi iU c� u Ci G G O O O O O _ O O O O O a i - - - _ - - - _ - - - - REMOTE 1/0 BACKPLANE PLC & RIO PANELS NH—LCP—G-03 & NH—LCP—C-99 & SH—LCP—C-100 J v \ 19 - - - - - - -- - - - - 79 7 tic�J 12 a ® Ho no 15 1 SUB —PANEL LAYOUT 1 1 /2"=1 °-0" MATERIAL SCHEDULE ITEM NOTES DESCRIPTION ( 1) 1 DUAL DOOR FREE-STANDING NEMA 12 ENCLOSURE, 72" x 72" x 24" 2) ' FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURE W/ MANUAL SWITCH (3) 1 3 1 REMOTE 1/0 BACKPLANE (4) DATA POCKET ON INSIDE OF DOOR (5) DUPLEX RECEPTACLE W/ BOX & COVER ISA/120VAC - GFCI 1 (6) 4 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY RESTING ON SHELF 1 (7) SUB -PANEL 60" x 68" (85 I SIDE SUB -PANEL 60" x 20" (9) 2 HOT -STANDBY PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER BACKPLANE (�10,) 1 2 HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE 1 \' 1 I 1 4' x 4" WIREWAY 1 12) 1 DIN RAIL MOUNTING 1 3� DIN RAIL MOUNTED TERMINAL BLOCKS (14) I DIN RAIL MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKERS PANEL GROUND BAR FIBER OPTIC CABLE PATCH PANEL REMOTE 1/0 CABLE TO FIBER OPTIC CONVERTER (118) 2 COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK TAP (19) 1 REMOTE 1/0 NETWORK TAP (20) 1 24 VDC REDUNDANT POWER SUPPLY (21 1 EXHAUST FILTER AND GRILL ON SIDE OF ENCLOSURE 1 (27) 240 CFM COOLING FAN WITH AIR FILTER AND GRILL ON ENCLOSURE SIDE (23) DIN RAIL MOUNTED CODLING FAN THERMOSTAT O i U] r \ Ng * sif �a.rtUt't`{ 4n ttiti>� c 5f, "g ®yo�P L �LLo 1 !Lg°auµO. W CL Ch 0 0. Of W ° + ' 2 /'1 z o L- d 0 _3zI 0 o O W NOTES: O [if °. TYPICAL CONTROL PANEL SIZE AND COMPONENT LAYOUT. OZONE SYSTEM SUPPLIER TO PROVIDE48 FINAL DETAIL AND SIZING FOR EACH SPECIFIC Q PANEL. SUBMIT FOR ENGINEERS REVIEW- 2. NOT REQUIRED IN LCP-C-99 AND -TOO- 3. TWO REfiOTE 1/0 BACKPLANES REQUIRED IN LCP-C-99 AND -100. LOCATE SECOND BACKPLANE WHERE HOT -STANDBY PLC BACKPLANES ARE SHOWN IN DETAIL 'C', THIS DRAWING. 4. UPS POWER SHALL BE PROVIDED TO THE. � o o a N FOLLOWING DEVICES: PLC/RID BACKPLANES, HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACES, 24VDC POWER SUPPLIES, REMOTE 1/0 TO FIBER OPTIC CONVERTERS. rl- ii u 4 ut c�i1 r°i u 5. PROVIDE THE INDICATED ON THIS SHEET IN ---- - ACCORDAI4CE WITH SECTION 17710. o 14 U w.r �n ct o •• u - u o� Ho U O [D c 3� LL 7—N-103 iEQ i LIST SAVED BY: n;- LAST UPDATED: V512812009 08:S1AM ti FIELD EQUIPMENT LOCAL CONTROL PANEL P�Q $CAD O I NH-OZ-142-AC-002-AL,l O f— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — ---— TL I �� I I I I NH-N2-AC-AC-02-RN I I I I I NH-AC-001-AL F:;a Ln z =NZ > on > C' > Noa � -a � IK� I l i I I I I I F- NH-AC-001-RN I z rj NI1-02-N2-SV-002 11cm zmF I NK-07-1q2-SV-001 UTI G .����'T�-,-i NH-GQX-FLR06 I -13-3 M4 01 x IKH-0Z-N2-PSH-002-ALI INH-DZ-JN2-PSH-0011 12-11L-111' IN11-12-N2-111-0011 II Ll I L-----< --------- -------- L I NH-0Z-N2-SV-001-6Cj IT I ;a' 0 z 11 z— I 0 NH-COX-FLRO5 I IT 1 NH-OZ-N2-DY-002- T -T- — — — — !n�� �roj II INH-OZ-N2-OY-002- RNf O x AC 0 x it i — — — — — — — — -- - — — — — — LNH-0Z-N7.-A1T-D01-AH] — — — — — — - LNm-0z-Nz-AT-001-Al — — — — — — — --- < r I NH-OZ-N2-PI-0021 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - — — — — — - o n, 13 — — — — — — — — — — — — — NH-0Z 01, r, 0 0 z -> no �ml no 10, mx on rni -m -m -To m z 0 7, 0 to r"n 0 n " m 0, 00 0 0 1 ,w>mxx a 5 �z C' > C 00 '0- 5 MC z rl �1R' 0, C, V, C) -0m, "C-50 RAO MAY 2009 RDJ/TS V, Aj O 0 RIFY SCALI her Is one Inch on o6qznci 'cw;'q. If VEE cf net one ;nch on ;his get, adjust scale. CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE OZONE GENERATION FACILITIES NITROGEN GENERATOR P&ID r1TE TBPE No. F-882 THE SEAL APPEA%Ifo ON THIS DOCLUDiT 57 WAS MJn+0CtM0 W goo KONAW 0� J005T Freese and Nichols 1 87 MAY 2dL 20W V71;-f 4055 A.0.0 S�2 Fort W.11h, T.,O. 76I09-4495 Ph,— - (817) 7.15-7300 F.. - (W) 735-7191 LAST UPDATED; CS28P.f03 08:81 AM LAST SAVED BY: m;aww% L� .7 n 0 n u.' 0001 z"~O cto-.v K O�� m6Z Y0Om O � v a lnz �� CJ v: cnn NTO 'rws 000+ k n �<C p az?. pp-. C r.. p -n O jlnm �a QL m U v `y' c K oc c �xi < Ivw 4i .:. c c' s- S mo OK AT. r' G (� <n n r royat'J>v ow�� ryn �y,m -am p c nr. �=[nr'r ' =ar_tz ,m-+xc* rnm �iy2n xr."�tT :z' 0. co, onG C71 G,XT>ti Sb Yrc 00 r,zr.' n x rn poN FIELD EQUIPMENT 1 ��Q I CGS O )ZH 11 INH-OZ- I I --9A--- -- N _ --- ' O NN h 1NH-0z-G0X-SA-001-7SCI -----------------------�% - n Z E H-OZ-GOX-BA-001-Zf I T-;_____ ____._-_- rn Z O ( = 1_I...____- E H+t�OZ_GOXX_Ah-dJl_RM I� r -__t 1 I -I � I ____---aZ`--HA-f.At N d O _ _ _. •- .-. _ Lt I DNH-tlZ-GOX-Pt-fa11" r 1 I t oT r I I ! i INH-Oz-G'JX-FM-DD11 INH-aZ-GaX-FM-001-F11 =I z - _________ - I m 1 _ Ii I i t I I Nt-OZ-GOX-FM-0421 INH-OZ-COX-iM-002-FlI I r-----------------------------� r l - I L- - - - - - - - -- Hm a INH--COX-PIT-i INH-OZ-GOX-PIT-OOt- -- - ^----- v -� NH-cz-c4ws-P1-nai i------_ y V INH-flz_GOX_TIT-0ot! -L �_----_INH-OZ_GOX_TIT-001_TIlR I 1 Iz ; I I NH-Gz-a;ws-•nT-oet ( 1 t I i 1 � -------------- l � I I I I lN+taz ocws-ssvtGelt'zsol , (- I 9NH-D-C_OCNS ' 1 I _HFv-OOt-ZSq ti _--- Oy i I I YN!t-02-DCK5-?fV-ODt-21 j -------------__- 17 \ •_ N I A1------------------NHDZtT;'wS-=_ZC! -- r 1 i I rJH-07-OCYtS-'FM-001 F1I TD _ --_-INH_aZ-aC155_FM-001 1 �> I OUTp:IDE z - 1 IL 1 1 I r I u O r_ r0,` m I- i INH•-02-OT-C• N-007-DOC 1 1 x p 0 I I IrAO y O� f I I I za on L.,----- ----I NH-OZ_- ---- - Y� r N 1 I1 t 4 L I O ., 4 NB-OZ-OZ-itT-D41-17 1 j I 1 I a I I DCNySY-C`07� _ !- 1 Op INH-OZ--- ---047-- C, p /11 ----_ _NH_OZ-OZ_CEN-00]-JI IP!rk-02-OC'+VR-RM-CO� z rn Z A I cn -`--- INH_CZ-OZ-TSH-002-TIID I �`J� 1.8 z� �v - -_iIID_JI tt i 0O �< f�/} �(� ___ iNH-oz_Dz-,EN-;EN-P.'i-4} i Ir�O-- --1/ '^L Q jna i I 4 I m171 I o Z I _ __ IN11-O2-02-CrN _c91-At1 Q 0 'r1 1 - vZ7 1 'K� --0£-OZ-PSH-C411 I {NH-OZ-07_-PSH-901-AL! 1 y, __-._______-___�_�__-_______� vrmz I INH-02-OZ-PSi-G071 -I ------------- r----------`V 7T-N J IT , r I INN-02-o2-HFV-001-zSOI I I _t., 0-------------T r----------i- = T - to -�- _ 'z ryH-02-OZ-BFV-O'06-- I ' o NH-aZ-OZ-V-GOt-21I I I ��/fin INH-D£-Oz-BFY-OG7-Rtll-� I -- �ri-0£-02-BFY-CCit-zCl I ZI � V r*7 a � 1 Q O .J > © 11 yJ r- ' I NH-OZ-OZ-4-091 1 I NH---c-- -- L; !NH-Oz-oz-Tss-001-AL - D ev 0 I D 'tlNH-OZ_oZ-Al=0G11 _--_ I1 INH-D-c-D2-AIT-UD4-Alf 1 n r I I O �•� 1 c a 11 I rnW f'3- INH-aZ-DZ-PI-002 i OOn O 1 00Ei ��..r- I ryozo �j_ -`� z -- ------_-'-_'___' r4 r'0ti z 'r S QNM TI z ~ o NG. R_Y.51Jh• 6+" I .1aT£ I r4.b J?B ":0, � � � I 82osAro ! I D-7 VAY 2009 � RoJ/-rs -. i (canny MAJ VEWY SCALE + -0 t Bar is ono inch an origins! Crewing. It IS=•t'C (Jl no: one inch an this sheet, adjust eealo, �CHEC'IEU CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE OZONE GENERATION FACILITIES OZONE GENERATOR No.1 P&ID .L4Y SCADA CLC't9E S`•�--CEr, _`AcF:OEt::, N' ;,7i; rdC :CNF.F:,A O^ NCA ST,:'JS i J:'71rP 'lt''•Fi:AtO� IvJ i ,Q), 1s,7 •:Ar V-- 9�.':-a Pl. 4747U c cx IM.- ":'nl':'E 'r'r! _�i ''�'d r' :='•;L?!.'f i7r h;^. i GrtSi::^.._ _ 77 'a;r: ERtrO? ::C.T .•-FirY.:Ja',C'LYCEv LOY, ;4C.1 ''DOU11C .v.L,:..a 'rr�T'=Fi .... :'�f'r•r ..7; Ji>.E ir•,..,_< .,. GPE;d :�•,fu> ......._ J`I -ti.. r_j r. '.:.IY I�\i: ',: . � �l:.�t•l. +.:.J�.C4 r.i L."', *j :1ZCNt GE`:ER^..'`4 ��C.t •ram.,-,.u'.; { '..COLVC 'WATER, rLN' ALAS+1 ;`-Cw ALAR1d z r �v, cnNE 1dG'.1 SHUN-G'".i'N STA',JS CZ'NE .iFA:CR1 iJ.'R IV4^I ✓ :"�' 07:tNF. Vr.NE,R4TO" N0.1 ... ._ ...` I4�1 iii`, CR i7 K)!NT ( I""r L'L�r'iC c'•F:' F227OF Ivy^ I :'1L1 _:fA�; !cu :.J--7 nt,,;-? �.',.F.fJC??".':�7 Ntl 1 \.e. ai .. ,'nL•�, '.ti'Hi .-,iL:.1 i_reF".'=Tu";k two, l+r.A1, ;. ct';,rht �`;tl i':nr ,rdvAi 1 111 '. t.� Y. � ri•.' C `: - .. _ VA ti? Oi°;;N STA7JS V ,ENERA7,CR'' '1G` CZONE FLCI, ryNO.' ENE TCR CZONE FLCt; ..:,•"r;:.:, :..ail'•.; ^AS C,( N' ZNTiATIO'N CAS •C" NCdNTPAPAi!CN Al2-, 1 1 TSPEINo. F-882 Engineem-world wwr wm we'r-0 7K SEAL APPrARNO ON THIS DOCUMENT QOSIi l Ner fIHaRM ifi4h wal ALD Freese and NichoIs 40551Mamotlonc! M. 5vi'a 200 ••6; ;•, AFeits�� RJ. ° Z� o/STy"R,.••'�+ Fort Worth, T.." 761 C9-4895 0 P.arw - (817) 735-7YJ0 Foy - (817) 7=-7491 / LAST SAVED BY: m;aloort 7� A c 0 no m nz a Q LAST UPDATED: 08.:812C09 08:81 AM 121:44pil'u'► n �.7 00 -N_1 x'N E 1 O A I I NH-0[-GLWrl-TSH-UUt 1 NH-UL-i)(:nR-iSt[-I;U7-A'. t -Ga-----------------"�! 7 .Jtk-fir.-OGN:d-i M -DUl I ' Nfi-OL-�OC.'N3-FM-047-; I I ----- I` rH-4r.-Ol:WR-1SH-C{J?i- - - - - - - - - - - - L..---.--.-_.._:�..__I "P a m 0 r I �. / 1-�S--•LSOS_wa-f 5L-{'r:. NH-f,:+.::6 R-FV 00-, 1 1 ----------- --•-• -------------------.---- p - 1 vINH-(3(-tk.:l5i!-WSi-DUI 1 � r INN-f`t-Ouh i'-✓IJ.P-OCll-F;P- ,G-U.�YGH-WSH-00:'� I 'O c7 (7 I rp lNN_.U7_. ()CWR-PSH-COI-AI I Ir Z y------.-----�.---._.--� l�lil I r.. T 0 T 1 �iI t7 CS 06 O n0 x L�H'_i)�_CC'1aR-PrtP-DU"i-rid. -----^----�----.- ----.--.---------.� r-t N - - O U 7 Z I I p �0 O I rn " v � INH-a�-c�cw,c-rsrr-�lry ( .p---------NH-U(-OCW!S-PSH-UL`t-Al,� �'t -Y a +NH-UC-U(.WH-HStt-q(171 �PlH-OZ-C�.4'M1i-P`H-0L2-ALA - -- - - - - - - - - - - r -.- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - -.- - - -- I 9 O I �NH-U7-G`:w'S-P;-DO? I f N`H-Ut-UCri$-M-001 I l 1 i I � T_ � 1 �� •-} II i Y�Qf i J�o i �o I jxg o v ra 1 I 1 1 I NH-i7G-UC154-PI-ll'JS i I � iN H-OL-UG'r•"C-F M -6}IJl NH-OL-UONR-MI-CQ}. I y --,-.- __..---------.---_----------- IA� ;N'FS-UG-'U{:w$-i'JH-LX71 i ---------------------------- --.--_-------._^'_--.-.------.-------.----.----INH_(Jt_-C7GVht-hIU_GV7{-F1� ram. 9 -------------, ::H-t7i-UCriF;- i JH-pG} I I 1 y- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I , 1n ' P'vs.c' l 07 I DA'E I 'Al tC9 N0. 8205AID 7 MAY 2009 I (oE5+:a5 RDJ/TS VERY' SCA.I - i� It lrch I PCN.5E0 � 0 9or an_ en origlnol Crewing. not ona 7nrh 01 this uncut, cdju . sccln. IC'.wsCxFJ m z..I -N_7 rn.D �a z o� I 1 I 1 1 `1 I1 1 CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE OZONE GENERATION FACILITIES OZONE GENERATOR No.1 COOLING WATER P&ID 'CIS z n v TBPE No. F-882 Engineer-^ ,w W mm Water' V '. * � SItE Sflt AaPE.@INO Freese and MichoIs ;�.. aliaz ° 4055 Intan'latlPml Pteza, Salta 200 �I F.d Worth, Taxoe 76709-<895 � PNOna - (817) 735-71�50] al -ax - (817) 735-7491 LAST UPDATED; 05/2812009 08:50Mt LAST SAVED BY r/ 2 i~ a c O V ayz AGO . � (n0 'nyn zeta x2 m4 -<O ro :L om .ads N��t nut -M, p111, �ntz zj c� r�°az .J pm J � x omro ro z x �� yc yp Ta >c v o a<_ c of z^ z m y u r.: tor_=oscc�a ro;.,�z_ c 185 'z T I r g-- FIELD EQUIPMENT >:1 C P xl000 m x Z f - INH-0Z-G0%-BA-002-ZS0I ' N I lO n I�'' ---- IN?i-GZ_GO%-En_002_- V) 1 1 z--Ir-`------ INH^OZ_GO%EA-G02-2i m ----_ -_-- I NH-oz-Gox-an-oat-eµ I N ( j - Z_ y r + t --- I RM_0Z_GOX^8A-0O2_ZC I f iN 1 D Li INK-OZ-GOX-P6-002t" ' 0 ¢JH-OZ-GOY-N-Ga3, 1 INH-07.-COX-N-DID341I I I y - - ••1 --------------�_ 1 1 - 9 I I I f N*t-02-G0X-FV-D041 -�_- LNH--OZ-GCX-FVI-004-nI , f -•---- „�..11lt r -----------.-_- I I ( 1 1 1 I 1 .a NH-D2-GDX-PtT-008 i I:V"ri-4Z-GO%-PIT-DOZ-- v , �•1 r Itiir-CZ-0CWS-PI-Ca21-.--------I �----•------._---- _ I H-OZ-GOX-77T-O()2I 1 , INH--TlT--A - - - - I 1 U4H--0Z-0CW'3-tiT--0021 I ' --------OZ-tY15 - -0O2_- �/TQ 1 - I n I L--- lN'H-0£-^Cris-AF`l-002-ZSG -------------.-�"�'1 INH-O2-OCNs-aFY-D02- - 1 INI1-OZ-OcAS-axV-002-21 1 _.... 1 � � � � -- INH-02-OCWS-BFY-Ih72-Rl:th% ,i••+�/ r 11 ItrH--- - -- 1 ;tJH-OZ-OCWS-F1A-Oa2l , I r I - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- --r----{-H-OZ-OC1'_M-002_Ff� r ' > OUTSIDE I ' 1 � r � 1 r -..----------IR'H_OZ-OZ-G'rN-002^OOC N r 1 V O 9 m O 1 ••�_ I Vm� r Ofl 1 7 I 1 xn, 1 + =z l INH-OZ-GEN-D02-JCI = i I L----------------------� � 1 Ctn? INH-OZ-OZ-7T-q2-TI I i ( N I 1 1NH-02-OONt5n S1r-C+021i r— ---- + 00 It,N-OZ_0CWS-Sv_C'a2-GCI s - - - --< z i I-OZ-OP'IR-RRI-00� m n z I nc----- 9Nrt'OZ-02_T:H_OO2-t71- - P1S� o; � -0 --'ti -•+-I II-a2I e� a (� � 1 m JH-02-02-G;N-002-f?NI I ---------------„V _� I z 1{ y t0 1 I I I ao I INH-OZ-O2-G`�•+-0O2-hLj R 0rn a - O,t-m 1 ^tH-02-OZ-PSH--00?t -_--_ 1 ' I�IH-OZ-02-Psi-CC2-dLl - f7•m m '- ' y -----__- -- ---- - - - - - - - - - -- ---V O a `m I INH-OZ-OZ-PSL-0021 -�I IRH-OZ-OZ-P9_-002-Ail -� r - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 r-----.-- -U p 1 in 1 <c 1 NM-OZ-OZ-R"'V-002-ZS01 1 1 n__--------T_JT __-___-_-� A o I i ! M1: OZ-OZ-EhV-L572^ZSC 1 I I 1 INH- OZ-OZ-BFV-002-Z1I i I � � = INH_Or".-O2-BB_V_CO2_ftM1 -i 1 ' - �' tNH-OZ-O2-8FY-002-ZCI 1 ' N z� N---_----__l�___-_-___- -- 5 lYt r z c0 m m �3 z- I ; t4H-OZ-OZ-TI-002 I ' < C) 1 1 I y m + 14H-OZ-OZ-TSH-0021 I i ;4H-OZ-0Z-TSH-002-ALi O�2 i,7 I •_-•{ U..2�'_--___-____.-_-_.L +.---------_-1> ny j wo-KH-02-a2-1dT-L021 ' INH-OZ-O2-nti-042-At I T� _____________.{..-}•----------- roSc I O O III , b m I r la I{ NH-OZ-OZ-R-004 sv z r) r i one '^ z a EVsox s I iE 1FeN na so, "' I 8205A10 ^�yy FILE 7--N-107,OWO z (ca-E WY 2009 j o?n N VAJ Q VERIFY SCAB oar {s one inch on orlglnol droving, If Cev;9<D ^,.I I'not one inch on :his ahect. adjust stole. ItyEcrE4 CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE OZONE GENERATION FACILITIES OZONE GENERATOR No.2 P&D 1 Ply. SCADA iv C4E ":ETC \ST - _F� - - 1 cxr i�,:�i''w<�..i'•ti-��,rv:� ra41r;,: c, INr_r ';• :E c'ar:rrL _•, I 1 : C�'' INL� r ;.L`. _ e"'�;_.Tl.rd ;nN't .__ &r.E^. HtGH G2 FLU , .. .... '{CASEOUS L0'11 F.Cr.-LAn1.4 �r OZ'GRIx �'•:e F,.rGP ";L' t v` ... ..._ .....X 1. �'} i7ZG^+E ^,('li "17R .7.1 ...,,� _, G%Sc:O*JS O'KYMN LC71 TLGrt' IUS l; _ ... ... ��.�1`l�'v D';it:-(.,•-•:EhJT4h �.a. Trmfr Mv 70 ,... >eJ_�BRr.. .«L.C:rGI INC 'M: nIL�} r :,i7tr L;atrtt.;,7t. `TR Ilv;.� 'Vr;'_.,.. Cie+! STATUS • rr: ,.,. at'... , ,- _ 'OS:Tii':FI ISi`''CATIO'. - -� ...4,`h' , ,,,...:.r,•.....� ',. _ri '.:.17;7rc:rl hiOdE S;-'t.,, Imo' ;•, .,...,... r...'ryxt y4a � r.-'.ti�^;?.TOR A^-•,', '4'!;- _, 1 :�ii :C.CLtis�.• 1t'hRP -_:,Y: -, �},.i....i LtiJYt C...,•....,C 9.,'.':'r "_JV: Id:.':M !r Isr VIO/Mi NJttA:. SEM.'CIOR "itd:_ %,j'�^rn C^;•t:n Ncj ' �'T, C?,; rldf• GLN<I'RaTC? \;.: :, ; ;'I i'�^ .C,;TF'R uvrLE7 ,ash tea�a-1�,>rllgr5 ,..., rl -C1,--G~'PATEv, DU'r-Ei -E`; R'A7GFe r,C " POWER - -`t Iu' CGLi.L iG VfFi?.Ci i^JLEi YA„Vc G:7r. ri0�.. k` `J O::L•'r;k:. "E'ViE?.A":Cr` NO t 1-12 .7 rt .tLId S' Cr:'Yf.=�.'i:P `•G.' :SsrPPL -JGH ,OkP M.A- �...Lr.'. „sk", SI'. PL• rn!I_.. ,. .....41'V {•, :-r P%:'.�"_t;)„Cr�.l. ... F•:. i'.7::';'.INf: ?L.ai',4 -NEP JCr: %C1.1 OZONE "LoW lg ',_'rr C cs<_u S'710us TSPE No. F-882 i Engineem-Wood Worp= WTth WaW'THE Eonr.RON.ILD,-i�,.,,7W,ST� SEAL APPEAM4 �........ ... .. ON THIS 000X= WAS Almlla= er Freese and Nichols 405`. tntemottoner Almxa. Suite 200 RC+tND O. ,KKiST ° ; '., 81187,0 �? ""Y 25• �, �t�a�+'� Phone q-t (e17) 7354 7300 E91 F., - (®17) 7.15-7.91 LM19T SAVED BY: , r/ O it O O c � © c` 0 roD o ibp r m r m LAST UPDATED; o5 =Xfil 0d:50 AM n� _N za �Z ------------- -----J ; -^-I-NHH-SIZ-QCWRQCNR-iSH-4a1I - - - - - - -_LSZ----1SH =6Q?-P -- yi'y 1 I NH-UL-OC11K-1M-p()7 ( `J LyN,}---L`C4dr7--- --FI-- �7:H_AL-OCWR-ISH.-pQ41 I NH-0/-0(;WH- lyk-iiliS-Al l - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4> o+ a LyN-Qj,-�SWR^Fqj Op41 INH-OG-GCNhi-FM-GG4-FI I .. + -----�---7--,------.------.-----_...----...y V rFeK m o 6>:H-U £- UCWH-PhI.-lNSa ro INH-OZ-OCWn-PSlq-D03-A! I a nr Cx - .o {H-02-OCWR-YSH-CU»l INH-OZ-OCW,4-YMP-004-RNl ------.------..-.--.---.------..----.----.--- -,--�i rA- i c'i c7 p 00 Ip m LN1=Q7-OCf-vSH-r,OJ-AtI ro �� r -a 'o O � J W c N!tiHH-- OUCtW;WRri- O N N Z r m SNH-07-G1-PSH-W31 -------------- —YM+—:PH---UUUU-4J---RANl--17t�- ZE - ro INH-- --li^J41 'Nt U --PSN- --A..I -- - - I � 1 1 I � INH-07-CCW'a-PI-604 I { tiN-OZ-OGWS-wl-003 I I '°I I NH-UI- M-UUS NH-0?-GCW4-PI-OUt I ti - - - - ---.-----.-------------- -, x I.YH-i17-OCW'j-95H-DU31 CWS-Py+..no3-A, _ INH-Of-C'i.Yhi-FM-O^.e5-F11 ---- ItJH_O1_(X:'WH-rN_UU4-FBI ----- - - - - - - - -----------..--------- _ . -v rp- L r\ V ro NH-41-11Cn'S-: i�^Gt_au �j�( iy2--------------------------------------ji l IPl nH-ur.-t)C»tt-i« -UU"ll �t�t ,y hH-fl/-UCYN-I"'-0.7--Aly�j� -.-.---------------------.--------.---.------------V I 1 I � E a � I -.._----�-----'-.- „-------•.--------------'j 1 I 1 � I ( � 1 1 o l O i O ' Z, [CV&c. I aY I aatc IF&N Jae fro. 8205A10 J E . • 7-N- a 08.DwC I MBE WAY 2009 loe.^,�nv[aROJ/TS IAAj VERIFY SCALE IPE ,sEO Q I0 1 Bar Is one inch an original Qrowing. If 00 11 not one ;"h on thix sheaf, oaJua seats. Ib+E^cC0 WK 'm Emmo—m-11-01 rm ,9 '1 IM CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE OZONE GENERATION FACILITIES OZONE GENERATOR No.2 COOLING WATFR P&.ID 1\ TBPE No. F-882 wneam- rrg Wono- 4498) wety • • * � HE t� DOCUD I EE1�1r �.ItO fSD • t1.•.7(?OSl'r WASgoo titrtirsu2En er Freese and NIChOis 4055 Mfernoticnal Plow, Saito 200 PF8387�,MAY 23. 20M Fort ft'tty Toxaa 78109-4695 a>taax� Poona - (8i7) 73 -7300 F- - (617) 735-7491 LAST UPDATED: Z)M12009 M50 AM LAST SAVED 9Y: c n c 0 0 ;u "'0 I �Y0 oa oaoo A (nZ O TJ N(nh y�0 Zp2 IT�-{cc> t=JO mmo �O m -1m1 oomm N -C� Ado -Omm (myJN O:� z > _ 20 00 �-1 IZ10 p2 C'Lj "pDD r-rn rnrn ono ��... pz a�T f it A > C> � o x 0�a c oc A O p D 'D 0 O 5z An m 01 r>->> m C In 2 L4 N N :i V]'D-1TNNC7 N ".,Iz CpC�yj '=O GAS Z'= rr Um^r�x �mzA pzp0 00< cm Km p �1m-gym Orn o monzm �yrzi- COSmz-zixr�iK C�> rnp�Ayl y�>O t� m2clm-art C-< Z N-xTO O a ern OtSSn00. on< domoq :' sus 2C n' m2{ 7o r-Om �0N Z~om O" z � rzAx is NON FIELD EQUIPMENT Q o � �suCi �Z00 N� (" �Z 1 yr -�_L_ INH-OZ-GDX-BA-Ct13-2S0� P"rrnl p ^' _ 1 - - - - INH-OZ_COX-aA_GYJ3_290I y� 0 r- NH-OZ-C)X-9A-003-ZI 1 y z------------------------- --- 1 0 — N r ---- 1 ---- -LP t jTl x � 1 � I h,-CZ-GQx-B'-C4' ZC I w= ----------------- n Z n 1 0 N l n-I-oz-cox-P�-ca3 t• I D ' 1i I I rn = INH-OZ-COX-FM-0C51 i I t _ I -----INN_02_:IJX_F>a_435-- I I z- {- 1 I 1 I NM_OZ-GOX-Frd_0061-1----- It: --COX-FAI_DO6_F- I r - - I I t 1 f — — — — — — — — IhH-AZ GOX-PI.-OD3( i i ItdH-D2-COX-PIT-ty�3-PII 1 — s�--------- Fj---------------- a� 14H-C7.-CCWS-PI-003I �� 1 1 INH-OZ-GOX-TIT-G03 ( 1 I INH-02-GOX-AT-443- 111 I - - - - - - - - - - - O 1 1 INH-CZ-0CWS-TIT-0031 1 I 1 1 T------INH_OZ-CCA3_71T-403-711 - I II 1 I E'NH-OZ-DDri5-9Fv-UD3- -- '}-�•1 N 1NJi-0Z-DM-8FV-003-ZS0 r — — — — ---------------I—----------------U �r}� 1 I t 1 INH-02-QOYrS-EFA'-OQ3-ZI 1 %'- ON --'--- - hl l to .y -----------------�—T---- ,NH_OZ_OCriS-9.`"V_OD3_RM I1� �L..�-(..___r______________T—.j-------_..--------•Y I2 2-�---- jNPi-OZ_OCri'S_BZY_D03lZC I N > 1 l i AxH-C2-OCN"-FM_003I I I �r>-, 1 1 -----I NH_AZ-OC9 - -- -- :L\ �y�L 0Ui510E I 1[,��I I mN Io m I i INH-OZ---CC'`N-063-DOCI I �--- ---------------- p �N r — 1 N ,ZmiO m I 1 I ?�� z p I I ( 1 m O U T O S c= I I L.----- ----I NM-02`GE-- -,� i� N I � I I 1 1 1 x 1 1 z 1 1 fNH-OZ-CCriR-T1T-G031 n 1 1 � � I NH-OZ-o2-TIT-003-TI I i 1-------�---t-------------i► - t� _'------�1 -- i I I HH-OZ-AC'dS-5Y-40ry 13 fl l t C10 INH-OZ-DCN^rSY-W3-DCI _ I l 2"---------.-.-.--< z I l� o m o O 1 fNH-42-tiriR-RM-0031 z m Z I 1 Z8 z� I ----- INM_---7SM_Oa3_TIIC I Ias � 0 --_ 'z q O -- INH-42_OZ _CEN-003-R - 1 1 = I I I o m PIZ >�t0''1 1 ! 00 I 1 o I 1 ----- INH-07_02-GEN_003-ALI 1 ° > 1 1 rzrj Urn 1 SOS °"'1- 1 INH-02_OZ-PSH-0031 1 INN-OZ-02-PSH-OQ3-Ail - 7-�, I A Ci i— — — ..-. —LI-------—_.--- INH-OZ---PSL-D03 -� ( INN-OZ-AZ-PSt-003-ALi - I cr - -------^--- I r----------`f% r In JA a ! I'iH=02-QZ-"or"V-0O3--ZS01 ( Jt�� ,. cGn •o� I a N--------•^---rT ----------'V .IN INH-OZ-CZ-BFV-0O3-ZS0! -� ` 1 r•1 1 D N ___—_—......_.___ T--_.-- ------ t -INH_-- -BFY003_- I ------ - v_ iINH-OZ-OZ-aFV-003-RM! I I I 5 o c Z I �1`JH-CZ-QT-SFV- --2C1 i- 1 VI r------.-----�------- 1 I coZ 0 r- ( I NH-OZ-02-71-003 I 1 1 O F 1 1 1 � t- t 0 n N O I l^}, NH-CZ_D'L-T-003-------t 1 INH-OZ_DZ`TSN-OC3-ALI -� 1 '° I '-- Nam'' �— --'{% I vx; 1 II I m vH-oz-Dz-Al;-o43 I �l--c I • INH-CZ-OZ-AIT-043-A4 -rt - > 1 o j ? INH-0:-D2-PI-CB6 f i P ES'O I 00 OM OM 1 !�__ n '0 ,^ �g - - _—_-----__--_� s zb Z {1 000 mU I T,pz i z oc>i •a I r+�.;:a�w aY ! aT6 I "c-, roe ^.c. I a265atD 7-N-11D9.DwG pAi' MAY 2009 I I oFsc:lc� RDJi':s VAJ VERIFY SCALE D Stir cna inch or. 0691n01 vice ;r.g. If (0 nat one !nch on th!s .heat• adjust score. CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE OZONE GENERATION FACILITIES OZONE GENERATOR No.3 P&ID SCADA 4 1,Z0%E iZ _ N ,IERCEN, _. _.-i t, C'rytif a -NATOR NO.t !f !r c.:x It{...• •e,`<:.:' '_:51`.:RCt `:c3�E St;; ,•: -i.nZRnTaM rtC ._-�` 't -i �)ryr;tit.f n'GH Pa+t:i;� �l0'•Y KA ram-- '` ':iJIC �ti;. na Ll:v tiJJ .,^.COt;PIG IN I"T !al : E: >~ O ED STATUS °c�aLlrlr. CNTRCL trCOE STr,TI N" N0.' =,OLNG ._ �'EN14F%TCF? '"OaiR--L OZCt'Nt"G%Y.CRhTCP F.Q.1 L.�..',1'...t.::•�' Iw �w _ _. +,�.1 ��y GZDNC GE"J4,•e,*-.,^n tJQ.t _ �r,! ,�, Y+ C:vC'_'V:, 1'+„ ER FL•N'h ,-y? _ i' p -y '".'..i:r. GSf.FF��T^A TUG,' „•„ {, �l ll' 1YTI 7NE D'JnA':CN f>-ILL, I.FT-RATC.? I, ..a -�, ..,..... ... . .4 ,,,...,.:, 3Z7, cRPT4^. •.tr;,^, . -r•pr;F CE,J-^v+iCF '>JA' ^:Fhl.'�''" 'olq'G,(a CUT 6T Ht;^t IcLFP F,:i F: A_Ai i; pl- J �, nl ;eAvsATCS PGricn Sr't==•„S -;XJIUNv 4'1AMR INLET VALVE CC,+T,.:1L :-`. l ._.� r>4:k•�j'( .. ..�r"''..Y li,r,.l Km. A1.R`t SJI FFS.%i: C't1E' .: cNc F,A".JR NC.I OZONE _......_. AlI" VALVE OPENSTATUS_., ZVAIt-WR(.1 C 'J"cNER;,T03 NCA OZONE'r:; ,, CLUSEC S'ATUS t� 9 Efl!NL ::Liv:.l JR NC I 070NE J ',fv,VE 'OSITiON IN0'Ct,T'iJ`i 77 , TBPE No. F-882 eigineem..Vlodd Monde �I(($$ i�i(n' Wisfer" TNc SEM. IYPEMr • •� «.THS DOCUUM WAS XRIIGO.TED B7 Freese and Nichols ;+ :, �falls�� l � "�M°'Mg 4055 Inl—tional Plata. S'ae 20D Fort M'or!h, Ten. 7610_4595 PI— - (417) 735-73M e4% ++' Fo. - (817) 735-7491 LAST S.Ati E0 BY: , a n IASTUPCATctl'. M2&2O09 MSOA.M P1411010*11JR1� D G G 4 Aprp ram- O <U 2rn 00 w z INH-t)7-(y`hR- ISIi-UOS I 9 P.H-pl-UCYt2-i5H-WS-AL �IItt�� -------------------V 7�17C 1 I NH-UL-OCWR-hid-UfFS 1 ` -------- NH---0CWi=F1-- 1 INH-R£----7SN-OCfi— — — — — — — — LNN-U/-UCrii?-rSH-iJ06-A�- �j]( 1 01 1 6 I 1 y h------ U— --- -- — — — — — — INH-q7-O-- 1.1 1 c O 1 n INH-0{-CCriH-YS! -60SI 1 I NH-OZ--I-PSI-OOS-AL I .Q � y V r .a INH-07- —-PSH- — INH-OI-OCWrt_PMP-U05-RNI v r z o0 0 INN-07-0CW..R-PSH-005-ALI NN---------- II----------{� �liC Q N c '�v v I o o0 h m u Li-U�-UC15R...�MP-PUS-f<NI G7 1- 0 v v I Z h rn _ n � 4:H-tl7-lN:WR-PS4-UU5( ,a INn-UL-UCWr2-PJH-UUS-ALI G � — .p tNH-01 -lH."'h'R-PSH-(1'Jbf hLH-L}t�U;',h'H-h'tiH-tlUF-AI.I yT�( f_ t.H-U7-OCw5-PI-tp5 I ( mr I I j 0o ono) ( So mO� ! mr of i N �— t `:H-OL-OCW'7-PI-UOS -m h'H-67-gCW4-H1-UU5 I � — — — — _------------------------� — — — — _— SN`L-Q7-QCglt-FM-COS-8 L�11., 6� — — — - -- 1 Nk-UC----F41-Cp6-rl { N----'------, r--------------------------- - pi ------M-I-fk".N5-P'�JtCYArAi'_ ---_---.--------_-.----- _ I=- >D --- 4 (l O O rn 1 Tii ON o0v jr D4 0 I 820SAI0 7-N-110.owc Z L `"T' MAY 2009 L IosSoc'ea£tDa1ti'S L � OP.anr1 IAA.1 -' �0 RIFt SCALE Bor is one inch on orirainol draw'ng. If IReAS:D ` O I not one inch on this sheet, adjust scale. ICHECY.tO CITY Of FORT WORTH, TEXAS NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE OZONE GENERATION FACILITIES OZONE GENERATOR No.3 COOIING WATER P&ID 'D u Irmill Freese and Nichols 41)<j5 IM noliomol PI—. Sul. 2DO Fort WW,% Texas 76IM-4695 Phone - (W) 715-7300 Fc, - (017) 715-7491 1 TBPE No. F-882 Engineers ... Wodd Wandent Mm WSW- s r. SEX FPPFJC1a0 `.RQ?t ':•: on Tara DOCLA K �.:., ;Af.0 D.• .P.QDS'Cr IrtiS uft110a12tRORALD D..D T �'+Y4ua f `•' LAST SAVED BY: zs 00 O a Ds p 2 LAST UPDATED: 051280009 al'Ag AM I NH-OZ-OF-PiT-001 I I m-oz-o;-pa-DDI-p1 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — �< 0 ul mo M 'z 1z M 0 _m I I NH-0Z -CIF-TIT-001 I 0 0 C' z N z 2: pzz" p I NH-0Z-0E-BF-V00I-ZCD I — — -- — — — — — — — — — — -- < NH-0Z-OF-8FV-00I-ZCC I Io — — — — — — — — — — — -- < ;a I — — — — — — — — — — — — O I NH-OZ-OF-FV-001 -ZSO I — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — -- — 0 I NH _07_0C_8Fv_00I _zCS I — — — — — — — — ---- — — — — — — T M Cn mm =I — — — — I NH-OZ-OF-TSH-001 I INH-OZ-OF-TSH-001-ALI — — — — — — — 0 NH-07-or-PH-Opt-RM I M - — — — — — — — — — — — — z o - i� 0 2 K 01 N-i-OZ-OF-PH-001-DOC I z il ;a O I NH-0Z-0E-PX-001-RN 14 QL5 z X'= 52 I NI-OZ-OF--TIT-002-TI I — — — — — — — — -- — — — — — — — — H-02-OF-P-R-001 I NH-0?-OF-PSL-001-A1_I — — — — — — — — — — --- 1 W-OZ-OF-ELR-001-S] I - — — — — — — — INH-OZ-017-m-041 -ALI — — — - -- - 01A I 0 0 s y x — — — — — — 1 NH_DZ_0F_2LR-00I-D0C1 — — — — — — - =R 1 0 z 2 - 1 0 G0 f1i-0Z-QF-aLR-00!-R1i I j2 I NK-OZ-OF-A)TI-001 I JINH-OZ-OF-AT-COI-A] I — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — - 0 .�x I ftve;=,V I BY CAIC I r&N 'D$ NO, 5205AI 0 MAY 2009 z: JnCqc�'coRDJ/TS I I OuAN MAJ VERIFY SCALE 0 1 Bar is one inch on original drawing. If not one inch on I.h;n ioiact. oalust scale. RQ SCAD _4/*�,' NCR,7}i 070K 71F-S71,,C7 13'r,1,TC',t t'.� :N1_F`T pRr_111"Je.5' I- NO"i U'C - r):5T!"uCT S11717M Sr-,EV ND.t INILL-T V)','vE STA%1'� r7 R N)RT-i C_-:•NE MT?' -,;CT 5'I'57M 7 V,'R!,TUR!7 HIGH -NCp'Jx CiiGtD:S'1rvC1 vlesfLv COKMOL. MODE '3-,ATI;S Na�FJH C7C;,z DESTRUZ:; S-i!T,1_V N10,1, L �J' rkw-A7zp. 6-0601. NCR a'ZCNE 'ST-RUCT NO.' r ro NORTH 0%XF' DF1_7-,UCT 5'ST-Fl.' N-,' vRIE SE7 Pcv. . ml, i—_n I- >1 SLOWF� f'3 G-Is LC1W FHESlsuf"_ A!AWN FISTEV 111r.. '7J 5133.�V N� S-w)' 'q'D.1 CON E,*M,V,7\ L`r' C CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE OZONE GENERATION FACILITIES NORTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM No.1 P&�ID Z ozom =I 'T1 x m' ;0 zt. op ':e- z � < 0 pz< M -p?, -M U) '01 > C, r;t' am Cro C'0 F, 1- TBPE No. F-882 Ir THE SEk AWDAM4 0" rKS DOCUMOC Freese and Nichols SOS"IntoPnOt-OF Prom. S.A. 2200 o WAS ALnV*M= RY 0# Fold Worth. T..O. 76109-1�-4 ....... --73M F- - 17) 735-7491 LAST SAVED BY; .r LAST UPDATED: 05,12812009 08A9 A".! �i c FIELD EOUIPMEN LOCAL CONTROL PANEI Z n o `'I �Il h h d m r — — — — — — —h_H-02-O—SIT-OOZ-q NH-OZ-Of-dtT-0O2 17 — I l IXH-DZ-Cr-8•,-V-O02-2C01 x z z = — — — — — — — —< INH-02-0�-HFV-002-Z N o o INH-OZ-OF-8+V-002-ZS- INN-OZ-OF-BF 002-2C51 r i O m40 , =m= ! NH-OZ-OF-TSH-002 l ( I INH-07.-0E-TSH-002-AL) __\_ �..(-- r�•1 -i O — — .-- — — -- -- — — — — •— 9 rNNO 0 z INH-02-DF-PH-042-RM ! '2 = �I NH-OZ-OF-PH-002-DOCI na----- < I I a 0 I NH-OZ-0E-PH-002-RN I r- z ? I Q ( o0 o goes I l G v � I I NH-OZ-OF-71T-003 I I NH-OZ-1:47-TIT-003-11 I 1 NH-OZ-OF-PSL-002 I NH-OZ-OF-PSL-002-A1(fl In ----- ------- -._.. — -- r I NH-OZ-OF-Pl-002 I a 0 .Bw SCADA I < hKH-0Z-OF-BLR-002-SCI Q n � `flNH-02-OF-BLR-002-S1t — INK-02-OF-SLR-002-ALI � INH-OZ-CF-HLR-DD2-RAe — _- — — INH_OZ-Or 9'-002-DOCI — — — — — — - O jS 0 a 10 N f+� Pt N Y/i v G i _ HH-OZ^0E-8UR-002-RNi �v�,,..jjj/^''''��E NH-OZ-OF-AIT-002 7 I NH-OZ-OF-AIT-002-AI I — — — — — — — — — _ — — — — — — — — — — -� m .i O 0 0 m z SILE>•iCER — --'01 i ,:' ''•' na ir...{`."�;,^,,v I Br C+,:E I°G'( 3C? h0 Q I 8205.410 v I c I 7-N-I12.DYrc) Z I ! D"T MAY 2009 locs•ar::� ROU/TS .� I I oxlwn M.AJ VERIFY SCALE -or is one inch on on ina! a� Crin It ICJ no: and inch on this hest, aAjUttstolo. �CaEcx cc, ..._ .,...f' Ise ^T;- n�•� - r..E:�reucr LLJSYS7V N112 I, -LET vruv'E ' TA. ' :'- O>C>:E CtiTR, C- 4 E v S7,12 _ 'r' tit ... NORTH Gr'_.�'wE vESTRC lS�c'/ :r^? Pr^.�iEhT i CON�x9L ItCCE c-ari is ' N;;HIFI OZCiJ= Uc,SNUCT .S BTSM PRFl -F ;, i CCNTROL NORTH I'WCNr'-,Z:,MUCT IZ-Fftf N0.2 PaerEl„E, Or. STATUS z i� N `A„2 �✓ C.Ff-^.;;s` Tc".t�E-:-'LtiF. .>.. PC., CC>-"F'i,! T'�' �UC ""'vl EM ';O,2 D_5THU,—, SYSTEA: N0,2 ` 910'wr- F `•7 ;.AS :�Yf PRcSSI!P... A:F?f,4 - •�. ,`iC.2 nLC'✓~'EF: a-GEti' 00.`+i 0l O7.CN-'. Gca,,'w;;CT SY5iS°,t N; e,0Wcf1, SPE7r.1 ;.NO'CARON I VER IAD AL EGOt'ic.R. ;''tERLQ�.G K..r',,.f u� NCRTH OZw'.Ic n�5`Hac^.' �'?•5TE4' Vil.: 9I.0t4'E2 C--?NTRCL MOQE STATE°, \ "YST; bt '+; "; F11GH CO`. CEt.TR,\T.;' . :TN NE `5"PUi.T S: TEM N CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE OZONE GENERATION FACILITIES NORTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM No.2 P&I D THPE No. F-882 Englneem..w wonders Wnh water- 02 wrtt '*'. `' . THE SC.A. MPElPHO D �RONALD,,..J00§'S� AS yr a'aouo o. 3xn,T Freese and Nichols ': '.,g 81$7 5,. e UAY 28' 2009 4055 lm.—Oa t P1sxo, SIA. 200 Fort Nforin, T...aa 76109-4895 Phone - (017) 735-7300 +Atpda'� Fc.. - 017) 7..:r-7491 LAST SAVED SY' .i C: T. A tl G LASTUPDATED. M2&`2009 08:49M INH-OZ-GF-TIT-002-Tt1 3---------— — — — — — — —01 1 NH-GZ-OF-TJ-002 I I INH-OZ-OF-8-V-002-ZCDI = z a z x — — - — — — — — IVH-OZ-O=-?FV-O02-ZCC< — — — — — — a < — — — _ _ !NH-OZ-OF-5FV-D02-RMI n z n2 — — — _ INH-OZ-0E-5FV-0L12-ZS01 NN — — — — — ..—. — — — — — — -- — — Nr-OZ-0E-5FV-002-ZCS 1 — — — — — — — — — — _ � I _ Om�z OC= �- .� .-- �-. -- H-OZ^OF-75H-002 ( INH-O7.-CF-TSH-O62-AL1 to — - - a O V N 1 NH-07-CF-PH-0O2-RM i oa�m -— — — — — — — — — — 0 - nV-----�i NH-0Z-0E-PH-002-OOCI I Ina --- I I a o I o I ( i NH-OZ-OF-PH-DO2-RN I —1, a O ZC7 D. j Lo o- > ` o�OC�i cy'f� I 1 6 Ic� i '�- I NH-OZ-OF-T1T-003 I I _ — — — — — — — — — 1 NH-OZ-OF-TIT-003-i1 I NH-OZ-OF-PSL-002 I INH-OZ-OF-PSL-002-ALI '^ ----- — — — — — — - --'--— — — — - -- r NH-GZ-OF-PI-002 I v a c, I tNH-0Z-0'F-8LR-002-SCi I NH-0Z-0E-8LR-002-St I INK-OZ-OF-&LR-002-ALI r.,.,H-0Z-0,*--9LR-002-RMI o in lNH-OZ-OF-PLR-002-00CI ~o z--------- --- N — — — — - < Vl N G i - Nli-0Z-0E-8LR-002-RN i k NH-0Z-G=-AfT-002 i INH-OZ-OF-AtT-002-AtI ny a — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — _ — — — — _Y. A< y =a z roc b 8205A10 :_E f ( 7-N-112.DY1G z I I'a4''0 MAY 2009 � lci>:G�E]RDJ iTS ORIFY SCA" 5or is one inch on origine! crowing, It �J no; One ;nch on thi; Sheet. OdjUit 9COIe. 1ChF CCI J:'C.:. t. INLET .�, •MA SYS-",.Nf Tie.. INLL`f %';y:,!E CPEN STA-,VS r o= NE -` -.-i 'NORTH OZ E MESTiR', ` l�, Gil NC.2 Jll oRs`uc z,IF: i :Fi L6 ?cPATt„ .. nL:?ti' 1 NCtiJ2Mt+ DES'r�.Q wT 1` 0,2. 577a4 N PREuvTHi ( CCNU'11L I,CDE F?.ATUS -» - t� TROJ-Lur r PI-HL P++^,EtiEA.. i' � i,NT?OI_ R NQRiH CZCNe n,-=RUCT 4.:4TF,f.' ti0.2 tt5.� PRE14:47-, ON STA%0 Z 1 n S'F PC'.N"*•C!`. ",'RI^,L ` � ; ru�rrl o-�taE OE.�TfTtt,,T �•srrlr'Fa._ -,. , RTH ZCNE uEiCICi :"'STEM •;02 ry -Or ;,S TENV'i7xA,:P: J'I NCR'Y. a<9NE OES'1U,„T SYSTEM '40.2 510WER FReSSUR- A;A=M OZONE :J =:•;i. ,"..i SYSTEV 1 > NC.I 5LO'.a�'_Ft S=[L'.i^ CONTROL NORTH G'I.O..-- O=S:RJC-1 SYSIMM tic. FLOV- r,`SPEED ,NOCAr . d M40? , OVERLCA.D ALARM 1 _ t;CRTN OZCNE CZS-R 1S, S7STV ^ >OOF STA%5 P,I.Q',5'ER r4fP.CL , 3 a' Ehr CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE OZONE GENERATION FACUTIES NORTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM No-2 P&ID N r 0, —I r �1L77 2A mm D v y mG =�O InC zm o Z aRz< LD 05 z< c� _m a �N -0z 0 � cT5 CD L rry 0 O 0O 1 nr THPE No, F-882 Engtneem-Woe4ng Wonders MM Water- ,,,; ', ....,,;.,,; ix r ♦ tME 5FK /PPFAkK �PONfiI�DI912.,D. JOOSf;: WAStrc 11Ol4kD o, jomr 00q Freese and Nichols �0* `., atlaz a� MAY M eons sn55 In n.r wJ Mpr ftm su,x4 200 Fort iVPNh" 7"as 76104-4M5 �f Phone - (917) 735-7300 Fex - (a17) M-749t 10, LAST SAVEO BY: O 0 LASTUPDATFO: 05128.1200S 08:49Am m SCAD IN rr z I TIT -003-TI I CT . . . . I NH-02-Of-TIT-003 I 1Nif-0Z-0E-8FV-003-ZC01 < z 1I4H-0Z-OF-8FV-003-ZCC( — — — — — — — — — — — — — -- < — — — — — — — — N-i-G?.-0P-BFV-00—RM I — — — — — -- z N I*I-0Z-0E-3FV-003-ZS0I — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 1NH-OZ-0f-8FV-00.3--ZCSj — — — — — — — --- — — — — — — --- 0 I NH-OZ-OF-TSH-003 I — — — — — — — — — — — — — '*--OZ-OF'-7SH-003-AL1 — — — — — - 0 I Z08 I - — — — — — — — — — — — — 1 NH-0Z-OF-PH-G03-kM I 1 NH-OZ-OF-PH-003-RN I 0 O I NH-OZ-OF-T11-004 I I _I NH-02-OF-TIT-004-Ti 1 (33 - — — — — — — — — - 4 — — — — — — — — NH-OZ-OF-PSL-003 I M-OZ-OF-PSL-003- ALI — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — -- NH-OZ-OF-Ff-003 1 0 lz !NH-0Z-OF-SLR-003-ALt - — — — — --f> Ix > T a" M Z 40 jNH-0Z-OF-B1R-00J-R0A1 F — — — — — — i> C - — — — — — Ir. zIII') N al O z JUH OZ 0- PLR-CO3-DD--[ — — — — --- - -�r- 0 INN-0Z-QF-8LR-003-RN I -0— — — — — --� IH-OZ-OF-AIT-003 I 0 0 >1 <rl -4—S,E7- V I DAIE rLE B20SA10 7-N- 1 13.DWG DATE '2009 z MAY opwWN W.AJ VLK;FT bU�- Sot ic one inch on origino; drawing, If 0 1 N not one inch on 1h;s Vicet, adjunt scqle. I C,.Eceo I NH-0Z-OF-AIT,-003-Af I — — — — — — — — — — — — — — - z rai z C:''Nt UE IN -FT C-',E H) J1 Iran PI NORTH 023NE CEST.C' SYS-TM R03 INLET VAI:,T Ofrru NORi'L4 02CINZ DESTRUCT, J r '�m NCRZH :J?t;'a= =AU17 '10.3 PF�FqE4 N STARIS —C-NE DSTRUCT NCRTH — -�, ND,Z TE -RA7!�A EMP. -z ISE7 POMT CC' �N-PI L U4`NORT14 OZ01J,7 OFS7,UCT -,STZI/. ?40.3 I;FA7- Orr -CAS ',C'V T1-!AP:7RAUr' A!ARM ,,�' r,CRTH 02-CUE O-ZS-,RUC3 1YS7Zm J,; -GAS VPERA7 ,Z;,,TFD Or - 07,17 NCNRT4 OZONE 0Z,7RU^T SYSTEL' NO.-- rt,7:nE- F-r-) GAS LCW FRE3SJRr A�ARU, NQRH 3i.QN� iY�HFI* C7 SITSTE !CprH "ZS-RU.":T CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE OZONE GENERATION FACILITIES NORTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM No.3 P&D 4L,7 F�-.TEI) NO,:, Irm,"N' Freese and Nichols 4055 Wtvw"on.1 Wow. Sao 200 Fort Worth, To.* 76102-4895 � Ph - (3i7) 736-7300 Foi - (817) 735-7493 om Z> rfl nj 0— om mm 'n ay mD > E50 nc z: > nz< zo Ewi c �- vn z:c U) cz uj> o, z O cl o ,0 nr I TBPE No. F-882 Wne—..W" W?Wm WIM ftW- IAPPEARR4 DOMAOIT OR= D. J01= . By =m LAST SAVED BY: LAST UPDATED, 05?2212009 08:4RA14 FIELD EQUIPMENT LOQAL CONTROL PANEL BIQ SCADA ro O 0, 1 SV57FY T — — — — I SH-OZ-OF-T11-002 I o. 1SH-OZ-OF-8FV-OO2-7CD1 j — — — — — — — — — — — — -- < IDES > -Oz-QF-eFV-O02-I 1 —;5 01 < r — — — — — — 134 , , — -- — — — — — — — — — — — 0 0 Z S8-OZ-OF-BFV-OO2-ZS0 I 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N., SOUTH 02C'NEE ES tRQ:-1 0 IS1I-OZ-OF-3FV-O02-ZCSj TTSN NC.-. V�14-rT ZI OPEN STATUS — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — --- i> SCbTH, OZLNE, "E�--RUCT L—'� 'u- CLOSE S-A�JS j ars-Em tc'�)'2 0 - m = Cxcl , — I SK-oz-Of- I-SH-002 I IS, -OZ-OF- TSM-002-ALI S'11117H 0' N-1 — — — — — — — — — — L 1-1 — — — — — — — --- -,, -C - 5,EM N`1,2 .tyr mz 00 SH 2-RM I OB - — — — — — — — — — — — — — --G�-OF--PH-00 '0z5TRXr SYS7EV NJ.2 ZtS. Ii-0 -OF-PH-002-DOCI CC'NTROL VI�-CE SATVS 171 F.0,71i D;STR';,T SYSTEM W-1 0 io 1 SH-OZ-OF-PH-002-RN T 0 o 0 I Z 0 Z; 0 0 0 �A= snx NO2 TEVPEPk-L,1;E -SE' Prrr.r M;7110L ISTS--V, ND�2 I SH-OZ-OF-TT-003 I AlARV Si-OZ-OF-TIT-003-71 I '71 — — — — — — — — - — — — — -STr.jCT S1"3lz['j I SH-oz-OF-PSL-002 I [SH -OZ- OF-FISL-002-AL I — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — -- :'ECO G"'I'3 -PS�'A.... '* I SH-OZ-OF-PI-002 I BLR-002-SCI .C. ULOYER SP-r-D C**'d :70. :�MLU -PEED t -0Z-O;-8LR-OO2-ALj .3 Sm — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —t> D. TR.J'11�-' sys7-M N0�2 F- KO)�'E]R "Ir. A�.A;;N 1SH-OZ-OF-BLR-OO2-RMj — — — — — — OTC — soj-" OZONE DESMirT Z1'rS7W1 11 Z!. ^1 I SH OZ Or BLR-OD -DM FLOWER, CCI`rRCL MCbE STAT-,JS o 2 '00 V SOUTH f)r--,TRXT �;YSTUJ NO.2 C — — — — — — — — — — — — - 3Lc'wE-R N oho 0 00 s- SH-07-OF-AIT-DO2 I I SH-OZ-OF-AIT-002-All I — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — - D�SIR-UCT SrSV,' N -3 0)qC OEfi -CT 8205A10 7-N-115.D49C z i I o''"` MAY 2009 PDJ /TS MAJ 0 SCALE Bcr is one inch on oriq;nol drnwing. It 1 not 0'¢ ;nch on fmis sheet, adt.st scale. ICNECBEP X z 0 < > C CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEAS NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE OZONE GENERATION FACILITIES SOUTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM No.2 P&ID 1\ TBPE No. F-882 C,-- AM Aft AIWAO- 4 —6--'r-7,7 Engineers... Wondom Weter' SEAL *rya-4 Freese and Nichols 4M Mt— tioml ROZ.. SwIt. 200 D. 11-SWIZIOUICIVII 187 MAY 23. 20M 1 red Wn At . - h' (817)T"" 75109-4505 7Z5-73W 44 F.. - (BR)735-7491 LAST SAVED BY: mjww Q LAST UPDATED: OS12WON 08;48Am -0 $CAD N I S,i-02-CF-TIT-003-11 sm-oz-CF-TII-003 I < 1 &1, -OZ-OF- BFV- 003-ZCC I 0 — — — — — — — — — — — --- < I'Vi-OZ-OF-M-003-RU I 0 z ISH-OZ-0;7-8FV-003-ZS0I — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — --- ISH-Oz-OF-e1-V-()03-zCSj 0 I I SH-OZ-OF-TS4-003 I — — — — — JSH-OZ-OF-TSH-00-AII — — — — — — 0 Iz - — — — — — — — — — — --- L'i LI SH-O -OF-PH-003-DOC I V) I Si-OZ-OF-PH-003-RN I 0 ci a SH-07.-OF-TIT-004 I SH-OZ-Cr-InT-004--;I I S 0� �L-DF-PSL-00.3 I SH-OZ-OF-PSL-003-Ad — — — — — — — — - - — — — — — — — — — — --- :02 — — — — — — — ISFI-OZ-0°-8LR-DO3-ALJ — — — -- — - 0 0C 2� SH-OZ-OF-61-R-003-RMI rj 070 -- C r — — — — — — — ISi 02 OF 21R-003-00cl — — — 2! 9 ,z Sfl-OZ-0E-&-R-003-RN I -0-3SH-02-OF-AIT-003 I i SH-OZ-OF-AIT-00— 3-Al j ,LW - — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — - 0 0 I 8205A10 7-N-116.DWC My 2009 XL j 0-mo,,= RDJ/TS DRAY,4 MAJ ? VERIFY SCAIE Bar ;s one inch on 0691 m dwing. If nnot one ;.nch on th;s sheet, adjust stole. cn S3-1-H SCL'TH I.MCNE SYST---M NO3 tME11 11141-VE CICIN flIgUIS ry SCUIH OZONE "ESTRUICT SYS--'A !NL0 1ALIL - 1,-114 SOJT11, CZONZ UESIRXT SYFa( NO.*-' C,,,t;TRCL PO',Z Ozp'iL DESm';c-, 5-.,S:Em NC FRD-VTFR 0C!,!TRGL PPEHEAVCR P:;N STATUS "K&TRL,CT SYS--M !,;O, S'W-- OESTR'�'C7 Nc,-, '-MFl V =- SJR= R'Y SCIJ7H 07--NIF NO -4 r P.O, CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS NORTH AND SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT UPGRADE OZONE GENERATION FACILITIES SOUTH OZONE DESTRUCT SYSTEM No.3 P&ID TBPE No. P-882 ftineem-Woking Wonders With Water" Tmc srx 1ppaw,no ONwCUUDIT S-1 VIAS AVrMOP= 91 Freese and Nichols 81187 ROMMD D, JD0V 4055 F ht�l nm PW.. SUR. 200 orth, T.. 76109-4895 .,I w .. F ) 735-73W pt. - (0,7 F.. - (a17) 913-7491 M&C Review Page 1 of 2 official site of flip c ty of 'ort wort'), Texas CITY U CIL G A FORT�'4`OR7`HIF COUNCIL ACTION: Approved on 8/18/2009 DATE: 8/18/2009 REFERENCE NO.: **C-23726 LOG NAME: 60OZONE EQUIPMENT CODE: C TYPE: CONSENT PUBLIC NO HEARING: SUBJECT: Authorize an Engineering Agreement with Ozonia North America, LLC in the Amount of $50,000.00 for the North and South Holly Water Treatment Plant Ozone Project — Ozone Equipment Pre -Selection and Shop Drawing Preparation .AG*." S vvwvrvaazm.�umsrw•A,+��zzw-w.w� i'� i\ .f�" ✓, RECOMMENDATION: It is recommended that the City Council authorize the City Manager to execute an engineering agreement with Ozonia North America, LLC in the amount of $50,000.00 for the preparation of ozone equipment shop drawings required for the final design of the North and South Holly Water Treatment Plant Ozone Project. DISCUSSION: On March 19, 2002, (M&C C-19013) the City Council authorized the City Manager to execute an engineering agreement with Freese and Nichols, Inc., (Freese and Nichols) for the update to the Fort Worth Water System Master Plan. The Water System Master Plan recommended that a facility condition assessment be conducted at the North and South Holly Water Treatment Plants in order to prioritize equipment and piping replacements and to evaluate the transition from chlorine to ozone as the primary disinfectant. On June 19, 2007, (M&C C-22199) the City Council authorized the City Manager to execute an engineering agreement with Freese and Nichols for the North and South Holly Water Treatment Plants Condition Assessment. This assessment concluded that converting the North and South Holly Water Treatment Plants from primary disinfectant with chlorine to ozone will increase the ability to meet future water quality regulations, improve taste and odor control, provide improved treatment and protection against cryptosporidium and pharmaceuticals and potentially increase the capacity of the combined plants. On February 17, 2009, (M&C C-23356) the City Council authorized the City Manager to execute an engineering agreement with Freese and Nichols for the design of the North and South Holly Water Treatment Plant Ozone Project. As part of this agreement, Freese & Nichols prepared ozone pre- selection contract documents and present worth bid evaluation criteria. The present worth evaluation taken over a twenty year period included the initial equipment cost, the present worth of the equipment energy consumption and the $50,000 engineering stipend for shop drawing preparation. A total of two ozone vendors were pre -qualified to submit bids. By submitting a bid, each vendor agreed that should they be the selected ozone vendor, they would execute an engineering agreement in the amount of $50,000.00 to prepare shop drawings of their ozone equipment to be utilized by Freese and Nichols in the final design of the North and South Holly Water Treatment Plant Ozone Project. The selected ozone vendor is required to hold their equipment bid price for a period of three hundred calendar days, during which time it is expected that Fort Worth will award a construction contract to build the North and South Holly Water Treatment Plant Ozone Project. The ozone vendor will sub -contract with the general contractor, using the equipment bid price provided in the ozone equipment pre -selection bid. http://apps.cfwnet.org/council_packetlmc review.asp?ID=12123&councildate=8/18/2O09 9/24/2009 M&C Review Page 2 of 2 The project was advertised for bid in the Fort Worth Star Teleqram on May 28 and June 4, 2009. On July 2, 2009, the following bids were received: Prequalified Total Present Worth Engineering Ozone Vendor Cost of Ozone Svstem Services Fee Ozonia North America LLC $7,749,700.00 $50,000.00 Fuji Electric Corp. of America $9,830,739.00 An M/Wl3E Waiver was approved due to the presence of negligible subcontracting opportunities. This project is located in COUNCIL DISTRICT 9. FISCAL INFORMATION/CERTIFICATION: The Financial Management Services Director certifies that funds are available in the current capital budget, as appropriated, of the Water Capital Projects Fund. TO Fund/Account/Centers Submitted for Citv Manaaer's Office bv: Oriainatina Department Head: Additional Information Contact: ATTACHMENTS 60ozone equipment map.pdf FROM Fund/Account/Centers P265 531200 609530075733 $50,000.00 Fernando Costa (6122) S. Frank Crumb (8207) Chris Harder (8293) http://apps.cfwnet.org/council_packet/mc_review.asp?ID=12123&councildate=8/18/2O09 9/24/2009